Product Catalog

Mobile Hydraulics
Part 3: Mobile Controls
Product Catalog Mobile Hydraulics
Part 3: Mobile Controls

The complete Mobile Hydraulics Catalog Program at a glance:

Part 1 Hydraulic Pumps Axial Piston Pumps, External Gear Pumps, RE 90010-01
Electrohydraulic Pumps, Gerotor Pumps

Part 2 Hydraulic Motors Axial Piston Motors, External Gear Motors, RE 90010-02
Gears Radial Piston Motors, Gears

Part 3 Mobile Controls Control Blocks, Valve Modules, RE 90010-03

Pilot Control Devices, Power Brake Valves,
Steering Units

Part 4 Mobile Electronics Controllers, Sensors, Joysticks, Displays, RE 90010-04

Accumulators Video Cameras, Tools, Accumulators, Filters,
Filters Oil Measurement Technology

Part 5 Compact Hydraulics Mechanical, Solenoid and Proportional RE 90010-05

Cartridge Valves, Integrated Circuits

Part 6 Compact Hydraulics Load Holding/Motion Control Valves, RE 90010-06

Compact Directional Valves,
Compact Power Modules

For the latest product information from Bosch Rexroth, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/products

1
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

Publisher Bosch Rexroth AG

Mobile Applications
Glockeraustrasse 4
89275 Elchingen, Germany
Tel. +49 7308 82-0
Fax +49 7308 7274
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.com

Catalog No. RE 90010-03/07.2012

Replaces: RE 90005-02/07.2009

Print Schirmer Medien GmbH & Co. KG

89079 Ulm

Reprints and translation, in whole or in part, only with the

publishers prior consent.
Subject to revision.

Should you require further technical

information, please contact the Rexroth
sales partner in your area.
www.boschrexroth.com/addresses

2
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

General Page

7 1

Control Blocks

55 2

Valve Modules

559 3

Pilot Control Devices

677 4

Power Brake Valves

827 5

Steering Units

909 3 6
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

Contents
Type Size Data sheet Page
General
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons RE 90220 9
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221 25 1
Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids (HFDR/HFDU) RE 90222 39

Control Blocks
Open-center control block SM 12 RE 64122 57
Open-center control block MO 16, 22, 32 RE 64354 93
Open-center control block M8 1632 RE 64294 113
Open-center control block M9 25 RE 64303 129
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) SX 10 RE 64132 137
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) SX 12 RE 64128 153
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) SX 14 RE 64125 171
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M6 15 RE 64321 193
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M6 22 RE 64322 205
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M7 22 RE 64295 217 2
Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M7 25 RE 64297 233
Load-sensing control block SP 08 RE 64139 251
Load-sensing control block M4 12 RE 64276 285
Load-sensing control block M4 15 RE 64283 349
Load-sensing control block M4 22 RE 64279 401
Load-sensing control block SB 12 RE 64386 419
Load-sensing control block SB 23 RE 66130 459
Control block with On-Board-Electronic OBE SB 23-EHS1 RE 66134 483
Control block with On-Board-Electronic OBE SB 33-EHS1 RE 66132 519

Valve Modules
Hitch control valves EHR 5, 23 RE 66125 561
Traction module (flow divider) RTM 16, 25 RE 64592 577
Slew drive module MSC 16 RE 64593 603
Check-Q-meter FD 1232 RE 27551 615
Stabilising module RSM2 10 RE 64614 625
Stabilising module RSM2 16 RE 64617 631
Stabilising module RSM2 25 RE 64618 635
3
Multi-way directional valves MH.W. 6, 20, 30 RE 64638 639
Pressure relief valves RE 25860 647
Flow control valves RE 27574 659
Safety valves, type-approved (see RE 90010-04, chapter 4) 0 532 VA RE 50153
Thermal pressure valve MHDBDT 6 RE 64309 667
Throttle check valve and check valve MHFS, 20, 25, 32 RE 64548 671
MHSV

4
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Contents
Type Size Data sheet Page
Pilot Control Devices
Hydraulic pilot control device in sandwich plate design 2TH6 RE 64552 679
Hydraulic pilot control device in pedal design 2TH6R RE 64551 687
Hydraulic pilot control device for armrest installation 4TH5, RE 64555 693
4TH6,
4TH6N
Hydraulic pilot control device with 2 pedals and damping system 4TH5NR, RE 64535 705
5TH5NR,
6TH5NR
Hydraulic pilot control device with 2 pedals and damping system 4TH6NR, RE 64554 713
5TH6NR, 4
6TH6NR
Hydraulic pilot control device with end position lock 4THF5, RE 64557 721
6THF5
Hydraulic pilot control device with end position lock 4THF6, RE 64553 733
5THF6
Hydraulic pilot control device TH7 RE 64558 745
Electronic pilot control device THE5 RE 29881 755
Electronic pilot control device EJ RE 29896 799

Power Brake Valves

Single-circuit power brake valve LT 05 RE 66143 829
Accumulator charging valve LT 06 RE 66191 833
Dual-circuit power brake valve LT 07 RE 66146 839
Hand brake valve LT 08 RE 66148 847
Relay valve LT 09 RE 66153 851
Single-circuit power brake valve of compact design LT 12 RE 66218 857
5
Dual-circuit power brake valve of compact design LT 13 RE 66221 873
Dual-circuit power brake valve of compact design LT 17 RE 66228 891
Inching remotely powered brake valve LT 31 RE 66227 901
Steering brake valve LT 10 RE 66154 905

Steering Units
Steering unit LAGC 50630 RE 14365 911
Steering unit LAGL 5001000 RE 11872 923
Steering unit LAGU 125320 RE 11867 933
Steering unit LAGZ 160300 RE 11868 945 6
Bypass priority valve LPD 120 RE 27549 957
Priority valve LPS 40160 RE 27548 963
Steering column and sensor LAB RE 11874 973

5
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

6
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Steuerblcke
General

Benennung
Designation Typ Nenngre Datenblatt
Data sheet Seite
Page

1
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons RE 90220 9

Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221 25

Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids (HFDR/HFDU) RE 90222 39

7
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

8
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral RE 90220/05.12
Replaces: 05.10
1/16 1

oils and related hydrocarbons

Application notes and requirements for Rexroth hydraulic components

Hydraulic fluids

Hydraulic fluids based Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Title on mineral oils and acceptable hydraulic water-free water-containing
related hydrocarbons fluids hydraulic fluids hydraulic fluids

Standard DIN 51524 ISO 15380 ISO 12922 ISO 12922

RE 90223
Data sheets RE 90220 RE 90221 RE 90222
(in preparation)

HL
HEPG
HLP HFDR HFC
HEES partially saturated
HLPD HFDU (ester base) HFB
Classification HEES saturated
HVLP HFDU (glycol base) HFAE
HEPR
HLPD and more HFAS
HETG
and more

9
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

Contents
1 Basic information .................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1 General instructions ...................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Scope ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................................................................................3
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels ....................................................................................................................................4
3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid ..........................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid .................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.1 Viscosity .................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior........................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.3 Wear protection capability ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.4 Material compatibility..........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.5 Aging resistance .................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.6 Air separation ability (ASA)...............................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.7 Demulsifying ability and water solubility .........................................................................................................................................6
3.1.8 Filterability .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.9 Corrosion protection ..........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.10 Additivation .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Classification and fields of application ................................................................................................................................................7
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................9
4.1 General .........................................................................................................................................................................................................9
4.2 Storage and handling ...............................................................................................................................................................................9
4.3 Filling of new systems...............................................................................................................................................................................9
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover ......................................................................................................................................................................9
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids .........................................................................................................................9
4.6 Re-additivation............................................................................................................................................................................................9
4.7 Foaming behavior .......................................................................................................................................................................................9
4.8 Corrosion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.9 Air ................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.10 Water ........................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration .......................................................................................................................................10
5 Disposal and environmental protection ........................................................................................................................................................11
6 Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons .................................................................................................12
7 Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................15

10
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

1 Basic information
1.1 General instructions Notes:
In the market overview RE 90220-01, hydraulic fluid based on
The hydraulic fluid is the common element in any hydraulic mineral oil are described which, according to the information of
component and must be selected very carefully. Quality and the lubricant manufacturer, feature the respective parameters
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid are decisive factors for the of the current requirements standard DIN 51524 and other
operational reliability, efficiency and service life of a system. parameters which are of relevance for suitability in connection
Hydraulic fluids must conform, be selected and used in with Rexroth components.
accordance with the generally acknowledged rules of technol- These specifications are not checked or monitored by Bosch
ogy and safety provisions. Reference is made to the country- Rexroth. The list in the market overview does not therefore 1
specific standards and directives (in Germany the directive of represent a recommendation on the part of Rexroth or approval
the Employer's Liability Insurance Association BGR 137). of the respective hydraulic fluid for use with Rexroth compo-
This data sheet includes recommendations and regulations nents and does not release the operator from his responsibility
concerning the selection, operation and disposal of hydraulic regarding selection of the hydraulic fluid.
fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons in the Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for its components
application of Rexroth hydraulic components. for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the
The individual selection of hydraulic fluid or the choice of notes below.
classification are the responsibility of the operator.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that appropriate 1.3 Safety instructions
measures are taken for safety and health protection and to Hydraulic fluids can constitute a risk for persons and the
ensure compliance with statutory regulations. The recommen- environment. These risks are described in the hydraulic fluid
dations of the lubricant manufacturer and the specifications safety data sheets. The operator is to ensure that a current
given in the safety data sheet are to be observed when using safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid used is available and
hydraulic fluid. that the measures stipulated therein are complied with.
This data sheet does not absolve the operator from verifying
the conformity and suitability of the respective hydraulic fluid
for his system. He is to ensure that the selected fluid meets the
minimum requirements of the relevant fluid standard during the
whole of the period of use.
Other regulations and legal provisions may also apply. The
operator is responsible for their observance, e.g. EU directive
2004/35/EG and their national implementations. In Germany
the Water Resources Act (WHG) is also to be observed.
We recommend that you maintain constant, close contact
with lubricant manufacturers to support you in the selection,
maintenance, care and analyses.
When disposing of used hydraulic fluids, apply the same care
as during use.

1.2 Scope
This data sheet must be observed when using hydraulic fluids
based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons in Bosch
Rexroth hydraulic components.
Please note that the specifications of this data sheet may be
restricted further by the specifications given in the product
data sheets for the individual components.
The use of the individual hydraulic fluids in accordance with
the intended purpose can be found in the safety data sheets or
other product description documents of the lubricant manufac-
turers. In addition, each use is to be individually considered.
Rexroth hydraulic components may only be operated with
hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons
according to DIN 51524 if specified in the respective compo-
nent data sheet or if Rexroth approval for use is furnished.

11
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels

Solid particle contamination is the major reason for faults oc- Hydraulic fluids frequently fail to meet these cleanliness
curring in hydraulic systems. It may lead to a number of effects requirements on delivery. Careful filtering is therefore required
in the hydraulic system. Firstly, single large solid particles during operation and in particular, during filling in order to
may lead directly to a system malfunction, and secondly small ensure the required cleanliness levels. Your lubricant manu-
particles cause continuous elevated wear. facturer can tell you the cleanliness level of hydraulic fluids
as delivered. To maintain the required cleanliness level over
For hydraulic fluids, the cleanliness level is given as a three-
the operating period, you must use a reservoir breather filter.
digit numerical code in accordance with ISO 4406. This
If the environment is humid, take appropriate measures, such
numerical code denotes the number of particles present in
as a breather filter with air drying or permanent off-line water
a hydraulic fluid for a defined quantity. Moreover, foreign solid
separation.
matter is not to exceed a mass of 50 mg/kg (gravimetric
examination according to ISO 4405). Note: the specifications of the lubricant manufacturer relat-
ing to cleanliness levels are based on the time at which the
In general, compliance with a minimum cleanliness level of
container concerned is filled and not on the conditions during
20/18/15 in accordance with ISO 4406 or better is to be main-
transport and storage.
tained in operation. Special servo valves demand improved
cleanliness levels of at least 18/16/13. A reduction in cleanli- Further information about contamination with solid matter and
ness level by one level means half of the quantity of particles cleanliness levels can be found in brochure RE 08016.
and thus greater cleanliness. Lower numbers in cleanliness
levels should always be striven for and extend the service life
of hydraulic components. The component with the highest
cleanliness requirements determines the required cleanliness
of the overall system. Please also observe the specifications in
table 1: "Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406" and in the
respective data sheets of the various hydraulic components.

Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406

Particles per 100 ml

Up to and Scale number
More than
including
8,000,000 16,000,000 24 20 / 18 / 15
4,000,000 8,000,000 23 > 4 m > 6 m > 14 m
2,000,000 4,000,000 22
1,000,000 2,000,000 21
500,000 1,000,000 20
250,000 500,000 19
130,000 250,000 18
64000 130,000 17
32000 64000 16
16000 32000 15
8000 16000 14
4000 8000 13
2000 4000 12
1000 2000 11
500 1000 10
250 500 9
130 250 8
64 130 7
32 64 6

12
 RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid

The use of hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils for Rexroth If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid used is above the permitted
hydraulic components is based on compliance with the operating viscosity, this will result in increased hydraulic-me-
minimum requirements of DIN 51524. chanical losses. In return, there will be lower internal leakage
losses. If the pressure level is lower, lubrication gaps may not
be filled up, which can lead to increased wear. For hydraulic
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid pumps, the permitted suction pressure may not be reached,
The specified limit values for all components employed in the which may lead to cavitation damage.
hydraulic system, for example viscosity and cleanliness level,
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid is below the permitted
must be observed with the hydraulic fluid used, taking into
operating viscosity, increased leakage, wear, susceptibility to 1
account the specified operating conditions.
contamination and a shorter component life cycle will result.
Hydraulic fluid suitability depends, amongst others, on the
following factors: 3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior
For hydraulic fluids, the viscosity temperature behavior (V-T
3.1.1 Viscosity
behavior) is of particular importance. Viscosity is characterized
Viscosity is a basic property of hydraulic fluids. The permissible in that it drops when the temperature increases and rises when
viscosity range of complete systems needs to be determined the temperature drops; see Fig. 1 "Viscosity temperature chart
taking account of the permissible viscosity of all components for HL, HLP, HLPD (VI 100)". The interrelation between viscos-
and it is to be observed for each individual component. ity and temperature is described by the viscosity index (VI).
The viscosity at operating temperature determines the The viscosity temperature diagram in Fig. 1 is extrapolated
response characteristics of closed control loops, stability and in the < 40 C range. This idealized diagram is for reference
damping of systems, the efficiency factor and the degree of purposes only. Measured values can be obtained from your
wear. lubricant manufacturer and are to be preferred for design
purposes.
We recommend that the optimum operating viscosity range
of each component be kept within the permissible temperature
range. This usually requires either cooling or heating, or both.
The permissible viscosity range and the necessary cleanliness
level can be found in the product data sheet for the component
concerned.

Fig. 1: Viscosity-temperature chart for HL, HLP, HLPD (VI 100, double logarithmic representation)
40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1600
1000
600
400
VG 68
VG

VG 00
VG

VG
VG

VG 2
VG 6

1
15
15
10

3
22

200
0

100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]

60

40

20

10

5
40 25 10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
Temperature t [C]

13
6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

3.1.3 Wear protection capability 3.1.6 Air separation ability (ASA)

Wear protection capability describes the property of hydraulic The air separation ability (ASA) describes the property of a
fluids to prevent or minimize wear within the components. hydraulic fluid to separate undissolved air. Hydraulic fluids
The wear protection capability is described in DIN 51524-2,-3 contain approx. 7 to 13 percent by volume of dissolved air
via test procedures "FZG gear test rig" (ISO 14635-1) and (with atmospheric pressure and 50 C). Hydraulic fluids
"Mechanical test in the vane pump" (ISO 20763). From always contain dissolved air. During operation, dissolved air
ISO VG 32 DIN 51524-2,-3 prescribes a rating of at least may be transformed into undissolved air, leading to cavitation
10 (FZG test). At present, the FZG test cannot be applied damages. Fluid classification, fluid product, reservoir size and
to viscosity classes < ISO VG 32. design must be coordinated to take into account the dwell
time and ASA value of the hydraulic fluid. The air separation
3.1.4 Material compatibility capacity depends on the viscosity, temperature, basic fluid and
aging.
The hydraulic fluid must not negatively affect the materials
It cannot be improved by additives.
used in the components. Compatibility with coatings, seals,
hoses, metals and plastics is to be observed in particular. The According to DIN 51524 for instance, an ASA value d 10
fluid classifications specified in the respective component data minutes is required for viscosity class ISO VG 46,
sheets are tested by the manufacturer with regard to material 6 minutes are typical, lower values are preferable.
compatibility. Parts and components not supplied by us are to
be checked by the user. 3.1.7 Demulsifying ability and water solubility
The capacity of a hydraulic fluid to separate water at a defined
Table 2: Known material incompatibilities
temperature is known as the demulsifying ability. ISO 6614
Classification Incompatible with: defines the demulsifying properties of hydraulic fluids.
HLxx classifications with EPDM seals For larger systems with permanent monitoring, a demulsifying
Zinc- and ash/free fluid with good water separation capability (WSC) is recom-
with bronze-filled PTFE seals
hydraulic fluids mended. The water can be drained from the bottom of the
reservoir. In smaller systems (e.g. in mobile machines), whose
3.1.5 Aging resistance fluid is less closely monitored and where water contamination
The way a hydraulic fluid ages depends on the thermal, into the hydraulic fluid, for instance through air condensation,
chemical and mechanical stress to which it is subjected. Aging cannot be ruled out completely, an HLPD fluid is recom-
resistance can be greatly influenced by the chemical composi- mended.
tion of the hydraulic fluids. The demulsifying ability up to ISO-VG 100 is given at 54 C,
High fluid temperatures (e.g. over 80 C) result in a approxi- and at 82 C for fluids with higher viscosity.
mate halving of the fluid service life for every 10 C temperature Water emulsifying HLPD hydraulic fluids have no, or a very
increase and should therefore by avoided. The halving of the poor, demulsifying ability.
fluid service life results from the application of the Arrhenius
equation (see Glossary). 3.1.8 Filterability

Table 3: Reference values for temperature-dependent Filterability describes the ability of a hydraulic fluid to pass
aging of the hydraulic fluid through a filter, removing solid contaminants. The hydraulic
fluids used require a good filterability, not just when new, but
Reservoir temperature Fluid life cycle also during the whole of their service life. Depending on the
80 C 100 % basic fluid used and the additives (VI enhancers) there are
90 C 50 % great differences here.
100 C 25 % The filterability is a basic prerequisite for cleanliness, servicing
and filtration of hydraulic fluids. Filterability is tested with the
new hydraulic fluid and after the addition of 0.2 % water. The
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocar-
underlying standard (ISO 13357-1/-2) stipulates that filterability
bons are tested with 20% water additive during testing of
must have no negative effects on the filters or the hydraulic
aging resistance according to ISO 4263-1.
fluid, see chapter 4 "Hydraulic fluids in operation".
The calculated fluid service life is derived from the results of
tests in which the long-term characteristics are simulated in 3.1.9 Corrosion protection
a short period of time by applying more arduous conditions
Hydraulic fluids should not just prevent corrosion formation
(condensed testing). This calculated fluid service life is not to
on steel components, they must also be compatible with
be equated to the fluid service life in real-life applications.
non-ferrous metals and alloys. Corrosion protection tests on
Table 3 is a practical indicator for hydraulic fluids with water different metals and metal alloys are described in DIN 51524.
content < 0.1%, cf. chapter 4.10. "Water". Hydraulic fluids that are not compatible with the materials
listed above must not be used, even if they are compliant with
ISO 51524.
Rexroth components are usually tested with HLP hydraulic
fluids or corrosion protection oils based on mineral oils before
they are delivered.

14
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

3.1.10 Additivation
The properties described above can be modified with the
help of suitable additives. A general distinction is made for
fluids between heavy metal-free and heavy metal-containing
(generally zinc) additive systems. Both additive systems are
most often incompatible with each other. The mixing of these
fluids must be avoided even if the mixing ratio is very low. See
chapter 4, "Hydraulic fluids in operation.
1
Increasing additivation generally leads to deteriorated air
separation ability (ASA) and water separation capability
(WSC) of the hydraulic fluid. According to the present state
of knowledge, all hydraulic fluids described in this document,
independently of the actual additivation, can be filtered using
all filter materials with all known filtration ratings t 1 m without
filtering out effective additives at the same time.
Bosch Rexroth does not prescribe any specific additive system.

3.2 Classification and fields of application

Table 4: Classification and fields of application

Typical field of
Classification Features Notes
application
HL fluids Hydraulic fluids HL fluids can be HL fluids may be used only for components whose product data
according to predominantly only used in hydraulic sheet specifically allows HL fluids. For components which have
DIN 51524-1 with additives for systems that do not not been approved according to the product data sheet, please
VI = 100 oxidation and corro- pose any require- consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
sion protection, but ments as to wear
Hydraulic fluids that only comply with the requirements of classes
no specific additives protection.
HL and HR in accordance with ISO 11158 without proving that
for wear protection in
DIN 51524-1 is also met may be used only with written approval
case of mixed friction
of Bosch Rexroth AG.
Observe restrictions as to pressure, rotation speed etc.
HLP fluids Hydraulic fluid with HLP fluids are suit- For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to corrosion, oxidation able for most fields respective product data sheet. For components which have not
DIN 51524-2 and verified wear of application and been approved according to the product data sheet, please
VI = 100 protection additives components provided consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
the temperature and
For the viscosity classes VG10, VG15 and VG22, DIN 51524
viscosity provisions
defines no requirements as to wear protection (DIN 51354 part 2
are observed.
and DIN 51389 part 2). Beyond the requirements of DIN 51524
part 2, we require the same base oil type, identical refining
procedure, identical additivation and identical additivation level
across all viscosity classes.

Continued on page 8

15
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

Table 4: Classification and fields of application (continued from page 7)

Typical field of
Classification Features Notes
application
HVLP fluids HLP hydraulic fluid HVLP fluids are used For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to with additional in systems operated respective product data sheet. For components which have not
DIN 51524-3 improved viscosity over a wide tempera- been approved according to the product data sheet, please
VI > 140 temperature behavior ture range. consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
The same notes and restrictions as defined for HLP fluids apply
accordingly.
The effect on Rexroth components (e.g. compatibility with material
seals, wear resistance capacity) may differ when using related
hydrocarbons instead of mineral oils, cf. Table 6, line 8.
When using HVLP fluids, the viscosity may change on account of
the shear of the long-chain VI enhancers. The viscosity index, high
at the start, decreases during operation. This needs to be taken
into account when selecting the hydraulic fluid.
The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance with
DIN 51350 part 6. Please note that there are practical applications
that create a much higher shear load on such fluids than can be
achieved by this test. Up to VI < 160, we recommend a maximum
permitted viscosity drop of 15 %, viscosity at 100 C.
The viscosity limits given by Bosch Rexroth for its components
are to be observed for all operating conditions, even after the
hydraulic fluids have sheared.
HVLP fluids should be used only if required by the temperature
ranges of the application.
HLPD fluids HLP and HVLP HLPD and HVLPD For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to hydraulic fluid with fluids are used in respective product data sheet. For components which have not
DIN 51524-2, additional detergent systems where been approved according to the product data sheet, please
and or dispersant deposits as well consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
HVLPD fluids in
additives as solid or liquid
accordance with Some of these fluids are able to absorb significant quantities of
contamination need
DIN 51524-3 water (> 0.1 %). This may have negative implications for the wear
to be kept temporarily
protection and the aging properties of the fluid.
suspended
The wetting ability of these fluids varies largely depending on the
product. Therefore it is not correct to say that they are generally all
very well able to prevent stick-slip.
In individual cases where higher water contamination is to be
expected (such as in steelworks or under humid conditions),
the use of HLPD/HVLPD fluids cannot be recommended as the
emulsified water does not settle in the reservoir but is evaporated
in heavily loaded positions. For such cases, we recommend using
HLP hydraulic fluids with particularly good demulsifying ability. The
water collected at the reservoir bottom is to be drained regularly.
If HLPD/HVLPD fluids are used, contamination does not settle. It
rather remains suspended and needs to be filtered out or removed
by appropriate draining systems. For this reason, the filter area
must be increased.
HLPD/HVLPD fluids may contain additives that in the long run
are incompatible with plastics, elastomers and non-ferrous metals.
Furthermore, these additives may lead to the premature clogging
of hydraulic filters. Therefore, test the filterability and the selection
of the filter material in consultation with the filter manufacturer.

16
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

4 Hydraulic fluids in operation

4.1 General For information on changing over hydraulic fluids with different
classifications please refer to VDMA 24314, VDMA 24569 and
The properties of hydraulic fluids can change continually during ISO 15380 appendix A.
storage and operation.
Bosch Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its
Please note that the fluid standard DIN 51524 merely components resulting from inadequate hydraulic fluid change-
describes minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids in new overs!
condition at the time of filling into the bins. The operator of a
hydraulic system must ensure that the hydraulic fluid remains
in a utilizable condition throughout its entire period of use. 4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different 1
hydraulic fluids
Deviations from the characteristic values are to be clarified with
the lubricant manufacturer, the test labs or Bosch Rexroth. If hydraulic fluids from different manufacturers or different
types from the same manufacturer are mixed, gelling, silting
Please note the following aspects in operation. and deposits may occur. These, in turn, may cause foaming,
impaired air separation ability, malfunctions and damage to
4.2 Storage and handling the hydraulic system.

Hydraulic fluids must be stored correctly in accordance with If the fluid contains more than 2 % of another fluid then it is
the instructions of the lubricant manufacturer. Avoid exposing considered to be a mixture. Exceptions apply for water, see
the containers to lengthy periods of direct heat. Containers chapter 4.10 "Water".
are to be stored in such a way that the risk of any foreign liquid Mixing with other hydraulic fluids is not generally permitted.
or solid matter (e.g. water, foreign fluids or dust) ingression This also includes hydraulic fluids with the same classification
into the inside of the container can be ruled out. After taking and from the market overview RE 90220-01. If individual lubri-
hydraulic fluids from the containers, these are immediately to cant manufacturers advertise miscibility and/or compatibility,
be properly resealed. this is entirely the responsibility of the lubricant manufacturer.
Recommendation: Bosch Rexroth customarily tests all components with mineral
Store containers in a dry, roofed place oil HLP before they are delivered.

Store barrels on their sides Note: With connectible accessory units and mobile filtering
systems, there is a considerable risk of non-permitted mixing
Clean reservoir systems and machine reservoirs regularly of the hydraulic fluids!
Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
4.3 Filling of new systems nents resulting from mixing hydraulic fluids!
Usually, the cleanliness levels of the hydraulic fluids as
delivered do not meet the requirements of our components. 4.6 Re-additivation
Hydraulic fluids must be filtered using an appropriate filter
system to minimize solid particle contamination and water in Additives added at a later point in time such as colors, wear
the system. reducers, VI enhancers or anti-foam additives, may negatively
affect the performance properties of the hydraulic fluid and
As early as possible during test operation, new systems should the compatibility with our components and therefore are not
be filled with the selected hydraulic fluid so as to reduce the permissible.
risk of accidentally mixing the fluids (see chapter 4.5 "Mixing
and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids"). Changing Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
the hydraulic medium at a later point represents significant nents resulting from re-additivation!
additional costs (see following chapter).
4.7 Foaming behavior
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover Foam is created by rising air bubbles at the surface of hydraulic
Changeovers, in particular between hydraulic fluids with fluids in the reservoir. Foam that develops should collapse as
heavy metal-free and heavy metal-containing (generally zinc) quickly as possible.
additives, frequently lead to malfunctions, see chapter 3.1.10 Common hydraulic fluids in accordance with DIN 51524 are
"Additivation". sufficiently inhibited against foam formation in new condi-
In the case of changeovers of the fluid in hydraulic systems, it tion. On account of aging and adsorption onto surfaces, the
is important to ensure compatibility of the new hydraulic fluid defoamer concentration may decrease over time, leading to a
with the remainder of the previous hydraulic fluid. We recom- stable foam.
mend obtaining a written performance guarantee from the Defoamers may be re-dosed only after consultation with the
manufacturer or supplier of the new hydraulic fluid. The quantity lubricant manufacturer and with his written approval.
of old fluid remaining should be minimized. Mixing hydraulic
fluids should be avoided, see following chapter. Defoamers may affect the air separation ability.

17
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

4.8 Corrosion 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration

The hydraulic fluid is to guarantee sufficient corrosion protec- Air, water, operating temperature influences and solid matter
tion of components under all operating conditions, even in the contamination will change the performance characteristics of
event of impermissible water contamination. hydraulic fluids and cause them to age.
During storage and operation, hydraulic fluid based on mineral To preserve the usage properties and ensure a long service life
oils with anti-corrosion additives protect components against for hydraulic fluid and components, the monitoring of the fluid
water and "acidic" oil degradation products. condition and a filtration adapted to the application require-
ments (draining and degassing if required) are indispensable.
4.9 Air The effort is higher in the case of unfavorable usage conditions,
increased stress for the hydraulic system or high expectations
Under atmospheric conditions, the hydraulic fluid contains
as to availability and service life, see chapter 2 "Solid particle
dissolved air. In the negative pressure range, for instance in
contamination and cleanliness level".
the suction pipe of the pump or downstream of control edges,
this dissolved air may transform into undissolved air. The When commissioning a system, please note that the required
undissolved air content represents a risk of cavitation and of minimum cleanliness level can frequently be attained only by
the diesel effect. This results in material erosion of components flushing the system. Due to severe start-up contamination, it
and increased hydraulic fluid aging. may be possible that a fluid and/or filter replacement becomes
necessary after a short operating period (< 50 operating
With the correct measures, such as suction pipe and reservoir
hours).
design, and an appropriate hydraulic fluid, air intake and
separation can be positively influenced. The hydraulic fluid must be replaced in regular intervals and
tested by the lubricant manufacturer or recognized, accredited
See also chapter 3.1.7 "Air separation ability (ASA).
test labs. We recommend a reference analysis after com-
missioning.
4.10 Water The minimum data to be tested for analyses are:
Water contamination in hydraulic fluids can result from direct
Viscosity at 40 C and 100 C
ingress or indirectly through condensation of water from the air
due to temperature variations. Neutralization number NN (acid number AN)
Water in the hydraulic fluid may result in wear or direct failure Water content (Karl-Fischer method)
of hydraulic components. Furthermore, a high water content in
Particle measurement with evaluation according to ISO 4406
the hydraulic fluid negatively affects aging and filterability and
or mass of solid foreign substances with evaluation to
increases susceptibility to cavitation.
EN 12662
Undissolved water can be drained from the bottom of the
Element analysis (RFA (EDX) / ICP, specify test method)
reservoir. Dissolved water can be removed only by using
appropriate measures. If the hydraulic system is used in humid Comparison with new product or available trend analyses
conditions, preventive measures need to be taken, such as
Assessment / evaluation for further use
an air dehumidifier at the reservoir vent. During operation, the
water content in all hydraulic fluids, determined according to Also recommended: IR spectrum
the "Karl Fischer method" (see chapter 6 "Glossary") for all hy-
Compared to the pure unused hydraulic fluid, the changed
draulic fluids must constantly be kept below 0.1% (1000 ppm).
neutralization number NN (acid number AN) indicates how
To ensure a long service life of both hydraulic fluids and
many aging products are contained in the hydraulic fluid. This
components, Bosch Rexroth recommends that values below
value must be kept as low as possible. As soon as the trend
0.05% (500 ppm) are permanently maintained.
analysis notes a significant increase in the acid number, the
To ensure a long service life for the hydraulic fluids and the lubricant manufacturer should be contacted.
components, we recommend that values below 0.05 % (500
In case of warranty, liability or guarantee claims to Bosch
ppm) are permanently maintained. Detergent and or dispersant
Rexroth, service verification and/or the results of fluid analyses
hydraulic fluids (HLPD / HVLPD) are able to absorb (and keep
are to be provided.
suspended) more water. Prior to using these hydraulic fluids,
please contact the lubricant manufacturer.

18
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

5 Disposal and environmental

protection
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons
are hazardous for the environment. They are subject to a
special disposal obligation.
The respective lubricant manufacturers provide specifications
on environmentally acceptable handling and storage. Please
ensure that spilt or splashed fluids are absorbed with appropri-
ate adsorbents or by a technique that prevents it contaminating 1
water courses, the ground or sewerage systems.
It is also not permitted to mix fluids when disposing of hydraulic
fluids. Regulations governing the handing of used oils stipulate
that used oils are not to mixed with other products, e.g.
substances containing halogen. Non-compliance will increase
disposal costs. Comply with the national legal provisions
concerning the disposal of the corresponding hydraulic
fluid. Comply with the local safety data sheet of the lubricant
manufacturer for the country concerned.

19
12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

6 Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons

Table 6: Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons

Serial
Hydraulic fluids Features / Typical field of application / Notes
number
1 Hydraulic fluids with Can be used without confirmation provided they are listed in the respective product
classification data sheet and are compliant with DIN 51524. Conformity with DIN 51524 must be
HL, HM, HV according verified in the technical data sheet of the fluid concerned. For classification see Table
to ISO 11158 4: "Hydraulic fluid classification.
Fluids only classified in accordance with ISO 11158 may be used only with prior
written approval of Bosch Rexroth AG.
2 Hydraulic fluids with May not be used.
classification
HH, HR, HS, HG ac-
cording to ISO 11158
3 Hydraulic fluids with DIN 51502 merely describes how fluids are classified / designated on a national
classification level.
HL, HLP, HLPD, HVLP,
It contains no information on minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids.
HVLPD to DIN 51502
Hydraulic fluids standardized according to DIN 51502 can be used without confirma-
tion provided they are listed in the respective product data sheet and are compliant
with DIN 51524. Conformity with DIN 51524 must be verified in the technical data
sheet of the fluid concerned. For classification see Table 4: "Hydraulic fluid clas-
sification.
4 Hydraulic fluids with ISO 6743-4 merely describes how fluids are classified / designated on an interna-
classification tional level. It contains no information on minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids.
HH, HL, HM, HR, HV,
Hydraulic fluids standardized according to ISO 6743 -4 can be used without
HS, HG according to
confirmation provided they are listed in the respective product data sheet and are
ISO 6743-4
compliant with DIN 51524. Conformity with DIN 51524 must be verified in the techni-
cal data sheet of the fluid concerned. For classification see table 4: "Classification
and fields of application".
5 Lubricants and regulator Turbine oils can be used after confirmation and with limited performance data.
fluids for turbines to
They usually offer lower wear protection than mineral oil HLP. Classification of
DIN 51515-1 and -2
turbine oils to DIN 51515-1 comparable to HL, turbine oils to DIN 51515-2 compa-
rable to HLP.
Particular attention must be paid to material compatibility!
6 Lube oils C, CL, CLP Lube oils in acc. with DIN 51517 can be used after confirmation and with limited
in accordance with performance data. They are mostly higher-viscosity fluids with low wear protection.
DIN 51517 Classification: CL similar to HL fluids and CLP similar to HLP fluids.
Particular attention must be paid to material compatibility, specifically with non-ferrous
metals!
7 Fluids to be used in There are medical white oils and synthetic hydrocarbons (PAO).
pharmaceutical
Can only be used after consultation and approval for use in the specific application,
and foodstuff industries,
even if they are compliant with DIN 51524.
in acc. with FDA /
USDA / NSF H1 May be used only with FKM seals.
Other fluids used in pharmaceutical and foodstuff industries may be used only after
confirmation.
Attention is to be paid to material compatibility in accordance with the applicable food
law.
Caution! Fluids used in pharmaceutical and foodstuff industries should not be con-
fused with environmentally acceptable fluids!

Continued on page 13

20
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

Table 6: Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons
(continued from page 12)
Serial
Hydraulic fluids Features / Typical field of application / Notes
number
8 Hydraulic fluids of Can only be used after consultation and approval for use in the specific application,
classes HVLP and even if they are compliant with DIN 51524.
HVLPD based on
Lower pour point than HLP
related hydrocarbons 1
Other wetting (polarity)
9 Automatic Transmission ATF are operating fluids for automatic gearboxes in vehicles and machines. In special
Fluids (ATF) cases, ATFs are also used for certain synchronous gearboxes and hydraulic systems
comprising gearboxes.
To be used only after confirmation!
Some of these fluids have poor air separation abilities and modified wear properties.
Check material compatibility and filterability!
10 Multi-purpose oil Multi-purpose oils (industry) combine at least two requirements for a fluid,
(MFO) Industry for instance metal machining and hydraulics.
To be used only after confirmation!
Please pay particular attention to air separation ability, modified wear properties and
the reduced material life cycle.
Check material compatibility and filterability!
11 Multi-purpose oils Multi-purpose oils combine requirements for wet brakes, gearboxes, motor oil
(MFO) Mobil (STOU only) and hydraulics.
UTTO, STOU
Fluids of the types:
UTTO (= universal tractor transmission oil) and
STOU (= Super Tractor super tractor universal oil)
To be used only after confirmation!
Please pay particular attention to shear stability, air separation ability and modified
wear properties.
Check material compatibility and filterability!
12 Single-grade engine To be used only after confirmation!
oils 10W, 20W, 30W
Please pay particular attention to the air separation ability and filtering ability.
13 Multi-grade engine oils To be used only after confirmation!
0Wx-30Wx
Please pay particular attention to air separation ability, changes in wear protection
capability, viscosity changes during operation, material compatibility, dispersant and
detergent properties and filterability.
Caution! Multi-grade engine oils have been adapted to specific requirements in com-
bustion engines and are suitable for use in hydraulic systems only to a limited extent.
14 Hydraulic fluids for To be used only after confirmation!
military applications to
Please pay particular attention to air separation ability, changes in wear protection
MIL 13919 or H 540,
capability, viscosity changes during operation, material compatibility, water separa-
MIL 46170 or H 544,
tion capability and filterability.
MIL 5606 or H 515,
MIL 83282 or H 537, Caution! Hydraulic fluids for military applications do not meet the current requirements
MIL 87257 for high-quality hydraulic fluids and are suitable for use only to a limited degree.
15 Motor vehicle transmis- Motor vehicle transmission oil can be used after confirmation and with limited
sion oils performance data.
Pay particular attention to wear protection, material compatibility, specifically with
non-ferrous metals, as well as viscosity!
Continued on page 14

21
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

Table 6: Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons
(continued from page 13)
Serial
Hydraulic fluids Features / Typical field of application / Notes
number
16 Diesel, test diesel in Diesel / test diesel has poorer wear protection capabilities and a very low viscosity
acc. with DIN 4113 (< 3 mm2/s).
May be used only with FKM seals
Please note their low flash point!
To be used only after confirmation and with limited performance data!
17 Hydraulic fluids for roller Hydraulic fluids for roller processes have lower wear protection capabilities than
processes mineral oil HLP and a lower viscosity
Please note their low flash point!
Hydraulic fluids for roller processes with limited performance data can be used only
after confirmation.
18 Fluids for power Can only be used after consultation and approval for use in the specific application,
steering, even if they are compliant with DIN 51524.
hydro-pneumatic sus-
Please note the low viscosity!
pension,
active chassis etc. In most cases they have poor water separation capability
Check the material compatibility!

22
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

7 Glossary
Additivation Cavitation
Additives are chemical substances added to the basic fluids to Cavitation is the creation of cavities in fluids due to pressure
achieve or improve specific properties. reduction below the saturated vapour pressure and subse-
quent implosion when the pressure increases. When the
Aging
cavities implode, extremely high acceleration, temperatures
Hydraulic fluids age due to oxidation (see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging
and pressure may occur temporarily, which may damage the
resistance"). Liquid and solid contamination acts as a catalyzer
component surfaces.
for aging, meaning that it needs to be minimized as far as
possible by careful filtration. Neutralization number (NN)
The neutralization number (NN) or acid number (AN) specifies 1
API classification
the amount of caustic potash required to neutralize the acid
Classification of basic fluids by the American Petroleum
contained in one gram of fluid.
Institute (API) the largest association representing the US oil
and gas industry. Pour point
The lowest temperature at which the fluid still just flows when
Arrhenius equation
cooled down under set conditions. The pour point is specified
The quantitative relation between reaction rate and temperature
in the lubricant manufacturers' technical data sheets as a
is described by an exponential function, the Arrhenius equation.
reference value for achieving this flow limit.
This function is usually visualized within the typical temperature
range of the hydraulic system. For a practical example, see RFA (wavelength dispersive x-ray fluorescence analysis)
chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance. Is a procedure to determine nearly all elements in liquid and
solid samples with nearly any composition. This analysis
Related hydrocarbons
method is suitable for examining additives and contamination,
Related hydrocarbons are hydrocarbon compounds that are
delivering fast results.
not classified as API class 1, 2 or 5.
Shearing/shear loss
Basic fluids
Shearing of molecule chains during operation can change the
In general, a hydraulic fluid is made up of a basic fluid, or
viscosity of hydraulic fluids with long chain VI enhancers. The
base oil, and chemical substances, the so-called additives.
initially high viscosity index drops. This needs to be taken into
The proportion of basic fluid is generally greater than 90%.
account when selecting the hydraulic fluid.
Demulsifying
The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
Ability of a fluid to separate water contamination quickly;
changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance
achieved with careful selection of base oil and additives.
with DIN 51350 part -6. Please note that there are practical
Detergent applications that create a much higher shear load on such
Ability of certain additives to emulsify part of the water contami- hydraulic fluids than can be achieved by this test.
nation in the oil or to hold it in suspension until it has evapo-
Stick-slip effect (sliding)
rated with increasing temperature. Larger water quantities, in
Interaction between a resilient mass system involving friction
contrast (above approx. 2 %), are separated immediately.
(such as cylinder + oil column + load) and the pressure
Dispersant increase at very low sliding speeds. The static friction of the
Ability of certain additives to keep insoluble liquid and solid system is a decisive value here. The lower it is, the lower the
contamination in suspension in the fluid. speed that can still be maintained without sticking. Depend-
ing on the tribologic system, the stick-slip effect may lead to
Diesel effect
vibrations generated and sometimes also to significant noise
If hydraulic fluid that contains air bubbles is compressed
emission. In many cases, the effect can be attenuated by
quickly, the bubbles are heated to such a degree that a self-
replacing the lubricant.
ignition of the air-gas mix may occur. The resultant temperature
increase may lead to seal damage and increased aging of the Viscosity
hydraulic fluid. Viscosity is the measure of the internal friction of a fluid to
flow. It is defined as the property of a substance to flow under
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils
tension. Viscosity is the most important characteristic for
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils are made from petroleum
describing the load-bearing capacity of a hydraulic fluid.
(crude oil).
Kinematic viscosity is the ratio of the dynamic viscosity and the
ICP (atomic emission spectroscopy)
density of the fluid; the unit is mm/s. Hydraulic fluids are clas-
The ICP procedure can be used to determine various wear
sified by their kinematic viscosity into ISO viscosity classes.
metals, contamination types and additives. Practically all
The reference temperature for this is 40 C.
elements in the periodic system can be detected with this
method. Viscosity index (VI)
Refers to the viscosity temperature behavior of a fluid.
Karl Fischer method
The lower the change of viscosity in relation the temperature,
Method to determine the water content in fluids. Indirect
the higher the VI.
coulometric determination procedure in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 12937 in connection with DIN 51777-2. Only the
combination of both standards will assure adequately accurate
measured values.

23
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Zum Eisengieer 1 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany No statements concerning the suitability of a hydraulic fluid for a specific purpose
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release the
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 user from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
[email protected] It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
www.boschrexroth.de wear and aging.
Subject to change.

24
Environmentally acceptable RE 90221/05.12 1/14
Replaces: 05.10
1

hydraulic fluids

Application notes and requirements for Rexroth hydraulic components

Hydraulic fluids

Hydraulic fluids based Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Title on mineral oils and acceptable hydraulic water-free water-containing
related hydrocarbons fluids hydraulic fluids hydraulic fluids

Standard DIN 51524 ISO 15380 ISO 12922 ISO 12922

RE 90223
Data sheets RE 90220 RE 90221 RE 90222
(in preparation)

HL HEPG
HLP HEES partially satu- HFDR HFC
HLPD rated HFDU (ester base) HFB
Classification
HVLP HEES saturated HFDU (glycol base) HFAE
HLPD HEPR and more HFAS
and more HETG

25
2/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

Contents
1 Basic information .................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1 General instructions ...................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Environmental compatibility .....................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Scope ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.4 Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................................................................................3
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels .....................................................................................................................................4
3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid ..........................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid .................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.1 Viscosity .................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior........................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.3 Wear protection capability ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.4 Material compatibility..........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.5 Aging resistance .................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.6 Biological degradation .......................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) ...............................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility ........................................................................................................................................7
3.1.9 Filterability .............................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.10 Corrosion protection ........................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.11 Additivation .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Classification and fields of application ................................................................................................................................................8
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation ............................................................................................................................................................................10
4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.2 Storage and handling .............................................................................................................................................................................10
4.3 Filling of new systems.............................................................................................................................................................................10
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover ....................................................................................................................................................................10
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids .......................................................................................................................10
4.6 Re-additivation..........................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.7 Foaming behavior .....................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.8 Corrosion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.9 Air ................................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.10 Water ........................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration .......................................................................................................................................11
5 Disposal and environmental protection ........................................................................................................................................................12
6 Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................13

26
RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 3/14

1 Basic information
1.1 General instructions acute daphnia toxicity at least 100 mg/l
(according to ISO 5341)
The hydraulic fluid is the common element in any hydraulic
acute bacteria toxicity at least 100 mg/l
component and must be selected very carefully. Quality and
(according to ISO 8192)
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid are decisive factors for the
operational reliability, efficiency and service life of a system. The same amount of care should be taken when handling
environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids as for mineral oils,
Hydraulic fluids must conform, be selected and used in
leakage from the hydraulic system should be avoided. Environ-
accordance with the generally acknowledged rules of technol-
mentally acceptable hydraulic fluids are designed so that in the
ogy and safety provisions. Reference is made to the country- 1
event of accidents and leakage,less permanent environmental
specific standards and directives (in Germany the directive of
damage is caused than by mineral oils, see also chapter 5
the Employer's Liability Insurance Association BGR 137).
"Disposal and environmental protection".
This data sheet includes recommendations and regulations
In comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP , the biological deg-
concerning the selection, operation and disposal of envi-
radation of environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids may
ronmentally compatible hydraulic fluids in the application of
change fluid aging, see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance", 3.1.6.
Rexroth hydraulic components.
"Biological degradation" and 4 "Hydraulic fluids in operation".
The individual selection of hydraulic fluid or the choice of
classification are the responsibility of the operator.
1.3 Scope
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that appropriate
This data sheet must be applied when using environmentally
measures are taken for safety and health protection and to ensure
acceptable hydraulic fluids with Rexroth hydraulic components.
compliance with statutory regulations. The recommendations
The specifications of this data sheet may be further restricted
of the lubricant manufacturer and the specifications given in the
by the specification given in the data sheets for the individual
safety data sheet are to be observed when using hydraulic fluid.
components.
This data sheet does not absolve the operator from verifying
The use of the individual environmentally acceptable hydraulic
the conformity and suitability of the respective hydraulic fluid
fluids in accordance with the intended purpose can be found in
for his system. He is to ensure that the selected fluid meets the
the safety data sheets or other product description documents
minimum requirements of the relevant fluid standard during the
of the lubricant manufacturers. In addition, each use is to be
whole of the period of use.
individually considered.
Other regulations and legal provisions may also apply. The operator
Rexroth hydraulic components may only be operated with
is responsible for their observance, e.g. EU directive 2004/35/EG,
environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids according to
2005/360/EG and their national implementation. In Germany the
ISO 15380 if specified in the respective component data
Water Resources Act (WHG) is also to be observed.
sheet or if a Rexroth approval for use is furnished.
We recommend that you maintain constant, close contact
The manufacturers of hydraulic systems must adjust their
with lubricant manufacturers to support you in the selection,
systems and operating instructions to the environmentally
maintenance, care and analyses.
acceptable hydraulic fluids.
When disposing of used hydraulic fluids, apply the same care
Notes:
as during use.
In the market overview RE 90221-01, environmentally accept-
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids have been used able hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil are described which,
successfully for many years. In some countries, the use of envi- according to the information of the lubricant manufacturer,
ronmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids is already prescribed in feature the respective parameters of the current requirements
ecologically sensitive areas (e.g. forestry, locks, weirs). standard ISO 15380 and other parameters which are of rel-
evance for suitability in connection with Rexroth components.
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids may only be used
in the pharmaceutical and food industry subject to required These specifications are not checked or monitored by Bosch
certification to FDA/USDA/NSF H1. Rexroth. The list in the market overview does not therefore
represent a recommendation on the part of Rexroth or approval
of the respective hydraulic fluid for use with Rexroth compo-
1.2 Environmental compatibility
nents and does not release the operator from his responsibility
There is no unambiguous legal definition for environmentally regarding selection of the hydraulic fluid.
acceptable hydraulic fluids as different testing procedures can
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for its components
be applied for biological degradation and toxicity.
for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the
According to ISO 15380 the definition of "environmentally notes below.
acceptable" is as follows: Humans, animals, plants, air and soil
must not be endangered. With regard to hydraulic fluids in an
unused condition in the bin this mainly means:
1.4 Safety instructions
biological degradation at least 60 % Hydraulic fluids can constitute a risk for persons and the
(according to ISO 14593 or ISO 9439) environment. These risks are described in the hydraulic fluid
safety data sheets. The operator is to ensure that a current
acute fish toxicity at least 100 mg/l
safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid used is available and
(according to ISO 7346-2)
that the measures stipulated therein are complied with.

27
4/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels

Solid particle contamination is the major reason for faults oc- the operating period, you must use a reservoir breather filter.
curring in hydraulic systems. It may lead to a number of effects If the environment is humid, take appropriate measures, such
in the hydraulic system. Firstly, single large solid particles as a breather filter with air drying or permanent off-line water
may lead directly to a system malfunction, and secondly small separation.
particles cause continuous elevated wear.
Note: the specifications of the lubricant manufacturer relat-
For mineral oils, the cleanliness level of environmentally accept- ing to cleanliness levels are based on the time at which the
able hydraulic fluids is given as a three-digit numerical code in container concerned is filled and not on the conditions during
accordance with ISO 4406. This numerical code denotes the transport and storage.
number of particles present in a hydraulic fluid for a defined
Further information about contamination with solid matter and
quantity. Moreover, foreign solid matter is not to exceed a mass
cleanliness levels can be found in brochure RE 08016.
of 50 mg/kg (gravimetric examination according to ISO 4405).
In general, compliance with a minimum cleanliness level of
20/18/15 in accordance with ISO 4406 or better is to be main-
tained in operation. Special servo valves demand improved
cleanliness levels of at least 18/16/13. A reduction in cleanli-
ness level by one level means half of the quantity of particles
and thus greater cleanliness. Lower numbers in cleanliness
levels should always be striven for and extend the service life
of hydraulic components. The component with the highest
cleanliness requirements determines the required cleanliness
of the overall system. Please also observe the specifications in
table 1: "Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406" and in the
respective data sheets of the various hydraulic components.
Hydraulic fluids frequently fail to meet these cleanliness
requirements on delivery. Careful filtering is therefore required
during operation and in particular, during filling in order to
ensure the required cleanliness levels. Your lubricant manu-
facturer can tell you the cleanliness level of hydraulic fluids
as delivered. To maintain the required cleanliness level over

Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406

Particles per 100 ml

Up to and Scale number
More than
including
8,000,000 16,000,000 24 20 / 18 / 15
4,000,000 8,000,000 23 > 4 m > 6 m > 14 m
2,000,000 4,000,000 22
1,000,000 2,000,000 21
500,000 1,000,000 20
250,000 500,000 19
130,000 250,000 18
64000 130,000 17
32000 64000 16
16000 32000 15
8000 16000 14
4000 8000 13
2000 4000 12
1000 2000 11
500 1000 10
250 500 9
130 250 8
64 130 7
32 64 6

28
 RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 5/14

3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid

Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids for Bosch Rexroth If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid is below the permitted
hydraulic components are assessed on the basis of their fulfill- operating viscosity, increased leakage, wear, susceptibility to
ment of the minimum requirements of ISO 15380. contamination and a shorter life cycle will result.
Please ensure that the permissible temperature and viscosity
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid limits are observed for the respective components. This usually
requires either cooling or heating, or both.
The specified limit values for all components employed in the
hydraulic system, for example viscosity and cleanliness level,
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior
must be observed with the hydraulic fluid used, taking into 1
account the specified operating conditions. For hydraulic fluids, the viscosity temperature behavior (V-T
behavior) is of particular importance. Viscosity is characterized
Hydraulic fluid suitability depends, amongst others, on the
in that it drops when the temperature increases and rises when
following factors:
the temperature drops. The interrelation between viscosity and
temperature is described by the viscosity index (VI).
3.1.1 Viscosity
If exposed to the cold for several days, viscosity may rise sig-
Viscosity is a basic property of hydraulic fluids. The permissible
nificantly (HETG and HEES). After heating, the characteristic
viscosity range of complete systems needs to be determined
values as specified on the data sheet are restored. Please ask
taking account of the permissible viscosity of all components
your lubricant manufacturer for the " Flow capacity after 7 days
and it is to be observed for each individual component.
at low temperature" (ASTM D 2532) of fluid classifications
The viscosity at operating temperature determines the HETG and partially saturated HEES.
response characteristics of closed control loops, stability and
All known environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids have
damping of systems, the efficiency factor and the degree of
better viscosity temperature behavior than mineral oil HLP and
wear.
generally feature greater shear stability than HVLP mineral
We recommend that the optimum operating viscosity range of oils. This should be taken into consideration when selecting
each component be kept within the permissible temperature hydraulic fluid for the required temperature range. A lower
range. This usually requires either cooling or heating, or both. viscosity level can frequently be used to save any drive power
The permissible viscosity range and the necessary cleanliness during a cold start and avoid viscosity being too low at higher
level can be found in the product data sheet for the component temperatures. The required viscosity and temperature limits
concerned. in the product data sheets are to be observed in all operating
conditions.
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid used is above the permitted
operating viscosity, this will result in increased hydraulic-me- Depending on the basic fluid types/classes, VI indices can be
chanical losses. In return, there will be lower internal leakage achieved of 140220, see Fig. 1: "Examples: V-T diagrams in
losses. If the pressure level is lower, lubrication gaps may not comparison to HLP (reference values)" and Table 4: "Classifi-
be filled up, which can lead to increased wear. For hydraulic cation and fields of application of environmentally acceptable
pumps, the permitted suction pressure may not be reached, hydraulic fluids".
which may lead to cavitation damage.

Fig. 1: Examples V-T diagrams in comparison to HLP (reference values, double-logarithmic representation)

40q 20q 0q 20q 40q 60q 80q 100q

1600 Typical viscosity data [mm2/s]
1000
600 Temperature 20 C 40 C 100 C
400
HEES partially saturated 1250 46 9
200
HEES saturated 2500 46 8
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]

100
60 HEPG 2500 46 10
40 HEPR 1400 46 10

20 For comparison HLP

4500 46 7
(see RE 90220)
HEPG
10 HEPR
HEES partially saturated
HEES saturated
5 HLP
40q 25q 10q 0q 10q 30q 50q 70q 90q 115q
Temperature t [C]
Detailed V-T diagrams may be obtained from your lubricant manufacturer for their specific products.

29
6/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

3.1.3 Wear protection capability 3.1.5 Aging resistance

Wear protection capability describes the property of hydraulic The way an environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids ages
fluids to prevent or minimize wear within the components. The depends on the thermal, chemical and mechanical stress to
wear protection capability is described in ISO 15380 via test which it is subjected. The influence of water, air, temperature
procedures"FZG gear test rig" (ISO 14635-1) and "Mechani- and contamination may be significantly greater than for mineral
cal test in the vane pump" (ISO 20763). From ISO VG 32, oils HLP/HVLP. Aging resistance can be greatly influenced by
ISO 15380 prescribes a rating of at least 10 (FZG test). At the chemical composition of the hydraulic fluids .
present, the FZG test cannot be applied to viscosity classes
High fluid temperatures (e.g. over 80 C) result in a approxi-
< ISO VG 32. The wear protection capability of environmen-
mate halving of the fluid service life for every 10 C temperature
tally acceptable hydraulic fluids in relation to the two test
increase and should therefore by avoided. The halving of the
procedures is comparable to that of mineral oil HLP/HVLP.
fluid service life results from the application of the Arrhenius
equation (see Glossary).
3.1.4 Material compatibility
The hydraulic fluid must not negatively affect the materials Table 3: Reference values for temperature-dependent
used in the components. Compatibility with coatings, seals, aging of the hydraulic fluid
hoses, metals and plastics is to be observed in particular. The
Reservoir temperature Fluid life cycle
fluid classifications specified in the respective component data
sheets are tested by the manufacturer with regard to material 80 C 100 %
compatibility. Parts and components not supplied by us are to 90 C 50 %
be checked by the user. 100 C 25 %
A modified aging test (without adding water) is prescribed for
Table 2: Known material incompatibilities
fluid classifications HETG and HEES. Hydraulic fluids with
Classification Incompatible with: HEPG and HEPR classification are subjected to the identical
HE... general One-component color coatings, lead, galva- test procedure as mineral oils (with 20 % water added). The
nized zinc coatings, some non-ferrous metals, calculated fluid service life is derived from the results of tests in
seals made of NBR. In some cases, the which the long-term characteristics are simulated in a short pe-
latter show major increases in volume when riod of time by applying more arduous conditions (condensed
impermissibly aged hydraulic fluids come testing). This calculated fluid service life is not to be equated to
into contact with the material. NBR is only the fluid service life in real-life applications.
permitted by prior consent, please observe Table 3 is a practical indicator for hydraulic fluids with water
the customary seal and tube replacement content < 0.1%, cf. chapter 4.10. "Water".
intervals. Do not use any hydrolysis/suscep-
tible polyurethane qualities. 3.1.6 Biological degradation
Note Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids are ones which
Please check seals and coatings of control degrade biologically much faster than mineral oils. Biologi-
cabinets, outer coatings of hydraulic compo- cal degradation is a biochemical transformation effected by
nents and accessories (connectors, cables, micro-organisms resulting in mineralization. For environmentally
control cabinets) for resistance to vapors acceptable hydraulic fluids that make reference to ISO 15380,
issuing from hydraulic fluids. biological degradation according to ISO 14593 or ISO 9439
HETG/HEES Zinc, some non-ferrous alloys with zinc must be verified. 60% minimum degradation is defined as limit
HEPG Steel/aluminum tribocontacts, paper filters, value. Proof of biological degradation is furnished for the new,
polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA), NBR unmixed, ready-formulated hydraulic fluids. Aged or mixed
hydraulic fluids are less able to degrade biologically. Biological
Note degradation outside the defined test procedure is subject to a
Check plastics for resistance variety of natural influences. The key factors are temperature,
The material incompatibilities mentioned here do not automati- humidity, contamination, fluid concentration, type and quantity
cally result in function problems. However the elements of the of micro-organisms. Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids
materials are found in the hydraulic fluids after use. The biologi- require no extended maintenance in comparison to mineral oils,
cal degradation of hydraulic fluids is negatively influenced. please observe chapter 4 "Hydraulic fluids in operation".

30
RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 7/14

3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) 3.1.10 Corrosion protection

The air separation ability (ASA) describes the property of a Hydraulic fluids should not just prevent corrosion formation
hydraulic fluid to separate undissolved air. Hydraulic fluids on steel components, they must also be compatible with
always contain dissolved air. During operation, dissolved air non-ferrous metals and alloys. Corrosion protection tests on
may be transformed into undissolved air, leading to cavitation different metals and metal alloys are described in ISO 15380.
damages. Fluid classification, fluid product, reservoir size and Hydraulic fluids that are not compatible with the materials listed
design must be coordinated to take into account the dwell above must not be used, even if they are compliant with
time and ASA value of the hydraulic fluid. The air separation ISO 15380.
capacity depends on the viscosity, temperature, basic fluid 1
Rexroth components are usually tested with HLP hydraulic
and aging. It cannot be improved by additives.
fluids or corrosion protection oils based on mineral oils before
According to ISO 15380, for instance, an ASA value d 10 minutes they are delivered.
is required for viscosity class ISO VG 46, 6 minutes are typical,
lower values are preferable. 3.1.11 Additivation
The properties described above can be modified with the help
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility
of suitable additives. Environmentally acceptable hydraulic
The capacity of a hydraulic fluid to separate water at a defined fluids should never contain heavy metals. According to the
temperature is known as the demulsifying ability. ISO 6614 present state of knowledge, all hydraulic fluids, regardless of
defines the demulsifying properties of hydraulic fluids. additivation, can be filtered with all customary filter materials
in all known filtration ratings (t 0.8 m), without filtering out
Fluids classified HETG, HEES and HEPR separate from
effective additives at the same time.
water. HETG and HEES hydraulic fluids have a different
water separation ability to mineral oil HLP/HVLP. At 20 C, in Bosch Rexroth does not prescribe any specific additive system.
comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP, a multiple ( > factor 3)
of water can separate in the hydraulic fluid. Water solubility is
also more temperature-dependent than for mineral oils. With
regard to water solubility, HEPR hydraulic fluids behave like
HVLP hydraulic fluids (see RE 90220). In the majority of cases,
HEPG-classified fluids HEPG dissolve water completely , see
chapter "4.10 Water".

3.1.9 Filterability
Filterability describes the ability of a hydraulic fluid to pass
through a filter, removing solid contaminants. The hydraulic
fluids used require a good filterability, not just when new, but
also during the whole of their service life. Depending on the
different basic fluids (glycols, saturated and partially saturated
ester oils, hydrocrack oils, polyalpha olefins, triglycerides) and
additives (VI enhancers), there are great differences here.
The filterability is a basic prerequisite for cleanliness, servicing
and filtration of hydraulic fluids. Rexroth therefore requires
the same degree of filterability of environmentally acceptable
hydraulic fluids as for mineral oils HLP/HVLP to DIN 51524. As
ISO 15380 does not comment on the filterability of hydraulic
fluids, filterability comparable to that of mineral oils HLP/HVLP
must be requested of lubricant manufacturers.
Filterability is tested with the new hydraulic fluid and after the
addition of 0.2 % water. The underlying standard (ISO 13357-
1/-2) stipulates that filterability must have no negative effects
on the filters or the hydraulic fluid, see chapter 4 "Hydraulic
fluids in operation".

31
8/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

3.2 Classification and fields of application

Table 4: Classification and fields of application

Typical field
Classification Features Notes
of application
HEPG Basic fluid, glycols Systems on exposed For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to water courses respective product data sheet. For components which have not
ISO 15380 (locks, weirs, been approved according to the product data sheet, please
dredgers) consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at
15 C: typically Very good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear
> 0.97 kg/dm stability
VI: typical > 170 Resistant to aging
Incompatible with mineral oil (exceptions must be confirmed
by the lubricant manufacturer)
Can be water-soluble
Can be mixed with water
Very good wear protection properties
A higher implementation temperature with the same viscosity
in comparison to mineral oil is to be expected
Due to the higher density in comparison to HLP, lower suc-
tion pressures are to be anticipated for pumps. Reduce the
maximum speed as required and optimize suction conditions.
Classified as insignificantly water-endangering (water hazard
class WGK 1)
Prior to commissioning, contact the lubricant manufacturer,
as the components are tested with mineral oil HLP/corrosion
protection oil.
HEES Basic fluid: Ester Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
based on renew-
partially saturated fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have not
according to able raw materials, and components. been approved according to the product data sheet, please
ISO 15380 synthetic esters, consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
mixtures of various
Density at Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire for shaft seal
esters, mixtures with
15 C: typically rings and implementation temperatures under 15 C.
polyalphaolefines
0.900.93 kg/dm
(< 30%) In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
VI: typical > 160 oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design and
viscosity
Iodine count < 90
Limit lower (depending on viscosity class) and upper imple-
mentation temperatures (maximum 80 C due to aging)
Good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear stability.
Good corrosion protection, if correspondingly additivized
Mostly classed as insignificantly water-endangering (water
hazard class WGK 1), in some cases as not water-endangering
High dirt dissolving capacity on fluid changeovers
In unfavorable operating conditions (high water content,
high temperature), HEES on ester basis have a tendency to
hydrolysis. The acidic organic decomposition products can
chemically attack materials and components.

Continued on page 9

32
RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 9/14

Table 4: Classification and fields of application (continued from page 8)

Typical field
Classification Features Notes
of application
HEES Basic fluid: Ester Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
saturated based on renew- fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have not
according to ISO able raw materials, and components. been approved according to the product data sheet, please
15380 synthetic esters, Saturated HEES consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
mixtures of various should be preferred 1
Density at Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire for shaft seal
esters, mixtures with over partially
15 C: typically rings and implementation temperatures under 15 C.
polyalphaolefines saturated HEES
0.900.93 kg/dm
(< 30%) and HETG for In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
VI: components and oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design and
typical 140160 systems exposed to viscosity
high stress levels.
Iodine count <15 Good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear stability
Good corrosion protection, if correspondingly additivized
Mostly classed as insignificantly water-endangering (water
hazard class WGK 1), in the case of low viscosity classes
(up to ISO VG 32) also classed as not water-endangering
High dirt dissolving capacity on fluid changeovers
HEPR Basic fluid: Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to synthetically fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have not
ISO 15380 manufactured hydro- and components. been approved according to the product data sheet, please
carbons (polyalpha HEPR should be consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 C:
olefins PAO) partly preferred over
typically 0.87 kg/ Behaves similarly to HVLP- hydraulic fluids, individual prod-
mixed with esters ( partially saturated
dm ucts comply with ISO 15380 HEPR and DIN 51524-3 HVLP
< 30 %) HEES and HETG
VI : for components and Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire for shaft seal
typical 140160 systems exposed to rings and implementation temperatures under 15 C.
high stress levels.
Good viscosity-temperature behavior
Classified as insignificantly water-endangering (water hazard
class WGK 1)
Note:
Note shear stability (see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid
analysis and filtration" and chapter 6 "Glossary")
HETG Basic fluid: Not recommended Practical requirements are frequently not fulfilled by hydraulic
according to vegetable oils and for Rexroth compo- fluids in this classification. Use only permissible after consulta-
ISO 15380 triglycerides nents! tion.
Density at 15 C: Viscosity is not stable over time
typically 0.90-0.93
Very fast fluid aging, very hydrolysis-susceptible
kg/dm
(please observe neutralization number)
VI: typical > 200
Tendency to gumming, gelling and setting.
Iodine count > 90
Limit the lower (depending on viscosity class) and upper
implementation temperatures (see chapter 3.1.5)
Only limited material compatibility
Filterability problems at water ingress
High dirt dissolving capacity on fluid changeovers
Mostly classed as not water-endangering

33
10/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

4 Hydraulic fluids in operation

4.1 General manufacturer or supplier of the new hydraulic fluid. The quantity
of old fluid remaining should be minimized. Mixing hydraulic
The properties of hydraulic fluids can change continually during fluids should be avoided, see following chapter.
storage and operation.
For information on changing over hydraulic fluids with different
Please note that the fluid standard ISO 15380 merely classifications, please refer to VDMA 24314, VDMA 24569
describes minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids in new and ISO 15380 appendix A.
condition at the time of filling into the bins. The operator of
a hydraulic system must ensure that the hydraulic fluid remains Bosch Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its
in a utilizable condition throughout its entire period of use. components resulting from inadequate hydraulic fluid change-
overs!
Deviations from the characteristic values are to be clarified with
the lubricant manufacturer, the test labs or Bosch Rexroth.
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for damage to its compo- hydraulic fluids
nents within the framework of the applicable liability legislation
insofar as the latter is due to non-observance of the following If hydraulic fluids from different manufacturers or different
instructions. types from the same manufacturer are mixed, gelling, silting
and deposits may occur. These, in turn, may cause foaming,
Please note the following aspects in operation. impaired air separation ability, malfunctions and damage to the
hydraulic system.
4.2 Storage and handling If the fluid contains more than 2 % of another fluid then it is
Hydraulic fluids must be stored correctly in accordance with considered to be a mixture. Exceptions apply for water, see
the instructions of the lubricant manufacturer. Avoid exposing chapter 4.10 "Water".
the containers to lengthy periods of direct heat. Containers Mixing with other hydraulic fluids is not generally permitted.
are to be stored in such a way that the risk of any foreign liquid This also includes hydraulic fluids with the same classification
or solid matter (e.g. water, foreign fluids or dust) ingression and from the market overview RE 90221-01. If individual lubri-
into the inside of the container can be ruled out. After taking cant manufacturers advertise miscibility and/or compatibility,
hydraulic fluids from the containers, these are immediately to this is entirely the responsibility of the lubricant manufacturer.
be properly resealed.
Bosch Rexroth customarily tests all components with mineral
Recommendation: oil HLP before they are delivered.
Store containers in a dry, roofed place Note: With connectible accessory units and mobile filtering
Store barrels on their sides systems, there is a considerable risk of non-permitted mixing
of the hydraulic fluids!
Clean reservoir systems and machine reservoirs regularly
Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
nents resulting from mixing hydraulic fluids!
4.3 Filling of new systems
Usually, the cleanliness levels of the hydraulic fluids as 4.6 Re-additivation
delivered do not meet the requirements of our components.
Hydraulic fluids must be filtered using an appropriate filter Additives added at a later point in time such as colors, wear
system to minimize solid particle contamination and water in reducers, VI enhancers or anti-foam additives, may negatively
the system. affect the performance properties of the hydraulic fluid and
the compatibility with our components and therefore are not
As early as possible during test operation, new systems should permissible.
be filled with the selected hydraulic fluid so as to reduce the
risk of accidentally mixing fluids (see chapter 4.5 "Mixing and Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
compatibility of different hydraulic fluids"). Changing the hy- nents resulting from re-additivation!
draulic medium at a later point represents significant additional
costs (see following chapter). 4.7 Foaming behavior
Foam is created by rising air bubbles at the surface of hydraulic
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover fluids in the reservoir. Foam that develops should collapse as
In particular with the changeover from mineral oils to environ- quickly as possible.
mentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, but also from one environ- Common hydraulic fluids in accordance with ISO 15380 are
mentally acceptable hydraulic fluids to another, there may be sufficiently inhibited against foam formation in new condi-
interference (e.g. incompatibility in the form of gelling, silting, tion. On account of aging and adsorption onto surfaces, the
stable foam or reduced filterability or filter blockage). defoamer concentration may decrease over time, leading to a
In the case of changeovers of the fluid in hydraulic systems, it stable foam.
is important to ensure compatibility of the new hydraulic fluid Defoamers may be re-dosed only after consultation with the
with the remains of the previous hydraulic fluid. Bosch Rexroth lubricant manufacturer and with his written approval.
recommends obtaining verification of compatibility from the
Defoamers may affect the air separation ability.

34
RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 11/14

4.8 Corrosion 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration

The hydraulic fluid is to guarantee sufficient corrosion protec- Air, water, operating temperature influences and solid matter
tion of components under all operating conditions, even in the contamination will change the performance characteristics of
event of impermissible water contamination. hydraulic fluids and cause them to age.
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids are tested for To preserve the usage properties and ensure a long service life
corrosion protection in the same way as mineral oil HLP/ for hydraulic fluid and components, the monitoring of the fluid
HVLP. When used in practice other corrosion mechanisms are condition and a filtration adapted to the application require-
revealed in detail and in individual cases, for the most part in ments (draining and degassing if required) are indispensable. 1
contact with non-ferrous and white alloys.
The effort is higher in the case of unfavorable usage conditions,
increased stress for the hydraulic system or high expectations
4.9 Air as to availability and service life, see chapter 2 "Solid particle
contamination and cleanliness levels".
Under atmospheric conditions the hydraulic fluid contains
dissolved air. In the negative pressure range, for instance in When commissioning a system, please note that the required
the suction pipe of the pump or downstream of control edges, minimum cleanliness level can frequently be attained only by
this dissolved air may transform into undissolved air. The flushing the system. Due to severe start-up contamination, it
undissolved air content represents a risk of cavitation and of may be possible that a fluid and/or filter replacement becomes
the diesel effect. This results in material erosion of components necessary after a short operating period (< 50 operating
and increased hydraulic fluid aging. hours).
With the correct measures, such as suction pipe and reservoir The hydraulic fluid must be replaced at regular intervals and
design, and an appropriate hydraulic fluid, air intake and tested by the lubricant manufacturer or recognized accredited
separation can be positively influenced. test labs. We recommend a reference analysis after com-
missioning.
See also chapter 3.1.7 "Air separation ability (ASA).
The minimum data to be tested for analyses are:
4.10 Water Viscosity at 40 C and 100 C
Water contamination in hydraulic fluids can result from direct Neutralization number NN (acid number AN)
ingress or indirectly through condensation of water from the air
Water content (Karl-Fischer method)
due to temperature variations.
Particle measurement with evaluation according to
HEPG dissolves water completely. This means that any water
ISO 4406 or mass of solid foreign substances with
that has ingressed into the system cannot be drained off in the
evaluation to EN 12662
sump of the reservoir.
Element analysis (RFA (EDX) / ICP, specify test method)
In the case of hydraulic fluids classed HETG, HEES and
HEPR undissolved water can be drained off from the reservoir Comparison with new product or available trend analyses
sump, the remaining water content is however too high to
Assessment / evaluation for further use
ensure that the maximum permissible water limit values are
observed in the long term. Also recommended: IR spectrum"
Water in the hydraulic fluid can result in wear or direct failure Differences in the maintenance and upkeep of environmentally
of hydraulic components. Furthermore, a high water content acceptable hydraulic fluids with the corresponding suitability
in the hydraulic fluid negatively affects aging and filterability characteristics (as required in market overview RE 90221-01)
and increases susceptibility to cavitation. During operation, in comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP are not necessary.
the water content in all hydraulic fluids, determined according Attention is however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3.
to the "Karl Fischer method" (see chapter 6 "Glossary") for all
After changing over hydraulic fluids it is recommended that
environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids must constantly be
the filters be replaced again after 50 operating hours as fluid
kept below 0.1% (1000 ppm). To ensure a long service life of
aging products may have detached themselves ("self-cleaning
both hydraulic fluids and components, Bosch Rexroth recom-
effect").
mends that values below 0.05% (500 ppm) are permanently
maintained. Compared to the pure unused hydraulic fluid the changed
neutralization number NN (acid number AN) indicates how
Due to the higher water solubility (except for HEPR) in
many aging products are contained in the hydraulic fluid. This
comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP it is urgently advised
difference must be kept as low as possible. As soon as the
that precautions be taken when using environmentally accept-
trend analysis notes a significant increase in the values, the
able hydraulic fluids, such as a dehumidifier on the reservoir
lubricant manufacturer should be contacted.
ventilation.
A higher viscosity than that of new materials indicates that the
Water content has an affect particularly in the case of HETG
hydraulic fluid has aged. Evaluation by the test lab or lubricant
and partially saturated HEES in that it accelerates aging
manufacturers is however authoritative, whose recommenda-
(hydrolysis) of the hydraulic fluid and biological degradation,
tion should be urgently observed.
see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration".

35
12/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

5 Disposal and environmental

On systems where the possibility of water contamination
protection
cannot be completely ruled out (also condensation), it should
All environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, are like mineral
be ensured via the hydraulic system circuit that fluid aging
oil-based hydraulic fluids, subject to special disposal obliga-
products are not accumulating in individual areas of the
tions.
hydraulic system, but are being removed from the system in
a controlled manner via the filtration system. This should be The respective lubricant manufacturers provide specifications
ensured via suitable hydraulic circuits (e.g. flushing circuit) or on environmentally acceptable handling and storage. Please
system manufacturer's operating instructions/specifications. ensure that spilt or splashed fluids are absorbed with appropri-
ate adsorbents or by a technique that prevents it contaminating
In case of warranty, liability or guarantee claims to Bosch
water courses, the ground or sewerage systems.
Rexroth, service verification and/or the results of fluid analyses
are to be provided. It is also not permitted to mix fluids when disposing of hydraulic
fluids. Regulations governing the handing of used oils stipulate
that used oils are not to mixed with other products, e.g.
substances containing halogen. Non-compliance will increase
disposal costs. Comply with the national legal provisions
concerning the disposal of the corresponding hydraulic
fluid. Comply with the local safety data sheet of the lubricant
manufacturer for the country concerned.

36
RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 13/14

6 Glossary
Additivation Iodine count
Additives are chemical substances added to the basic fluids The iodine count is a yardstick for the quantity of single and
to achieve or improve specific properties. multiple unsaturated bonds between C atoms in the basic fluid.
A low iodine count indicates that the hydraulic fluid contains
Aging
few unsaturated bonds and is thus considerably more resistant
Hydraulic fluids age due to oxidation (see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging
to aging than a hydraulic fluid with a high iodine count. A
resistance"). Liquid and solid contamination acts as a catalyzer
statement about the position at which these multiple bonds are
for aging, meaning that it needs to be minimized as far as
located and about how "stable" they are against influencing
possible by careful filtration. Please refer to Hydrolysis.
factors cannot be derived simply by stating the iodine count. 1
Arrhenius equation
Karl Fischer method
The quantitative relation between reaction rate and temperature
Method to determine the water content in fluids. Indirect
is described by an exponential function, the Arrhenius equation.
coulometric determination procedure in accordance with DIN
This function is usually visualized within the typical temperature
EN ISO 12937 in connection with DIN 51777-2. Only the
range of the hydraulic system. For a practical example, see
combination of both standards will assure adequately accurate
chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance.
measured values. For hydraulic fluids based on glycol, DIN EN
Basic fluids ISO 12937 is to be applied in conjunction with DIN 51777-1.
In general, a hydraulic fluid is made up of a basic fluid, or base
Cavitation
oil, and chemical substances, the so-called additives. The
Cavitation is the creation of cavities in fluids due to pressure
proportion of basic fluid is generally greater than 90%.
reduction below the saturated vapour pressure and subse-
Diesel effect quent implosion when the pressure increases. When the
If hydraulic fluid that contains air bubbles is compressed cavities implode, extremely high acceleration, temperatures
quickly, the bubbles are heated to such a degree that a self- and pressure may occur temporarily, which may damage the
ignition of the air-gas mix may occur. The resultant temperature component surfaces.
increase may lead to seal damage and increased aging of the
Neutralization number (NN)
hydraulic fluid.
The neutralization number (NN) or acid number (AN) specifies
Saturated esters the amount of caustic potash required to neutralize the acid
Esters differ by the number of C atoms (chain length) and contained in one gram of fluid.
position of the bonds between the C atoms. Saturated esters
Pour point
do not have double/multiple bonds between C atoms and are
The lowest temperature at which the fluid still just flows when
therefore more resistant to aging than partially saturated esters.
cooled down under set conditions. The pour point is specified
Partially saturated esters in the lubricant manufacturers' technical data sheets as a
In contrast to saturated esters, partially saturated esters have reference value for achieving this flow limit.
double/multiple bonds between C atoms. Rexroth defines
RFA (wavelength dispersive x-ray fluorescence analysis)
partially saturated esters as unsaturated bonds and mixtures
Is a procedure to determine nearly all elements in liquid and
of esters with unsaturated and saturated bonds. Esters with
solid samples with nearly any composition. This analysis
unsaturated bonds are produced on the basis of renewable
method is suitable for examining additives and contamination,
raw materials.
delivering fast results.
Depending on their number and position, these unsaturated
Shearing/shear loss
bonds between the C atoms are instable. These bonds can
Shearing of molecule chains during operation can change the
detach themselves and form new bonds, thus changing the
viscosity of hydraulic fluids with long chain VI enhancers. The
properties of those liquids (an aging mechanism). One of the
initially high viscosity index drops. This needs to be taken into
underlying requirements for inclusion in the market overview
account when selecting the hydraulic fluid.
RE 90221-01 is an aging stability characteristic. Attention is
however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3. The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance
Hydrolysis
with DIN 51350 part -6. Please note that there are practical
Hydrolysis is the splitting of a chemical bond through the
applications that create a much higher shear load on such
reaction with water under the influence of temperature.
hydraulic fluids than can be achieved by this test.
ICP (atomic emission spectroscopy)
Stick-slip
The ICP procedure can be used to determine various wear
Interaction between a resilient mass system involving friction
metals, contamination types and additives. Practically all
(such as cylinder + oil column + load) and the pressure
elements in the periodic system can be detected with this
increase at very low sliding speeds. The static friction of the
method..
system is a decisive value here. The lower it is, the lower the
speed that can still be maintained without sticking. Depend-
ing on the tribologic system, the stick-slip effect may lead to
vibrations generated and sometimes also to significant noise
emission. In many cases, the effect can be attenuated by
replacing the lubricant.

37
14/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12

Viscosity
Viscosity is the measure of the internal friction of a fluid to
flow. It is defined as the property of a substance to flow under
tension. Viscosity is the most important characteristic for
describing the load-bearing capacity of a hydraulic fluid.
Kinematic viscosity is the ratio of the dynamic viscosity and the
density of the fluid; the unit is mm/s. Hydraulic fluids are clas-
sified by their kinematic viscosity into ISO viscosity classes.
The reference temperature for this is 40 C.
Viscosity index (VI)
Refers to the viscosity temperature behavior of a fluid. The
lower the change of viscosity in relation the temperature, the
higher the VI.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Zum Eisengieer 1 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany No statements concerning the suitability of a hydraulic fluid for a specific purpose
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release the
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 user from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
[email protected] It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
www.boschrexroth.de wear and aging.
Subject to change.

38
Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic RE 90222/05.12 1/16 1

fluids (HFDR/HFDU)

Application notes and requirements for Rexroth hydraulic components

Hydraulic fluids

Hydraulic fluids based Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Title on mineral oils and acceptable hydraulic water-free water-containing
related hydrocarbons fluids hydraulic fluids hydraulic fluids

Standard DIN 51524 ISO 15380 ISO 12922 ISO 12922

RE 90223
Data sheets RE 90220 RE 90221 RE 90222
(in preparation)

HL
HEPG
HLP HFDR HFC
HEES partially saturated
HLPD HFDU (ester base) HFB
Classification HEES saturated
HVLP HFDU (glycol base) HFAE
HEPR
HLPD and more HFAS
HETG
and more

39
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

Contents
1 Basic information .................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1 General instructions ...................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Fire resistance ............................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Scope ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................................................................................4
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels .....................................................................................................................................5
3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid ..........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid .................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.1 Viscosity .................................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior........................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.3 Wear protection capability ................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.4 Material compatibility..........................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.5 Aging resistance .................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.6 Environmentally acceptable ..............................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) ...............................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility ........................................................................................................................................8
3.1.9 Filterability .............................................................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.10 Corrosion protection ........................................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.11 Additivation .........................................................................................................................................................................................8
3.2 Classification and fields of application ................................................................................................................................................9
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................11
4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.2 Storage and handling .............................................................................................................................................................................11
4.3 Filling of new systems.............................................................................................................................................................................11
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover ....................................................................................................................................................................11
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids .......................................................................................................................11
4.6 Re-additivation..........................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.7 Foaming behavior .....................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.8 Corrosion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.9 Air ................................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.10 Water ........................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration .......................................................................................................................................12
5 Disposal and environmental protection ........................................................................................................................................................13
6 Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................14

40
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

1 Basic information
1.1 General instructions 1.2 Fire resistance
The hydraulic fluid is the common element in any hydraulic There is no clear legal definition of fire-resistant hydraulic fluids.
component and must be selected very carefully. Quality and There are great differences regarding fire resistance. The
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid are decisive factors for the selection is the sole responsibility of the system operator with
operational reliability, efficiency and service life of a system. respect to requirements (application, construction and design
of the system, hottest source in the system, necessary fire
Hydraulic fluids must conform, be selected and used in
protection).
accordance with the generally acknowledged rules of technol-
ogy and safety provisions. Reference is made to the country- Different test procedures are applied for evaluating fire 1
specific standards and directives (in Germany the directive of resistance.
the Employer's Liability Insurance Association BGR 137).
Fire resistance test procedure according to ISO 12922:
This data sheet includes recommendations and regulations
Ignition properties of spray according to ISO 15029-1
concerning the selection, operation and disposal of fire-resis-
(Spray flame persistence hollow-cone nozzle method)
tant, water-free hydraulic fluids in the application of Rexroth
hydraulic components. Ignition properties of spray according to ISO 15029-2
(Stabilized flame heat release)
The individual selection of hydraulic fluid or the choice of
classification are the responsibility of the operator. Wick flame persistence of fluids according to ISO 14935
(average flame persistence)
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that appropriate
measures are taken for safety and health protection and to Determination of the flammability characteristics of fluids
ensure compliance with statutory regulations. The recommen- in contact with hot surfaces, ignition process according to
dations of the lubricant manufacturer and the specifications ISO 20823 (ignition temperature, flame spread)
given in the safety data sheet are to be observed when using
In general, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids are distinguished
hydraulic fluid.
between water-containing fire-resistant and water-free
This data sheet does not absolve the operator from verifying fire-resistant hydraulic fluids. Water-containing fire-resistant
the conformity and suitability of the respective hydraulic fluid hydraulic fluids are described in RE 90223.
for his system. He is to ensure that the selected fluid meets the
Water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluid means hydraulic
minimum requirements of the relevant hydraulic fluid standard
fluids with a water-proportion of 0.1% by volume ("Karl Fischer
during the whole of the period of use.
method", see chapter 6 "Glossary"), measured at the time
The currently valid standard for fire-resistant hydraulic fluids is of filling in the transport container.
the ISO 12922. In addition, other, more detailed documents,
In Europe water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids are not
guidelines, specifications and legislation may also be valid. The
approved for use in underground coal mining. The classification
operator is responsible for ensuring that such regulations are
HFDU is no longer included in the VDMA 24317: 2005.
observed, for example:
Note
7th Luxembourg Report: Luxembourg, April 1994, Doc.
In contrast to water-containing fluids, all water-free, fire-
No. 4746/10/91 EN "Requirements and tests applicable to
resistant hydraulic fluids have a flash point and a fire point.
fire-resistant hydraulic fluids for hydrostatic and hydrokinetic
Specific parameters for flash point and fire point can be found
power transmission and control"
in the technical and/or safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid
VDMA 24314 (1981-11): "Changing hydraulic fluids guide- concerned.
lines"
Just as much care should be taken when working with fire-
VDMA 24317 (2005-11): "Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids resistant hydraulic fluids are with other hydraulic fluids,
minimum technical requirements" e.g. mineral oils. A leak from the hydraulic system must be
avoided. The best and most cost-effective protection against
FM Approval Standard 6930 (2009-04): "Flammability
fire and explosion is to prevent leakage with meticulous
Classification of Industrial Fluids" (only available in English)
service, maintenance and care of the hydraulic system.
DIN Technical Report CEN/TR 14489 (2006-01): "Selection
guidelines for protecting safety, health and the environment"
We recommend that you maintain constant, close contact
with lubricant manufacturers to support you in the selection,
maintenance, care and analyses.
When disposing of used hydraulic fluids, apply the same care
as during use.

41
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

1.3 Scope 1.4 Safety instructions

This data sheet must be applied when using water-free, fire- Hydraulic fluids can constitute a risk for persons and the
resistant hydraulic fluids with Rexroth hydraulic components. environment. These risks are described in the hydraulic fluid
The specifications of this data sheet may be further restricted safety data sheets. The operator is to ensure that a current
by the specifications given in data sheets for the individual safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid used is available and
components concerned. that the measures stipulated therein are complied with.
The use of the individual water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic
fluids in accordance with the intended purpose can be found in
the safety data sheets or other product description documents
of the lubricant manufacturers. In addition, each use is to be
individually considered.
Rexroth hydraulic components may only be operated with
water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids according to
ISO 12922 if specified in the respective component data
sheet or if a Rexroth approval for use is furnished.
The manufacturers of hydraulic systems must adjust their sys-
tems and operating instructions to the water-free, fire-resistant
hydraulic fluids.
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for its components
for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the
notes below.

42
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels

Solid particle contamination is the major reason for faults oc- Hydraulic fluids frequently fail to meet these cleanliness
curring in hydraulic systems. It may lead to a number of effects requirements on delivery. Careful filtering is therefore required
in the hydraulic system. Firstly, single large solid particles during operation and in particular, during filling in order to
may lead directly to a system malfunction, and secondly small ensure the required cleanliness levels. Your lubricant manu-
particles cause continuous elevated wear. facturer can tell you the cleanliness level of hydraulic fluids
as delivered. To maintain the required cleanliness level over
For mineral oils, the cleanliness level of water-free, fire-resistant
the operating period, you must use a reservoir breather filter.
hydraulic fluids is given as a three-digit numerical code in
If the environment is humid, take appropriate measures, such
accordance with ISO 4406. This numerical code denotes the
number of particles present in a hydraulic fluid for a defined
as a breather filter with air drying or permanent off-line water 1
separation.
quantity. Moreover, foreign solid matter is not to exceed a mass
of 50 mg/kg (gravimetric examination according to ISO 4405). Note: the specifications of the lubricant manufacturer relat-
ing to cleanliness levels are based on the time at which the
In general, compliance with a minimum cleanliness level of
container concerned is filled and not on the conditions during
20/18/15 in accordance with ISO 4406 or better is to be main-
transport and storage.
tained in operation. Special servo valves demand improved
cleanliness levels of at least 18/16/13. A reduction in cleanli- Further information about contamination with solid matter
ness level by one level means half of the quantity of particles and cleanliness levels can be found in brochure RE 08016.
and thus greater cleanliness. Lower numbers in cleanliness
levels should always be striven for and extend the service life
of hydraulic components. The component with the highest
cleanliness requirements determines the required cleanliness
of the overall system. Please also observe the specifications in
table 1: "Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406" and in the
respective data sheets of the various hydraulic components.

Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406

Particles per 100 ml

Up to and Scale number
More than
including
8,000,000 16,000,000 24 20 / 18 / 15
4,000,000 8,000,000 23 > 4 m > 6 m > 14 m
2,000,000 4,000,000 22
1,000,000 2,000,000 21
500,000 1,000,000 20
250,000 500,000 19
130,000 250,000 18
64000 130,000 17
32000 64000 16
16000 32000 15
8000 16000 14
4000 8000 13
2000 4000 12
1000 2000 11
500 1000 10
250 500 9
130 250 8
64 130 7
32 64 6

43
 6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid

Water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids for Bosch Rexroth We recommend that the optimum operating viscosity range of
hydraulic components are assessed on the basis of their fulfill- each component be kept within the permissible temperature
ment of the minimum requirements of ISO 12922. range. This usually requires either cooling or heating, or both.
The permissible viscosity range and the necessary cleanliness
level can be found in the product data sheet for the component
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid concerned.
The specified limit values for all components employed in the
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid used is above the permitted
hydraulic system, for example viscosity and cleanliness level,
operating viscosity, this will result in increased hydraulic-me-
must be observed with the hydraulic fluid used, taking into
chanical losses. In return, there will be lower internal leakage
account the specified operating conditions.
losses. If the pressure level is lower, lubrication gaps may not
Hydraulic fluid suitability depends, amongst others, on the be filled up, which can lead to increased wear. For hydraulic
following factors: pumps, the permitted suction pressure may not be reached,
which may lead to cavitation damage.
3.1.1 Viscosity
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid is below the permitted
Viscosity is a basic property of hydraulic fluids. The permissible operating viscosity, increased leakage, wear, susceptibility to
viscosity range of complete systems needs to be determined contamination and a shorter component life cycle will result.
taking account of the permissible viscosity of all components
Please ensure that the permissible temperature and viscosity
and it is to be observed for each individual component.
limits are observed for the respective components. This usually
The viscosity at operating temperature determines the response requires either cooling or heating, or both.
characteristics of closed control loops, stability and damping
of systems, the efficiency factor and the degree of wear.

Fig. 1: Examples V-T diagrams for water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids in comparison to
HLP and HFC (reference values, double-logarithmic representation)

40q 20q 0q 20q 40q 60q 80q 100q

1600
1000
600
400
200
100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]

60
40

20

HFC
10
HFDU
HLP46
5
40q 25q 10q 0q 10q 30q 50q 70q 90q 115q HFDR
Temperature t [C]

Typical viscosity data [mm2/s] Detailed V-T diagrams may be obtained from your lubricant
manufacturer for their specific products. Descriptions of the
at temperature 0 C 40 C 100 C individual classifications can be found in chapter 3.2 and in
HFDR 2500 43 5,3 Table 4.
HFDU (ester base) 330 46 9,2
HFDU (glycol base) 350 46 8,7
For comparison HLP
610 46 7
(see RE 90220)
For comparison HFC
280 46
(see RE 90223)

44
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior Table 2: Known material incompatibilities

For hydraulic fluids, the viscosity temperature behavior (V-T Classification Incompatible with:
behavior) is of particular importance. Viscosity is characterized HFD in Seals, plastics and coatings of control cabi-
in that it drops when the temperature increases and rises when general nets, outer coatings of hydraulic components
the temperature drops. The interrelation between viscosity and and accessory components (connectors,
temperature is described by the viscosity index (VI). wiring harnesses, control cabinets) are to be
tested for stability.
For cold testing over a period of several days, the viscosity
of ester-based HFDU can increase greatly. After heating, Note: hydraulic fluid vapors can also lead to 1
the characteristic values as specified on the data sheet are incompatibility!
restored. Please ask your lubricant manufacturer for the "Flow HFDR Individual component color coating, lead, gal-
capacity after seven days at low temperature" (ASTM D 2532) vanic zinc-plating, in part non-ferrous metals
for the fluid classification ester-based HFDU . with zinc, tin and aluminum in a tribological
HFDU fluid based on ester and glycol have better viscosity/ system. Sealing elements made of NBR. In
temperature characteristics than mineral oil HLP (see Fig. 1). some cases, the latter show major increases
This should be taken into consideration when selecting in volume when impermissibly aged hydraulic
hydraulic fluid for the required temperature range. The viscosity fluids come into contact with the material. Do
and temperature limits required in the product data sheets are not use any hydrolysis/susceptible polyure-
to be observed in all operating conditions. thane qualities.

Note HFDU based Single-component color coatings, lead,

For ambient temperatures below 0 C, fire-resistant, water- on ester galvanized zinc coatings, in part non-ferrous
containing hydraulic fluids of classification HFC are to be metals with zinc, tin, seals made of NBR. In
preferred because they observe the component-related some cases, the latter show major increases
viscosity ranges and because the have better pour points in volume when impermissibly aged hydraulic
(see RE 90223). fluids come into contact with the material. Do
not use any hydrolysis/susceptible polyure-
3.1.3 Wear protection capability thane qualities.
HFDU based Single-component color coatings, steel/alu-
Wear protection capability describes the property of hydraulic on glycol minum tribocontacts, paper filters, polymeth-
fluids to prevent or minimize wear within the components. The ylmethacrylate (PMMA). The compatibility of
wear protection capability is described in ISO 12922 via test NBR is to be examined for individual case.
procedures"FZG gear test rig" (ISO 14635-1) and "Mechani-
cal test in the vane pump" (ISO 20763). The wear protection
capability of water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids in relation The material incompatibilities mentioned here do not automati-
to the two test procedures is comparable to that of mineral oil cally result in function problems. However the elements of
HLP/HVLP. the materials are found in the hydraulic fluids after use. The
material incompatibilities described here may lead to acceler-
3.1.4 Material compatibility ated aging of the hydraulic fluid and to reduced fire resistance.

The hydraulic fluid must not negatively affect the materials 3.1.5 Aging resistance
used in the components. Compatibility with coatings, seals,
hoses, metals and plastics is to be observed in particular. The The way a water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluid ages de-
fluid classifications specified in the respective component data pends on the thermal, chemical and mechanical stress to which
sheets are tested by the manufacturer with regard to material it is subjected. The influence of water, air, temperature and
compatibility. Parts and components not supplied by us are to contamination may be significantly greater than for mineral oils
be checked by the user. HLP/HVLP. Aging resistance can be greatly influenced by the
chemical composition of the hydraulic fluids.
High fluid temperatures (e.g. over 80 C) result in a approxi-
mate halving of the fluid service life for every 10 C temperature
increase and should therefore by avoided. The halving of the
fluid service life results from the application of the Arrhenius
equation (see Glossary).

Table 3: Reference values for temperature-dependent

aging of the hydraulic fluid
Reservoir temperature Fluid life cycle
80 C 100 %
90 C 50 %
100 C 25 %

45
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

A modified aging test (ISO 4263-3 or ASTM D943 without 3.1.9 Filterability
the addition of water) is specified for fluid classification
Filterability describes the ability of a hydraulic fluid to pass
HFDU. Fluid classification HFDR is described with a special
through a filter, removing solid contaminants. The hydraulic
procedure with respect to oxidation stability (EN 14832) and
fluids used require a good filterability, not just when new, but
oxidation service life (ISO 4263-3). The calculated fluid service
also during the whole of their service life. This can differ greatly
life is derived from the results of tests in which the long-term
depending on the different basic fluids (glycols, esters) and
characteristics are simulated in a short period of time by
additives (VI enhancers, anti-fogging additives).
applying more arduous conditions (condensed testing). This
calculated fluid service life is not to be equated to the fluid The filterability is a basic prerequisite for cleanliness, servicing
service life in real-life applications. and filtration of hydraulic fluids. Rexroth therefore requires the
same degree of filterability of water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic
Table 3 is a practical indicator for hydraulic fluids with water
fluids as for mineral oils HLP/HVLP to DIN 51524.
content < 0.1%, cf. chapter 4.10. "Water".
As ISO 12922 does not comment on the filterability of hydrau-
lic fluids, filterability comparable to that of mineral oils HLP/
3.1.6 Environmentally acceptable
HVLP must be requested of lubricant manufacturers.
HFDU fluids based on ester and glycol are hydraulic fluids
Filterability is tested with the new hydraulic fluid and after the
which may also be classified as environmentally acceptable.
addition of 0.2 % water. The underlying standard (ISO 13357-
The main criteria for fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids
1/-2) stipulates that filterability must have no negative effects
are the leak-free, technically problem-free use and the neces-
on the filters or the hydraulic fluid, see chapter 4 "Hydraulic
sary fire resistance. Environmentally acceptable is merely a
fluids in operation".
supplementary criterion. Notes on environmentally compatible
hydraulic fluids can be found in RE 90221.
3.1.10 Corrosion protection
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) Hydraulic fluids should not just prevent corrosion formation
on steel components, they must also be compatible with
The air separation ability (ASA) describes the property of a
non-ferrous metals and alloys. Corrosion protection tests on
hydraulic fluid to separate undissolved air. Hydraulic fluids
different metals and metal alloys are described in ISO 12922.
always contain dissolved air. During operation, dissolved air
may be transformed into undissolved air, leading to cavitation Rexroth components are usually tested with HLP hydraulic
damages. Fluid classification, fluid product, reservoir size and fluids or corrosion protection oils based on mineral oils before
design must be coordinated to take into account the dwell they are delivered.
time and ASA value of the hydraulic fluid. The air separation
capacity depends on the viscosity, temperature, basic fluid and 3.1.11 Additivation
aging. It cannot be improved by additives.
The properties described above can be modified with the help
According to ISO 12922 for instance, an ASA value d 15 min- of suitable additives.
utes is required for viscosity class ISO VG 46, practical values Bosch Rexroth does not prescribe any specific additive
on delivery are < 10 minutes, lower values are preferable. system.

3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility

The capacity of a hydraulic fluid to separate water at a defined
temperature is known as the demulsifying ability. ISO 6614
defines the demulsifying properties of hydraulic fluids.
The fluid classifications HFDU based on ester and HFDR
separate water, but HFD hydraulic fluids have a different
water separation ability to mineral oil HLP/HVLP. At 20 C, in
comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP, a multiple (> factor 3) of
water can separate in the hydraulic fluid. Water solubility is also
more temperature-dependent than for mineral oils. The fluid
classification HFDU based on glycol usually dissolves water
completely, see chapter "4.10 Water".

46
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

3.2 Classification and fields of application

Table 4: Classification and fields of application
Typical field
Classification Features Notes
of application
HFDU Base fluid: Mobile systems with For information on approved components, please refer to the
(glycol-based) Glycols high thermal loading respective product data sheet. For components which have
according to ISO not been approved according to the product data sheet, 1
12922 please consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 C: Very good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear
typically stability
> 0.97 kg/dm
Resistant to aging
VI: typical > 170
Can be water-soluble
Can be mixed with water
The classification
Very good wear protection properties
"HFDU" is no longer
listed in the current A higher implementation temperature with the same viscos-
standard sheet ity in comparison to mineral oil is to be expected
VDMA 24317.
Due to the higher density in comparison to HLP, lower
suction pressures are to be anticipated for pumps. Reduce
the maximum speed as required and optimize suction
conditions.
Prior to commissioning, contact the lubricant manufacturer,
as the components are tested with mineral oil HLP/corro-
sion protection oil.
Incompatible with mineral oil (exceptions must be con-
firmed by the lubricant manufacturer).
HFDU (ester-based) Base fluid: Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to Ester based on fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have
ISO 12922 regenerative raw and components. not been approved according to the product data sheet,
materials, synthetic please consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 C:
ester and mixtures
typically 0.90-0.93 Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire about shaft
of different esters
kg/dm seal rings and implementation temperatures under 15 C.
Because of the fire
VI: typical > 160 Note shear stability (see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid
resistance, HFDU
analysis and filtration" and chapter 6 "Glossary")
Iodine count < 90 hydraulic fluids
based on ester are Fire resistance is not stable over time
usually partially
In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
The classification saturated esters
oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design
"HFDU" is no longer
and viscosity. Please check ATEX approvals for hydraulic
listed in the current
components.
standard sheet
VDMA 24317. Limit the lower (see chapter 3.1.2) and upper implementa-
tion temperatures (see chapter 3.1.5)
Good viscosity-temperature behavior
Usually classified as insignificantly water-endangering
(water hazard class WGK 1)
High dirt dissolving capacity on fluid changeovers
In unfavorable operating conditions (high water content,
high temperature), HFDU on ester basis have a tendency
to hydrolysis. The acidic organic decomposition products
can chemically attack materials and components.

47
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

Typical field
Classification Features Notes
of application
HFDR Base fluid: phos- Turbine control For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to ISO phoric acid ester systems respective product data sheet. For components which have
12922 not been approved according to the product data sheet,
please consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 C:
typically 1.1 kg/dm Classified as hazardous materials
(for transportation and storage)
VI : typical 140160
Hazardous working material
Water-endangering (Water hazard class 2 WGK2)
Develops toxic vapors in case of fire
Preferred use of FKM, and possibly PTFE seals. Please
enquire for shaft seal rings and implementation tempera-
tures under 15 C.
In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design and
viscosity
Phosphoric acid esters display a tendency to hydrolysis
when they come into contact with moisture. Under the
influence of water/moisture, they become unstable or form
highly aggressive, acidic components which could damage
the hydraulic fluid and component beyond repair.
Poor viscosity/temperature characteristics
Due to the higher density in comparison to HLP, lower
suction pressures are to be anticipated for pumps. Reduce
the maximum speed as required and optimize suction
conditions.
In unfavorable operating conditions (high water content,
high temperature), HFDR have a tendency to hydrolysis.
The acidic inorganic decomposition products chemically
attack materials and components.
HFDU (continued) Based on triglycer- Not recommended Hydraulic fluids based on polyalphaolefines are not recom-
ides, mineral oils or for Rexroth compo- mended on account of their poor fire resistance. This clas-
related hydrocarbons nents! sification can usually be identified from: density < 0.89;
VI < 140 to 160
Hydraulic fluids based on triglycerides are not recommended
on account of their aging resistance. This classification can
usually be identified from: density > 0.92; VI > 190; iodine
count > 90
Consult your lubricant manufacturer or your Bosch Rexroth
sales partner if the classification of a hydraulic fluid is not
clear.
HFDS Based on haloge- Not approved for HFDS and HFDT have not been permitted to be manufac-
nated hydrocarbons Rexroth compo- tured or used since 1989 for environmental reasons.
HFDT
or mixtures with nents!
halogenated
hydrocarbons

48
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

4 Hydraulic fluids in operation

4.1 General manufacturer or supplier of the new hydraulic fluid. The quantity
of old fluid remaining should be minimized. Mixing hydraulic
The properties of hydraulic fluids can change continually during fluids should be avoided, see following chapter.
storage and operation.
Information about changing to a hydraulic fluid of a different
Please note that the fluid standard ISO 12922 merely classification can be found, for example, in VDMA 24314 and
describes minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids in new in ISO 7745. In addition, the information given in chapter 3.1.4
condition at the time of filling into the bins. The operator of a "Material compatibility" is also to be observed.
hydraulic system must ensure that the hydraulic fluid remains
in a utilizable condition throughout its entire period of use. Bosch Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its com- 1
ponents resulting from inadequate hydraulic fluid changeovers!
Deviations from the characteristic values are to be clarified with
the lubricant manufacturer, the test labs or Bosch Rexroth.
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for damage to its compo- hydraulic fluids
nents within the framework of the applicable liability legislation
insofar as the latter is due to non-observance of the following If hydraulic fluids from different manufacturers or different
instructions. types from the same manufacturer are mixed, gelling, silting
and deposits may occur. These, in turn, may cause foaming,
Please note the following aspects in operation. impaired air separation ability, malfunctions and damage to the
hydraulic system.
4.2 Storage and handling If the fluid contains more than 2 % of another fluid then it is
Hydraulic fluids must be stored correctly in accordance with considered to be a mixture. Exceptions apply for water, see
the instructions of the lubricant manufacturer. Avoid exposing chapter 4.10 "Water".
the containers to lengthy periods of direct heat. Containers Mixing with other hydraulic fluids is not generally permitted.
are to be stored in such a way that the risk of any foreign liquid This includes hydraulic fluids with the same classification. If
or solid matter (e.g. water, foreign fluids or dust) ingression individual lubricant manufacturers advertise miscibility and/or
into the inside of the container can be ruled out. After taking compatibility, this is entirely the responsibility of the lubricant
hydraulic fluids from the containers, these are immediately to manufacturer.
be properly resealed.
Bosch Rexroth customarily tests all components with mineral
Recommendation: oil HLP before they are delivered.
Store containers in a dry, roofed place Note: With connectible accessory units and mobile filtering
Store barrels on their sides systems, there is a considerable risk of non-permitted mixing
of the hydraulic fluids!
Clean reservoir systems and machine reservoirs regularly
Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
nents resulting from mixing hydraulic fluids!
4.3 Filling of new systems
Usually, the cleanliness levels of the hydraulic fluids as delivered 4.6 Re-additivation
do not meet the requirements of our components. Hydraulic fluids
must be filtered using an appropriate filter system to minimize solid Additives added at a later point in time such as colors, wear
particle contamination and water in the system. reducers, VI enhancers or anti-foam additives, may negatively
affect the performance properties of the hydraulic fluid and
As early as possible during test operation, new systems should the compatibility with our components and therefore are not
be filled with the selected hydraulic fluid so as to reduce the permissible.
risk of accidentally mixing fluids (see chapter 4.5 "Mixing and
compatibility of different hydraulic fluids"). Changing the hy- Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
draulic medium at a later point represents significant additional nents resulting from re-additivation!
costs (see following chapter).
4.7 Foaming behavior
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover Foam is created by rising air bubbles at the surface of hydraulic
Problems may be encountered in particular when changing fluids in the reservoir. Foam that develops should collapse as
over from water-containing, fire-resistant hydraulic fluid or quickly as possible.
mineral oils to water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids (e.g. Common hydraulic fluids in accordance with ISO 12922 are
incompatibilities in the form of gelling, silting, stable foam, sufficiently inhibited against foam formation in new condi-
reduced filterability or filter blockage). This may also happen tion. On account of aging and adsorption onto surfaces, the
when changing products within the same classification. defoamer concentration may decrease over time, leading to a
In the case of changeovers of the fluid in hydraulic systems, it stable foam.
is important to ensure compatibility of the new hydraulic fluid Defoamers may be re-dosed only after consultation with the
with the remains of the previous hydraulic fluid. Bosch Rexroth lubricant manufacturer and with his written approval.
recommends obtaining verification of compatibility from the
Defoamers may affect the air separation ability.

49
12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

4.8 Corrosion Water content has an affect particularly in the case of HEDU
hydraulic fluid on ester basis and HFDR in that it accelerates
The hydraulic fluid is to guarantee sufficient corrosion protec- aging (hydrolysis) of the hydraulic fluid and biological degra-
tion of components under all operating conditions, even in the dation, see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and
event of impermissible water contamination. filtration".
Water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids are tested for cor-
rosion protection in the same way as mineral oil HLP/HVLP. 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration
When used in practice other corrosion mechanisms are
revealed in detail and in individual cases, for the most part in Air, water, operating temperature influences and solid matter
contact with non-ferrous and white alloys. contamination will change the performance characteristics of
hydraulic fluids and cause them to age.

4.9 Air To preserve the usage properties and ensure a long service life
for hydraulic fluid and components, the monitoring of the fluid
Under atmospheric conditions the hydraulic fluid contains condition and a filtration adapted to the application require-
dissolved air. In the negative pressure range, for instance in ments (draining and degassing if required) are indispensable.
the suction pipe of the pump or downstream of control edges,
this dissolved air may transform into undissolved air. The The effort is higher in the case of unfavorable usage conditions,
undissolved air content represents a risk of cavitation and of increased stress for the hydraulic system or high expectations
the diesel effect. This results in material erosion of components as to availability and service life, see chapter 2 "Solid particle
and increased hydraulic fluid aging. contamination and cleanliness levels".

With the correct measures, such as suction pipe and reservoir When commissioning a system, please note that the required
design, and an appropriate hydraulic fluid, air intake and minimum cleanliness level can frequently be attained only by
separation can be positively influenced. flushing the system. Due to severe start-up contamination, it
may be possible that a fluid and/or filter replacement becomes
See also chapter 3.1.7 "Air separation ability (ASA). necessary after a short operating period (< 50 operating
hours).
4.10 Water The hydraulic fluid must be replaced at regular intervals and
Water contamination in hydraulic fluids can result from direct tested by the lubricant manufacturer or recognized accredited
ingress or indirectly through condensation of water from the air test labs. We recommend a reference analysis after com-
due to temperature variations. missioning.

HFDU hydraulic fluids on glycol basis are water-soluble or The minimum data to be tested for analyses are:
can be mixed with water. This means that any water that has Viscosity at 40 C and 100 C
ingressed into the system cannot be drained off in the sump
of the reservoir. Neutralization number NN (acid number AN)

In the case of HDFU hydraulic fluids on ester basis, undis- Water content (Karl-Fischer method)
solved water can be drained off from the reservoir sump, the Particle measurement with evaluation according to
remaining water content is however too high to ensure that the ISO 4406 or mass of solid foreign substances with
maximum permissible water limit values are observed in the evaluation to EN 12662
long term.
Element analysis (RFA (EDX) / ICP, specify test method)
With the fluid classification HFDR, the greater density of the
ester means that the any water that has ingressed will be on Comparison with new product or available trend analyses
the surface of the hydraulic fluid. This means that any water Assessment / evaluation for further use
that has ingressed into the system cannot be drained off in the
sump of the reservoir. Also recommended: IR spectrum

Water in the hydraulic fluid can result in wear or direct failure No differences are needed in the maintenance and care of
of hydraulic components. Furthermore, a high water content in water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids with the appropriate
the hydraulic fluid negatively affects aging and filterability and suitability parameters compared to HLP/HVLP mineral oils.
increases susceptibility to cavitation. During operation, the water Attention is however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3.
content in all hydraulic fluids, determined according to the "Karl After changing over hydraulic fluids it is recommended that the
Fischer method" (see chapter 6 "Glossary") for all water-free, filters be replaced again after 50 operating hours as fluid aging
fire-resistant hydraulic fluids must constantly be kept below 0.1% products may have detached themselves ("self-cleaning effect").
(1000 ppm). To ensure a long service life of both hydraulic fluids
and components, Bosch Rexroth recommends that values below Compared to the pure unused hydraulic fluid the changed
0.05% (500 ppm) are permanently maintained. neutralization number NN (acid number AN) indicates how
many aging products are contained in the hydraulic fluid.
Due to the higher water solubility in comparison to mineral oil This difference must be kept as small as possible. The lubricant
HLP/HVLP it is urgently advised that precautions be taken manufacturer should be contacted as soon as the trend
when using water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids, such as a analysis notes a significant increase in values.
dehumidifier on the reservoir ventilation.

50
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

5 Disposal and environmental

A higher viscosity than that of new materials indicates that the
protection
hydraulic fluid has aged. Evaluation by the test lab or lubricant
All water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids, are, like mineral oil-
manufacturers is however authoritative, whose recommenda-
based hydraulic fluids, subject to special disposal obligations.
tion should be urgently observed.
The respective lubricant manufacturers provide specifications
On systems where the possibility of water contamination
on environmentally acceptable handling and storage. Please
cannot be completely ruled out (also condensation), it should
ensure that spilt or splashed fluids are absorbed with appropri-
be ensured via the hydraulic system circuit that fluid aging
ate adsorbents or by a technique that prevents it contaminating
products are not accumulating in individual areas of the
hydraulic system, but are being removed from the system in
water courses, the ground or sewerage systems. 1
a controlled manner via the filtration system. This should be It is also not permitted to mix fluids when disposing of hydraulic
ensured via suitable hydraulic circuits (e.g. flushing circuit) or fluids. Regulations governing the handing of used oils stipulate
system manufacturer's operating instructions/specifications. that used oils are not to mixed with other products, e.g.
substances containing halogen. Non-compliance will increase
In case of warranty, liability or guarantee claims to Bosch
disposal costs. Comply with the national legal provisions
Rexroth, service verification and/or the results of fluid analyses
concerning the disposal of the corresponding hydraulic
are to be provided.
fluid. Comply with the local safety data sheet of the lubricant
manufacturer for the country concerned.

51
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

6 Glossary
Additivation Karl Fischer method
Additives are chemical substances added to the basic fluids to Method to determine the water content in fluids. Indirect
achieve or improve specific properties. coulometric determination procedure in accordance with DIN
Aging EN ISO 12937 in connection with DIN 51777-2. Only the
Hydraulic fluids age due to oxidation (see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging combination of both standards will assure adequately accurate
resistance"). Liquid and solid contamination acts as a catalyzer measured values. For hydraulic fluids based on glycol, DIN EN
for aging, meaning that it needs to be minimized as far as ISO 12937 is to be applied in conjunction with DIN 51777-1.
possible by careful filtration. Please refer to Hydrolysis. Cavitation
Arrhenius equation Cavitation is the creation of cavities in fluids due to pressure
The quantitative relation between reaction rate and temperature reduction below the saturated vapour pressure and subse-
is described by an exponential function, the Arrhenius equation. quent implosion when the pressure increases. When the
This function is usually visualized within the typical temperature cavities implode, extremely high acceleration, temperatures
range of the hydraulic system. For a practical example, see and pressure may occur temporarily, which may damage the
chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance. component surfaces.

Basic fluids Neutralization number (NN)

In general, a hydraulic fluid is made up of a basic fluid, The neutralization number (NN) or acid number (AN) specifies
or base oil, and chemical substances, the so-called additives. the amount of caustic potash required to neutralize the acid
The proportion of basic fluid is generally greater than 90%. contained in one gram of fluid.

Diesel effect Pour point

The lowest temperature at which the fluid still just flows when
If hydraulic fluid that contains air bubbles is compressed cooled down under set conditions. The pour point is specified
quickly, the bubbles are heated to such a degree that a self- in the lubricant manufacturers' technical data sheets as a
ignition of the air-gas mix may occur. The resultant temperature reference value for achieving this flow limit.
increase may lead to seal damage and increased aging of the
hydraulic fluid. RFA (wavelength dispersive x-ray fluorescence analysis)
Is a procedure to determine nearly all elements in liquid and
Partially saturated esters solid samples with nearly any composition. This analysis
In contrast to saturated esters, partially saturated esters have method is suitable for examining additives and contamination,
double/multiple bonds between C atoms. Rexroth defines delivering fast results.
partially saturated esters as unsaturated bonds and mixtures
of esters with unsaturated and saturated bonds. Esters with Shearing/shear loss
unsaturated bonds are produced on the basis of renewable Shearing of molecule chains during operation can change
raw materials. the viscosity of hydraulic fluids with long chain VI enhancers
and anti-fogging additives. The initially high viscosity index
Depending on their number and position, these unsaturated drops. This needs to be taken into account when selecting the
bonds between the C atoms are instable. These bonds can hydraulic fluid.
detach themselves and form new bonds, thus changing the
properties of those liquids (an aging mechanism). Attention The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
is however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3. changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance
with DIN 51350 part -6. Please note that there are practical
Hydrolysis applications that create a much higher shear load on such
Hydrolysis is the splitting of a chemical bond through the hydraulic fluids than can be achieved by this test.
reaction with water under the influence of temperature.
Viscosity
ICP (atomic emission spectroscopy) Viscosity is the measure of the internal friction of a fluid to
The ICP procedure can be used to determine various wear flow. It is defined as the property of a substance to flow under
metals, contamination types and additives. Practically all tension. Viscosity is the most important characteristic for
elements in the periodic system can be detected with this describing the load-bearing capacity of a hydraulic fluid.
method.
Kinematic viscosity is the ratio of the dynamic viscosity and the
Iodine count density of the fluid; the unit is mm/s. Hydraulic fluids are clas-
The iodine count is a yardstick for the quantity of single and sified by their kinematic viscosity into ISO viscosity classes.
multiple unsaturated bonds between C atoms in the basic fluid. The reference temperature for this is 40 C.
A low iodine count indicates that the hydraulic fluid contains
few unsaturated bonds and is thus considerably more resistant Viscosity index (VI)
to aging than a hydraulic fluid with a high iodine count. A Refers to the viscosity temperature behavior of a fluid. The
statement about the position at which these multiple bonds are lower the change of viscosity in relation the temperature, the
located and about how "stable" they are against influencing higher the VI.
factors cannot be derived simply by stating the iodine count.

52
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

53
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Zum Eisengieer 1 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.de It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
wear and aging.
Subject to change.

54
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Control Blocks

Benennung
Designation TypType Size Nenngre Datenblatt
Data sheet Seite
Page

Open-center control block SM 12 RE 64122 57

Open-center control block MO 16, 22, 32 RE 64354 93

Open-center control block M8 1632 RE 64294 113

Open-center control block M9 25 RE 64303 129

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) SX 10 RE 64132 137 2

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) SX 12 RE 64128 153

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) SX 14 RE 64125 171

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M6 15 RE 64321 193

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M6 22 RE 64322 205

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M7 22 RE 64295 217

Flow sharing control block (LUDV) M7 25 RE 64297 233

Load-sensing control block SP 08 RE 64139 251

Load-sensing control block M4 12 RE 64276 285

Load-sensing control block M4 15 RE 64283 349

Load-sensing control block M4 22 RE 64279 401

Load-sensing control block SB 12 RE 64386 419

Load-sensing control block SB 23 RE 66130 459

Control block with On-Board-Electronic OBE SB 23-EHS1 RE 66134 483

Control block with On-Board-Electronic OBE SB 33-EHS1 RE 66132 519

For the latest information on control blocks, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/control-blocks
55
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

56
RE 64 122/05.03
Replaces : 10.01

Mobile control block, 6-way version

sandwich plate design

Type SM12, series 1X

Nominal size 12
Maximum pressure, pump side 250 / 350* bar
Maximum pressure, actuator side 300 / 400* bar
Flow at each directional valve element 70 l/mn 2
Type 8SM12
* high pressure version

Contents Features

Functional description 2 6-way system

Technical data 3 Design
Characteristic curves 4 Compact sandwich plate design, can be combined so that the
Circuit examples, complete block 5 control block can meet the requirements of differing machines:
Ordering details: control block, basic version 6, 7 Inlet element
Ordering details: control block with intermediate inlet element 8 Up to 10 directional valve elements
Ordering details: control block with central tank connection 9 Outlet element
Ordering details: control block with electro-hydraulic operation 10 Operation type:
Ordering details: separate elements 11 Hydraulic
Inlet element 12 Mechanical
Directional valve element 13, 14, 18, 19, 20 Electro-hydraulic
Types of circuit 15, 16, 17 Design features
Pilot oil supply internal and external 20 Circuit types: parallel, tandem or series circuits
Outlet element 21 Low internal leakage
Unit dimensions 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 Compact control block with low pressure losses
Combination possibilities 27 Fine control
Control block for the auxiliary functions on agricultural Flow
tractors Good fine control due to the extensive use of fine control
Ordering details 28, 29 grooves
Inlet and outlet elements 30 Pressure
Directional valve elements 31, 32 System protection via primary and secondary pressure relief
valves
Intermediate elements 33
Main areas of use / examples
Unit dimensions 34
Mini excavators, excavators, auxiliary functions on agricultlural
tractors, loaders, drilling machines, lifting machines, material
handling
2003
by Bosch Rexroth AG, Mobile Hydraulics, D-89275 Elchingen
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored, processed, duplicated or circulated using electronic
systems, in any form or by any means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG, Mobile Hydraulics. In the event
of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is obliged to pay compensation.

SM12 1/36 RE 64 122/05.03

57
Functional description, section
1 Housing
2 Spool
3 Check valve
1 3 5
4 Operating element
5 Secondary valve
6 Plug
6

4 2 4

The SM 12 control block basically comprises of an inlet element, With all of the spool axes in their neutral position the flow passes
directional valve elements and an outlet element. via the bypass channel at zero pressure to tank. If one of the
The control blocks are designed to the 6-way principle and control spools is actuated then the connection from the pump to
comprises of a housing (1), control spool (2), load holding check the actuator is opened via the fine control grooves, whilst the
valve (3), spool actuation and return system (4), cavities (5) for the bypass is throttled by fine control grooves. If the pump pressure
secondary pressure valves or relief/anti-cavitation valves, as well as exceeds the actuator pressure, the pressure fluid starts to flow over
anti-caviation valves or plugs (6). the check valve to the actuator. With further movement of the
control spool (2) the volume of fluid is increasingly diverted from
the bypass channel to the actuator (fine control).
The spool stroke is divided into three phases: overlap (leak-free in
the neutral position), fine control range (flow and pressure),
residual stroke (fully open). Due to the large fine control range of
the spool stroke it is possible to sensitively control the actuators.

Symbol for a parallel directional valve element

6
Parallel channel Bypass T
Connections
P Pump
A, B Actuators
T Tank

5
B
A

4 3 2

RE 64 122/05.03 2/36 SM12

58
Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
General
Design flangeable
Description 6-way system / pressure control
Type SM 12
Installation optional
Connections threads
Nominal size 12
Hydraulic
Leakage oil flow (at 100 bar, 36 mm2/s) cm3/mn 15
Nominal pressure Medium pressure version High pressure version
bar 250 350
Max. operating pressure per connection Medium pressure version High pressure version
P, M, P3, N bar 250 350
A, B bar 300 400
T, T1, R bar 20
Max. control pressure per connection 2
a, b max. bar 35
pst max. bar 35
pst min. bar 25
a, b (operation H200) we recommend the use of control curve
5.8 to 19.5 bar, and inlet pressure (4TH6 curve no. 06)
6 to 22 bar, and inlet pressure (4TH6 curve no. 106), when
the fine control of the spool from A/B to T is increased
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1)
HEES fluids to VDMA 24 568 as well as fluid to catalogue
sheetsuitable for NBR seals RE 90 221 : please consult us.
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 to +80 (for higher temperature range, please consult us)
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Permissible degree of contamination Class 9 to NAS 1638. We therefore recommend a filter with a
minimum retention rate of 10 75
Mechanical
Weight
Inlet element, separate, with connections P and T1 kg 1.8
Directional valve element kg 2.1
Outlet element, mono block version kg 2.6
Outlet element, separate kg 0.9
Spool return force (without detent) N 90 to 125 (with standard spring)
Max. permissible actuation force on the spool
Axial N 1000
Radial N 16
Use guidelines
Pipe connections
P, P3, N, A, B T, T1, R M a, b
Tightening torque for the pipe connections Nm 50 100 20 20
Recommended fixing in 3 locations
Flatness of the mounting surface mm 0,5
Maximum pressure in the tank line when using
electro-hydraulic operation bar 5
Do not direct the water jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit

SM12 3/36 RE 64 122/05.03

59
Characteristic curves (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50C)
Pressure differential in the neutral position, P to T:
for all spool variations
16
10
14

Number of directional valve spools

8
12
Pressure differential in bar

10
6
8

4
6

4
2
2 1

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow in L/min

Pressure differential for a double acting spool (001-011)

with P switched to A / B to T
with P switched to B / A to T
10 P to A
P to B
Pressure differential in bar

6
B to T
4
A to T

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow in L/min
(measured at a control block with 1 directional valve spool)

Pressure differential for a single acting spool (014)

with P switched to B
with lowering position P switched to T / B to T
10
P to B
Pressure differential in bar

6
P to T
4
B to T

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow in L/min
(measured at a control block with 1 directional valve spool)

RE 64 122/05.03 4/36 SM12

60
Circuit example: complete control block
For a sectional view of the relevant control block: see page 15

P3 (pressure for downstream actuators)

Outlet element
type C

Tandem directional
B valve element
A

Series
circuit

Series directional
B valve element 2
A

Parallel directional
B valve element
A

Parallel
circuit

Tandem
B directional valve
A element
a
Tandem
b
circuit

Parallel
B
A directional valve
element

Inlet element
P type E
T1

SM12 5/36 RE 64 122/05.03

61
Ordering details: SM 12 control block basic version
inlet element Directional valve element outlet element
1 to 10 elements

SM 12 1X / ...

1st directional valve element 1)

P
No. of directional Seals
valve spools 1 to 10 2nd directional valve element
M= NBR seals
High pressure version = H4)
! Attention!
Medium pressure version = L The compatibility of the seals
Series 10 to 19 = 1X 10th directional valve element and pressure fluid has to be
taken into account
(10 to 19: unchanged installation
and connection dimensions) Further details
in clear text
M *

Inlet element 5) Connection threads

Inlet element, separate, with connections P and T1 01 = Pipe thread to
(only for medium pressure version) standard ISO 228/1
with primary pressure relief valve P, A, B, P3 = G 1/2
= EV + pressure in bar T, T1 = G 3/4
without primary pressure relief valve (with M = G 1/4
plugged cavity) = E 000 a, b = G 1/4
Inlet element, separate, with connection P, without 19 = UNF connection
connection T1 (medium and high pressure) threads to standard ISO 11926
with primary pressure relief valve P, A, B, P3 = 3/4 UNF-2B
= AV + pressure in bar
T, T1 = 1-1/16 UNF-2B
without primary pressure relief valve (with
M = 9/16 UNF-2B
plugged cavity) = A 000
a, b = 16 UNF-2B

Outlet element
Directional valve element R= Outlet element with tank
Parallel directional valve element =P connection T
Tandem directional valve element =T C= Outlet element with
Series directional valve element 2) =S pressure connection P3 for
downstream actuators (connection
Mono block directional valve element
T1 is in the inlet element) 4)
Secondary valve on connection side B

used as an outlet element 3)

Secondary valve on connection side A

=M
K= Outlet element with tank
connection T at the top and
pressure connection P3 for
1) The 1st directional valve element is always the downstream actuators 3)
Directional valve spool

Operation orientation

parallel version
2) The series directional valve element is alsways used
Operation type

with spool variant 010 (see page 7)

3) The mono block directional valve element used as
an outlet element type M cannot be combined with
the outlet element type K
4) The outlet element type C cannot be used in the
high pressure version H Ordering example:
5)
Ordering details: 2 SM12 L 1X / E 220 P001A2Z1AQQ
The pressure gauge connection M is plugged with
see page 7 P004E2Z1AH250H250KM01
a metal plug

RE 64 122/05.03 6/36 SM12

62
Ordering details: supplementary details for the directional valve element
Control block, basic version (page 6), control block with intermediate inlet element (page 8),
control block with a central tank connection (page 9)

P Secondary valves
T A..0* = Pressure relief valve, direct actuated

connection "A"

connection "B"
B..0* = Pressure relief valve, pilot operated
S
H..0* = Relief/anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated
M * = Pressure value in bar
E = Anti-caviation check valve
Q = Plug
Operation orientation :
= Without mechanical or manual operator
A = Manual operator on connection side A lever up
or mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A 6)
B = Manual operator on connection side B lever up B A
B A
or mechanical operator with tongue on connection side B
C = Manual operator on connection side A lever down F E
D = Manual operator on connection side B lever down
E = Manual operator on connection side A lever to the front
D C
F= Manual operator on connection side B lever to the front 2
Type of operation :
A2 . . = Spool return via a spring
B2 . . = Spool return via a spring with detent in spool position 2
C2 . . = Spool return via a spring with detent in spool position 1
D2 . . = Spool return via a spring with detent in spool positions 1, 2
E2 . . = spool return via a spring with detent in spool position 3 (4th position)
. . M1 = Manual operator (not possible with secondary valves with lever in position A or B)
. . R5 = Manual operator, encapsulated lever (with rubber boot)
. . Z1 = Spool end with tongue ( 6)
H200 = Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
H400 = Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring for the 4th position spool version 004

Operation type Operation type

R5 M1 M1 R5
1 3 1 3 3 2 3 2
0 0 0 0
2 2 A B 1 1
A B

2 0 1 3 3 2 0 1
Spool variants P T P T

with without operation on connection operation on connection

check valve check valve side A side B
AB AB

= 001 = 005 2 0 1 2 0 1

P T P T

= 011 = 009
2 0 1 2 0 1

= 014 = 015 2 0 1 2 0 1

= 004 7) _ 2 0 1 3 3 2 0 1

= 010 8) _ 2 0 1 2 0 1

6) A = preferred operator location as an outlet element

7) Not possible with a mono block directional valve element used 8) Only for use with the series directional valve elements

SM12 7/36 RE 64 122/05.03

63
Ordering details: SM 12 control block with intermediate inlet element

SM 12 L 1X /

E ... Inlet element 2)

No. of directional Inlet element with connections P and T1
valve spools 1 to 10
with primary pressure relief valve
Medium pressure = EV + pressure in bar
version =L
without primary pressure relief valve (with
plugged cavity) = E 000
Series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation 1st directional valve element 1)
and connection dimensions) P
2nd directional valve element Directional valve elements
1 to n elements (n = 5 max.)

Ordering details: see pages 6 and 7

5th directional valve element

Intermediate inlet element 2)

ZA . . .
Intermediate inlet element for 2nd circuit
with primary pressure relief valve
= ZAV + pressure in bar
without primary pressure relief valve (with
Seals plugged cavity) = ZA 000
(n + 1) directional valve element
M = NBR seals
Attention! ! Directional valve elements
(n + 2) directional valve element
The compatibility of the seals and (n + 1) to (n + 5) elements
pressure fluid has to be taken into
account
Ordering details: see pages 6 and 7
Connection threads
(n + 5) directional valve element
01 = Pipe thread to
standard ISO 228/1
P, A, B, P3 = G 1/2
T, T1 = G 3/4
M = G 1/4 Outlet element
a, b = G 1/4 Outlet element with tank connection T =R
19 = UNF connection threads to Outlet element with pressure connection P3 for
standard ISO 11926 downstream operators (connection T1 in the
inlet element) =C
P, A, B, P3 = 3/4 UNF-2B
Outlet element with tank connection T on top and
T, T1 = 1-1/16 UNF-2B
pressure connection P3 for downstream operators
M = 9/16 UNF-2B (cannot be combined with the mono block directional
M *
a, b = 9/16 UNF-2B valve element type M) =K

Further details in clear text

Ordering example :
4 SM12 L 1X / EV 220 P 001 H200 QQ
P 001 H200 QQ
ZAV 200 1)
P 001 H200 QQ The 1st directional valve element is always the parallel version
2) The pressure gauge connection M is plugged with a metal plug
P 001 H200 QQ RM 01

RE 64 122/05.03 8/36 SM12

64
Ordering details: SM 12 control block with central tank connection

SM 12 L 1X /

E ... Inlet element 2)

No. of directional Inlet element with connections P and T1
valve spools 1 to 10
with primary pressure relief valve
Medium pressure = EV + pressure in bar
version =L
without primary pressure relief valve (with
plugged cavity) = E 000
Series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation
1st directional valve element 1)
and connection dimensions)
P
2nd directional valve element Directional valve elements
1 to n elements (n = 5 max.)

Ordering details: see pages 6 and 7

5th directional valve element
2

Mutual outlet element

ZR with a central tank connection

(n + 1) directional valve element

Seals
(n + 2) directional valve element
M = NBR seals Directional valve elements
Attention! ! (n + 1) to (n + 5) elements
The compatibility of the seals and
pressure fluid has to be taken into Ordering details: see pages 6 and 7
(n + 5) directional valve element
account
Connection threads
01 = Pipe thread to
standard ISO 228/1
P, A, B, P3 = G 1/2 A ... Inlet element 2)
T, T1 = G 3/4 Inlet element, separate, with connection P1
M = G 1/4 without connection T
a, b = G 1/4 with through tie rods
19 = UNF connection threads to with primary pressure relief valve
standard ISO 11926 = AV + pressure in bar
P, A, B, P1 = 3/4 UNF-2B without primary pressure relief valve (with plugged cavity)
M * = A 000
T, T1 = 1-1/16 UNF-2B
M = 9/16 UNF-2B
a, b = 9/16 UNF-2B Further details in clear text

Ordering example :
4 SM12 L 1X / EV 200 P 001 H200 QQ
P 001 H200 QQ
ZR
1) The 1st directional valve element is always the parallel version
P 001 H200 QQ
P 001 H200 A000 M 01 2) The pressure gauge connection M is plugged with a metal plug

SM12 9/36 RE 64 122/05.03

65
Ordering details: control block with electro-hydraulic operation

inlet element Directional valve elements outlet element

1 to 10 elements
Outlet element
SM 12 1X / A ...
KW = Outlet element with tank
connection T and adjustable throttle
1st directional valve element 1) in the bypass channel to create the
P W200 pressure drop. A p = 8 bar is
No. of directional required for the start of movement2)
valve spools 1 to 10 2nd directional valve element
S= Outlet element with tank
High pressure version =H W200
connection T on top 3)
Medium pressure version = L K= Outlet element with tank
Series 10 to 19 = 1X 10th directional valve element connection T on top and pressure
(10 to 19: unchanged installation connection P3 for downstream
W200 operators 3)
and connection dimensions)
Further details in
clear text
M *
Pilot oil supply, internal =Y
Pilot oil supply, external =X Connection threads
01 = Pipe thread to
Inlet element standard ISO 228/1
Inlet element, separate, only with connection P P, A, B, P3 = G 1/2
with primary pressure relief valve T, T1 = G 3/4
= AV + pressure in bar
M = G 1/4
without primary pressure relief valve (with
connection port "A"

connection port "B"

a, b = G 1/4
plugged cavity) = A 000
19 = UNF connection
Directional valve element threads to standard ISO
Parallel directional valve element =P 11926
Tandem directional valve element =T P, A, B, P3 = 3/4 UNF-2B
T, T1 = 1-1/16 UNF-2B
Spool type (see symbole page 7) M = 9/16 UNF-2B
With check valve = 001 a, b = 9/16 UNF-2B
= 011
Pv, Pst = 9/16 UNF-2B
Without check valve = 005
= 009 Seals
M= NBR seals
Electro-hydraulic operation ! Attention!
Spool return via a spring = W200 The compatibility of the seals and
Valve for electro-hydraulic operation (supplementary details on page 18) pressure fluid has to be taken into
Proportional valves account
FT DRE 2K 3X/18 A G12 C4V (12 Volt) to RE 58 032 = 23 Secondary valves
FT DRE 2K 3X/18 A G24 C4V (24 Volt) to RE 58 032 = 21 A..0*= Pressure relief valve, direct actuated
Switching valves B..0*= Pressure relief valve, pilot operated
FT WE 2KC 20/315 A G12 C4V (12 Volt) to RE 58 007 = 43 H..0*= Relief/anti-cavitation check
valve, pilot operated
FT WE 2KC 20/315 A G24 C4V (24 Volt) to RE 58 007 = 41 *= Pressure value in bar
E= Anti-caviation check valve
Q= Plug

Ordering example :
2 SM12 L 1X / Y A000 W20021QQ
1) The 1st directional valve element is always the parallel version W20021QQ KW M 01
2) Always in conjunction with internal pilot oil supply version Y 2 SM12 L 1X / XAV250 W20041QQ
3) Always in conjunction with external pilot oil supply version X W20041QQ S M 01

RE 64 122/05.03 10/36 SM12

66
Ordering details: separate element

Medium pressure version

Delivery possibilitites for separate elements
Series 10 to 19 (see combination possibilities on the pages containing
the ordering details for the relevant complete block).
SM 12 1X /

[Ordering examples]

Outlet element with flange for external pilot oil supply

X (page 10)
[SM 12 L 1X / X S M 01]
A ... Internal pilot oil supply (page 10)
Y [SM 12 L 1X / YA M 01]

Inlet element 1) 2) (page 6)

[SM 12 L 1X / AV xxx M 01]

Single directional valve element (pages 6, 7, 28, 29) 2

M M [SM 12 L 1X / P001 H 200 MM M 01]

Directional valve element with leak-free valve (pages

D M Z 28, 29)
[SM 12 L 1X / D001 A2 Z1 A MZ M 06]
Mono block directional valve element used as an
M M M outlet element (page 6) (only medium pressure range)
[SM 12 L 1X / M001 A2 Z1 A MM RM 01]
Directional valve element with electro-hydraulic
M M operator (page 10)
[SM 12 L 1X / P001 W200 23 MM M 01]

Single outlet element (pages 6, 10)

[SM 12 L 1X / R M 01]
connectoin port "A"

connection port "B"

M *

Further details in clear text

Connection threads
Seals
Valve for electro-hydraulic operation
Directional valve element version
Pilot oil supply, internal/external

Outlet element version

Operation orientation
Inlet element version

M = secondary
Operation type
Spool version

1)
valve cavity

The separate inlet element with primary pressure relief valve is

suppled with a built-on, but not pres-set pilot operated relief/
anti-cavitation valve.
2) The pressure gauge connection M is plugged with a metal plug

SM12 11/36 RE 64 122/05.03

67
Inlet element
Inlet element, separate, with connections P and T1 (only for medium pressure range)
With primary pressure relief valve Without primary pressure relief valve

Ordering details Ordering details

EV + pressure in bar E 000
P Bypass channel T P Bypass channel T

P P

M T1 M T1

Inlet element, separate, with connection P, without connection T1 (medium and high pressure)
With primary pressure relief valve Without primary pressure relief valve

Ordering details Ordering details

AV + pressure in bar A 000
P Bypass channel T P Bypass channel T

P P

M M

Intermediate inlet element for a 2nd circuit (only for medium pressure range)
With primary pressure relief valve Without primary pressure relief valve
Ordering details Ordering details
ZAV + pressure in bar ZA 000

inlet element

P Bypass channel T P Bypass channel T

M M

P2 P2

P Bypass channel T P Bypass channel T

Parallel directional
valve element 1)

1) If this element is to be suppled as a separate element, then it must be stated in clear text that this element is positioned directly before
the intermediate inlet element.
The primary pressure relief valve shown above is a pilot operated relief/anti-cavitation valve. The setting of the stated pressure value is
carried out with a flow of 10 L/ mn. The pressure settings of the primary pressure relief valves must not exceed the permissible pressure
of the block itself.
In the delivered condition the pressure gauge connection M of the inlet element is plugged with a metal plug.

RE 64 122/05.03 12/36 SM12

68
Directional valve element

Parallel directional valve element with check valve

Bypass channel
P T
Ordering details
P 001 - - QQ B
A

Parallel directional valve element without check valve

P Bypass channel T
Ordering details
P 005 - - QQ B
A

Tandem directional valve element with check valve

Ordering details P Bypass channel T

T 001 - - QQ
B
A

Tandem directional valve element without check valve

Bypass channel
Ordering details P T

T 005 - - QQ
B
A

Series directional valve element

Bypass channel
Ordering details T

S 010 - - QQ
B
A

SM12 13/36 RE 64 122/05.03

69
Directional valve element
Parallel directional valve element

Ordering details
P

Tandem directional valve element

Ordering details
T

Series directional valve element

Ordering details
S 010

RE 64 122/05.03 14/36 SM12

70
Types of circuit
For circuit examples: see page 5
Parallel directional valve element
Tandem directional valve element Series directional valve element
Parallel directional valve element Tandem directional valve element

Tandem circuit Series circuit

Parallel circuit

Mixed circuit

SM12 15/36 RE 64 122/05.03

71
Types of circuit
Parallel circuit
T

II
A B
B

A A B
Parallel
2 0 1 II directional
I valve element
P T
A B
B

A A B
Parallel
2 0 1 I directional
P T valve element
A number of actuators can be operated
simultaneously

Example:
When directional valve elements I and II are moved to position 2
P
(or 1), both actuators I and II are operated.
The division of flow to the individual actuators is dependent upon
the working pressure of the actuator concerned. T1

Tandem circuit

T
II
A B
B

A A B
Tandem
2 0 1 II directional
I
P T valve element
A B
B

A A B
Parallel
2 1 0 I directional
P T
valve element
Only one actuator may be operated

Example:
When directional valve ements I and II are moved to position 2 (or
1), only only actuator I is operated. P

Actuator II can only be operated, when spool I is returned to

neutral. T1
(Exception: with a single acting spool, the lowering action of the M
cylinder is always possible).

RE 64 122/05.03 16/36 SM12

72
Types of circuit
Mixed circuit

IV
Example 1:
When directional valve elements I and II are simultaneously
B operated, the oil supply to the other elements is interrupted.
A

III
P3

B
A B

A B Parallel directional
II A
2 0 1 IV valve element
2
B P T
A
B
I
A A B Tandem
2 0 1 III directional
B valve element
A P T

A A B
Parallel directional
2 0 1 II valve element

P T

IV B

A A B
Parallel directional
B 2 0 1 I
A valve element
P T
III

B
A
P
II
T1
B
M
A

I
Example 2:
B
A
In order to operate actuator III and/or IV, directional valve spools
I and II must be returned to neutral.

SM12 17/36 RE 64 122/05.03

73
Directional valve element
Operation type
Electro-hydraulic operation
W200
The control block is controlled proportionally via a pressure reducing valve type FTDRE 2 K or switchable via a 3/2-way directional
valve type FTWE 2 K
These valve are directly mounted onto the SM 12 control block and are provided with pilot oil from a separate supply system or from the
built-in pilot oil supply unit (see page 20).
When using the type FTDRE 2 K as the control (see RE 58 032) the spool stroke is proportional to the electrical control signal provided
to the proportional solenoids (load independent solenoid current). The valve control is achieved either directly from a THE6 remote control
unit (see RE 29 771) or via a signal transmitter with an amplifier stage (see RE 64 383).

Ordering details
W200 43 / W200 41 (with proportional valves type FT WE2)
B
A

a b

Ordering details
W200 23 / W200 21 (with proportional valves type FT DRE 2)

B
A

a b

Orifice for switching time

limitation (standard 0.8 mm) in
conjunction with the FTWE 2 K

RE 64 122/05.03 18/36 SM12

74
Directional valve element

Operation type
Mechanical operation

Ordering details Ordering details

A2Z1A B2M1A

B
B
A
A

P T

Ordering details Ordering details

C2M1A D2R5B 2

B B
A A

P T

Ordering details Ordering details

(P004) E2Z1A (P004) E2Z1B 1)

B B
A A

P T

Hydraulic operation

Ordering details Ordering details

H200 H400 1)

B B
A A

a b a b

1) Not possible with the mono block directional valve element used
as an outlet element

SM12 19/36 RE 64 122/05.03

75
Directional valve element
Secondary valves

Ordering details
For valve H the setting of the stated
H... H...
pressure values has been carried out at a
B flow of 10 L/mn
A

Ordering details
A... Q For valve A the setting of the stated
pressure values has been carried out at a
flow of 2 to 3 L/mn
B
A

Ordering details
EB... For valve B the setting of the stated
pressure values has been carried out at a
flow of 10 L/mn
B
A

Note : The pressure setting of these valves must not exceed the maximum permissible pressure of the control block.

Pilot oil supply, internal and external (for electro-hydraulic actuation)

Pilot oil supply, internal Pilot oil supply, external
Ordering details Ordering details
Y X
T

T Pst

B
A

a b
B
A

a b

Pv

RE 64 122/05.03 20/36 SM12

76
Outlet element
Outlet element, separate, with tank connection T (medium and high pressure version)
Ordering details T
R
S 1)

Outlet element, separate, with pressure connection P3 for downstream actuators (connection T1 is to be provided in
the inlet element) (only for the medium pressure range)
Ordering details P3

Outlet element with tank connection T and pressure connection P3 for downstream actuators (medium and high
pressure range) P3
Ordering details
K T
2

Outlet element with tank connection T and adjustable throttle 1)

Ordering details
T
KW

(For systems where there is an inadequate p in the bypass channel - e.g. when starting a movement with electro-hydraulic operation, for
which the p must be 8 bar)

Mono block directional valve element used as an outlet element, with tank connection T (only in the medium pressure
range) T
Ordering details
B
M 001 - - QQR - - A

Mono block directional valve element used as an outlet element, with pressure connection P3 for downstream
actuators (connection T1 is to be provided in the inlet element) only in the medium prerssure range)
Ordering details P3

M 001 - - QQC - - B
A

Central outlet element with tank connection (only in the medium pressure range)
Ordering details
ZR
T

1) Only with the electro-hydraulic variants (see pages 10 and 20)

SM12 21/36 RE 64 122/05.03

77
Unit dimensions (in mm)
Control block, medium pressure range (ordering detail L)
with separate inlet element E and outlet element versions R, C or K
179 73
With mono block
38 38 38 49 71,5
directional valve element 40
as an outlet element, = = = = = = = = 36,5
versions R or C 4 12,5

33
1
B B B
90

M M
B1 B2 B3

=
52,5

52,5

46,5
21,4 21,4

P P3 ou T

133
52,5

52,5
T1
A1 A2 A3

=
A A A

25
2
6 f8
1 136 89

190 73
With separate 38 38 38 38 11 71,5
outlet element, 40
3 = = = = = = = = 36,5
versions R or C
4 12,5

33
1
B B B
90

M M
B1 B2 B3

=
52,5

46,5
21,4 21,4

P 29

133
P3 ou T P3
52,5

T1
A1 A2 A3

=
A A A
2

25
1 6 f8
136 89

207 73
38 38 38 38 46 71,5
With separate
7 21
40
outlet element, = = = = = = = = 36,5
version K 11
1
12,5
33

B B B
90

M M
B1 B2 B3
=
52,5

46,5
21,4 21,4

P 36,3
133

T P3 P3
52,5

T1
A1 A2 A3
=

A A A
2
25

1 6 f8
136 89

Connections
1 Control Block fixing holes 11H13 Outlet element T T1 P3
2 4 tie rods (nut tightening torque = 18 10% Nm) R connected with tank plugged
3 Primary pressure relief valve
(tightening torque = 70 10% Nm) C connected with tank for downstream actuators
4 Plug Q (tightening torque = 70 10% Nm) K connected with tank plugged for downstream actuators

RE 64 122/05.03 22/36 SM12

78
Unit dimensions (in mm)
Control block, medium pressure range (ordering detail L)
with separate inlet element version A and a mono blick directional valve element used as an outlet element version R
179 89
38 38 38 49 71,5 5
= = = = = = = = 40
11 36,5
12,5
1

50
1

33
B B B
M

=
B1 B2 B3 M

52,5
52,5
39,5

21,4 P
33

133
T
33

52,5
52,5

A1 A2 A3

=
90

A A A

25

30
3 2 6 f8
136
2
Control block, medium pressure version (ordering detail L) or high pressure version (ordering detail H)
with a separate inlet element version A and a separate outlet element versions R or K
190 89
With outlet element, 38 38 38 38 71,5
= = = = = = = = 40
version R
11 11 36,5
12,5
1 1

50
33
B B B
M

=
B1 B2 B3 M
52,5
39,5

P
21,4
33

133
T
33
52,5

A1 A2 A3

=
90

A A A 2 25

30
6 f8
136

With outlet element, 207 89

38 38 38 38 46 71,5
versionK = = = = = = = = 21 40
11 11 36,5
12,5
50
33

1 1
B B B
M
=

B1 B2 B3 M
52,5

36,3
39,5

P
21,4
33

133

T P3 P3
5 Secondary valve,
33
52,5

version A-B-H A1 A2 A3
=
90

(tightening torque =
70 10% Nm) A A A
6 Anti-cavitation valve, 2
25

30

version E
6 f8
(tightening torque = 136
70 10% Nm) 6

SM12 23/36 RE 64 122/05.03

79
Unit dimensions (in mm)
SM12 control block with intermediate inlet element 89
266 8 73
5 38 38 38 38 38 38 71,5
= = = = = = = = = = = = 40
11 11 36,5

8
4

51
B B B B
86

M
B1 B2 M B3 B4
52,5

52,5

=
M

46,5
P P2
21,4 21,4
33

29

133
T
T
33

52,5
T1
52,5

A1 A2 A3 A4

=
A A A A

51
114
7
12,5
2 212

6 3
1 Inlet element, separate with connection T1 (with outlet 5 Primary pressure relief valve (tightening torque =
element versions R or K connection T1 is plugged ) 70 10% Nm)
2 Directional valve element 6 Primary pressure relief valve (tightening torque =
3 Intermediate inlet element/continuous tie rods 70 10% Nm)
4 Outlet element, separate, version R (or C) 7 4 tie rods (nut tightening torque = 18 10% Nm)
8 Pressure gauge connection M

SM12 control block with a central tank connection

2
5
8 6 51
86

4
B1 B2 A3 A4
52,5

M
=
46,5

P
21,4
21,4 21,4
33

133

T
33

39,5

T1 P2
52,5

A1 A2 B3 B4
=

7
1
51

3 8

1 Inlet element, separate, with connection T1 5 Primary pressure relief valve (tightening torque =
2 Directional valve element 70 10% Nm)
3 Outlet element with a central tank connection/continuous 6 Primary pressure relief valve (tightening torque =
tie rods 70 10% Nm)
4 Inlet element, separate, without connection T1 7 4 tie rods (nut tightening torque = 18 10% Nm)
8 Pressure gauge connection M

RE 64 122/05.03 24/36 SM12

80
Unit dimensions (in mm)

SM12 control block with electro-hydraulic operator W 200 and external pilot oil supply X

B1 B2 B3
P Pst 36,3

=
82
T Pst

=
A1 A2 A3
5

= =
30
2
1 36 160

External pilot oil supply is fitted under the outlet element T

SM12 control block with electro-hydraulic operator W 200 and internal pilot oil supply Y

136
11 38 38 38 11 89 7
19 41

Pilot oil supply

Pv
57

Pv
62

B1 B2 B3
=

P
24,5

105

133
105

T
21,4

A1 A2 A3
8
=

38 38

21

340 32

SM12 25/36 RE 64 122/05.03

81
Unit dimensions (in mm)
Hydraulic operator with spool return via a spring
Ordering details
H 200 a b

52 52

Hydraulic operator with spool return via a spring for the 4th position spool
Ordering details
H 400

position 3
position 1
position 0
position 2
A B

b
17,5

a
30

52
83 x

Spring return Manual operation

25
Ordering details Ordering details 6F8

A2 Z1
7 position 1 and 2
7
5 position 3
33 3
Ordering details 23 0
1 13
30' 2
M1 13
30'

(not possible with secondary

Ordering details valves, with the lever
pointing upwards)
B2 / C2 / D2
18
225
36,5

61

1 0
Ordering details 3
15
2
17
Ordering details R5 11

E2 10
165

220
67
225
36,5 24

80

90

RE 64 122/05.03 26/36 SM12

82
Control block, basic version : assembly possibilities

6 8-1
5 9-1
4
T 3

A 4
7 B 10-1
A 3
11-1
13 B A

B
A 2
8-2
13 B
2
9-2 12
P 1
M
10-2 T1
P
11-2 M
3

12

1 Inlet element, separate, with connection T1, version E (only 8-2 Spring return mechanism, detents in switched positions 1
for the medium pressure range) and 2, versions B2, C2, D2
2 Inlet element, separate, without connection T1, version A 9-1 Manual operator, version M1
(only for the high pressure range) 9-2 Sspring return mechanism, detent in switched position 3,
3 Directional valve element version E2
4 Mono block directional valve element used as an outlet 10-1 Control cover for hydraulic operation H 200
element, version R or C (only in the medium pressure 10-2 Control cover for hydraulic operation H 200
range)
11-1 Mechanical operator with tongue, version Z1
5 Outlet element, separate, version R or C
11-2 Spring return cover, version A2
6 Outlet element, separate, version K
12 Primary pressure relief valve
7 Check valve
13 Secondary valve
8-1 Manual operator, encapsulated lever, version R5

Pipe connections

d2 Pipe connections
d1 01 19
t2

connections d1 d2 t1 t2 d1 d2 t1 t2
P, P3, A, B G 1/2 34 14 3/4 UNF-2B 32 14
t1

T, T1 G 3/4 42 16 1-1/16 UNF-2B 42 16

M G 1/4 25 12 1,5 9/16 UNF-2B 26 13 1,5

SM12 27/36 RE 64 122/05.03

83
Ordering details: SM 12 control block for tractor auxiliary functions
intermediate element
inlet element Directional valve elements outlet element
1 to 10 elements

1st directional valve element

SM 12 L 1X /

No. of 2nd directional valve element U1 = Intermediate

directional inlet plate with tube 3)
valve spools U2 = Intermediate
1 to 10 3th directional valve element inlet plate without
tube
Medium pressure version= L
4th directional valve element S= With spacer
Series 10 to 19 = 1X No code = Without
(10 to 19: unchanged installation intermediate plate,
and connection dimensions) 5th directional valve element without spacer

Inlet element
Further details in
Inlet element with adjustable priority flow divider,

Secondary valve on connection side A

Secondary valve on connection side B

clear text
without primary pressure relief valve,
mounting points on top = C 000
Inlet element with connections P and T1 4) M 06 *
with primary pressure relief valve
Directional valve spool

Operation orientation

= EV + pressure in bar
without primary pressure relief valve (with Connection threads
Operation type

plugged cavity) = E 000

06 = Metric threads to
Inlet element with connection P, without standard ISO 6149 (not for
connection T1 4) connections A - B / depth
with primary pressure relief valve =13,5 mm)
= AV + pressure in bar P, P3, N, A, B = M 22 x 1.5
without primary pressure relief valve (with T, T1, R = M 27 x 2
plugged cavity) = A 000 Ordering details:
M= M 14 x 1.5
see page 29
Directional valve element Seals
Parallel directional valve element =P M= NBR seals
Parallel directional valve element with leak-free valve ! Attention!
on connection side B (Attention! It is not possible to fit The compatibility of the seals and
a secondary valve to connection side B) =D pressure fluid has to be taken into
account
Outlet element
R= Outlet element with tank
connection T on top 2)
1) Only in conjunction with inlet element type C C= Outlet element with pressure
2) Only in conjunction with inlet element types E or A connection P3 for downstream
3) Only possible between the 1st and 2nd directional valve elements
actuators (connection T1 is in the
inlet element 2)
4) The pressure gauge connection M is plugged with a metal plug
K= Outlet element with tank
connection T on top and pressure
Ordering example : connection P3 for downstream
4 SM12 L 1X / C000 P001 KD2 Z1 A QR actuators 2)
U1
D001 KD2 Z1 A H200Z
NR = Outlet element with pressure
S connection N for downstream
P004 KE2 Z1 A H200Q actuators and tank connection R,
S fixing points on top 1)
P001 A2 Z1 A QQNR06

RE 64 122/05.03 28/36 SM12

84
Ordering details: supplementary information for the directional valve element
Control block for auxiliary tractors (page 28)

Secondary valves
A..0*= Pressure relief valve, direct actuated
P A B..0* = Pressure relief valve, pilot actuated
D H..0*= Relief/anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated
* = Pressure value in bar
E= Anti-caviation check valve
connection "A"

connection "B"
Q= Plug
R= Switch for change-over to single acting/double acting version
Z= Without secondary valve cavity
! Attention!
Only in connection b for a directional
valve element with leak-free valve

Operation orientation : A
B A
A = Manual operator on connection side A lever up
or mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A 6) E 2
C = Manual operator on connection side A lever down
E = Manual operator on connection side A lever to the front C

Type of operation :
A2 . . = Spool return via a spring
B2 . . = Spool return via a spring with detent in spool position 2
C2 . . = Spool return via a spring with detent in spool position 1
D2 . . = Spool return via a spring with detent in spool positions 1, 2
E2 . . = spool return via a spring with detent in spool position 3 (4th position)
KD2 = Spool return via a spring, with detent in switched positions 1, 2
internal hydraulic detent release with p = 145 +15 -0 bar (Kick-out)
KE2 = Spool return via a spring, with detent in switched positions 1, 2
internal hydraulic detent release with p = 145 +15 -0 bar (Kick-out)
for 4 positions spool type 004 5)
. . R5 = Manual operator, encapsulated lever (with rubber boot)
. . Z1 = Spool end with tongue ( 6)

Spool variants 7)
with check Operation on connection side A Operation on connection side A
conventional version Operation type R5
valve Kick-out version

001 = 2 0 1
2 0 1

P T
P T Kick-out 1 3
0
2 A B
011 =
2 0 1 2 0 1
2 0 1 3

P T

004 = 2 0 1 3 2 0 1 3

5) Not in conjunction with a parallel directional valve element with leak-free valve, ordering detail D
6) A = Preferred operator orientation
7) Attention: The spool symbols shown are only for the parallel directional valve element, ordering detail P

SM12 29/36 RE 64 122/05.03

85
Inlet element
Inlet element with adjustable priority flow divider, fixing points on top
Ordering details
P (Q1) Parallel
C000 pressure channel Bypass channel

Q1 = adjustable priority flow, 2 to 50 L/min

Y1 Y1 = residual flow (Y1 can have pressure
applied that can be up to the set value of the
circuit pressure relief valve)
P

Inlet element with connection P, without connection T1

With primary pressure relief valve Without primary pressure relief valve
Ordering details Ordering details
AV + pressure in bar A 000

P Bypass channel T P Bypass channel T

P P

M M

Inlet element with connections P and T1

With primary pressure relief valve Without primary pressure relief valve
Ordering details Ordering details
EV + pressure in bar E 000

P Bypass channel T P Bypass channel T

P P

M T1 M T1

Outlet element
Outlet element with pressure connection N for downstream actuators and tank connection R,
fixing points on top N R
Ordering details
NR

Outlet element with tank connection T T

Ordering details
R

Outlet element P3
Ordering details
C

Outlet element P3

Ordering details
T
K

RE 64 122/05.03 30/36 SM12

86
Directional valve element
Parallel directional valve element Parallel directional valve element
Ordering details with leak-free valve on connection side B
P 001 - - HQ Ordering details
D 001
P Bypass channel T Bypass channel
P T
B
A
B
A

Parallel directional valve element

Ordering details
P
B A 2

Parallel directional valve element with leak-free valve on connection side B

Ordering details Change-over
to single acting/double
D B A acting version

Leak-free valve

Cover for hydrualic detent

release (Kick-out)

SM12 31/36 RE 64 122/05.03

87
Directional valve element
Operation type

Ordering details Ordering details

(P001) KD2Z1A QQ (P004) KE2R5A QQ

B B
A A

Ordering details
(D001) KD2Z1A

B
A

For further mounting possibilities to the ordering details on page 29: see details on page 19

Switch for change-over to single acting / double acting version for a double acting spool

Ordering details
(A2Z1A) QR

B
A

Configuration, switch closed Configuration, switch open

B B
A A

For the mounting possibilities of a secondary valve to the ordering details on page 29: see details on page 20

RE 64 122/05.03 32/36 SM12

88
Intermediate element
Intermediate inlet plate with tube
Ordering details
U1
Intermediate inlet plate without tube 2)
Ordering details
U2
Spacer P
Ordering details Y1
S

A
B
2

Y2
orU2
U1 ou

U1 1)

A
B

A
B

R N

1) Only possible between the 1st and 2nd directional valve elements (also see page 34)
2) Tube connection = M 18 x1.5 (to ISO 9974)

SM12 33/36 RE 64 122/05.03

89
Unit dimensions (in mm)
SM 12 control block for ausiliary tractor functions

position spool
A B

spool
positions

3 positions
4 4position
ouvert

closed
robinetopen

Switch ferm

course 3
Switch

course

Stroke,
robinet

6 6 4 Stroke,

7 7
40

34
11 76 22,5
269
42 38 30 38 30 38 46 7

+2
2 6
50 - 6 69
= = = = = =

110
52,5 8F8
13 8
1,5 1,5 1,5 1 35 10

12
25
100 +- 2

A3 A2 A1
4 2
76

=
P
33

133
N P
9 36

34,5
33

208

R
66,5

68

=
B3 B2 B1

15

54 44 +- 2 68 136 +- 1,2 90
105

5 4 3 12 7

1 Inlet element with adjustable flow divider 9 Stop for throttle screw
2 Directional valve element 10 Switch for change-over to double acting / single acting
3 Intermediate inlet plate version (for orientation: see Fig. A)
4 Spacer for mounting purposes 11 Mechanical operator with tongue (for stroke: see Fig. B)
5 Outlet element 12 Cover for the internal hydraulic detent release types KD2 or
KE2
6 Tube for intermediate inlet plate
13 6 mounting holes M8 x 1.25 / 12 mm deep
7 4 tie rods (tightening torque = 18 10% Nm)
8 Throttle screw (range: 2 to 50 L/mn)

RE 64 122/05.03 34/36 SM12

90
Notes

SM12 35/36 RE 64 122/05.03

91
Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI SAS The data specified above only serve to describe
Mobile Hydraulics BP 101 - 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie the product. No statements concerning a
Glockeraustrae 4 69634 Vnissieux cdex - France certain condition or suitability for a certain
89275 Elchingen - Germany Tl. 04 78 78 52 52 application can be derived from our informa-
Telefon 0 73 08 / 820 Fax. 04 78 78 52 26 - Tlex 380 852 tion.
Telefax 0 73 08 / 72 74 Internet www.boschrexroth.fr The details stated do not release you from the
eMail [email protected] responsibility for carrying out your own
Internet www.boschrexroth.de assessment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

RE 64 122/05.03 36/36 SM12

92
 RE 64 354/06.03 1/20
High Pressure Mobile Control blocks Replaces: 02.98

Type MO-16, 22 and 32

2
Nominal size 16, 22, 32
Series 1X
Maximum control pressure
pump side
350 bar R 7927/9

actuator side
420 bar 2 spool block size 32 with Secondary valve side of the 4 spool block (Size 22) with
Maximum flow secondary valves, hydraulic left 2 spool block showing secondary valves, hydraulic
410 L/min operation, SAE flanged ports the arrangement of the valves operation, threaded ports

Overview of contents Features

Description Page 1 to 4 spools in one high pressure mobile control block

Features 1 Parallel circuit

Section 2 In the 4 spool block, the 4th spool may be in tandem circuit if
required
Function, Symbol and Circuit Features 3
Combination and tandem circuits available on enquiry
Ordering Code 4, 5 8 spool variations
Technical Data 6 Counterbalance spool for hydrostatic transmissions
Operating Curves 6 to 9 Large fine control range for flow control with progressive
Unit Dimensions 10 to 16 flow characteristic
Spreading of the fine control range by means of remote
Notes on the Selection of the Size
pressure control systems
and Type of Secondary Valves 17
return springs or detents which are immersed in oil
Plugs and Cover Plates 17
High pressure carry-over feature when using C port, i.e.
Primary Pressure Relief Valve 18 separation of by-pass line from tank line
Secundary Valves 18, 19 Fine tolerance and low clearance control spools, therefore
low internal leakage
Identical control characteristics from block to block due to
close tolerance manufacture
Primary pressure relief valve in P supply line
Integral secondary pressure relief valves and anti-cavitation
check valves

93
2/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Section

Spool operated
P B; A T;

Model "K"
Model "R" Model "C"

Threaded
T
TC
port T C
SAE-
port P P P
XX XX XX
With version K, port C is provided, but plugged
Port T on the actuator side By-pass channel is separated with a screw plug. If port C is required, a
(only if port C is not required). from the tank port separating plug must be screwed in between the
P and the T channel.

94
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/20

Function
High pressure mobile control blocks Type MO are directional Control Characteristics, Operating Forces
control valves of monoblock design Uniform quality of the control characteristics and low operating
They give fine control of the speed and direction of an oil flow. forces are achieved by optimum design of the metering
The valves are optionally operated hydraulically, electro- notches and individual grinding of the control spool to close
hydraulically or, on enquiry, mechanically. tolerances.
They basically consist of the housing (1), control spool (2), with Counterbalance Spool
built-in check valves (3) (for spool types 001), operating This spool is used for the control of hydrostatic drives on
element (4), return element (5), built on anti-cavitation valves tracked vehicles as a fully automatic motion control device in
(6) (optional) and built-on secondary pressure relief valves (7) both directions of operation. Down-hill travel with cavitation-
(optional). free operation is achieved by controlling the meter-out opening
The 6/3-way valves combine the function of a 4/3-way valves dependent upon the inlet pressure.
and a 2/2-way valve.
Easily Serviced Design
In the unoperated condition, the control spool (2) is held in
Primary pressure relief valves (10) are designed as screw-in
starting position by the return spring or detent (12).
cartridges.
In this position the connection from pump to services is closed,
Secondary valves (anti-cavitation and/or pressure relief
the 2/2-way section is open and allows fluid to flow without
valves) are designed as stacking elements.
pressure from P to T.
Primary and secondary pressure relief valves can therefore
If control spool (2) is moved out of its starting position, the
be interchanged without dismantling the block.
connection from the pump to the services is opened via
Corrosion of the return elements is prevented, as the return
metering notches and at the same time the 2/2-way section is
throttled by means of further similar notches (negative overlap).
springs (11) and detents (12) are oil immersed. 2
In order to remove the control spool, only one cover need be
Pump pressure increases. When the pressure at the service
removed per spool. In valves with mechanical operation,
port is reached, the check valve (3) in the spool opens and
cover (8) is removed and for hydraulic operation, cover (9) is
fluid begins to flow to the serviced unit. As the control spool
removed.
(2) continues its movement, fluid is gradually fed from the 2/2-
way line to the service port (fine control). Notes on setting the primary and secondary pressure relief
valves.
Spool Stroke
The setting of the stated pressure values is made as follows:
The spool stroke is divided into approx. 30% control land
direct operated pressure relief valves at a flow of 2 to
overlap and 50% fine control range, while the remaining stroke
3 L/min.
serves to create the full opening.
pilot operated pressure relief valves at a flow of 10 L/min.
The overlap and a low spool tolerance serve to reduce internal
leakage. Due to the large fine control range, the services can
be sensitively controlled.

Symbol and Circuit Features

The symbol is for a 2-spool block with hydraulic operation. The 4th spool of a 4-spool block can be arranged in tandem
The spools are always arranged in parallel circuit. circuit if required.
In this model, the pump port to the 4th spool is blocked when
the free by-pass of the previous spools is closed when one of
these is operated.

B4 T
B2 T
A4
A2

a2 b2

B1 P
A1
In model C the tank port is separated from the by-pass channel.
a1 b1

C T
B
A

P
P P

95
4/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Ordering Code
Control block versions which can be derived from
the shaded ordering variants are available on the 1st spool
short term.
MO 1X A2

2nd spool
Number of spools 1, 2, 3 or 4 A2
Size 16 = 16
Size 22 = 22 3rd spool
Size 32 = 32
Series 10 to19 (10 to 19, externally interchangeable) = 1X A2
Without primary pressure relief valve = D 000
With primary pressure relief valve, pilot operated = D + press. in bar 4th spool
Parallel circuit =P A2
Tandem circuit (only with 4-spool block for the 4th spool axis) =B
Tandem circuit (MO16 3-spool block for all spool axes) =T
Combination circuit available on enquiry
Symbols
A B A B

2 0 1 = 001 2 0 1 = 009
P T P T
A B A B

Directional valve port B

Directional valve port A
2 0 1 = 002 2 0 1 = 006
P T P T
A B A B each )|( - opening in mm2
2 0 1 = 003 2 0 1 MO-16 MO-22 MO-32 = 026
P T P T 30 60 120
A B A B
2 0 1
= 005 2 0 1
= 007
P T P T
Spool return:
Spool return to neutral position by spring = A2
Operation mode:
Hydraulic operation, standard =H
Electro-hydraulic operation (on request!) = W..

Secondary valves: MO- MO- MO-

16 22 32

Pressure relief and anti-cavitation valve, direct operated, size 16 = H + press. [bar]
Pressure relief and anti-cavitation valve, pilot operated, size 32 = F + press. [bar]
Pressure relief valve, direct operated size 16 = A + press. [bar]
Pressure relief valve, direct operated size 22 = R + press. [bar]
Cross-line relief valve and anti-cavitation valve (size 16/22 + E; size 32 + S) = K + press. [bar] *
Anti-cavitation valve, size 16 = E
Anti-cavitation valve, size 22 = S
Pressure relief valve, direct operated, size 16 and anti-cavitation valve, size 16 = G + press. [bar]
Pressure relief valve, direct operated, size 22 and anti-cavitation valve, size 22 = T + press. [bar]
Cover plate for secondary valve mounting face, size 16 = P
Cover plate for secondary valve mounting face, size 22 = U
without secondary valves = Z

Secondary valves of various sizes cannot be used individually on MO-22 and 32, they must be used in pairs per spool. The use
of secondary valves Types T, R, S and cover plate U on adjacent spools in size MO-22 is not possible. As an aid to deciding
which secondary valves should (and can) be used, please see page 17.
*See also pages 15 and 16 (items 1 and 2).
= applicable

96
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 5/20

*
Further details in clear text
M= NBR seals, suitable for use with mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524
V= FKM seals, suitable for use with phosphate ester (HFD-R)
Designation of mounting position from horizontal. This is necessary
for hydraulic operation only, and determines the position of the air bleed.
1= 2= 3=

A2 B2 A B
B2

B1
A2 A1 B1
A1

S= Tank port T on secondary valve side

V= Tank port T on service port side
( not possible for models C
} see page
10, 11, 12 2
S= Pump port P on secondary valve side see page
V= Pump port P on service port side } 10, 11, 12

Port P A, B, C T L a, b, X
01 = 3/4" BSP 3/4" BSP 1" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP
MO-16 11 = 1/2" SAE 1/2" SAE 3/4" SAE 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP
1
)18 = 3/4" SAE 1/2" SAE 3/4" SAE 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP

01 = 1" BSP 1" BSP 1 1/4" BSP 3/8" BSP 1/4" BSP
MO-22 11 = 3/4" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 3/8" BSP 1/4" BSP
1
)18 = 1" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 3/8" BSP 1/4" BSP
1
MO-32 )11 = 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/2" SAE 1/2" BSP 1/4" BSP
R= with tank port T
C= with tank port T and pressure carry over port C for downstream
actuators (not possible for tank port on "V" side)
K= with tank port and variable pressure carry over port C for
downstream actuators (pressure port C closed by locking screw)

1
) Preferred Type with SAE flanges, 6000 PSI rating except size 32 port T 3000 PSI

97
6/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Technical Data (For operation outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Fluid: Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524, Operating pressure: Ports P, X, C up to 350 bar
hydraulic fluids HEES to VDMA 24 568 Ports A, B up to 420 bar
as well as hydraulic fluids as specified Port T up to 30 bar
in RE 90 221. Port L at zero pressure to tank
Fluid temperature range: 20 to + 80C
Pilot pressure: Ports a, b up to 30 bar
Viscosity range: 10 to 380 mm2/s
(Fine control range 8 to 19 bar);
Degree of contamination of fluid: Control curve No. 06
(maximum permissible ) is to ISO 4406 (C) Class 20/18/15. (for suitable pilot devices, see
Flow rate: RE 64 552, RE 64 555 and RE 64 558)
MO - 16 MO - 22 MO - 32
110 L/min 200 L/min 410 L/min

Weight in kg: (without secondary valves) MO - 16 MO - 22 MO - 32

Number of spools 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
hydraulically operated 13,5 20 25,5 31,5 21,5 35 43,5 55 39 64,5 87 115

Operating Curves (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

Flow/pressure drop curve

P T in mid position, free by-pass
Pressure difference in bar

12
4 spools
10 MO - 16 3 spools
8
2 spools
6
1spool
4
2

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Flow in L/min

T
Pressure difference in bar

12
4 spools
10 MO - 22 2 0 1 4 spools
3 spools
8
2 0 1 3 spools
6 2 spools
4 1spool 2 0 1 2 spools
2
2 0 1 1spool
0 50 100 150 200 230
P
Flow in L/min
Pressure difference in bar

12 4 spools
10 MO - 32
3 spools
8
6 2 spools
4 1spool
2

0 100 200 300 400

Flow in L/min

98
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 7/20

Operating Curves for Type MO - 16 (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

A B A B

2 0 1 Symbol 001 (026) 2 0 1 Symbol 005

P T P T

A B
2 0 1 Symbol 006 (009)
Flow/pressure drop curve P T
P A, P B;
A T, B T;
14

12 A1/B1 T
Pressure difference in bar

10

8 P A1/B1

6 P A4/B4 A4/B4 T
4 2
2

0 40 80 120 160 200 240

Flow in L/min

A B
2 0 1 Symbol 002

P T
Flow/pressure drop curve
A B
P A, P B; Symbol 003
2 0 1
A T, B T;
P T
A B (only Symbol 002)
22

20

18
A1/B1 T

16
Pressure difference in bar

14

12 A4/B4 T

10
AB
8

6
P A4/B4
4

2
P A1/B1

0 40 80 120 160 200 240

Flow in L/min

99
8/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Operating Curves for Type MO - 22 (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

A B A B

2 0 1 Symbol 001 (026) 2 0 1 Symbol 005

P T P T

A B
2 0 1 Symbol 006 (009)
Flow/pressure drop curve P T
P A, P B;
A T, B T;
28
26
24
Pressure difference in bar

22
A1/B1 T
20
18
16
14
P A1/B1
12
10 P A4/B4 A4/B4 T
8
6
4
2

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

Flow in L/min

A B
2 0 1 Symbol 002

P T

A B
Flow/pressure drop curve
2 0 1 Symbol 003
P A, P B;
A T, B T; P T
A B (only Symbol 002)
34
32
30
28
Pressure difference in bar

26 A1/B1 T
24 AB
22
20
18
16 A4/B4 T
14
12
10
8 P A4/B4
6
4
2 P A1/B1

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

Flow in L/min

100
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 9/20

Operating Curves for Type MO - 32 (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

A B A B

2 0 1 Symbol 001 (026) 2 0 1 Symbol 005

P T P T

A B
2 0 1 Symbol 006 (009)
Flow/pressure drop curve P T
P A, P B;
A T, B T;
22
20
Pressure difference in bar

18
16 A1/B1 T
14
12 P A1/B1
10 P A4/B4
8 2
A4/B4 T
6
4
2

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 650

Flow in L/min

A B
2 0 1 Symbol 002

P T

A B
Flow/pressure drop curve
2 0 1 Symbol 003
P A, P B;
P T
A T, B T;
A B (only Symbol 002)
34
32
30
28
Pressure difference in bar

26 AB
24
22
20
18
16
14
12 A1/B1 T
10
8 A4/B4 T
6 P A4/B4
4 P A1/B1
2

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 410

Flow in L/min

101
10/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Unit Dimensions: Type MO - 16 (in mm)

1.1 Hydraulic operation spool H 13 13
2.1 Bleed screw,
The position of this screw
2
is dependent on the a b
orientation of the valve
block with regard
90
73

73
to the horizontal.

5
Tightening torque = 8 Nm
3.1 Pressure port C for 40
downstream actuators.
In this model, the tank port
is on the actuator side 3
6 1
4.1 Tank port T on secondary
valve side
5.1 Tank port T on service port side
(not possible in models C)
6.1 Mounting face for secondary
valves (also see pages 13 to
19)
7.1 Clearance required to remove 4 5
primary pressure relief valve
8.1 Pump port P on secondary 322
valve side 100 45 96 6
9.1 Pump port P on service port 85 52,5
side

A B
a2 b2

2
6

55

a1 b1
L3
L1

1
L2
6

94

P
41

39
14

9,5 44,5 16 68
52,5
95
30 190

8 9 7
No. of
L1 L2 L3
spools
SAE flanges, 6000 PSI rating
1 130 137 168
port P A, B, C T L a, b, X
2 185 192 223
01 3/4" BSP 3/4" BSP 1" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP
3 240 247 278 11 1/2" SAE 1/2" SAE 3/4" SAE 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP
4 295 302 333 18 3/4" SAE 1/2" SAE 3/4" SAE 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP

102
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 11/20

Unit Dimensions: Type MO - 22 (in mm)

1.1 Hydraulic operation spool H 15 15
2.1 Bleed screw,
The position of this screw 2
is dependent on the a b
orientation of the valve

108
block with regard

89

89
to the horizontal.
Tightening torque = 8 Nm

50
3.1 Pressure port C for
downstream actuators.
In this model, the tank port
is on the actuator side 6 3 1
4.1 Tank port T on secondary
valve side
5.1 Tank port T on service port
side (not possible in models
C)
6.1 Mounting face for secondary
valves (also see pages 13 to
2
19)
7.1 Clearance required to remove 4 5
primary pressure relief valve 394
8.1 Pump port P on secondary 128 49 125 6
valve side
100 63
9.1 Pump port P on service port
side

T
A B
a2 b2
2

65
a1 b1

L3
L1

1 L2
116

P
51

68
1
16

11,5 59,5
63
113
37 226

8 9 7
No. of
spools L1 L2 L3
SAE flanges, 6000 PSI rating
1 163 166 202
port P A, B, C T L a, b, X
2 228 231 267
01 1" BSP 1" BSP 1 1/4" BSP 3/8" BSP 1/4" BSP
3 293 296 332 11 3/4" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 3/8" BSP 1/4" BSP
4 358 361 397 18 1" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 3/8" BSP 1/4" BSP

103
12/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Unit Dimensions: Type MO - 32 (in mm)

1.1 Hydraulic operation spool H
20 20
2.1 Bleed screw,
The position of 2
this screw is
a b
dependent on
the orientation
130

of the valve block

105

105
with regard to the
58

horizontal.
Tightening torque
= 8 Nm
3.1 Pressure port C for
downstream actuators. 6 3 1
In this model, the tank port
is on the actuator side
4.1 Tank port T on secondary
valve side
5.1 Tank port T on service
port side (not possible
in models C)
6.1 Mounting face for
secondary valves
4 5
(also see pages 13 to 19) 488
7.1 Clearance required 164 68 138 6
to remove primary
pressure relief valve 130 85

8.1 Pump port P on

secondary valve side
9.1 Pump port P on
service port side
A T B
a2 b2
2

85
a1
L3
b1
L1

1
L2
137
57

78
P
10
20

13,5 76
85
150
44 300

No. of
spools L1 L2 L3 8 9 7
1 200 207 250
2 285 292 335
SAE-flanges 6000 psi; port T: 3000 psi
3 370 377 420
port P A, B, C T L a, b, X
4 455 462 505 11 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/2" SAE 1/2" BSP 1/4" BSP

104
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 13/20

Unit Dimensions: Secondary valves, sizes 16 and 22 (in mm)

L1 L2
114 101,5
L4

38
G

68
H

38
E

69 L5 L6 50

6
42 P
E 2

12
2 1

48
A, G
49

47

Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 P
MO - 16 136 137,5 41 42,5 21 38
MO - 22 150 151,5 37 38,5 35 52
Type MO - 16 Type MO - 22
Item 1 Item 2 Item 1 Item 2
With a 3/4" SAE - T port, With a 1" BSP - T port, the With a 1" SAE - T port, the With a 1 1/4" BSP - T port, the
the last spool immediately last spool immediately last spool immediately last spool immediately adja-
adjacent, may only be adjacent may be equipped adjacent may be equipped cent may be equipped with all
equipped with the with all secondary valves with all secondary valves secondary valves except K,
secondary valves H, E, K except K. except K, T, R, S, and cover T and R.
and cover plate P. plate U.

105
14/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Unit Dimensions: Secondary valves, size 22 (in mm)

Type L1 L2 L3
3 MO - 22 170 31 47
MO - 32 188 49 65
Item 3 Type MO - 22
With a 1"SAE - P port, the 1st Secondary valves of varying sizes cannot be used together on
spool immediately adjacent one spool axis, they may only be used in pairs of the same
may be equipped with all size.
secondary valves except R. Secondary valves T, R, S and cover plate U may not be fitted
on spools immediately adjacent to one another.

106
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 15/20

Unit Dimensions: Secondary valves, sizes 16 and 22, for types MO-16 and MO-22 (in mm)

2 1
2

Type L1 L2 L3
MO-16 234 90 42
MO-22 262 104 70
Type MO - 16 Type MO - 22
1 With a 3/4" SAE - T port, the last spool immediately 1 With a 1" SAE - T port, the last spool immediately
adjacent, may only be equipped with secondary valves H, adjacent, may be equipped with all secondary valves
E, K and cover plate P. except K, T, R, S, and cover plate U.
2 With a 1"BSP - T port, the last spool immediately adjacent 2 With a 1 1/4"BSP - T port, the last spool immediately
may be equipped with all secondary valves except K. adjacent, may be equipped with all secondary valves
except K, T and R.

107
16/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Unit Dimensions: Secondary valves, sizes 22 and 32 for type MO-32 (in mm)
179 179
115 115

F F

1
78

78

F F

1 With a 1 1/2"SAE - T port,

the last spoolimmediately adjacent
may be equipped with all secondary
valves except D.

108
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 17/20

Notes on the Selection of the Size and Type of Secondary Valves

Secondary valves T
These valves, either direct or pilot operated, are used to protect
the actuators and actuator lines from unaccepably high pres-
sures.

Pressure relief valves

B1
Direct operated, size 16 A1
The response pressure must lie above the maximum pump
pressure
For the reaction forces of small masses = low flows a1 b1

Leak-tight until the response pressure is reached

Setting is carried out at qV = 2 L/min

Direct operated, size 22

The response pressure must lie above the maximum pump
P
pressure
For the reaction forces of large masses = large flows T

Leak-tight until the response pressure is reached

Setting is carried out at qV = 2 L/min 2

Pressure anti-cavitation valves

B1
Pilot operated, size 16, 22 A1
The response pressure must lie above the maximum pump
pressure
a1 b1
For repeated operation
Setting is carried out at qV = 10 L/min

Plug Type "D 000" for Primary Valve Cavities

for Valve Material Tight. torque

control block Code No. in Nm
MO - 16 und 22 D 000 R900309110 80
MO - 32 R900309124 300

Cover Plates "P" and "U" for Secondary Valve Mounting Faces, Sizes 16 and 22
for Valve
Material No.
control block Code
MO - 16 und 22 P R900305435
MO - 22 und 32 U R900303897

Plug for the Pre-selectable Pressure Port

Tank port T and pre- for Valve Tightening torque
Material No.
selectable pressure port control block Code in Nm
C for downstream MO - 16 R900309111 50
actuators
MO - 22 K R900309112 80
K MO - 32 R900309125 160

Warning: When changing valve cartridges and plugs, please note the correct tightening toque.

109
18/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Primary Pressure Relief Valve

Pressure relief valve
Pilot operated Max. set Tight.
Valve For Valve Material
size control block Code pressure torque No. Designation
P in bar Nm
22 MO - 16; 22 D + press. 80 R900304674 MHDBV22K2-1X/420 YM
350
40 MO - 32 in bar 300 R900307942 MHDBV40K2-1X/420 YM

T For further technical data, see data sheet RE 64 642

Secondary Valves (for further technical data, see data sheet RE 64 644)
Anti-cavitation valve Valve For Valve Material
size control block Code No. Designation

MO - 16 E R900307120 MHSV16ZB1-1X/M
A (B) T 16 MO - 22 Cover plate P for
secondary valve R900305435
mounting face
S R900307121 MHSV22ZB1-1X/M
MO - 22
22 Cover plate U for
secondary valve R900303897
MO - 32
mounting face

Pressure relief valve, Valve For Valve Max. set Material

direct operated size control block Code press. in bar No. Designation
A,B
MO - 16 200 R900305835 MHDBD16P2-1X/200 M
A + press.
16 MO - 22 195 to 300 R900303895 MHDBD16P2-1X/315 M
in bar
MO - 32 295 to 420 R900302906 MHDBD16P2-1X/420 M
T
200 R900305836 MHDBD22P2-1X/200 M
22 MO - 22 R + press. 195 to 300 R900305837 MHDBD22P2-1X/315 M
The response pressure is set at MO - 32 in bar
Q = 2 L/min 295 to 420 R900303354 MHDBD22P2-1X/420 M

Pressure anti-cavitation valve, Valve For Valve Max. set Material

pilot operated size control block Code press. in bar No. Designation
A,B
MO - 16; H + press.
16 R900936574 MH1DBN16P2-2X/420VFB
MO - 22 in bar
420
MO - 22 F + press.
32 R900937256 MH1DBN32P2-2X/420VFK
MO - 32 in bar
T
The response pressure is set at
Q = 10 L/min

Cross-line pressure relief valve Valve For Valve Max. set Material
and anti-cavitation valve size control block Code press. in bar No. Designation
(E or S)
16 MO - 16 K + press. R900308512 MH2DBV16P2-1X/420 YM
22 MO - 22 in bar 420 R900308383 MH2DBV22P2-1X/420 YM
16 MO - 16 and 22 E *) R900307120 MHSV16ZB1-1X/ M
K + press.
32 MO - 32 420 R900434971 MH2DBV32P2-1X/420 YM
in bar
22 MO - 32 S *) R900307121 MHSV22ZB1-1X/ M

*) Orderings code not required

T B A T

110
RE 64 354/06.03 | MO-16, 22 and 32 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 19/20

Secondary Valves (for further technical data, see data sheet RE 64 644)
Secondary valves: Secondary For Weight S.H.Cap screws Tight. Material
weights and fixing screws torque
valves control block in kg DIN 912 - 10.9 No.
Sealing rings for secondary valves Nm
are included in the supply. A MO - 16/22 1,1 4x M6 x 40 13 R900003196
Fixing screws must be ordered E MO - 16/22 0,6 4 x M6 x 50 13 R900006034
separately. G MO - 16/22 1,6 4 x M6 x 70 13 R900003201
H MO - 16/22 1,8 4 x M6 x 40 13 R900003196
MO - 16/22 4,5 8 x M6 x 90 13 R900003203
K
MO - 32 14,5 8 x M10 x 120 60 R900009409
P MO - 16/22 0,3 4 x M6 x 20 13 R900003192
R MO - 22/32 3,3 / 3,1 4 x M10 x 50 60 R900003231
S MO - 22/32 1,5 4 x M10 x 60 60 R900003233
T MO - 22/32 4,7 4 x M10 x 90 60 R900003236
F MO - 22/32 2,6 4 x M10 x 60 60 R900003233
U MO - 22/32 0,9 4 x M10 x 20 60 R900003226

111
20/20 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics MO-16, 22 and 32 | RE 64 354/06.03

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG 2003 by Bosch Rexroth AG, Mobile Hydraulics, D-97813 Lohr am Main
Mobile Hydraulics All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored,
Zum Eisengieer 1 processed, duplicated or circulated using electronic systems, in any form or by
any means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany
In the event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52-18 0
obliged to pay compensation.
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52-18 23 58 The data specified above only serves to describe the product. No statements
[email protected] concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
www.boschrexroth.de derived from our information.The details stated do not release you from the
responsibility for carrying out your own assessment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
ageing.

112
 RE 64 294/06.03 1/16
Compact Valve Block Replaces: 07.94

Type M8

Nominal size16...32
Series 1X H/A 1707 H/A 1705

Maximum control pressure:

pump side 350 bar Compact valve block M8 Compact valve block M8
actuator side 420 bar (view from above) (view from below)
Maximum flow 2 x 450 L/min

Overview of contents Features

Contents Page Compact valve blocks, series M8 are primarily used for the
control of standard functions in track driven and wheeled
Features 1
excavators, such as arms, buckets, transmission, dipper and
Technical features 2 slew (swing) within a 2 circuit hydraulic system.
Function, circuit diagram for excavator valve block 3 They may even be usefully used in drilling devices and cranes.
Compact valve block M8 replaces the previous 4 axis valve
Installation and service notes 4
blocks in 2 circuit controls.
Technical data 4
The advantage of this type over a separated design lies in the
Operating Curves 4 to 6 reduced time and effort required for assembly and piping.
Spool selection, Port sizes 7
Unit dimensions 8 to 15
Primary and secondary valves 16

113
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Technical features
Valve control to the 6/3 way principle Spool stroke, control characteristics
Proportional control characteristic The spool stroke is divided into appox. 30 % control land
Further fine control range for sensitive flow control overlap, approx. 50 % fine control range and approx. 20 %
residual stroke for creating fully opened cross-section.
Hydraulic control by means of pilot operated device type TH,
electrical control available on request Optimum fine control is achieved by means of the fine control
grooves in the pilot devices.
Spool axes: for size 16 min. 8 to max.10
for size 18 min. 7 to max. 9
for size 22 7 Deceleration spool
for size 25 6
for size 32 min. 6 to max. 8 These are used in hydrostatic transmissions in tracked vehicles
and are used to avoid the over-running of the drive in both
Various circuit variations (parallel/tandem/series) directions of travel. Controlled, cavitation-free downhill travel is
Simultaneous control of various actuators possible achieved by control of the return oil opening dependent on the
feed pressure.
Internal flow summation of max. 3 actuators (Other actuators
possible externally)
Spools for track transmission controls with integrated Warning: For the deceleration spool to funtion correctly
deceleration functions system optimisation must be carried out on the
vehicle.
Priority circuit for slew operation
Before going into series production, the valve must
Flange mountable flow divider with compensator valve for be tested in situ and final installation certified as
transmission spool axes, ports for tank, cooler and anti- being correct!
cavitation
Various primary and secondary cartridge valves
Ordering Code
Project department together with the customer will specify the
ordering code for the valve blocks of series M8.

114
RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

Function, circuit diagram for excavator valve block

The block mainly comprises the housing, the control spool with 1 2 3 6
return springs (1), built-in primary cartridge valves (3) and
secondary cartridge valves (4), as well as load holding valves (2).
Connected to pump P1 (5) are usually arm (12, spool axis 1) P2
and bucket (13, spool axis 2), as well as transmission L (14,
P2'
spool axis 3). Arm and bucket may be supplied with fluid either in
parallel or in series, i.e. both functions may be carried out simul-
taneously. If these functions are not used, the pump flow is avai-
a7 b7
lable for control of the transmission.
Pump P2 (6) usually supplies the slew (17, spool axis 7), dipper 17 A7
(16, spool axis 6) and transmission R (15, spool axis 5). The slew 4
has priority over the dipper and transmission (tandem circuit). B7
The dipper function has priority over the transmission. Flow from
pump P2 not required for these functions may [by operating the
C valve (10)] be used for the external summation with another a6 b6
actuator.
If neither arm, bucket nor transmission L (spool axes 1-3) are
16 A6
operated, flow from pump P1 may be made available by internal- B6
ly activating the summation valve (9) of spool axis 6 (control of
dipper) (dipper summation).
8
By means of the transmission compensation valve (7) the remai- 2
a5 b5
ning of oil from pumps P1 and P2 may be combined for the sup-
ply of both spool axes for the transmisssions. Hence various 15 A5
operations may be carried out during travel, without the vehicle
deviating from its path of travel. If only the transmission spools B5
are operated, the transmission compensation valve is then at 10
rest and only a residual compensation is carried out.
Preload valves (11) arranged in the return cause the return oil to C
L 7
be divided between the cooler and tank. The return oil which has
built up may only be removed via port S and then fed to the a4
slew motor for the purpose of anti-cavitation.
In addition to the model of the compact valve block described Pst
b4
here, further variations exist, which our project department MH-V
is willing to provide information on. Similary help is provided for
S
the design of hydraulic controls using M8 valve blocks.

14 B3 K T 11
1 Control spool A3
8 9
2 Load holding valve
a3 b3
3 Primary valve
4 Secondary valve
5 Port for pump 1 13 B2
6 Port for pump 2
A2
7 Transmission compensation
valve with residual oil at rest a2 b2
8 Spool with integrated
deceleration function
9 Summation valve (internal, 12 B1
dipper summation)
10 C valve external P1; P2 pump ports A1
summation Pst, a., b. control ports b1
a1
11 Preload valves S anti-cavitation port
12 Port: arm K cooler port
13 Port: spoon T tank port
14 Port: left transmission L leakage oil port
M P1
15 Port: right transmission M pressure gauge port
16 Port: dipper C Port for external
17 Port: slew (swing) summation 2 3 5

115
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Installation and service notes

Installation
The installation position of the compact valve block is optional. Mechanical distortion is not permissible.
Service notes
Primary and secondary valves may be exchanged without disassembling block. They must not be adjusted by the customer.
If a control spool needs to be removed, only the long cover of the spool axis needs to be removed first.

Technical data (For operation outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524
Phosphate ester (HFD-R)
Fluid temperature range C 20 to + 80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Degree of contamination of fluid (maximum permissible) ISO 4406 (C) Class 20/18/15
Flow, max. Size 16 18 22 25 32
L/min 2 x 110 2 x 1501) 2 x 2002) 2 x 230 2 x 300 2 x 450
Operating pressure pump side bar 350
(maximum) actuator side bar 420
tank side bar 30
leakage oil bar Low pressure
Control pressure, max. bar 30
Fine control range bar 8 ... 19 for control curve 06
8 ... 25 for control curve 70
(for suitable pilot units see RE 64 552, RE 64 555 and
RE 64 558)
Other control curves on enquiry
Weight See Unit dimensions on pages 8 - 15 (approx. weights)
Exact weight will depend on the equipment used.
1) with brake piston 007 2) without brake piston

Operating Curves (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

Size 16
p p
Through flow resistance P1 actuator Through flow resistance actuator tank
15 27
25
Pressure drop in bar
B3 3

12 T
Pressure drop in bar

20
/B 7
P1

9 A1 7/B
A
15
B 1
A
1

6
P1

10

3 5

0 25 50 75 100 110 Q 0 50 100 150 200 Q

p Flow in L/min Flow in L/min
Bypass resistance
15

12
Pressure drop in bar

9
T

P2

T

P1

0 25 50 75 100 110 Q
Flow in L/min

116
RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

Operating Curves (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

Size 18
p p
Through flow resistance P1 actuator Through flow resistance actuator tank
15 15

12 12

Pressure drop in bar

Pressure drop in bar

T
1

B3 3
A
/B
9 9 A1 7/B7

P1
A
A1 1
6 B 6
P1

3 3

0 25 50 75 100 125 150 Q 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Q

Flow in L/min Flow in L/min
p
Bypass resistance
15

12
2
Pressure drop in bar

9
T
T

P2
P1

0 25 50 75 100 125 150 Q

Flow in L/min
Size 22
p p
Through flow resistance P1 actuator Through flow resistance actuator tank
25 25

A3 3
Pressure drop in bar

20 B 20
Pressure drop in bar

1 )
P1 T
15 15 1
/B 7
A1 7/B
A1 A
10 B1
P1 10

5 5

0 50 100 150 200 230 Q 0 100 200 300 400 Q

p Flow in L/min Flow in L/min
Bypass resistance
10 1) for brake piston 007
Pressure drop in bar

T
8
P2
T
6
P1

0 50 100 150 200 230 Q

Flow in L/min

117
6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Operating Curves (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50 C)

Size 25
p p
Through flow reistance pump actuator Through flow resistance actuator tank
25 25
T
A1 1
B

Pressure drop in bar

Pressure drop in bar

20 20

15 15
A6 T
B6
10 A1 10
1
P B
B6
5 P2
4

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Q 0 100 200 300 400 500 Q
p Flow in L/min Flow in L/min
Bypass resistance
25

20
Pressure drop in bar

T
15 P1 2
P

10

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Q

Flow in L/min
Size 32
p Through flow resistance pump actuator p Through flow resistance actuator tank
25 A4 4 10
B
P1
A6 6
B 8
Pressure drop in bar

20 P2
Pressure drop in bar

T
15 6 1
A1 /B 7
B1 7 A1 7/B
P1 A 4
A
10 B7
P2

5 2

0 100 200 300 400 500 Q 0 200 400 600 800 Q

Flow in L/min Flow in L/min
p
Bypass resistance
25 T

P1
Druckdifferenz in bar

20

T
15
P2

10

0 100 200 300 400 500 Q

Flow in L/min

118
RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

Spool selection
Symbols Size16 Size18 Size 22 Size 25 Size 32
A B

P T
0 1
= 001

A B

2 0 1 = 002
P T
A B

2 1

P T
0 = 003

A B

2 0 1 = 005
P T
A B

2 1 = 006
P T
0

A B

= 007 2
2

P T
0 1

A B

2 1

P T
A B
0 = 009

2 1 = 026
P T
0

A B

= 115

2 0 1

P T
A B

= 139
2 0

P T
A B
1

0 = 149
2

PT
1

= available
Port sizes
Port Size 16 Size 18 Size 22 Size 25 Size 32
A, B, C, P2' M27 x 2 SAE 3/4" 6000 PSI SAE 3/4" 6000 PSI SAE 1" 6000 PSI SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI
A6, B6 M33 x 2 SAE1" 6000 PSI SAE 1" 6000 PSI SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI
P1, P2 SAE 3/4" 6000 PSI SAE 1" 6000 PSI SAE 1" 6000 PSI SAE 1" 6000 PSI SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI
K SAE 1" 3000 PSI SAE 1 1/4" 3000 PSI SAE 1 1/4" 3000 PSI SAE 1 1/2" 3000 PSI SAE 2" 3000 PSI
T SAE 1" 3000 PSI SAE 1 1/2" 3000 PSI SAE 1 1/2" 3000 PSI SAE 2" 3000 PSI SAE 2 1/2" 3000 PSI
a, b, L 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP
Pst 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP
M1 1/4" BSP 1/4" BSP M22 x 1,5 M22 x 1,5 M22 x 1,5
S M26 x 1,5 M33 x 2 M33 x 2
30,160,2
23,90,2

27,80,2

35,70,2
31,70,2

42,90,2

50,90,2

M 10x15,5 M 12x16 M 14x19 M 10x14 M 12x16 M 12x18 M 12x18

50,80,2 57,150,2 66,70,2 58,740,2 69,850,2 77,80,2 88,90,2

SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/2" SAE 2" SAE 2 1/2"
6000 PSI 6000 PSI 6000 PSI 3000 PSI 3000 PSI 3000 PSI 3000 PSI

119
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Unit dimensions: M8-16, variation 1, 2 and 3 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
Variation 3 P3 Weight: approx. 113 kg
(basic block
with 2-axis
P3
B A

75
extension) M3
b10 a10

50
b9 a9

4.2
C9 1

Variation 2 95 Weight: approx. 95 kg

(basic block 90

710
with single axis 66 P3
extension)
28
B P3
A
M3 75
b9
a9
4.1
1

Variation 1 (extendable) 40 Weight: approx. 90 kg

30 90 109,5 12,5 26 20
660

110 83,5
3

M2 M16; 20
P2 7 P2

b8 a8

6
70

b7 a7

5
50

a6
b6
50

b5 a5
555
502

50

b4 T S K a4
485

405
50
373

b3 a3
50
267

b2 a2
50

b1 a1
95
70

B A
M1 P1
28
20

5
41,5 97 M16; 20 1 70 63
1 Bleed 77
31 50 25
2 98
7 2 Nameplate 130
3 Blanking plate (only variation 1)
1800,2 84,5 6 4.1 Extension piece (single axis)
4.2 Extension piece (2-axis) 6 Pisten stroke limitation
5 Transport aid 7 Mounting bores

120
RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

Unit dimensions: M8-18, variation 1 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7

7-axis valve block (not extendable) Weight: approx. 112 kg

Pst S
L

T K
61 52
5 81 54,5
97,9
30 190 96 6
132 13 40 13
110 52
4
2
3xM16; 20 P2
7 P2
53,5

82 a7
1
b7
30 2
66,5

a6 b6
S
66,5

a5 b5
63,5

T/K
C
273

a4 b4

3250,2
580
541
65

L 52
a3 b3
372,5

65
319

a2 b2
238

65

31
a1 b1
128,5
154,5

A B
96

M
33

24

P1
52 124,5
20,5 33,5
70
7 6
1 Bleed
2 Nameplate
3 Blanking plate (only Variation 2)
4.1 Extension piece (single axis)
4.2 Extension piece (2-axis)
5 Transport aid
6 Pisten stroke limitation
7 Mounting bores

121
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Unit dimensions: M8-18, variation 2; 3 and 4 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
Variation 4 P2 Weight: approx. 140 kg
(basic block
with 2-axis B A

90
extension) M2
b9 a9

65
b8 a8

4.2
1
617,5

70 M16; 20
7
Variation 3 Weight: approx. 127 kg
(basic block 95 70 33,5
with single axis 57 7
P2

805
extension)

33
B A

90
M2
b8 a8

4.1
617,5

70 M16; 20
7
Variation 2 Weight: approx. 115 kg
(extendable) 70 33,5
740

51,8 107 4
P2
33

P2 M2
3
M2
A 110,9
M16; 20
7
a7
1 b7
65

C2
a6
b6

93
65

b5 a5
627
660
65

147
b4 a4

C1 2
65

b3 a3
451,5

65

b2 a2
65
225,5

b1 a1
126,5
92,5

B
94

P1 P1
39

M1 5
43 4 7
M16; 20
13 40 110 13 7 132 20,6
96 190 30 6
For explanations of items see page 9

122
RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

Unit dimensions: M8-22, variation 1 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
7-axis valve block (not extendable) Weight: approx. 148 kg

131

Pst
L S

T K
61 52
80 66
181,3 98

37 226 125 6
15 128 49 15 2
M16; 20
21
2 1 5 7 1200,2

P2
A B
63,5

P2'
a7 b7
66,5

30
a6
b6
S
66,5

a5
b5
63,5

58
598

5320,2
a4 C b4
C
275

65

L
a3 b3
65

a2
b2
380,5

65
327

a1
b1
161,5
246

M1
27,80,2
104

P1
39

33

40 77 31 57,150,2 154

58 145 82 5 60 M16; 20
M12; 16
7 6
1 Bleed
2 Nameplate
5 Transport aid
6 Pisten stroke limitation
7 Mounting bores

123
 12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Unit dimensions: M8-22, variation 2 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
7-axis valve block (not extendable) Weight: approx. 150 kg

125

25
L Pst
S

T K
61 52
70,5 66

37 226 125 6
840,2 19 82 M16; 20 15 1280,2 49 3,5
2 M16; 20 5 7

30,5
30 1200,2 15
1
P2
P2
65

65
A B
20 a7 b7
495-C
65

a6 b6
65

60 30
a5 b5
4xM12/16

5260,2
C 37 D
65

362-C

L
276

a4 b4
598

594

65
220

55
166

a3 b3
30 60
65

20
85

4
a2 b2
65

32,5

a1 b1
162

1
103,5

E P1
P1
38,5
26,5

550,2 19 8 43 M16; 20
5 7
40 77 31 45 113
20 145

1 Bleed
2 Nameplate
5 Transport aid
7 Mounting bores

124
 RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

Unit dimensions: M8-25 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
6-axis valve block (not extendable) Weight approx. 187 kg

6 134 134 6

44
1 142 104
90 53

28
Pst L

T K
40 84 45

15 260 15
147 56,5
M16; 25 140 60
2
2 5 7 30

P2
P2' P2
95
37
75

b6
a6
75

b5
a5

C
75

a4 b4
598

561,5
75

63
L b3
a3
75

b2
a2
75
270

b1
a1
27,80,2

M1
106,5

P1 A B
41,5

P1

40 86 35 57,20,2
M16; 25
70 158 70 7 1

1 Bleed
2 Nameplate
5 Transport aid
7 Mounting bores

125
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Unit dimensions: M8-32, variation 1 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
7-axis valve block (not extendable) *) Weight approx. 325 kg

138 300
150 138 6
175 18,5 80
56 M20; 30 44 35 164 68
7
P2'
P2' P2
P2
97 B
a7 b7
100

a6 b6
100

13
a5 L b5 1
70

K T
K,T M20; 30
94 7
995

206
245
a4
b4
100

a3
b3
590

100

457
a2 b2
100

a1 b1

66,7
31,7
140

M1
M1 P1
38
38

P1
56 95 45 M14 80
M20; 30
5 7

1 Bleed
2 Nameplate
5 Transport aid
*) Dimensions for 6-axis valve block on request 7 Mounting bores

126
 RE 64 294/06.03 | M 8 Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

Unit dimensions: M8-32, variation 2 (Dimensions in mm)

For dimensions see page 7
8-axis valve block (not extendable) Weight approx. 350 kg
138 300 138 6
44 150

175 18,5 35 164 68

56 M20; 30 70
7

P2'
P2' P2 P2

97
A B
a8 b8
100

a7 b7

2
100

a6 b6

82
100

13
C
a5 b5
C
70

1
K, T
K T
1095

M20; 30
94 7
206
245
a4 b4
100

a3 b3
590
100

495

a2 b2
100

a1 b1

66,7
140

M1
38

M1
P1
38

P1
31,7

56 95 M20; 30 M14
5
45 80
7
1 Bleed 5 Transport aid
2 Nameplate 7 Mounting bores

127
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics M 8 | RE 64 294/06.03

Primr- und Sekundrventile

Primary valves available:

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated, without anti-cavitation

Pressure control/anti-cavitation valve, pilot operated
Pressure control/anti-cavitation valve pilot operated with pressure isolation stage
Pressure relief valve pilot operated with pressure isolation stage

Secondary valves available:

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated without anti-cavitation

Pressure control/anti-cavitation valve, pilot operated
Anti-cavitation valve
Pressure relief valve with pressure isolation stage (off)
Pressure relief valve with pressure isolation stage (on)
Project department will be pleased to provide information on the availability and application possibilities for these valves for the
various sizes of compact block series M8.

Bosch Rexroth AG 2003 by Bosch Rexroth AG, Mobile Hydraulics, D-97813 Lohr am Main
Mobile Hydraulics All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored,
Zum Eisengieer 1 processed, duplicated or circulated using electronic systems, in any form or by
any means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany
In the event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52-18 0
obliged to pay compensation.
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52-18 23 58 The data specified above only serves to describe the product. No statements
[email protected] concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
www.boschrexroth.de derived from our information.The details stated do not release you from the
responsibility for carrying out your own assessment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
ageing.

128
Positive Control control block M9-25 RE 64303/01.2012 1/8

in monoblock design English

Data sheet

2
Nominal size 25
Unit series 1X
Maximum operating pressure:
pump side 350 bar
actuator side 380 bar
Maximum flow:
2 x 300 l/min
7M9-25

Table of contents Areas of application

Content Page The compact control blocks of type M9 serve, first of all, for
Areas of application 1 the control of standard functions in crawler excavators or
mobile excavators, like boom, bucket, travel drive, arm and
Features 2
swing in a dual-circuit hydraulic system.
Function 2
In this connection, particularly value was put on the fact that
Symbol 3 the multiplicity of possible parallel movements of a hydraulic
Technical data 4 excavator of the driver are to be controlled at any time well,
Spool variants 5 comfortably and without high concentration effort with optimal
power demand.
Primary and secondary pressure safety 6
Line connections 6
Unit dimensions 7, 8

129
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG M9-25 | RE 64303/01.2012

Features

System Design
Control principle: Dual-circuit Positive Control Monoblock design
(no fixed pump operation possible) Basic block with 7 consumer axes and 2 summation half
Valve control due to 6/3-way principle axes
Internal summation functions for arm and boom Expandable via maximum 2 sandwich plates
Improved flow distribution with parallel movements travel/
equipment Types of operation
Arm regeneration with brake valve function to tank Hydraulic
Spool for boom function with integrated regeneration Electrohydraulic
function
Optimal supply of boom with parallel movements with Flanged housing (inlet section)
bucket or swing Primary valve on the rear side
Semi priority of the swing axis compared with the arm axis Pre-load valves for tank and cooler
Integrated anti-drift valves for fr arm and boom
Options flangeable lateral
Primary and secondary pressure protection via pilot
controlled cartridge valves with combined anti-cavitation Cost-efficient piping with low p
function to avoid cavitation. Consumer ports facing upwards
Ports for pump and tank downwards
Order details
The order details for control blocks of type M9 are defined
by the project department in co-operation with the customer.

Function
Control block M9-25 Summation
The control block basically consists of the housing, control There is one summation valve in both loops. These enable
spools with return springs (1), built-in primary cartridge an internal supply of the functions boom lifting (11) and arm
valves (2) and secondary cartridge valves (3) as well as in/out (12) with two pumps.
load-holding valves (4).
Inlet section
Pilot control of consumer
By means of the inlet section (15) the flow distribution is
Connected to pump P1 are usually travel drive right (spool
determined during the parallel movements travel/equipment.
axis 3), swing (spool axis 2) and arm (spool axis 1).
Via the inlet section the pump P1 is swiched on both travel
The arm movement has a reduced influence on the swing drive sections during parallel movement and pump P2 is
movement compared to a parallel control. Therefore a semi switched on the equipment via the parallel channels of both
priority of the swing is achieved by control of swing and arm loops.
section. The flow fluctuations of the swing as a result of the
parallel movement which a felt by the driver as unpleasant
are minimized.
Connected to pump P2 are usually travel drive left (spool
axis 4), boom (spool axis 5), bucket (spool axis 6) and
option (spool axis 7).
By the chosen control a sufficient supply of the boom
function is ensured during parallel movements with the
load-lower bucket function. Thereby a stop of the boom is
prevented.
The option section integrated in the block (spool axis 7) is
bound-in parallel to the boom. Other option sections can be
flanged lateral whereat the connection of the pump is carried
out via the parallel channel (8).

130
RE 64303/01.2012 | M9-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Symbol

B2
Arm
1 Main spool

C2
2 Primary valve 2:

b2
3 Secondary valve

c2
4 Load-holding valve

M3
5 Throttled parallel bypass arm
28
6 Throttled parallel bypass bucket
29 6

B3
Swing
7 Parallel channel P1 2
8 Parallel channel P2

c3 C3

b3
9 Bypass valve loop P1
10 Bypass valve loop P2 5 8

Travel Right
11 Summation valve boom

c4 C4 B4
12 Summation valve arm

CC b4
33
13 Parallel channel connection P1 to
summation valve

Z LT
14 Parallel channel connection P2 to
24 2
summation valve
3
Qd3
15 Inlet section

Q3 M2 Q2
16 Regeneration spool boom lowering
21
17 Regeneration spool arm in
22
18 Arm counterbalance valve
19 Anti-drift valve arm 23 26

Qj
20 Anti-drift valve boom
B5 c5 BC

U
21 Pre-load valve for tank line

b5 Qd2
Travel Left

22 Pre-load valve for cooler back 32

pressure
M4 c6 C5

9
25
b6
B6
Boom

C6

7
27
31
c7

b7
B7
Bucket

C7
c8

b8
C8 B8
Option

P1; P2 Pump ports

T Tank port
A, B Consumer ports
a, b, Pi, PC1, PC2, AB, BB Pilot pressure control ports
S Anti-cavitation port for swing
K Cooler port
Y, L1, L2, L3 Leakage oil ports (at zero pressure to tank)

131
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG M9-25 | RE 64303/01.2012

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Weight kg 195
Installation position Optional
Line connections See page 6
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80

Hydraulic
Max. operating P p bar 350
pressure at port
A/B p bar 380
T p bar 30
L p Must be zero pressure to tank
Max. pilot pressure a, b p bar 35
at port
Max. flow l/min 2 x 300
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic
fluids, such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568
as well as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, on inquiry
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter
hydraulic fluid cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) with a minimum retention rate of 10 75
Recommended hydraulic pilot control range bar 0 to 35

132
RE 64303/01.2012 | M9-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Spool variants

Order detail +
Main application Symbol
flow in l/min

E Cut spool

Hydro motor as consumer (A/BT)

J Consumer port in neutral position
tank balanced

Application with defined orifice (A/BT)

Q Consumer port in neutral position
tank balanced

R
Regeneration spool 2
(cylinder bottom end to cylinder ring chamber)

133
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG M9-25 | RE 64303/01.2012

Primary and secondary pressure safety

Available primary valves:

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated
Pressure relief valve, pilot operated with pressure
sequence stage

Available secondary valves:

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated
Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve, pilot operated
Anti-cavitation valve

Line connections

Port Dimension Similar Standard

P1, P2
DN 28 (SAE 1 1/4 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2 P = Pump ports
A1, B5
A, B = Consumer ports
T
DN 28 (SAE 1 1/4 3000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-1 T = Tank port
K
K = Cooler port
A2 A7, B1 B4,
DN 25 (SAE 1 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2 a, b = Pilot control ports
B6, B7
a1 a7, b1 b7 DN 10 G 1/4 DIN EN ISO 1179-1 S = Anti-cavitation port for
swing
S M33 x 2 DIN EN ISO 9974-1
Y, L = Leakage oil ports
Y, L DN 10 G 1/4 DIN EN ISO 1179-1

Mount the SAE flanges according to the manufacturer CAUTION! With nonobservance malfunctions are possible
instructions: by tensioning of the anti-drift valves!
1. Tight fixing screws stalwart.
2. Tight fixing screws diagonally.
3. Tight fixing screws stepwise with the allowed tightening
torque (manufacturer instructions).

SAE 1 6000 PSI SAE 1 1/4 6000 PSI SAE 1 1/4 3000 PSI

36,1/6 41,3 41,3

41/261/3
42/81/3
38/91/3

68/31/3 77/81/3 69/861/3

2 3 4
1 4 x M12 2 4 x M14 3 4 x M10
thread depth 19 thread depth 19 thread depth 15.5

134
RE 64303/01.2012 | M9-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Unit dimensions (in mm)

547
531
437/6
81 391 81
33:
338
9 7:
62 9
2:/6
222/6

B2 C2
c2
78

83/6 81/6

87/6
B3 C3
c3 2
79

83/6
B4 C4
c4
81

241

237
B C
CC
81

749

Qd2 C5
5:2

T B5
c5
83/6
554
81

87
C6
B6
419/6

M4
c6
83/6
78 79

86
34:

B7
32:

C7
c7
276

79

83
B8 C8
66

c8
4:

23 36 44
26 58/7 5:
34/6 67 7
226/6 :1 86/6
256 329/6
272 341/6
344/6
489

A, B Consumer ports
b, PC1, BB Pilot control ports
S Anti-cavitation port for swing
L3 Leakage oil port (at zero pressure to tank)

135
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG M9-25 | RE 64303/01.2012

Unit dimensions (in mm)

372/6
2:2
221
2651/3 96
221 1/3 36/6

M3
b2
78

b3
79

b4
Q3 Q2
Qd3 M2
81

BC Qj

5891/3
Z
684

81

b5
U
81

472

L
b6
467
438/6

446
417

399
79
338

326

b7

338
221
78

b8

89
42

26 1/3 25
26 541/3 53
42/6 222/6 232
291
:3/6
338

P1; P2 Pump ports 1 Three fixing threads

T Tank port M16, 23 deep
a, Pi, PC2, AB Pilot control ports
K Cooler port
Y, L1, L2 Leakage oil ports
(at zero pressure to tank)

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-3972 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered
[email protected] that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
www.boschrexroth.de

136
LUDV control block of sandwich RE 64132/05.09
Replaces: 12.02
1/16

plate design

Type SX 10

Nominal size 10
Series 1X
Maximum pressure, pump side 250 bar
Maximum pressure, actuator side 300 bar
Inlet flow 80 l/mn
Flow at each directional valve element 50 l/mn

Contents Special features

Special features 1 Distributes the flow between the directional valve elements
according to the requirements, independently of
Functional description, Section 2
the pressure and available flow.
Hydraulic Symbol 2
Compact sandwich plate design, can be combined so
Technical data 3 to 4 that the control block can meet the requirements of differing
Ordering details 5 to 7 machines.
Inlet element - Final element 8 No shuttle valves.
Directional valve element 9 to 10 Limitation of system maximum pressure via LS pressure
Unit dimensions (in mm) 11 to 13 relief valve.
Assembly possibilities 14 System protection via LS and secondary pressure relief
valves.
Pipe connections 14

137
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Functional description, Section

C B
7

U U
4
Q

1 Housing
2 Spool
3 Check valves
4 Pressure compensator
5 Direct operated pressure relief valve with anti-cavitation function 5 MT
6 Plug

The SX 10 directional control block basically consists of one Each SX directional valve element is composed of a housing
inlet element, a number of directional valve elements and one (1), a spool (2), two load holding check valves (3) placed in-
final element. side the spool, a pressure compensator (4), cavities for direct
The inlet element contains one fixing point and the pipe con- operated pressure relief valves with anti-cavitation function
nection ports P, T, LS, M. (5), and anti-cavitation check valves or plugs (6).
This element also contains all the components required for The final element has two fixing points.
the system function, namely: a flow control valve for the con-
trolled unloading of the LS line, a LS relief valve for the limi-
tation of the maximum pressure in the system and a pressure
compensator.

Hydraulic Symbol
5

Orifices
P Pump
A, B Actuator
T Tank
7
LS Load Sensing

B
C
6

Q MT U
4 3

138
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Design flangeable (up to 10 directional valve elements)
Description flow distribution between the directional valve elements propor-
tional to the requirements, independently of the pressure and
available flow
Type SX 10
Installation optional
Nominal size 10

Hydraulic
Max. permissible flow port P l/min 80
port A, B l/min 50
Standard leakage oil flow on load holding cm3/min 15 maxi
(at 100 bar, 36 mm2/s)
Max. operating pressure per connection
2
P, M, LS bar 250
A, B bar 300
T bar 20
for applications at higher pressure: please consult us.
Secondary valves setting pressure tolerances bar setting tolerance
(at 5 l/min)
101 - 170 -5 / +10
171 - 230 -7 / +13
231 - 300 -10 / +15
Max. control pressure per connection
a, b bar 35
we recommend the use of control curve 6 to 25 bar, and
inlet pressure (30 bar mini)
Pressure fluid mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1).
HEES fluids to VDMA 24568 as well as fluids to Rexroth
1)
suitable for NBR seals catalogue sheet RE 90221: please consult us.
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 to +100 inside the block
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Maximum permissible degree of contamination autorised for Class 20/18/15, therefore we recommend a filter with a mini-
hydraulic fluid, purity degree according to ISO 4406 (c) mum retention rate of B10 r75

139
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Mechanical
Weight
Inlet element kg 5
Directional valve element kg 2.1
Blanking plate kg 2
Spool return force N 55 to 95 (with standard spring)
Max. permissible actuation force on the spool
(for 1 million cycles)
- axial N 1000 during 20% of total cycles then 500
- radial N 16
Storage temperature C -40 to +60

Installation guidelines
Pipe connections
P, P2 T, T3 M, LS, T1 A, B, T2 a, b
Tightening torque for the pipe connections Nm 50 50 20 30 20
Recommended fixing at 3 locations
Flatness of the mounting surface mm 0.5
Setting of system pressure via the LS pressure relief valve
The hydraulic circuit may not generate any un-
controlled leak flow in the LS line
Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit

140
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

Ordering details: SX 10 directional control block

inlet element directional valve element

final element
1 to 10 elements

SX 10 L 1X ..0
1st directional valve element
Number or ..0 - ..0
directional
valve spools 2 directional valve element
nd

1 to 10 ..0 - ..0
Medium pressure = L
3 directional valve element
rd

series 10 to 19 = 1X
..0 - ..0
(10 to 19, unchanged Seals
installation and connection 4 directional valve element
th M= NBR seals
dimensions) ! Attention!
..0 - ..0
Inlet element The compatibility of the seals
Closed Center with 5th directional valve element and pressure fluid has to be
flushing valve =S ..0 - ..0 taken into account 2
Open Center =P
6th directional valve element
1)
Max. pressure in bar, measured at M, ad- Connection threads
justable via the LS pressure relief valve ..0 - ..0
01 = Pipe threads
7th directional valve element to standard ISO 228/1
..0 - ..0 A, B, T2 = G 3/8
p, P2, T, T3 = G 1/2
8th directional valve element M, LS, T1 = G 1/4
..0 - ..0 a, b = G 1/4
9th directional valve element Further
..0 - ..0 details in
clear text
10th directional valve element
..0 - ..0 M *
Secondary valve at connection port "A"

Secondary valve at connection port "B"

Final element
Flow at connection port "A" (in l/mm)

Flow at connection port "B" (in l/mm)

L = Blanking plate
LT = Blanking plate
with outlet T3
Directional valve spool

Operation orientation
Type of operation

Ordering details: see page 6

1)
set with a p of 15 bar between M and LS

141
6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Ordering details: additional details for the directional valve element (page 5)

Secondary valves
H..0* = direct actuated pressure relief valve with anti-cavitation function
* = pressure value in bar
port "A"

port "B"
E = anti-cavitation check valve
Q = plug
Operation orientation
No code = without mechanical operator (H200)
A = mechanical operator on connection side A
B = mechanical operator on connection side B
Type of operation
A2 = 3 positions spool return via a spring
E2 = 4 positons spool return via a spring
Z1 = mechanical operator with tongue ( 6)
H 200 = hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
H 230 = hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring,
stroke limitation on connection sides A and B
Flow at connection ports
050 = flow at connection port B in l/min
Other flow values (rated in 10 l/min ranges): please consult us
050 = flow at connection port A in l/min
Other flow values (rated in 10 l/min ranges): please consult us

Directional valve spools

C B

2 1 3 = EA

Q U

C B

2 1 3
= JA

C B

2 1 3 = QA

C B

4 2 1 3
= WA

142
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

Ordering details: separate element

Inlet element SX 10 1X ..0 M *

see ordering details page 5

see ordering details of inlet element page 5

Directional valve ele- SX 10 1X ..0 - ..0 M *

ment

see ordering details pages 5 and 6

see ordering details of directional valve element pages 5 and 6

Final element SX 10 1X M *

see ordering details page 5 2

see ordering details of final element page 5

Ordering example - complete block SX10

Desired execution: 3 directional valve elements

Inlet element: Open Center,

Max. pressure = 200 bar

3 directional valve elements:

1st and 2nd elements: - Spool symbol = EA
- Flow in A = 50 l/min, Flow in B = 50 l/min
- Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring
- Secondary valve in A = direct operated pressure relief valve with anti-cavitation
function set at 250 bar
- Secondary valve in B = plug
3rd element: - Spool symbol = JA
- Flow in A = 50 l/min, Flow in B = 50 l/min
- Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
- Secondary valves in A and B = anti-cavitation check valve

Final element: Blanking plat

Ordering details:
inlet element

1st directional valve element

3 SX 10 L 1X P 200 EA 50 - 50 A2Z1 A H250 Q
2nd directional valve element
EA 50 - 50 A2Z1 A H250 Q
3rd directional valve element
JA 50 - 50 H200 E E L M 01
final element

143
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Inlet element

Closed center with flushing valve Open center

Ordering detail Q3 N Ordering detail Q3 N
S P

Q Q

MT MT

U U

U3 U2 U3 U2

Final element

Blanking plate
Ordering detail
L

Q MT U

Blanking plate with outlet T3

Ordering detail
U4
LT

Q MT

144
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

Directional valve element

Representation of the SX directional valve element
Simplified symbol used to illustrate SX directional control circuits

A
B

P LS T
Spool variations
Ordering detail
C B

EA...-...: Symbol EA 2 1 3 2
Q U

C B
JA...-...: Symbol JA 2 1 3

C B
QA...-...: Symbol QA 2 1 3

C B
WA...-...: Symbol WA 4 2 1 3

Type of operator
Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring 3 positions
Ordering detail
B
A2Z1A C

Q MT U

Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side B, spool return via a spring 4 positons
Codification
E2Z1B B
C

Q MT U

145
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Directional valve element

Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail B
H200 C

c b

Q MT U

Hydraulic operator with adjustable stop pins, spool return via a spring
Ordering detail
B
H230
C

c b

Q MT U

Secondary valves

Direct operated pressure relief valve with anti-cavitation function (on connection side A); plug
(on connection side B)

Ordering detail
H...Q

B
C

Q MT U

Anti-cavitation check valve (on connection side A); plug (on connection side B)
Ordering detail
EQ

B
C

Q MT U

146
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

Unit dimensions (in mm)

21: 226
:9-6 1 Inlet element
93 2 Directional valve element
3 Blanking plate
4 Cover for hydraulic operator
MT U2
5 Stroke limitation and hydraulic connection
6 Mechanical operator with tongue
218-6

7 Cover for spring return arrangement

:4

8 LS flow control valve

81

9
53-6

(tightening torque = 20 10% Nm)

36-6

Q3 9 LS pressure relief valve

9 (tightening torque = 45 10% Nm)
24

10 Secondary pressure relief valve

22 (tightening torque = 30 to 35 Nm)
:5-6 :4 11 3 tie rods (nuts tightening torque =
97-6 20 10% Nm)
86 86
73-6 73-6 2
4 29 29

C B
>
43

C: B:
>

C B
>
43

C9 B9
>

C B
>
43

C8 B8
> >

3
2-6

C B
43

C7 B7
>

B
>

C 5
43

C6 B6
>
515

47:

C B
>
43

C5 B5
>

6
C B
>
43

C4 B4
>

21 C B 5
>
43

C3 B3
>

8 C B
>
43

C2 B2 7
>

37
44-6
68-6
74

2
88

Q U

MT
9-4 41-6 59
U2 :
61-6 64-6
73-6 79

147
12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Inlet element
21: 226
:9-6
93

MT U2

218-6
:4
81

74
53-6
36-6
Q3
9

24
44-6
37
U3
44

68-6
74
88

Q U

MT
27 41-6 59
9-4
61-6 64-6 U2
73-6 79

Mechanical or manual operators, spool return via a spring

Spool return via a spring Manual operators

3 positions Ordering detail
Ordering detail Z1 35
7G9
A2
Tongue thickness
6 mm
43 7
7

4 positions
Ordering detail
E2

72

148
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail
H200
32-6 32-6

2-6

2-6
47 47

Hydraulic operator with adjustable stop pin, spool return via a spring
Ordering detail
H230 32-6 32-6
2-6

2-6
2

57 57

Final element

Blanking plate
Ordering detail
9-4
L
28-6
49

27 86 86

Blanking plate with outlet T3

Ordering detail
56
LT 9-4
U4
28-6
49

2:

27 86 86

149
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Assembly possibilities

:
9
24

21

24

5
24 2
23
7
6

22 3

3
8

24

1 Inlet element 8 LS flow control valve

2 Directional valve element 9 LS pressure relief valve
3 Blanking plate L 10 Secondary pressure relief valve
4 Cover for hydraulic operator H200 11 Plug for individual pressure compensator
5 Cover for hydraulic operator H230 12 Plug
6 Mechanical operator with tongue type Z1 13 Seals plate
7 Spring return arrangement type A2

Pipe connections

01

e3 ports d1 d2 t1 t2
e2
u3

A, B, T2 G 3/8 - 14 1

P, P2, T, T3 G 1/2 34 14 1
u2

M, LS, T1, a, b G 1/4 25 12 1

150
RE 64132/05.09 | SX 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

Notes

151
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 10 | RE 64132/05.09

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informati-
Hydraulics BP 101 on set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Telefon +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain applicati-
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telefax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 on can be derived from our information. The information given does not
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
www.boschrexroth.com must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process
of wear and ageing.
Subject to revision.

152
LUDV control block of RE 64128/01.11 1/18
Replaces: 06.06
sandwich plate design

Type SX 12

Nominal size 12
Component series 1X
Maximum pressure, pump side 250 bar
Maximum pressure, actuator side 300 bar
Inlet flow 120 l/min
Flow at each directional valve element 70 l/min

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Distributes the flow between the directional valve elements
Features 1 according to the requirements, independently of the pressure
About this datasheet 2 and available flow.
Functional description, section 3 Compact sandwich plate design, can be combined so that
the control block can meet the requirements of differing ma-
Symbol, hydraulic 3
chines.
Technical data 4
No shuttle valves.
Characteristic curves 5 Limitation of system maximum pressure via LS pressure
Ordering details 6 to 8 relief valve.
Inlet elements - End elements 9 System protection via LS and secondary pressure relief
Directional valve elements 10 to 12 valves.
Unit dimensions 13 to 15
Assembly possibilities 16
Pipe connections 17

153
2/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

About this datasheet

This manual describs functioning, technical datas and ordering details of control blocks SX 12. This manual is illustrated with
hydraulic symbols, sections and unit dimensions drawings.

Related documents

SX 12 are system components.

Also follow the instructions for the other system components.

Also follow the instructions in the following manuals:
- System documentation from the system manufacturer
- Service instruction manual RE64025
- Spare parts manual RDEF64128-E
- Assembly Instructions RE64128-S

154
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/18

Functional description, section

2 5
B C

4 4 6
MT
7

U Q U

2
1 Housing
2 Main spool
3 Check valves
4 Pressure compensator
5 Secondary valve
6 Plug
The SX 12 directional control block basically consists of one limitation of the maximum pressure in the system.
inlet element, a number of directional valve elements and one Each SX directional valve element is composed of a housing
final element. (1), a spool (2), two load-holding check valves (3), a pressure
The inlet element contains 2 fixing points and the pipe con- compensator (4), cavities (5) for secondary relief/anti-cavita-
nection ports P, T, LS, M. tion check valves, and anti-cavitation check valves or plugs
This element also contains all the components required for (6).
the system function, namely: a flow control valve for the con- The final element has one fixing point.
trolled unloading of the LS line and a LS relief valve for the

Symbol, hydraulic
5
7
Ports
P Pump
A, B Actuator
T Tank
6
LS Load Sensing
B
C

Q MT U
4 3

155
4/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
Design flangeable (up to 10 directional valve elements)
Description Flow distribution between the directional valve elements ac-
cording to the requirements, independently of the pressure
and available flow
Type SX 12
Installation optional
Connections threads
Nominal size 12

hydraulic
Max. permitted flow port P l/min 120
port A, B l/min 70
Max. leakage oil flow (at 100 bar, 36 mm2/s) cm3/min 15
Max. operating pressure per connection
P, M, LS bar 250
A, B bar 300
T bar 20
Max. control pressure per connection
a, b bar 35
We recommend the use of control curve 6 to 25 bar, and inlet
pressure min. 30 bar
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524 (suitable for
NBR seals)
HEES fluids to VDMA 24568 as well as fluids to Rexroth data
sheet RE 90221: please consult us.
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C -20 to +80 (for higher temperatures please consult us)
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic Class 9, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
fluid cleanliness class according to NAS 1638 retention rate of 10 75

mechanical
Weight Inlet element kg 7
Directional valve element kg 3.3
End element kg 1.5
Spool return force N 90 to 125 (with standard spring)
Max. permitted actuation force on the spool
(for 1 million cyles)
axial N 1000 during 20 % of total cycles then 500
radial N 16

Application guidelines
Pipe connections
P, T (A) P, T (S) M, LS A, B, P3 a, b
Tightening torque for the pipe connections Nm 50 70 20 50 20
Recommended fixing at 3 points
Flatness of the mounting surface mm 0,5
Setting of system pressure via the LS relief valve
Do not use a high-pressure cleaner for cleaning.

156
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/18

Characteristic curves (measured at = 41 mm2/s and = 50C)

Pressure differential with P switched to A/B Pressure differential with A/B switched to T
with spool 60 l/min with spool 60 l/min

60 15

Pressure differential in bar

Pressure differential in bar

40 10

T
to

T
5
5

/B
5/B

to
A5
oA
20 5

1
Pt

/B
/B 1

A1
o A1
Pt

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 20 40 60 80 100
Flow in l/min Flow in l/min

Flow at each directional valve element in relationship to the regulating 2

p = P - LS, with spool 60 l/min

30
Pressure differential in bar

25

20

15

10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Flow in l/min

Flow control by the individual pressure compensators

60
Flow in l/min

40

20

0 50 100 150 200

Pressure differential in bar

157
6/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Ordering details: separate element

Inlet element SX 12 1X ..0 M *

see ordering details page 6

see ordering details of inlet element page 6

Directional valve
element
SX 12 1X ..0 - ..0 M *

see ordering details page 6 and 7

see ordering details of directional valve element pages 6 and 7

End element SX 12 1X M *

see ordering details page 6

see ordering details of end element page 6

Ordering example: complete block SX 12

Desired execution: 3 directional valve elements

Inlet element: Closed Center,

max. pressure = 250 bar

3 directional valve elements:

1st a. 2nd element: - Spool symbol = EA
- Flow in A = 70 l/min, flow in B = 70 l/min
- Mechanical operation with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring
- Secondary valve in A = relief/anti-cavitation check valve set at 300 bar
- Secondary valve in B = plug
3rd element: - Spool symbol= JA
- Flow in A = 70 l/min, flow in B = 70 l/min
- Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
- Secondary valves in A and B = anti-cavitation check valve

End element: Blanking plate

Ordering details:

Inlet element

1st directional valve element

3 SX 12 L 1X A 250 EA 070 - 070 A2Z1 A H300 Q

2nd directional valve element

EA 070 - 070 A2Z1 A H300 Q

3rd directional valve element

JA 070 - 070 H200 E E L M 01
End element

158
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/18

Ordering details: directional control block SX 12

Inlet element Directional valve element End element
1 to 10 elements

1. directional valve element

SX 12 L 1X ..0 ..0 - ..0 Sealing material
M= NBR seals
2. directional valve element ! Attention!
Number of
directional ..0 - ..0 The compatibility of the
valve spools seals and pressure fluid has
to be taken into account
1 to 10
3. directional valve element
Medium
pressure =L ..0 - ..0 Connection threads
01 = Pipe threads to
Series 10 to 19 = 1X
4. directional valve element standard ISO 228/1
(10 to 19: unchanged
inlet A:
installation and connec- ..0 - ..0
tion dimensions) A, B = G 1/2
P, T = G 1/2
5. directional valve element
P2, T2 = G 3/4
Inlet element
..0 - ..0 LS, LS2 = G 1/4 2
Closed Center without
primary relief valve =A a, b = G 1/4
Closed Center with 6. directional valve element inlet S:
flushing valve =S A, B, P3 = G 1/2
..0 - ..0
P, T = G 3/4
Max. pressure in bar, measured
1)

at M, adjustable via the LS, M = G 1/4

7. directional valve element
LS pressure relief valve a, b = G 1/4
..0 - ..0 41 = UNF threads to
standard ISO 11926
8. directional valve element inlet S:
A, B, P3 = 7/8 UNF-2B
..0 - ..0 P, T = 1-1/16 UNF-2B
LS, M = 9/16 UNF-2B
9. directional valve element a, b = 9/16 UNF-2B
..0 - ..0 Further
details in
10. directional valve element clear text
..0 - ..0 L M *
Secondary valve at connection port "A"

Secondary valve at connection port "B"

Flow at connection port "A" (in l/min)

Flow at connection port "B" (in l/min)

End element
L= Blanking plate
LP = Blanking plate with
Directional valve spool

additional inlet P3
Operation orientation
Type of operation

ordering details: see page 7

1)
set with a p = 15 bar betweem M and LS

159
8/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Ordering details: directional valve element

..0 ..0

Connection port "B"

Connection port "A"
Secondary valves
A..0* = pressure relief valve, direct actuated
H..0* = relief/anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated
* = pressure value in bar
E = anti-cavitation check valve
Q = plug
M 3) = with cavity for secondary valves
Operation orientation
No code = without mechanical operator (H200 oder H230)
A= mechanical operator on connection side A
B= mechanical operator on connection side B
Type of operation
A2 = spool return via a spring
B2 = spool return via a spring, detent in spool position 2
C2 = spool return via a spring, detent in spool position 1
D2 = spool return via a spring, detent in spool position 1, 2
M1 = manual operator (not possible with secondary valves when lever in A or B)
R5 = manual operator, encapsulated lever (with bellow)
Z1 = mechanical operator with tongue ( 6)
H 200 = hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
H 230 = hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring,
stroke limitation on connection sides A and B
1) 2)
Flow at connection ports
*** = flow at connection port B in l/min
Other flow values (rated in 10 l/min ranges): please consult us
*** = flow at connection port A in l/min
Other flow values (rated in 10 l/min ranges): please consult us

Spool symbol
C B

2 1 3
= EA
Q U

C B
= JA
2 1 3

C B
= QA
2 1 3

2)
accuracies: consult us
3)
only when ordering a separate element

160
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/18

Inlet elements

Closed Center without primary relief valve Closed Center with flushing valve
Ordering detail Ordering detail
A S

U Q Q3 MT N

U3 Q

MT3 MT

End elements

Blanking plate Blanking plate with additional inlet P3

Ordering detail Ordering detail
L LP

Q4

Q MT U MT U

161
10/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Directional valve elements

Representation of the SX directional valve element

Simplified symbol used to illustrate SX directional control circuits

B
C

Q MT U

Spool types
Ordering detail C B

2 1 3

EA...-... : Symbol EA Q U

C B

2 1 3
JA...-... : Symbol JA

C B

2 1 3
QA...-... : Symbol QA

162
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/18

Directional valve elements

Type of operation

Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail
H200
B
C

c b

Q MT U

Hydraulic operator with stroke limitation, spool return via a spring

2
Ordering detail
H230
B
C

c b

Q MT U

Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring
Ordering detail
A2Z1A
B
C

Q MT U

163
12/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Directional valve elements

Secondary valves

Relief/anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated (connection side A); direct actuated pressure relief valve
(connection side B)
(the setting of the given pressure values is carried out at a flow of 5 l/min for the valve unmounted in the distribution
element; tolerance +5b 0)
Ordering detail
H...A...

B
C

Q MT U

Anti-cavitation check valve (connection side A); plug (connection side B)

Ordering detail
EQ

B
C

Q MT U

Plug (connection side A); relief/anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated (connection side B)
(the setting of the given pressure values is carried out at a flow of 5 l/min for the valve unmounted in the distribution
element; tolerance +5b 0)
Ordering detail
QH...

B
C

Q MT U

164
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/18

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

8: 244 8: 1 Inlet element
62 > > 62 2 Directional valve element
3 End element
9 4 Cover for hydraulic operation

42
:
5 Stroke limitation and hydraulic
Q MT U connection
6 Mechanical operator with tongue
7 Cover for spring return arrangement
MT3
216

Q3 8 LS flow control valve

(tightening torque = 20 Nm 10%)
82-6

77

9 LS relief valve
5:
U3
47-6

(tightening torque = 45 Nm 10%)

38
9-6
10 Secondary valve (pressure relief

23-6
37 3: valve)
(tightening torque = 70 Nm 10%)
24 63-6 63-6 26 11 Plug for individual pressure
44 44 !22
compensator
(tightening torque = 70 Nm 10%)
28 4 2
22 12 Plug
(tightening torque = 70 Nm 10%)
36

23
13 4 tie rods
C B (tightening torque = 24 Nm 10%)
>

c b
49

C: B:
14 4 fixation points 11
>

15 2 transport points M10, 20 deep

C B
>

c b
49

C9 B9
>

C B
>

c b
49

C8 B8
>

C B
>

c b
49

C7 B7
>

C B
>

21
49

C6 B6
551

526

5 6
>

C B
>

c b
49

C5 B5
>

C B
>
49

C4 B4
>

8
C B 7
>
49

C3 B3
>

C B 3
>
49

C2 B2
>

27

MT 51
38
55-6

52
59
71

Q U
28

4
22
48 53 2
25
91-6 91-6

165
14/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Inlet element
Closed Center without primary relief valve Closed Center with flushing valve
Ordering detail Ordering detail
A 244 S
> >
244
58
42
> >

Q MT U Q U MT

N
MT3

216
216

Q3

97-6
84-6
75-6
23-6
77

23-6
U3
5:

47-6
38
9-6

37 3: 22

23
27

27
MT

27
51 MT
38
55-6

52

53

62
59

Q U
71

78

Q U
N
22 4 6
48 53
55 43
91-6 91-6 91-6 91-6

Mechanical or manual operators, spool return via a spring

Spool return via a spring Mechanical operation
Ordering detail Ordering detail 36
7G9
A2 Z1
tongue thickness
!44 6 mm
8
Spool return via a spring 8
Ordering detail
B2 / C2 / D2 Manual operation
Ordering detail
2 1
!72 R5
3
26 28
Manual operation
2 244
Ordering detail 1( 1
24
41( 3
M1
21
276

331
336

78

29
336

35
47-6
47-6

:1

166
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/18

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Hydraulic operation, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail
H200

62 62

Hydraulic operation with stroke limitation, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail
H230

8: 8:
2

End element
Blanking plate Blanking plate with additional inlet P3
Ordering detail Ordering detail
L LP

28
36

49

22 Q4
63-6 63-6
23-6

42-6

28
36

49

22
63-6 63-6

167
16/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX12 RE 64128/01.11

Assembly possibilities

24

: 9

2
25

22
6
3

23
6
4 21
5

1 Inlet element 8 LS flow control valve

2 Directional valve element 9 LS relief valve
3 Blanking plate (with/without port P3) 10 Secondary pressure relief valve
4 Cover for hydraulic operator with spool return via a spring: 11 Plug for individual pressure compensator
H200 12 Spring return arrangement, type B2, C2
5 Cover for hydraulic operator with stroke limitation: H230 13 Manual operator, type M1
6 Mechanical operator with tongue: Z1 14 Manual operator, encapsulated lever, type R5
7 Spring return arrangement, type A2

168
RE 64128/01.11 SX12 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/18

Pipe connections

01 41

e3 connection d1 d2 t1 t2 d1 d2 t1 t2
e2 A, B, P3 G 1/2 34 A, B: 16 2.5 7/8 UNF-2B 35 A, B: 16 2.4
u3

P3: 20 P3: 20
u2

P, T (A) G 1/2 34 20 2.5

P, T (S) G 3/4 42 25 2.5 1-1/16 UNF-2B 42 24 2.4
M, LS, a, b G 1/4 25 16 1.5 9/16 UNF-2B 26 16 1.6

169
18/18 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 12 | RE 64128/01.11

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Hydraulics BP 101 tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.
Subject to revision.

170
LUDV control block of RE 64125/02.11
Replaces: 01.10
1/22

sandwich plate design

Type SX 14, SX 14 S

Nominal size 14
Series 2X
Maximum pressure, pump side 250 bar
Maximum pressure, actuator side 300 bar
Inlet flow 175 l/min

Table of contents Special features

Contents Page Distributes the flow between the directional valve elements
Special features 1 according to the requirements, independently of the pressure
About this datasheet 2 and available flow.
Sections 3 Compact sandwich plate design, can be combined so that
the control block can meet the requirements of several type
Functional description, Symbol 4 of machines.
Technical data 5, 6 No shuttle valves.
Characteristic curves 7 Limitation of system maximum pressure via LS pressure
Ordering details 8 to 11 relief valve.
Inlet elements 12 System protection via LS and secondary pressure relief
Directional valve elements 13 to 15 valves.
Final elements, Circuit example 16
Unit dimensions 17 to 20
Assembly possibilities 21
Pipe connections 22

171
2/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

About this datasheet

This manual describs functioning, technical datas and ordering details of control blocks SX 14 and SX 14 S. This manual is il-
lustrated with hydraulic symbols, sections and unit dimensions drawings.

Related documents

SX 14 and SX 14 S are system components.

Also follow the instructions for the other system components.

Also follow the instructions in the following manuals:
- System documentation from the system manufacturer
- Service instruction manual RE64025
- Spare parts manual RDEF64125-E
- Assembly Instructions RE64125-S

172
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 3/22

Sections

Standard SX 14 (SX 14) 6 3 2 4 5 4 7

B C

MT
1 Housing
2 Spool
3 Check valves
U U
4 Pressure compensator
5 Secondary valve
6 Plug Q

2
SX 14 S with pressure compensator 5 1 3/4 2 6
and secondary valves (SX 14 S C)
A B

LS

P
T T

SX 14 S without pressure compensator and 1 3 2

without secondary valve (SX 14 S L)

A B

LS

P
T T

173
4/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Functional description

The SX 14 directional control block basically consists of one check valves (3), a pressure compensator (4), cavities (5)
inlet element, a number of directional valve elements and one for secondary relief/anti-cavitation check valves, and
final element. anti-cavitation check valves or plugs (6).
The inlet element contains 2 fixing points and the pipe Each SX 14 S directional valve element is composed of a
connection ports P, T, LS, M. housing (1), a spool (2), one load holding check valve /
This element also contains all the components required for compensator (3/4) or only a load hold check valve (3), and
the system function, namely: a flow control valve for the if needed of cavity for secondary valves (5) or for plugs (6).
controlled unloading of the LS line and a LS relief valve for The final element has one fixing point.
the limitation of the maximum pressure in the system.
Each standard SX 14 (SX 14) directional valve element is
composed of a housing (1), a spool (2), two load holding

Symbol, hydraulic
4
Standard SX 14 (SX 14)

Ports
6
P Pump
A
A, B Actuator
B 5
T Tank
LS Load Sensing

P LS T
3 2

4 3
SX 14 S with pressure
compensator and 5
secondary valves
(SX 14 S C)
A
B
6

P LS T
2

SX 14 S without pressure
compensator and
without secondary valve
(SX 14 S L) A
B

P LS T
2

174
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 5/22

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Design Flangeable (up to 9 directional valve elements)
Description Flow distribution between the directional valve elements
according to the requirements, independently of the
pressure and available flow
Type SX 14
Assembly position Any
Connections Threads
Nominal size 14
Standard primer Blue (RAL 5010)

Hydraulic
Max. permissible flow on port P l/min 175
Standard leakage oil flow on load holding cm3/mn 20
(at 100 bar, 36 mm2/s)
Max. operating pressure per connection 2
P, M, LS, D, DLS bar 250
A, B bar 300
T bar 20
Secondary valves setting pressure tolerances
(at 5 l/min)
H..0 direct actuated bar
(SX14 S) setting tolerance
71 120 -4 / +8
121 200 -6 / +12
201 270 -8 / +12
271 320 -10 / +14
321 420 -12 / +18

H..0 pilot operated bar 0 / +5

(standard SX 14)
Max. control pressure per connection 1)
a, b bar 35
We recommend the use of control curve 6 to 25 bar,
and inlet pressure (4TH6 curve no. 70)
Pressure fluid Mineral oils (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524 2).
Other hydraulic fluids, such as HEES (synthetic esters)
according to VDMA 24568, as well as hydraulic fluids as
specified under RE 90221, at request.
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +100 (for higher temperatures, please consult us)
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Max. admissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic Class 9, we therefore recommend a filter
fluid, cleanliness class according to NAS 1638 with a minimum retention rate of 10 75

1) pilot pressure regulated by a pressure reducing valve and

protected by a relief valve
2) suitable for NBR seals

175
6/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Mechanical
Weight Inlet element kg 10
Directional valve element SX 14 kg 4.5
Directional valve element SX 14 S
kg
with secondary valves 5
Directional valve element SX 14 S
without secondary valve kg 4
Blanking plate kg 2
Spool return force N Minimum value 54, depending of operation
(for more details please consult us)
Max. permissible actuation force on the spool
(for 1 million cycles)
axial N 1000 during 20 % of total cycles then 500
radial N 20
Storage temperature range, ambient C -40 to +60

Electrical
Electrical detent when spool is pushed (operation S2)
(datas for 25 C)
supply voltage V 12 (min. 10; max. 16)
supply current mA 780 (min. 670; max. 785)
power input W 9.35 5 %
resistance 15.4 5
lifetime 1 million cycles at 90 C, work factor 50 %
protection classification IP65
maximum temperature C 110 at a room temperature of 90 C
reached by the electro-magnet
Solenoid On / Off (operation V212)
supply voltage V 12
supply current A 4
power input W 48
resistance 3

Application guidelines
Pipe connections
A, B, P, T3 T a, b, DLS, D
LS, M, T1
Tightening torque for the pipe connections Nm 70 100 20 50
Recommended fixing at 3 locations maximum
Flatness of the mounting surface mm 0.5
Setting of system pressure via the LS relief valve
- Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.
- No free-wheeling diode required for electical operations.
- Mechanical operation spool : a greasy appearance on the tongue side is normal (due to natural effect of seal lubrification). It
could be neccessary to proceed to a regular cleaning of this area.

176
 RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 7/22

Characteristic curves (measured at = 36 mm2/s and = 50 C)

Pressure differential with P switched to A/B Pressure differential with A/B switched to T
with spool 200 l/min with spool 200 l/min

120 30
pressure differential

pressure differential
80 SX 14 20
in bar

in bar
SX 14 S
A
to
P T
B to
40 10

0 100 200 0 100 200

flow in l/min flow in l/min

Pressure differential in the neutral position Pressure differential in the neutral position
of inlet element type P (Open Center execution) of the inlet element with flushing valve
30 60
2
pressure differential

pressure differential
in bar (P-T)

in bar (P-T)
20 40

10 20

0 100 200 0 100 200

flow in l/min flow in l/min

Secondaries valves characteristic Anti-cavitation check valves Characteristic

A/B switched to T T switched to A/B
300 30
pressure differential

pressure differential

H..0
pilot operated
in bar

200 20
in bar

H..0
direct actuated
100 10

0 50 100 0 50 100
flow in l/min flow in l/min

Priority flow in relationship to the inlet flow

30
priority flow in l/min

20

10

0 50 100
inlet flow in l/min

177
8/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Ordering details: separate elements

Inlet element SX 14 2X ..0 M *

see ordering details page 9

see ordering details of inlet element page 9

Directional SX 14 2X ..0 -..0 M *

valve element

see ordering details pages 9 and 10

see ordering details of directional valve element pages 9 and 10

Final element SX 14 2X M *

see ordering details page 9

see ordering details of final element page 9

178
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 9/22

Ordering details: SX 14 directional control block

inlet element directional valve element

final element
1 to 9 elements

Seals
1st directional valve element M= NBR seals
Attention!
SX 14 L 2X ..0 ..0 - ..0 The compatibility of the
2nd directional valve element seals and pressure fluid has
Number or to be taken into account
directional ..0 - ..0 Connection threads
valve spools 01 = Pipe threads to
1to 9 3rd directional valve element
standard ISO 228/1
Medium ..0 - ..0 P, A, B, T3 = G 3/4
pressure =L T =G1
4th directional valve element
Series 20 to 29 = 2X LS, DLS, M = G 1/4
(20 to 29, unchanged ..0 - ..0 D = G 1/2
installation and connec- a, b, T1 = G 1/4
tion dimensions) 5th directional valve element
2
Inlet element ..0 - ..0 19 = UNF connection
threads to standard
Closed Center =A
6th directional valve element ISO 11926
Closed Center with priority P, A, B, T3 = 1-1/16
flow divider for dynamic ..0 - ..0 UNF-2B
servo-steering T = 1-5/16 UNF-2B
(with flow in the LS line) = CD 7th directional valve element
LS, DLS, M = 9/16
Closed Center with priority ..0 - ..0 UNF-2B
flow divider for static D = 3/4 UNF-2B
servo-steering (without 8th directional valve element a, b, T1 = 9/16 UNF-2B
flow in the LS line) = CS ..0 - ..0 Further
details in
Open Center =P
9th directional valve element clear text
With flushing valve
(use with variable ..0 - ..0 L M *
displacement pump) =S
1) Max.pressure in bar, measured Final element
at M, adjustable via the LS
L= Blanking plate
Secondary valve at connection port "A"

Secondary valve at connection port "B"

pressure relief valve

Flow at connection port "A" (in l/mim)

Flow at connection port "B" (in l/mim)

R= Outlet element with

Type of directional valve element

tank bridge
C= Outlet element with
solenoid operated control
valve (12 V)
Directional valve spool

Operation orientation

F= Flushing valve
Type of S element

Type of operation

ordering details : see page 10

1) set
with a p of 15 bar between M and LS
(not for inlet element in Open Center execution)

179
10/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Ordering details additional details for the directional valve element (page 9)

..0 ..0
Secondary valves 6)

Connection port "A"

Connection port "B"

A..0* = direct actuated pressure relief valve without anti-cavitation
H..0* = relief / anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated 7)
or direct actuated 8)
* = pressure value in bar
E = anti-cavitation check valve
Q = plug
Z 7) 9) = without cavity for secondary valves
Operation orientation
No code = without mechanical operator
A = mechanical operator on connection side A
B = mechanical operator on connection side B
Type of operation
A2 = spool return via a spring
E2 4) = spool return via a spring, mechanical detent in spool position 3
(4th or float position) pull function only
S2 = spool return via a spring, electrical detent when spool is pushed (12 V)
Z1 = mechanical operator with tongue ( 8 or 10)
H 200 = hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
H 230 = hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring,
stroke limitation on connection sides A and B
V 212 5) = direct electrical operation (12 V)
Type of S element
C = check valve and compensator
L = no compensator (check valve only)
1) 2) Flow at connection ports

060 = flow at connection port B in l/min

120 = flow at connection port B in l/min
Other flow values (rated in 10 l/min ranges): please consult us
060 = flow at connection port A in l/min
120 = flow at connection port A in l/min
Other flow values (rated in 10 l/min ranges): please consult us
Directional valve spools
B A

1 0 2 = EA
P T
B A

1 0 2 = JA
B A

1 0 2 = QA
B A

1 0 2 3
= WA 3)
P T

Type of directional valve element

No code = standard element
S = S element

2) accuracies: consult us 6) except on SX 14 S without secondary valves

3) for hydraulic operation, consult us 7) only available on standard SX 14
4) on SX 14 S, only available on tongue side A 8) only available on SX 14 S
5) if used, consult us 9) only if both sides are not machined

180
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 11/22

Ordering example: complete block SX 14

Desired execution: 4 directional valve elements

Inlet element: Open Center,

Max. pressure = 220 bar

4 directional valve elements:

1st element: Standard element
Spool symbol = EA
Flow in A = 120 l/min, flow in B = 80 l/min
Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring
Secondary valve in A = relief / anti-cavitation check valve set at 300 bar
Secondary valve in B = plug

2nd element: S element

Spool symbol = EA
Flow in A = 120 l/min, flow in B = 80 l/min
Check valve + pressure compensator
Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring 2
Secondary valve in A = direct actuated relief / anti-cavitation check valve set at 300 bar
Secondary valve in B = direct actuated relief / anti-cavitation check valve set at 250 bar

3rd element : S element

Spool symbol = EA
Flow in A = 100 l/min, flow in B = 100 l/min
Check valve
Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A, spool return via a spring
Plugs in A and B

4th element : Standard element

Spool symbol = JA
Flow in A = 100 l/min, Flow in B = 100 l/min
Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
Secondary valves in A and B = anti-cavitation check valve

Final element : Blanking plate

Type code:

inlet element

1st directional valve element

4 SX 14 L 2X P 220 EA 120 - 080 A2Z1 A H300 Q

2nd directional valve element

S EA 120- 080 C A2Z1 A A300 A250

3rd directional valve element

S EA 100- 100 L A2Z1 A Q Q

4th directional valve element

JA 100- 100 H200 E E L M 01

final element

181
12/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Inlet elements
Closed Center Open Center
Ordering detail Ordering detail
A P
M M

P P

LS LS

T T

T1 T1

Closed Center with priority flow divider Flushing valve

(use with variable displacement pump
for static servo-steering for dynamic servo-steering and qmin)
Ordering detail Ordering detail Ordering detail
CS CD S

LS

M LS D M LS D

DLS DLS

P P

T T

T1

182
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 13/22

Directional valve elements

Representation of the SX directional valve element

Simplified symbol used to illustrate SX directional control circuits

A
B

P LS T 2

Spool variations
Ordering detail

B A

EA...-... : symbol EA 1 0 2

P T

B A

JA...-... : symbol JA 1 0 2

B A

QA...-... : symbol QA 1 0 2

B A

WA...-... : symbol WA 1 0 2 3

P T

183
14/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Directional valve elements

Type of operation

Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring A

B
Ordering detail
b a
H200

P LS T

Hydraulic operator with stroke limitation, spool return via

A
a spring B

b a
Ordering detail
H230

P LS T

Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A,

A
spool return via a spring B

Ordering detail
A2Z1A

P LS T

Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A,

A
spool return via a spring and mechanical detent when B
spool is pulled

Ordering detail
E2Z1A
P LS T

Direct electrical operation

A
B
Ordering detail
V212

P LS T

Mechanical operator with tongue on connection side A,

A
spool return via a spring and electrical detent when spool B
is pushed

Ordering detail
S2Z1A

P LS T

184
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 15/22

Directional valve elements

Secondary valves

Relief / anti-cavitation check valve, pilot operated

(connection side A); direct actuated pressure relief valve
(connection side B) on standard SX 14
(the setting of the given pressure values is carried out A
at a flow of 5 l/min) B

Ordering detail
H...A...
P LS T

Anti-cavitation check valve (connection side A);

plug (connection side B) on standard SX 14

Ordering detail A
EQ B
2

P LS T

Plug (connection side A); direct actuated pressure relief

valve (connection side B) on SX 14 S

Ordering detail B
QH... C

Q MT U

185
16/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Final elements

Outlet element with solenoid operated control Outlet element with Flushing valve
valve (for use with inlet element CS or CD)

Ordering detail Ordering detail

C F
T

P LS P LS

Blanking plate Outlet element with tank bridge T

Ordering detail Ordering detail
L R

P LS T P LS

Circuit example: complete directional control block

M b B1 A1 b B2 A2 B3 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 b B6 A6 b B7 A7 b B8 A8
P
LS

T T3

T1 a a a a a

Open center 8 directional Outlet element

inlet valve elements with tank bridge T

186
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 17/22

Unit dimensions (in mm)

SX 14 directional control block with inlet element in open center execution

432
255 1 Open center inlet element P
5 62 233 233 2 Flow control valve
(tightening torque = 20 10 % Nm)
3 LS relief valve
4 (tightening torque = 45 10 % Nm)
N 4 Pressure gauge connection
3
272-6

5 Directional valve element

245-6

232-6

standard SX 14
241

6 Directional valve element SX 14 S

:2

:2
91

Q3 7 Hydraulic operation cover with stroke

72
U3
49
46

limitation, on connection side B

8 Secondary valve
31

21 58
224 224 (pressure relief valve)
337 (tightening torque = 70 10 % Nm)
9 Secondary valve for SX 14 S
99 (pressure relief valve) 2
83-6 83-6
(tightening torque = 32 10 % Nm)
24 59 59
56 56 10 Hydraulic operation cover,
23 49 49
22 on connection side A
34
11 3 tie rods
(tightening torque = 30 to 35 Nm)
12 3 fixation points 11
5:-6
> 36-6

U4 13 Outlet element with tank bridge T.

8
59

C9 B9
> >
59

C8 B8
> >
59

C7 B7
> > > > >
59

C6 B6
549-6
64:
59

C5 B5
9G9
> >
59

C4 B4
7 21
9
>
59

C3 B3
>

:
> >
59

C2 B2
6 9
22
3:
75

U
:2

N
Q MT U2

21 34
55 3:
2 68
99 99
287

187
18/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Inlet element in open center execution 91

Ordering detail 121,5
64
P
29 91

or

M M
Inlet element in closed center execution T

88

=
Ordering detail

10
44
A P

144
23
29
or

57

=
LS

88
T1
Inlet element with flushing valve 35
Ordering detail

48
S

11
20
63
91

Inlet element in closed center execution 81 121,5

with priority flow divider 52 100
43 89,5
15 69
Ordering detail 20
11

CD or CS

35
DLS DLS
88

=
9

144
M

2
P
LS
29
44

D
9
=
T
88

48

62
26

89,5

188
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 19/22

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Hydraulic operator, spool return via a spring
Ordering detail
H200

44

44
61 61

Hydraulic operator with stroke limitation, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail
H230
44

44
30 61 61 30 2

Mechanical operator with tongue, spool return via a spring

Ordering detail
A2Z1 8 0 8

8 -0,1
0
8F8

35 41,5

Mechanical operator with tongue, mechanical detent in position 3

Ordering detail 5 Position 3
E2Z1
Position 1 and 2
8 0 8
8 -0,1
0

8F8

87,5 41,5

Mechanical operator with tongue, electrical detent when spool is pushed

Ordering detail
S2Z1 Connector DEUTSCH DT 04 - 2P - CE04
(protection IP67)
~
550

8 0 8
8 -0,1
0

8F8

90 41,5

189
20/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Direct electrical operation

Ordering detail
V212
Connector DEUTSCH DT 04 - 2P - CE04 Connector DEUTSCH DT 04 - 2P - CE04
(protection IP67) (protection IP67)

100 100

129 129

Blanking plate Outlet element with tank Outlet element with sole- Flushing valve
bridge noid operated control valve

Ordering detail Ordering detail Ordering detail Ordering detail

L R C F

49,5

28

47 49,5 25,5 49,5

8,5
34 25,5 25,5
Connector
AMP
Timer Junior

C
88
88

88
56
23
23

23

T3
11

T3

190
RE 64125/02.11 SX 14, SX 14 S Bosch Rexroth AG 21/22

Assembly possibilities

12
10

11 7

9-2 6

5
9-3
4
9-4

A
3
A
A

2
12
1 10
15
13
14 11
9-1
13
14

1 Inlet element with priority flow divider CD or CS 9-3 Spring return arrangement, mechanical detent in spool
2 Inlet element - Closed Center A - Open Center P position 3, type E2
or with flushing valve S 9-4 Spring return arrangement, electrical detent when spool
3 Directional valve element SX14 or SX14S is pushed, type S2
4 Blanking plate L 10 Hydraulic operator with spool return via a spring H200
5 Oulet element with 11 Hydraulic operator with stroke limitation H230
tank bridge R 12 Direct electrical operation V212
6 Oulet element with solenoid operated control valve C 13 LS relief valve
7 Flushing valve F 14 Flow control valve
9-1 Mechanical operator with tongue Z1 15 Secondary valve
9-2 Spring return arrangement, type A2

191
22/22 Bosch Rexroth AG SX 14, SX 14 S RE 64125/02.11

Pipe connections

01 19

d2 connection d1 d2 t1 t2 d1 d2 t1 t2
A, B, P, T3 G 3/4 42 25 2,5 1-1/16 UNF-2B 42 24 2,4
t2

d1

T G1 47 27 2,5 1-5/16 UNF-2B 50 24 3,2

t1

M, LS, DLS, a, b, T1 G 1/4 25 16 1,5 9/16 UNF-2B 26 16 1,6

D G 1/2 34 20 2,5 3/4 UNF-2B 32 18 2,4

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Hydraulics BP 101 tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.
Subject to revision.

192
LUDV control block in mono block/sandwich RE 64321/05.2012 1/12

Replaces: 11.2011
plate design
M6-15

Data sheet

2
Size 15
Component series 3X
Nominal pressure:
On the pump side 350 bar
On the consumer side 420 bar
Maximum flow:
On the pump side 200 l/min
On the consumer side 160 l/min
3M6-15

Table of contents Fields of application

Contents Page Wheel loaders

Fields of application 1 Bulldozers
Features 2 Crawler loaders
Set-up 2 More applications upon request
Function, section 3
Technical data 4, 5
Characteristic curve 5
Ordering code 6, 7
Control spool variants 8
Line connections 8, 9
Circuit diagram 9
Unit dimensions 10, 11
Project planning aid 12
Related documents 12

193
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-15 | RE 64321/05.2012

Features

System Actuation
Load pressure-independent flow distribution LUDV Hydraulic
Closed center for variable displacement pump Electro-hydraulic
Regeneration function in the mono block
Pressure
Check valves that can be released by means of the
control pressure (low-leak) Secondary pressure relief
Floating position function Pilot operated, compact screw-in cartridge valve with
Integrated pilot oil generation large nominal widths with combined feed-in function
Integrated priority valve (e. g. for steering) LS pressure relief for the entire control block

Design Flow

Mono block/sandwich plate design Load pressure-compensated

Inlet: Basic block with 2 axes High repeatability
Can be extended by a maximum of 5 directional valves Low hysteresis
End plate Adjustable via stroke limitation

Design

1 2-fold mono block with inlet function

2 Directional valve that can be flanged
3 End plate

4
3

194
RE 64321/05.2012 | M6-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Function, section

Control block M6-15 Load holding

Proportional directional valve according to the LUDV prin- In every functional axis, a load holding valve has been
ciple (from the German for Load pressure-independent flow mounted between pressure compensator (3) and the
distribution). line connections.
Load pressure compensation, LUDV Leakage oil-free blocking
The control block M6-15 works according to the LUDV prin- Releasable check valves can be integrated into ports B1
ciple. With this load-sensing version, the pressure compen- and B2. This blocking works in a leakage oil-free manner
sators (3) are mounted between the control spools (2) and and prevents lowering of the load over a longer period of
the consumer ports (A, B). time. The check valves are controlled open with pilot pres-
The highest load pressure of all consumers involved is notified sure from a.
to all pressure compensators and simultaneously to the pump. Flow limitation
As opposed to conventional LS versions, there is no un- The maximum flow can be set individually, using the stroke
wanted standstill of individual consumers with LUDV if the limitation (6).
pump flow is not sufficient for supplying all functions with the Pressure relief, consumer ports
desired rated volume. The speed of all working movements Pressure relief valves with large nominal widths with
will then be reduced in the same ratio. combined feed-in function (4) protect the consumers from
Consumer control overload and cavitation.
At the control spool (2), the flow direction and the size of the Floating position
flow is determined, which reaches the consumer ports (A or The floating position is optionally realized in axis 1 or 2 by 2
B). means of a 4-position spool.
The spring chambers (5) are supplied with control pres- Regeneration
sure either via the pilot ports a and b (hydraulic control) or In order to avoid cavitation in case of negative loads in axis
internally, via integrated pressure reducing valves (electro- 1 or 2 (e.g. tipping forward or lowering), the oil in the tank
hydraulic control). The size of the pilot pressure in the spring is preloaded by a valve and fed into consumer A after the
chamber (5) determines the stroke of the control spool (2). pressure compensator by means of a feed valve.
The pressure compensator (3) controls the pressure differ-
ential at the control spool (2).

4 5
B C

b c

7 6 3 2 6 7

1 Housing 4 Pressure relief/feed valve

2 Control spool 5 Spring chamber
3 Pressure compensator 6 Stroke limitation

195
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-15 | RE 64321/05.2012

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
2-fold mono block Directional valve End plate
Weight kg 32.9 8.5 3.0
Installation position Any
Type of connection Consumer According to ISO 11926
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Priming RAL 5001

hydraulic
Nominal pressure pnom bar 350
Max. operating P p bar 350
pressure at the port
A, B, LS p bar 420
T p bar 30
Y (L) p Must be led to the tank in a depressurized form
Max. control X (Pst) p bar 40
pressure at the port
a, b p bar 40
Control pressure Hydraulic bar 0 to 35
range
Electro-hydraulic bar 0 to 35
Max. flow at the port P qV, max l/min 200
A, B qV, max l/min 160 (load-compensated with p = 16 bar)
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic fluids,
such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568, as well
as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, upon request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Maximum admissible degree of contamination of the Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
hydraulic fluid cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75
Recommended hydraulic pilot control units 4 THF6, control curve 14 (RE 64553)
2 TH6, control curve 14 (RE 64552)
4 TH6...; control curve 14 (RE 64555)

196
RE 64321/05.2012 | M6-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

electric
Voltage type Direct voltage
On/off valves FTWE 4 K (see RE 58008)
Available voltages V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 10 40
Power consumption at 20 C W 14.4 14.4
Duty cycle % 100 100
Proportional valves MHDRE 02 K (see RE 64658) and
MHDRE 04 K (see RE 64666) MHDRE 02 MHDRE 04
Available voltages V 12 24 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 3.5 11.1 3.5 11.1
Duty cycle % 100 100 100 100
Max. control current A 1.7 0.95 1.7 0.98
Recommended chopper frequency Hz 150 150 200 200
Protection class according to VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), IP 69K (with mating connector mounted and locked) 1)
DIN 40050-9
Plug-in connector type DT04-2P (Deutsch) 2
Control electronics, e.g. BODAS Control unit RA, see RE 95230
Control unit RC, see RE 95200

1) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of delivery and need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.
NOTICE!
The technical data were determined at a viscosity of = 32 mm/s (HLP46: 50 C).

Characteristic curve
Flow resistance Pump Consumer 54
Pressure differential in bar

48
42
36
P mB2, B3
30
P mA1, A2, A3, B1
24
18
12
6

0 40 80 120 160
Flow in l/min

197
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-15 | RE 64321/05.2012

Ordering code

The ordering code serves to specify the technical features distribution organization derives a short type as well as
and requirements. From the ordering code, the Rexroth a material number.

Features overall control block

M6 .... 3X M6 15 S V 35 *

Series
LUDV control block Further details in the
Series M6 = M6 plain text 1)
Control block number Consumer ports
35 = Thread according to
Component series 30 to 39 = 3X ISO 11926
(30 to 39: Unchanged
installation and connection dimensions) Seal material
V= FKM seals
Total number of spool axes = 2 to 7
LS shuttle
Size 15 = 15 L= with LS shuttle (1.2 to 0.6 mm)
Inlet Z= without
Closed center = J000
Closed center with internal priority valve = P
qmax = 80 l/min at port S, pressure specification in bar, 3-digit
LS pressure relief
with LS pressure relief valve, = S
Pressure specification in bar, 3-digit
Type of actuation
Hydraulic =H
Electro-hydraulic =W

End plate

M6 15 3X E *

Plate type
End plate =E Further details in the plain text
Line connections Additional valves
Additional threaded connections =G S= with flushing valve
without connections =Z Z= without
Pilot oil supply Unloading function
Internal pilot oil generation =Y U= Unloading valve
External pilot oil supply = X 2) R= Unloading valve with improved pump dynamics
without =Z B= Unloading valve with improved
pump dynamics and flushing
Z= without
Pilot oil switch-off
A= with shut-off valve
Z= without

1) Customer-specific name plate upon request

2) External pilot oil supply only possible with line connections

198
RE 64321/05.2012 | M6-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Ordering code

Spool axes
1st spool axis

M6 15 3X 1 A
2nd spool axis Mono block

2 A
3rd spool axis

Z Z
4th spool axis

Z Z
5th spool axis

Z Z Directional valves that can

be flanged
6th spool axis

Z Z
7th spool axis 2
Z Z

Spool axis number,

1 to 7
Spool variant 1)
Control spool A/B/T blocked =E
Control spool A/BT =J Low-leak connection 2)
Control spool A/BT throttled =Q L= with low-leak connection
Control spool rapid traverse 3) =N Z= without
4-position spool 2) =W
5-position spool 3) =K Regeneration / check valve 2)
A= with regeneration valve
Flow = Z= without
Consumer port A

Consumer port B

Specification in l/min, 3-digit

Secondary valves
Type of actuation H = Pressure relief/feed valve,
Hydraulic A side B side pressure specification in bar, 3-digit
without shuttle = H00 = H00 E= Feed valve
Z= without
with shuttle 0.6 mm = H06 = H06
with shuttle 0.8 mm = H08 = H08 with hydraulic actuation H:
Cover connection Pilot oil port 4)
Axial =A G= Poppet seal
Radial =R O= Flange O-ring seal
Z= G 1/4 without adapter (only with "H00")
Electro-hydraulic proportional = W2
with electro-hydraulic actuation W2:
supply voltage
1= 24 V
2= 12 V

1)
ATTENTION! Symbols see page 7
2) Only possible in spool axis 1 and 2
All functions can only be combined to a limited extent. Every 3) Only possible in spool axis 2
enquiry requires individual verification! 4) See page 8, 9

199
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-15 | RE 64321/05.2012

Control spool variants

Ordering code +
Main use Symbol
flow specification in l/min

Q( B C
Hydraulic cylinder as consumer
E Spool with blocked ports A/B in
neutral position
Q Q(( U U2

Q( B C
Hydraulic motors as consumer
J Consumer ports A/B T open in
neutral position
Q Q(( U U2

Hydraulic cylinders and motors as

consumer in connection with hose burst
check valve, blocking Q meter and Q( B C
lowering brake valve
Q
Spool with defined remaining opening
(A/BT) in neutral position
Q Q(( U U2
Consumer load connection unloaded in
neutral position
Floating position (A/BT), connection via Q( B C
pressure jump at the control panel
4-position spool
W
Hydraulic cylinder as consumer
Spool with blocked ports A/B in
neutral position Q Q# U U2

Q( B C
Rapid traverse for P kinematics
Differential circuit
N
Spool with defined remaining opening
(A/BT) in neutral position
Q Q# U U2

Q( B C
Power regeneration bulldozer
5-position spool
K
Lowering Differential circuit
Floating (via pressure jump)
Q Q# U U2

Line connections

Connection Dimension Similar standard

P 1 5/16 12 UN P = Pump connection

T 1 5/16 12 UN T = Tank connection
A, B 1 5/16 12 UN ISO 11926 A, B = Consumer port
S 7/8 14 UNF S = Priority connection
LS 9/16 18 UNF LS = Load sensing
a, b G 1/4 (version "Z") DIN EN ISO 1179 a, b = Pilot oil port

200
RE 64321/05.2012 | M6-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Line connections

Connection Dimension Similar standard



Poppet seal (version "G"):

.Y
L10 according to DIN EN ISO 8434

a, b 
6/"

O-ring seal (version "O"):

SAE J 1453-3

Circuit diagram (example)

2
#
"
C
B

#
" C

B

#
"

C
B

4
-4
 49


1 5

Key see page 10.

201
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-15 | RE 64321/05.2012

Unit dimensions, hydraulic actuation (in mm)



4 


-4 49





 

 



1 2-fold mono block

2 Directional valve
3 End plate (without function)
4.1 Control cover A side
4.2 Control cover B side
5 Stroke limitation
6 Secondary pressure
relief valve
7 Tank preload valve
8 LS pressure relief valve
9 LS flow controller
10 Threaded steel pipe fitting
with shuttle valve
11 Three mounting threads
M10, 16 deep
12 Priority valve
12.1 LD pressure relief valve for
priority volume
13 Name plate
14 Tie rod

202
RE 64321/05.2012 | M6-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Unit dimensions, electro-hydraulic actuation (in mm)

111
133
40 b1 a1 b2 a2 b3 a3
83.5 33
9 149.5 33
243 33
321.6
292 20
267
227
162.5 5
92.5
25 2
8
2

A
T

A
1

LS
150
108.5

12
75

67
67

B
36

L1

B
6

1
46 27
9
57 7
4 115.5
3
185.5
10

13
1 2-fold mono block
83

2 Directional valve
3 End plate (without function)
217
4 Control cover B side
5 Stroke limitation 8
6 Secondary pressure 40
146.5

relief valve
12
78.5

7 Tank preload valve

8 LS pressure relief valve
9 LS flow controller
30
82.5

10 Electro-hydraulic actuation
75
117.5

393
P

11 Three mounting threads

150

M10, 16 deep
12 Name plate
13 Tie rod
54

11
96.5

203
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-15 | RE 64321/05.2012

Project planning aid (e. g. for wheel loaders)

General information Diesel motor data

Project number: Designation:
Customer: Power: kW
Machine type: Load speed: 1/min
Machine designation: Max. speed: 1/min
Lifting cylinder: bottom: mm
rod: mm Pump
Active stroke: mm Designation:
Quantity: Units Displacement: cm/rotation
Tip cylinder: bottom: mm Rated speed: 1/min
rod: mm Pump control p: bar
Active stroke: mm Controller type:
Quantity: Units Maximum pump pressure: bar

Supplementary information
Cycle times
Kinematics: Lifting: sec. at mm stroke
Z kinematics Lowering: sec. at mm stroke
P kinematics (parallel) Depressurized lowering: sec. at mm stroke
Tipping backwards: sec. at mm stroke
Tipping forwards: sec. at mm stroke
Option A: l/min
Option B: l/min

Related documents

The control blocks M6-15 are system components.

f Also observe the instructions for the other system components.
f The product may not be commissioned until you are provided with the following documentation and have understood and
observed it.

Title Document number Document type

Control blocks for mobile applications RE 64025-B Operating instructions
System documentation from the Operating instructions
machine manufacturer

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above serve to describe the product. If there is also
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 information on the use, it is only to be regarded as application examples and
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-3972 proposals.
Catalog information does not constitute warranted properties. The information
[email protected] given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.de verification. Our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

204
LUDV control block in mono block/sandwich RE 64322/05.2012 1/12

Replaces: 11.2011
plate design
M6-22

Data sheet

2
Size 22
Component series 3X
Nominal pressure:
On the pump side 350 bar
On the consumer side 420 bar
Maximum flow:
On the pump side 350 l/min
On the consumer side 300 l/min
2M6-22

Table of contents Fields of application

Contents Page Wheel loaders

Fields of application 1 Bulldozers
Features 2 Crawler loaders
Set-up 2 More applications upon request
Function, section 3
Technical data 4
Characteristic curve 5
Control spool variants 5
Ordering code 6, 7
Line connections 8
Circuit diagram 8, 9
Unit dimensions 10 ,11
Project planning aid 12
Related documents 12

205
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-22 | RE 64322/05.2012

Features

System Actuation
Load pressure-independent flow distribution LUDV Hydraulic
Closed center for variable displacement pump Electro-hydraulic
Regeneration function in the mono block
Pressure
Floating position function
Integrated pilot oil generation Primary and secondary pressure limitation
Pilot operated, compact screw-in cartridge valve with
Design large nominal widths with combined feed-in function
Mono block/sandwich plate design LS pressure limitation for the entire control block
Inlet: Basic block with 2 axes
Flow
Can be extended by a maximum of 4 directional valves
Load pressure-compensated
End plate
High repeatability
Low hysteresis
Adjustable via stroke limitation

Design

1 2-fold mono block with inlet function

2 Directional valve that can be flanged
3 End plate

206
RE 64322/05.2012 | M6-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Function, section

Control block M6-22 The pressure compensator (3) controls the pressure differ-
Proportional directional valve according to the LUDV prin- ential at the control spool (2).
ciple (from the German for Load pressure-independent flow Load holding
distribution). In every functional axis, a load holding valve has been inte-
Load pressure compensation, LUDV grated in the pressure compensator (3).
The control block M6-22 works according to the LUDV prin- Flow limitation
ciple. With this load-sensing version, the pressure compen- The maximum flow can be finely adjusted in the individual
sators (3) are mounted between the control spools (2) and case using the stroke limitation (7).
the consumer ports (A, B).
Pressure limitation, consumer ports
The highest load pressure of all consumers involved is notified Pressure relief valves with large nominal widths with
to all pressure compensators and simultaneously to the pump. combined feed-in function (5) protect the consumers from
As opposed to conventional LS versions, there is no un- overload and cavitation.
wanted standstill of individual consumers with LUDV if the Floating position
pump flow is not sufficient for supplying all functions with the The floating position is optionally realized in axis 1 or 2 by
desired rated volume. The speed of all working movements means of a 4-position spool.
will then be reduced in the same ratio.
Regeneration
Consumer control In order to avoid cavitation in case of negative loads in
At the control spool, (2) the flow direction and the size of the axis 1 or 2 (e.g. tipping forward or lowering), the oil in the
flow is determined, which reaches the consumer ports (A or tank is preloaded by a valve and fed into consumer A after 2
B). the pressure compensator by means of the feed valve (4).
The spring chambers (6) are supplied with control pres-
sure either via the pilot ports a and b (hydraulic control) or
internally, via integrated pressure reducing valves (electro-
hydraulic control). The size of the pilot pressure in the spring
chamber (6) determines the stroke of the control spool (2).

4 6

B C

b
c

8 7 5 3 2 7

1 Housing 5 Pressure relief/feed valve

2 Control spool 6 Spring chamber
3 Pressure compensator with load holding 7 Stroke limitation
4 Feed valve for regeneration

207
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-22 | RE 64322/05.2012

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
2-fold mono block Directional valve End plate
Weight kg 65 15 Approx. 4
Installation position Any
Type of connection Consumer Flange connection according to DIN EN 6162
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Priming RAL 5001

hydraulic
Nominal pressure pnom bar 350
Max. operating P p bar 350
pressure at the port
A, B, LS p bar 420
T p bar 30
Y (L) p Must be led to the tank in a depressurized form
Max. control X (Pst) p bar 40
pressure at the port
a, b p bar 40
Control pressure Hydraulic bar 0 to 35
range
Electro-hydraulic bar 0 to 35
Max. flow at the port P qV, max l/min 350
A, B qV, max l/min 300 (load-compensated with p = 16 bar)
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic fluids,
such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568, as well
as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, upon request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Maximum admissible degree of contamination of the Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
hydraulic fluid cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75
Recommended hydraulic pilot control units 4 THF6, control curve 14 (RE 64553)
2 TH6, control curve 14 (RE 64552)
4 TH6...; control curve 14 (RE 64555)

electric
Voltage type Direct voltage
On/off valves FTWE 4 K (see RE 58008)
Available voltages V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 10 40
Power consumption at 20 C W 14.4 14.4
Duty cycle % 100 100
Proportional valves MHDRE 04 K (see RE 64666) and
MHRDE 06 (see RE 64655) MHDRE 04 MHDRE 06
Available voltages V 12 24 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 3.5 11.1 5 22.5
Duty cycle % 100 100 100 100
Max. control current A 1.7 0.98 1.45 0.7
Recommended chopper frequency Hz 200 200 150 150
Protection class according to VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), DIN 40050-9 IP 69K (with mating connector mounted and locked) 1)
Plug-in connector type DT04-2P (Deutsch)
Control electronics, e.g. BODAS Control unit RA, see RE 95230
Control unit RC, see RE 95200
1) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of delivery and need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.
NOTICE!
The technical data were determined at a viscosity of = 32 mm/s (HLP46: 50 C).

208
RE 64322/05.2012 | M6-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Characteristic curve

Flow resistance Pump Consumer 54

(double connections in axis 1 and 2)

Pressure differential in bar

48
42
36
P mB2, B3
30
P mA1, A2, A3, B1
24
18
12
6

0 40 80 120 160
Flow in l/min

Control spool variants

2
Ordering code +
Main use Symbol
flow specification in l/min

Q( B C
Hydraulic cylinder as consumer
E Spool with blocked ports A/B in
neutral position
Q Q(( U U2

Q( B C
Hydraulic motors as consumer
J Consumer ports A/B T open in
neutral position
Q Q(( U U2
Hydraulic cylinders and motors as
consumer in connection with hose burst
check valve, blocking Q meter and Q( B C
lowering brake valve
Q
Spool with defined remaining opening
(A/B T) in neutral position
Q Q(( U U2
Consumer load connection unloaded in
neutral position
Floating position (A/BT), connection
via pressure jump at the control panel
Q( B C
4-position spool
W
Hydraulic cylinder as consumer
Spool with blocked ports A/B in
neutral position Q Q# U U2
Q( B C
Rapid traverse for P kinematics
Differential circuit
N
Spool with defined remaining opening
(A/B T) in neutral position
Q Q# U U2
Power regeneration bulldozer
Q( B C
5-position spool
K
Lowering Differential circuit
Floating (via pressure jump)
# U2

209
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-22 | RE 64322/05.2012

Ordering code

The ordering code serves to specify the technical features distribution organization derives a short type as well as
and requirements. From the ordering code, the Rexroth a material number.

Features overall control block

M6 .... 3X M6 22 J S V 11 *

Series
LUDV control block Further details in the
Series M6 = M6 plain text 1)
Control block number Consumer ports
11 = Flange connection
Component series 30 to 39 = 3X according to ISO 6162
(30 to 39: Unchanged
installation and connection dimensions) Seal material
V= FKM seals
Total number of spool axes = 2 to 6
LS shuttle
Size 22 = 22 L= with LS shuttle (1.2 to 0.6 mm)
Inlet Z= without
Closed center =J
Primary pressure limitation
with primary pressure limitation, pressure specification in bar, 3-digit =
with plug screw (primary pressure limitation can be retrofitted) =Q
LS pressure limitation
with LS pressure relief valve, = S
pressure specification in bar, 3-digit
Type of actuation
Hydraulic =H
Electro-hydraulic =W

End plate

M6 22 3X E *

Plate type
End plate =E Further details in the plain text
Line connections Additional valves
Metric threads according to ISO 6149-1 =G S= with flushing valve
without connections =Z Z= without
Pilot oil supply Unloading function
Internal pilot oil generation =Y U= Unloading valve
External pilot oil supply = X 2) R= Unloading valve with improved pump dynamics
without =Z B= Unloading valve with improved pump dynamics
and flushing
Z= without
Pilot oil switch-off
A= with shut-off valve
Z= without

1) Customer-specific name plate upon request

2) External pilot oil supply only possible with line connections

210
RE 64322/05.2012 | M6-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Ordering code

Spool axes
1st spool axis

M6 22 3X 1 A
2nd spool axis Mono block

2 A
3rd spool axis

Z Z
4th spool axis

Z Z
5th spool axis Directional valves that can
be flanged
Z Z
6th spool axis

Z Z
2

Spool axis number,

1 to 6
Spool variant 1)
Control spool A/B/T blocked =E
Control spool A/BT =J Double connection 2)
Control spool A/BT throttled =Q D= with double connections
Control spool rapid traverse 3) =N Z= without
4-position spool 2) =W
5-position spool 3) =K Regeneration / check valve 2)
A= with regeneration valve
Flow = Z= without
Consumer port A

Consumer port B

Specification in l/min, 3-digit

Secondary valves
Type of actuation H = Pressure relief/feed valve, pressure
Hydraulic A side B side specification in bar, 3-digit
E= Feed valve
without shuttle = H00 = H00
Z= without
with shuttle 0.6 mm = H06 = H06
with shuttle 0.8 mm = H08 = H08 with hydraulic actuation H:
Cover connection Pilot oil port 4)
G= Poppet seal
Axial =A
O= Flange O-ring seal
Radial =R
Z= G 1/4 without adapter (only with "H00")
Electro-hydraulic proportional = W2
with electro-hydraulic actuation W2:
Supply voltage
1= 24 V
2= 12 V

1)
ATTENTION! Symbols see page 5
2) Only possible at spool axis 1 and 2
All functions can only be combined to a limited extent. Every 3) Only possible at spool axis 2
enquiry requires individual verification! 4) See page 8

211
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-22 | RE 64322/05.2012

Line connections

Connection Dimension Similar standard

P DN 25 (SAE 1" 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2
P = Pump connection
T DN 28 (SAE 1 1/4" 3000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-1
T = Tank connection
A, B DN19 (SAE 3/4" 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2
A, B = Consumer port
LS M14x1.5 DIN EN ISO 6149-1
LS = Load sensing
G 1/4 (version "Z") DIN EN ISO 1179
a, b = Pilot oil port


Poppet seal (version "G"):

.Y

L10 according to DIN EN 8434

a, b

6/"

O-ring seal (version "O"):

SAE J 1453-3

Circuit diagram, hydraulic actuation (example)

C4
B4

3
b4 c4

MT

9
*)

:
C3 C3
B3 B3

b3 c3

C2 C2
B2 B2
7
6 2
b2 c2

U
Key see page 10. 8

212
RE 64322/05.2012 | M6-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Circuit diagram, electro-hydraulic actuation (example)

M BD Qtu
41cbs 51cbs

C4
B4

2
MT

9
*)

:
C3 C3

B3 B3

C2 C2

B2 B2
7
6 M
2
Qtu

Key see page 11.

213
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-22 | RE 64322/05.2012

Unit dimensions, hydraulic actuation (in mm)

51
7

214
8
B

564
MT
293
287

331
Q

226
:1
55

213/7
2 68 241/6
228
28:
336
387
3 4

455 View A
387
23
28: :
228
6

226/6
218
313
276
276
313

b2 b3 b4
218

c2 c3 c4

228
28:
351 83 31 387
21
1 2-fold mono block
B 5/3
2 Directional valve
3 End plate
4.1 Control cover A side
55
66

4.2 Control cover B side

221
287

5 Stroke limitation
276

6 Secondary pressure relief valve

7 Tank preload valve
24 8 LS pressure relief valve
22 9 LS flow controller
10 Threaded steel pipe fitting with shuttle valve
11 Three mounting threads M12, 19 deep
23 12 Name plate
5/2
228 13 Tie rod
28:
339

214
RE 64322/05.2012 | M6-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Unit dimensions, electro-hydraulic actuation (in mm)

387
336
28:
228 9
51

214
8
B 23
U
MT
293
287

331
Q

5:5
226
:1
39 55

C
81

2
254
Qtu
283

2
68
View A
88 48:
93
3 4
351 83 56
387 :
6

57
M
245/6

248/6
276
313

b2 b3 b4
c2 b2 c3 b3 b c

215/6 48 4: 48 55/6 44
453

21

B 5/3 1 2-fold mono block

2 Directional valve
3 End plate
55
66

4.1 Control cover A side

221

231

4.2 Control cover B side

287
276

5 Stroke limitation
6 Secondary pressure relief valve
7 Tank preload valve
24
8 LS pressure relief valve
22 9 LS flow controller
10 Electro-proportional pressure control valve
11 Four mounting threads M12, 19 deep
23
5/2 12 Name plate
228
13 Tie rod
28:
339
448

215
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG M6-22 | RE 64322/05.2012

Project planning aid (e. g. for wheel loaders)

General information Diesel motor data

Project number: Designation:
Customer: Power: kW
Machine type: Load speed: 1/min
Machine designation: Max. speed: 1/min
Lifting cylinder: bottom: mm
rod: mm Pump
Active stroke: mm Designation:
Quantity: units Displacement: cm/rotation
Tip cylinder: bottom: mm Rated speed: 1/min
rod: mm Pump control p: bar
Active stroke: mm Controller type:
Quantity: units Maximum pump pressure: bar

Supplementary information
Cycle times
Kinematics: Lifting: sec. at mm stroke
Z kinematics Lowering: sec. at mm stroke
P kinematics (parallel) Depressurized lowering: sec. at mm stroke
Tipping backwards: sec. at mm stroke
Tipping forwards: sec. at mm stroke
Option A: l/min
Option B: l/min

Related documents

The control blocks M6-22 are system components.

f Also observe the instructions for the other system components.
f The product may not be commissioned until you are provided with the following documentation and have understood and
observed it.

Title Document number Document type

Control blocks for mobile applications RE 64025-B Operating instructions
System documentation from the machine Operating instructions
manufacturer

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above serve to describe the product. If there is also
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 information on the use, it is only to be regarded as application examples and
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-3972 proposals.
Catalog information does not constitute warranted properties. The information
[email protected] given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com/brm verification. Our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

216
LUDV control block in mono block/ RE 64295/06.2012 1/16

Replaces: 05.2006
sandwich plate design
M7-22

Data sheet

2
Size 22
Component series 3X
Nominal pressure:
On the pump side 380 bar
On the consumer side 420 bar
Maximum flow:
On the pump side 1 x 420 l/min or 2 x 350 l/min
On the consumer side 350 l/min
H6169

Table of contents Fields of application

Contents Page Cranes

Fields of application 1 Excavators
Features 2 Stripping shovels/crawler cranes
Functional description, section 3 Handling equipment
Technical data 4, 5 Drilling rigs
Characteristic curve 5
Project planning information 6
Explanations on the ordering code 6
Combination possibilities 7
Short type 8
Ordering code 8 to 10
Control spool variants 11
Pressure compensator spool variants 11
Circuit diagram 12
Other elements 13
Unit dimensions 14, 15
Line connections 16
Related documents 16

217
 RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 2/16

Features

System Actuation
Load pressure-independent flow distribution LUDV Hydraulic
Closed center for variable displacement pump Electro-hydraulic
Integrated load holding valves
Pressure
Integrated tank pre-loading possible
3-fold block (K internal, T attached) Primary and secondary pressure relief
5-fold block (K and T internal) Pilot operated, compact screw-in cartridge valves with
large nominal widths with combined feed-in function
Unloading function LS pressure relief for the entire control block
Improved response behavior
Flow
Reduction of switch-off peaks
Flushing and cooling Load pressure-compensated
Lower risk of cavitation High repeatability
Low hysteresis
Design Adjustable via stroke limitation
Mono block/sandwich plate design
Mono block with 3 or 5 axes
Can be extended by directional valves of different sizes
(max. 9)
End plate

218
RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

Functional description

Control block M7-22 The LUDV pressure compensator consists of a control spool
Proportional directional valve according to the LUDV prin- and a compression spring defining a stable initial position.
ciple (from the German for Load pressure-independent The control spool (6) is proportionally moved to the right
flow distribution). against the spring force by the applied control pressure of
Load pressure compensation, LUDV the pilot control unit in the control cover a. The supply meter-
ing orifice (7) of the control spool opens the connection
The control block M7-22 works according to the LUDV prin-
from the pump port P to the channel P. The pressure in this
ciple. With this load-sensing version, the pressure compen-
chamber opens the pressure compensator (4) and is applied
sator (4) is mounted between the control spool (6) and the
to the load holding valves (3).
consumer ports (A, B).
The consumer pressure pC of port A keeps the left load
The highest load pressure of all consumers involved is
holding valve (3) closed via the passages in the control
notified to all pressure compensators and simultaneously to
spool (11). When the value of P exceeds that of pC, the
the pump.
check valve is opened. The connection from the pump to
As opposed to standard LS versions, there is no unwanted the consumer is established and initiates the movement.
standstill of individual consumers with LUDV if the pump The oil displaced in the consumer flows from B via the
flow is not sufficient for supplying all functions with the de- outlet orifice (9) back to the tank. The secondary pressure
sired rated volume. The speed of all working movements will relief valves (2) remain closed as long as the pressure in
then be reduced in the same ratio. the consumer port remains below the pressure setting. The
Consumer control main poppet of the combined pressure relief/feed valve
In the neutral position of the control spool (no control pres- (2) in the supply (side A) opens in case of cavitation in the 2
sure at ports a or b, the connection from the pump to the P consumer port and allows for feed-in from the tank channel
channel is blocked by the control spool. The load holding in the block. In this connection, an optional tank pre-loading
valves and the pressure compensator are closed. The increases the feed-in volume.
consumer ports are blocked by the control spool overlap in
the housing.

 
A B

-4


5 5
Q$ 5 1


a b
      

1 Stroke limitation 7 Supply metering orifice P P A

2 Secondary pressure relief/feed valve 8 SupplyJ metering orifice P P B
3 Load holding valve 9 Outlet orifice B T
4 LUDV pressure compensator 10 Outlet orifice A T
5 Pilot pressure shuttle 11 Directional grooves P A (P B accordingly)
6 Control spool

219
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
Weight 3-fold mono block kg 64
5-fold mono block kg 90
Directional valve M7-20 kg 12
Directional valve M7-22 kg 19.5
End plate kg 3.7
Installation position Any
Type of connection Consumer Flange connection according to DIN EN 6162
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Priming RAL 5001

hydraulic
Max. operating pressure P p bar 380
at the port
A, B p bar 420
LS p bar 360
T p bar 30
Y (L) p bar Must be led to the tank in a depressurized form
Max. control pressure X (Pst) p bar 35
at the port
a, b p bar 35
Control pressure range Hydraulic p bar 0 to 23 (27)
Electro-hydraulic p bar 0 to 27
Max. flow at the port P qV, max l/min 420
A, B qV, max l/min 350 (with p block input P LS = 19 bar)
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic fluids,
such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568, as well
as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, upon request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Max. admissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum reten-
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) tion rate of 10 75
Recommended hydraulic pilot control units 4 TH6, characteristic curve 70, see RE 64555
2 TH6 R, characteristic curve 70, see RE 64552

220
 RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

electric
Voltage type Direct voltage
On/off valves FTWE 4 K (see RE 58008)
Available voltages V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 10 40
Power consumption at 20 C W 14.4 14.4
Duty cycle % 100 100
Proportional valves FTDRE 4 K (see RE 58038)
Available voltages V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 2.4 12
Duty cycle % 100 100
Max. control current A 1.8 0.8
Recommended chopper frequency Hz 150 150
Protection class according to VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), DIN 40050-9 IP 69K (with mating connector mounted and locked) 1)
Plug-in connector type C Junior Timer (AMP)
K DT04-2P (Deutsch) 2
Control electronics, e.g. BODAS Control unit RA, see RE 95230
Control unit RC, see RE 95200

1) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of delivery and need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.
NOTICE!
The technical data were determined at a viscosity of = 32 mm/s (HLP46: 50 C).

Characteristic curve

Typical spool characteristic curve

211
Flow in % of the max. setting

:1
91
81
71
2
61
51
41
31
21
1
411 461 511 561 611 661 711 761 811
Control current in mA
: 26 33 39 46
Pilot pressure in bar

1 Control spool

221
6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Project planning information

The LUDV control block M7-22 is the core component of 1. Machine type
the hydraulic control of a mobile working machine. It is 2. Pump volume at rated speed
therefore recommended to only specify it in connection
3. Type of the pump controller
with an overall hydraulic circuit diagram.
4. Description of the consumer on the axes
For the design of a hydraulic LUDV control block of
(e. g. boom, winch)
type M7-22, the following boundary conditions are rel-
evant for the project planning and should be enclosed to 5. Cylinder situation / displacement of the motor
the enquiry: 6. Information whether a system element is installed down-
stream the valve (e. g. hose burst check valve, lowering
brake valve)
7. Information on the loads (pressures) to be throttled per
axis if there is no braking valve or the like.

Explanations on the ordering code

The ordering code documents the functional features of the In the second part of the ordering code (set-up of the overall
valve series which is set-up as modular system, which are control block), the block configuration is determined without
available by default. This series consists of a 3- or 5-fold definition of the individual spool axes.
mono block with LUDV function at the one front side of Finally, you must then select the corresponding features for
which a group of up to four LUDV directional valves with or every spool axis of the block.
without sandwich plate and with corresponding end plate
Complete specification of all features is the prerequisite for
can be adapted. On the opposite front side, up to three
the fast and clear processing of an order. In case of ques-
LS directional valves with end plate can be flanged. The
tions, contact the relevant application specialist in the sales-
number of spool axes in the mono block and the number of
related product management.
the individual directional valve plates LUDV and LS result in
the total number of spool axes in the control block.
In the first part of the ordering code (features of the overall
control block), the available detail features and settings of
the block are defined.

222
RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

Combination possibilities
Counting method Control block segments
axis no.
End plate 2

 Directional valves, group 4

SX 14 LUDV (can only be flanged to M7-20 LS)
 Directional valves, group 3
M7-20 LS

 1

 3-fold mono block

Directional valves, group 1


M7-22 LUDV 2
2-circuit sandwich plate

Directional valves, group 2


M7-22 LUDV
End plate 1

End plate 2

 Directional valves, group 4

SX 14 LUDV (can only be flanged to M7-20 LS)
 Directional valves, group 3
M7-20 LS


5-fold mono block



1

Directional valves, group 1


M7-20 LUDV, M7-22 LUDV

2-circuit sandwich plate

Directional valves, group 2

 M7-20 LUDV, M7-22 LUDV
End plate 1

223
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Short type (name plate information)

The ordering code serves to specify the technical features distribution organization derives a short type as well as
and requirements. From the ordering code, the Rexroth a material number.

M7 .... 3X M7 22 V 11 *

Series Further details in

LUDV control block the plain text 1)
series M7 = M7
Consumer ports
Control block number 11 = Flange connection
Component series 30 to 39 = 3X according to ISO 6162
(30 to 39: Unchanged installation Seal material
and connection dimensions) V= FKM seals
Total number of spool axes = 3 to 9
Mono block 3-fold =3 1) Customer-specific name plate upon request
Mono block 5-fold =5
Type of actuation
Hydraulic =H
Electro-hydraulic =W

Ordering code

Features overall
control block
M7 22

Primary pressure relief 1) Cooler pre-loading 2)

with primary pressure relief valve = H 000 KZ = without
with primary pressure relief valve K1 = with 0.5 bar
with sequencing stage = A K2 = with 2.0 bar
with plug screw (primary pressure K3 = with 3.5 bar
relief can be retrofitted) = Q00 000 K5 = with 5.5 bar
LS pressure relief 1) K7 = with 7.0 bar
with LS pressure relief valve = S 000 Tank pre-loading 2)
with LS pressure relief valve with sequencing stage = A TZ = without
with plug screw (LS pressure relief can be retrofitted) = Q000 000 T1 = with 0.5 bar
LS shuttle (nozzle ) T2 = with 2.0 bar
Nozzle B T3 = with 3.5 bar
without LS shuttle = L0
A 0.6 B 1.2 = L1 T5 = with 5.5 bar
A 1.0 B 0.4 = L2 T7 = with 7.0 bar
A 1.2 B 0.4 A B = L3 Unloading function (qVmin circuit)
A 1.2 B 0.6 = L4 U= with unloading function
A 2.0 B 0.4 = L5 Z= without
A = customer connection
Nozzle A
B = block side 1) Pressure specification in bar, 3-digit
2) When designing the preload values, the
cooling power necessary for the machine
is to be considered!

224
RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

Ordering code

Set-up overall control block

M7 22 K S

Total number of spool axes = 1 to 9

1-circuit system =E
2-circuit system =T
Mono block
3-fold =3
5-fold =5
Directional valves group 1 and 2
Size M7-20 1) =K
Size M7-22 =G
Number group 1 2) = 0 to 4
Number group 2 2) = 0 to 4
End plate 1 2
LUDV =L
LUDV with P port =C
Directional valves group 3
Size M7-20 LS =K
Number group 3 = 0 to 4
Directional valves group 4 3)
SX 14 =S
Number group 4 = 0 to 4
End plate 2 4)
without function =Z
with P port =C

1) Not possible with 3-fold mono block

2) The maximum result of the two groups is 4
3) Can only be flanged to directional valves M7-20 LS
4) Others upon request

225
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Ordering code for spool axes

1st spool axis

M7 22 3X 1

mono block
2nd spool axis

3-fold
2
3rd spool axis

mono block
4th spool axis

5-fold
4
5th spool axis

5
Xth spool axis

that can be flanged

M7 22 3X

Directional valves
M7 20 3X

SX 14 2X See RE 64125

Spool axis number = 1 to X

Spool symbol 1)
Control spool A/B/T blocked =E
Secondary valves 6)
Consumer port A

Consumer port B

Control spool A/BT =J

E000000 = Feed valve
Control spool A/BT throttled =Q
H000 = Pressure relief/feed valve
Control spool P/BA =R
N = Pressure relief/feed valve with
Special spool 2) =S sequencing function
Flow in the consumer port Z000000 = without
A and B =
Type of actuation
Specification in l/min, 3-digit
A side B side Hydraulic 5)
Load holding
H00 H00 without shuttle
with (on both sides) =L
H06 H06 with shuttle 0.6 mm
without =Z
H07 H07 with shuttle 0.7 mm
Pressure compensator H08 H08 with shuttle 0.8 mm
Direct operated =D
Pilot oil port 4)
Pilot operated =V
G= Poppet seal
O= O-ring seal
Z= G 1/4 without adapter (only with "H00")
ATTENTION!
A side B side Electro-hydraulic 3)
All functions can only be combined to a limited extent. Every
enquiry requires individual verification! W81 W81 Proportional 24 V
W83 W83 Proportional 12 V
1) Symbols see page 11. With hydraulic cylinders, the gear ratio W61 W61 Switchable 24 V
must be specified in the plain text as E and Q spools have sup- W63 W63 Switchable 12 V
ply and outlet characteristic curves.
2) Functional description in the plain text Plug-in connector type
3) With measuring port C= Junior-Timer 2-pole (AMP)
4) See page 16 K= DT04-2P (Deutsch)
5) With electro-hydraulic control via remote control plate
(e.g. HICFP), specification in the plain text is required.
6) Pressure specification in bar, 3-digit

226
RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

Control spool variants

Ordering code +
Main use Symbol
flow specification in l/min

Hydraulic cylinder as consumer

E Spool with blocked ports A/B in
neutral position

Hydraulic motors as consumer

J Consumer ports A/B T open in
neutral position

Hydraulic cylinders and motors as

consumer in connection with hose burst
check valve, blocking Q meter and lower-
Q ing brake valve
Spool with defined remaining opening
(A/B T) in neutral position

2
E spool with regeneration function
R
Control spool P/BA

Pressure compensator spool variants

Ordering code Description Symbol

MT

D Direct operated (standard)

U

c b
Q B C

Pilot operated
V Use with superimposed movements with highly MT
dynamic load cycles
U

c b
Q B C

227
12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Circuit diagram (example)

End plate 2

C
 B
Directional valve
" SX 14
#

" 1

#
B
C Directional valve
M7-20 LS
BC

-%3

%3%"
, 5

-4

.-4

1
1
"
# .1
B
C

3-fold
" mono block
#
B
C

"
#
B
C

End plate 1

228
RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

Other elements

1-fold M7-20 LUDV

Short description
LUDV directional valve plate
Hydraulically or electro-hydraulically controlled
C
Switching speed of the control spool can be influenced B
Stroke stops for exact flow setting available #
Pressure relief/feed valves "
Load holding valves
Maximum flow 250 l/min

1 -4 5

Channel for movement compensation nozzle only

for the first 1M7-22 plate at the mono block 3M7-22

1 5
1-fold M7-20 LS QTU%3
Short description
LS directional valve plate (e.g. for consumer: Slew drive, : 2
gripper); LS section pressure relief (torque control with
pressure distributor circuit DTS) -4%
Hydraulically controlled C
Switching speed of the control spool can be influenced B
Stroke stops for exact flow setting available #
Load holding valve "
No secondary pressure relief possible
Maximum flow 200 l/min 1 -4 5

Movement compensation nozzle

9: 1 -4 5 : 9
2-circuit sandwich plate M7-22
Short description
2-circuit valve disconnection / connection of P1 and P2
(LS1 and LS2) .1
Primary pressure relief, LS pressure relief and .-4
LS unloading for 2nd circuit integrated
Integrated movement compensation nozzle, can -4
also be switched off (standard for crawler vehicles)

-
1TU

9: 1 -4 5 : 9

1-fold SX 14
Short description
LUDV directional valve plate
Hydraulically or electro-hydraulically controlled
A
Stroke stops for exact flow setting available B
Pressure relief/feed valves
Load holding valves
Maximum flow 160 l/min

P LS T

229
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Unit dimensions: Hydraulic actuation (nominal dimensions in mm)









 

" #


- B

 
C -


1


C
B 
 %3%"
" #


5




 1
C B

  




C B
)


1




C B





C B




C  B
1
.1 


1
-4 .-4  ,
" #








   
 

1 Mono block 5-fold

2 Plug screw
3 Feed valve
4 LUDV pressure compensator
5 Secondary pressure relief valve
6 Control cover with stroke limitation
7 Primary pressure relief valve
8 LS pressure relief
9 qVmin circuit
10 End plate M7-20
11 Three mounting threads M16, 24 deep
12 Tank pre-loading
13 LS pressure compensator
14 pst shuttle
15 Cooler pre-loading

230
RE 64295/06.2012 | M7-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

Unit dimensions: Electro-hydraulic actuation (nominal dimensions in mm)

  



 



1



" #



  " #
-4 






 1TU
 -
 

" #
" # 
   



  2
 






 
1
1TU


  5,
.1



 

-4 1 



 9C



- 
QTU 1TU%3
 9B


9C
- 




QTU 9B
1TU%3




 



1 End plate 2 12 LS pressure relief 1st circuit

2 Secondary pressure relief valve 13 Name plate
3 Feed valve 14 Cooler pre-loading
4 Primary pressure relief valve 2nd circuit 15 Tank pre-loading (as built-on valve)
5 Compensation nozzle which can be connected 16 Mono block 3-fold
6 Three mounting threads M16, 22 deep 17 Electro-hydraulic control cover with stroke limitation
7 LS unloading 1st circuit 18 Electr. on/off or proportional valve
8 qVmin circuit 19 1-circuit / 2-circuit switching
9 Primary pressure relief valve 1st circuit 20 LS unloading 2nd circuit
10 Torque control valve 21 LS pressure relief 2nd circuit
11 End plate 1

231
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-22 | RE 64295/06.2012

Line connections

Connection Dimension Similar standard

P1 DN 32 (SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2 P = Pump connection

T1 DN 32 (SAE 1 1/4" 3000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-1 T = Tank connection
K = Cooler connection
K DN 32 (SAE 1 1/4" 3000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-1
A, B = Consumer ports
A, B DN 25 (SAE 1" 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2
LS = Load sensing
A0.., B0.. DN 19 (SAE 3/4" 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2 a, b = Pilot oil ports
LS, MP,
DN 10 (G 1/4) DIN EN ISO 1179-1 Pst = Pilot oil inlet
Pst, L
MP = Pump measuring port
G 1/4 (version "Z") DIN EN ISO 1179



Poppet seal (version "G"):

.Y

L10 according to DIN EN ISO 8434

a, b

6/"

O-ring seal (version "O"):

SAE J 1453-3

Related documents

The control blocks M7-22 are system components.

f Also observe the instructions for the other system components.
f The product may not be commissioned until you are provided with the following documentation and have understood and
observed it.

Title Document number Document type

Control blocks for mobile applications RE 64025-B Operating instructions
System documentation from the machine Operating instructions
manufacturer

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above serve to describe the product. If there is also
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 information on the use, it is only to be regarded as application examples and
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-3972 proposals.
Catalog information does not constitute warranted properties. The information
[email protected] given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.de verification. Our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

232
LUDV control block in sandwich plate design RE 64297/06.2012 1/18

M7-25

Data sheet

2
Size 25
Component series 3X
Nominal pressure:
On the pump side 380 bar
On the consumer side 420 bar
Maximum flow:
On the pump side 1 x 650 l/min or 2 x 650 l/min
On the consumer side 650 l/min

Table of contents Fields of application

Contents Page Cranes

Fields of application 1 Excavators
Features 2 Stripping shovels/cawler cranes
Combination possibilities 2 Handling equipment
Functional description, section 3 Drilling rigs
Technical data 4, 5
Project planning information 6
Explanations on the ordering code 6
Short type 6
Ordering code 7, 8
Characteristic curves 9
Control spool variants 10
Order examples, circuit diagram 11 to 14
Unit dimensions 15, 16
Line connections 17
Related documents 18

233
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 2/18

Features

System Actuation
Load pressure-independent flow distribution LUDV Hydraulic
Closed center for variable displacement pump Electro-hydraulic

Unloading function Pressure

Improved response behavior Primary and secondary pressure relief
Flushing and cooling of the block Pilot operated, compact screw-in cartridge valves with
large nominal widths with combined feed-in function
Design
LS pressure relief for the entire control block
Sandwich plate design
Inlet plate Flow
Directional valves (max. 6 with 1-circuit system, Load pressure-compensated
max. 2 x 4 with 2-circuit system) High repeatability
Sandwich plate (with 2-circuit system) Low hysteresis
End plate Adjustable via stroke limitation

Combination possibilities

1-circuit system 2-circuit system

Axis no. Axis no.

Inlet plate

1 Directional 1 Group 1
valves
2 2

3 Sandwich plate

4
Group 2

Directional 3
valves
4

End plate

234
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/18

Functional description

Control block M7-25 The LUDV pressure compensator consists of a control spool
Proportional directional valve according to the LUDV prin- and a compression spring defining a stable initial position.
ciple (from the German for Load pressure-independent The control spool (6) is proportionally moved to the right
flow distribution). against the spring force by the applied control pressure of
Load pressure compensation, LUDV the pilot control unit in the control cover a. The supply meter-
ing orifice (7) of the control spool opens the connection
The control block M7-25 works according to the LUDV prin-
from the pump port P to the channel P. The pressure in this
ciple. With this load-sensing version, the pressure compen-
chamber opens the pressure compensator (4) and is applied
sator (4) is mounted between the control spool (6) and the
to the load holding valves (3).
consumer ports (A, B).
The consumer pressure pC of port A keeps the left load
The highest load pressure of all consumers involved is
holding valve (3) closed via the passages in the control
notified to all pressure compensators and simultaneously to
spool (11). When the value of P exceeds that of pC, the
the pump.
check valve is opened. The connection from the pump to
As opposed to standard LS versions, there is no unwanted the consumer is established and initiates the movement.
standstill of individual consumers with LUDV if the pump The oil displaced in the consumer flows from B via the
flow is not sufficient for supplying all functions with the de- outlet orifice (9) back to the tank. The secondary pressure
sired rated volume. The speed of all working movements will relief valves (2) remain closed as long as the pressure in
then be reduced in the same ratio. the consumer port remains below the pressure setting. The
Consumer control main poppet of the combined pressure relief/feed valve
In the neutral position of the control spool (no control pres- (2) in the supply (side A) opens in case of cavitation in the 2
sure at ports a or b), the connection from the pump to the consumer port and allows for feed-in from the tank channel
P channel is blocked by the control spool. The load holding in the block. In this connection, an optional tank pre-loading
valves (3) and the pressure compensator (4) are closed. The increases the feed-in volume.
consumer ports are blocked by the control spool (6) overlap
in the housing.

 
A B

-4


5 5
Q$ 5 1


a b
      

1 Stroke limitation 7 Supply metering orifice P P A

2 Secondary pressure relief/feed valve 8 Supply metering orifice P P B
3 Load holding valve 9 Outlet orifice B T
4 LUDV pressure compensator 10 Outlet orifice A T
5 Pilot pressure shuttle 11 Directional grooves P A (P B accordingly)
6 Control spool

235
4/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
Weight Inlet plate kg Approx. 25
2-circuit sandwich plate kg Approx. 35
Directional valve M7-25 kg Approx. 30
End plate kg Approx. 14
Installation position Any (however not with the consumer ports facing downwards)
Type of connection Consumer Flange connection according to DIN EN 6162
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Priming RAL 5001

hydraulic
Max. operating pressure P p bar 380
at the port
A, B p bar 420
LS p bar 360
T p bar 30
Y (L) p bar Must be led to the tank in a depressurized form
Max. control pressure X (Pst) p bar 40
at the port
a, b p bar 40
Control pressure range Hydraulic p bar 0 to 23 (27)
Electro-hydraulic p bar 0 to 27
Max. flow at the port P qV, max l/min 2 x 650
A, B qV, max l/min 650
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic fluids,
such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568, as well
as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, upon request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Max. admissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75
Recommended hydraulic pilot control units 4 TH6, characteristic curve 70, see RE 64555
2 TH6 R, characteristic curve 70, see RE 64552

236
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/18

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

electric
Voltage type Direct voltage
On/off valves for summing FTWE 4 K (see RE 58008)
Available voltages V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 10 40
Power consumption at 20 C W 14.4 14.4
Duty cycle % 100 100
Proportional valves FTDRE 4 K (see RE 58038)
Available voltages V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance at 20 C 2.4 12
Duty cycle % 100 100
Max. control current A 1.8 0.8
Recommended chopper frequency Hz 150 150
Protection class according to VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), DIN 40050-9 IP 69K (with mating connector mounted and locked) 1)
Plug-in connector type C Junior Timer (AMP)
K DT04-2P (Deutsch) 2
Control electronics, e.g. BODAS Control unit RA, see RE 95230
Control unit RC, see RE 95200

1) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of delivery and need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.
NOTICE!
The technical data were determined at a viscosity of = 32 mm/s (HLP46: 50 C).

237
6/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Project planning information

The LUDV control block M7-25 is the core component of 1. Machine type
the hydraulic control of a mobile working machine. It is 2. Pump volume at rated speed
therefore recommended to only specify it in connection
3. Type of the pump controller
with an overall hydraulic circuit diagram.
4. Description of the consumer on the axes
For the design of a hydraulic LUDV control block of type
(e. g. boom, winch)
M7-25, the following boundary conditions are relevant for
the project planning and should be enclosed to the enquiry: 5. Cylinder situation / displacement of the motor
6. Information whether a system element is installed down-
stream the valve (e. g. hose burst check valve, lowering
brake valve)
7. Information on the loads (pressures) to be throttled per
axis if there is no braking valve or the like.
Explanations on the ordering code

The ordering code documents the functional features of the In the second part of the ordering code, you must then
valve series which is set-up as modular system, which are select the corresponding features for every spool axis of
available by default. This series consists of an inlet plate at the block.
the front side of which a group of up to four LUDV directional Complete specification of all features is the prerequisite for
valves with sandwich plate or six directional valves with cor- the fast and clear processing of an order. In case of ques-
responding end plate can be adapted. tions, contact the relevant application specialist in the sales-
In the first part of the ordering code, the block configuration related product management.
- without definition of the individual spool axes - as well as
the available detail features and settings of the block
are determined.

Short type (name plate information)

The ordering code serves to specify the technical features distribution organization derives a short type as well as
and requirements. From the ordering code, the Rexroth a material number.

M7 .... 3X M7 25 V 11 *
Series
LUDV control block
series M7 = M7 Further details in the plain text 1)
Control block number Consumer ports
Component series 30 to 39 = 3X 11 = Flange connection
according to ISO 6162
(30 to 39: Unchanged
installation and connection dimensions) Seal material
Total number of spool axes = 1 to 8 V= FKM seals

Size 25 = 25
1-circuit system =E
2-circuit system =T
Type of actuation
Hydraulic =H
Electro-hydraulic =W

1) Customer-specific name plate upon request

238
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/18

Ordering code

M7 25

Total number of
directional valves = 1 to 8
Unloading function
Directional valves, group 1 (qVmin circuit)
Number with 1-circuit system = 1 to 6 U= with unloading function
Number with 2-circuit system = 1 to 4 Z= without
1-circuit system =E LS shuttle (nozzle )
2-circuit system =T Z= without LS shuttle
Directional valves, group 2 L= with shuttle, A 1.2 B 0.6
Number with 1-circuit system (with "E") =0 other upon request
Number with 2-circuit system (with "T") = 1 to 4 A = customer connection
B = block side
Primary pressure relief
with primary pressure relief valve 1) = Nozzle B
with plug screw (primary pressure
relief can be retrofitted) = Q00 2
LS pressure relief 1) A B
with LS pressure relief valve = S000
with LS pressure relief valve with sequencing stage = A
with plug screw (LS pressure relief can be retrofitted) = Q000000
Nozzle A

1) Pressure specification in bar, 3-digit

239
8/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Ordering code for directional valve

1st spool axis

M7 25 3X D

2nd spool axis

M7 25 3X D

3rd spool axis etc.

M7 25 3X D

Number of the = 1 to 8
spool axis
Spool symbol 1)
Control spool A/B/T blocked =E
Control spool A/BT =J
Control spool A/BT throttled =Q
Control spool P/BA =R
Secondary valves 5)
Consumer port A

Consumer port B
Control spool AB neutral =M
E000000 = Feed valve
Flow in the consumer H000 = Pressure relief/feed valve
port A and B =
N= Pressure relief/feed valve
Specification in l/min, 3-digit with sequencing function
Load holding Z000000 = without
with (on both sides) =L
without =Z
Pressure compensator
Direct operated =D
Type of actuation
Hydraulic 2) A side B side
without shuttle = H00 = H00
with shuttle 0.6 mm = H06 = H06
with shuttle 0.7 mm = H07 = H07
with shuttle 0.8 mm = H08 = H08
Pilot oil port 3)
Poppet seal =G
O-ring seal =O
G 1/4 without adapter (only with "H00") =Z

Electro-hydraulic 4) A side B side

Proportional 24 V = W81 = W81
Proportional 12 V = W83 = W83 1) Symbols see page 10. With hydraulic cylinders,
Switchable 24 V = W61 = W61 the gear ratio must be specified in the plain text as
Switchable 12 V = W63 = W63 E and Q spools have supply and outlet characteris-
tic curves.
Plug-in connector type 2) With electro-hydraulic control via remote control
Junior-Timer 2-pole (AMP) =C plate (e.g. HICFP), specification in the plain text
DT04-2P (Deutsch) =K is required.
3) See page 17
4) With measuring port
5) Pressure specification in bar, 3-digit

240
 RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/18

Characteristic curves

Typical spool characteristic curve Pressure loss P A/B (measured with E spool)
 
Flow in % of the max. setting




 

p in bar
 

 
 



 
               
Control current in mA Flow in l/min

    
Pilot pressure in bar
2
Pressure loss A/B T (measured with J spool)





p in bar








         
Flow in l/min

241
10/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Control spool variants

Ordering code +
Main use Symbol
flow specification in l/min

Hydraulic cylinder as consumer

E Spool with blocked ports A/B in
neutral position

Hydraulic motors as consumer

J Consumer ports A/B T open in
neutral position

Hydraulic cylinders and motors as

consumer in connection with hose burst
check valve, blocking Q meter or lowering
Q brake valve
Spool with defined remaining opening
(A/B T) in neutral position

E spool with regeneration function

R
Control spool P/BA

Control spools AB connected, neutral

M
Only possible without load holding valves

242
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/18

Order example: 1-circuit control block

Example: 3-fold control block Ordering code:

Inlet plate
End plate
Entire block
Features 1-circuit system
Primary pressure relief set to 350 bar 3 M7 25 E 3 Z 350 S 320-000 L Z
LS pressure relief set to 320 bar
with LS shuttle
without unloading function
1st spool axis Spool symbol J, flow in A and B 650 l/min 1st spool axis
without load holding M7 25 3X
with direct operated pressure compensator
Type of actuation: Hydraulic 1 J 650-650 Z D H00Z H00Z H 150-000 H 300-000
without damping shuttle, G 1/4
Secondary valves: Pressure relief/feed
valve at consumer port A, set to 150 bar;
pressure relief/feed vale at consumer port
B, set to 300 bar 2
2nd spool axis Spool symbol J, flow in A and B 650 l/min 2nd spool axis
without load holding M7 25 3X
with direct operated pressure compensator
Type of actuation: Hydraulic 2 J 650-650 Z D H00Z H00Z H 150-000 H 300-000
without damping shuttle, G 1/4
Secondary valves: Pressure relief/feed
valve at consumer port A, set to 150 bar;
pressure relief/feed vale at consumer port
B, set to 300 bar
3rd spool axis without load holding valve 3rd spool axis
Spool symbol E, flow in A and B 400 l/min M7 25 3X
without load holding
with direct operated pressure compensator 3 E 400-400 Z D H00Z H00Z H 420-000 H 420-000
Type of actuation: Hydraulic
without damping shuttle, G 1/4
Secondary valves: Pressure relief/
feed valve at consumer port A and B,
set to 420 bar

243
12/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Circuit diagram: 1-circuit control block

(according to the order example of page 11)
1 Primary pressure relief valve
1 5 2 LUDV pressure compensator
3 Pressure suction valve
4 LS flow controller
5 LS pressure relief valve
6 LS shuttle

B
CBS
C
#

"

CBS

B
CBS
C

#

"

CBS


B
CBS
C
#

"

CBS


.1

1
CBS

.-4

CBS

-4


5

244
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/18

Order example: 2-circuit control block with sandwich plate

Example: 6-fold control block Ordering code:

2-circuit system

Entire block
Features 2-circuit system
6 M7 25 T 3 2 350 S 320-000 L U
Three directional valves, sandwich plate,
three directional valves
Primary pressure relief set to 350 bar
LS pressure relief set to 320 bar
with LS shuttle
with unloading function
1st spool axis Spool symbol Q, flow in A and B 500 l/min 1st spool axis
without load holding M7 25 3X
with direct operated pressure compensator
Type of actuation: Electro-hydraulic propor- 1 Q 500-500 Z D W81K W81K H 350-000 H 350-000
tional 24 V with Deutsch connector
Secondary valves: Pressure relief/
feed valve at consumer port A and B, 2
set to 350 bar
2nd spool axis Spool symbol J, flow in A and B 300 l/min 2nd spool axis
without load holding M7 25 3X
with direct operated pressure compensator
Type of actuation: Electro-hydraulic propor- 2 J 300-300 Z D W81K W81K E 000-000 E 000-000
tional 24 V with Deutsch connector
Secondary valves: Feed valve at consumer
port A and B
Sandwich plate
3rd spool axis Spool symbol Q, flow in A 700 l/min and in 3rd spool axis
B 400 l/min
M7 25 3X
without load holding
with direct operated pressure compensator 3 Q 700-400 Z D W81K W81K H 420-000 H 420-000
Type of actuation: Electro-hydraulic propor-
tional 24 V with Deutsch connector
Secondary valves: Pressure relief/
feed valve at consumer port A and B,
set to 420 bar
4th spool axis
4th spool axis Spool symbol Q, flow in A and B 250 l/min
without load holding M7 25 3X
with direct operated pressure compensator
Type of actuation: Electro-hydraulic propor- 4 Q 250-250 Z D W81K W81K Z 000-000 H 200-000
tional 24 V with Deutsch connector
Secondary valves: No valve at consumer
port A; pressure relief/feed valve at con-
sumer port B, set to 200 bar

245
14/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Circuit diagram: 2-circuit control block with sandwich plate

(according to the order example of page 13)

- 1TU 5 1 1TU -
1 Primary pressure relief valve
CBS
-4 2 Unloading valve
3 Pressure relief/feed valve
4 Electric pilot control for summing (switchable)
.1
CBS 5 LS flow controller
6 Electric pilot control
7 Feed valve
"
# 8 LS pressure relief valve
9 LS shuttle
YB

YC


"
#

YB

YC

.-4


-
1TU


.-4

YC

YB

#
"


YC

YB

#
"

CBS

.1


 
-4
CBS
- 1TU 1 5 1TU -

246
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/18

Unit dimensions: 1-circuit control block (in mm)

(according to the order example of page 11)




C C C










5






" " " 5

2



-4
.-4
# # # 1
.1 1
.1


 


     

B B B


.Y


.Y






1 Primary pressure

relief valve
2 Pressure suction valve
3 Mounting thread

4 Name plate

247
16/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Unit dimensions: 2-circuit control block with sandwich plate (in mm)

(according to the order example of page 13)

 





145 -
.1


"


" " -4
# #



1

.-4
.-4
# # " "
5

-4
- 145

-



145
 



View A







 

        
.1

145 -
1


5

- 145


YC

YC

YB

YB








1 Primary pressure relief valve



2 Unloading valve
3 Pressure relief/feed valve
YB
YB

YC
YC


4 Electric pilot control for summing
5 LS flow controller
6 Electric pilot control 

7 Feed valve 


8 LS pressure relief valve
9 Four mounting threads M16, 20 deep
10 Name plate

248
RE 64297/06.2012 | M7-25 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/18

Line connections

Connection Dimension Similar standard

P1 DN 32 (SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI)
DIN ISO 6162-2 P = Pump connection
P2 DN 38 (SAE 1 1/2" 6000 PSI)
T = Tank connection
T1 DN 38 (SAE 1 1/2" 3000 PSI)
DIN ISO 6162-1 A, B = Consumer ports
T2 DN 51 (SAE 2" 3000 PSI)
LS = Load sensing
A, B DN 32 (SAE 1 1/4" 6000 PSI) DIN ISO 6162-2
a, b = Pilot oil ports
LS, MP DN 10 (G 1/4) DIN EN ISO 1179-1
MP = Pump measuring port
G 1/4 (version "Z") DIN EN ISO 1179



Poppet seal (version "G"):

.Y

L10 according to DIN EN ISO 8434

a, b

6/"

O-ring seal (version "O"):

SAE J 1453-3 2

249
18/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M7-25 | RE 64297/06.2012

Related documents

The control blocks M7-25 are system components.

f Also observe the instructions for the other system components.
f The product may not be commissioned until you are provided with the following documentation and have understood and
observed it.

Title Document number Document type

Control blocks for mobile applications RE 64025-B Operating instructions
System documentation from the Operating instructions
machine manufacturer

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above serve to describe the product. If there is also
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 information on the use, it is only to be regarded as application examples and
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-3972 proposals.
Catalog information does not constitute warranted properties. The information
[email protected] given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.de verification. Our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

250
Load-sensing control block RE 64139/05.06
Replaces: 07.05
1/34

of sandwich plate / mono-block

design

Type SP-08

Component series 2X
Nominal pressure Mono-block Sections

s
1VNQ
TJEF

CBS

CBS )"%

 )"%


s
"DUVBUPS
TJEF

CBS

CBS Mono-block with built-on directional Sandwich plate design
Maximum flow valve elements

s
1VNQ
TJEF

MN

MN

s
"DUVBUPS
TJEF

MN

MN

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Types of actuation
Features 1 s
.FDIBOJDBM
IBOE
MFWFS

s
)ZESBVMJD
Function, section and symbols 2, 3
s
&MFDUSPNBHOFUJD
TXJUDIBCMF
QSPQPSUJPOBM
Technical data 4, 5 s
&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
Ordering code 6 to 9 Flow
Order examples 10 to 13 Load pressure-compensated
Mono-block 14 to 16
n
)JHI
SFQFBUBCJMJUZ
Inlet elements 17 to 21 Low hysteresis
Directional valve elements 22 to 24 Adjustable
End elements 25 Pressure relief function
Unit dimensions 26 to 33 Inlet element
Features s
XJUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
Directional valve element / actuator ports
System s
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFGBOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF
Load pressure-independent flow control LS pressure relief function in mono-block
s
0QFO
$FOUFS
GPS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
Fields of application
s
$MPTFE
$FOUFS
GPS
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
Truck applications Construction machines
Design
Drilling equipment Agricultural machines
Sandwich plate/mono-block design
Working platforms Municipal vehicles


s
*OMFU
FMFNFOU
s
.POP
JOMFU
FMFNFOU

BYFT

DBO
CF
FYUFOEFE
CZ
Cranes Stationary applications
max. 8 sections
s
6Q
UP

EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOUT
s
&OE
FMFNFOU

251
2/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Function, section and symbols

Control block SP-08 Flow limitation

The directional valves are switchable or proportional valves ac- The maximum flow can be adjusted mechanically and individu-
cording to the Load-Sensing principle. They can be actuated BMMZ
CZ
NFBOT
PG
BO
BEKVTUBCMF
PSJGJDF


mechanically, hydraulically, electrically proportionally or electro- Pressure relief function
magnetically.
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT
XJUI
BOUJDBWJUBUJPO
GVODUJPO


QSPUFDU

Actuator control with electromagnetic actuation BDUVBUPS
QPSUT
h"v
BOE
h#v
GSPN
QSFTTVSF
QFBLT
BOE
OFHBUJWF

The position of main spool


SFMBUJWF
UP
IPVTJOH


EFUFS- load situations.
mines the direction and the amount of ow fed to the actuator Section pressure compensator
ports
"
PS
#

*O
UIF
DFOUSBM
QPTJUJPO
PG
UIF
NBJO
TQPPM
UIF
DPOOFDUJPO
GSPN
1

In the non-operated condition, the main spool is centred by
UP
BDUVBUPS
QPSUT
"
BOE
#
JT
DMPTFE
*O
UIJT
PQFSBUJPOBM
TUBUF

DPNQSFTTJPO
TQSJOHT


5IFSF
JT
OP
DPOOFDUJPO
CFUXFFO
h1h

QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
TQPPM


JT
TIJGUFE
CZ
UIF
QVNQ
QSFT-
BOE
h"h
PS
h#h
TVSF
UP
UIF
MFGU
BHBJOTU
TQSJOH


When the electric control current exceeds the value of the
If a function is required, the LS pressure is directed via the
spring force, the main spool starts to move from its central po-
main spool to the spring chamber and shifts the pressure com-
TJUJPO
BOE
UIF
DPOOFDUJPO
1

"
PS
1

#
PQFOT
pensator spool to the right to the control position. The flow is
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWF kept constant, even when several actuators with different load
0QUJPOBMMZ
JOUFHSBUFE
QJMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWFT


TFSWF
GPS
pressures are operated in parallel.
the leak-free isolation of an actuator. They can be installed in
POF
BDUVBUPS
MJOF
#

PS
JO
CPUI
BDUVBUPS
MJOFT

41
TFDUJPO
XJUI
FMFDUSPNBHOFUJDBMMZ
TXJUDIBCMF

actuation and pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve in
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
#
7FSTJPO
41

$
2)

1 )PVTJOH
2 Main spool
3 Adjustable orifice with load holding function
4 1SFTTVSF
SFMJFGBOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF
5 1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWFT
6 Solenoid
7 Compression spring
8 1MVH
TDSFX
9 Section pressure compensator
10 1SFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
TQSJOH
Ports
P 1VNQ
A, B Actuator
LS -PBETFOTJOH
-4

T Tank 3 2 6 7 8 4

252
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/34

Function, section and symbols

41
TFDUJPO
XJUI
FMFDUSPNBHOFUJDBMMZ
TXJUDIBCMF
BDUVBUJPO
and pilot operated check valves A B
7FSTJPO
41

$
44

6 5

T T

2
1 2 3 7

5 3 2 6 7 10 9 3 2 6 7 4

41
TFDUJPO
XJUI
FMFDUSPNBHOFUJD
QSP- 4
portional actuation, section pressure com-
pensator and pressure relief/anti-cavitation
WBMWF
JO
BDUVBUPS
QPSUT
"
BOE
#

7FSTJPO
41

1

)
)

For legend, see page 2 1 10 11 9 2 3 7

253
4/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Technical data GPS
BQQMJDBUJPOT
PVUTJEF
UIFTF
QBSBNFUFST
QMFBTF
DPOTVMU
VT

General
Type of connection 1JQF
UISFBE
UP
*40

Weight
Mono-block n
XJUI
XBZ
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
h1h kg 19.8
n
XJUI
XBZ
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
h+h kg 20.0
Inlet n
XJUI
XBZ
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
h1h kg 2.3
elements
with 2-way pSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
h.h
h)h kg 5.2
n
XJUIPVU
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
h+h
h(h kg 4.9
Directional with manual actuation kg 1.8 to 2.3
valve elements
with hydraulic actuation kg 2.2
with electromagnetic actuation kg 3 to 3.5
End n
h-"h
XJUIPVU
NPVOUJOH
CSBDLFU
kg 0.2
elements
n
h-6h
XJUIPVU
mounting bracket
kg 0.4
n
.PVOUJOH
CSBDLFU
h'h
QMVT kg 0.1
n
h47h
XJUI
QPQQFU
WBMWF
kg 3.3
Installation orientation Optional
)ZESBVMJD
GMVJE
BOE
BNCJFOU
UFNQFSBUVSF
SBOHF
C 20 to +80

Hydraulic
Mono-block Sections
Max. operating n
1PSUT
1
.
9
-4 p bar 300 250
pressure
1PSUT
"
#
p bar 320 300
n
1PSU
5 p bar 20 20
Nominal pressure pnom bar 300 250
Max. pilot pressure 1PSUT a, b p bar 30 30
Max. flow 1PSU
1 l/min 140 75
Max. flow with electrohydraulically switchable qV, max l/min 70
actuation
electrohydraulically proportional qV, max l/min 70
mechanical, hydraulic qV, max l/min 50 

electromagnetically switchable qV, max l/min 30 

electromagnetically proportional qV, max l/min 25 

Recommended hydraulic pilot control devices 5ZQF
5)
DPOUSPM
DVSWF


Data sheet RE 64552
5ZQF
5)3
DPOUSPM
DVSWF

Data sheet RE 64551
5ZQF
5)
DPOUSPM
DVSWF

Data sheet RE 64555
)ZESBVMJD
GMVJE .JOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/



PUIFS
IZESBVMJD

GMVJET
PO
FORVJSZ
FH
)&&4
TZOUIFUJD
FTUFST

UP
7%."

and other hydraulic fluids as specified in RE 90221
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid Class 20/18/15 

$MFBOMJOFTT
DMBTT
UP
*40

D

-FBLBHF
"
#
T at an operating pressure of 150 bar

Standard qVL cm3/min 45
With isolator valve qVL cm3/min 2

254
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/34

Technical data GPS
BQQMJDBUJPOT
PVUTJEF
UIFTF
QBSBNFUFST
QMFBTF
DPOTVMU
VT

Solenoid
Mono-block Sections
4XJUDIJOH
TPMFOPJE
'58&
12 V 24 V
Current range A 2.5 1.25
Resistance R 5 19.2
1SPQPSUJPOBM
TPMFOPJE
'5%3&
12 V 24 V
Current proportional range A 0.8 to 1.8 0.36 to 0.8
Resistance R 6.7 30

Electrical
Recommended analogue amplifiers Type RA, see RE 95230
Type RC4-4, see RE 95200

Note 2
Technical data was determined at a viscosity range of
= 41 mm2/s and a temperature of = 50 C.

Note
Further information about the proper handling of hydraulic
QSPEVDUT
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
DBO
CF
GPVOE
JO
PVS
CSPDIVSF
h)Z-
ESBVMJD
WBMWFT
GPS
NPCJMF
BQQMJDBUJPOT
n
HFOFSBM
JOGPSNBUJPOh

3&

#



(SFBUFS
GMPXT
PO
FORVJSZ


4VJUBCMF
GPS
/#3
BOE
',.
TFBMT

For this, we recommend a filter with a minimum retention rate
of 10 75

255
6/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Ordering code for mono-block design

Short code Mono-block inlet

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Continued
on page 7
SP 08 2X K

No. of directional valves: 2 to 10

Component series 20 to 29 = 2X

UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT

Mono-block housing =K

Inlet
Closed Center =J
Open Center with 3-way pressure compensator =P
Primary pressure relief valve
8JUIPVU
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

=Q
With primary pressure relief valve =
QSFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Pilot oil supply

With internal pilot oil supply =Y
For external pilot oil supply =X
Max. LS pressure cut-off function
Without LS pressure cut-off function =Z
8JUI
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
pressure to be specified in bar, 3 digits

= 

Flushing valve
With flushing valve, with flow controller = F 

Without flushing valve, with flow controller =

LS pressure relief valve for downstream actuators
Without LS pressure relief valve =Q
With LS pressure relief valve
pressure to be specified in bar, 3 digits

=
3rd pressure compensator for downstream actuators
With plug screw =Q
With 3rd pressure compensator =S
LS2 port
8JUI
-4
TJHOBM
GSPN
QBSBMMFM
DPOUSPM
CMPDL

= L 

Without =Z



/PU
XJUI
WFSTJPO
h1h

Note!
Either the LS pressure relief valve or the flushing valve can be used.
LS2 port is only possible when a flushing valve is used.

256
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/34

Ordering code for mono-block design

Mono-block axes End element / supplementary details

1st spool axis

9 10 11 12 13

Z M 01 *
2nd spool axis
Further details in clear text
Pipe connections
01 =
1JQF
UISFBE
DPOOFDUJPOT
to ISO 228/1

Seal material
M =
/#3
TFBMT
TVJUBCMF
GPS
)-
)-1


Actuator port A

to DIN 51524
Type of mounting
F= With mounting bracket
2
O= Without mounting bracket
LA = End plate 

LU = End plate with internal tank connection 

SV = End plate with poppet valve

Coding of flange-mounting directional valve elements
see pages 8 and 9
Secondary pressure relief valves
Actuator port A1
Z =
8JUIPVU
TFDPOEBSZ
%#
DBOOPU
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

Actuator port A2
Q= 8JUIPVU
TFDPOEBSZ
%#
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

=
8JUI
TFDPOEBSZ
%#
QSFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Supply voltage and plug-in connector 

+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1

1= 24 V
3= 12 V
Actuation
W2 = Electrohydraulically proportional
W4 = Electrohydraulically switchable
"DUVBUPS
QPSUT
h"h
BOE
h#h
= Flow in l/min, 3 digits, e.g. 070070
Spool symbol

E= J=



1MVHJO
DPOOFDUPST
BSF
OPU
JODMVEFE
JO
UIF
TDPQF
PG
TVQQMZ
BOE
NVTU
CF
PSEFSFE
TFQBSBUFMZ
TFF
BMTP
QBHF




Up to a return flow of 15 l/min


For a return flow of 15 l/min or more

257
8/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Ordering code for sandwich plate design

Short code Inlet element Directional valve elements

1st spool axis Continued

on page 9
SP 08 2X

2nd spool axis

No. of directional valves: 1 to 10

3rd spool axis, etc.
Component series 20 to 29 = 2X

UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT

Inlet Open Center

With 3-way pressure compensator =P
Inlet Closed Center
Without shuttle valve without pressure compensator = J
With shuttle valve without pressure compensator =G
Without shuttle valve with 2-way pressure compensator = M
With shuttle valve with 2-way pressure compensator = H
With priority valve =V
Primary pressure relief function
8JUI
QMVH
TDSFX
QSJNBSZ
%#
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

= Q
without measuring port
With pirmary pressure relief function, without measuring port =
QSFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Adjustable orifice with load holding function =F

Section pressure compensator and adjustable orifice with load holding function = S
Spool symbol

=E =J

"DUVBUPS
QPSUT
h"h
BOE
h#h
Flow in l/min, 3 digits, e.g. 030030

=
Actuation
Mechanical, spool end with tongue = Z1
Mechanical, encapsulated lever = R5
Mechanical, with 2-axis lever = R9
)ZESBVMJD
= H2
Electromagnetically switchable = C2
Electromagnetically proportional = P5
Supply voltage and plug-in connector 

+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1

24 V =1
12 V =3


Spool standard types
TQPPM
UZQF
&
+

Symmetric spools Asymmetric spools The ow rate depends on the actuation variant and on the
pressure compensator p.
Flow in l/min


*OEJDBUJPO
SFRVJSFE
POMZ
GPS
UZQFT
PG
BDUVBUJPO
h$h
BOE
h1h
010010 010020
1MVH
JO
DPOOFDUPST
BSF
OPU
JODMVEFE
JO
UIF
TDPQF
PG
TVQQMZ

020020 020040 and must be ordered separately, see page 33
030030
040040

258
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/34

Ordering code for sandwich plate design

Directional valve elements End elements / supplementary details

M 01 *
Further details in clear text
Connections
01 = As pipe thread
"DUVBUPS
QPSU

#
Actuator port A

to ISO 228/1
Seals
M =
/#3
TFBMT
TVJUBCMF
GPS
NJOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/

F= With mounting bracket
O= Without mounting bracket
LA = End plate 

LU = End plate with internal tank connection 

SV = End plate with poppet valve 

2
Secondary valves
Z= Without secondary valve
H + pressure in bar = 1SFTTVSF
SFMJFGBOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF
QJMPU
PQFSBUFE
QSFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Q =
1MVH
TDSFX
S =
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWF

JO
UIF
DBTF
PG
POMZ
POF
QJMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWF
UIF
MBUUFS

JT
JOTUBMMFE
JO
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
h#h


PSEFSJOH
DPEF
ZS)
A= Float function with hydraulic detent, one-sided
BU
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
h"h


PSEFSJOH
DPEF AZ

B =
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWF
XJUI
TQMJU

PQFOJOH
TQPPM
PO
CPUI
TJEFT
GMPBU
GVODUJPO

ordering code BB


Spool return with versions R5 and Z1

A2 =
#Z
TQSJOH
B2 = #Z
TQSJOH, operating position 2 with detent
C2 = #Z
TQSJOH, operating position 1 with detent
D2 = #Z
TQSJOH, operating positions 1, 2 with detent
G0 = #Z
TQSJOH, operating positions 1, 2, 0 with detent
Arrangement of operating lever for version R5 and Z1
A =
.BOVBM
PQFSBUJPO
PO
QPSU
TJEF
"
n
MFWFS
VQXBSET
TUBOEBSE
UZQF



B= Manual operation on port side
#
n
lever upwards




Other lever positions on enquiry


1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWFT
XJUI
TQMJU
PQFOJOH
TQPPM
GMPBU
GVODUJPO

h##h

POMZ
JO
DPOKVODUJPO
XJUI
FOE
FMFNFOU
h47h


Up to a return flow of 15 l/min


For a return flow of 15 l/min or more

The complete control blocks are defined according to the type &YBNQMF
PG
B
TIPSU
DPEF
GPS
BO
41
DPOUSPM
CMPDL
XJUI
UISFF

code. directional valve elements:
The order text is required for determining technical features
and requirements. SP 1234 20 / 3 SP 08
5IF
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
TBMFT
PSHBOJ[BUJPO
EFSJWFT
B
TIPSU
DPEF
BOE
No. of directional valve
a material number from the order text. elements
Control block no. Serial no./revision index

259
10/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Order example of Open Center mono-block and section

Example: 2-fold mono-block with 1 directional valve ele- Ordering code:

ment
Fixed displacement pump qV, max = 100 l/min Short code

Inlet s
Open Center with 3-way pressure compensator 3 SP 08 2X K

s
With primary pressure relief valve, set to 220 bar
Inlet of mono-block
s
&YUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
DVUPGG P 220 X Z Q Q Z

Mono-block
s
8JUIPVU
GMVTIJOH
WBMWF
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
s
8JUIPVU
SE
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QPSU 1st spool axis
1st spool s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
J 070070 W2 3 Z
axis s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO

electrohydraulically proportional
s
8JUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
2nd spool s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO

"
BOE
#

MNJO 2nd spool axis
axis s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
FMFDUSPIZESBVMJDBMMZ

switchable
J 070070 W4 3 Q
s
8JUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
8JUIPVU
TFDPOEBSZ
%#

3rd spool axis

3rd spool s
"EKVTUBCMF
PSJGJDF
XJUI
MPBE
IPMEJOH
GVODUJPO
axis s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO

"
BOE
#30 l/min F J 030030 C2 1 S S
s
Type of actuation: electromagnetic switchable

Elements fitted
s
8JUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWF
JO
"
BOE
#
End element, supplementary details
End element, s
&OE
QMBUF
h-"h

supplemen- s
8JUIPVU
NPVOUJOH
CSBDLFU LA O M 01
tary details s
/#3
TFBMT
QJQF
UISFBE
DPOOFDUJPOT

260
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/34

Order example of Closed Center mono-block and sections

Example: 2-fold mono-block with 2 directional valve ele- Ordering code:

ments
Fixed displacement pump qV, max = 140 l/min
Short code
Inlet s
$MPTFE
$FOUFS
s
With primary pressure relief valve, set to 300 bar 4 SP 08 2X K
s
8JUI
JOUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ Inlet
s
8JUIPVU
-4QSFTTVSF
DVUPGG
s
'MVTIJOH
WBMWF
XJUI
GMPX
DPOUSPMMFS J 300 Y Z F 230 S L
s
8JUI
-4%#
TFU
UP

CBS
BOE
SE
QSFTTVSF

Mono-block
compensator for downstream actuators
s
XJUI
-4
QPSU
1st spool s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO 1st spool axis
axis s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
J 070070 W2 3 Z
electrohydraulically proportional
s
8JUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7

2nd spool s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO

"
BOE
#

MNJO 2nd spool axis

axis s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
J 070070 W4 3 200 2
electrohydraulically switchable
s
8JUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
8JUI
TFDPOEBSZ
%#
TFU
UP

CBS

3rd spool 3rd spool axis

s
"EKVTUBCMF
PSJGJDF
XJUI
MPBE
IPMEJOH
GVODUJPO
axis s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO F J 030030 H2 Z Z
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO

IZESBVMJD
s
8JUIPVU
TFDPOEBSZ
WBMWFT
4th spool axis
4th spool s
"EKVTUBCMF
PSJGJDF
XJUI
MPBE
IPMEJOH
GVODUJPO
axis s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
F J 030030 C2 1 B B
"
BOE
#

MNJO

Elements fitted
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO

FMFDUSPNBHOFUJDBMMZ

switchable
s
8JUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWFT
XJUI
TQMJU
PQFOJOH

spool End element, supplementary details
End element, s
&OE
QMBUF
h47h
XJUI
QPQQFU
WBMWF SV O M 01
supplemen- s
8JUIPVU
NPVOUJOH
CSBDLFU
tary details s
/#3
TFBMT
QJQF
UISFBE
DPOOFDUJPOT

261
12/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Order example of Open Center sandwich plate design

Example: 2-fold control block of sandwich plate design Ordering code:

Fixed displacement pump qV max = 75 l/min
Inlet element
Inlet element s
0QFO
$FOUFS
XJUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG

2 SP 08 2X P 250
valve, set to 250 bar
1st spool s
8JUI
BEKVTUBCMF
PSJlDF
BOE
MPBE
IPMEJOH
1st spool axis
axis function
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
mPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO F J 030030 R5 A Q H200
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
NFDIBOJDBM
XJUI
FODBQTV-
lated hand lever on A side
s
1MVH
TDSFX
JO
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
TFDPOEBSZ

WBMWFT
DBO
CF
SFUSPlUUFE

s
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFGBOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF
JO
BDUVB-
UPS
QPSU
#
TFU
UP

CBS 2nd spool axis
2nd spool s
8JUI
BEKVTUBCMF
PSJlDF
BOE
MPBE
IPMEJOH
F E 030030 R5 A S S
axis function
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
&
mPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
NFDIBOJDBM
XJUI
FODBQTV-
lated hand lever on A side
s
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWFT
PO
"
BOE
#
TJEF
End element s
&OE
QMBUF
h-"h
BOE
NPVOUJOH
CSBDLFU End element, supplementary details
s
/#3
TFBMT
QJQF
UISFBE
DPOOFDUJPOT LA F M 01

262
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/34

Order example of Closed Center sandwich plate design

Example: 3-fold control block of sandwich plate design Ordering code:

Fixed displacement pump qvmax = 75 l/min

Inlet element s
$MPTFE
$FOUFS
XJUI
XBZ
QSFTTVSF
DPN- Inlet element

pensator without LS shuttle valve, primary
3 SP 08 2X M Q
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPlUUFE
1st spool s
8JUI
BEKVTUBCMF
PSJlDF
BOE
MPBE
IPMEJOH
1st spool axis
axis function
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
&
mPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO F E 030030 H2 Z Z
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
IZESBVMJD
s
8JUIPVU
TFDPOEBSZ
WBMWF
MPX
IPVTJOH
2nd spool axis
2nd spool s
8JUI
BEKVTUBCMF
PSJlDF
BOE
MPBE
IPMEJOH

F E 030030 C2 1 Q H200
axis function
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
&
'MPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
FMFDUSPNBHOFUJDBMMZ

switchable, 24 V
s
&MFDUSJDBM
DPOOFDUJPO
".1
5ZQF
+VOJPS
5JNFS
s
1MVH
TDSFX
JO
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
TFDPOEBSZ

WBMWFT
DBO
CF
SFUSPlUUFE
2
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWFT
JO
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
#

set to 200 bar 3rd spool axis
3rd spool s
8JUI
BEKVTUBCMF
PSJlDF
BOE
MPBE
IPMEJOH

axis function
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
mPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
BDUVBUJPO
FMFDUSPNBHOFUJDBMMZ

switchable, 24 V
s
&MFDUSJDBM
DPOOFDUJPO
".1
5ZQF
+VOJPS
5JNFS
s
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
DIFDL
WBMWFT
PO
"
BOE
#TJEF
End element s
&OE
QMBUF
h-"h
BOE
NPVOUJOH
CSBDLFU End element, supplementary details
s
/#3
TFBMT
QJQF
UISFBE
DPOOFDUJPOT LA F M 01

263
14/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Mono-block Open Center

Short description
s
'PS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
s
&YUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
DVUPGG
s
8JUIPVU
GMVTIJOH
WBMWF

Ordering code for inlet:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 220 X Z 2 2 Z

Ordering code of 1st spool axis:

9 10 11 12 13
+ 070-070 W2 3 Z

Ordering code of 2nd spool axis:

9 10 11 12 13
+ 070-070 W4 3 2

264
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/34

Mono-block Closed Center

Short description
s
'PS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
*OUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
DVUPGG
s
8JUI
GMVTIJOH
WBMWF
s
8JUI
SE
QFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
GPS
EPXOTUSFBN
BDUV-
ators

Ordering code for inlet:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ 300 Y Z F 200 S L

Ordering code of 1st spool axis:

9 10 11 12 13
+ 070-070 W2 3 Z
2
Ordering code of 2nd spool axis:
9 10 11 12 13
+ 070-070 W4 3 150

265
16/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Mono-block Closed Center

Short description
s
'PS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
s
*OUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
s
8JUI
-4
QSFTTVSF
DVUPGG
s
8JUIPVU
GMVTIJOH
WBMWF

Ordering code for inlet:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ 280 Y 250 200 S Z

Ordering code of 1st spool axis:

9 10 11 12 13
+ 070-070 W2 3 Z

Ordering code of 2nd spool axis:

9 10 11 12 13
+ 070-070 W2 3 2

266
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/34

Inlet elements: Function with fixed displacement pump (Open Center)

When all of the spool axes are in the non-operated state, the When the pump pressure rises to a value higher than the con-
pump flow is directed via the Open-Center pressure compen- trol pressure differential p plus actuator pressure, the pres-
sator to the tank. When one spool axis is operated, the load sure compensator spool is shifted to the left, and a part of the
pressure acts via the shuttle valve chain, which is now blocked pump flow is directed to the tank until a balanced situation is
to the tank, on the left-hand side of the pressure compensa- SFTUPSFE
5IF
QSFTTVSF
JO
TQSJOH
DIBNCFS


JT
MJNJUFE
CZ
QSFT-
tor and the pump-to-tank connection is interrupted. The highest TVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF


8IFO
UIF
QSFTTVSF
SJTFT
GVSUIFS
UIF
QSFT-
BDUVBUPS
QSFTTVSF
BDUT
JO
TQSJOH
DIBNCFS


BOE
PO
UIF
MFGU sure compensator acts as main spool of a pilot operated pres-
IBOE
TJEF
PG
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
TQPPM


sure relief valve and limits the system pressure.
The pump pressure acts on the right-hand side of this spool.

3 4
Inlet element with 3-way pressure compensator P

Characteristic curve

Flow resistance
4UBOEBSE
DPNQSFTTJPO
TQSJOH

CBS

PE T
%'


CBS

1SFTTVSF
EJGGFSFOUJBM
JO
CBS

Flow in l/min

267
18/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Inlet elements Open Center

Inlet element
with 3-way pressure compensator
Ordering code PQ
Short description
s
'PS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE
s
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
SFRVJSFE
JO
UIF
TZTUFN

Inlet element
with 3-way pressure compensator
Ordering code P
Short description
s
'PS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Inlet element with priority valve

Inlet element
with priority valve
Ordering code V
Short description
s
*OUFSOBM
QSJPSJUZ
GVODUJPO
external subordinate actuator
QPSU
$

s
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
GMPXDPOUSPMMFE
QVNQ
QPSU
9

268
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 19/34

Inlet elements: Function with fixed displacement pump (Closed Center)

At the neutral position of the directional valve, the shuttle valve The relation between flow and spool stroke, especially the
chain is unloaded. At the working positions, the load pressure maximum flow, can be adapted on site to the individual require-
of the actuator with the highest load is effective in the LS port ments by means of an adjustable throttle that is combined with
via the shuttle valve chain. The hardened shuttle valve seats a load-holding valve.
can be replaced. When several actuators are operated simultaneously, the flow
The LS port must be connected to the pressure/flow controller depends on the relevant pressure differential between pump
of the pump. The controller maintains the pressure differential pressure and load pressure.
across the control block approximately constant over the entire The inlet elements can be fitted with 2-way pressure compen-
operating range. The flow is therefore proportional to the cross- sators, if further actuators are to be connected to a pump. In
section opened by the spool between the pump and the actua- this case, the pressure compensator keeps the pressure differ-
tor port within the framework of actuating operations and is in- ential across the directional valve elements constant.
dependent of the working pressure.
At the same time, the other actuator port is connected to the
tank.

Circuit example
Inlet element version J 2

P
1VNQ
A, B Actuator
LS
-PBETFOTJOH
-4

X
1JMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
T Tank Version G

Parallel connection of several control blocks, with

inlet element version H + M

Engineering note
Port X:
LS pressure supply of
an additional control block
With this version, a ball must be installed in the shuttle
valve.
DFR = pressure/flow controller

269
20/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Inlet elements Closed Center

Inlet element
without pressure compensator, without shuttle
valve
Ordering code J
Short description
s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
QVNQ
%'3

s
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Inlet element
without pressure compensator, with shuttle
valve
Ordering code G
Short description
s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
UIF
QVNQ
%'3

s
-4
TVQQMZ
PG
BO
BEEJUJPOBM
DPOUSPM
CMPDL
JO
QPSU
9
s
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Inlet element
with 2-way pressure compensator, without
shuttle valve
Ordering code M
Short description
s
LS signal to the pump
%'3

s
With primary pressure relief function

s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

Inlet element
with 2-way pressure compensator, with shuttle
valve
Ordering code H
Short description
s
LS signal to the pump
%'3

s
LS supply of an additional control block in port X

s
With primary pressure relief function
s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
TQFDJGJFE
JO
CBS

EJHJUT

DFR = pressure/flow controller

270
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 21/34

Inlet elements Closed Center

Inlet element
without pressure compensator, without shuttle
valve
Ordering code JQ
Short description
s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
UIF
QVNQ
%'3

s
1SJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

Inlet element
without pressure compensator, with shuttle
valve
Ordering code GQ
Short description
2
s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
UIF
QVNQ
%'3

s
-4
TVQQMZ
PG
BO
BEEJUJPOBM
DPOUSPM
CMPDL
JO
QPSU
9
s
1SJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

Inlet element
with 2-way pressure compensator, without
shuttle valve
Ordering code MQ
Short description
s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
UIF
QVNQ
%'3

s
1SJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

Inlet element
with 2-way pressure compensator, with shuttle
valve
Ordering code HQ
Short description
s
-4
TJHOBM
UP
UIF
QVNQ
%'3

s
LS supply of an additional control block in port X

s
1SJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
GVODUJPO
DBO
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

DFR = pressure/flow controller

271
22/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Directional valve elements - pressure compensator

Adjustable orifice with load holding function

Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 S S

Adjustable orifice with load holding function

Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 Q H

Section pressure compensator

Ordering code:

SP-08-2X S J 030-030 P5 1 S S
C

Section pressure compensator

Ordering code:

SP-08-2X S J 030-030 P5 1 Q H
C

272
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 23/34

Directional valve elements - types of actuation

Mechanical - spool end with tongue

Ordering code:

F J 030-030 Z1 A A2 Z Z

Mechanical - encapsulated lever

Ordering code:

F J 030-030 R5 A B2 Z Z

Hydraulic
Ordering code:

F J 030-030 H2 Z Z

Electromagnetically switchable,
without secondary valve
Ordering code:

F J 030-030 C2 1 Z Z

Electromagnetically proportional
Ordering code:

F J 030-030 P5 1 Z Z

273
24/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Directional valve elements - secondary valves

With pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve and

plug screw
Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 Q H200

Short description
s
1MVH
TDSFX
JO
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
h"h
TFDPOEBSZ
WBMWF

can be retrofitted
s
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFGBOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF
PO
BDUVBUPS

TJEF
h#h
TFU
UP

CBS

With pilot operated check valves

Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 S S

With pilot operated check valves

Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 Z S

Electromagnetically switchable, with float func-

tion with hydraulic detent
Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 A Z

Electromagnetically switchable, with pilot oper-

ated check valves with split opening spool
Ordering code:

SP-08-2X F J 030-030 C2 1 B B
Short description
s
0OMZ
JO
DPOKVODUJPO
XJUI
FOE
QMBUF
h47h

274
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 25/34

End elements

End element
Ordering code LA

End element with internal

tank connection
Ordering code LU
Short description
s
8JUI
JOUFSOBM
UBOL
DPOOFDUJPO
2

End element with opppet valve

Ordering code SV
Short description
s
0OMZ
JO
DPOKVODUJPO
XJUI
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
##h
TFF
QBHF


275
26/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Unit dimensions: Open Center mono-block with section OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

According to order example on page 10

1 Mono-block with Open Center inlet Ports:

2 &OE
FMFNFOU
WFSTJPO
h-"
0h A1, B1, A2, B2 
(

3 Directional valve element with electromagnetically switch- LS, MP, X 
(

BCMF
BDUVBUJPO
WFSTJPO
h$h Pst 
(

4 
UJF
SPET
NBUFSJBM


UJHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
OVUT
A, B, T2 
(

MT = 18 Nm
P, T 
(


276
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 27/34

Unit dimensions: Closed Center mono-block with sections OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

According to order example on page 11

1 Mono-block with Closed Center inlet Ports:

2 &OE
FMFNFOU
WFSTJPO
h47h A1, B1, A2, B2 
(

3 Directional valve element with electromagnetically switch- LS1, MP, X 
(

BCMF
BDUVBUJPO
WFSTJPO
h$h Pst 
(

4 Directional valve element with hydraulic actuation, version A, B, T2 
(

h)h
P, T 
(

5 
UJF
SPET
NBUFSJBM


UJHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
OVUT

MT = 18 Nm

277
28/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Unit dimensions OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

1 *OMFU
FMFNFOU
WFSTJPO
h1h
0QFO
$FOUFS

2 Inlet element version h+h
PS
h(h
$MPTFE
$FOUFS

3 Inlet element version h.h
PS
h)h
$MPTFE
$FOUFS

4 Inlet element version h7h
QSJPSJUZ
WBMWF

5 End element version h-"
'h

6 End element version h-6
'h 9 Mechanical actuation version h3h
7 End element version h47h 10 Electromagnetically switchable actuation version h$h
8 
UJF
SPET
NBUFSJBM


UJHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
OVUT
11 Electromagnetically proportional actuation version h1h
MT = 18 Nm 12 )ZESBVMJD
actuation version h)h

278
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 29/34

Unit dimensions OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

Ls X T Ls

9
50
35.5
28.5

14,5
15
P

76 12 48

6.5
25 78
53
80
108

3
42

Ls X
T

75
62
2

39
21
P
10

92 10 48
9
76.5 78 27.6
83
114

4
T
25

49
55
75

78
65

29
X C
P

78 80 10 33
30 76
53
83 X
100

Pipe connections OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

01 QJQF
UISFBE
UP
*40


1PSUT d1 d2 t1 t2
P, A, B (
 28 12 0.5
X, LS, a, b (
 25 12 0.5
T (
 34 14 0.5

1JQF
UISFBE
h(h
UP
*40


279
30/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Unit dimensions: Closed Center mono-block with LS pressure cut-off OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

Ports:
A1, B1, A2, B2 
(

LS, MP, L 
(

P, T 
(


280
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 31/34

Unit dimensions: Types of actuation OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

Mechanical actuation - ordering code Ordering code

Z1 A2 / G0
25

7 Operating position 1 and 2 !44

7

5 Operating position 3

Encapsulated lever Ordering code

Ordering code B2 / C2 / D2
R5 2

61

13 Fulcrum of lever

Note!
'VSUIFS
IBOE
MFWFS
QPTJUJPOT
BSF
QPTTJCMF

281
32/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Unit dimensions: Types of actuation OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

Mechanical actuation, 2-axis lever Hydraulic actuation

Ordering code R9 Ordering code H2

Note!
The parallel operation of lever 1 and lever 2 in the overlap area
JT
QPTTJCMF
UP
B
SFTUSJDUFE
FYUFOU
POMZ

282
RE 64139/05.06 SP08 Bosch Rexroth AG 33/34

Unit dimensions: Types of actuation OPNJOBM
EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

Electromagnetically switchable actuation Electromagnetically proportional actuation

Ordering code C2 Ordering code P5

14 Space required to detach coil

Note!
#PUI
UFSNJOBMT
PG
FBDI
TPMFOPJE
NVTU
CF
XJSFE

Accessories

Recommended plug-in connector for plug type Junior

Timer
2-pin (AMP)
1MVHJO
DPOOFDUPS
GPS
'5%3&x
BOE
'58&x

UZQF
PG
QSPUFD-
UJPO
*1
,
Material number: R900313533
'PS
MJU[
XJSF
DSPTTTFDUJPOT
GSPN

UP

NN2 and for an insula-
tion diameter of individual seals from 1.2 to 2.1 mm
Material number: R901022127
'PS
MJU[
XJSF
DSPTTTFDUJPOT
GSPN

UP

NN2 and for an insula-
tion diameter of individual seals from 2.2 to 3 mm

3FDPNNFOEFE
QMVHJO
DPOOFDUPS
GPS
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1

Note!
1MVHJO
DPOOFDUPST
BSF
OPU
JODMVEFE
JO
UIF
TVQQMZ
CVU
NVTU
CF

ordered separately.

283
34/34 Bosch Rexroth AG SP08 RE 64139/05.06

Notes

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"( This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications TFU
GPSUI
JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

8JUIPVU

Zum Eisengieer 1 their consent it may not be reproduced or given to third parties.

-PIS
BN
.BJO
(FSNBOZ The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
1IPOF






 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
'BY







 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
[email protected] the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.de remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

284
Load-sensing control block in RE 64276/08.2010
Replaces: 08.2008
1/64

mono and sandwich plate design

Type M4-12

2
Nominal size 12
Unit series 2X
Nominal pressure 350 bar (pump side)
Nominal pressure 420 bar (actuator side)
Maximum flow
Pump side: 200 l/min for central inlet element
150 l/min for lateral inlet element
Actuator side: 130 l/min with pressure compensator and
load holding function
HAD 7407

Table of contents

Content Page
Types of operation cover B 41, 4242
Features 2
Secondary valves 43, 44
Function 2
Housing options that can be ordered 45
Cross-section 3
End elements 46, 47
Symbol 3
Dimensions 48 to 60
Technical data 4
On-board electronics (EPM) 61
Modular structure 5 to 7
Electronic pilot module: Pin assignment 62
Order details 8 to 11
Electronic pilot module: Accessories 63
Order examples 12 to 16
Inlet elements 17
Closed Center (J) 17 to 21
Open Center (P) 22
Monoblock Closed Center (JM) 23
Monoblock Open Center (PM) 24
Directional valve elements
Pressure compensator 25
LS pressure relief function 26 to 30
Main spool 31, 32
Flow 33
Types of operation cover A mechanical 34 to 40
Voltage supply and plugs 40

285
2/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Features
System Flow
Load pressure-independent flow control Load pressure compensated
Open center for fixed displacement pump High repeatability
Closed center for variable displacement pump Low hysteresis
Adjustable via stroke limitation
Type
Sandwich plate design Pressure relief function
Inlet element Inlet element:
Up to 10 directional valve elements Pilot-operated pressure valves with large nominal width
Up to 20 directional valves with central inlet element Directional valve element / actuator ports
End element Compact shock valves with feed function
Monoblock (single)
LS pressure relief function
Inlet element combined with 1 spool axis
Up to 9 directional valve elements flangeable Adjustable for each actuator port
External pressure adjustment for each actuator port
Types of operation possible
Mechanical: Electro-proportional per section
Handle-operated lever
Areas of application
Tongue
Truck applications Construction machines
Hydraulic
Drilling machinery Lifting platforms
Servohydraulic
Forestry machines Heavy load vehicles
Electrohydraulic (switching, proportional)
Large-size and telescopic Ship engineering
Electrohydraulic with on-board electronics (EPM2)
forklifts Mining applications
Municipal vehicles Stationary applications
Cranes

Function

Control block M4-12 Load pressure compensation

The directional valves are proportional valves according to Pressure changes at the actuators or at the pump are
the load-sensing principle. compensated by the pressure compensator (3). The flow to
Actuator control the actuator remains constant even if the load varies.
The flow direction and magnitude of flow reaching the Flow limitation
actuator ports (A or B) is determined by the main spool (2). The maximum flow can be set mechanically and individually
Pressure reducing valves (9) control the position of the via stroke limitations (6).
main spool (2). The level of electric current at the pressure Pressure relief function
reducing valve determines the level of pilot pressure in the The LS pressure as per actuator port can be adjusted
spring chambers (8) and therefore also the stroke of the internally via the LS pressure relief valves (4) or externally
main spool (P A; P B). via the LS ports MA, MB.
The pressure difference at the main spool (2), and Shock valves with combined feed function (5) protect the
consequently the flow to the actuator, is maintained constant actuator ports A and B from pressure peaks.
via the pressure compensator (3).
The highest load pressure is signaled to the pump via the
LS line and the integrated shuttle valves (7).

286
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/64

Cross-section
1 Housing 6.1 A side stroke limitation 9.2 Pressure reducing valve
2 Main spool 6.2 B side stroke limitation (pilot valve b)
3 Pressure compensator 7 LS shuttle valve 10 Compression spring
4 LS pressure relief valves 8 Spring chamber 11 Handle-operated lever
5.1 Shock valve with feed function 9.1 Pressure reducing valve 12 Cover A
5.2 Plug screw (pilot valve a) 13 Cover B

9 6/2 6/3
B C

2
#c#

22
:/3 7/2
U U
7/3
#b# Y

Z 7/2

:/2 Q
MTQ

23 5 NB NC 8 2 4 3 21 9 24

Symbol

Connections:
5 3 7 6/2 6/3
P Pump QY ZMT U
A, B Actuator C
T Tank
X Pilot oil supply
Y Tank, depressurized NB
NC
LS Load-sensing (LS)
B
MA, MB External LS ports #c# B C

:
#b#
Q U

8 4

287
4/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Technical data (Please inquire in case the intended use of unit is outside the given values!)

general
Installation position Any
Type of connection Pipe thread according to ISO 228/1
Mass Inlet element: Closed center J kg 4.3
Open center P kg 6.0
Central inlet element: Closed center JZ kg 8.4
Monoblock kg 5.6
Directional valve element Operation
Mechanical Hydraulic El.-hydraulic with EPM2
kg 4.9 4.2 4.5 4.8
Excess weight of handle-operated lever kg 0.6
End element kg 2.6
Hydraulic fluid and ambient temperature range * C 20 to +80
Painting Standard painting
hydraulic
max. flow at port P qV max l/min 200 with central inlet element
l/min 150 with lateral inlet element
A, B qV max l/min 140
Nominal pressure pnom bar 350 (400 on inquiry)
max. operating pressure P pmax bar 350 (400 on inquiry)
at port A, B pmax bar 420
LS pmax bar 330
T pmax bar 30, or 20 for purely mechanic model
Y pmax bar Depressurized to the tank
max. pilot pressure at port X pctrl bar 35
a, b pctrl bar 35
Pilot pressure range Hydraulic pctrl bar 8.5 to 22.5
Electrohydraulic pctrl bar 6.5 to 17.2
Required control $p at the Versions S; C p bar 18
control block
Recommended hydraulic pilot control units Characteristic curve TH 6... , see RE 64552
LS pressure relief function (adjustment ranges) bar 50 to 149; 150 to 330 (selected in the factory)
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic fluids,
such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568 as well as
hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, on inquiry
Viscosity range N mm/s 10 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum reten-
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) tion rate of B10 r 75
servohydraulic
STDS 0014 See data sheet RE 29617-B2
STDS 0015 See data sheet RE 29616-B2
STDS 0016 See data sheet RE 29618-B2 2)
electrical
Electrical pilot control valves FTWE 2 K...; see RE 58007 1)
FTDRE 2 K...; see RE 58032 1)
Recommended amplifiers RA 1-0/10; 1 axis, see RE 95230
(further control options on inquiry) RA 2-1/10; 4 to 6 axes, see RE 95230
Control units RC see RE 95200
On-board electronics (EPM2) Data from page 61; see also RE 64815-B
1) Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply and
need to be ordered separately, see page 41.
2) Projected

Note!
You can find more information on using the hydraulic
Note! products of Bosch Rexroth in our publication Hydraulic
The technical data were determined with a viscosity of valves for mobile applications - General information,
= 32 mm/s (HLP46: 50 oC). RE 64020-B1.

288
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/64

Modular structure: Control block with lateral inlet element

Control blocks of the series M4-12 have a modular structure. They

can be combined without problems for the specific application.

1. Inlet element 2.4 Operation cover B

A: Monoblock inlet (combined with 1 spool axis) A: Mechanical operation Z
B: Open center P B: Standard cover
C: Closed center J C: Mechanical operation K with handle-operated
lever
2. Directional valve elements 2.5 Electro-proportional LS pressure relief function
2.1 LS pressure relief function
3. End element
2.2 Secondary valves
A: with LS unloading LA
2.3 Operation cover A
B: with LS port LZ
A: Mechanical operation A
C: with two installation bores LAWW
B: Hydraulic operation H
C: Electrohydraulic operation W
D: Servohydraulic operation S
E: Electrohydraulic operation with on-board 2
electronics EPM2 CBA

2.2 2.4

2. B

A
C
B
A

3.

2.1

E C

D B
C

B A

A 1.
2.3 2.5

289
6/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Modular structure: Control block with lateral inlet element

1. Central inlet element JZ 2.4 Operation cover B

2. Directional valve elements A: Mechanical operation Z
2.1 LS pressure relief function B: Standard cover
2.2 Secondary valves C: Mechanical operation K with
handle-operated lever
2.3 Operation cover A
2.5 Electro-proportional LS pressure relief function
A: Mechanical operation A
3. End element
B: Hydraulic operation H
C: Electrohydraulic operation W A: Diversion plate LU
D: Servohydraulic operation S B: with two installation bores LUWW
E: Electrohydraulic operation with on-board C: with LS unloading LA
electronics EPM2 CBA D: with LS port LZ
E: with two installation bores LAWW

2.2 2.4

2. B

A
E
D 2.
C

3.

2.1

1.

D B
C
A
B

2.3 A
3.
2.5

290
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/64

Modular structure: Monoblock

1 Monoblock (combining inlet, 1 spool axis and end element) 1.7 Operation cover B
1.1 LS pressure relief function A: Mechanical operation Z
1.2 Secondary valves B: Standard cover
1.3 Primary pressure relief function C: Mechanical operation K with handle-operated lever
1.4 Electro-proportional LS pressure relief function 2 Flangeable directional valve elements
1.5 LS shut-off
1.6 Operation cover A
A: Mechanical operation A
B: Hydraulic operation H
C: Electrohydraulic operation W
D: Servohydraulic operation S
E: Electrohydraulic operation with on-board
electronics EPM2 CBA

2
2.
1.7
1.4
C

1.
A

1.3

1.1 1.2

E 1.5

D
C

1.6 A

291
8/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Order details
Short code Inlet element Directional valve element

1. Spool axis

M4 12 2X

2. Spool axis

3. Spool axis etc.

Number of directional valves
1 to 20 1)
Nominal size 12 = 12
Unit series 20 to 29 = 2X
(unchanged installation
and connection dimensions) Order details see pages 10 and 11
Closed Open
center center
Sandwich plate design
Lateral =J =P
Central = JZ
Central for M4-12/15 = JK
Monoblock (inlet combined with 1 spool axis) = Standard product range (M4 configurator)
Standard = JM 2) = PM 3)
1)
without primary pressure relief valve =Q max. 10 elements per side, of which a maximum of 6
(not for open center) with servohydraulic operation
2) Installation of further directional valve elements
with primary pressure relief valve = possible.
(pressure information in bar, 3-digit; not with OC monoblock) Consult Technical Sales.
3)
without primary pressure relief valve =Z Installation of further directional valve elements not
(cannot be retrofitted, only in combination with JZ) possible.
Consult Technical Sales.
Pilot oil supply
with internal pilot oil supply =Y
for external pilot oil supply =X
with LS shut-off (only in combination with J, P) =A

Short code Example for a short code of the M4-12 control block with
Complete control blocks are defined three directional valve elements:
according to type key.
The order text is for detailing the technical M4 7654 2 0 / 3 M4 12 J W2 K V 01 450
features and requirements.
The order text is used by the Rexroth sales
department to derive a short code as well as Control block No.
a material number. Unit series of the unit
series (2X)
Revision status of the
series
Number of Directional valve
elements
Inlet
Operation A side (prevalent operation)
Operation B side (prevalent operation)
Sealing material
Threaded connection
SO number if any

292
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/64

Order details
End element Additional details

01 *
Further information in the clear text
SO numbers
038 = Resistant to sea water 4)
450 = Aluminum free
S= For safety-relevant applications

Supply voltage 24 V Supply voltage 12 V Supply voltage and plug-in connector 6)

1 3 Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
8 9 DT04-2P (German)
01 = Connections as pipe thread acc. to ISO 228/1
V= FKM seals 5)
M= NBR seals (on inquiry)
End element
LA = End element without ports, with internal LS unloading 2
LAPT = End element LA with additional P and T port
LZ = End element with LS port, without internal LS unloading
LZPT = End element LZ with additional P and T port
LU = End element for use with central inlet element
LAK = End element LA with internal pilot oil supply for servohydraulic operation
LZK = End element LZ with internal pilot oil supply for servohydraulic operation

LA = End element LA with two installation bores

LU = End element LU with two installation bores

Q= Plug screw
W2 = Electrohydraulically proportional
W4 = Electrohydraulically switchable

LA = End element LA with three installation bores

Q = Plug screw
= Pressure reducing valve (pressure info in bar, 3-digit)

Q = Plug screw
KKDER = 4/2 way spool valve, according to RE 18136-05 (information in plain text)
LM = Monoblock, no end element
L8 = Adapter plate for SP-08 directional valve elements, inlet pressure relief function (pressure info in bar, 3-digit)
LC = Adapter plate for Bosch Rexroth Oil Control 4)

= Standard product range (M4 configurator)

4) At request only. Rating by Technical Sales.

5) The block preferably contains FKM, but also NBR seals. Observe
Note!
sealing compatibility of the hydraulic fluid used!
6) Information required only for electrohydraulic operation and Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply
electroproportional pressure relief function. and need to be ordered separately, see also page 40.

293
10/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Order details for directional valve element

Pressure compensator
with pressure compensator, with load holding function =S
without pressure compensator, with load holding function (not in combination with PM) =C
without pressure compensator, without load holding function =Q
with sensitive pressure compensator, with load holding function =F
with 3-way pressure compensator (only in combination with PM) =D
with pressure compensator, with priority function (only in connection with JM) =V
without pressure compensator bore for change-over axis =Z

LS valve
with LS pressure relief valve
=
(pressure information in bar, 3-digit) (no Z possible)

For available combinations, see table on page 45.

with LS pressure relief valve (pressure relief function) plug screw (no Z possible) = Q Q

with only 1 LS pressurerelief valve

= = M
for same pressure setting in A and B

with LS unloading plug = B B

without LS pressure relief valve

= Z Z
(LS pressure relief valve cannot be retrofitted) (no M possible)
Housing with measuring ports = M
Housing without measuring ports = Z
Housing for change-over axis 1) (possible in combination with ZUZ only) = U
Housing for electroproportional or switchable pressure relief function 2) = K
210 bar, decreasing characteristic curve 2) = L
210 bar, rising characteristic curve 2) = J
350 bar, decreasing characteristic curve 2) = R
350 bar, rising characteristic curve 2) = N

Spool symbol
E spool =E
J spool =J
Q spool =Q
Spool with regeneration function =R
Plunger cylinder as actuator = P 3)
Float position spool = W 3)
Float position spool = Y 3)
Flow in l/min, 3-digit, e. g. 070-070; actuator ports A and B =
Spool with pressure function T, only in connection with E, J or Q spool 3) =T

= Standard product range (M4 configurator)

1) Rating by Technical Sales.

2) Detailed information in plain text, see data starting on page 29;
see also data sheet RE 18139.
3) At request only. Rating by Technical Sales.

294
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/64

Order details for directional valve element

Further information in the clear text

SO numbers
011 = One-sided operation, two spool positions
Secondary valves
Flange surface 3)
Actuator port A

Actuator port B

F =
A = Shock/Feed valve, adjustable
H = Shock/Feed valve, non-adjustable
Q = Plug screw (secondary valves can be retrofitted)
Z = G 3/4 without secondary valve (cannot be retrofitted)
X = G 1/2 without secondary valve (cannot be retrofitted)
Operation B side cover
= Standard cover
Position of handle-operated lever without Encapsulated operation
60 0 60 Handle-
operated
lever 2
K L M R Handle-operated lever following
N O P X Handle-operated lever, non-following
see notes on page 42 further versions
purely mechanical operation
Z= Tongue 5)
N= Tongue with lever 3); 5)

Supply voltage 24 V Supply voltage 12 V Supply voltage and plug-in connector 6)

1 3 Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
8 9 DT04-2P (Deutsch)

Purely mechanical 5) Operation A side cover

Encapsulated,
Spring Detent in
spring centered
centered 1 2 1, 2
M A B1 B2 B4 Mechanical
H = Hydraulic
S = Servohydraulic 3); 7)
with damping with damping ori- Orifice + check
orifice, both with measuring fice, with measuring valve for hydrau-
Standard sides ports, both sides ports, both sides lic superposition)
W2 W8 G2 Electrohydraulically proportional
W4 W5 W6 W7 G4 Electrohydraulically switchable
Standard with position with measuring ports, Orifice + check
sensor both sides valve, both sides
Electrohydraulic with digital on-Board
CBA CPA 3) CXA CXC electronics (EPM2) 4)

= Standard product range (M4 configurator)

3) At request only. Rating by Technical Sales.

4) Further ordering codes according to operating instructions
RE 64815-B.
The supply includes daisy chain cabling.
5) Not available aluminum-free.
6)
Note!
Information required only for electrohydraulic operation
and electroproportional pressure relief function. Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply
7) Not in combination with following handle-operated lever and need to be ordered separately; see also page 40.

295
12/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Order example closed center with lateral inlet element and change-over axis

Example: 3-fold control block Order details:

Variable displacement pump
qV max = 150 l/m
Directional valve number, inlet element 3 M4 12 2X J250Y
Closed Center with lateral primary
pressure relief valve, set to 250 bar,
internal pilot oil supply
1. Spool axis with pressure compensator, with load 1. Spool axis
holding function S ZZZ J 100-100 W2 1 Z Z
without LS pressure relief valve bore
Spool symbol J, flow in A and
B 100 l/min
Types of operation:
Electrohydraulically proportional
Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 24 V
without secondary valves (cannot be
retrofitted) 2. Spool axis
2. Spool axis without pressure compensator, change-
over axis Z ZUZ J 065-090 W4 1 Z Z
without LS pressure relief valve bore
Housing for change-over axis
Spool symbol J, flow in C
65 l/min, 90 l/min for internal actuators
Types of operation:
Electrohydraulically switchable
Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 24 V
without secondary valves (cannot be
retrofitted) 3. Spool axis
3. Spool axis with pressure compensator, with load
S 180 M Q J 085-085 CBA K H350 H350
holding function
with LS pressure relief valve for actuator
port A 180 bar, Actuator port B closed
Spool symbol J, flow in A and B 85 l/min
Types of operation: Digital OBE
Overriding handle-operated lever
(following)
Secondary valves: Pressure relief/feed
valves, actuator port A and B 350 bar
(non-adjustable) End element
End element, with internal LS unloading, FKM seals, LA V 01
additional pipe thread connections
information
N Y B2 C2 D B4 C4
Q Q
Z Y
Z
MT MT

#b# #b# #b#

#c# #c# #c#

Q B Q B Q B

U C U C U C

U U U U

NB NC

296
 RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/64

Order example open center with lateral inlet element

Example: 3-fold control block Order details:

Fixed displacement pump qV max = 150 l/min
Directional valve number, inlet element 3 M4 12 2X P300 Y
Open Center with lateral primary pressure
relief valve, set to 300 bar
Internal pilot oil supply 1. Spool axis
1. Spool axis without pressure compensator, with load C 250MB E 050-000 A Z A230 Q
holding function
with LS pressure relief valve for actuator port A
250 bar and LS unloading plugs in B
Spool symbol E, flow in
A 50 l/min, flow in B 0 l/min, connection closed
Types of operation: Mechanical, spring
centered, not encapsulated, with tongue
Secondary valves: Adjustable shock/feed valve
for actuator port A 230 bar, secondary valve
bore B closed 2. Spool axis
2. Spool axis without pressure compensator, without load Q = M275 E 100-100 H H100 A230
holding function
with 1 LS pressure relief valve for actuator port 2
A and B 275 bar,
Spool symbol E, flow in A and B 100 l/min
Types of operation: Hydraulic
Secondary valves: Non-adjustable shock/feed
valve for actuator port A 100 bar, adjustable
shock/feed valve for actuator port B 230 bar 3. Spool axis
3. Spool axis with pressure compensator, with load holding S ZZZ J 070-070 W7 8 X Z Z
function
without LS pressure relief valve bore
Spool symbol J, flow in A and B 70 l/min
Types of operation: Electrohydraulically
switchable, with damping orifices, with
measuring ports
with DT04-2P plug (Deutsch) 24 V
Handle-operated lever cover, not following,
without handle-operated lever
without secondary valves (cannot be retrofitted) End element
End element without internal LS unloading, with LS port, LZPT V 01
with P and T port FKM seals, pipe thread
connections

N Y B2 C2 b c B3 C3 Nc B4 C4
Q Q
Z Y
Z
MT MT

#c#

#b#

Q B Q B Q B

U C U C U C

U U U U
NC NB N Nb

297
14/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Order example closed center for central inlet with primary valve

Example: 2-fold control block Order details:

Fixed displacement pump qV max = 200 l/min
Directional valve number, end element 2 M4 12 2X LU
Diversion plate
1. Spool axis with pressure compensator, with load
holding function 1. Spool axis
without LS pressure relief valves S ZZZ E 100-100 W6 1 K Q Q
(cannot be retrofitted)
Spool symbol E, flow in A and
B 100 l/min
Types of operation: Electrohydraulically
proportional with measuring ports on both
sides
Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 24 V
Actuation with handle-operated lever
(following)
Secondary valve bores closed Inlet element
Inlet element Central Closed Center with primary
JZ 300 Y
pressure relief valve, set to 300 bar
with internal pilot oil supply
2. Spool axis with pressure compensator, with load 2. Spool axis
holding function S 270L300 E 090-090 CBA K Q Q KBPSL8BA
with LS pressure relief valves,
actuator port A 270 bar,
actuator port B 300 bar
with electroprop. pressure relief function,
pressure relief function, 210 bar
(decreasing characteristic curve)
Spool symbol E, flow in A and B 90 l/min
Types of operation: Digital OBE
Overriding handle-operated lever
(following)
Secondary valve bores closed End element
End element, with internal LS unloading, FKM seals,
additional pipe thread connections LA V 01
information
Nb B2 C2 MT Q Z Y B3 C3
Q Q
Y Y
Z Z
MT MT

#b# #b#

#c# #c#

Q B Q B

U C U C

U U U

Nc U NB NC
N

298
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/64

Order example closed center with combined inlet element

Example: 3-fold control block Order details:

Fixed displacement pump
qV max = 200 l/min 3 M4 15 2X LU
Directional valve number, end element
Diversion plate
1. Spool axis with pressure compensator, without load 1. Spool axis
M4-15 holding function T 230MB E 190-000 CBA K Q Q
with LS pressure relief valve,
actuator port A 230 bar,
actuator port B unloaded
Spool symbol E,
Flow in A 190 l/min, flow in B 0 l/min,
connection closed
Types of operation: Digital OBE
Overriding handle-operated lever
(following)
Secondary valve bores closed Inlet element
Inlet element Central inlet element for M4-12/M4-15
Primary pressure relief valve, set to JK 280 Y
M4-12/15
280 bar 2
with integrated pilot oil supply 2. Spool axis
2. and 3. with pressure compensator, with load
spool axis holding function S 180M120 E 090-090 CBA Z Z
M4-12 with LS pressure relief valves,
actuator port A 180 bar, 3. Spool axis
actuator port B 120 bar S 180M120 E 090-090 CBA Z Z
Spool symbol E
Flow in A and B 90 l/min
Types of operation: Digital OBE
without secondary valve bores End element
End element with internal LS unloading, FKM seals, pipe
LA V 01
M4-12 thread connections

B2 C2 MT Q Z NQ Y B3 C3 B4 C4
Q Q Q
Y Y Y
Z Z Z
MT MT MT

#b# #b# #b#

#c# #c# #c#

Q B Q B Q B

U C U C U C

U U U

NC NB U NC NB NC NB

299
16/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Order example monoblock

Example: Single monoblock Order details:

Fixed displacement pump
qV max = 130 l/min
Directional valve number, inlet element 1 M4 12 2X PMZ Y
Open Center monoblock without primary
pressure relief valve
Internal pilot oil supply 1. Spool axis
1. Spool axis with 3-way pressure compensator
D = M210 J 085-085 W2 1 Z Z
with 1 LS pressure relief valve for actuator
port A and B 210 bar,
Spool symbol J, flow in A and B 85 l/min
Types of operation:
Electrohydraulically proportional
Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 24 V
without secondary valves (cannot be
retrofitted)
End element
End element without end element (monoblock)
FKM seals LM V 01
Pipe thread connection

B C
Q

#b#

#c#

Q B

U C

300
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/64

Inlet elements Closed Center (J) for sandwich plate design

Without primary pressure relief valve,

for external pilot oil supply
Order details:
N
M4 12 2X J Q X
Q Y Z MT U

Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min

Without primary pressure relief valve,

with internal pilot oil supply Y
Order details: 30+5 45
bar bar
M4 12 2X J Q Y
2
Short description N
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min Q Z MT U

With primary pressure relief valve,

for external pilot oil supply
Order details:
N
M4 12 2X J X
Q Y Z MT U

Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min
Pressure information in bar after J ... required
(3-digit)

With primary pressure relief valve,

with internal pilot oil supply Y
30+5 45
Order details:
bar bar
M4 12 2X J Y

Short description N
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min Q Z MT U
Pressure information in bar after J ... required (3-digit)

301
18/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Inlet elements Closed Center (J) for sandwich plate design

Pilot oil supply (Y)
Pressure relief function 45 bar Y 45
30 +5 bar
Pilot pressure max. 30 + 5 bar bar

Attention!
f In case of internal pilot oil supply, the X connection N
can also be used to lead way pilot oil for other
Q Z MT U
actuators. However, this may affect the switching
times at the M4-12. Consult Technical Sales
regarding possible effects.
f In case of external pilot oil supply the X connection
is not closed in general. It needs to be closed when
not in use (e. g. in case of hydraulic control H).

Notes on the dimensioning of pilot oil supply with servohydraulic operation

If servohydraulic operation is used in the control block, please note:
External pilot oil supply:
pctrl = 33 +2 bar constant
qctrl = 2 l/min per servohydraulic spool axis
Required and mandatory for inlet element P

Internal pilot oil supply

6 servohydraulically controlled spool axes maximum possible
No pilot oil supply for external actuators
p at the inlet element needs to be 40 bar
No internal pilot oil supply in the inlet element

With LS shut-off
Order details: Y

M4 12 2X J Q Y A

Short description
LS line is connected de-energized with the Y line to
the tank N
All downstream M4-12 sandwich plates remain in Q MT Z U
the load-holding mode

302
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 19/64

Central inlet elements Closed Center (JZ) for sandwich plate design
Without primary pressure relief valve,
for external pilot oil supply Y
Order details:
NQ
M4 12 2X JZ Q X
Z
Short description
Q U
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/ MT
min

Without primary pressure relief valve,

Y 271.311n
with internal pilot oil supply
Order details: NQ

M4 12 2X JZ Q Y Z

Q U
MT
2
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to
200 l/min

With primary pressure relief valve,

for external pilot oil supply Y
Order details:
NQ
M4 12 2X JZ X
Z
Short description
Q U
For variable displacement pumps up to MT
200 l/min
Pressure information in bar behind JZ...
required (3-digit)

With primary pressure relief valve,

with internal pilot oil supply Y 271.311n
Order details:
NQ
M4 12 2X JZ Y
Z
Short description
Q U
For variable displacement pumps up to MT
200 l/min
Pressure information in bar behind JZ...
required (3-digit)

303
20/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Central inlet elements Close Center (JZ) for sandwich plate design

Without primary pressure relief valve,

with internal pilot oil supply Y 271.311n
Order details:
NQ
M4 12 2X JZ Z Y
Z
Short description
Q U
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min MT
Primary pressure relief valve cannot be retrofitted

Without primary pressure relief valve,

for external pilot oil supply Y
Order details:
NQ
M4 12 2X JZ Z X
Z
Short description
Q U
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min MT
Primary pressure relief valve cannot be retrofitted

304
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 21/64

Central inlet elements Close Center (JZ) for sandwich plate design

For the connection of direction valve elements of M4-12

sizes 12 and 15
Without primary pressure relief valve, Y
for external pilot oil supply
Order details: NQ

M4 12 2X JK Q X Z

Q U
Short description MT
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min M4-15

For the connection of direction valve elements of M4-12

sizes 12 and 15
Without primary pressure relief valve, Y 271.311n
with internal pilot oil supply
NQ
Order details: 2
Z
M4 12 2X JK Q Y
Q U
MT
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min M4-15

M4-12
For the connection of direction valve elements
of sizes 12 and 15 Y
With primary pressure relief valve,
for external pilot oil supply NQ
Order details: Z
M4 12 2X JK X Q U
MT
Short description M4-15
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
Pressure information in bar behind JK... required
(3-digit)

For the connection of direction valve elements M4-12

of sizes 12 and 15
With primary pressure relief valve, Y 271.311n
with internal pilot oil supply
NQ
Order details:
Z
M4 12 2X JK Y
Q U
Short description MT
M4-15
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
Pressure information in bar behind JK... required
(3-digit)

305
22/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Inlet elements: Open Center (P) for sandwich plate design

With primary pressure relief valve,

for external pilot oil supply
Order details:

M4 12 2X P X
N
Short description
Q Y Z MT U
For fixed displacement pumps up to 150 l/min
Pressure information in bar after P ... required
(3-digit)

With primary pressure relief valve,

with internal pilot oil supply Y
Order details:

M4 12 2X P Y

Short description
For fixed displacement pumps up to 150 l/min
Pressure information in bar after P ... required
(3-digit) N

Q Z MT U

With LS shut-off
Order details: Y

M4 12 2X P Y A

Short description
LS line is connected de-energized with the Y line to
the tank
All downstream M4-12 sandwich plates remain in
the load-holding mode N
Q MT Z U

306
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 23/64

Inlet elements: Monoblock Closed Center (JM)

Without primary pressure relief valve, with

internal pilot oil supply C
Order details:

M4 12 2X JM Z Y NB
NC
S QM J W2 1 H H B
#c#
B C
LM V 01
#b#
Q U
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min

Q Y ZMT U 2

MT
With priority function, without primary pressure
relief valve, for external pilot oil supply C
Order details:

M4 12 2X JM Z X NB
NC
V M J W2 1 H H B
#c#
B C

LM V 01
#b#
Q U
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min T
Priority for the integrated M4-12 axis
Remaining flow to external actuator
Q Y Z MT U

With priority function, without primary pressure Q Y Z MT U

relief valve, for external pilot oil supply, for the
connection of further directional valve elements C
Order details:

M4 12 2X JM Z X
NB
NC
V M J W2 1 H H B
#c#
B C
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 150 l/min #b#
Q U
Priority for the integrated M4-12 axis
Remaining flow for flanged-on M4-12 axes

Note!
Please consult Technical Sales. Q Y Z MT U

307
24/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Inlet elements: Monoblock Open Center (PM)

With primary pressure relief valve, with internal
pilot oil supply C
Order details:

M4 12 2X PM Z Y NB
NC
D M J W2 1 Q Q B
#c#
B C
LM V 01
#b#
Q U
Short description
For fixed displacement pumps up to 130 l/min
Primary pressure relief via pressure compensator
and LS pressure relief valve
Y
Note!
Please consult Technical Sales.

Q Z U

With primary pressure relief valve, for external

pilot oil supply C
Order details:

M4 12 2X PM Z X
N

D = M J W2 1 H H B
#c#
B C

LM V 01
#b#
Q U
Short description
For fixed displacement pumps up to 130 l/min
Primary pressure relief via pressure
compensator and LS pressure relief valve
Y
Note!
Please consult Technical Sales.

Q Z U

308
 RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 25/64

Directional valve elements: Pressure compensator

Flow control by pressure compensator Main spool in central position
231 B C

211
U U
91
Flow in L/min m

71 Z

Q
51 MTQ

31 NB NC
5 3 6 2 4

1 61
211 261 311 361 411
Pressure difference in bar m 2
Main spool operated
In the central position of the main spool, there is no
connection from P to the actuator ports A and B. In this B C
operating state, the pressure compensator spool (1)
is moved to the left against the spring (2) by the pump
pressure.
When the main spool (3) is operated (= metering orifice), U U
the LS pressure reaches the spring chamber (4) and moves
the pressure compensator spool to the right into the control
position. The flow is kept constant even in case of parallel
Z
operation of actuators with different load pressures.
The pressure compensator S boasts a load holding
function. This function is not free of leak oil. Q
MTQ
In its standard version it is equipped with one ring (5). The
number of the rings inserted depends on the required flow.
Pressure compensator spool variants NB NC
5 3 6 2 4
Order details Short description Symbol
with pressure compensator
S with load holding function 1)
max. flow 130 l/min
without pressure compensator
C with load holding function 1)
max. flow 140 l/min
without pressure compensator
Q without load holding function
max. flow 140 l/min
with pressure compensator
F with load holding function 1)
Sensitive for flows up to 20 l/min

D 2) with 3-way pressure compensator

V 3) with priority function

1) The load holding function is not free of leak oil.

2) only with PM
3) only with JM

309
26/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: LS pressure relief function

Characteristic curves
Reduction of the actuator flow through LS pressure
relief function 211
Minimum setting: 50 bar
Maximum setting: 330 bar 91

Flow in % m
71

51

31

1 61 211 261 311 361 411 461

Set value (example)
LS pressure in bar m

Q Y Z MT U
With LS pressure relief valve and LS plug
screw C
Order details:

S M Q J W2 1 H H
NB
Short description NC
Pressure information in bar for actuator port A B
#c# B C
(3-digit)
Plug screw for actuation port B
#b#
For the QMQ version, the LS pressure relief Q U
function can be retrofitted at the directional valve
element.
The LS pressure can be influenced externally
via the ports MA and MB. These ports can also
be used as measuring ports.

With LS pressure relief valve and Unloading plugs Q Y ZMT U

Order details: C
S M B E 000 W2 1 H Q

Short description NB
Pressure information in bar for actuator port A NC
(3-digit) B
Unloading plug for actuator port B #c# B C

e.g. for cylinders with one-sided operation

#b#
Q U

Note!
Please consult Technical Sales.

310
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 27/64

Directional valve elements: LS pressure relief function

With only 1 LS pressure relief valve Q Y Z MT U

Order details:
C
S =M J W2 1 H H

Short description
NB
Only 1 LS pressure relief valve for identical NC
pressure setting in A and B, pressure B
information in bar (3-digit) #c# B C
1 measuring port
#b#
Q U

2
Without LS pressure relief valves Q Y Z MT U
Order details:
C
S ZZZ J W2 1 H H

Short description
LS pressure relief valve cannot be retrofitted
Housing without measuring ports B
Max. flow of internal actuators 90 l/min #c# B C

#b#
Q U

Housing for change-over axis Q Y Z MT U

Order details:

Z ZUZ J W4 1 K Z Z

Short description
Housing for change-over axis
D
#c#
B C

#b#
Q U

311
28/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: LS pressure relief function

Electroproportional / hydraulically switchable pressure relief function

Short description Q Y Z MT U
Differentiation between: C
1. Type KBPS electrohydraulically proportional
2. Type MH2DAD and Type KBPS
3. Type KKDE electrohydraulically switchable
4. Porting pattern KBPS and cover plate B
5. Housing KBPS and plug B C

c
The exact description of the valve is to be clear Q U
N
text as follows. b

1. Electroproportional pressure relief valve

Type KBPS
(see also data sheet RE 18139-04; RE 18139-05)
Standard product range:

S L J H H H KBPSL8BA
N N

S J J H H H KBPSL8AA

S R J H H H KBPSR8BA

S N J H H H KBPSR8AA KBPSBA: KBPSAA:

Decreasing characteristic Rising characteristic curve
curve
Extension program, such as:

S K J H H H KBPSH8BA -033

2. Pressure cut-off valve, type MH2DAD, and

electroproportional pressure relief valve,
type KBPS
(see also data sheet RE 64586;
RE 18139-04; RE 18139-05) NMT QMT

S K J H H H MH2DAD+KBPSH8BA

312
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 29/64

Directional valve elements: LS pressure relief function

Pressure control through electroproportional

LS pressure relief function
Pressure in the main connection 1 in bar m

561 Addition
Falling Rising
511 SO no.
2 characteristic characteristic
(Option:
461 curve curve
4 24 V; 0.8 A)
411 50 bar KBPSC8BA KBPSC8AA
361 100 bar KBPSF8BA KBPSF8AA
3 5 150 bar KBPSH8BA KBPSH8AA
311 (2)
210 bar KBPSL8BA KBPSL8AA (4)
033
261 250 bar KBPSN8BA KBPSN8AA
211 315 bar KBPSP8BA KBPSP8AA
350 bar KBPSR8BA (1) KBPSR8AA (3)
61
420 bar KBPST8BA KBPST8AA
1 36 61 86 211 = Standard product range
Command value in % m
2

Technical data KBPS (see also RE 18139-04)

electrical standard
Supply voltage V 12 DC 24 DC
Maximum control current mA max. nominal current 1,760 mA max. nominal current 1,200 mA
Coil resistance Cold value with 20C 7 2.3 4.8
max. hot value 7 3.65 7.2
Duty cycle % 100 1)
Maximum coil temperature 2) C 150
Protection type acc. to Version K4 IP 65 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), Version C4 IP 66 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
DIN 40050-9
IP 69K with Rexroth plug-in connector (Material No. R901022127)
Version K40 IP 69K with plug-in connector mounted and locked

1) If use > 2,000 m via NN, we recommend consulting the 2) Due to the surface temperatures of solenoid coils, the standards
manufacturer. EN 563 and EN 982 must be adhered to!

313
30/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: LS pressure relief function

3. 2/2 way spool valve type KKDE

S K J H H H KKDER8PA

De-energized open De-energized closed

KKDER8PA KKDER8NA
KKDEPA: KKDENA:
De-energized open De-energized closed
Technical data KKDE (see also RD 18136-08)

electrical standard
Type of voltage Direct voltage
Supply voltage V 12 DC 24 DC
Voltage tolerance and ambient temperature See characteristic curve RE 18136-08 page 5
Power consumption 7 22
Duty cycle % See characteristic curve RE 18136-08 page 5
Maximum coil temperature 2) C 150
Switching time according to ON ms b80
ISO 6403 (solenoid horizontal) OFF ms b150
Maximum switching frequency cy/h 15,000
Protection type acc. to VDE Version K4 IP 65 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), Version C4 IP 66 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
DIN 40050-9
IP 69K with Rexroth plug-in connector (material no. R901022127)
Version K40 IP 69K with plug-in connector mounted and locked

1) If use > 2000 m via NN, we recommend consulting the

At the electrical connection K4, the protective earth
manufacturer.
2) Due to the surface temperatures of the solenoid coils, the European conductor (PE ) must be connected correctly.
standards EN 563 and EN 982 must be adhered to!

Note!
Consumer pressure does not become depressurized!

4. Porting pattern KBPS and cover plate

S K J H H H A
Cover plate

5. Housing KBPS and plug

S K J H H H Q Plug

314
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 31/64

Directional valve elements: Main spool

Main spool variants
Order details Main use Symbol
Flow information in l/min
B NC NB C

E Hydro cylinder as actuator

Q MT U

B N C NB C

J Hydro motors as actuator

Q MT U

B NC NB C
Application with defined residual opening
Q (A/B m T)
Actuator port unloaded in neutral position
Q MT U

B NC N B C 2
Regeneration function
R
(P, B m A)
Q MT U

B NC N B C

W Float position

Q MT U

B NC NB C

Y Float position

Q MT U

B NC N B C

P Plunger cylinder as actuator

Q MT U

B NC NB C

(E, J, Q) T Spool with pressure function

Q MT U

315
32/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Main spool

Spool characteristic curves (symmetric spools)

P A/B
251
2
231 3

4
211

Nominal flow
5
Flow in l/min

91

6
71

7
51
8
31 9
:
21
1-5 1-56 1-6 1-66 1-7 1-76 1-8 1-86 1-9 (24 V actuation)
electrohydraulic
operation (12 V actuation)
1-9: 2-1 2-23 2-34 2-45 2-56 2-67 2-79 2-9
hydraulic Current in amperes
operation
9 21 23 25 27 29 31 33-6
9-6
Pilot pressure in bar
digital on-board
electronics (EPM2)
61 211 261 311 361
1 365
Command value in digits (steps)
servohydraulic
operation
8 : 21 23 24 25 27 28 31
(at pctrl = 35 bar) 9
Current in milliamperes

316
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 33/64

Directional valve elements: Flow

Symmetric spools
Pressure
Spool type compen- Flow in l/min (spool characteristic curve see page 32)
sator
130130 (1) 100100 073073 052052 034034 023023 014014 007007
S 120120 (2) 085085 (4) 065065 (5) 045045 (6) 030030 (7) 020020 (8) 012012 (9) 006006 (10)
E, J, Q
100100 (3) 070070 057057 038038 026026 017017 010010 005005
C 140140 115115 090090 063063 042042 028028 017017 008008

Asymmetric spools
Pressure
Spool type compen- Flow in l/min
sator
100073 100052 052034 034023 023014
S 085065 085045 045030 030020 020012
E, J, Q
070057 070038 038026 026017 017010
C 115090 115063 063042 042028 028017

Float position, regeneration and plunger spools

Pressure
Spool type compen- Nominal flow in l/min (more on inquiry)
2
sator
W S 030030
Y S 030030
R S 130101 085030 065025
P S 140000
(1) (10) Notes on spool characteristic curve, page 32.

Note!
Please consult Technical Sales.

Example: Solution:
Spool type J m 85 liter spool + 2 washers = 100 l/min
Pressure compensator S m Set 90 liters via stroke limitation.
Command value: QActuator = 90 l/min

Pressure
Spool type Flow in l/min
compensator
100100
E, J, Q S 085085
070070

Flow without washer (pressure compensator $p = 4 to 7 bar)

Flow with 1 washer (pressure compensator $p = 6 to 9.5 bar)
Volume flow with 2 washers (pressure compensator $p = 8.5 to 11.5 bar)

Note!
Position directional valve elements with maximum flow as
close as possible to the inlet element.

317
34/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover A mechanical

Purely mechanical (non-encapsulated) with Q Y Z MT U

tongue
Order details: C

S ZZZ J A Z Z Z

Short description NB
NC
Mechanical operation of the main spool. In case B
of non-operation centering in central position by B C
springs

Q U

Purely mechanical (non-encapsulated) with Q Y Z MT U

handle-operated lever and detent
C
Order details:

S M J B1 N H H
NB
Short description
NC
Mechanical operation of the main spool. In case B
of non-operation centering in central position by B C
springs

Q U
Note!
Handle-operated lever setting, please consult
Technical Sales.

Mechanical (encapsulated) Q Y Z MT U
Order details: C
S M J M K H H

Short description NB
Mechanical operation of the main spool. In case NC
of non-operation centering in central position by B 2*
springs B C
All handle-operated lever position options are
#c#
available (K, L, M etc.) comp. also type key on
Q U
page 11
#b#
1) Following handle-operated lever
2) Non-following handle-operated lever

3*

318
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 35/64

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A hydraulic

Hydraulic Q Y Z MT U
Order details:
C
S M J H H H

Short description
NB
Recommended hydraulic pilot control units: NC
Type TH6 according to RE 64555 B
B C

c
Q U
b

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A servohydraulic

Servohydraulic Q Y Z MT U
Order details:
C
S ZZZ J S Q Q

Short description
Voltage: 7 VDC min.
Current type: Direct current B
Nominal current: 20 mA B C
Max. current: 25 mA
Q U
STDS 0014; see RE 29617-B2
STDS 0015; see RE 29616-B2
STDS 0016; see RE 29618-B2

Note!
Rating by Technical Sales.

319
36/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically switchable

Electrohydraulically switchable Q Y Z MT U
Order details: C
S M J W4 1 H H

Short description NB
Switching valves, type FTWE 2 K according to NC
RE 58007 B
#c#
B C

#b#
Q U

Q Y Z MT U
Electrohydraulically switchable with damping
orifice on both sides C
Order details:

S M J W5 3 H H
NB
Short description NC
B
Switching valves, type FTWE 2 K according to #c#
B C
RE 58007
#b#
Q U

Q Y Z MT U
Electrohydraulically switchable with
measuring ports on both sides C
Order details:

S M J W6 3 H H
NB
Short description NC
B #c#
Switching valves, type FTWE 2 K according to B C
RE 58007 Nc
#b#
Q U
Nb

320
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 37/64

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically switchable

Electrohydraulically switchable with damping Q Y ZMT U

orifice, with measuring ports on both sides
C
Order details:

S M J W7 1 H H
NB
Short description B NC
Switching valves, type FTWE 2 K according to #c#
RE 58007 Nc B C

#b#
Nb
Q U

2
Q Y Z MT U
Electrohydraulically switchable with orifice
and check valve for hydraulic override C
Order details:

S M J G4 3 H H
NB
B
Short description NC
#c#
Switching valves, type FTWE 2 K according to B C
RE 58007 c
#b# b
Q U

Technical data FTWE 2K (see also RE 58007)

electrical
Type of voltage Direct voltage
Nominal voltage V 12 24
Power consumption at 20 W 14.4 14.4
Coil resistance R20 7 10 40
Duty cycle % 100
Switching time ton ms b20
toff ms b30
Protection type according to Solenoid IP 69K
DIN 40050-9 Electrical C4 IP 69K 1)
connection K40 IP 69K 1)
Switching frequency Hz 5

1) Recommended plug-in connector see page 40.

321
38/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically proportional

Electrohydraulically proportional with handle- Q Y Z MT U
operated lever (encapsulated)
C
Order details:

S M J W2 1 K H H

Short description NB
NC
Proportional pressure reducing valve B 2*
Type FTDRE 2 K according to RE 58032 #c# B C

Safety notes! #b#

Q U
f Following handle-operated lever 1):
Electrohydraulic operation can be overruled by
mechanical operation. The handle-operated
lever is connected directly with the main spool
and follows the spool movement in case of
electrohydraulic control. 3*
f Non-following handle-operated lever 2):
The handle-operated lever is connected with
the main spool via a coupling. When the
main spool is in central position, the handle-
operated lever can be detented. Thus, it does
not follow the movement of the spool in case of
electrohydraulic operation.
Electrohydraulically proportional with Q Y Z MT U
measuring ports on both sides C
Order details:

S M J W8 9 H H
NB
Short description NC
Proportional pressure reducing valve, B
#c#
type FTDRE 2 K according to RE 58032 B C
Nc
#b#
Q U
Nb

Q Y Z MT U
Electrohydraulically proportional with
damping orifice and check valve C
Order details:

S M J G2 1 H H
NB
Short description B NC

Proportional pressure reducing valve, #c# B C

type FTDRE 2 K according to RE 58032 c
#b# b
Q U

322
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 39/64

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically proportional

Technical data FTDRE 2K (see also RE 58032)

electrical
Type of voltage Direct voltage
Nominal voltage of the amplifier V 12 24
Maximum control current A 1.8 0.8
Coil resistance (20 ) 7 2.4 12
Duty cycle (with amplifier) % 100
Electrical connection See ordering codes
Protection type according to Solenoid IP 69K
DIN 40050-9 Electrical connection C4 IP 69K 1)
K40 IP 69K 1)
PWM frequency (recommended) 1) Hz 150

1) The PWM frequency is to be optimized depending on the individual application.

In this regard, the operating temperature must be taken into account.
Recommended plug-in connector see page 40. 2

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A on-board electronics

Electronic pilot module Q Y Z MT U

Order details: C
S M J CBA H H

Short description NB
Digital interface, standard NC
see RE 64815-B B
#c# B C

#b#
Q U

Q Y Z MT U
Electronic pilot module with position sensor
C
Order details:

S M J CPA Q Q

Short description NB
NC
Digital interface with position sensor, B
see RE 64815-B #c# B C

#b#
Note! Q U
At request only. Rating by Technical Sales.

323
40/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover A on-board electronics

All control blocks with EPM2 are supplied with mounted Open plug for Daisy chain Plug with final
daisy chain cabling and final resistance plug. The final connection to the resistance
resistance is mounted to the last sandwich plate of the machine electronics
block.
Recommended cable for connection to the machine electronics:
Material number: R917c02724

End
Inlet element
element

B B B B
U B B

N C C

Directional valve elements: Voltage supply and plugs

Plug type
Supply voltage Junior Timer DT04-2P
2-pin (AMP) (Deutsch)
24 V 1 8
12 V 3 9

This information is required only in case of electrohydraulic

operation and / or electroproportional pressure relief
function.

Recommended plug-in connector for connector type

Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
Plug-in connector for FTDRE and FTWE protection type
IP 69K Recommended plug-in connector for Junior Timer 2-pin
(AMP)
Material number: R900313533
For a litz wire cross-section of 0.5 to 1 mm and for an
insulation diameter of the individual seals of 1.2 to 2.1 mm
Material number: R901022127
For a litz wire cross-section of 0.5 to 1 mm and for an
insulation diameter of the individual seals of 2.2 to 3 mm

Note!
Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply
and must be ordered separately.

324
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 41/64

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover B

Mechanical - Non-encapsulated operation (purely mechanical)

Spring centered + Tongue

Spring centered + Tongue
with lever

AZ AN

Detent + Tongue Detent + Tongue with lever

B1 Z B1 N B1 = Detent in 1
BC 3 1
B2 Z B2 N 2 B2 = Detent in 2
3 1 2

B4 Z B4 N Q U B4 = Detent in 1, 2

Operating force:
Tongue < 250 N (spool axis) 2

Note!
Handle-operated lever setting, please consult Technical
Sales.

325
42/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover B

Mechanical - encapsulated operation

Standard lever Clamping piece with lever Lever screwing at the

(example: lever screwing in Pos. 2) clamping piece

60 = K, N
60 = B, G

30 = B1, G1 1

0 = L, O 0 = F, H
2

-30 = D1, J1 3

-60 = D, J
-60 = M, P

Bottom, Bottom, without

Top, 60 Top, 30 Straight, 0
30 60 lever
Standard Following K L M R
Non-following N O P X
Clamping Following B 1 B1 1 F 1 D1 1 D 1
piece with B 2 B1 2 F 2 D1 2 D 2
lever B 3 B1 3 F 3 D1 3 D 3
Non-following G 1 G1 1 H 1 J1 1 J 1
G 2 G1 2 H 2 J1 2 J 2
G 3 G1 3 H 3 J1 3 J 3
Clamping Following T T1 U V1 V
piece Non-following
Q Q1 S C1 C
without lever

Operating force (at the handle-operated lever):

Mechanical < 20 N
Hydraulic, handle-operated lever override < 70 N
Electrohydraulic, handle-operated lever override < 50 N

Further handle-operated lever options (aluminum-free) on inquiry.

= Standard product range

326
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 43/64

Directional valve elements: Secondary valves

Shock/feed valve, non-adjustable

Order details: Q Y Z MT U
C
S M J W2 1 H100 H150

Short description
Non-adjustable shock/feed valve NB
Pressure information in bar behind H ... required NC
(3-digit) B
#c# B C
Example: H100, H150
H100: Shock/feed valve, set to 100 bar for actuator port A #b#
Q U
H150: Shock/feed valve, set to 150 bar for actuator port B

Note!
Suitable only to reduce pressure peaks, not to be
used as pressure relief valve!
2

Preferred pressure settings for shock valves with feed function

Pressure setting in bar in the actuator ports A and B

H050 = 50 bar H140 = 140 bar H210 = 210 bar H280 = 280 bar
H063 = 63 bar H150 = 150 bar H230 = 230 bar H300 = 300 bar
H080 = 80 bar H160 = 160 bar H240 = 240 bar H320 = 320 bar
H100 = 100 bar H175 = 175 bar H250 = 250 bar H350 = 350 bar
H125 = 125 bar H190 = 190 bar

Note!
Shock valves have a fixed setting!

Shock/Feed valves, adjustable Q Y Z MT U

Order details: C
S M J W2 1 Q A

Short description
NB
Adjustable shock/feed valve NC
Pressure information in bar behind A ... required B
(3-digit) #c# B C

Example: QA200 #b#

Q: Plug screw for actuator side A Q U

A200: Shock/feed valve, set to 200 bar for actuator

port B

The directional valve is ready for retroactive fitting of

secondary valves.

Adjustable pressure levels in bar in the actuator ports

A and B
Note!
10 70 201 270
Suitable only to reduce pressure peaks, not to be
71 120 271 320
used as pressure relief valve!
121 200 321 380

327
44/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Directional valve elements: Secondary valves

Without secondary valves Q Y Z MT U

Order details:
C
S M J W2 1 Z Z

Short description
NB
Secondary valves cannot be retrofitted
NC
Actuator port G 3/4 B
#c# B C
Order details:
#b#
S M J W2 1 X X Q U

Short description
Secondary valves cannot be retrofitted
Actuator port G 1/2

Without secondary valves, with flange Q Y Z MT U

surface
Order details:

S M J W2 1 F F
C
Short description NB
NC
Secondary valves cannot be retrofitted
Information on the flange valves in clear text #c# B C

B #b#
Note! Q U
Dimensioning of the flanged installation housing
with screwable valves by Technical Sales.

328
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 45/64

Directional valve elements: Housing options that can be ordered

With Without Without Flange surface

secondary secondary secondary
valve option valve options valve options
(can be (cannot be (cannot be
retrofitted) retrofitted) retrofitted)
G 1/2 G 3/4
G 1/2
Q, A, H XX ZZ FF
Without LS pressure relief valves
(LS pressure relief valve cannot be
retrofitted)
ZZZ
Without LS pressure relief valves, for
change-over axis (LS pressure relief valve
cannot be retrofitted)
ZUZ
With only 1 LS pressure relief valve for same

Standard

=M
pressure setting in A and B

With 2 LS pressure relief valves

(pressure info in bar, 3-digit)
M 2
With LS pressure relief valves
(pressure info in bar, 3-digit)
Housing for electroproportional or switchable
K
pressure relief function
Without LS pressure relief valves
(LS pressure relief valve cannot be
retrofitted)
ZZZ
With only 1 LS pressure relief valve for same
=M
pressure setting in A and B
Mechanical

With 2 LS pressure relief valves

(pressure info in bar, 3-digit)
M
With LS pressure relief valves
(pressure info in bar, 3-digit)
K
Housing for electroproportional or switchable
pressure relief function

329
46/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

End elements
End element with LS unloading
Order details:

LA MT U

End element with LS port MT[

Order details:

LZ
MT
Short description
LS unloading must be ensured externally

End element LA with additional P and T port Q U

Order details:

LAPT
MT

End element LZ with additional P and T port Q MT[ U

Order details:

LZPT

Short description
LS unloading must be ensured externally

End element LA with two installation bores for QY Z D2 D3 U

FTDRE, FTWE
Consult Technical Sales for use of units!
Order details:

LA W4 W2

Short description
For 30 bar control pressure. MT U

End element LA with three installation bores for D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

pressure reducing valve, KKDER...
Consult Technical Sales for use of units!
Order details:

LA KKDER KKDER Q Q

Short description Z
Max. 40 l/min per working port
See also RE 18136-05
Q Y Z MT U

330
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 47/64

End element to be combined with central inlet element

End element for use with central inlet element MT
Order details:

M4 12 2X LU

End element LU with installation bores for FTDRE,

FTWE
Consult Technical Sales for use of units!
Order details:

M4 12 2X LU Q W4

Short description:
QY Z D2 D3 U
For 30 bar control pressure
2

End elements adapter plate

Adapter plate for SP-08 directional valve elements SP-08

Order details:

L8 210

Short description:
With integrated 2-way pressure compensator
With LS pressure relief valve, set to 210 bar
Type key for flange-mounted SP-08 sandwich plates
according to RE 64139 Q Y Z MT U
M4-12
Maximum 7 directional valve elements permitted

Adapter plate for ED valves from BROC

Use only on inquiry!
Order details:

LC

Short description:
Type key for flange-mounted ED valves according to
RIE 00159

Attention!
Rating by Technical Sales.

331
48/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: Line connections

Inlet element lateral Closed center P G 3/4

T G 3/4
LS G 1/4
X, Y G 1/4
M G 1/4
Open center P G 3/4
T G1
LS G 1/4
X, Y G 1/4
M G 1/4
Inlet element central Closed center P G1
T G1
LS G 1/4
X, Y G 1/4
MP G 1/4
Directional valve element with secondary valves A G 1/2
B
without secondary valves A G 3/4
(option Z) B
without secondary valves A G 1/2
(option X) B
a G 1/4
b
MA G 1/4
MB
Ma G 1/8
Mb
Change-over axis C G 3/4
End element P G 1/2
T G 1/2
LS G 1/4
LSZ G 1/4
X, Y G 1/4
C1, C2 C6 G 1/4
For LAPT, LZPT P, T G 3/4

P = Pump M, MP = Pump measuring port

A, B = Actuator MA, MB = LS pressure measuring ports
a, b = Pilot line Ma, Mb = Pilot pressure measuring ports
T = Tank C = External actuators
X = Pilot oil supply C1, C2 C6 = Additional actuators
Y = Tank, depressurized
LS = Load-sensing (LS)
LSZ = LS - feed Fastening screws M10
according to EN ISO 4762 or EN ISO 4014:
Property class: 8.8 10.9
Connections according to ISO 1179-1 Fastening torque: 41 2 Nm 60 3 Nm

332
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 49/64

Dimensions: Inlet elements

Lateral inlet element J...Y Lateral inlet element P...Y

214
214
36
36

23

23
N21<26!ujfg
deep N21<26!ujfg
deep
59 59 24/6

5
Z

Y N

225
MT

225
Y Z

:3
62/6
55/6

MT
65

61
51
38

36
Q

24 46
61 5 76 5
49/6 56
76 :2/6 2
9: 243
236

N
37

54
39

U U
Q

59 56
96 :2/6 59

Central inlet element JZ Central inlet element JK

223/6
236
45/6 23
26
38
36

23

91
76 89 46
deep
N21<26!ujfg 41
59 :1
N21<2602:!ujfg
deep

NQ
241
225

Y
:4

MT
58
54

51

Y
36

36

Z Z
248 26 264 25
75
38

Q 81
64
76

Q
:1

U
71
57

U MT

48 db/!45 51 db/!59
87 216
::

333
50/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: Single monoblock

Standard monoblock Closed Center JM as inlet element with 1 axis; more directional valve elements flangeable

47
27
103

125 36,5

T
Y

20,5
93
68

LS

63
P
52
37,5

29
16,5

15 89

18 107,5
44,5
72
78,5

94
50
15,5

37

88
94

17,5
168

334
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 51/64

Dimensions: Single monoblock

Standard monoblock Open Center PM

43
95

125

2
124
119

98.5

87.5
72

33

19

15 40

18 67
72 114.5
78.5

94
50
41
98

335
52/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: Directional valve elements

Housing with secondary valve bore, Housing without secondary valve bore, Housing for change-over axis
actuator port G1/2 actuator port G3/4 actuator port G3/4
Order details: actuator port G1/2
Order details:
Order details:
A A ZUZ Z Z
Z Z
H H
X X
Q Q

236 236
236
94/6 :9
5: 57 58

D
34

34
C
29
39

57

57
57

B B
83 41

N NB

26
44
45

NC

2:

Dimensions: Operation

Purely mechanical operation with Purely mechanical operation with tongue and lever
tongue
Order details:
Order details:
B1 N
A Z

Cover A Cover B Cover A Cover B

8
280
8

X 41.5

52
X 128

336
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 53/64

Dimensions: Operation
Mechanical / hydraulic operation with Cover A Cover B
standard cover

Order details:

86.5
63
39
H

64 56.5

2
Cover A Cover B
Electrohydraulic operation

Order details: "b"

W.
86.5

"a"
63
39

108

Electronic pilot module EPM2 169

with handle-operated lever
Cover A Cover B
Order details:

C.A K
230
60
152

135 86
46

337
54/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: End elements

Order details: Order details:

LA LZ
103 103
15 25 25

15
M10 M10

125 125
114.5 114.5
30 67 30 67
15 46.5 15 46.5
114

114
83.5

83.5
63

63

27
LSZ

17
15

15
Order details: Order details:

LAPT LZPT

103 103
25 25
15

15

M10 M10

125 125
114.5 114.5
50 67 50 67
15 46.5 15 46.5

T T
114

114

P P
83.5

83.5
63

63
35

35
27

LSZ

87 37 87
15

15

338
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 55/64

Dimensions: End elements

Order details: Order details:

LU LU

103
123.5
25
45.5

20
20

M10
106 M10
47
12.5 18 28
8 16 17.5

33
33
50

64

63
C2
17

77
114

93.5

90
96
83.5

114
C1
2

83.5
P

46.5 35
15

67 24

15
67
87.5 35
114.5
135
125
145

Order details: 123.5

45.5
LA
20

M10
105
77
47
17.5 27 18
33

33

C2
50

T
64
64

75
88
84

93.5
114

LSz C1
83.5

P1

Y1

35 67
15

87.5
135
150

339
56/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: Control block Closed Center with lateral inlet element

(according to the order example of page 12, dimensions in mm)
429

230
"b"
152

Y LS
X
86.5

"a"
63

44.5
54
40
39

27
P
13
38.5
65
89
135 125 86

4 98
83.5 9
8 49
114

5.2 8

46 30
18
28

B2

A2
6.2
23

239
46 46
47
3
23

B1
4
A1 6.1
5.1
50

7
28

T M

46 114 4
2
4

108 48 56.5
85
114.5
15

67
46.5
83.5

1 Type plate
2 Inlet element J...Y
Closed Center
103 3 Directional valve elements
25 4 End element LA
12

5.1 Control cover W (side A) for

electrohydraulic operation
10 5.2 Control cover CBA (side A)
with electronic pilot module
M (EPM2)
34

6.1 Control cover standard (side

MA
B)
33

MB
6.2 Control cover K (side B)
7 Stroke limitation
15

19 8 Secondary valves
25
30 9 Tie rod
72 10 Fastening screw thread
103 4 x M10; 15 deep

340
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 57/64

Dimensions: Control block Open Center with lateral inlet element

(according to the order example of page 13, dimensions in mm)

1
"b"
X M

86.5 "a"

51.5
63
LS

50
39

25
35 79
108 45
91.5
132
317 114 34
125 86 86.5
98 56.5
9 83.5
39
52 27
4 49
6.3

13
46 41.5 LSZ

50
5.3 T
B3 2

A
46
5.2 A3
6.2 7

A B
23
B2

46
257
"a" "b"
A2
3

A B
5.1

13.5
B1

46
A1
6.1

B
8 8
26

43
Y

65
T
P

2 50 45 7 4
64 91.5 48 92
114.5 114 31.5
15

87
35
83.5

46.5 P

1 Type plate
67 2 Inlet element P...Y
Open Center
3 Directional valve elements
103
30 4 End element LZPT
25 5.1 Control cover A (side A) for
19 mechanical operation
5.2 Control cover H (side A) for
12

hydraulic operation
10
5.3 Control cover W (side A) for
electrohydraulic operation
33

6.1 Purely mechanical operation

with tongue (side B)
30

6.2 Control cover standard (side B)

13

20
Control cover X (side B)
7 Stroke limitation
8 Secondary valves
9 Tie rod
15

25 10 Fastening screw thread

103 4 x M10; 15 deep

341
58/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: Control block Closed Center with central inlet element

(according to the order example of page 14, dimensions in mm)

"b"
86.5

83.5
"a"
63
39

15
46.5
9 67
114.5
125
137
125
10 83.5 4 114
49 6
6.2 8.5 3
18
28

46 30
15
B2
A2
1
27

30
P
7
53

65
65

270
80

MP
T LS

Y
2

A
B1

35 46
A1

B
6.1 3 8
108 28.5 4 7
67.5
90.5
5 25
43
125 93
135 125 170 114
97 114.5 86
46.5
15
52.5

83.5

1 Type plate

152

60

2 Central inlet element JZ

230

Closed Center
67 3 Directional valve elements
137 4 End element LA
103 5 Diversion plate LU
25 6.1 Control cover W (side A) for
20

8.5 electrohydraulic operation

11
6.2 Control cover CBA (side A)
with electronic pilot module
(EPM2)
34.5
25

7 Control cover K (side B)

8 Stroke limitation
112.5
9 Electroproportional pressure
relief valve, type KBPS
10 Tie rod
15

11 Fastening screw thread

25
4 x M10; 15 deep
103

342
 RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 59/64

Dimensions: Control block Closed Center with combined inlet element

(according to the order example of page 15, dimensions in mm)

236
157.5

135 133
440
98
46
8 25 78 114
2

15
4.1 9

46 30
3.2
23
A3 B3
6.2
7

46
1 A2 B2
12

44
30

T
40
45

2 118

76
344

90
63
MP 75 LS

20
40
P X
22

51
A1
25.5

B1
3.1 5 6.1

50
35

4.2
18 20 25
106 48.5 40
85 47
93.5 130
28
48 1 Type plate
113 2 Central inlet element JK...
141 Closed Center
125 64 3.1 Directional valve element M4-15
3.2 Directional valve element M4-12
4.1 End element LA
63

4.2 Diversion plate LU

5 Control cover CBA (side A) with
electronic pilot module (EPM2)
6.1 Control cover K (side B)
6.2 Control cover standard (side B)
7 Stroke limitation
8 Tie rod
9 Fastening screw thread
4 x M10; 15 deep

343
60/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Dimensions: Monoblock Open Center

(according to the order example of page 16, dimensions in mm)

43
2 95

125
4

T 5

124
Y

98.5
72
P 33

3
15
18
1
72
78.5

94
50
41

A B
98

6
144.5
105.4 67
40
11

19
43
87.5

67
90.5

1 Type plate
119

2 Housing PM
3 Control cover W (side A) for
electrohydraulic operation
4 Control cover K (side B)
5 Stroke limitation
294.5
6 Fastening screw thread
4 x M10; 20 deep

344
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 61/64

On-board electronics: Electronic pilot module (EPM)

Function
The electronic pilot module controls the flow at the control
block M4-12 by means of an analog or digital electrical
signal.
An analog (voltage or PWM signal) or digital (CAN bus)
input signal is converted by the pilot module into a pilot
pressure via two electrohydraulic pressure reducing valves.
In case of an analog input signal, each pilot module is
connected individually to the control electronics of the
machine.
In case of CAN bus actuation, it is possible to loop the
electrical connection to the next pilot module via a second
plug-in connection (daisy chain cabling). The complete valve
control block is then connected to the control of the machine
via the 4-pin plug of the first pilot module.
The electrical connection is realized via a 4-pin plug of type
Bosch Kompakt 1.
It is also possible to connect further CAN bus stations at the
output to the last pilot module (see also RE 64815-B).
M4-12 with EPM2
2
Features
Time functions (ramp functions), the form and gradient of
characteristic curves can be parameterized and changed Processor-independent watchdog
directly during the operating cycle via the CAN bus. Time ramps can be selected separately for valve outputs
A and B, Open and Close (only for CAN, fixed parameter
Various diagnosis functions allow to monitor the fault-free
for analog module)
operation of the pilot module.
Modifiable characteristic curve from linear to progressive
The following elements are monitored in the basic version: form separately for A and B (only CAN, fixed parameter
Correct reception of a valid command value signal for analog module)
Stability of the connection with the command value Linear reduction of the curve, modifiable in operation, and
encoder therefore also linear reduction of the total flow (CAN only,
Adherence to the defined limits of supply voltage fixed parameter for analog module)
Function of the pilot valves (short circuit, cable break) Selectable time ramps for shutdown in case of error (only
for analog module)
Malfunctions are indicated in the form of an error code Selectable monitoring limits for operating voltage
(flashing code) via an LED that can be seen from the parameterizable via CAN bus
outside.
Protection type according to EN 60529 IP 69K
With the analog module, there is a relay output available as (only with connected Bosch Kompakt plug-in connectors)
error indicator. Comprehensive options for customized parameterization
With the CAN bus variant, the error code is transferred to by Rexroth in the factory
the control in the status telegram of the pilot module and can
then be analyzed by the control: Options
Reduced cabling effort with CAN wiring through daisy Position sensor
chain with measuring port
Controlled output stages with superimposed dither

Electronic pilot module parameterization specifications

You can find the form for the parameterization specifications in the data sheet RE 64815-02.
Its purpose is to set the electronic pilot module according to the requirements of the client on delivery.

345
62/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Electronic pilot module: Pin assignment

Pin assignment at the Bosch Kompakt plug-in Pin assignment at the CAN plug-in connector
connector Connection via Bosch Kompakt plug coding 1.
The second Bosch Kompakt plug, coding 2, can be used in
conjunction with CAN control to establish a connection to the
next module or to another CAN station.

Note!
Connecting cables and plugs are not included in the scope
of supply and must be ordered separately (see also page
63).

DBO Coding 2 Bobmph Attention!

(gray plug-in connector) f Please observe the safety notes of the operating
instructions RE 64815-B at all times.
f Bosch Rexroth warrants the correct functioning of
5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2
the unit as described in the operating instructions
RE 64815-B. With this unit, Bosch Rexroth declines any
V Cbu V Cbu warranty for the safe operation of the machine or plant of
DBO mpx Gbjmvsf which this unit is a part.
DBO ijhi Tjhobm
Hoe Hoe

2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5

Coding 1
(black plug-in
connector)

346
RE 64276/08.2010 | M4-12 Bosch Rexroth AG 63/64

Electronic pilot module: Accessories

Material number Type Description Length

Daisy chain cable

R917c02581 Cable For the connection of two pilot modules (standard) 190 mm
R917c02599 Cable For the connection of two pilot modules 240 mm
R917c02628 Cable For the connection of two pilot modules via central inlet 370 mm

Special cable

R9017c05332 Cable with two plug-in connectors, coding 1 (black) 90

2
R917c05333 Cable with two plug-in connectors, coding 2 (gray) 90

Connecting cable

R917c02724 Cable with one plug-in connector, coding 1 (black) 4,000 mm

R917c04484 Cable with one plug-in connector, coding 2 (gray) 4,000 mm

Plug-in connectors and plug-in connector kits

Plug-in
R917c05459 connector Coding 1 (black), dummy plug
R917c02627 Plug-in Coding 2 (gray), dummy plug
connector
Plug-in
R917c05458 connector Coding 1 (black), dummy plug with integrated final resistance
R917c04605 Plug-in Coding 2 (gray), dummy plug with integrated final resistance
connector

Plug-in
R900785606 connector Bosch Kompakt coding 1 (black)
kit

Plug-in
R900785607 connector Bosch Kompakt coding 2 (gray)
kit

347
64/64 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-12 | RE 64276/08.2010

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Hydraulics information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
Zum Eisengieer 1 AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany consent.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
[email protected] application can be derived from our information. The information given
www.boschrexroth.de does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging.

348
Load-sensing control block RE 64283/10.08
Replaces: 06.05
1/52

in sandwich plate design

Type M4-15

Nominal size 15 2
Component series 2X
Nominal pressure 350 bar (pump side)
Nominal pressure 420 bar (actuator side)
Maximum flow
Pump side: 300 l/min for central inlet element
200 l/min for lateral inlet element
Actuator side: 200 l/min with load-holding function
200 l/min with pressure compensator
160 l/min with pressure compensator and load-holding function

Table of contents
Content Page
Features 2 Types of operation, cover A 28 to 33
Function 2 Voltage supply and plug-in connectors 33
Cross-section, Symbol 3 Types of operation cover B 34
Technical data 4, 5 Secondary valves 35
Modular design 6, 7 End elements 36 to 39
Ordering code 8 to 11 Unit dimensions 40 to 49
Order example 12 to 14 On-board electronics: Electronic pilot module 50
Inlet elements 15 to 18 Electronic pilot module: Pin assignment 51
Directional valve elements 19 Electronic pilot module: Accessories 51, 52
Pressure compensator 19
LS pressure limitation 20 to 24
Main spool 25, 26
Flow 27

349
2/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Features
System Flow
Load pressure-independent flow control Load pressure-compensated
Open center for fixed displacement pump High repeatability
Closed center for variable displacement pump Low hysteresis
Type Adjustable via stroke limiter
Sandwich plate design Pressure relief function
Inlet element Inlet element
up to 9 directional valve elements
Pilot operated pressure valves with large nominal width
up to 18 directional valve elements with central inlet ele-
ment, thereof max. 6 with servo operation Directional valve element / actuator ports
End element Compact pressure valves with feed function
Types of operation LS pressure limitation
Mechanical (hand lever following) Adjustable as per actuator port
Hydraulic External pressure setting as per actuator port possible
Servohydraulic Electro-proportional as per section
Electrohydraulic (switching, proportional) Fields of application
Electrohydraulic with on-board electronics (EPM2)
Cranes Drilling equipment
Large-scale and telescopic fork lifts Truck applications
Rock crushers Municipal vehicles
Forestry machines Stationary applications

Function

Control block M4-15 Load pressure compensation

The directional valves are proportional valves according to Pressure changes at the actuators or at the pump are com-
the load-sensing principle. pensated by the pressure compensator (3). The flow to the
Actuator control actuator remains constant even if the load varies.
The flow direction and level of flow reaching the actuator Flow limitation
ports (A or B) is determined at the main spool (2). The maximum flow can be set mechanically and individually
Pressure reducing valves (9) control the position of the main via stroke limiter (6).
spool (2). The level of electrical current at the pressure reduc- Pressure relief function
ing valve determines the level of pilot pressure in the spring The LS pressure as per actuator port can be adjusted inter-
chambers (8) and therefore also the stroke of the main spool nally via the LS pressure relief valves (4) or externally via the
(P A; P B). LS ports MA, MB.
The pressure difference at the main spool (2), and therefore Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valves (5) protect the actuator
the flow to the actuator, is maintained constant via the pres- ports A and B against pressure peaks and against external
sure compensator (3). forces.
The highest load pressure is signaled to the pump via the LS
line and the integrated shuttle valves (7).

350
3/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Cross-section
1 Housing 6.1 A side stroke limiter 9.2 Pressure reducing valve
2 Main spool 6.2 B side stroke limiter (pilot control valve b)

3 Pressure compensator 7 LS shuttle valve 10 Compression spring

4 LS pressure relief valves 8 Spring chamber 11 Hand lever
5.1 Secondary valve 9.1 Pressure reducing valve 12 A side cover
5.2 Plug screw (pilot control valve a) 13 B side cover

:/3 9 6/3 6/2

B C

#c#
22 2
U U

7/2
7/3
#b#
Y
7/2
Z
Q
MTQ

NB0C
:/2 23 5 2 4 3 21 9 24

Symbol

Connections 5 3 7 6/3 6/2

Q Y Z MT U
P Pump
A, B Actuator C
T Tank
X Pilot oil supply
NB
Y Pilot oil drain
NC
LS Load-sensing (LS) B
#c#
MA, MB External LS ports B C
:
#b#
Q U

8
4

351
4/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Technical data (Please inquire in case the intended use of unit is outside the given values!)
general
Installation position Any
Type of connection Pipe thread according to ISO 228/1
Weight Inlet element Closed center J kg 6.6
Open center P kg 10.0
with priority valve VZ kg 10.7
Central inlet element closed center JZ kg 8.5
Directional valve element Operation
Hydraulic Electrohydraulic with EPM2
kg 7.1 7.5 7.8
Excess weight of handle-operated lever kg 0.6
End element kg 5.8
Hydraulic fluid and ambient temperature range * C 20 to +80
Painting Standard priming

hydraulic
Max. volume flow at P qV, max l/min 300 with central inlet element
port l/min 200 with lateral inlet element
A, B qV, max l/min 160 with pressure compensator and load-holding function (model S)
l/min 200 with pressure compensator, without load-holding function
(model T)
l/min 200 without pressure compensator (model C)
Nominal pressure pnom bar 350
Max. operating P p bar 350
pressure at port A, B p bar 420
LS p bar 330
T p bar 30
Y p bar At zero pressure to the tank
Max. pilot pressure at X p bar 35
port a, b p bar 35
Pilot pressure range Hydraulic p bar 8.5 to 22.5
Electrohydraulic p bar 6.5 to 17.2
Required control $p at Models S; C p bar 18
the control block 1) Model T p bar 25
Recommended hydraulic pilot control devices TH6, characteristic curve 97, see RE 64552
LS pressure limitation (adjustment ranges) bar 50 to 149; 150 to 330 (selected in the factory)
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hy-
draulic fluids, such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to
VDMA 24568, as well as hydraulic fluids as specified under
RE 90221, at request
Viscosity range Hydraulic N mm/s 10 to 380
Servohydraulic N mm/s 16 to 200 2)
Max. admissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a mini-
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) mum retention rate of 75

1) Please observe the design instructions on pilot oil supply at

servohydraulic operation on page 18.
2) Between 200 and 380mm/s reduced maximum quantity.

352
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/52

Technical data (Please inquire in case the intended use of unit is outside the given values!)
servohydraulic
STDS 0014 See data sheet RE 29617
STDS 0015 See data sheet RE 29616
STDS 0016 See data sheet RE 29618

electrical
Electrical pilot control valves FTWE 2 K...; see RE 58007 1)
FTDRE 2 K...; see RE 58032 1)
Recommended amplifiers RA 1-0/10; 1 axis, see RE 95230
(further control options at request) RA 2-1/10; 4 to 6 axes, see RE 95230
Control devices RC see RE 95200
On-board electronics (EPM2) Data from page 50; see also RE 64518-B

1) Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply

and need to be ordered separately, see page 33.

2
Note!
The technical data were determined at a viscosity of
N = 32 mm/s (HLP46: 50C).
You can find more information on using the hydraulic prod-
ucts of Bosch Rexroth in our publication Hydraulic valves for
mobile applications - General information, RE 64020-B1

353
6/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Modular design: Control block with lateral inlet element

Control blocks of the series M4-15 have a modular structure.
They can be combined ideally for the corresponding application.
1. Inlet element 2.4 Operation cover B
A: Closed center VR with external priority actuators A: Standard cover
B: Open center P B: Mechanical operation K with hand lever
C: Closed center J 2.5 Electro-proportional LS pressure limitation
2. Directional valve elements 3. End element
2.1 LS pressure limitation A: with LS unloading LA and LZ
2.2 Secondary valves B: with LS port and pilot oil supply
2.3 Operation cover A LAY and LZY
A: Hydraulic operation H C: with LS port and pilot oil supply
LAX and LZX
B: Electrohydraulic operation W
C: Servohydraulic operation S
D: Electrohydraulic operation with on-board electronics
(EPM2) CBA

2.4

2.2
B
2.

C
B
A
2.2
3.

C 2.1 C
B
B
A

2.3 A

2.5 1.

354
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/52

Modular design: Control block with central inlet element

1. Central inlet element 3. End element
A: Closed center central JZ A: Diversion plate with external priority port LVZ
B: Closed center central VZ with priority valve B: Diversion plate LU
2. Directional valve elements C: with LS unloading LA and LZ
2.1 LS pressure limitation D: with LS port and pilot oil supply
2.2 Secondary valves LAY and LZY
2.3 Operation cover A E: with LS port and pilot oil supply
LAX and LZX
A: Hydraulic operation H
B: Electrohydraulic operation W
C: Servohydraulic operation S
D: Electrohydraulic operation with
on-board electronics (EPM2) CBA
2.4 Operation cover B
A: Standard cover
B: Mechanical operation K with hand lever
2.5 Electro-proportional LS pressure limitation
2.4
2

2. B

E
D 2.2
2.
C

3.

1.

D C
2.1 B
C
B A

A
2.3
3.

2.5

355
8/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Ordering code
Short code Inlet elements Directional valve elements
1. Spool axis

M4 15 2X

2. Spool axis

3. Spool axis etc.

Number of directional valves
1 to 18 1)
Nominal size 15 = 15
Component series 20 to 29 = 2X
Order details see pages 10 and 11
(unchanged installation
and connection dimensions)

Closed Open
center center
Lateral =J =P
Lateral, internal priority actuator = VL
external subordinate actuator
Lateral, external priority actua- = VR = Preferred program (M4 configurator)
tor, internal subordinate actuator 1) Max. 9 elements per side, thereof a maximum of 6
Central = JZ with servohydraulic operation
Central with priority valve = VZ 2) Consult Technical Sales.
Central for M4-12/15 = JK 2)
Without primary pressure relief valve =Q
(not with model P)
Without primary pressure relief valve =
(pressure info in bar, 3-digit)
Priority valve (only with V.)
Static priority valve =A
Dynamic priority valve =B
LS pressure limitation at priority valve (V.) =
(pressure info in bar, 3-digit)

Short code Example for a short code of the M4-15 control block with
Complete control blocks are defined in accor- three directional valve elements:
dance with the type key.
The order text is to determine the technical fea- M4 4567 2 0 / 3 M4 15 J W2 K V 01 450
tures and requirements.
From the order text the Rexroth distribution organi-
zation derives a short code and a material number. Control block No.
Component series of
unit series (2 X)
Revision status of the series
Number of directional valve
elements
Inlet
Operation A side (prevalent operation)
Operation B side (prevalent operation)
Sealing material
Threaded connection
SO number if any

356
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/52

Ordering code
End elements Additional details

01 *
Further details in the clear text
SO numbers
038 = Resistant to sea water 6)
450 = Aluminum-free
S= For safety-relevant applications
Supply voltage 24 V Supply voltage 12 V Supply voltage and plug-in connector 5)
1 3 Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
8 9 DT04-2P (German)
01 = Connections as pipe thread acc. to ISO 228/1
V= FKM seals 4)
M= NBR seals (at request only)

with without External pilot Internal pilot Internal pilot with additional
LS unloading LS unloading oil supply oil supply oil supply for P and T con- 2
servohydraulic nections
operation3)
LA =
LAPT =
LAY =
LAYPT =
LAK =
LAX =
LAXPT =
LZ =
LZPT =
LZY =
LZYPT =
LZK =
LZX =
LZXPT =

L12Y = Adapter plate for M4-12 directional valve elements with pilot oil supply
L12Q = Adapter plate for M4-12 directional valve elements without pilot oil supply
Only in connection with inlet elements VL, VZ, JZ:
LVZ = External priority port (connection option for another LS control block)
LU = Diversion plate
LUT = Diversion plate with additional T port
LUPT = Diversion plate with additional P and T port

5) Information required only for electrohydraulic operation and

= Preferred program (M4 configurator)
3) Notes on pilot oil supply see page 18. electroproportional pressure limitation.
6) At request only. Rating by Technical Sales.
4) The block preferably contains FKM, but also NBR seals.
Observe compatibility of seals of the hydraulic fluids used! Note!
Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply
and need to be ordered separately; see also page 33.

357
10/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Ordering code

Pressure compensator
with pressure compensator, with load-holding function =S
with pressure compensator, without load-holding function =T
without pressure compensator, with load-holding function =C
LS valve
with LS pressure relief valve 1)
=
(pressure information in bar, 3-digit) (no Z possible)

with LS pressure relief plug screw (no Z possible) 1) = Q Q

only with 1 LS pressure relief valve 1)

= = M
For same pressure setting in A and B

with LS unloading plug = B B

without LS pressure relief valve

= Z Z
(LS pressure relief valve cannot be retrofitted) (no M possible)
Housing with measuring ports = M
Housing without measuring ports = Z
Housing for electro-proportional or switchable pressure limitation 2) = K
210 bar, decreasing characteristic line 2) = L
210 bar, rising characteristic curve 2) = J
350 bar, decreasing characteristic line 2) = R
350 bar, rising characteristic curve 2) = N
Spool symbol

=E =J =Q

=R

B NC NB C

= W 3) = Y 3)
Q MT U

Flow in l/min, 3-digit, e.g. 070-070; actuator ports A and B =

Spool with pressure function T, only in connection with E, J or Q spools 3) =T

= Preferred program (M4 configurator)

1) Only with pressure compensators S and T.
2) Detailed information in clear text, see data starting on
page 22; see also datasheet RE 18139.
3) At request only. Rating by Technical Sales.

358
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/52

Ordering code

Actuator port A

Actuator port B

Further details in the clear text

SO numbers
011 = One-sided operation, two spool positions
Secondary valves
H = Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve, adjustable
E = Feed valve, adjustable
Q = Plug screw (secondary valves can be retrofitted)
Operation B side cover
= Standard cover
Hand lever position without
60 0 -60 hand lever 2
K L M R Hand lever following
N O P X Hand lever, non-following 7)
See notes on page 34 Further versions

Supply voltage 24 V Supply voltage 12 V Supply voltage and plug-in connector 6)

1 3 Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
8 9 DT04-2P (German)

Operation A side cover

M = Mechanical
H = Hydraulic
S = Servohydraulic 3) 5)
with damping with damping orifice, Orifice + check
orifice, on both with measuring with measuring ports, valve for hydrau-
Standard sides ports, both sides both sides lic override
W2 W8 G2 Electrohydraulically proportional
W4 W5 W6 W7 G4 Electrohydraulically switchable

Standard with position sensor with measuring Orifice + check

ports, both sides valve, both sides Electrohydraulic with digital on-
CBA CPA 3) CXA CXC board electronics (EPM2) (EPM2) 4)

6) Information required only for electrohydraulic operation and

= Preferred program (M4 configurator)
3) At request only. Rating by Technical Sales. electroproportional pressure limitation.
7) Only lockable in central position.
4) Further order details according to RE 64815-B.
The delivery comprises daisy chain cabling. Note!
5) Not in combination with following hand lever. Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply
and need to be ordered separately; see also page 33.

359
12/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Order example closed center with lateral inlet element

Example: Triple control block Ordering code:
Variable displacement pump qVmax = 200 l/min
Directional valve number, inlet element
Closed center lateral with primary pres- 3 M4 15 2X J250
sure relief valve, set to 250 bar
1. Spool axis with pressure compensator, without load- 1. Spool axis
holding function
with 1 pressure relief valve for actuator T = M 200 J 190-190 H H320 H320
port A and B 200 bar,
Spool symbol J
Flow in A and B 190 l/min
Types of operation: Hydraulic
Secondary valves:
Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valves for
actuator ports A and B 320 bar
2nd and 3rd with pressure compensator, with load- 2. Spool axis
Spool axis holding function S 180 M 120 E 085-085 H H320 H320
with LS pressure relief valves,
actuator port A 180 bar, 3. Spool axis
actuator port B 120 bar S 180 M 120 E 085-085 H H320 H320
Spool symbol E,
Flow in A and B 85 l/min
Types of operation: Hydraulic
Secondary valves:
Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valves for
End element
actuator ports A and B 320 bar
End element, ad- with internal LS unloading LA V 01
ditional informa- FKM seals
tion Pipe thread connections

N b2 c2 B2 C2 b3 c3 B3 C3 b4 c4 B4 C4
Q Q
MT
Y Y Z
Z
MT

Q B Q B Q B

U C U C U C

N NC NB NC NB U2 MT[

360
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/52

Order example closed center with central inlet element

Example: Double control block
Variable displacement pump qVmax = 200 l/min Ordering code:
Directional valve number, end element
Diversion plate
2 M4 15 2X LU
1. Spool axis without pressure compensator, with load-
holding function
without LS pressure relief valves
(cannot be retrofitted) 1. Spool axis
Spool symbol E C ZZZ E 175-175 W2 1 K Q Q
Flow in A and B 175 l/min
Types of operation:
Electrohydraulically proportional, 24 V
Overriding hand lever (following)
Secondary valve bores closed Inlet element
Inlet element Central inlet element with priority valve VZ 300 B 250
(dynamic), set to 250 bar
Primary pressure relief valve, set to 300 bar
2. Spool axis with pressure compensator, with load-hold- 2. Spool axis
ing function S 270 L 300 E 090-090 CBA K Q Q
with LS pressure relief valves, 2
actuator port A 180 bar,
actuator port B 120 bar
with electro proportional pressure limitation,
210 bar (decreasing characteristic line)
Spool symbol E
Flow in A and B 90 l/min
Types of operation: digital OBE
Overriding hand lever (following)
Secondary valve bores closed End element
End element with internal LS unloading and pilot oil supply LAY V 01
FKM seals
Pipe thread connections

B2 C2 MT B3 C3
Q
Y
Z
MT

#b# #b#

#c# #c#
271.311n

Q B Q B

U C U C

U Q NC NB U2 MT[ Z Y
N

361
14/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Order example closed center with combined inlet element

Example: Triple control block
Variable displacement pump qVmax = 200 l/min Ordering code:
Directional valve number, end element
Diversion plate
3 M4 15 2X LU
1. Spool axis with pressure compensator, without load-
holding function 1. Spool axis
M4-15
with LS pressure relief valve, T 230MB E 190-000 CBA K Q Q
actuator port A 230 bar,
actuator port B unloaded
Spool symbol E
Flow in A 190 l/min, flow in B
0 l/min, connection closed
Types of operation: digital OBE
Overriding hand lever (following)
Secondary valve bores closed Inlet element
Inlet element Central inlet element for M4-12/M4-15 JK 280 Y
M4-12/15 Primary pressure relief valve, set to 280 bar
with integrated pilot oil supply
2nd and 3rd with pressure compensator, with load-hold-
spool axis ing function 2. Spool axis
M4-12 with LS pressure relief valves, S 180M120 E 090-090 CBA Z Z
actuator port A 180 bar,
actuator port B 120 bar 3. Spool axis
Spool symbol E S 180M120 E 090-090 CBA Z Z
Flow in A and B 90 l/min
Types of operation: digital OBE
without secondary valve bores
End element
End element with internal LS unloading
M4-12 FKM seals LA V 01
Pipe thread connections

N5.26 N5.26 N5.23026 N5.23 N5.23 N5.23

B2 C2 MT Q Z NQ Y B3 C3 B4 C4
Q
Y
Z
MT

#b# #b# #b#

#c# #c# #c#

Q B Q B Q B

U C U C U C

U
NC NB U NC NB NC NB

362
 RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/52

Inlet elements
Characteristic curves (measured at N = 41 mm/s and * = 50C)

Open center Priority valve

Circulation pressure P T
36 311
Circulation pressure ppin bar

31 271

(priority actuator)
Flow qVs in l/min
26 231

21 91

6 51

1 1 2
51 91 231 271 311 46 216 286 356 426
Flow in l/min Pressure differential in bar

Closed center without primary pressure relief valve

Ordering code:
M4 15 2X J Q N

Short description Q MT U
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min

Closed center with primary pressure relief valve

Ordering code:
M4 15 2X J N

Short description Q MT U
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
Pressure informationin bar after J reqired (3-digit)
Technical data on primary valve according to
RE 64642, characteristic curve D5

Open center with primary pressure relief valve

Ordering code:
M4 15 2X P

Short description
For fixed displacement pumps up to 200 l/min N
Pressure information in bar after P reqired (3-digit)
Q MT U
Technical data on primary valve according to
RE 64642, characteristic curve D5

363
16/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Inlet elements
Closed center, internal priority actuator, Q2 Z MTq2 1; 2)

external subordinate actuator without primary

pressure relief valve
Ordering code:
N
M4 15 2X VL Q A
Q
Short description
MT
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
Pressure informationin bar after A required for
LS pressure limitation at priority valve (3-digit)

Closed center, internal priority actuator, exter- Q2 Z MTq2 1; 2)

nal subordinate actuator with primary pressure
relief valve
Ordering code:
M4 15 2X VL A N

Q
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min MT
Pressure information in bar after VL ... required
for primary pressure relief valve (3-digit)
Pressure informationin bar after A required for
LS pressure limitation at priority valve (3-digit) U

Closed center, external priority actuator, Q Y Z MT 1; 2)

internal subordinate actuator, without primary
pressure relief valve
Ordering code:
M4 15 2X VR Q A N

NMT Q
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min MT
Pressure informationin bar after A required for
LS pressure limitation at priority valve (3-digit)

U
T MTT
Closed center, external priority actuator, inter-
nal subordinate actuator, with primary pres- 1; 2)
Q Y Z MT
sure relief valve
Ordering code:
M4 15 2X VR A
N
Short description NMT Q
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
Pressure information in bar after VL ... required MT
for primary pressure relief valve (3-digit)
Pressure information in bar after A required for
LS pressure limitation at priority valve (3-digit)
1; 2)
U
See page 18
T MTT

364
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/52

Central inlet elements

Closed center, without primary pressure relief valve Q Y Z MT2
Ordering code:
Q
M4 15 2X JZ Q
MT
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 300 l/min

U
MT3

Closed center, with primary pressure relief valve Q Y Z MT2

Ordering code:
Q
M4 15 2X JZ
MT
Short description
For variable displacement pumps up to 300 l/min
Pressure information in bar after JZ ... required for 2
primary pressure relief valve (3-digit) U
Technical data on primary valve according to MT3
RE 64642, characteristic curve D5

Closed center, with priority valve without primary Q Y Z MT 1; 2)

pressure relief valve
Ordering code:
M4 15 2X VZ Q A

Short description Q
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
MT
Pressure informationin bar after A required for
LS pressure limitation at priority valve (3-digit)

U
T MTT

Closed center, with priority valve with primary Q Y Z MT 1; 2)

pressure relief valve
Ordering code:
M4 15 2X VZ A

Short description Q
For variable displacement pumps up to 200 l/min
MT
Pressure information in bar after VR ... required for
primary pressure relief valve (3-digit)
Pressure information in bar after A required for LS
pressure limitation at priority valve (3-digit)
U
1; 2) See page 18
T MTT

365
 RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 18/52

Inlet elements
1) For priority actuators with constant flow model V A is 2) For dynamic priority consumer loads (e.g. steering) model
recommended. V B is recommended.

1; 2) 1; 2)

MTT MTT

Notes on the dimensioning of control oil supply with servohydraulic operation

If servohydraulic operation is used in the control block, please note:

External pilot oil supply:
pst = 30 + 2 bar constant
qst = 2 l/min per servohydraulic spool axis
Required and mandatory for inlet element P

Internal pilot oil supply:

6 servohydraulically controlled spool axes maximum possible
No pilot oil supply for external actuators
$p at the inlet element needs to be 35 bar at least
No internal pilot oil supply in the inlet element

366
 RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 19/52

Directional valve elements: Pressure compensator

Flow control due to individual pressure compensator Main spool in central position
271
U B C U
251

231
Flow in l/min

211

91 Y
Z
71 Q
MTQ
51

31
5 3 6 4 2
1 61 211 261 311 361 411 Main spool actuated
Pressure differential in bar
2
In the central position of the main spool there is no connec-
U B C U
tion between P and the actuator ports A and B.
With this operational state the pressure compensator spool
(1) is moved to the left by the pump pressure against the
spring (2).
When the main spool (3) is operated (= metering orifice), the
LS pressure reaches the spring chamber (4) and moves the
Y
pressure compensator spool to the right into the control posi-
tion. The flow is kept constant even in case of parallel opera- Z
tion of actuators with different load pressures. Q
The pressure compensator S boasts a load-holding func- MTQ
tion. This function is not leak-free.
In its standard version it is equipped with one ring (5). The num-
ber of the rings inserted depends on the required flow. 5 3 6 4 2

Pressure compensator spool variants

Ordering code Short description Symbol
with pressure compensator
S with load-holding function 1)
max. flow 160 l/min
without pressure compensator
C with load-holding function 1)
max. flow 200 l/min
with pressure compensator
T without load-holding function 1)
max. flow 200 l/min

1) The load-holding function is not leak-free.

367
20/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: LS pressure limitation

Characteristic curves
Reduction of the actuator flow due to LS
pressure limitation 211
Minimum settings: 50 bar
Maximum settings: 330 bar 91

Flow in %
71

51

31

1 61 211 261 311 361 411 461

Settings (example)
LS-pressure in bar

With LS pressure relief valve and LS plug screw Q Y ZMT U

Ordering code:
C
S M Q J W2 1 Q H

Short description
NB
Pressure information in bar for actuator port A
NC
(3-digit)
B
Plug screw for actuator port B #c# B C
For the model QMQ, the LS pressure limitation
can be retrofitted at the directional valve element. #b#
Q U
The LS pressure can be influenced externally
via the ports MA and MB These ports can also be
used as measuring ports.

With LS pressure relief valve and unloading plug Q Y ZMT U

Ordering code: C
S M B J 000 W2 1 H H

Short description NB
Pressure information in bar for actuator port A NC
(3-digit) B
Unloading plug for actuator port B #c# B C

E.g. for cylinders with one-sided operation

#b#
Q U

Note!
Please consult Technical Sales.

368
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 21/52

Directional valve elements: LS pressure limitation

Only with 1 LS pressure relief valve and LS plug Q Y ZMT U
screw
C
Ordering code:

S =M J W2 1 H H
N
Short description
Only 1 LS-DB for same pressure setting in A and B
B, pressure information in bar (3-digit) B C
#c#
1 measuring port
#b#
Q U

Without LS pressure relief valves Q Y ZMT U

Ordering code:
C
S Z Z Z J W2 1 H H

Short description
LS pressure relief valve cannot be retrofitted
Housing without measuring connections B
#c# B C

#b#
Q U

369
22/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: LS pressure limitation

Electro-proportional / hydraulically switchable pressure limitation

Short description Q Y Z MT U
Differentiation between: C
1. Type KBPS electrohydraulically proportional
2. Type MH2DAD and type KBPS
2. Type KKDE electrohydraulically switchable
3. Porting pattern KBPS and cover plate B
4. Housing KBPS and plug B C

c
Q U
The exact description of the valve has to be stated N
as follows in clear text. b

1. Electro-proportional pressure relief valve type KBPS

(see also datasheets RE 18139-04; RE 18139-05)
Preferred program:

S L J H H H KBPSL8BA
N N
S J J H H H KBPSL8AA

S R J H H H KBPSR8BA

S N J H H H KBPSR8AA
KBPSBA: KBPSAA:
Extension program, e. g.: Decreasing characteristic curve Rising characteristic curve

S K J H H H KBPSH8BA -033

2. Pressure cut-off valve type MH2DAD and electro-proportional

pressure relief valve, type KBPS NMT QMT
(see also datasheets RE 18139-04; RE 18139-05)

S K J H H H MH2DAD+KBPSH8BA

370
 RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 23/52

Directional valve elements: LS pressure limitation

Pressure control due to electro-proportional LS pressure limitation

561 Additional
Decreasing Rising
Pressure in the main connection 1

511 SO-No.
2 characteristic characteristic
(Option:
461 curve curve
4 24V; 0.8A)
411 50 bar KBPSC8BA KBPSC8AA
in bar

361 100bar KBPSF8BA KBPSF8AA

3 5 150bar KBPSH8BA KBPSH8AA
311
210bar KBPSL8BA (2) KBPSL8AA (4)
033
261 250 bar KBPSN8BA KBPSN8AA
211 315 bar KBPSP8BA KBPSP8AA
350 bar KBPSR8BA (1) KBPSR8AA (3)
61
420 bar KBPST8BA KBPST8AA
1 36 61 86 211 = Preferred program

Command value in %

Technical data KBPS (see also RE 18139-04)

electrical standard
Supply voltage V 12 DC 24 DC
Maximum control current mA max. nominal current 1,760 mA max. nominal current 1,200 mA
Coil resistance Cold value with 20C 7 2.3 4.8
max. hot value 7 3.65 7.2
Duty cycle % 100 1)
Maximum coil temperature 2) C 150
Protection class according to Model K4 IP 65 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), Model C4 IP 66 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
DIN 40050-9
IP 69K with Rexroth plug-in connector (Material no. R901022127)
Model K40 IP 69K with plug-in connector mounted and locked

1) If using > 2,000 m via NN, we recommend consulting the 2) Due to the temperatures occurring at the surfaces of the
manufacturer. solenoid coils, the standards ISO 13732-1 and EN 982 need
to be adhered to!

371
24/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: LS pressure limitation

3. 2/2-directional spool valve type KKDE
N N
S K J H H H KKDER8PA

De-energized open De-energized closed

KKDER8PA KKDER8NA

KKDEPA: KKDENA:
De-energized open De-energized closed

Technical data KKDE (see also RE 18136-08)

electrical standard
Type of voltage Direct voltage
Supply voltage V 12 DC 24 DC
Voltage tolerance and ambient temperature See characteristic curve RE 18136-08 page 5
Power consumption 22
Duty cycle % See characteristic curve RE 18136-08 page 5
Maximum coil temperature 2) C 150
Switching time according to ON ms 80
ISO 6403 (solenoid horizontal) OFF ms 150
Maximum number of cycles cy/h 15,000
Protection class according to Model K4 IP 65 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), Model C4 IP 66 with plug-in connector mounted and locked
DIN 40050-9
IP 69K with Rexroth plug-in connector (Material no. R901022127)
Model K40 IP 69K with plug-in connector mounted and locked

1) If using > 2,000 m via NN, we recommend consulting the At the electrical connection K4, the protective earth-
manufacturer. ing conductor (PE ) has to be connected properly.
2) Due to the temperatures occurring at the surfaces of the
solenoid coils, the European standards EN 563 and EN 982
need to be adhered to!

Note!
Consumer load pressure does not become zero pressure!

4. Porting pattern KBPS and cover plate

S K J H H H A Cover plate

5. Housing KBPS and plug

N
S K J H H H Q

Plug

372
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 25/52

Directional valve elements: Main spool

Main spool variants
Ordering code Main application Symbol
Flow information in l/min

E Hydraulic cylinder as actuator

J Hydraulic motors as actuator

Application with defined residual opening

Q (A/B T)
Actuator port unloaded in neutral position

2
Regeneration function
R
(P, B A)

W Floating position

B NC NB C

Y Floating position
Q MT U

(E, J, Q) T Spool with pressure function

373
26/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: Main spool

Spool characteristic curves (symmetric spools)

P A/B
271

251

231
Typical flow in l/min

Nominal flow
211

91

71

51

31

1-5 1-56 1-6 1-66 1-7 1-76 1-8 1-86 1-9

Electrohydraulic
Current in amperes at 12V
operation

1-9: 2-1 2-23 2-34 2-45 2-56 2-67 2-79 2-9

Current in amperes at 24V
Hydraulic operation
9 21 23 25 27 29 31 33-6
9-6 Pilot pressure in bar

Digital on-Board-elec-
tronics (EPM2) 61 211 261 311 361
1 Command value in digits (steps) 365

Servohydraulic opera-
tion (at N = 32 mm/s) 8 : 21 23 24 25 27 28 31
9 Current in milliamperes

374
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 27/52

Directional valve elements: Flow

Symmetric spools
Spool type Pressure compensator Flow in l/min (spool characteristic curve see page 26)
160-160 150-150 120-120 080-080 050-050 032-032 023023
S 140-140 130-130 100-100 070-070 045-045 028-028 020020
E, J, Q 120-120 110-110 085-085 060-060 040-040 025-025 017017
C 200-200 175-175 145-145 110-110 080-080 045-045 028028
T 200-200 190-190 160-160 100-100 065-065 040-040

Asymmetric spools
Spool type Pressure compensator Flow in l/min
150-120 120-080 080-050 050-032
S 130-100 100-070 070-045 045-028
E, J, Q 110-085 085-060 060-040 040-025
C 175-145 145-110 110-080 080-045
T 190-160 160-100 100-065 065-040

Floating position and regeneration spool

Spool type Pressure compensator Flow in l/min (more at request)
W S 065065 2
Y S 045-045
R S 130100

Note!
Please consult Technical Sales.

Example: Solution:
Spool type J m 130 liters spool + 2 washers = 150 l/min
Pressure compensator S m Set 140 liters via stroke limiter.
Command value: qActuator = 140 l/min

Spool type Pressure compensator Flow in l/min

150150
E, J, Q S 130130
110110

Flow without washer (pressure compensator $p = 6 to 9 bar)

Flow with 1 washer (pressure compensator $p = 7.5 to 10 bar)
Flow with 2 washers (pressure compensator $p = 9 to 12 bar)

Note!
Position directional valve elements with maximum flow as
close as possible to the inlet element.

375
28/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: Types of operation, cover A mechanical

Mechanical (encapsulated) Q Y ZMT U
Ordering code:
C
S M J M K H H

Short description
NB
Mechanical operation of the main spool. In case NC
of non-operation centering in central position by
B
springs B C
2*

All handle-operated lever position options are

available (K, L, M etc.) comp. also type key on
page 11 Q U

1) Following hand lever

2) Non-following hand lever

3*

Directional valve elements: Types of operation, cover A hydraulic

Hydraulic Q Y ZMT U
Ordering code:
C
S M J H H H

Short description
NB
Recommended hydraulic pilot control devices: NC
Type TH6 according to RE 64555
B
B C

c
Q U

Directional valve elements: Types of operation, cover A servohydraulic

Servohydraulic Q Y Z MT U
Ordering code:
C
S ZZZ J S Q Q

Short description
Voltage: 7VDC min
Type of current: Direct current B
Nominal current: 20 mA B C

Max. current: 25 mA
STDS 0014; see RE 29617-B2 Q U

STDS 0015; see RE 29616-B2

STDS 0016; see RE 29618-B2

Note!
Rating by Technical Sales.

376
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 29/52

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically switchable

Electrohydraulically switchable Q Y Z MT U
Ordering code: C
S M J W4 1 H H

Short description NB
On/off valves, type FTWE 2 K according to NC
RE 58007 B #c#
B C

#b#

Q U

Electrohydraulically switchable with damping Q Y ZMT U 2

orifice on both sides
C
Ordering code:

S M J W5 3 H H
NB
Short description
NC
On/off valves, type FTWE 2 K according to B #c#
RE 58007 B C

#b#

Q U

Electrohydraulically switchable with measuring

Q Y Z MT U
ports on both sides
Ordering code: C

S M J W6 3 H H

Short description NB
On/off valves, type FTWE 2 K according to NC
RE 58007 B #c#
B C
Nc
#b#

Q U

Nb

377
30/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically switchable

Electrohydraulically switchable with damping Q Y ZMT U
orifice, with measuring ports on both sides
C
Ordering code:

S M J W7 1 H H
NB
Short description
B NC
On/off valves, type FTWE 2 K according to
RE 58007 Nc
#c#
B C

#b#
Nb
Q U

Electrohydraulically switchable with orifice and Q Y Z MT U

check valve for hydraulic override
C
Ordering code:

S M J G4 3 H H
NB
Short description
B NC
On/off valves, type FTWE 2 K according to
RE 58007 #c#
B C
c
#b#

Q U b

Technical data FTWE 2K (see also RE 58007)

electrical
Type of voltage Direct voltage
Nominal voltage V 12 24
Power consumption at 20 W 14.4 14.4
Coil resistance R20 7 10 40
Duty cycle % 100
Switching time ton ms b20
toff ms b30
Protection class according to Solenoid IP 69K
DIN 40050-9 Electric connection C4 IP 69K 1)
K40 IP 69K 1)
Switching frequency Hz 5

1) Recommended plug-in connector see page 33.

378
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 31/52

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically proportional

Electrohydraulically proportional with hand Q Y Z MT U
lever (encapsulated)
C
Ordering code:

S M J W2 1 K H H
NB
Short description
NC
Proportional pressure reducing valve B 2*
type FTDRE 2 K according to RE 58032 #c# B C

Safety notes! #b#

Q U
Following hand lever 1):
Electrohydraulic operation can be overruled by
mechanical operation. The hand lever is con-
nected directly with the main spool and follows
through the spool movement in case of electro-
hydraulic operation. 3*

Non-following hand lever 2):

The hand lever is connected to the main spool
by means of a coupling. When the main spool 2
is in central position, the hand lever can be de-
tented. Thus, it does not follow the movement of
the spool in case of electrohydraulic operation.

Electrohydraulically proportional with measur- Q Y ZMT U

ing ports on both sides
C
Ordering code:

S M J W8 9 H H
NB
Short description
NC
Proportional pressure reducing valve B
type FTDRE 2 K according to RE 58032 #c#
B C
Nc
#b#
Q U

Nb

Electrohydraulically proportional with damping Q Y Z MT U

orifice and check valve
C
Ordering code:

S M J G2 1 H H
NB
Short description B NC
Proportional pressure reducing valve
Type FTDRE 2 K according to RE 58032 #c#
B C
c

#b#
Q U b

379
32/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: Types of operation Cover A electrohydraulically proportional

Technical data FTDRE 2K (see also RE 58032)
electrical
Type of voltage Direct voltage
Nominal voltage of the amplifier V 12 24
Maximum control current A 1.8 0.8
Coil resistance (20 ) 7 2.4 12
Duty cycle (with amplifier) % 100
Electric connection See order details
Protection class according to Solenoid IP 69K
DIN 40050-9 Electric connection C4 IP 69K 1)
K40 IP 69K 1)
PWM frequency (recommended) 1) Hz 150

1) The PWM frequency is to be optimized depending on the application.

In this regard, observe the temperature range of the application.
Recommended plug-in connector see page 33.

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover A on-board electronics

Electronic pilot module Q Y ZMT U
Ordering code:
C
S M J CBA H H

Short description
NB
Digital interface, standard
NC
See RE 64815-B B
#c# B C

#b#
Q U

Electronic pilot module with position sensor Q Y Z MT U

Ordering code: C
S M J CPA Q Q

Short description NB
Digital interface with directional sensor, NC
See RE 64815-B B
#c#
B C

Note!
#b#
At request only. Rating by Technical Sales. Q U

380
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 33/52

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover A on-board electronics

All control blocks with EPM2 are supplied with mounted daisy Open plug for connec- Daisy chain Plug with terminal
chain cabling and terminal resistance connector. tion to the machine resistance
The terminal resistance is mounted to the last section of the electronics
block.
Recommended cable for connection to the machine electronics:
Material number: R917c02724

End
Inlet element
element

Directional valve elements: Voltage supply and plug-in connectors

Connector type
Supply voltage Junior Timer DT04-2P
2-pin (AMP) (Deutsch)
24 V 1 8
12 V 3 9

This information is required only in case of electrohydraulic

operation and / or electroproportional pressure limitation.

Recommended plug-in connector for connector type

Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
Plug-in connector for FTDRE and FTWE protection class IP 69K
Material number: R900313533
Recommended plug-in connector for Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
For litz wire cross-sections of 0.5 to 1 mm and for an isola-
tion diameter of the individual seals of 1.2 to 2.1 mm
Note!
Material number: R901022127
Plug-in connectors are not included in the scope of supply
For litz wire cross-sections of 0.5 to 1 mm and for an isola-
and need to be ordered separately.
tion diameter of the individual seals of 2.2 to 3 mm

381
34/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Directional valve elements: Types of operation cover B

Mechanical - encapsulated operation

Standard lever Clamping piece with lever Lever screwing at the

(Example: Lever screwing in Pos. 2) clamping piece

60 = K, N
60 = B, G

30 = B1, G1 1

0 = L, O 0 = F, H
2

-30 = D1, J1 3

-60 = D, J
-60 = M, P

Bottom, Bottom, Without

Top, 60 Top, 30 Straight, 0
30 60 lever
Standard Following K L M R
Non-following N O P X
Clamping Following B 1 B1 1 F 1 D1 1 D 1
piece with B 2 B1 2 F 2 D1 2 D 2
lever B 3 B1 3 F 3 D1 3 D 3
Non-following G 1 G1 1 H 1 J1 1 J 1
G 2 G1 2 H 2 J1 2 J 2
G 3 G1 3 H 3 J1 3 J 3
Clamping Following T T1 U V1 V
piece with- Non-following
Q Q1 S C1 C
out lever

Operating force (at the hand lever):

Mechanical < 20 N
Hydraulic, overriding hand lever < 50 N
Electrohydraulic, overriding hand lever < 70 N

Further handle-operated lever options (aluminum-free) at request.

= Preferred program

382
 RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 35/52

Directional valve elements: Secondary valves

Pressure function Feed function

Pressure differential in bar

561 21
Setting pressure in bar

511
461 9
411
7
361
311
5
261
211 3
61

1 51 91 231 271 311 1 51 91 231 271 311

Flow in l/min Flow in l/min

Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valves, adjustable Q Y Z MT U 2

Ordering code:
C
S M J W2 1 Q H200

Short description
NB
Adjustable pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve, pilot
NC
operated
B
Pressure information in bar after H ... require #c#
B C
(3-digit)
Example: QH200 #b#
Q U
Q: Plug screw for actuator port A
H200: Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valves, set to
200 bar for actuator port B
The directional valve is ready for retroactive fitting
of secondary valves
See RE 64642.

Feed valves Q Y Z MT U
Ordering code:
C
S M J W2 1 E E

Short description
NB
See RE 64642.
NC
B
#c#
B C

#b#
Q U

383
36/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

End elements
End element with LS unloading Z
Ordering code:

LA MT[

U2

End element with LS unloading and additional P Q2 Z

and T port
Ordering code:
MT[
LAPT

U2

End element with LS unloading and internal pilot

oil supply
271.311n Y
Ordering code: 2*

LAY

Short description Z
Takes oil from P line, pressure reduced to 35 bar
(definitely adjusted), pressure relief valve set to MT[
45 bar 2*

U2

End element with LS unloading and pilot oil sup- Q2

ply and additional P and T port
Ordering code:
271.311n Y
LAYPT
2*

Short description
Takes oil from P line, pressure reduced to 35 bar Z
(definitely adjusted), pressure relief valve set to
45 bar MT[
2*

U2

1) When using an inlet element with priority VRQ, VR, VZQ

or VZ the plug is replaced.

384
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 37/52

End elements
End element with LS unloading and internal pilot
oil supply at servohydraulic operation
311n 44!,3!cbs 56!cbs Y
Ordering code: 2*

LAK

Short description
Z
Takes oil from P line, pressure reduced to 35 bar
(definitely adjusted), pressure relief valve set to MT[
2*
45 bar
1) When using an inlet element with priority VR or
VZ the plug is replaced.
U2
Attention!
Please observe the design instructions on pilot oil sup-
ply at servohydraulic operation on page 18.

End element with LS unloading and pilot oil supply Z Y 2

Ordering code:
271.311n MT[
LAX

Short description
External pilot oil supply required U2
pst, max = 35 bar

End element with LS unloading and pilot oil sup- Q2 Z Y

ply and additional P and T port
Ordering code: 271.311n MT[
LAXPT

Short description U2
External pilot oil supply required
pst, max = 35 bar

End element without LS unloading Z

Ordering code:

LZ MT[

Short description
Supply of parallel switched LS signals U2

End element without LS unloading and additional Q2 Z

P and T port
Ordering code:
MT[
LZPT

Short description U2
Supply of parallel switched LS signals

385
38/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

End elements
End element without LS unloading, with pilot oil
supply
271.311n Y
Ordering code: 2*

LZY
Short description Z
Supply of parallel switched LS signals
Takes oil from P line, pressure reduced to 35 bar MT[
(definitely adjusted), pressure relief valve set to 2*

45 bar

U2
End element without LS unloading, with pilot oil Q2
supply and additional P and T port
Ordering code:
271.311n Y
LZYPT
2*

Short description
Supply of parallel switched LS signals Z
Takes oil from P line, pressure reduced to 35 bar
(definitely adjusted), pressure relief valve set to MT[
45 bar 2*

U2

End element without LS unloading, with internal

pilot oil supply at servohydraulic operation
311n 44!,3!cbs 56!cbs Y
Ordering code: 2*
2)
LZK
Short description
Z
Supply of parallel switched LS signals
Takes oil from P line, pressure reduced to 35 bar MT[
2*
(definitely adjusted), pressure relief valve set to 45 bar

Attention!
Please observe the design instructions on pilot oil sup- U2
ply at servohydraulic operation on page 18.

End element without LS unloading, with pilot oil Z Y

supply
Ordering code: 271.311n MT[
LZX

Short description U2
Supply of parallel switched LS signals
External pilot oil supply required
pst, max = 35 bar

1) When using an inlet element with priority VRQ, VR, VZQ

or VZ the plug is replaced.

386
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 39/52

End elements
End element without LS unloading, with pilot oil Q2 Z Y
supply and additional P and T port
Ordering code: 271.311n MT[
LZXPT

Short description U2
Supply of parallel switched LS signals
External pilot oil supply required
pst, max = 35 bar

Adapter plate for M4-12 directional valve elements Q Y Z MT M4-12

Ordering code:

L12 Y Y U

Short description
With integrated pilot oil supply
For flanging further M4-12 sections, see datasheet
RE 64276 Z 2
M4-15

End element with external priority port

Ordering code:

LVZ

Short description
To connect external priority actuators T MTT U

Diversion plates for central inlet element

End element for central inlet element, diversion plate
Ordering code:

LU

End element for central inlet element, diversion plate

with additional T port
Ordering code:

LUT
U

End element for central inlet element, diversion plate

with additional LS, P and T port
Ordering code:

LUPT N
Q MT U
Short description
Pressure information in bar required (3-digit)

387
40/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Unit dimensions: Line connections

Inlet element, lateral Closed center P G1 P = Pump
T G1 P1 = Subordinate connection
A, B = Actuator
LS, LSS, LS1, G 1/4
a, b = Pilot line
LSP1,
T, T1 = Tank
Y G 1/4
X = Pilot oil supply
M G 1/4 Y = Tank, at zero pressure
S G1 LS = Load-sensing (LS)
Open center P G1 LSZ = LS supply
T G 1 1/4 LSP1 = LS port subordinate actuators
LSS = LS priority port
LS G 1/4
M = Pump measuring port
X, Y G 1/4 MA, MB = Measuring ports LS
M G 1/4 pressure
Inlet element, central Closed center P G 1 1/4 Ma, Mb = Measuring ports pilot
pressure
T G 1 1/4
S = Priority actuators
LS G 1/4
LSS, LS1, LS2 G 1/4
X, Y G 1/4
Priority input P G1
T G1
Directional valve element with secondary valves A1, B1 G 3/4
a1, b1 G 1/4
MA, MB G 1/4
Ma1, Mb G 1/8
End element P G 3/4
T1 G 3/4
LS G 1/4
LSZ G 1/4
X, Y G 1/4
Adapter plate X, Y G 1/4
T G 3/4

Fastening screws M10

according to EN ISO 4762 or EN ISO 4014:
Property class: 8.8 10.9
Fastening torque: 41 2 Nm 60 3 Nm

Connections according to ISO 1179-1

388
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 41/52

Unit dimensions: Lateral inlet elements

Lateral inlet element J Lateral inlet element P
M10 M10

35

22 36
10
70
12.5
88 113 10
133 65
133 83

M LSS
LS
130

130
S
90

102
LS

80
27

58
92
15 2
97
32
35

32
40
T P
T P
38
93
36
97

Lateral inlet element VR Lateral inlet element VL

M10 M10
60

22 36

22 36

60
10

10
10 113 10 113
133 19 17 133

LS LSP1
LSS LS
S
130

130

P1
115
103
102

97
77

31

30

35 83 83 20
98 61
92
30

P
40

98
T 29

30
40

T
50

97

389
42/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Unit dimensions: Central inlet elements

Central inlet element JZ Central inlet element VZ

M10 M10
60

60

22 36
22 36
10

10
10 113 10 113

15 15

LS
LS
130
130

85
85

133 80 133 80

P
32

P
32

40

40
T
T

30.5 30
90.5 97

390
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 43/52

Unit dimensions: Central inlet elements

Central inlet element JK

125
12

M10
75

63
12
78 35
153 90
130

LS
2

47
40
X
25

Y
14
64
P
70
60

T
46

ca. 34 40
105

Unit dimensions: Directional valve element

Actuator port G 3/4

93,5
48,5
25,5
22
51

A B
133
12
33

18
27

391
44/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Unit dimensions: Operation

Mechanical / hydraulic operation Cover A Cover B
with standard cover

Ordering code:

86,5
63
39
H

64 56,5

Cover A Cover B
Electrohydraulic operation

Ordering code: "b"

W.
86,5

"a"
63
39

108

Electronic pilot module 169

with hand lever
Cover A Cover B
Ordering code:

C.A K
230
60
152

135 86

392
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 45/52

Unit dimensions: End elements for lateral inlet element

Ordering code: Ordering code:

LA LAX

LZ LZX
65 20 65 20

50

50
133 133

T1 T1
X
130

130
LSZ LSZ
82,5

82,5
Y Y
30,5

30,5
40

40
2
15 54 15 54
28 28

Ordering code: Ordering code:

LAY L12

LZY

65 20 77 28
25
50

51

133 153

T X T
130

130
112

LSZ
82,5

X
82
40

52
30

Y Y
28

18 22 26
28 54 38
40

393
46/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Unit dimensions: End elements for central inlet element

Ordering code: Ordering code:

LU LUT

20 65 20 65

50

50
35

35
133 22 133
130

130
100

Ordering code:

LVZ

20 65
50
35

133
130

52
40

31
75

394
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 47/52

Unit dimensions: Control block closed center with lateral inlet element
(according to the order example of page 12, dimensions in mm)

90
LS

27
58
92
130
133 92,5
93,5 82,5
48,5 45 2
20 65 9 30,5
4
10 T1
Y

50
25

7
22

51

25,5
25,5

A3

3 x 51 = 153
B3
8
284

51
5 A2 B2
8
51

A1 B1 7
P
32

35

65
3 T

2 12,5 130
38 131
88
93
1 Nameplate
133 2 Inlet element J...
261 Closed center
45 54 3 Directional valve elements
4 End element LA
5 Control cover H (side A) for hy-
40

draulic operation
69

69

LSZ 6 Control cover standard

(side B)
162

7 Stroke limiter
8 Secondary valves
9 Tie rod
32

10 Mounting thread
31
4 x M10; 15 deep

395
48/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Unit dimensions: Control block closed center with central inlet element
(according to the order example of page 13, dimensions in mm)

130
92.5
69
45
53

93 133
9

133
93,5
48,5
9
82,5
4.1 20 65 10 2 30

6
5.2 T1

18
Y

50

28
25

51
A2 B2
8
60 10

36 22

P
32

40

26,5

310
80

T
113

1
51

7
25,5

A1 B1
22

5.1
35

50

3
20 99
4.2 30,5 130
85
10 131
97,5
133

151 133
1 Nameplate
54
22 2 Central inlet element VZ
Closed center with priority valve
3 Directional valve elements
4.1 End element LAY
4.2 Diversion plate LU
40

49

5.1 Control cover W (side A) for elec-

112
130

LSZ
162,5

trohydraulic operation
289

X
5.2 Control cover CBA (side A) with
electronic pilot module
6 Control cover K (side B)
7 Stroke limiter
8 Primary pressure relief valve
454
9 Electro-proportional pressure relief
valve, type KBPS
10 Tie rod
11 Mounting thread
4 x M10; 15 deep

396
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 49/52

Unit dimensions: Control block closed center with combined inlet element
(according to the order example of page 14, dimensions in mm)

236
157,5

135 133
440
98
46
25 78 8 114
2

15
4.1 9

46 30
3.2

23
6.2
A3 B3
7

46
1 A2 B2
12

44
30
T
40
45

118

76
2

344

90
63
75
MP LS

20
40
P 22 X

51
A1
25,5

B1
3.1

50
5 6.1
35

4.2
18 20 25
106 48,5 40
85 47
93,5 130
28
48 1 Nameplate
113 2 Central inlet element JK
141 Closed center
125 64 3.1 Directional valve element M4-15
3.2 Directional valve element M4-12
4.1 End element LA
63

4.2 Diversion plate LU

5 Control cover CBA (side A) with
electronic pilot module
6.1 Control cover K (side B)
6.2 Control cover standard (side B)
7 Stroke limiter
8 Tie rod
9 Mounting thread
4 x M10; 15 deep

397
50/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

On-board electronics: Electronic pilot module (EMP2)

Function
The electronic pilot module controls the flow at the control
block M4-15 via an analog or digital electrical signal.
An analog (voltage or PWM signal) or digital (CAN bus) input
signal is converted by the pilot module into a pilot pressure
via two electrohydraulic pressure reducing valves.
In case of an analog input signal, each pilot module is con-
nected individually to the control electronics of the machine.
In case of CAN bus operation, is it possible to loop the electri-
cal connection to the next pilot module via a second plug-in
connection (daisy chain cabling). The complete valve control
block is then connected to the control of the machine via the
4-pin plug of the first pilot module.
The electrical connection is realized via a 4-pin plug,
type Bosch Kompakt 1.
It is also possible to connect further CAN bus units at the out-
put of the last pilot module (see also RE 64815-B).

Features
Time functions (ramp functions), form of the characteristic
curve and increase are parameterizable and can be changed Electronic pilot module EMP2
directly during the working cycle via the CAN bus.
Modifiable characteristic curve from linear to progressive
Various diagnosis functions allow to monitor the fault-free trend separately for A and B (only CAN, fixed parameter for
function of the pilot module. analog module)
The following elements are monitored with the standard version: Linear decline of the characteristic curve, modifiable in op-
Correct reception of a valid command value signal eration, and therefore also linear lowering of the complete
Stability of the connection to the command value encoder flow (CAN only, fixed parameter for analog module)
The adherence to the defined limits of supply voltage Selectable time ramps for shutoff in the error case (only for
Function of the pilot valves (short-circuit, cable break) analog module)

Malfunctions are indicated in the form of a error code (blink- Selectable monitoring limits for operating voltage
ing code) via an LED that can be seen from the outside. Parameterizable via CAN bus
With the analog module, there is a relay output available as Protection class according to EN 60529 IP 69K
error indicator. (only with plugged Bosch Kompakt connectors)
With the CAN bus variant, the error code is transferred to the Condition Monitoring
control in the state telegram of the pilot module and can then Internal saving of temperatures
be analyzed by the control. Internal counting of the operating hours
Low cabling effort with CAN wiring through daisy chain Internal saving of diagnostic data
Clocked output stages with superimposed dither Comprehensive parameterizibility according to the client's
Processor-independent watchdog requirements by Rexroth in the factory

Selectable time ramps, separated individually for valve

outputs A and B, Open and Close (only for CAN, fixed Options
parameter for analog module) Position sensor
with measuring port

Electronic pilot module: Parameter specifications

The form for the parameter specifications can be found in the project planning aid RE 64815-02.
It serves for setting the electronic pilot module according to the requirements of the customer ex factory.

398
RE 64283/10.08 M4-15 Bosch Rexroth AG 51/52

Electronic pilot module: Pin assignment

Pin assignment at the Bosch Kompakt plug-in connector Pin assignment at the CAN plug-in connector
Connection via Bosch Kompakt plug coding 1.
Via the second Bosch Kompakt plug c oding 2, a connection
to the next module or to another CAN participant is possible if
CAN operation is used.

Note!
Connecting cables and plug-in connectors are not included in
the scope of supply and need to be ordered separately (see
accessories pages 51, 52).

Attention!
Please observe at all times the safety notes of the operat-
DBO Coding 2 Bobmph ing instructions RE 64815-B.
(plug-in connector gray)
Bosch Rexroth warrants the correct function of the unit as
described in the operating instructions RE 64815-B. With
this unit, Bosch Rexroth declines any warranty for the safe
5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2
operation of the machine or plant of which this unit is a part.
2
V Cbu V Cbu
DBO mpx Gbjmvsf
DBO ijhi Tjhobm
Hoe Hoe

2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5

Coding 1
(plug-in connec-
tor black)

Electronic pilot module: Accessories

Material number Type Description Length

Daisy chain cable

R917c02581 Cable For the connection of two pilot modules (standard) 190 mm
R917c02599 Cable For the connection of two pilot modules 240 mm
R917c02628 Cable For the connection of two pilot modules via central inlet 370 mm

Special cable

R9017c05332 Cable with two plug-in connectors, coding 1 (black) 90

R917c05333 Cable with two plug-in connectors, coding 2 (gray) 90

399
52/52 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-15 RE 64283/10.08

Electronic pilot module: Accessories

Material number Type Description Length

Connecting cable

R917c02724 Cable with one plug-in connector, coding 1 (black) 4,000 mm

R917c04484 Cable with one plug-in connector, coding 2 (gray) 4,000 mm

Plug-in connectors and connector sets

Plug-in
R917c05459 connector Coding 1 (black), dummy plug
R917c02627 Plug-in Coding 2 (gray), dummy plug
connector
Plug-in
R917c05458 connector Coding 1 (black), dummy connector with integrated terminal resistance
R917c04605 Plug-in Coding 2 (gray), dummy connector with integrated terminal resistance
connector

Connector
R900785606 Bosch Kompakt coding 1 (black)
set

Connector
R900785607 Bosch Kompakt coding 2 (gray)
set

Bosch Rexroth AG All rights with Bosch Rexroth AG, including applications for property
Mobile Applications rights. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its
Zum Eisengieer 1 consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified only serve to describe the product. Our information
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 cannot be used to derive a particular property or suitability for a specific
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 use. The information conveyed does not relieve the user from making
[email protected] own evaluations and performing own inspections. Please note that our
www.boschrexroth.de products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

400
High-pressure load-sensing control RE 64279/06.05 1/18

block of sandwich plate design

Type M4-22

2
Nominal size 22
Series 1X
Nominal pressure 350 bar (pump side)
Nominal pressure 420 bar (actuator side)
Nominal flow
n
1VNQ
TJEF

s

MNJO
*OMFU
FMFNFOU



s

MNJO
XJUI
1
BOE
1
QPSUT

"DUVBUPS
TJEF
s

MNJO
)

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Types of actuation
Features 1
s
NFDIBOJDBM
Function, section, symbols 2
s
IZESBVMJD

s
FMFDUSPIZESBVMJD
POPGG
QSPQPSUJPOBM

Technical data 3
Flow
Ordering code 4 and 5
Load pressure-compensated
0SEFS
FYBNQMFT

BOE

High repeatabillity
*OMFU
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
BOE
FOE
FMFNFOU

UP

TZNCPMT
DJSDVJU
GFBUVSFT
DIBSBDUFSJTUJD
DVSWFT
Low hysteresis
6OJU
EJNFOTJPOT
QPSUT

BOE

"EKVTUBCMF
WJB
TUSPLF
MJNJUFS
Pressure relief function

*OMFU
FMFNFOU
s
1JMPU
PQFSBUFE
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT
PG
MBSHF
OPNJOBM
XJEUI
Features

%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU

BDUVBUPS
QPSUT
System s
3FMJFG
WBMWFT
XJUI
BOUJDBWJUBUJPO
GVODUJPO
Load pressure-independent flow control LS pressure limitation
s
0QFO
DFOUFS
GPS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ s
"EKVTUBCMF
GPS
FBDI
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
s
$MPTFE
DFOUFS
GPS
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ

s
&YUFSOBM
QSFTTVSF
BEKVTUNFOU
QPTTJCMF
GPS
FBDI
BDUVBUPS

Design
Fields of Application
Sandwich plate de sign

$SBOFT
s
*OMFU
FMFNFOU
s
6Q
UP

EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOUT Drilling machines
s
&OE
FMFNFOU Forestry machines
Others

401
2/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Function, section
M4-22 control block Load pressure compensation
5IF
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWFT
BSF
QSPQPSUJPOBM
WBMWFT
BDDPSEJOH
UP
UIF
$IBOHFT
JO
QSFTTVSF
BU
UIF
BDUVBUPST
PS
UIF
QVNQ
BSF
DPNQFO-
load-sensing principle. They can be operated mechanically, hy- sated for by the pressure compensator (3). The flow to the ac-
draulically or electrohydraulically. UVBUPS
SFNBJOT
DPOTUBOU
FWFO
VOEFS
EJGGFSJOH
MPBET
Actuator control with electrohydraulic operation Flow limitation
The position of the main spool (2) in relation to the housing (1) 5IF
NBYJNVN
GMPX
DBO
CF
JOEJWJEVBMMZ
NFDIBOJDBMMZ
BEKVTUFE

determines the direction and magnitude of a flow that is fed to CZ
NFBOT
PG
TUSPLF
MJNJUFST


the actuator ports (A or B).
Pressure relief function
*O
UIF
OPOPQFSBUFE
DPOEJUJPO
UIF
NBJO
TQPPM
JT
DFOUSFE
CZ

The LS pressure per actuator port can be influenced for each
compression springs (11). There is no connection from P to
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
CZ
NFBOT
PG
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT


PS
FYUFS-
A or B.
OBMMZ
WJB
UIF
-4
QPSUT
."
.#
The intensity of the elctrical control current determines the
3FMJFG
WBMWFT
XJUI
JOUFHSBUFE
BOUJDBWJUBUJPO
GVODUJPO


QSPUFDU

amount of the pilot pressure in the spring chambers and thus
the actuator ports A and B against pressure peaks.
the stroke of the main spool (P A; P B).
5IF
IJHIFTU
MPBE
QSFTTVSF
JT
TJHOBMMFE
UP
UIF
QVNQ
WJB
UIF
-4

The pressure compensator (3) keeps the pressure differenti-
MJOF
BOE
JOUFHSBUFE
TIVUUMF
WBMWFT


al across the main spool (2) and thus the flow to the actuator
constant. A B
11 8 5 5

LS T T 6.2
6.1

10

Y
P

MA MB
9 4 7 1 3 2
1 Housing 6.1 Stroke limiter, A-side 9 Pilot pressure switch-off
2 Main spool 6.2 Stroke limiter,B-side (pilot a and b)
3 Pressure compensator 7 LS shuttle 10 1SFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
WBMWF


4

-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF QJMPU
WBMWF
B
C

8 Spring chamber
5

4FDPOEBSZ
QSFTTVSF

BOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF 11 $PNQSFTTJPO
TQSJOHT

Symbol
P X Y LS 4 2 5
Ports
P Pump
MA
A, B Actuator
A MB
T Tank
b A B
X Pilot oil supply
Y Pilot oil drain 10 a P T
LS Load-Sensing (LS) 7
MA, MB Measuring ports 3

402
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/18

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
general
Design Sandwich plate design
System Load-Sensing (LS)
Type M4
Size 22
*OTUBMMBUJPO
QPTJUJPO optional
Type of connection 4"&
Weight *OMFU
FMFNFOU

0QFO
DFOUFS kg 28

$MPTFE
DFOUFS
LH 28
%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
kg 24
mechanical
%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
IZESBVMJD
LH 29
%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
FMFDUSPIZES

LH 33
&OE
FMFNFOU kg 13
Hydraulic uid and ambient temperature range $ 20 to +80

hydraulic 2
Flow Port P qV, max l/min 400

XJUI
1
BOE
1
QPSUT

Port A, B qV, max l/min 400 with pressure compensator and load-holding function
Nominal pressure max. pnom bar 350
Operating pressure P / LS p bar 350
max. in port A/B p bar 420
T p bar 30
Y p bar at zero pressure to tank
Pilot pressure max. X p bar 35
in port a, b p bar 35
Pilot pressure hydraulic p bar 8.5 to 22.5
range elektrohydraulic p bar 
UP

3FDPNNFOEFE
IZESBVMJD
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDFT 5)

DIBSBDUFSJDUJD
DVSWF

TFF
3&

LS pressure relief function (adjustment ranges) bar 50 to 149
(selected in the factory) 150 to 350
Hydraulic uid .JOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/

0UIFS
mVJE
PO
FORVJSZ
FH
)&&4
TZOUIFUJD
FTUIFST

UP
7%."


BT
XFMM
BT
IZESBVMJD
mVJET
BT
TQFDJlFE
JO
3&


Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
haydraulic uid max. permissible degree of contamination to class 20/18/15
*40

D

electric
&MFDUSJDBM
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
WBMWFT '58&

,
TFF
3&

'5%3&

,
TFF
3&

3FDPNNFOEFE
BNQMJlFST "OBMPHVF
BNQMJlFS
(other control options on enquiry) 3"

BOE

JO
QSFQBSBUJPO

%JHJUBMBNQMJlFS
3$'BNJMZ
3&


Note!


5IF
UFDIOJDBM
EBUB
XBT
EFUFSNJOFE
BU
B
WJTDPTJUZ
SBOHF
PG
= 30 mm2T
)-1
$


403
4/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Ordering code
Short code Inlet element Directional valve elements
1 spool axis $POUJOVFE
PO

page 5
M4 22 1X
2 spool axis

3 spool axis
No. of direc-
UJPOBM
WBMWFT





1 to 8
Size 22 = 22
Series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installati-
on and connection dimensions)

Actuator port "B"

Actuator port "A"
0QFO
$FOUFS
=P
$MPTFE
$FOUFS
=J Secondary valves
8JUIPVU
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF =Q H...H... = Pressure relief
(OPU
XJUI
WFSTJPO
u1h
BOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWFT
QSF
8JUI
QSJNBSZ
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
=... operated (see table)
(pressure details in bar, 3-digits) Q= Plug screw
Pilot oil supply 4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWFT

DBO
CF
SFUSPlUUFE

With internal pilot oil supply =Y

Details required only for type
For external pilot oil supply =X of operation H and H3
Without pilot pressure switch-off and LS damping shuttle = 1 Damping shuttle
With pilot pressure switch-off =2 00 = Without (Standard)
With LS damping shuttle =3 06 = With

NN
With pilot pressure switch-off and LS damping shuttle = 4 07 = With

NN
With pressure compensator, with load-holding function (standard) = S 08 = With 0.8 mm
Without pressure compensator, with load-holding function = C Details required only for type of
operation H3, W2, W3
With
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF = M and W4
(pressure details in bar, 3-digits) Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 2)
With LS pressure relief plug screw = Q M Q 1= 4VQQMZ
WPMUBHF

7
(LS QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
DBO
CF
SFUSPlUUFE) 3= 4VQQMZ
WPMUBHF

7
Without
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF = Z Z Z 1) DT04-2P (Deutsch) 2)
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
DBO
OPU
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE

8= 4VQQMZ
WPMUBHF

7
Housing with measuring ports =M 9= 4VQQMZ
WPMUBHF

7
Housing without measuring ports =Z Operation cover A
M= Mechanical 1)
Spool symbol
H= Hydraulic
W2 =
&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
QSPQPSUJPOBM
W4 =
&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
TXJUDIBCMF
=E =Q H3 = Hydraulic with pilot oil switch-off
W3 =
&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
QSPQPSUJPOBM
with pilot oil switch-off
...... = Flow in l/min, 3-digits,
e.g. 320-320;
Actuator ports A and B
=J

1) .FDIBOJDBM
JT
POMZ
XJUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
;;;

2) Mating plugs are not included in the scope of supply and

must be ordered separately

404
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/18

Ordering code
End element Additional details

L V 11 *

Further details in clear text

11 = 1PSUT
BT
4"&
End element
A =
&OE
FMFNFOU
XJUIPVU
QPSUT
XJUI
JOUFSOBM
-4
VOMPBEJOH
Z =
&OE
FMFNFOU
XJUI
-4
QPSU
XJUIPVU
JOUFSOBM
-4
VOMPBEJOH
P =
&OE
FMFNFOU
XJUI
1
QPSU
R =
&OE
FMFNFOU
XJUI
1
BOE
-4
QPSU
T =
&OE
FMFNFOU
XJUI
5
QPSU

Pressure setting in bar in actuator ports A and B

2
H050 = 50 bar H140 = 140 bar H210 = 210 bar H280 = 280 bar
)


CBS H150 = 150 bar H230 = 230 bar H300 = 300 bar
H080 = 80 bar )


CBS H240 = 240 bar H320 = 320 bar
H100 = 100 bar )


CBS H250 = 250 bar H350 = 350 bar
H125 = 125 bar H190 = 190 bar

= Prefered type

Preferred spool types

Symetric spools
Pressure
Spool type Flow in l/min (other flows can be set on the stroke limiter)
compensator
400-400 300-300 200-200 130-130 080-080
E, J, Q S   180-180 115-115 
320-320 240-240  100-100 

$PNQMFUF
DPOUSPM
CMPDLT
BSF
UP
CF
EFGJOFE
JO
BDDPSEBODF
XJUI
&YBNQMF
PG
B
TIPSU
DPEF
PG
BO
.
DPOUSPM
CMPDL
XJUI
UISFF

the type code. EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOUT
The order text is used to collate the technical features and re-
quirements.
5IF
3FYSPUI
4BMFT
0SHBOJTBUJPO
EFSJWFT
B
TIPSU
DPEF
BOE
B
M4 6789 1 0 / 3 M4 22
material number from the order text.
No. of directional
$POUSPM
CMPDL
OP WBMWF
FMFNFOUT
Series of type (1X) SFWJTJPO
JOEFY
PG
TFSJFT

405
6/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Order example: Open center

Example: Fixed displacement pump qV.max = 400 l/min
3 actuators

&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
PQFSBUJPO
Assembled control block
Inlet ele- s
0QFO
DFOUFS
XJUI
QSJNBSZ
WBMWF
TFU
UP

CBS Ordering code:
ment: with internal pilot oil supply, without pilot pres-
sure switch-off and LS damping shuttle, 3 M4 22 1X P250 Y 1
Directional valve elements:
1. spool axis s
8JUI
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
XJUI
1. spool axis
load-holding function
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT S ZZZ J 400-400 H3 1 00 Q Q
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
PQFSBUJPO
IZESBVMJD
XJUI
QJMPU
PJM

switch off
s
XJUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWF
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
BOE
#
QMVHHFE
2. spool axis s
8JUI
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
XJUI

load-holding function 2. spool axis
s
8JUI
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT S 180M180 J 400-400 W2 1 H350 H350
actuator port A and B set to 180 bar
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
PQFSBUJPO
FMFDUSPIZESBVMJD

proportional
s
XJUI
+VOJPS
UJNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWF

actuator port A and B 350 bar
3. spool axis s
8JUI
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
XJUI
3. spool axis
load-holding function
s
8JUI
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT S 180M120 J 085-085 W3 1 H350 H350
actuator port A set to 180 bar,
actuator port B set to 120 bar
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
PQFSBUJPO
FMFDUSPIZESBVMJD

proportional with pilot oil switch-off
s
XJUI
+VOJPS
UJNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWF
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
BOE
#

CBS
End element s
-4
VOMPBEJOH
QPSUT
BT
4"& LA V 11

LS

406
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/18

Order example: Closed Center

Example: Variable displacement pump qV.max = 400 l/min
3 actuators

&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
PQFSBUJPO
Assembled control block: Ordering code
Inlet ele- s
$MPTFE
DFOUFS
XJUI
QSJNBSZ
WBMWF
TFU
UP

CBS
3 M4 22 1X J250 Y 3
ment: with internal pilot oil supply, with LS damping
shuttle
Directional valve elements:
1. spool axis s
8JUI
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
XJUI
1. spool axis
load-holding function
s
8JUIPVU
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT
S ZZZ J 400-400 H3 1 00 Q Q
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
PQFSBUJPO
IZESBVMJD
XJUI
QJMPU
PJM

switch-off
s
XJUI
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWF
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
BOE
#
QMVHHFE

2. spool axis s
8JUI
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
XJUI
2. spool axis
load-holding function
S 180M180 J 400-400 W2 1 H350 H350 2
s
8JUI
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT
actuator port A and B set to 180 bar
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
PQFSBUJPO
FMFDUSPIZESBVMJD
QSPQPSUJPOBM

s
8JUI
+VOJPS
UJNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWF
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
BOE
#

CBS
3. spool axis s
With pressure compensator, 3. spool axis
with load-holding function
S 180M120 J 200-200 W3 1 H350 H350
s
8JUI
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT
actuator port A set to 180 bar,
actuator port B set to 120 bar
s
4QPPM
TZNCPM
+
GMPX
JO
"
BOE
#

MNJO
s
5ZQF
PG
PQFSBUJPO
FMFDUSPIZESBVMJD

proportional with pilot oil switch-off
s
XJUI
+VOJPS
UJNFS
QJO
".1


7
s
4FDPOEBSZ
WBMWF
BDUVBUPS
QPSU
"
BOE
#

CBS
End element s
-4
VOMPBEJOH
QPSUT
BT
4"&
LA V 11

LS

407
8/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Inlet elements
%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
Inlet element
Open Center with primary valve
for external pilot oil supply
s
XJUIPVU
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE

LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail PX1
Short description
s
'PS
GJYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTTVSF
EFUBJMT
UP
CF
HJWFO
BGUFS
1x


(3 digits)

%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
Inlet element
Open center with primary valve
with internal pilot oil supply
s
XJUIPVU
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE

LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail PY1
Short description
s
'PS
lYFE
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTTVSF
EFUBJMT
UP
CF
HJWFO
BGUFS
1x

(3 digits)

Inlet element %JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU

Closed Center with primary valve

for external pilot oil supply
s
XJUIPVU
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE

LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail JX1
Short description
s
'PS
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTTVSF
EFUBJMT
UP
CF
HJWFO
BGUFS
+x

(3-digits)

%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
Inlet element
Closed Center with primary valve
with internal pilot oil supply
s
XJUIPVU
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE

LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail JY1
Short description
s
'PS
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTTVSF
EFUBJMT
UP
CF
HJWFO
BGUFS
+x

(3 digits)
Attention!
8JUI
JOUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
QJMPU
PJM
PG
PUIFS
BDUVBUPST
NBZ
BMTP
CF
ESBJOFE
WJB
UIF
9
QPSU
5IJT
NBZ
IPXFWFS
IBWF
BO
JOGMVFODF
PO
UIF
TXJUDIJOH
UJNFT
PG
UIF
.
Please contact the technical sales department for possible effects.

8JUI
FYUFSOBM
QJMPU
PJM
TVQQMZ
QPSU
u9h
JT
HFOFSBMMZ
OPU
QMVHHFE
*G
JU
JT
OPU
VTFE
FH
XJUI
IZESBVMJD
DPOUSPM
u)h

JU
NVTU
CF
QMVHHFE

408
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/18

Inlet elements

Inlet element
Closed center without primary valve %JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
for external pilot oil supply
s
XJUIPVU
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE
X
LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail JQX1
Short description
M
s
'PS
-4
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTTVSF
EFUBJMT
OPU
SFRVJSFE

P Y LS T
Inlet element
%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
Closed Center without primary valve
with internal pilot oil supply
s
XJUIPVU
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE
2
LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail JQY1
Short description
s
'PS
-4
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTTVSF
EFUBJMT
OPU
SFRVJSFE

Inlet element %JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU

Closed Center with primary valve
with internal pilot oil supply
s
XJUI
QJMPU
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIPGG
BOE

LS damping shuttle
Ordering detail J Y2
Short description
s
'PS
-4
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTVSF
EFUBJMT
UP
CF
HJWFO
BGUFS
+x

%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
Inlet element
Closed Center with primary valve
with internal pilot oil supply
s
XJUI
-4
EBNQJOH
TIVUUMF
Ordering detail J Y3
Short description
s
'PS
-4
WBSJBCMF
EJTQMBDFNFOU
QVNQ
s
1SFTVSF
EFUBJMT
UP
CF
HJWFO
BGUFS
+x

409
10/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Directional valve elements: Spools

Spool symbol

Ordering detail Main application Symbol

Flow in l/min

E Hydraulic cylinders as actuator

J Hydraulic motors as actuator

Q Application with defined residual

opening (A/B T)
Actuator port unloaded in the neutral
position

410
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/18

Directional valve elements: Pressure compensator

Central position of the main spool
Directional valve elements: Pressure compensator
When the main spool (3) is in the central position, there is no
DPOOFDUJPO
CFUXFFO
1
BOE
UIF
BDUVBUPS
QPSUT
"
BOE
#
*O
UIJT

operating state, the pump pressure pushes the pressure com-
pensator spool (1) to the left against the spring (2).
When the main spool (3) (= metering orifice) is operated the
LS pressure is fed to the spring chamber (4) and pushes the
pressure compensator spool to the right to the control position.
5IF
GMPX
JT
LFQU
DPOTUBOU
FWFO
XJUI
QBSBMMFM
PQFSBUJPO
PG
BDUVB-
tors with different load pressures.
1SFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
WBSJBOU
h4h
JT
QSPWJEFE
XJUI
B
MPBEIPM-
ding function. This function is not leak-free.
The number of washers (5) inserted determines the pressure
difference and thereby the required flow. 4 2 5 1 3

Operation of the main spool 2

4 2 5 1 3

Preferred types

Flow in l/min (other flows can be set on the stroke limiter)

400-400 300-300 200-200 130-130 080-080
Symmetric spools   180-180 115-115 
320-320 240-240  100-100 

Flow without washer (pressure compensator (pressure compensator p


UP

CBS

Flow with 1 washer (pressure compensator p


UP

CBS

Flow with 2 washers (pressure compensator p = 9 to 12 bar)

Example:
$PNNBOE
WBMVF
2actuator = 380 l/min

-JUFS
TQPPM


XBTIFST


MNJO
set 380 L by means of stroke limiter

411
12/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Directional valve elements: Pressure compensator, load-holding function

Ordering detail S
Short description
s
8JUI
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
s
8JUI
MPBEIPMEJOH
GVODUJPO
1)
s
.BY
GMPX

MNJO

Ordering detail C
Short description
s
8JUIPVU
QSFTTVSF
DPNQFOTBUPS
s
8JUI
MPBEIPMEJOH
GVODUJPO
1)
s
"U
p = 18 bar

1) The load-holding function is not leak-free.

412
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/18

Directional valve elements: LS pressure relief function, secondary valves

With LS pressure relief valve

Ordering detail M
Short description
s
1SFTTVSF
UP
CF
EFUBJMFE
GPS
BDUVBUPS
QPSUT
u"h

and B (3 digits), e.g. 180M120
s
8JUI
WFSTJPO
u2.2h
UIF
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG

function can be retrofitted to the directional
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
s
5IF
-4
QSFTTVSF
DBO
CF
FYUFSOBMMZ
JOGMVFODFE

WJB
QPSUT
."
BOE
.#
5IFTF
QPSUT
DBO
BMTP

be used as measuring points.

Without LS pressure relief valve

Ordering detail ZZZ
Short description
s
-4
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
DBOOPU
CF
SFUSPGJUUFE
s
)PVTJOH
XJUIPVU
NFBTVSJOH
QPSUT

Secondary valves
Ordering detail QH
Short description
s
1MVH
GPS
QPSU
"
s
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG

BOUJDBWJUBUJPO
WBMWF
QPSU
#
s
&YBNQMF
2)
s
5IF
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
JT
QSPWJEFE
GPS
SFUSPGJUUJOH

TFDPOEBSZ
WBMWFT

Attention!
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWFT
BSF
SFTUSJDUFE
TVJUBCMF
BT

pressure limiters!

413
14/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Directional valve elements: Types of operation

Mechanical
Ordering detail M
Short description
s
5POHVF
XJUIPVU
IBOE
MFWFS

Hydraulic
Ordering detail H
Short description
3FDPNNFOEFE
IZESBVMJD
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDFT
5ZQF
5)
UP
3&


$POUSPM
DVSWF


Hydraulic with pilot oil switch-off

Ordering Short description
H31 24 V (AMP-plug)
H33 12 V (AMP-plug)
H38 24 V (Deutsch-plug)
H39 12 V (Deutsch-plug)

414
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/18

Directional valve elements: Types of operation

Electrohydraulic proportional
Ordering Short description
W21

&MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
proportional 24 V
W23 &MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
proportional 12 V
1SPQPSUJPOBM
WBMWF
UZQF
'5%3&

,
UP
3&

1MVH
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1
1)

Electrohydraulic proportional with

pilot oil switch-off 2
Ordering Short description
W38 &MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
proportional 24 V
W39 &MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
proportional 12 V
0OPGG
WBMWFT
UZQF
'58&

,
UP
3&


1SPQPSUJPOBM
WBMWF
UZQF
'5%3&

,
UP
3&

Plug: DT04-2P (Deutsch)1)

Electrohydraulic switchable
Ordering Short description
W41 &MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
switchable 24 V
W43 &MFDUSPIZESBVMJD
switchable 12 V
0OPGG
WBMWFT
UZQF
'58&

,
UP
3&

1MVH
+VOJPS
5JNFS
QJO
".1
1)

1) Mating plugs are not included in the scope of

supply and must be ordered separately !

415
16/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

End elements

End element with LS unloading

Ordering detail LA

End element with LS port

(LS unloading must be ensured externally)
Ordering detail LZ
For the connection of additional LS actuators

End element with P2 port

Ordering detail LP

End element with P2 port and with LS port

Ordering detail LR

End element with T2 port

Ordering detail LT

416
RE 64279/06.05 M4-22 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/18

Unit dimensions: Control block as open center version (Unit dimensions in mm)

(Mounting hole)

118 112

29
110

1
*OMFU
FMFNFOU
2
%JSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
FMFNFOU
3
&OE
FMFNFOU
4
$POUSPM
DPWFS
GPS
electrohydraulic operation
5 $POUSPM
DPWFS
6 Stroke limiter
7
3FMJFG
WBMWF
8 Tie rod
9 Name plate
10 Measuring port M
11 Pilot oil supply

417
18/18 Bosch Rexroth AG M4-22 RE 64279/06.05

Ports (Unit dimensions in mm)

Master gage for SAE connecting flange
31,8 p0,2 27,8 p0,2
30,2 p0,2

57,1 p0,2
58,7 p0,2

66,7 p0,2
M10; 16 M12; 19
SAE 1-1/4 M14; 22 SAE 1
SAE 1-1/4
standard pressure high pressure high pressure

Ports
T 4"&

 (standard pressure)
P 4"&

 (high pressure)
A1... A3
4"&
 (high pressure)
B1... B3
LS1, LS2, M1,
M2, X1, X2, Y1, Y2,
MA, M B, a, b, V G 1/4

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
5IJT
EPDVNFOU
BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
EBUB
TQFDJlDBUJPOT
BOE
PUIFS

Mobile Applications JOGPSNBUJPO
TFU
GPSUI
JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI

;VN
&JTFOHJFFS
 "(

8JUIPVU
UIFJS
DPOTFOU
JU
NBZ
OPU
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS
HJWFO
UP
UIJSE


-PIS
BN
.BJO
(FSNBOZ parties.
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJlFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P

Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
[email protected] BQQMJDBUJPO
DBO
CF

EFSJWFE
GSPN
PVS
JOGPSNBUJPO
5IF
HJWFO
JOGPSNBUJPO

www.boschrexroth.de does not release the user from the obligation of own judgement and
WFSJlDBUJPO
*U
NVTU
CF
SFNFNCFSFE
UIBU
PVS
QSPEVDUT
BSF
TVCKFDU
UP
B

natural process of wear and aging.

418
 RE 64 386/02.12
Load-Sensing Control Block Replaces:
RE 64 386/11.10
SB12

SB12-M mechanical actuation

SB12-EM direct operated electromagnetic actuation
2

Nominal pressure: pnom = 250 bar

Flow: Qmax = 100 l/min

Table of contents Features

Content Page System
Features 1 load sensing system
Modular system 2
Order code 3 Design
Mechanical actuation M: plate construction
Technical data 4 up to 10 directional control valve elements
Direct operated electromagnetic actuation EM:
Technical data 5 Actuation types
Order details mechanical
Directional control valves 610 electromagnetic
Port plates 11
End plate 11 Flow
Subplate 12 load-pressure compensated
Accessories 12 high accuracy of repeatability
Characteristics 1416 low hysteresis
Unit dimensions 1724
Circuit examples 2528 Pressure safeguarding
Functional description 2938 port plate for fixed pump

Application areas
fork lift trucks
construction machines
municipal vehicles
harvesters
Operating instructions
Part 1: General information: RE 64 020-B1 Repair instructions
Part 2: SB12 directional control valves for mobile directional control valve block, series SB12:
applications: RDE 64 386-R1
RE 64 386-B2

419
2/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

SB12 control block (example) 6

Load sensing system, for minimization of throttle losses and

B
load-independent flow control.
1 Port plate with pressure compensator and pressure-relief
A
1 0 2
5
valve
2 Directional control valve, single-acting
3 Directional control valve, double-acting
4 Directional control valve with check valves B
A
5 Directional control valve with secondary pressure-relief 1 0 2

valve 3
6 End plate 7
7 Shuttle valve for load-pressure selection
B

A
1 0 2
4

1 0 2
2

R P

Modular system

A1 B1 A2 B2 EF C1 D1 C3 D3 GH

EM

ES RM

PN

1 0 2 1 0 2

L20 L30
1 0 2 1 0 2 F

L50 L70

Q1 Q2 Q3

420
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/40

The desired model variant of a directional

control valve is described using this order code.

Order code, e.g.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

L 30 A1 B2 Q1 RM

1. Circuit type 7. Auxiliary function in the main axis

L Load sensing PN Pneumatic actuation

2. Spool symbol
EM direct operated electromagnetic actuation
1 0 2
20 1 Switching
2 Proportional
1 0 2
30
RM Detent, mechanical release
2
1 0 2
50
ES1 Electrical switch
1 0 2 F
70
ES2 Position sensor

4. Auxiliary functions in the upper axis

Customer ports
A1 in A
Shock valve Ports A and B, threaded version
B1 in B
Type I:I DIN 3852, part 1
Type III: ISO 6149
A2 in A
Anticavitation valve
B2 in B Type 1: Type 3:
DIN 3852-1 ISO 6149-1
C1 Check valve, in A
D1 hydr. actuated in B

C3 Check valve, in A
D3 el. actuated in B

E Secondary PRV in A
F adjustable in B

G in A Cutting edge, O-ring sealing

Pilot pressure insert flat seal ring,
H in B
copper ring

Connection D1 to check valve switching

N
valve contained in subplate. Operating element
Accessories are to be ordered
separately.
5. Auxiliary functions in the lower axis
See page 13.
Q1 Metering restrictor, inflow in P

Q2 2-way flow control valve in P

Q3 2-way pressure compensator in P

421
4/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Mechanical actuation M

Characteristics
General Valve blocks consisting of:
1 port plate, 1 end plate
1...10 directional control valve elements and shuttle valves
3 tie bolts
Mass Directional control valve, mechanically actuated: 3.0 kg
Directional control valve, electrically actuated: 3.8 kg
Port plate: 2.7 kg
End plate: 1.8 kg
Fixing Thread in port plate and end plate (standard: M 8)
Line ports Internal thread, see order details
Installation position As desired
Port plate configuration Standard: left-hand version
Ambient temperature 30 C...+80 C
Hydraulic
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil based hydraulic oil acc. to DIN/ISO,
other fluids, e.g. environmentally acceptable fluids, on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permitted range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
12...2000 mm2/s range permitted for start-up
Temperature of hydraulic fluid In operation +20 C...+90 C, for short periods 30 C...+100 C
Filtration Oil contamination class 19/16 acc. to ISO/DIS 4406 or class 10 acc. to
NAS 1638, obtained with filter 25  75 1)
Operating pressure P pmax = 250 bar (pump side)
at port A, B pmax = 280 bar (consumer side), in combination with check valves 300 bar
R pmax = 20 bar (return side)
W pmax = 250 bar
Leakage A, B  R Standard: QL = 18 cm3/min
at p = 125 bar, = 33 mm2/s with check valve: QL = 2 cm3/min
= 50 C with shock valve: QL = 20 cm3/min
Nominal flow see diagram Operating limits, page 16
Mechanical
Spool strokes Symbol L20: 8 mm
L30, L50: 6 mm
L70: 6 + 5 mm
Actuating forces < 200 N in spool axis direction
Type of protection IP 69 K, with ES1 IP 54, with ES2 IP 64
1) Retention rate for dirt particles > 25 m is 1:75, i.e. 98.67 %

422
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/40

Direct operated electromagnetic

actuation EM

Characteristics Direct operated electromagnetic actuation

General hydraulic characteristics See mechanically actuated directional control valves, page 4
Installation position *) Spool axis horizontal. Maximum acceleration in spool axis direction 10g
Ambient temperature 20 C...+60 C
Temperature of fluid in operation +20 C+80 C 2
Valve type 4/3-, 4/2- and 3/3-way switching / proportional
Control type Electromagnetic, direct
Solenoid working stroke (s) 5 3.5 mm
Actuated time 100 % ED
Type of protection IP 65
Plug connection AMP Junior Timer, 2-pole

Characteristics EM 1 (switching) EM 2 (proportional)

Leakage A, B  R Standard Standard
at p = 125 bar, = 33 mm2/s QL  40 cm3/min QL  64 cm3/min
= 50 C (without check valve) (without check valve)
Hysteresis  15 %
Spark suppression Integrated in solenoid
Solenoid voltage Unom 12V 24V 12V 24V
Solenoid voltage Umax permitted 14V 28V
Solenoid current min required 2.3 A 1.1 A
Solenoid current (controlled) Imax 2.3 A 1.5 A
Coil resistance (RL) at 20 C 3.5 1 3.75 1 13.8 1 14.6 1 3.5 1 3.75 1 9.6 1 10.2 1
Coil resistance (RL) at 80 C  4.8 1  18.2 1  4.8 1  12.8 1
Inductivity at nominal stroke (50 Hz) 5 87 mH 5 220 mH
Current proportional range (A), (B) Iprop 0.5 A 2.3 A 0.25 A 1.5 A
Dither signal (A), (B) 0.75 A ss 0.25 A 0.48 A ss 0.2 A
Dither frequency (A), (B) 120 Hz 5 Hz
Dither shape of the current setpoint (A), (B) Triangular signal
*) Another installation position can be permitted only after positive conclusion of a user validation co-ordinated
with Bosch Rexroth

Note
Definition of the proportional range: The dither values are to be interpreted as The dither data may need to be examined
0.02 x Qnom to Qnom. Current decay for values for minimum hysteresis. All dither with respect to the given system and, if
the specified dither signals via a spark- data are guide values. necessary, reoptimized.
suppression diode (Uf < 1 V).

423
6/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Order details
Directional control valves

Qnom
Port Port with AP  p
Symbol Comments A B [l/min / bar] Order number
L 20 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 004
R Y P B without M22 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 073

1 0 2

L 20 D1 without G1/2 / 1 70 / 3 0 521 608 028

R Y P B without M22 x 1.5 / 3 70 / 3 R 917 005 371

1 0 2

L20 ES1 with switch hub and spare M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 024
R Y P B
parts set E-switch incl.

1 0 2

L20 D1 ES2 without M22 x 1.5 / 1 120 / 8.4 R 917 003 192
R Y P B without M22 x 1.5 / 3 100 / 6 R 917 004 505
1 0 2

L20 D1 N for connection of the subplate without M22 x 1.5 / 3 70 / 3 R 917 005 356
R Y P B with cut-out function

1 0 2

L30 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 003

R Y P B M22 x 1.5 / 1 M22 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 034
A M18 x 1.5 / 3 M18 x 1.5 / 3 50 / 3 R 917 005 358
1 0 2

L30 end plate valve unit M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 R 917 004 171
B

A
1 0 2

R Y P

424
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/40

Qnom
Port Port with AP  p
Symbol Comments A B [l/min / bar] Order number
L30 A1 B1
A1 B1 p = 300 bar M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 008
R Y P B

A
1 0 2 A1 p = 250 bar M22 x 1.5 / 1 M22 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 032

B1 p = 125 bar

L30 A1 B2
B
A1 p = 300 bar M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 009
R Y P
A
1 0 2
A1 p = 90 bar M22 x 1.5 / 1 M22 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 043

L30 D1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 006

R Y P B

1 0 2
A 2

L30 C1D1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 005

R Y P B

A
1 0 2

L30 E
E p = 120 bar M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 022
R Y P B

A
(100...150 bar)
1 0 2

L30 F
R Y P B F p = 120 bar M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 023
A (100...150 bar)
1 0 2

L30 EF
R Y P B
E F p = 175 bar M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 011
(150...230 bar)
A
1 0 2
E F p = 175 bar M22 x 1.5 / 1 M22 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 069
(150...230 bar)

425
8/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Qnom
Port Port with AP  p
Symbol Comments A B [l/min / bar] Order number
L30 H
H p = 125 bar M18 x 1.5 / 3 M18 x 1.5 / 3 50 / 3 R 917 005 357
R Y P B

A
1 0 2

L30 PN pN max = 4 bar *) M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 066
min = 1 bar
R Y P B
*) proportional control
A
1 0 2

L30 ES1 with switch hub and spare M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 025
parts set E-switch incl.
R Y P B

A
1 0 2

L30 ES2 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 R 917 003 194

R Y P B

A
1 0 2

L30 C1D1 Q2 Q = 34 l/min (2...34) M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 34 / 3 0 521 608 071

R Y P B

A
1 0 2

L30 Q3 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 079

R Y P B

A
1 0 2

426
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 9/40

Qnom
Port Port with AP  p
Symbol Comments A B [l/min / bar] Order number
L50 M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 012
R Y P B

A
1 0 2

L70 RM detent engagement in F M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 50 / 3 0 521 608 013
R Y P B

A
1 0 2 F

L30 EM1 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 833
R Y P B

b 1 0 2 a
A
2

L30 EM2 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 827
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L30 C1D1 EM1 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 834
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L30 C1D1 EM2 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 7 / 3 0 521 608 841
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L30 EF EM2 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 R 917 002 484
R Y P B
E F p = 230 bar
b 1 0 2 a
A (150...230 bar)

427
10/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Qnom
Port Port with AP  p
Symbol Comments A B [l/min / bar] Order number
L30 Q3 EM2 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 859
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L50 EM1 24 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 831
R Y P B 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 847
A
b 1 0 2 a

L50 EM2 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 10 / 3 R 917 001 607
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L50 C3 D3 EM1 12 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 821
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L50 Q3 EM1 12 V Jet M22 x 1.5 / 1 M22 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 829
R Y P B

A
b 1 0 2 a

L50.2 Q3 EM1 12 V Jet M22 x 1.5 / 1 M22 x 1.5 / 1 36 / 3 0 521 608 830
R Y P B

A
0 2 a

L50.2 Q3 EM2 24 V Jet M18 x 1.5 / 1 M18 x 1.5 / 1 30 / 3 0 521 608 837
R Y P B

A
0 2 a

428
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 11/40

Port plates
p Qmax Ports
Symbol bar l/min P, R, W, Y, S Order number
A1 R Y P 3 50 P: M 18 x 1.5 1 525 503 390
R: M 22 x 1.5
3 50 P: M 18 x 1.5 1 525 503 524
R: plugged
R P 6 75 P: M 18 x 1.5 1 525 503 528
R: M 22 x 1.5
3 50 P: M 18 x 1.5 1 525 503 503
R: M 22 x 1.5
Y: G1/4
A3 R Y P
3 50 P: M 18 x 1.5 1 525 503 394
R: M 22 x 1.5
W: M 18 x 1.5

R P W

A6 R Y P 100 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 779 2

R: M 26 x 1.5
Y: M 12 x 1.5

R Y P

A2 R Y P
2.5/7 80 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 392
R: M 26 x 1.5
3/8.4 90 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 525
R: M 26 x 1.5
R P 3/11 95 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 531
R: M 26 x 1.5
6/16 100 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 505
R: M 26 x 1.5
A4 R Y P
2.5/7 80 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 396
R: M 26 x 1.5
W: M 22 x 1.5

R W P

End plates

E2 S: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 474

S
plugged
R Y P S: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 475
E8 W: M 18 x 1.5 R 917 000 886
Y W
S Y: M 12 x 1.5
S: M 22 x 1.5
R Y P

429
12/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Subplate
R Y P
LS switching valve Connection of load sensing to return flow. R 917 003 111
Check valve switching valve prevents / allows relief of check
valve of the bordering directional control valve L20 D1 N.
Manual lowering function.

Accessories
Y2
Shuttle valve for load tap 1 527 419 006
(left-hand version)
Y1
Y

Tie bolt Number of mm

(1 tie bolt with nut) directional 1 115 1 523 502 075
control valves 2 155 1 523 502 076
(port plate and 3 195 1 523 502 077
M8 end plate are
4 235 1 523 502 078
taken into
account) 5 275 1 523 502 079
6 315 1 523 502 080
7 355 1 523 502 081
8 395 1 523 502 082
9 435 1 523 502 083
10 475 1 523 502 084
Pos.
Operating element and bracket 1 1 527 000 097
+
2
3 Bracket with wiping ring 1 1 527 000 098

Hand lever 3 1 522 027 306

2

4 Cover plate with wiping ring 4 1 527 010 326

2 1 Electrical switch, retrofit kit, complete 1 527 010 332

Service part 1 1 527 010 293

Fixing clip with electrical switch +
2
DIN/ISO Jet Plug connector 2-pin, EM DIN/ISO 1 834 484 057
Jet 1 834 484 094

+ individual wire seals R 900 313 533

1 834 484 095

Plug connector 4-pin, EHS Jet R 917 002 006

430
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 13/40

Retrofitting kits for A1 , B1 , A2 , B2 , E , F

p [bar] Pos. 1
30 1 527 410 084
Shock valve A1 B1
50 1 527 410 082
80 1 527 410 079
90 1 527 410 078
1 100 1 527 410 081
3
120 1 527 410 083
140 1 527 410 077
160 1 527 410 080
180 1 527 410 076
200 1 527 410 070
220 1 527 410 073
250 1 527 410 076
280 1 527 410 072
300 1 527 410 061
2
Pos. 2
Anticavitation valve A2 B2
1 523 105 083
2

Pos. 3
Spare parts set: locking screw for A1 B1
1 527 010 355
A2 B2
3

p [bar] Pos. 4
Secondary PRV, adjustable E F
25... 60 1 527 410 089
4 60...100 1 527 410 123
100...150 1 527 410 069
150...230 1 527 410 063

Spare parts set, leakage dummy plug, no function 5 Pos. 5

1 527 010 356

431
14/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

WBIHYD
Characteristics, directional control valves 

= 35 mm2/s, = 50 C


Flow resistance for fully


open directional control valve
(characteristic curve)


) ^ 
) )


^
K


L
(
9
L^
7 (

7
7 9 7 9 
) 9
)
) ( ) ( 7

K^

7 9 7 9         
8UVTBSTPUD

Operating limits p [bar]

Mechanical actuation 16

14 L30
p  6 bar only with L50
p switchover L30Q1
L70
Control p on pressure compensator 12
control- p [bar]

10
Necessary

L20
8 s = 8 mm
(spool
travel)
6

0
Operating limits 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
direct operated electromagnetic actuation Qnom [l/min]
WBIHYD
1 Braking load, 
i.e. lifting or pressing at control p = 3 bar  

2 Braking load,
i.e. lifting or pressing at control p = 8.4 bar

3 Driving load,
i.e. lowering or pulling, 
AR 

4 Driving load, 
i.e. lowering or pulling, 
BR

        
8UVTBSTPUD

432
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 15/40

90
Flow versus spool travel
(characteristic curve) 80
p = 6 bar
70
60
50
p = 3 bar
40
30
20
10

8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8
s [mm]

Qnom [l/min]
Flow Q and solenoid current I 40 2,4
versus spool travel 2

IM [A]
(characteristic curve)
30 1,8

20 1,2

10 0,6

0
0 1 2 3 [mm] Valve strok

Pressure build-up versus Max. load

spool travel 180
(characteristic curve)
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20

s [mm]

433
16/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Characteristics, port plates p [bar]

16
Open center pump control P  R
(characteristic curve)
14

12

10

t
6 ring, ressor
Feder, sp
p 4 bar

4 p 3 bar
R P p 2,5 bar

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Qnom [l/min]

Pressure-relief valve p [bar]

(characteristic curve) 260

240

220

200

180

160
R
P 140

120

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Qnom [l/min]

434
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 17/40

Dimensions

SB12-M directional control valve, mechanically actuated

Base valve: L 10, L 20, L 30, L 50
2 01 Pos
66 L 30.50
B A
77 L 10.20

16.4
8D11
83.7 R
95

R R R

41.5
Y
P

16
128 34 8
193
2

8h11
21.5
40

60.8
100.2

112.4 7.9

28.5
70

Operating element

16.6
16
.6
13.5
211

16.5
60.5

16.5

178

435
18/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Dimensions

Directional control valve with auxiliary function

RM F 2 0 1 Pos
566

R R R
Y
P
248

Directional control valve with auxiliary function

ES 1
B A

R R R

Y
P

max 247

Directional control valve with auxiliary function

ES 2 B A

A
R

R R R

Y P

128.3 34 40
214.9
248.9

436
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 19/40

Dimensions

Directional control valve with auxiliary function 2 0 1 Pos

176.28 66
PN

34.3
A

R
72.2

R R R
Y
P
13

259.9

Directional control valve with auxiliary function Rubber cap

Gummikappe
Handnotbettigung
Manual emergency actuation 2
EM
mit Rckstellfeder
with return spring

R R R
Y
P

232.8 81.5
314.3

437
20/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Dimensions

Directional control valve with auxiliary function 100.2

60.8
A1 B1 A2 B2 B A

R R R
Y
P
194
Directional control valve with auxiliary function

C1 D1 109
2 0 1 Pos
52 66
B A

R R R
Y
P

Directional control valve

with auxiliary function

E F A

R R R
Y

P
201.27

B A

Directional control valve with auxiliary function

A
G H R

R R R

Y
P

128.3 34 40
158.6
192.6

438
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 21/40

Dimensions
2-pin mating
Directional control valve with auxiliary function connector 2-polig
Gegenstecker

C3 D3 EM

143.6
3.6
108.5

41.5
229.3 78.5
311.6

Directional control valve with auxiliary function

2
Q1
A

R
96.7

R R R
Y
P
17

158.3
193

Directional control valve with auxiliary function

Q3
A

R
130.6

R R R
41.5
13.5

Y
P
34

34
158.3 38
193

439
22/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Dimensions

Port plates A1 A2
Left-hand version
P

M R1
118
96.5

58
R
min.11

16.5
M8

41.5
M8 (3x)
(2x)

130.2
10 21 20
40 68
128

20
98
94 17
140

112.4 7.9
3.7
6.5

4
70

End plate E2 139.3

Left-hand version 128.3

RC
90.7
70

RB RA RD
8.2

8.5 (2x)
51.5

Y P
130.2

72.5
112.4 19
M8
94 11tief (2x)
11deep (2x)
34.5
28

18.5
14

440
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 23/40

Dimensions

Subplate, cut-out function

122.5

105
147.3 19.5
1.5

179.4 (2x) 40 2
208.6 (2x)

103.4

441
24/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Dimensions

Complete control block 235

118
96.5

M8 M8
min.11

30 30 40 (2x)
+2
4x40+24=184 -3

R
193

100.2
109

60.8
52
28.5

442
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 25/40

LS circuit examples

Standard control block with fixed pump Standard control block with variable pump

R Y P R Y P
R Y P B R Y P B

A A
1 0 2 1 0 2

R Y P B R Y P B

A A
1 0 2 1 0 2 F

R Y P B R Y P B 2
A A
1 0 2 1 0 2

R Y P B R Y P B

A
1 0 2 1 0 2

R Y P R Y P

R P R Y P

443
26/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Example circuit diagram:

Control block with fixed pump, SB12-M for fork lift truck applications

B Endplate valve unit, double acting, as block termination.

A The end plate is not necessary.
1 0 2

R Y P
R Y P B
Double acting valve for the auxiliary function
A
1 0 2

R Y P B

A
Double-acting valve with integrated pilot pressure insert
1 0 2 for a continuous transition from pushing load to pulling load
during tilting.

R Y P B
Single-acting valve with integrated check valve for leak-free
A
1 0 2
load holding with the lift/lower function

R Y P Subplate with LS switching valve for connection of load sensing to check flow,
check valve switching valve for relief of check valve of bordering directional control
valve L20 D1 N and manual lowering function.

R Y P Port plate with p switchover for reducing the open center

pump control

R N P

444
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 27/40

Parallel switching of two LS blocks

Open center pump control, fine-control residual flow and pri- Connection:
mary PRV function via pressure compensator in block 1, i.e. Control line Y via port plate from block 2 to end plate block 1.
block II does not require a pressure compensator of its own. P and R via pipeline with branch before block 1.

Block 1 Block 2

R Y P R Y P
R Y P B R Y P B

R Y P R Y P

R P R Y P

SB12 EM

Return port in the end plate at port plate with Q greater than Return port only in end plate up to
30 l/min. Q = 30 l/min.
Port plate symb. A3/A4 not usable. Port plate symb. A3/A4 not usable.

s s

R Y P R Y P
R Y P B R Y P B

A A

R Y P R Y P

R P R P

445
28/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Relay link, LS block to OC block

Block II is connected in series to block I.

Block II must have own primary pressure limitation.
Open center pump control by means of block II.

A
1 0 2
R Y P

R Y P B

A
1 0 2

R Y P

R N P R P

Relay link with two LS blocks

Block II is connected in series to block I.

R Y P R Y P
R Y P B R Y P B

A A

R Y P R Y P

R N P R P

446
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 29/40

Functional description
Load sensing principle and converted to heat. With negative switching overlap
Load sensing, i.e. the variable load pressure, is detected and of the open center pump control, the excess pressure can be
fed to a pressure compensator or a pump controller. This prin- reduced.
ciple offers the following advantages over other systems:
2.2 Fixed pump with load sensing
1. Load-independent flow control The excess flow is not removed by means of the maximum
The pressure differential p at the variable throttle cross- pressure valve, but instead via a parallel pressure compensa-
section of the directional control valve is kept constant. As tor. This does not open at p1, but instead at the measured load
a result, load fluctuations are compensated and the flow or pressure p2 plus the spring precharge pressure, which deter-
cylinder speed is kept constant. This only applies for the mines the pressure difference p at the throttle. This configura-
cylinder with the highest load pressure which is accessed via tion corresponds to a 3-way flow control valve and ensures not
shuttle valves. only improved power balance, but also a consumer flow which
is independent of load fluctuations.
2. Power drops in the fine control range
Flow control through throttling inevitably has losses. These 2.3 Variable pump with load sensing
losses are minimized through the load sensing principle. The pressure compensator is a component of the pump con-
A comparison with other systems illustrates this advantage. trol system and controls the delivery according to the opening
cross section of the throttle. This adaptation occurs when the
2.1 Fixed pump with open center pump control load pressure is detected, i.e. neither excess pressure nor
The excess flow is removed via the pressure-relief valve. excess delivery occurs. Only the pressure difference p at the 2
Because its set value p1 exceeds the load pressure p2, there throttle, determined by the spring of the pressure compensator,
is excess pressure. Thus, there is excess power which is still generates a slight dissipation power. This system requires
shared between the throttle and the pressure-relief valve a variable pump with corresponding controller.

OC system LS system

F variable
variabel F variable
variabel

P2 Q2 Q2
P2
N
p p = const
variabel
variable
N P p p p
P2 p
P1 Q2 p
Q = const

Q Q

447
30/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Fixed pump with open center pump control N

p
P1
P2 Q2

N
p P2
N P
P1

QPU

Q
Q2 QPU

Fixed pump with load sensing

p
P1
Q2
P2
p
p P2
P

P2 p

QPU
Q
Q2 QPU

Variable pump with load sensing

p
Q2 P1
P2

p
p
P P2

P2 p

p
Q
Q2 QPUmax.

448
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 31/40

3. Power drops in the open center pump control For LS systems, the open center pump control occurs with
In standard systems with open center pump control by means minimal pressure directly in the port plate. With the p switch-
of the valve block, the open center pump control pressure is over (optional), this pressure can also be minimized.
dependent on the number of directional control valve segments.
OC system LS system

p p
4 4
3
3
2
1 2
1

Q Q

4. Actuation force at the valve spool hydraulic power. For LS systems, the actuating forces are 2
In standard systems, the flow forces, and thus the actua- smaller and remain constant.
ting forces at the valve spool, increase with the transmitted

OC system LS system

F F

p,Q p,Q

5. Control characteristic tion to the open center pump control must be more strongly
With conventional systems, the flow is load dependent. More- throttled. LS systems are characterized by a control charac-
over, the connection to the consumer at higher load pressures teristic which is independent of load pressure.
is opened only with a larger spool travel since the connec-
OC system LS system

Q Q
P1 ... P2
N

P1 P1, P2, P3
P2 N T
S
P3 P

P1 P2 P3 S S

449
32/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Port plate 2 1
Basic version  p = 3 bar P

In addition to the infeed and return ports of the valve block for
use with fixed pumps, the port plate contains a pressure com-
pensator as well as an adjustable pressure-relief valve. The R P
pressure compensator performs 3 functions:
In combination with the instantaneous throttle cross sections R
R
at the directional-control-valve pilot spools, it functions as
a 3-way flow regulator. The load pressure acts on the spring
side of the pressure compensator via control line Y. The P
spring determines the pressure differential at the throttle
cross sections of the directional control valves. This is held
constant by the pressure compensator (p = 3 bar).
3 4
When the control line is depressurized (all directional control
valves in the home position), the pressure compensator
opens due to the effect of the inflow pressure and releases
the open center pump control. R Y P
Together with the adjustable pilot valve, the pressure com-
pensator forms the main level of a pilot controlled pressure-
relief valve for ensuring the maximum operating pressure.

R P

Port plate
R Y P
with  p switchover
2.5 bar/7 bar

The flow at one throttling point is dependent on the pressure R P

differential according to Q ~  p
.
If the pressure differential is increased from p1 = 2.5 bar to
p2 = 7 bar, the nominal flow Q1 = 50 l/min can be increased to

Q2 = Q1

p2
p1

= 50 = 80 l/min
7
Q
Q2 80 p p==7 7bar
bar
2.5
mit
with pp switchover
Umschaltung
The increased pressure differential does, however, mean
increased power drops, which are to be avoided particularly
during open center pump control. 50 p p==3 3bar
bar
Grundausfhrung
Basic version
A switchover from p = 2.5 bar during open center pump
control to p = 7 bar with opened directional control valves
is realized with a special port plate. The switchover occurs via
a switching valve which is integrated in the pressure compen-
sator.
S
Q p

450
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 33/40

SB12-M directional control valve

Basic version B A 3
The basic version shown here is a double-acting directional
control valve with 2 service line ports A and B. The valve spool 2

1 is held in the middle position by means of a return spring 2.

In addition to the regular metering notches between ports R
P, A, B and R, the valve spool also controls the opening cross
section 3 of the inflow PPL, which, together with the pres-
sure compensator in the port plate, determines the speed of
PL PL
the consumer (flow control valve function). A shuttle valve for
1
the load tap 4 is arranged vertically with respect to the spool P
axis in the flange surface.
5 4
A check valve 5 in channel PL prevents an undesired lowering Y Y1 Y2
Y2 Y
of the load in the fine control range and during simultaneous
actuation of multiple directional control valves. Y1
Y1
Y2 Y
1 Valve spool WV2 WV1

2 Return spring
3 Opening cross section
4 Shuttle valve R Y P B 2
5 Check valve 1 0 2
A

Ports
P Pump
A, B Consumers
R Tank
Y Load Sensing (LS)

Left-hand version of SB12-M directional control valve,

mechanically actuated L30-A1 B

Shock valve with

Shock valve with
anticavitation function in B
R Y P B
anticavitation function
A
in A
1 0 2

Check valve Valve spool Bracket

451
34/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Directional control valve actuation types, auxiliary functions in the main axis

Mechanical actuation RM

Detent, mechanical release

Switch as changeover contact with plug

Electrical switch ES1 connections.
2 Type of protection IP 00 DIN 40050.
Various switching points can be set by
Load capacity, AC current:
turning the switch hub 1
10 A 250 V~, 125 V~/0.25 kW inductive.
and the electrical switch 2.
Load capacity, DC current:
Either 1 or 2 electrical switches may
Inductive loading at NN
be used.
0.5 A 125 V=, 0.25 A 250 V=, 5 A 30 V=*).
Ohms load: 5 A 30 V=**).
Adjust by turning 1
Electric engine, continuous current 5 A 30 V=**).
and 2. 1
Mechanical service life > 107 switching cycles.
*) Inductive switching capacity acc. to AN 3179.
**) Switch-on peak must not exceed 6x the speci-
fied continuous current.
Position sensor ES2

Conversion of the mechanical spool stroke

to a proportional electric signal
Supply voltage US = 4.75...16.5 V

Characteristic UA
following ideal zero-point [xUS]
calibration on the valve
Sensitivity: 6 %
Linearity: 1.5 % 75%
Measuring span
Messspanne

(relative to measuring span)

50%

25%

-s +s
100% 100%
Measuring
Messwegpath

Direct operated electromagnetic actuation EM

Solenoids mounted on both sides of the spool ends.

Actuation via joystick potentiometer

with integrated electronics or switching.

452
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 35/40

Auxiliary functions in main axis, actuation types

Pneumatic actuation PN
X1 X2
Auxiliary actuation with respect to hand lever.
Actuation via pneumatic switching valve.
pst min. 1 bar
pst max. 4 bar

X1 X2

Auxiliary functions of upper axis

Shock valves A1 B1 A2 B2

Shock valves, a combination of pressure

B
relief valve and anticavitation valve, are R
used to safeguard against peak pressures 1 0 2
A 2
caused by impacts or acceleration forces R R R
on the consumer. This auxiliary equipment
can be located in one or both service line R Y P
P
ports, e.g. A1 B1 .

Shock valves A1 B1 Flow resistance of the anticavitation valve A2 B2

p [bar]
p [bar]
320
16
300
280 14

260
12
240
220 10

200 8
180 A2 B2
160 6

140
4
120
100 2

80
60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
QQ nom [l/min]
Nenn
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
QQ [l/min]
nom [l/min]
Nenn

453
36/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Auxiliary functions of upper axis B

A
1 0 2

Hydraulically disengaging check valve

C1 D1 R Y P

The pilot pressure for disengaging is

generated by the pump. The pilot
controlled sealing cone is disengaged via
a spool and a plunger.
P
The area ratio of spool to pilot cone
is 8 : 1.
The opening pressures are calculated B
accordingly. 1 0 2

For an L20-D1 single-acting direc-

tional control valve, the sealing cone R Y P

can also be disengaged by the load

pressure. For this purpose, the spring
chamber of the sealing cone is disen-
gaged while lowering into the back flow.

Secondary pressure limiting E F 1 0 2

A

Adjustable pressure-relief valves in the

service line ports limit the inflow pressure R Y P

of the respective consumer to a value R

which is less than the pressure safe-
guarding of the directional control valve
block. It can be located in one or both
service line ports.
P

B A R Y P B
Pilot pressure inserts G H
A
1 0 2

Pilot pressure inserts are used on the

return side of double-acting consumers.
They act against the load pressure with a
permanently set value, thereby preventing
the load from advancing. The valves can
be located in one or both service line
ports.

454
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 37/40

Auxiliary functions of lower axis B

Metering restrictor in the P-channel

P
For limiting Qmax in independent
B
operation of the directional control valves
of the downstream block section.

R P

Metering restrictor in the inflow Q1

Q
For limiting Qmax in independent opera- Qmax
tion. It acts together with the pressure B

t
ns
A
compensator of the port plate as a

co
1 0 2
3-way flow control valve. During parallel

p=
operation, the highest load pressure is
reported to the pressure compensator. R Y P
May either be fixed or adjustable.

Q
2-way flow control valve in the inflow Q2
B Qmax
For limiting Qmax in parallel operation. A
1 0 2
Also effective if the load pressure of the
other consumers is higher.

Permanently set Qmax  34 l/min. R Y P

455
38/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Auxiliary functions of lower axis

2-way pressure compensator R Y P B

A
in the inflow Q3 1 0 2

(Individual pressure compensator)

For load-independent speed control over

the entire actuation range, even during
parallel operation.

Metering restrictor for Qmax limiting, fixed

or adjustable.

Metering restrictor adjustment Q3, overview

None Manual adjustment

Control shaft Adjustable restrictor

Subplate
R Y P
Subplate with LS switching valve for connection
of load sensing to return flow, check valve
switching valve for relief of check valve of
bordering directional control valve L20 D1 N
and manual lowering function.

456
SB12 RE 64 386/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 39/40

Notes

457
40/40 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics SB12 RE 64 386/02.12

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Controls set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
D-71701 Schwieberdingen The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Fax +49 (0) 711-811 26 78 01 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
[email protected] can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
www.boschrexroth.com/brm the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

458
 RE 66 130/02.12
Load-Sensing Control Block Replaces:
RE 66 130 / 03.09
SB23

SB23-M mechanical actuation

Nominal pressure: pNom = 250 bar

Flow: Qmax = 100 l/min

Table of contents Features

Content Page System
Features 1 Load sensing system
Modular system 2
Order code 3 Design
Mechanical actuation M: Plate construction
Specifications 4 Up to 10 directional control valve elements
Order details 57
Characteristics 8 Actuation types
Dimensions 912 Mechanical
SB23 block assembly 1314
Functional description 1522 Flow
EHR23-EM2 solenoid valves 23 Load-pressure compensated
High accuracy of repeatability
Low hysteresis

Pressure safeguarding
Port plate for fixed pump

Application areas
Agricultural machinery
Tractors

459
2/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

SB23 control block (example)

Load sensing system, for minimization of throttle losses 4
and load-independent flow control.
1 Port plate for variable pump
R Y P B

2 Single-action EHR23-EM2 solenoid valve, electrical pro- A

1 0 2 F
portional actuation, with 2-way pressure compensator
3
and secondary pressure-relief valve 1.2F
3 Double-action SB23-M directional control valve, 1.2
mechanical actuation, with 2-way pressure compensator
and mechanically actuated check valve R Y P B
4 End plate
A
1 0 2 F

3
1.2F

1.2

R Y P A

S H R1
2

R Y
Y P

Modular system

D2 C2D2

10

20

RM

30 3
RH

50 5

Q3 Q4 70 6

460
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 3/24

The desired model variant of a directional

control valve is described using this
order code.

Order code, e.g.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
L 70 D2 Q3 RH

5. Auxiliary function in the main axis

1. Circuit type
Without auxiliary function
L Load sensing

2. Spool symbol Detent engagement in the working positions,

RM
mechanical release
1 0 2
Double-action,
3
right-hand version Detent engagement in the working positions,
RH
0 2
hydraulic release
1
Double-action,
5
right-hand version
6. Customer ports 2
F 1 0 2
Double-action, Ports A and B, threaded version
6
right-hand version Model I:I DIN 3852, part 1
Model II: DIN 3852, part 3,
1 0 2
Single-action, corresponds to ISO 6149 (for O-ring seal)
10
left-hand version Ports A and B, flanged version

1 0 2 7. Accessories
Single-action,
20 Optionally with bracket (see page 7)
left-hand version
Optionally with cover plate (see page 7)
1 0 2
Double-action,
30
left-hand version

1 0 2
Double-action,
50
left-hand version

1 0 2 F
Double-action,
70
left-hand version

3. Auxiliary functions in the upper axis

Without auxiliary function

Check valve in B, mechanically actuated,

D2
optionally with thermo pressure-relief valve

Check valve in A and B, mechanically actuated,

C2D2
optionally with thermo pressure-relief valve

4. Auxiliary functions in the lower axis

Without auxiliary function

2-way pressure compensator in P, individual pressure

Q3
compensator, type of flow control selectable (see p. 22)

3-way pressure compensator in P, priority pressure

Q4
compensator, type of flow control selectable (see p. 22)

461
4/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Mechanical actuation
SB23-M

Specifications
General Valve blocks consisting of:
1 port plate, 1 end plate
1...10 directional control valve elements and shuttle valves
3 tie bolts
Mounting Thread in port plate and end plate (standard: M 8)
Line ports Internal thread, see order details
Installation position As desired
Port plate configuration Standard: left-hand version
Ambient temperature 30 C...+80 C
Hydraulic
Mineral oil based hydraulic oil acc. to DIN/ISO,
Pressure medium
other fluids, e.g. environmentally acceptable fluids, on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
12...2000 mm2/s permissible range for start up
Fluid temperature In operation +20 C...+90 C, briefly 30 C...+100 C
Filtration Oil contamination class 19/16 acc. to ISO/DIS 4406 or class 10 acc. to
NAS 1638, obtained with filter 25  751)
Operating pressure P pmax = 250 bar (pump side)
at port A, B pmax = 280 bar (consumer side)
R pmax = 20 bar (return side)
Leakage A, B  R QL  18 ml/min Without check valves in A, B
at p = 125 bar, = 33 mm2/s QL  2 ml/min With check valves in A, B
= 50 C
Flow port P  A, B Qmax = 100 l/min (Q3) Depending on control 6p of individual pressure compensator
Qmax = 90 l/min (Q4) Depending on control 6p of individual pressure compensator
Qmax > 100 l/min (without Q)
Mechanical
Spool strokes Symbol L10, L20: L5, L3, 7 mm
L3, L5, L30, L50: 7 mm
L6, L70: L50: L5, 7 + 5 mm
Actuating forces < 200 N in spool axis direction
Degree of protection IP 69 K
1) Retention rate for dirt particles > 25 m is 1:75, i.e. 98.67 %
Information on other directional control valve designs is available from our technical sales staff.

Mechanically actuated directional control valves can generally be combined with EHS directional control valves.
Consult with our technical sales staff to ensure functionality.

462
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 5/24

Order details

Symbol Comments Ports A, B Order number

L 30 Qmax > 100 l/min M 22 x 1.5 0 521 610 045
B
DIN 3852-1
A
1 0 2

R Y P

L 30-D2 Q3 Qmax = 80 l/min M 22 x 1.5 0 521 610 054

B Control shaft DIN 3852-1
A
1 0 2

R Y P
2
L 70-RH Qmax > 100 l/min M 22 x 1.5 0 521 610 044
DIN 3852-1
B
RH in 1, 2 p = 17515 bar
A
1 0 2 F

1.2

R Y P

L 70-Q3-RH Qmax = 80 l/min M 22 x 1.5 0 521 610 007

B Control shaft DIN 3852-3
(ISO 6149)
1 0 2 F
A
R in 1, 2, F

1.2.F
RH in 1, 2 p = 17515 bar

1.2

R Y P

L 70-D2 Q3-RH Qmax = 100 l/min M 22 x 1.5 R 917 005 614

B Manual adjustment DIN 3852-3
A
(ISO 6149)
1 0 2 F
R in 1, 2, F

1.2.F
RH in 1, 2 p = 17515 bar

1.2

R Y P

L 70-D2 Q4-RH Qmax = 100 l/min M 22 x 1.5 R 917 005 615

Manual adjustment DIN 3852-3
B
(ISO 6149)
1 0 2 F
A R in 1, 2, F
RH in 1, 2 p = 17515 bar
1.2.F

1.2

R Y P

463
6/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Flow graduation
as a function of control p

When using with fixed pump:

Q3-design directional control valve Port plate for fixed pump

Flow Control p of the individual pressure compensator Control p of the pressure compensator (recommended)
Q [l/min] [bar] [bar]
50 3 3/8.4
80 6 4/11
100 10 5/13.7

Q4-design directional control valve Port plate for fixed pump

Flow Control p of the individual pressure compensator Control p of the pressure compensator (recommended)
Q [l/min] [bar] [bar]
50 3 4/11
70 5.4 5.9/11.4

When using with variable pump:

Q3- or Q4-design directional control valve Port plate for variable pump

Flow Control p of the individual pressure compensator Without pressure compensator

Q [l/min] [bar]
50 3
80 6
100 10

Port plate for fixed pump

p Qmax
Symbol bar l/min Ports P, R Order number
A2 3/8.4 90 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 535
R1: M 22 x 1.5
plugged
R2: M 22 x 1.5
DIN 3852-1
4/11 120 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 680
R1: M 22 x 1.5
R Y P plugged
R2: M 27 x 2
DIN 3852-3
(ISO 6149)

Port plate for variable pump

A6 160 P: M 22 x 1.5 1 525 503 536
R: M 22 x 1.5
Y: M 12 x 1.5
DIN 3852-1

R Y P

464
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 7/24

End plate

E1 1 525 503 537

R Y P

E3 YW
YW: M12 x 1.5 1 525 503 776
plugged
DIN 3852-3
(ISO 6149)
R Y P

Accessories
2
Tie bolts Number of directional mm
control valves 1 115 1 523 502 075
2 155 1 525 502 076
3 195 1 525 502 077
M8 4 235 1 525 502 078
5 275 1 525 502 079
6 315 1 525 502 080
7 355 1 525 502 081
8 395 1 525 502 082
9 435 1 525 502 083
10 475 1 525 502 084
Pos.
Operating element and bracket *) 1 1 527 000 097
+
2
3 Bracket with wiping ring *) 1 1 527 000 098

Manual lever 3 1 522 027 306

2

Cover plate with wiping ring 4 1 527 010 326

4

*) Note: Only for left-hand versions of directional control valves

465
8/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Characteristics
= 35 mm2/s, = 50 C

Open center pump control p [bar]

16

14

12

10
)
(spring
8 p 6bar
R P p 5 b ar
6 p 4bar
p 3bar
4

2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
QNom [l/min]

Operation limits p [bar]

16
p  6 bar only with 14 L30
p changeover L50
L70
control - p

Control p on pressure compensator 12

Required

10

0
Flow resistance when directional control valve is 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
completely opened QNom [l/min]
Cylinder

p [bar]
16

14 Flow versus spool travel

B A
P A,B
12

P R
10 Q [l/min] Control - p = 8.4 bar
90
A R B A
8 80
B R 70
6 60
P R
50
4 40
30
2 20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
QNom [l/min] s [mm]
Cylinder
Ex.: L 70-C2 D2 Q3-RH Ex.: Directional control valve with Qmax = 80 l/min

466
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 9/24

Dimensions

SB23-M directional valve, mechanical actuation

310.5
M6 (2x) =5.5+1.8Nm F201 Position
depth 6.5 (2x) 577

16.4
28.50.2
17.2

8D11
88.7
3

max. 138.3
.
0 13

77
.4 J5 .3
3 0
14 .3
14 10.7 8
17.2

=67+22Nm
(1x)

27.5
6f6
13 13 8.4J513 86.7 14.2
(3x) 112.4 =67+22Nm

8h11
20
40

42.9 2
124.9
158.1
max. 279.7

467
10/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Dimensions
141.5
EHR23-EM2 solenoid valve 120.7
86.7
63
29.2 14

28.31

22.6
81.70.6 A
A
E
R

88.7
77
57.5
170.3

6.5
11.3
R1 Y

36
E
120.6

48.71.5
37

E
P

18.7
38.3 19.5
42 65.5
112.4
242.72
95
17.5

A
A

Port plate

R
M
8.5JS13
M 8 (3x)

138.70.4

P
11
50

Y
min. 11

11.5
50

M8 9.2
181

(2x) 10 44.2
270.4 73.2
38.50.5 86.7
42 94 18.7
48 155.5

468
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 11/24

Dimensions

End plate for directional valves with mechanical actuation

77
57.5
137

6.5
Sealing surface

50
M8 (2x) 10
min. 11

9.2 22.5
65.5
86.7
94 18.7
2
112.4
153.5

469
12/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Dimensions

Ex.: Control block,

left-hand version

279.3

82.8
170.3
13.5 38.3
34.9

19.5
11.5 9.2
42.5
40
201.5
41
29
38

110.7 103.2
9.3
230

470
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 13/24

Control block assembly

Preparation Assemble the shuttle valve of the control block segments RE 66130-10-R
according to chapter 5.5 Shuttle valve.
Assemble the sealing elements of the control block segments RE 66130-10-R
according to chapter 5.4 Flange surface sealing element repair.

If the control block segment flange surface shows punching marks which have
been processed by means of a whetstone, a spacer 4 must be threaded on the
tie rod screws ,  and .

Montage Anschlussplatte 1. Only use original M8 tie rods by Rexroth (property class 10.9).
2. Screw in the tie rod screws  to  manually to the ground by rotating them
clockwise.

Subplate assembly

Control block segment assembly Push the control block segments over the tie rods according to the specified
order, with the opposite flange O ring side pointing at the subplate.

Assembly of the EHR23-EM2 hitch control valve

Assembly of the SB23 control valve

471
14/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

End plate assembly 1. Push the end plate over the tie rods to the stop with the flange surface
pointing at the control block.
2. Screw the nuts without washers and/or locking washers onto the tie rod screws
manually by turning the clockwise.
3. Align the control block segments so that they face each other.
4. Preload the nuts with a torque of 5+1 Nm.
5. Tighten the nuts applying a torque according to table 2 by turning the clock-
wise. Tightening order     .

Tightening torques nut

Oiled Dry
 25.5+2.5 Nm 30+3 Nm
 25.5+2.5 Nm 30+3 Nm
 25.5+2.5 Nm 30+3 Nm

End plate assembly

472
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 15/24

Functional description
Load sensing principle and converted to heat. With negative switching overlap
Load sensing, i.e. the variable load pressure, is detected and of the open center pump control, the excess pressure can
fed to a pressure compensator or a pump controller. This be reduced.
principle offers the following advantages over other systems:
2.2 Fixed pump with load sensing
1. Load-independent flow control The excess flow is not removed by means of the maximum
The pressure differential p at the variable throttle cross- pressure valve, but instead via a parallel pressure compensator.
section of the directional control valve is kept constant. As This does not open at p1, but instead at the measured load
a result, load fluctuations are compensated and the flow or pressure p2 plus the spring precharge pressure, which deter-
cylinder speed is kept constant. This only applies for the mines the pressure difference p at the throttle. This arrange-
cylinder with the highest load pressure which is accessed ment corresponds to a 3-way flow control valve and ensures
via the shuttle valve. not only improved power balance, but also a consumer flow
which is independent of load fluctuations.
2. Power drops in the fine control range
Flow control through throttling inevitably has losses. These 2.3 Variable pump with load sensing
losses are minimized through the load sensing principle. The pressure compensator is a component of the pump control
A comparison with other systems illustrates this advantage. system and controls the flow according to the opening cross
section of the throttle. This adaptation occurs when the load
2.1 Fixed pump with open center pump control pressure is detected, i.e. neither excess pressure nor excess
The excess flow is removed via the pressure-relief valve. flow occurs. Only the pressure difference p at the throttle,
Because its set value p1 exceeds the load pressure p2, there determined by the spring of the pressure compensator, still
2
is excess pressure. Thus, there is excess power which is generates a slight power loss. This system requires a variable
shared between the throttle and the pressure-relief valve pump with corresponding controller.

OC system LS system

F variable F variable

P2 Q2 Q2
P2
N
p p = const
variable
N P p p p
P2 p
P1 Q2 p
Q = const

Q Q

473
16/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Fixed pump with open center pump control N

p
P1
P2 Q2

N
p P2
N P
P1

QPU

Q
Q2 QPU

Fixed pump with load sensing

p
P1
Q2
P2
p
p P2
P

P2 p

QPU
Q
Q2 QPU

Variable pump with load sensing

p
Q2 P1
P2

p
p
P P2

P2 p

p
Q
Q2 QPUmax.

474
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 17/24

3. Power drops in the open center pump control For LS systems, the open center pump control occurs with
In standard systems with open center pump control by means minimal pressure directly in the port plate. With the p switch-
of the valve block, the open center pump control pressure is over (optional), this pressure can also be minimized.
dependent on the number of directional control valve segments.
OC system LS system

p p
4 4
3
3
2
1 2
1

Q Q

4. Actuation force at the control spool mitted hydraulic power. For LS systems, the actuating forces 2
With conventional systems, the flow forces, and thus the are smaller and remain constant.
actuating forces at the control spool, increase with the trans-

OC system LS system

F F

p,Q p,Q

5. Characteristic curve tion to the open center pump control must be more strongly
With conventional systems, the flow is load dependent. More- throttled. LS systems are characterized by a control character-
over, the connection to the consumer at higher load pressures istic which is independent of load pressure.
is opened only with a larger spool travel since the connec-
OC system LS system

Q Q
P1 ... P2
N

P1 P1, P2, P3
P2 N T
S
P3 P

P1 P2 P3 S S

475
18/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Port plate, basic version The spring determines the pressure differential at the throttle
Ex.: p = 3 bar cross sections of the directional control valves. This is held
In addition to the infeed and return ports of the valve block constant by the pressure compensator (p = 3 bar).
for use with fixed pumps, the port plate contains a pressure When the control line is depressurized (all directional con-
compensator as well as an adjustable pressure-relief valve. trol valves in the home position), the pressure compensator
The pressure compensator performs 3 functions: opens due to the effect of the inlet pressure and releases
In combination with the instantaneous throttle cross sec- the open center pump control.
tions at the directional-control-valve pilot spools, it functions Together with the adjustable pilot valve, the pressure com-
as a 3-way flow regulator. The load pressure acts on the pensator forms the main level of a pilot controlled pressure-
spring side of the pressure compensator via control line Y. relief valve for ensuring the maximum operating pressure.

R Y P
P

R P

R
R

P
P R

Port plate with p switchover The increased pressure differential does, however, mean
Ex.: 4 bar/11 bar increased power drops, which are to be avoided particularly
The flow at one side of a throttle is dependent on the during open center pump control.
pressure differential according to Q ~  p. A switchover from p = 4 bar during open center pump control
If the pressure differential of p1 = 4 bar is increased to to p = 11 bar with opened directional control valves is realized
p2 = 11 bar, the nominal flow Q1 = 60 l/min can be with a special port plate. The switchover occurs via a switching
increased to valve which is integrated in the pressure compensator.

Q2 = Q1  p2
p1

Q2 = 60  11
4
= 100 l/min.

R Y P

Q
100 p = 11 bar
with p switchover
p = 4 bar
60
p = 4 bar
basic version

S P R
Q p p = 7 bar

476
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 19/24

SB23-M mechanical actuation

The version shown here is a double-acting directional control (flow control valve function). A shuttle valve for the load tap 4
valve with 2 service line ports A and B. The control spool 1 is arranged vertically with respect to the spool axis in the flange
is held in the middle position by means of a return spring 2. In surface. A check valve 5 in channel PL prevents an undesired
addition to the regular control edges between ports P, A, B and lowering of the load in the fine control range and during simul-
R, the control spool also controls the opening cross section 3 taneous actuation of multiple directional control valves.
of the inlet P  PL, which, together with the pressure compen-
sator in the port plate, determines the speed of the consumer

Left-hand version of the directional control valve

L 70-C2 D2 Q3-RH

B Check valve A
2
2

Bracket
1
Control spool

Flow regulator
5 Non-return valve Pressure compensator

Y2
Y2 Y

Y1
Y1
4 Shuttle valve Y
WV2 WV1

Directional control valve segments

477
20/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Left- and right-hand versions of directional control valves Left-hand version of control block
Detent unit
A left- or right-hand version of the directional control valve is
used depending on the location of the spool linkage on port B B B
side A or B.

Each of the two designs requires different directional control

valve segments, e.g. L70... left-hand version
L6... right-hand version.
P A A A
The port plate and end plate are identical for both versions.
Spool linkage
Note AP WV1 WV2 WV3 EP
A left-hand version of a directional control valve cannot be
installed in place of a right-hand version or vice versa. Right-hand version of control block

Spool linkage
AP = Port plate B B B
WV1 = Directional control valve segment 1
WV2 = Directional control valve segment 2
WV3 = Directional control valve segment 3
EP = End plate

P A A A
Detent unit

AP WV1 WV2 WV3 EP

Left-hand version of directional control valve, B

e.g. L 70-C2 D2 Q3-RH
A
1 0 2 F

When the pilot spool is pulled out, a connection is established

from P  B. 1.2.F

1.2

R Y P

B A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12

13 14 15 16 17

478
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 21/24

Right-hand version of directional control valve, B

e.g. L 6-C2-D2 Q3-RH
A
F 1 0 2

When the pilot spool is pressed in, a connection is

established from P  B. 1.2.F

1.2

R Y P
B A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 11

2
13 14 15 16 17

2-way pressure compensator in the inlet Q3 3-way pressure compensator in the inlet Q4
(individual pressure compensator) (priority pressure compensator)

B B

A A
1 0 2 1 0 2

R Y P R Y P

For further information, see product-specific instructions RE 66 130-B2 (Chapter 5.4)

Function and matching of pressure compensators

B A
Check valves, mechanical C2 D2

The pilot pressure for disengaging is generated by the pump.

The pilot-controlled sealing cone is disengaged by a chamfer
on the pilot spool and a plunger.

Check valves can be located in port B D2 or in ports A and B

C2 D2 .

Optionally with thermo pressure-relief valve

Purpose: Relieving the built-up volume of oil between the
mechanical check valve and the socket coupling in
the event of heating.
Note: Testing in the vehicle is recommended.

479
22/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Flow control Q3 Q4

17 17

None Control shaft

17 17

Manual adjustment (0...540) Manual adjustment with stop (0...328)

Detent, mechanical release RM

SB 23/4

Detent, hydraulic release RH

SB 23/4

Detent is possible in working positions 1 and 2 and/or in For further information, see product-specific instructions
switch position F. RE 66 130-B2 (Chapter 5.2)
The standard detent pressure for the hydraulic release is Valves with mechanical actuation
17515 bar.

480
SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12 Hydraulics l Bosch Rexroth AG 23/24

Electronic-hydraulic hitch control

EHR23-EM2
For further technical information,
see technical data sheet RE 66 125 Solenoid Valves

Symb. 1 Symb. 2
1 2-way pressure compensator
5 A A
4 4
5 2 Lifting module
2 2
3
S H
R1
S 3 H
R1 3 Lowering module

1 1 4 Check valve
6 6

R Y P R Y P X RX 5 Secondary pressure-relief valve

6 Shuttle valve
Symb. 3 Symb. 4
2
5 A SB23 control blocks can generally be combined
4 4
A 5
2
with mechanically actuated SB23-M directional
2 3
S H S H
valves, pilot-controlled electrohydraulically actuated
3 R1 A1 SB23-EHS directional valves and electronic/hydrau-
1 1
lic EHR23-EM2 hitch control valves.
6 6
Consult with our technical sales staff to ensure
R Y P X RX R Y P R1
functionality.
Note: Subject to change.

Specifications
Design Proportional valve, single-acting, in segment design
Mounting Thread in port plate and end plate of the valve block (standard: M 8)
Line ports Internal thread
Installation position Axis ZZ, max. 30 deviation from horizontal
Ambient temperature 30 C...+80 C
Pressure medium Mineral oil based hydraulic oils acc. to DIN/ISO,
other fluids, e.g. environmentally acceptable fluids, on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
12...2000 mm2/s permissible range for start up
Fluid temperature In operation +20 C...+90 C, briefly 30 C...+100 C
Filtration Oil contamination class 19/16 acc. to ISO/DIS 4406 or class 10 acc. to
NAS 1638, obtained with filter 25  75 1)
Permissible peak pressure P, Y: 250 bar; R1: 5 bar, however less than load pressure, R: 30 bar
Nominal flow QSN, QHN (see table)
Load drop at port A Max. 4 cm3 per min at 125 bar, viscosity 35 mm2/s
Type of actuation Direct spool actuation by 12 V proportional solenoids, Imax. 3.35 A
Electrical connections Plug connection, 2-pin
Degree of protection IP 69 K (depending on solenoid mating connector)
1) Retention rate for dirt particles > 25 m is 1:75, i.e. 98.67 %

Order No. Line ports Lower Lift DBV Return EHS- Symbol
A R1 Threaded QSN QHN pLSV boreholes (see above)
version *) [l/min] [l/min] [bar] (X, RX)
R 917 006 918 M 22 x 1.5 M 22 x 1.5 I 65 80 220+20 external none 1
*) Version I: DIN 3852, part 1
Version II: DIN 3852, part 3, corresponds to ISO 6149 (for O-ring seal)

481
24/24 Bosch Rexroth AG l Hydraulics SB23 l RE 66 130/02.12

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Controls set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
D-71701 Schwieberdingen The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Fax +49 (0) 711-811 5 11 69 23 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
[email protected] can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
www.boschrexroth.com/brm the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

482
Control Block SB23-EHS1 RE 66 134/04.12
Replace:
1/36

RE 66 134/11.11

SB23-EHS1

with on-board-electronics OBE,

pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation

Nominal pressure: pnom. = 250 bar

Flow rate: Qmax = 100 l/min

Table of contents Features

Content Page System
Features 1 Load-independent flow control
Description 2 Load Sensing system
Technical data 4 Design
Ordering code 6 Port plate
Segment design (up to 5 valve segments)
Order details 7
End plate
Unit dimensions 10
Type of actuation
Installation position 19
Pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation
Hydraulic functions 20
Flow rate
Electronic functions 26
Load-pressure compensated
Installing the control block 32 High repeat accuracy
Commissioning notes 34 Low hysteresis
Additional documents 34 Pressure safeguarding
Optionally included in port plate
Application areas
Tractor applications

483
2/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Description
Purely electrically controlled, LS directional valve:

Double-acting with 4 switch positions Optional flange surface for customer-specific coupling housing
Mechanically operated check valve in B, optional in A Check valves in Open center without load pressure opened
2-way individual pressure compensator in inlet all the way

Control block SB23-EHS1

YW X X X3
8

Consisting of: DMV

FP

Port plate P2

R Y P X Rx B
1...5 valve segments A

3 tie bolts 7 a b F 2 0 1

End plate

The following combination is shown as an example:

1 Port plate R Y P X Rx B

2 Control valve, single-action, electrical proportional A

actuation with 2-way pressure compensator, with a b F 2 0 1

6
secondary pressure relief valve
3 Intermediate plate
4 7 Directional valve, double-action, with 2-way pressure
compensator, with check valves, hydraulically actuated R Y P X Rx B
8 End plate with coarse and fine filter and pilot oil A
preparation 5 a b F 2 0 1

Ports
P Pump R Y P X Rx
B

A, B Consumers A

a b F 2 0 1
X Pilot oil supply 4
Rx Pilot oil return

Y (LS)-signal
R Return reservoir R
R Y P X Rx

3 B

LS

B
R Y P X Rx

A
A1
B
a b F 2 0 1
2
A
A2

P1

R Y P

18bar
R Y P X Rx 1 X RE

0 1 2

Circuit diagram: SB23-EHS1 with 2 check valves, X W1

Thermo PRV and manual auxiliary actuation R

X W2

484
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/36

SB23-EHS1 with 2 check valves, Thermo-DBV and manual auxiliary actuation

Function, cut
8 9 1 2 1 2 3

The SB23-EHS1 is a pilot-controlled electrohydraulically

actuated directional valve with 4 settings. The main spool is
controlled via a 4/3 pilot valve which pressurizes the chambers
for moving the main spool. The main spool is guided back by
means of a displacement pick-up on the control electronics.
Using the current of the pilot valve, the electronics then
regulate the position of the main spool as a function of the
target value. The mechanically controlled check valves in the
two work ports act as non-return valves in the inlet. Load
compensation in the inflow occurs via the individual pressure
compensators. The electronics are for position control and
for communicating with the CAN bus. They are equipped with
diagnostic functions.

11 7 4 6 5 10

SB23-EHS1 with 1 check valve

1 Check valves 5 Individual pressure compensator 9 Pilot valve

2 Work ports 6 Main spool 10 Cover or cover with manual
3 Return springs 7 Electronics unit auxiliary actuation
4 Chamber 8 Displacement pick-up 11 CAN control

485
4/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation

SB23-EHS1

Technical data (Please contact us if the device is to be used outside of the specified values!)
General Control blocks consisting of:
1 port plate, 1 end plate
1...5 valve segments
3 tie bolts
Fasteners Thread in port plate and end plate (standard: M 6)
Line ports Screw-in thread or flange port, see unit dimensions
Installation position see page 19
Ambient temperature 35 C...+110 C, (storage temperature 3 h, 125 C)
Hydraulic
Permissible pressure fluids Hydraulic oils on mineral oil base according to DIN 51 524
HLP according to DIN 51524
HVLP 32/46/68 hydraulic oils according to DIN 51 524
HD SAE 10 W 40
HETG Fuchs Plantohyd 40/Fragol TR46
HEPG Fuchs Renolin PG
HEES Fuchs Plantosyns Super S40/Fragol Hydraulic HE 15 + 46
Engine oils according to API-C
Engine oils according to API-CD
Engine oils according to API-CF
Dye Renolin FST 101
Additional oil types such as multi-functional oils STOU/UTTO are available
on request.
Viscosity 7... 500 mm2/s permissible range
20... 100 mm2/s recommended range
8000 mm2/s range permissible for start
Fluid temperature in operation +35 C...+110 C permissible range
35 C range permissible for start
Oil cleanliness Oil contamination class 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406: 1999 or class
10A/10B/9C according to SAE AS 4059
Operating pressure at port: P pmax = 250 bar (pump side)
A, B pmax = 250 bar (consumer side)
R, Rx pmax = 20 bar (return side)
X pmax = 50 bar
Leakage A, B A R QL % 2 ml/min with check valves in A, B
with p = 125 bar, v = 33 mm2/s QL % 60 ml/min without check valve in A
= 50 C
Nominal oil flow port P A A, B Qnom = 100 l/min
A, B A R Qmax = 120 l/min
Thermo PRV Optionally as cartridges in work port side
Cracking pressure at 150 ml/min, 33 mm2/s: 257...293 bar
Closing pressure: > 215 bar
Neutral recirculation pressure for opening 6.5 bar for QNom = 100 l/min (1 check valve)
the IDW from the check function from P A R 4 bar for QNom = 80 l/min (1 check valve)
Spring cap with manual auxiliary actuation Active, bidirectional mechanical actuation of the main spool
Actuation torques (see project drawing)

486
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 5/36

Technical data (continued)

Electrohydraulic
Relative actuated time 100% ED to +110 C
Type of protection IPX6, IPX9K (with plugged-in CAN connector)
Plug connection Compact connector or Jet connector
Electrical power input pmax = 17 W for 12-V system
Solenoid voltage 12 V vehicle battery voltage ISO 16750-2: Code C, (24 V on request)
Response time for 100% deflection See response time/dynamics
Pilot pressure 18 bar 1, referenced to return pressure
Pilot oil flow Per valve segment 4.5 l/min short-term at max. actuating speed,
in neutral 0.25 l/min, in Lift/Lower control position 0.5 l/min
Response time/dynamics Step function: 0100% from position 0 to position 1 or 2: approx. 50 ms
(incl. dead time) 0 to position F: approx. 70 ms
50 C, 30 mm2/s, VG46, mean value of the valve
Response time vs. viscosity, see Z 206 803 930
EHS1 interface description
Hysteresis with respect to oil flow:
typically approx. 1% of Qmax (in oil flow range up to 80% of Qmax)
Other technical data: See Z 206 803 930 EHS1 interface description
2

487
6/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

This type key describes the desired design variant

of a SB23 directional valve and EHR23 control valve.

Type key, e.g. SB23

S B 2 3 0 0 L 7 0 E H S C C 2 D 2 Q 3

Additional function in the lower axis

no pressure compensator
Q 3 2-way individual pressure
compensator

Additional function in service line port A optional

D 2 mechanically actuated check valve

Additional function in service line port A B

C 2 mechanically actuated check valve

Target value signal

C CAN signal
P PWM on request

Control type E H S pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation

Spool symbol L 7 0 4 positions (Lift Neutral Lower Open center)

Version status
1 EHS1 control unit

Series status
0 First generation

Valve type - series

S B 2 3 SB23

488
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 7/36

Order details
SB23-EHS1 Flow rate Q Ports/design Comments Part number

B
100 l/min A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / I R917007116
A

a b F 2 0 1

80 l/min Coupling flange M 6 R917007117

R Y P X Rx

B
100 l/min A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / I Manual auxiliary R917007219 *)
actuation of the
A thermo PRV
2
F 2 0 1
main spool
a b

R Y P X Rx

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

489
8/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Order details (continued)

SBx3-EHS1 port plate for variable pump Ports/ design Comments Part number
P1 = M27x2/ III With PRV; R917007235
P2 = M27x2/ III P2 port M27x2 plugged;
P3 = M10x1/ I P3 port, M10x1 open;
a
R1 = M33x2/ III Screw-in thread for tie bolts;
Y = M12x1.5 securing foot with M8 thread,
Dr RV 1527410132 screwed into
Y port

R1 Y P1 P2 P3

SBx3-EHS1 port plate for fixed pump

P = M22x1.5/ II With PRV R917007203
R1 = M27x2/ II
R2 = M27x2/ II
N1 = M22x1.5/ II

R2 a 6p = 4 bar in position 0
6p = 11 bar in position 1 or 2

R1 P N1

SBx3-EHS1 end plate use for variable pump

X X: M12x1.5/ III Pilot pressure 18 bar R917007578
(fixed setting)
Pilot pressure port: X-port
plugged; with sintered metal
filter in P line;

R Y P X Rx

X2 X: 9/16-18 UNF; Pilot pressure 18 bar R917005923

FX ISO 11926 (fixed setting)
P: M12x1.5/ III Pilot pressure port: X-port
DMV
plugged; with sintered metal
filter in P line; fine filter
PP
P

R Y P X Rx

SBx3-EHS1 end plate use for fixed pump

X2 X: M10x1/ I Pilot pressure 18 bar, switchable R917007249
FX 4.5 bar
P: M22x1.5/ III Pilot pressure port:
X port plugged; with sintered
metal filter in P line; fine filter
XNA
DMV

FP
P

R Y P X Rx

SBx3-EHS1 intermediate plate

Disc width: L = 13 mm R917005302
Disc width: L = 15 mm R917006220
Disc width: L = 22 mm R917007130
Disc width: L = 16 mm R917007583
R Y P X Rx

490
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 9/36

Threaded ports design

Version I
DIN 3852-1, DIN 3852-2
For sealing ring seal

Version II
ISO 11926-1
For O-ring seal

Version III
EN ISO 6149-1
Without marking on female thread
For O-Ring seal

491
10/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Unit dimensions
SB23-EHS1

Tie bolts Installing the control block in the machine.

When using R917007235, R917002924; R917007203
port plate(s) The SB23-EHS1 control block, consisting of:
End plate(s) R917007578, R917005923 Port plate
Valve segments Tie bolts ordering no. Tie bolt length 1...5 valve segments
length L [mm] [mm]
3 tie bolts
from to
End plate
40 42 1 523 502 096 131
44 44 R 917 000 013 133
80 80 1 523 502 097 171 Port plate, valve segments and end plates are secured during
control block installation by tie bolts.
91 98 R 917 000 538 187
99 106 1 523 502 087 195 The control block is fixed to the port- and/or end plate in the
machine.
107 114 R 917 005 260 203
115 122 1 523 502 098 211 The number of fasteners and the number of tie bolts depend
on the number of valve segments and the expected vibrational
128 133 1 523 502 125 223
load in the machine. At least 3 tie bolts are needed to secure
140 145 1 523 502 088 235
a control block.
146 149 R 917 005 261 239
156 161 1 523 502 099 251
162 167 R 917 003 101 257
168 172 R 917 005 949 263
174 178 R 917 004 775 269
180 184 1 523 502 089 275
196 200 1 523 502 100 291
209 212 1 523 502 129 304
215 218 R 917 005 950 310
220 223 1 523 502 090 315 15
236 239 1 523 502 101 331
249 251 1 523 502 130 344
260 262 1 523 502 091 355
AP L [mm] EP
276 278 1 523 502 102 371
Valve segments

492
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 11/36

Unit dimensions
SB23-EHS1
R917007116 134.1

86.7
232.5 +1
1 22.75 +0.5
0.5 65.5
86.7
38.3 24.3 JS12
=145+15 Nm =6.5 0.5 Nm
8.4 (3x)
11.4 JS13 (2x)
B A
2
A B
Rx Rx
R
2 1
R X

88.7
X

77

70.3
57.5
4

41.7
Y Y

1.5
48.5+1.5
P
50

6.5
6.5

11.3
69.65 =67+22 Nm 3
33 24.3 JS12
112.4 1 5 3
24.3 JS12

*110.7

*28.7
2

MNR: ... ..w..

SN: ...
40

CNR: ...
SYN: ...
Made in ...
20

SB23-EHS1
R917007117
134.1

86.7
232.5 +1
1 22.75 +0.5
0.5 65.5
86.7
38.3 24.3 JS12
=145+15 Nm =6.5 0.5 Nm
8.4 (3x)
11.4 JS13 (2x)
B A
2
A B
Rx Rx
R
2 1
R X
88.7

X
77

70.3
57.5

4
41.7

Y Y
1.5
48.5+1.5

P
50

P
6.5
6.5

11.3

69.65 =67+22 Nm 3
33 24.3 JS12
112.4 1 5 3
24.3 JS12

*110.7

*28.7

19.5 JS12
5.5

Made in ...
SYN: ...
CNR: ...
29

40

SN: ...
..w.. MNR: ...

21.5 JS12 31.9

106 M6, min. 8.7 tief (4x)

=11+1 Nm
M6, min. 8.7 deep (4x)
1 Stamped 4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents
2 O-ring included in the delivery contents 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
3 Pull off protective cap before connecting 6 M22x1.5 version 1, see page 9

493
12/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Unit dimensions
SB23-EHS1
R917007219 *)
134.1

86.7
232.5 +1
1 68.5+0.5
0.5
65.5
86.7
48 38.3 24.3 JS12
8.4 (3x)
11.4 JS13 (2x)
B A
2
A B
Rx Rx

88.7
R R X

70.3
77
6.5

57.5
4

41.7
35.8
Y Y
1.5
48.5+1.5
50

P P

6.5
11.3
69.65 =67+22 Nm 24.3 JS12
33
112.4
1 5 3
24.3 JS12

*110.7

60.5
*28.7
20

MNR: ... ..w..

SN: ...
40

CNR: ...
SYN: ...
Made in ...

6 =67+22 Nm

1 Stamped 4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents

2 O-ring included in the delivery contents 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
3 Pull off protective cap before connecting 6 M22 x 1.5 version 1

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

494
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 13/36

Unit dimensions
Port plate for variable pump
R917007235

R1 P2 P3 P1

R P

8.5 JS13
Y
M 8(3x)

50
Y

11
138.7
max. 13
min. 11

11.3

50
M10 9.2
(2x)
10 33.3
27 +0.4
2
38.3
38.5+0.5 73.2
42 86.7

48 94 20.2

155.5

24
7920 Germany
Made in

P2

40.2

134.1

112.4 11

86.7

65.5

38.3
12
.3 JS

1
11.3
24

6.5

12
41.7

JS M8
.3
57.5

24 12 (3x)
70.3

JS
3
77

2 4.

11.4 JS13 2

1 Seal rings are included in the delivery contents

2 Stamped

495
14/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Unit dimensions
Port plate for fixed pump
R917007203

40
38 +1(3x)

20 0.2
27+4(3x)

8.4 +1.1(3x)

M8 (3x)
1
N1
P N
R
R1
0.2

made in Germany
M

9.5 HB
67.2

Y W Rz16
max. 18
min. 11

0.2
682 5 (2x)*

28.5
M8 86.7 9 0.4 20 0.2
2x
10 112.4

94 9.2

144 0.2 14.7 0.1

P
0.2
20

R2 36 0.2

0.2
110.7

134.1

112.4

86.7

65.5
38.3

3
11.3

JS12
24.3
6.5

12

12
JS
41.7

.3 12
57,5

JS
24
0.2
70.3

4.3
77

2
88.5

11.4 JS13
2

1 Protective cap (sealable)

2 Stamped
3 Seal rings are included in the delivery contents

496
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 15/36

Unit dimensions
End plate for variable pump
R917007578

94
9.2
M8x13 deep (2x)
usable thread

103.4
35.4 1.5
25
40.2 +1.5
1.5

2
93.5

=11+3.7 Nm
88.7

70.3
77
28.5

9.7
37

50

23 134.1
86.7
48
112.4

28.4

155

497
16/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Unit dimensions
End plate for variable pump
R917005923

103.2
M10x15 deep (2x)
usable thread 9.2
8

103.4
35.4 1.5

max. 94
88.7
70.3

12.5
70.3
77
1
41.7

48.5
28.5
6.5
1

50
11.3
45

38.3 28.4 1.4

48 90
69 134.1
86.7

112.4

119 1.5

134.1

max. 212

498
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 17/36

Unit dimensions
End plate for fixed pump
R917007249

0.2
103.2
M8x13 deep (2x)
0.2

9.2 0.2
usable thread
8

47.5 103.4

35.4 1.5

max. 164
0.2
120.7

2
88.7
70.3

12.5
70.3
77
1

57.5
41.7

49.9
27.5

9.6

50
11.3

38.3 28.4 48 90
65,5 134.1
86.7

112.4

134.1

211,4

499
18/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Unit dimensions
Intermediate plate
R917005302 (L = 13 mm)
R917006220 (L = 15 mm)
R917007130 (L = 22 mm)
R917007583 (L = 16 mm)

158.2
134.1

112.4
86.7

14.2 +0.4 65.5

65.5 +0.1
0.1 ( 3)

38.3
-1 -1
-2 2.2 11.4 JS13 -2 L
13
JS
.3
x)
24
(4

13
JS
13

77
.3

70.3

0.5
JS

XXXX
24
(4x)
57.5
.3

113
x)
24

41.7
(4

33.5
10
11.3

6.5

27
13

8.4JS13(3x)
JS
.3

1
x)
24
(4

1 Stamped

500
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 19/36

Installation position
SB23-EHS1 control valve different installation positions *)

Installation Graphical depiction, permissible rotation around axis vertical to image axis
position
1
+50 +100
10 10

2 +50 +50
10 10

MNR: ... ..w..

SN: ...

CNR: ...
SYN: ...
Made in ...

2
3 +50 +10
10 10

4 +10 +10
20 20
Made in ...
SYN: ...
CNR: ...

SN: ...
MNR: ...
..w..

5 *) The permissible installation positions

+10 +10
50 10
are can be found in the respective,
valid project drawings

501
20/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Installation Graphical depiction, permissible rotation around axis vertical to image axis
position
6 +10 +10
*) The permissible installation positions
10 10 are can be found in the respective,
valid project drawings

Hydraulic functions
Standard Optional
Check valve for oil flow from B to R AR
Work ports / threaded ports: M22x1,5 / DIN 3852, sealing ring seal
M22x1.5 / ISO 6149, O-ring seal quick-release couplings:
flange surface for coupling housing with M6 fixing thread M6
Spring cap Manual auxiliary actuation
Main spool with 4 switch positions Various oil flows
2-way individual pressure compensator
Thermo PRV:
Integrated in check valve for the ports A and B. It prevents the
development of excessive pressure which could otherwise arise
due to thermal expansion in a confined space.
Position sensor for position control of the main spool and
for diagnostic purposes

a b F 2 0 1

R Y P X Rx

Circuit diagram: SB23-EHS1 with 2 check valves,

Thermo PRV and manual auxiliary actuation

502
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 21/36

Manual auxiliary actuation for SB23-EHS1

directional valve spool with 2 check valves (optional)
Mechanical manual actuation
Operated with standard tools (WAF 13 hexagon)
Interlock for directional valve spool not possible
The configuration of the valves in the tractor must be
selected so that dirt cannot accumulate on the positioning
shaft that could cause the main spool to seize.

F 3 1 = Lift
2 2 = Lower
O = Neutral
0 F = Float/Open center

2
1

1 When painting, cover the gaps on both sides. Alternatively, actuate mechanically several times after painting
2 Position indicator, milled corner of hexagon
3 WAF 13, max. size 6.5 mm, actuation torque max. 10.5 Nm permissible

503
22/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Pilot oil supply

Not a component of the directional valve (block or system
component)

Required pilot oil flow per SB23 segment:

Values for viscosity 30 mm2/s:
In Neutral: typical 250 ml/min, maximum 360 ml/min
In Lift or Lower: typical 500 ml/min, maximum 820 ml/min
In Open center: typical 250 ml/min, maximum 400 ml/min
During a jump function (Lift or Lower): typical 3.5 l/min
During a jump function (Open center): typical 4.5 l/min

Requirement peaks for pilot oil can be limited by preventing

simultaneous activation of several consumers (delay by response
time lag + safety margin) or by programming into the time ramp.

Pilot pressure referencing

Make sure that pilot pressure pX is referenced to the highest return
pressure of all SB23/EHR33 valves (pX absolute = pX + pR max).

Pilot pressure 20

px = 181 bar (response point at pilot oil flow 0.8 to 1.2 l/min) 18
16

14
Pilot pressure [bar]

12

10
8

6
4 maximum
maximal
minimal
minimum
2 Einstellwert
Setting
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pilot oil flow [l/min]

The pilot pressure acc. to the diagram must be available

solely to the SB23 valves as full valve performance is not
otherwise ensured.

Pilot oil fine filter

Pay close attention to oil cleanliness, particularly with
respect to the pilot oil supply; use an additional pilot oil
fine filter if necessary.

504
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 23/36

Oil flow rate

Standard valve oil flow variants:

Oil flow Nom. oil flow Tolerance Max. oil flow

QP-A 80 l/min 4 l/min
QA-R 100 l/min Qmax, A-R 120 l/min
QP-B 80 l/min 4 l/min
QB-R 100 l/min Qmax, B-R 120 l/min

Oil flow Nom. oil flow Tolerance Max. oil flow

QP-A 100 l/min 5 l/min
QA-R 100 l/min Qmax, A-R 120 l/min
QP-B 100 l/min 5 l/min
5
QB-R 100 l/min Qmax, B-R 120 l/min
4,5

4
Oil flow tolerance

Flow rate tolerance [l/min]

3,5
The tolerance characteristics apply for inflow oil flow for
3
standard variants with inflow calibration. If return flow calibra-
tion is used, greater tolerances for the flow rate of the inflow 2,5
oil will be generated at low flow rates for driving loads. 2
Other tolerances may occur for special versions. 1,5 2
1
Hysteresis 0,5
Volumenstrom
Flow Qmax
rate Qmax 80 100 l/min
l/min
Volumenstrom
Flow Qmax
rate Qmax 100 80 l/min
l/min
In respect of flow rate: typical approx. 1 % Qmax 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
(for flow rates up to 80 % Qmax), maximum 2 % Qmax
Flow rate [l/min]

Oil flow resolution

The tolerance characteristics apply for standard variants (inflow
calibration). Other tolerances may occur for special versions.

1,4
Other tolerances may occur for special slide versions.
1,2
Oil flow resolution [l/min]

1,0

0,8

0,6

0,4 lstromauflsung
Oil Qmax
flow resolution Q 100l/min
l/minmax
max
max 100
lstromauflsung
Oil Qmax
flow resolution Q 100l/min
max 100 l/minTyp.
typ
0,2 lstromauflsung
Oil Qmax
flow resolution Qmax 80
80 l/min
l/min max
max
lstromauflsung
Oil Qmax
flow resolution Q 80l/min
max 80 l/minTyp.
typ
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flow rate [l/min]

505
24/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Differential pressure (typical values)

SB23-EHS1, 1 check valve

20 20

18 YB 18 YA
PB Lift PA Lower
16 AR BR
16

14 14
Pressure drop [bar]

Pressure drop [bar]

12 12

10 10

8 8

6 6

4 4

2 2

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Pump oil flow rate [l/min] Pump oil flow rate [l/min]

20

18 Open centerAA R
Freigang R
Open centerBB R
Freigang R
16

14
Pressure drop [bar]

12

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Pump oil flow rate [l/min]

Temperature drift in oil flow

The temperature-dependence of the oil flow is electronically compensated for in the temperature range 30 C to 90 C

Pressure drift in oil flow

Pressure drift of the oil flow (pressure increase due to increased pressure in parallel operation) is compensated for by the
individual pressure balance.

506
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 25/36

SB23-EHS1, 2 check valves

20 20

18 YB 18 YA
PB Lift PA Lower
AR BR
16 16

14 14
Pressure drop [bar]

Pressure drop [bar]

12 12

10 10

8 8

6 6

4 4

2 2

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Pump oil flow rate [l/min] Pump oil flow rate [l/min]

20

Open centerAA R
Freigang
18
Open centerBB R
Freigang
2
16

14
Pressure drop [bar]

12

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Pump oil flow rate [l/min]

Internal Leakage Typical leakage process with check valve:

Leakage service line port in the basic version with 1 SPV

B to R in position 0 3.5 140

2 ml/min (at p = 125 bar, = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C, tW = 15 s, 3 120

tM = 60 s) Pressure [bar]
Pressure [bar], temperature [C]

2.5 V [ml] 100

Temperature [C]
Leakage [ml] / [ml/min]

A to R in position 0 Q [ml/min]
2 80
at p = 125 bar, = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C
Standard: 60 ml/min 1.5 60

A to R in position 2 (check function)

1 40
Typical: 150 ml/min, Max.: 300 ml/min
0.5 20

Additional leakage values are available on request. 0 0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Measuring time tM Time [min]

Leakage service line port for variants with optional function
SPV at A + B Leakage P-R in various switch positions
A, B to R in position 0 P to R (at p = 200 bar, = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C)
2 ml/min (at p = 125 bar, = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C, in position 0: typical: 60 ml/min, maximum: 250 ml/min
tW = 15 s, tM = 60 s) in position 1, 2: typical: 100 ml/min, maximum: 250 ml/min
in position F: typical: 60 ml/min, maximum: 250 ml/min
Additional leakage values are available on request.
Higher values may occur for custom slide variants.

507
26/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Response time / dynamics

10000
Dead timeNeutral-Freigang
Totzeit Neutral-Open center
Jump function Lift / Lower: typical 45 ms, maximum 70 ms Actuating
Stellzeittime Neutral-Open center
Neutral-Freigang
Dead timeNeutral-Senken
Totzeit Neutral-Lower
Jump function (Open center): typical 70 ms, maximum 100 ms Actuating
Stellzeit time Neutral-Lower
Neutral-Senken
Dead timeNeutral-Heben
Totzeit Neutral-Lift
Cutoff frequency with respect to spool stroke approx. 17 Hz 1000 Actuating
Stellzeit time Neutral-Lift
Neutral-Heben
for change in target value from 0 to 100 %

[min]
Zeit [ms]
Jump function: see characteristic curve

Time
100

10
10 100 1000 10000
Viscosity [mm2/s]

Electronic functions
Standard Optional
CAN control PWM (pulse-width-modulated voltage signal) on request

General electrical details

Supply voltage Standard on 12-V vehicle battery voltage; on request: 24 V
Overvoltage resistance Power supply: 48 V, duration 5 min
Polarity reversal protection Test voltage 48 V, duration 5 min
Protection against short circuit Protection against short circuit against 36 V, against ground,
as well as between the individual inputs and outputs.
Degree of protection IP69K (electronics), with mating connector plugged in
EMI immunity ISO 11452-2
EMC irradiation measurement 0.2 MHz to 1000 MHz, frequency according to
ISO 14982: 1998
Reference limit values:
TEM cell 100 V/m
Stripline 150 V/m
EMI transmission ISO 14982: 1998
ESD ISO 10605: 2008
Unpowered test: relay discharge: 8 kV, air discharge 15 kV, Ri = 2000 1,
C = 150 pF (table C1, category 1)
Powered up test: relay discharge: 8kV, air discharge 15kV, Ri = 2000 1,
C = 330 pF (table C2, category 1)
Line-bound interference ISO 7637-2:2004
Power input UBat = 14V
Typ.[W] Max.[W]
in neutral position 0.4 0.6
at max. adjustment speed 12
in switch or intermediate position 3.6 5.0
in Open center 6 12
Input signal CAN, physical layer acc. to ISO 11898 High Speed,
standard transmission rate 250 kBaud
Connections Compact connector Jet connector
Pin 1 = ground Pin 1 = UBat
Pin 2 = CAN high Pin 2 = CAN low
Pin 3 = CAN low Pin 3 = CAN high
Pin 4 = UBat Pin 4 = Ground
Sinusoidal vibration test DIN EN 60 068-2-6, 10 Hz 2000 Hz, 57,5 > 2000 Hz, 6.93 g rms
10 Hz > 57.5 Hz, 1.5 mm pp
Broadband noise test DIN EN 60 068-2-64, 5 Hz 2000 Hz, aeff 86.9 m/s2
Shock test DIN EN 60 068-2-27, a = 500 m/s2, 11 ms, 60 cycles
DIN EN 60 068-2-29, a = 400 m/s2, 6 ms, 300 cycles

508
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 27/36

Reading out the error code with the EHS diagnostic tool, error interpretation
The EHS Diagnostics Tool is a software program specially developed for troubleshooting in EHS systems in vehicles or on the
test bed. The diagnostic tool is used for identifying and diagnosing individual valves or all valves in the block / tractor. The techni-
cal data and error memory of the valves can be read out via RS232 (individual valve only) or CAN (together). For the RS232, the
baudrate is set to 9600 baud; for the CAN, the baudrate is automatically calculated
Overview for internal diagnostics
Special measures for protecting against malfunctions resulting from contamination, material defects and similar are not specified.
The unit does not effect any safety functions without additional measures on the part of the user.
Fail-safe In the event of a power failure, short circuit or failure in the oil supply, the actuator will automatically
switch the pilot spool to neutral (spool is spring-centered)
Fault detection Fault Reaction to fault:
Internal error: Control spool not in neutral CAN: diagnostic message via CAN bus
position when switching on Caution: uncontrolled load shifts possible, system must
be shut down.
Spool not deflected far enough Valve switched to neutral, optionally only error message
Control spool deflected too If countersteering does not help, the actuator will be
far or does not return to neutral de-energized .
(e.g. spool held or stuck) CAN: diagnostic message via CAN bus
Caution: uncontrolled load shifts possible, system must
be shut down.
Displacement pick-up defective Valve is not actuated 2
Current measurement defective Valve is not actuated
Output stage defective Valve is not actuated
Checksum error via
Main program Valve is not actuated
EEPROM customer area Checksum test, optionally only error message or shutdown
RAM error Test, either for error message or shutdown
Computer error Error due to interference peaks: A second attempt is only
permissible if the target value was first set to neutral.
Other computer errors: CAN: diagnostic message via
CAN bus
Caution: Uncontrolled load shifts possible, system must be
shut down.
External errors: Supply voltage below permissible Valve is not actuated
range (with CAN: above Bosch limit, optionally only error message)
Supply voltage above permissible Valve is not actuated
range (with CAN: below Bosch limit, optionally only error message)
Target voltage below permissible Valve is not actuated
range
Target voltage above permissible Valve is not actuated
range
No target value message Valve is not actuated
(only with CAN)
Implausible target value message Valve is not actuated
(only with CAN)
No configuration message Valve is not actuated
(only with CAN)
Manual actuation (on manual lever Valve remains switched off, no counter reaction,
of the valve) no electric control possible
Visual fault display Diagnostics LED in device plug Flash code shows type of fault (see flash code)
Fault diagnosis in The error is transmitted via CAN with an error code.
CAN version The transmission message diagnostics is sent up to 5 times directly after the error occurs, then every
100 ms (adjustable). The error code is transmitted (see CAN message description).

509
28/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

General information on CAN control

The EHS valve can be easily controlled via the serial CAN interface. In this way, the operating modes Neutral, Raise, Lower,
Open center and the oil flow target value can be set as default by means of a message. A second message can be used for
both Lift and Lower (different for each) to set the characteristic shape, characteristic gradient and ramp times. On the other
hand, the valve can communicate any faults to the higher-level control section in detail by means of a fault code.
Finally, the valve can be permanently re-programmed by way of parameter setting messages (CAN baud rate and identifiers,
battery voltage limits, valve number, etc.).

General CAN conventions:

Standard setting
Baud rate 250 kBaud, to ) 1 MBaud possible
Sampling Single sampling
Sampling instant At 3/4 of the bit length
Synchronisation edges Only edges from recessive to dominant
Synchronisation increment SJW = 1 BTL cycles
Caution: The maximum baudrate must always be tested in the vehicle and is dependent on:
Data traffic on the bus
Effectiveness of the internal hardware identifier filter, affected e.g. by:
Allocation of the CAN identifiers which do not affect the valves
CAN identifier set, see TKU: Z 206 E00 444

510
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 29/36

Characteristics for forming target values and time ramps

Characteristic gradient
The characteristic gradient can be used to linearly reduce valve deflection from 100 % to 0 %.

255 steps can be programmed: 00hex, 01hex, 02hex......FEhex

0 %, 0.39 %, 0.78 %, ...100 %

In CAN mode, the value of the characteristic gradient is transferred in the configuration message; in PWM mode, it is in the valve
EEPROM and can be programmed. Standard setting is 100 %. The characteristic gradient should preferably selected with values
as shown.
Characteristic-curve
g g
100
FE
F0
90 DC
C8
B4
A0
80
8C
78 2
64
70 50
3C
28
14
60
0A
01
Output [%]

50

40

30

20

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Input [%]

For CAN control, the input corresponds to the oil-flow target value. For PWM control, input = 0...100 % corresponds
to a PWM pulse-duty factor of 53...85 % for lowering or 47...15 % for lifting (with standard characteristic vertices). Output
corresponds to the oil flow at the directional valve.

511
30/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Characteristic-curve shape
The characteristic shape can change from linear to heavily progressive. If needed, the valves fine control characteristic
can be changed.

15 steps can be programmed separately for lifting and lowering: 0hex, 1hex, 2hex......Ehex
linear...................progressive

In CAN mode, the value for the characteristic shape is transferred in the configuration message. In PWM mode it is in the valve
EEPROM and can be programmed.

Characteristic curvature
100
0
1
90 2
3
4
80 5
6
7
8
70 9
A
B
60 C
D
E
Output [%]

F
50

40

30

20

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Input [%]

For CAN control, the input corresponds to the oil-flow target value. For PWM control, input = 0...100 % corresponds to a signal
voltage or a PWM pulse-duty factor of 53...85 % for lowering or 47...15 % for lifting (with standard characteristic curve vertices).
Output corresponds to the oil flow at the directional valve.

512
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 31/36

Time ramps
By using time ramps, the dynamics of the valve can be reduced in a well-targeted manner. The ramp time is then the time needed
to run through the full stroke (from 0 to 100 % or 100 % to 0 % for lifting or lowering).

255 separate steps can be programmed for lifting and lowering and for switching on and off:
00hex, 01hex, 02hex.........FEhex
0, 16, 32,............4064ms

In CAN mode, the values for the time ramp are transferred in the configuration message. In PWM mode they are in the valve
EEPROM and can be programmed.
Time ramps
100

90
01
02
80 05
0F
1E
2D 2
70
3C
4C
5A
60 69
78
Output [%]

87
50 96
A5
B4
C3
40
D2
E1
F0
30 FE

20

10

0
0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

2800

3000

3200

3400

3600

3800

4000

4200

4400

4600

4800

5000

Time [ms]

513
32/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Control block segments The following control block segments are available:
Port plate (AP) AP for fixed pump (KP)
with pressure compensator
optionally with 6p increase

AP for variable pump (VP)

No internal function

EHR23-EM2 control valve Optional

Ideally, the EHR control valve will directly follow the port plate and be located in front
of the SB control valve. A maximum of three SB control valves are permissible between
the port plate and the EHR control valve.

SB23-EHS1 control valve Several SB23 control valves can be configured.

End plate (EP) The end plate caps off the control block.

Installing the control block

Preparation Install the shuttle valve of the control block segments acc. to chapter 5.5 Shuttle
valve.
Install the sealing elements of the control block segments acc. to chapter 5.4 Repairing
flange surface sealing elements.

If the control block segment flange surface has stamp marks and if they were treated
with a whetstone, a spacer disc must be threaded onto tie bolt screws , and .

Installation of the port plate 1. Use only original M 8 tie bolts from Rexroth (hardness class 10.9).
2. Screw in tie bolt screws to clockwise by hand to the ground.

Installation of the EHR23-EM2 control

valve

514
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 33/36

Installation of the control block Push the control block segments over the tie bolts in the specified order,
segments with the flange on the side opposite the O-ring facing the port plate.

Installation of the end plate 1. Align the end plate with the flange surface to the control block, sliding it over the tie
bolts to the stop.
2. Screw the nuts, without washers or retaining discs, onto the tie bolt screws clockwise
by hand.
3. Align the control block segments with one another.
4. Pretension nuts with a torque of 5+1 Nm.
5. Tighten the nuts clockwise with a torque as given in the table.
Tightening sequence A A . 2

Tightening torques for nuts

Oiled
25.5+2.5 Nm
25.5+2.5 Nm
25.5+2.5 Nm

515
34/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Specifications / regulations

The valve itself performs no safety function. It may fail. The tractor manufacturer (customer) must take safety measures
as necessary.

Additional notes on operation and commissioning

For block assembly and installation in the tractor:
Do not misplace or damage O-rings, back-up rings and shuttle valves.
Shock-like loads above the specified values may cause invisible concealed damage and must be avoided.
The installation positions of the valves in the machine must be such that mechanical damage, e.g. due to stones etc., with con-
sequential damage such as housing deformation, jamming, damaged control elements, fractured or damaged cables are avoided.
Risk in event of drop in pilot pressure, for example if oil from the inlet flows into the system faster than it can flow through the
check valves and the main spool, this could cause impermissible pressure spikes. Examine critical operating conditions during
commissioning.
ESD was tested according to ISO 10605: 2008 tables C1 and C2, each in category 1, see General electrical details.
Adherence to the standard must also be ensured during installation and painting.
Note: If a hydraulic motor is operated with a directional valve in Open center position, the motor can turn freely. If the hydraulic
motor is turned by an external force and is quickly stopped by switching the directional valve to cutoff, the moment of inertia of
the hydraulic motor could give rise to very high pressure spikes that could damage the hydraulic system. This could happen,
for example, when the machine is switched off or the pilot pressure is cut off. The check valves in the directional valve and the
control spool then move to neutral.

For further details, please refer to Bosch Rexroth instruction manual RE-66132-B

Additional documents
Title Document number Document type
Control block
RE 66132-B Instruction manual
SB23-EHS1, SB33-EHS1, EHR33-EHS1

Control valve SB23-EHS1 RE 66134-01-R Repair manual

 Control block SB23-EHS1 RE 66134-10-R Repair manual

Control valve SB23-EHS1 RE 66134-20-R Repair manual

On Board Electronics SB23-EHS1 RE 66134-40-R Repair manual

SB23-EHS1 Interface description, Hydraulic Z 206 803 930 Techn. information

SB23-EHS1 Interface description, Electronic Z 206 E00 444 Techn. information

Air bleeding directional valves MH 121 Commissioning notes

Available from your machine or

Supplied installation drawing / hydraulic plan Project drawing
system manufacturer.

Hydraulic fluids on mineral oil basis RE 90220 Data sheet

Hydraulic fluids on mineral oil basis for axial piston

RE 90220-1 Data sheet
units

516
RE 66 134/04.12 | Control Block SB23-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 35/36

Abbreviations

This documentation uses the following abbreviations:

Abbreviation Meaning
PP Port plate
CAN Controller Area Network
PRV Pressure relief valve
Th-CV Throttle check valve
EHR Electronic and hydraulic hitch control
EHS1 Pilot controlled electro-hydraulic actuator
EP End plate
IPC Individual pressure compensator
LS Load sensing
OBE On Board Electronics
SB23 Control block, directional valve series 23
SPV Check valves

Spare parts
Spare parts and material numbers can be found on the Internet at
2
www.boschrexroth.com/spc

Contacts for accessories and spare parts

Accessories and spare parts are available
from vehicle manufacturers (specialist dealers),
from system manufacturers and
from your Bosch Rexroth dealer.

The Rexroth sales partners can be found on the Internet at

www.boschrexroth.com/addresses

Should you have any questions about spare parts, please contact your responsible Rexroth
Service partner or the Service department of the control block manufacturing plant.

Bosch Rexroth AG
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2
71701 Schwieberdingen
Germany
Tel. +49 (0) 711-811-84 81
Fax +49 (0) 711-811-28 11
[email protected]

517
36/36 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB23-EHS1 | RE 66 134/04.12

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG.
Product Division Mobile Controls It may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
D-71701 Schwieberdingen ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Fax: +49 (0) 711-811 5 11 18 14 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
[email protected] the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.com/brm remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

518
Control Block SB33-EHS1 RE 66 132/04.12
Replace:
1/40

RE 66 132/11.11

SB33-EHS1, EHR33-EHS1

with on-board-electronics OBE,

pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation

Nominal pressure: pnom. = 250 bar

Flow: Qmax = 140 l/min

Table of contents Features

Content Page System
Features 1 Load-independent flow control
Description 2 Load sensing system
Technical data 4
Design
Ordering code 6 Port plate
Order details 7 Segment design (up to 6 valve segments)
Unit dimensions 10 End plate
Hydraulic functions 23
Type of actuation
Electronic functions 30 Pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation
Installing the control block 36
Commissioning notes 38 Flow
Load-pressure compensated
Additional documents 38
High repeat accuracy
Low hysteresis

Pressure safeguarding
Optionally included in port plate

Application areas
Tractor applications

519
2/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Description
Purely electrically controlled, LS directional valve:

Double-acting with four switch positions Optional flange surface for customer-specific coupling
Hydraulically operated check valves in A and B housing
(for load-compensated lowering) Use in hitch control:
2-way individual pressure compensator in inlet control valve EHR33-EHS1, single- or double-acting
Function for active refilling (6p-increase in inlet for driving Check valves in float without load pressure opened all the way
loads)

Control block SB33-EHS1 X2

FX
YM
Consisting of:
Port plate 5
XNA
1...6 valve segments DMV

3 tie bolts, 5 tie bolts optional

FP
End plate P2

R Y P X Rx
The following combination is shown as an example: A

1 Port plate B

2 Control valve, single-action, electrical proportional actuation 4 a b F 2 0 1

with 2-way pressure compensator, with secondary pressure U

S
relief valve
3 Shuttle valve for load-pressure selection
4 Directional valve, double-action, with 2-way pressure Y1
compensator, with check valves, hydraulically actuated
5 End plate with coarse and fine filter R Y P X Rx
A

a b F 2 0 1

U
S

3
Ports
P Pump Y1
A, B Consumers
R Y P X Rx
X Pilot oil supply A

Rx Pilot oil return B/R

2 0 1

Y (LS)-signal 2 U
S

R Return reservoir

Y1

RFA
R Y P X Rx
A

F 2 0 1
1
U
S

Y1

R1 Y P1 P2 R2

520
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/40

Function, cut

The SB33-EHS1 is a pilot-controlled, electrohydraulically 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4

actuated directional valve with four switch positions.
The main spool is controlled via a 4/3 pilot valve which
pressurizes the chambers for moving the main spool. The main
spool is guided back by means of a displacement pick up
on the control electronics. Using the current of the pilot valve,
the electronics then regulate the position of the main spool
as a function of the setpoint.
The hydraulically controlled check valves in the two work
ports act as non-return valves in the inlet. In the return, they act
in a load-compensating manner for driving loads.
Load compensation in the inlet occurs via the individual
pressure compensators.
The electronics are for position control and for communicating
with the CAN bus. They are equipped with diagnostic functions.
12 8 4 5 6 7 11

2 13 2

14

1 Check valves 6 Individual pressure compensator 11 Cover or cover with manual

2 Work ports 7 Main spool auxiliary actuation
3 Return springs 8 Electronics unit 12 CAN control
4 Chamber 9 Displacement pick up 13 Secondary PRV
5 Shuttle valve AB 10 Pilot valve 14 Solenoid valve for switchover,
double-acting after single acting

521
4/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation

SB33-EHS1, EHR33-EHS1

Technical data (Please contact us if the device is to be used outside of the specified values!)
General Control blocks consisting of:
1 port plate, 1 end plate
1...6 valve segments
3 tie bolts, 5 tie bolts optional
Fasteners Thread in port plate and end plate (standard: M 8)
Line ports Screw-in thread or flange port, see unit dimensions
Installation position See page 22
Ambient temperature 35 C...+110 C
Hydraulic
Permissible pressure fluids Hydraulic oils on mineral oil base according to DIN 51 524
HLP according to DIN 51524
HVLP 32/46/68 hydraulic oils according to DIN 51 524
HD SAE 10 W 40
HETG Fuchs Plantohyd 40/Fragol TR46
HEPG Fuchs Renolin PG
HEES Fuchs Plantosyns Super S40/Fragol Hydraulic HE 15 + 46
Engine oils according to API-C
Engine oils according to API-CD
Engine oils according to API-CF
Dye Renolin FST 101
Other oil types, such as STOU/UTTO multifunction oils, on request.
Viscosity 7... 500 mm2/s permissible range
20... 100 mm2/s recommended range
8000 mm2/s range permissible for start
Fluid temperature in operation +35 C ... +110 C permissible range, short-term +125 C,
35 C range permissible for start
Oil cleanliness Oil contamination class 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406:
1999 or class 10A/10B/9C according to SAE AS 4059
Operating pressure at port: P pmax = 250 bar (pump side)
A, B pmax = 250 bar (consumer side)
R, Rx pmax = 20 bar (return side)
X pmax = 50 bar
Leakage A, B A R QL % 2 ml/min with check valves in A, B
with p = 125 bar, v = 33 mm2/s
= 50 C
Nominal oil flow port P A A, B Qnom. = 140 l/min
A, B A R Qmax = 250 l/min
Thermo PRV Optionally as cartridges in work port side
Cracking pressure at 150 ml/min, 33 mm2/s: 242...293 bar
Closing pressure: > 215 bar
Spring cap with manual auxiliary actuation Active, bidirectional mechanical actuation of the main spool
Possibility to block the main spool in neutral
Actuation torques (see project drawing)

522
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 5/40

Technical data (continued)

Electrohydraulic
Relative actuated time 100 % ED to +110 C
Type of protection IPX6, IPX9K (with plugged-in CAN connector)
Plug connection Compact connector or Jet connector
Electrical power input pmax = 17 W for 12-V system
Solenoid voltage 12 V vehicle battery voltage ISO 16750-2: Code C, (24 V on request)
Response time for 100 % deflection See response time/dynamics
Pilot pressure 18 bar 1, referenced to return pressure
Pilot oil flow Per valve segment 4.4 l/min short-term at max. actuating speed,
in neutral 0.25 l/min, in lift/lower control position 0.6 l/min
Response time/dynamics Step function: 0100 % from pos. 0 to pos. 1 or 2: approx. 50 ms
(incl. dead time) 0 to pos. F: approx. 70 ms
50 C, 30 mm2/s, VG46, mean value of the valve
Response time vs. viscosity, see Z 206 803 930
EHS1 interface description
Hysteresis with respect to oil flow:
typically approx. 1 % of Qmax (in oil flow range up to 80 % of Qmax)
Other technical data: See Z 206 800 810 EHS2 interface description
2

523
6/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

This type key describes the desired

design variant of a SB33 directional valve and
EHR33 control valve.

Type key, e.g. SB33

S B 3 3 0 0 L 7 0 E H S C C 2 D 2 Q 3

Additional function in the lower axis

no pressure compensator
Q 3 2-way individual
pressure compensator

Additional function in service line port B

D 2 hydraulically actuated check valve

Additional function in service line port A

C 2 hydraulically actuated check valve

Setpoint-value signal
C CAN signal
P PWM on request

Control type
E H S pilot-controlled electrohydraulic actuation

Spool symbol
L 7 0 4 positions (lift neutral lower float)

Version status
1 EHS1 control unit

Series production status

0 first generation

Valve type series

S B 3 3 SB33

E H R 3 3

524
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 7/40

Order details
SB33-EHS1 Flow Ports/ Comments Part number
Q design
R Y P X Rx
A
140 l/min A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / III Manual auxiliary R917007956 *)
actuation of the
B
Thermo PRV
F 2 0 1
main spool
U
S
A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / III Thermo PRV R917007957 *)

Y1
Coupling flange M 6 Manual auxiliary R917007958 *)
actuation of the
Thermo PRV
main spool
Coupling flange M 6 Thermo PRV R917007959 *)

EHR33-EHS1 SA
2
R Y P X Rx
A
100 l/min A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / II With RfA on R917006990 *)
O-ring side
B/R

2 0 1
Manual auxiliary
U
S
actuation of the
main spool

With manual
lowering and
RFA
emergency
manual function
incl. IPC inhibition

R Y P X Rx
A
100 l/min A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / II With RfA opposite R917007936 *)
the O-ring side
B/R

2 0 1
Manual auxiliary
U
S
actuation of the
main spool

With manual
lowering and
RFA
emergency
manual function
incl. IPC inhibition

EHR33-EHS1 DA
R Y P X Rx
A
100 l/min A, B = M 22 x 1.5 / II With RfA on R917006784 *)
O-ring side
B

F 2 0 1
Manual auxiliary
U
S
actuation of the
main spool

With manual
Y1
lowering and
RFA emergency
manual function
incl. IPC inhibition

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

525
8/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Order details (continued)

SBx3-EHS1 port plate for variable pump Ports/ Comments Part number
design
P1 = M27x2/ III With PRV; R917007235
P2 = M27x2/ III P2 port M27x2 plugged;
P3 = M10x1/ I P3 port M10x1 open; screw-in
a R1 = M33x2/ III thread for tie bolts;
Y = M12x1.5 fastening feet with M8 thread,
Th-CV 1527410132 screwed
into Y-port

R1 Y P1 P2 P3

SBx3-EHS1 port plate for fixed pump

P = M22x1.5/ II With PRV R917007203
R1 = M27x2/ II
R2 = M27x2/ II
N1 = M22x1.5/ II

a 6p = 4 bar in position 0
R2
6p = 11 bar in position 1 or 2

R1 P N1

SBx3-EHS1 end plate use for variable pump

X X: M12x1.5/ III Pilot pressure 18 bar R917007578
(fixed setting)
Pilot pressure port: X-port
plugged; with sintered metal
filter in P line;

R Y P X Rx

X2 X: 9/16-18 UNF; Pilot pressure 18 bar R917005923

FX ISO 11926 (fixed setting)
P: M12x1.5/ III Pilot pressure port: X-port
DMV
plugged; with sintered metal
filter in P line; fine filter
PP
P

R Y P X Rx

SBx3-EHS1 end plate use for fixed pump

X2 X: M10x1/ I Pilot pressure R917007249
FX 4.5 bar
P: M22x1.5/ III 18 bar, switchable
Pilot pressure port:
X-port plugged; with sintered
XNA
DMV
metal filter in P line; fine filter

FP
P

R Y P X Rx

SBx3-EHS1 intermediate plate

Disc width: L = 13 mm R917005302
Disc width: L = 15 mm R917006220
Disc width: L = 22 mm R917007130
Disc width: L = 16 mm R917007583
R Y P X Rx

526
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 9/40

Threaded ports design

Version I
DIN 3852-1, DIN 3852-2
For sealing ring seal

Version II
ISO 11926-1
For O-ring seal

Version III
EN ISO 6149-1
Without marking on female thread
For O-Ring seal

527
10/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Unit dimensions
SB33-EHS1

Tie bolts Installing the control block in the machine.

When using R917007235, R917002924; R917007203
port plate(s) The SB33-EHS1 control block, consisting of:
End plate(s) R917007578, R917005923 Port plate
Valve segments Tie bolts Tie bolt length 1...6 valve segments
Length L [mm] Ordering no. [mm]
3 tie bolts, 5 tie bolts optional
from to
End plate
40 42 1 523 502 096 131
44 44 R 917 000 013 133
80 80 1 523 502 097 171 Port plate, valve segments and end plates are secured during
91 98 R 917 000 538 187 control block installation by tie bolts.
99 106 1 523 502 087 195 The control block is fixed to the port- and/or end plate
in the machine.
107 114 R 917 005 260 203
115 122 1 523 502 098 211 The number of fasteners and the number of tie bolts depend
on the number of valve segments and the expected vibrational
128 133 1 523 502 125 223
load in the machine. At least
140 145 1 523 502 088 235
3 tie bolts are needed to secure a control block. Depending on
146 149 R 917 005 261 239 loading, 5 tie bolts may be needed.
156 161 1 523 502 099 251
162 167 R 917 003 101 257
168 172 R 917 005 949 263
174 178 R 917 004 775 269
180 184 1 523 502 089 275
196 200 1 523 502 100 291
209 212 1 523 502 129 304
215 218 R 917 005 950 310
220 223 1 523 502 090 315
16
236 239 1 523 502 101 331
249 251 1 523 502 130 344
260 262 1 523 502 091 355
AP L [mm] EP
276 278 1 523 502 102 371
Valve segments

528
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 11/40

Unit dimensions
SB33-EHS1
R917007956 *)
257.1 +1.5
1.5

177.9 +1 134.1
1
86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)
23.2 +0.5
0.5 2

8.4 JS13

0.5
(3x)

119.5 +0.5
Rx
R Rx

23.5
1.5
83.9 +1.5

70.3
24.3 JS12

77
57.5
X

41.7
11.4 JS13

6.5
(3x)
Y Y (2x)
P

2
48.7+2
P

11.3
+0.5
1
13.8 0.5 38.3

218.6 59.3 65.5 3

86.7
4
x 120 (ROD ZB)
x 83 5
112.4 2
x 32
x5
x 18

x 22
8

440.3
+0.3
36

A B

6
SB33-EHS1
R917007957
257.1 +1.5
1.5

177.9 +1 134.1
1
86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)
23.2 +0.5
0.5 2

8.4 JS13
0.5

(3x)
119.5 +0.5

Rx
R Rx
1.5
83.9 +1.5

X
24.3 JS12 70.3

77
57.5
X
41.7

11.4 JS13
6.5

(3x)
Y Y (2x)
P
2
48.7+2

P
11.3

+0.5
1
13.8 0.5 38.3
+0.5
218.6 50.2 0.5 65.5 3
86.7
4
x 120 (ROD ZB)
x 83 5
112.4
x 32
x5
x 18

x 22
440.3
+0.3

A B

6
1 Stamped 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
2 O-ring included in the delivery contents 6 Acc. to Z206800990-ETZ M22x1.5 design 3
3 Pull off protective cap R917001694 before connecting similar to DIN ISO 6149-1
4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

529
12/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Unit dimensions
SB33-EHS1
R917007958 *)
257.1 +1.5
1.5

177.9 +1 134.1
1
86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)
23.2 +0.5
0.5 2

8.4 JS13

0.5
119.5 +0.5
Rx (3x)
R Rx
1.5
83.9 +1.5

23.5
X

70.3

77
24.3 JS12

57.5
X

41.7
6.5
(3x) 11.4 JS13
Y Y (2x)
2
48.7+2
P P

11.3
+0.5
1
13.8 0.5 38.3

218.6 59.3 65.5 3

86.7
4
x 120 (ROD ZB)
x 94 5
112.4
x 83 x 16

x 32
x5
x 18

x 22
8

0.3
44+0.3
36
24.3 J512

B =20+22 Nm
(2x)

M6 (4x) 10.6 Min.

SB33-EHS1
R917007959
257.1 +1.5
1.5

177.9 +1 134.1
1
86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)
23.2 +0.5
0.5 2

8.4 JS13
0.5
119.5 +0.5

Rx (3x)
R Rx
1.5
83.9 +1.5

X
70.3

77

24.3 JS12
57.5

X
41.7
6.5

(3x) 11.4 JS13

Y Y (2x)
2
48.7+2

P P
11.3

+0.5
1
13.8 0.5 38.3
+0.5
218.6 50.2 0.5 65.5 3
86.7
4
x 120 (ROD ZB)
x 94 5
112.4
x 83 x 16

x 32
x5
x 18

x 22
440.3
+0.3
24.3 J512

B =20+22 Nm
(2x)

M6 (4x) 10.6 Min.

1 Stamped 4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents

2 O-ring included in the delivery contents 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
3 Pull off protective cap R 917 001 694 before connecting

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

530
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 13/40

Unit dimensions
Control valve EHR33-EHS1
R917007990 *)

134.1
177.9 96

23.5 86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)
183.1

RfA 2

0.5
119.5 +0.5
Rx
R Rx

23.5
1.5
83.9 +1.5

106
X

70.3

77
24.3 JS12

57.5
X 11.4 JS13

41.7
6.5
(4x) (2x)
Y Y
1.3
48.9+2.0
P P

50*

11.3
*
26.1

*
13.8 0.1
+0.1
38.3 3 33*

65.5
218.6 59.3 4 2
328.5 2.5 86.7 (ZA)
5
1 86.7 8.4 J513
x 159 (3x)
112.4
x 120

x 71

x 32
x5
x 18

x 22

45
44

A B
M22x1.5

1 Stamped 4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents

2 O-ring included in the delivery contents 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
3 Pull off protective cap R 917 001 694 before connecting

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

531
14/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Unit dimensions
Control valve EHR33-EHS1
R917007936 *)

134.1
177.9 96

23.5 86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)
183.1

RfA 2
Rx 0.5
119.5 +0.5
R Rx
23.5
1.5
83.9 +1.5

106
X

70.3

77
24.3 JS12

57.5
X 11.4 JS13

41.7
6.5
(4x) (2x)
Y Y
1.3
48.9+2.0

P P

50*

11.3
*
26.1

*
13.8 0.1
+0.1
38.3 3 33*

218.6 59.3 65.5 4

328.5 2.5 86.7 (ZA)
5
1 86.7 8.4 J513
x 159 (3x)
112.4
x 120

x 71

x 32
x5
x 18

x 22

45
44

A B
M22x1.5

1 Stamped 4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents

2 O-ring included in the delivery contents 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
3 Pull off protective cap R 917 001 694 before connecting

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

532
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 15/40

Unit dimensions
Control valve EHR33-EHS1
R917006784 *)

58.1+1.5
1.5

134.1
96
177.9 86.7+0.6
0.6 (R)

23.5
183.1

RfA 3

0.15
119.5 +0.15

24
Rx 23.5 Rx
1.5
83.9 +1.5

.3 (4x)
106
R

JS
12
X

70.3
X

77
57.5
11.4 JS13

41.7
6.5
Y Y (2x)
1.3
48.9+2.0

P 2 P

50*
1.5
68.2 +1.5

11.3
*
26.1

*
218.6 38.3 33*
+0.1
13.8 0.1 65.5 4
59.3 1 86.7 (ZA)
5
+1.5
94.1 1.5 86.7 8.4 JS13
(3x)
328.5 2.5 112.4
6
x 159

x 120
x 71

x 32
x5
x 18

x 22

45
44

A B
M22x1.5

1 Connector 4 4 Shuttle valve included in the delivery contents

2 2/2-solenoid valve 5 O-ring and back-up ring included in the delivery contents
3 O-ring included in the delivery contents 6 Stamped

*) Consultation required regarding technical specification and requirements

533
16/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Unit dimensions
Port plate for variable pump
R917007235

R1 P2 P3 P1

R P

M
8.5 JS13

Y
M 8(3x)

50
Y

11
138.7
max. 13
min. 11

11.3

50
M10 9.2
(2x)
10 33.3
27 +0.4 38.3
38.5+0.5 73.2
42 86.7

48 94 20.2

155.5
24
7920 Germany
Made in

P2

40.2

134.1

112.4 11

86.7

65.5

38.3
12
.3 JS

1
11.3
24

6.5

12
41.7

JS M8
.3
57.5

24 12 (3x)
70.3

JS
3
77

2 4.

11.4 JS13 2

1 Seal rings are included in the delivery contents

2 Stamped

534
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 17/40

Unit dimensions
Port plate for fixed pump
R917007203

40
38 +1(3x)

20 0.2
27+4(3x)

8.4 +1.1(3x)

M8 (3x)
1
N1
P N
R
R1
0.2

made in Germany
M

9.5 HB
67.2

Y W Rz16
max. 18
min. 11

0.2
682 5 (2x)*

28.5
M8 86.7 9 0.4 20 0.2
2x
10 112.4
2
94 9.2

144 0.2 14.7 0.1

P
0.2
20

R2 36 0.2

0.2
110.7

134.1

112.4

86.7

65.5
38.3

3
11.3

JS12
24.3
6.5

12

12
JS
41.7

.3 12
57,5

JS
24
0.2
70.3

4.3
77

2
88.5

11.4 JS13
2

1 Protective cap (sealable)

2 Stamped
3 Seal rings are included in the delivery contents

535
18/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Unit dimensions
End plate for variable pump
R917007578

94
9.2
M8x13 deep (2x)
usable thread

103.4
35.4 1.5
25
40.2 +1.5
1.5

93.5

=11+3.7 Nm
88.7

70.3
77
28.5

9.7
37

50

23 134.1
86.7
48
112.4

28.4

155

536
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 19/40

Unit dimensions
End plate for variable pump
R917005923

103.2
M10x15 deep (2x)
usable thread 9.2
8

103.4
35.4 1.5

max. 94
2
88.7
70.3

12.5
70.3
77
1
41.7

48.5
28.5
6.5
1

50
11.3
45

38.3 28.4 1.4

48 90
69 134.1
86.7

112.4

119 1.5

134.1

max. 212

537
20/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Unit dimensions
End plate for fixed pump
R917007249

0.2
103.2
M8x13 deep (2x)
0.2

9.2 0.2
usable thread
8

47.5 103.4

35.4 1.5

max. 164
0.2
120.7

88.7
70.3

12.5
70.3
77
1

57.5
41.7

49.9
27.5

9.6

50
11.3

38.3 28.4 48 90
65,5 134.1
86.7

112.4

134.1

211,4

538
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 21/40

Unit dimensions
Intermediate plate
R917005302 (L = 13 mm)
R917006220 (L = 15 mm)
R917007130 (L = 22 mm)
R917007583 (L = 16 mm)

158.2
134.1

112.4

86.7

14.2 +0.4 65.5

65.5 +0.1
0.1 ( 3)

38.3
-1 -1
-2 2.2 11.4 JS13 -2 L
13
JS

2
.3
x)
24
(4

13
JS
13

77
.3

70.3

0.5
JS

XXXX
24
(4x)

57.5
.3

113
x)
24

41.7
(4

33.5
10
11.3

6.5

27
13

8.4JS13(3x)
JS
.3

1
x)
24
(4

1 Stamped

539
22/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Installation position
SB33-EHS1 control valve different installation positions *)

Installation Graphical depiction, permissible rotation around axis vertical to image axis
position
1 +50 +10
10 40

2 +50 +50
10 10

3 +50 +10
10 10

4 +10 +10
20 20

5 +10 +10 *) The permissible installation positions

50 10 are can be found in the respective,
valid project drawings

540
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 23/40

Installation Graphical depiction, permissible rotation around axis vertical to image axis
position
6 +10 +10 *) The permissible installation positions
10 10 are can be found in the respective,
valid project drawings

Hydraulic functions 2
Standard Optional
Load-compensated check valve for oil flows from A, B
to R
Work ports / threaded ports: M22x1.5 / DIN 3852, flat sealed
M22x1.5 / ISO 6149, O-ring seal quick-release couplings:
flange surface for coupling housing with M6 fixing thread M6
preferred, M8 optional
Spring cap Manual actuation
Main spool with 4 switch positions Various oil flows
2-way individual pressure compensator Individual pressure compensator inhibition (IPC) for EHR33
Thermo PRV:
Assembly as cartridge valve for ports A and B.
It prevents an impermissibly high pressure build-up that can
arise through thermal expansion in a closed volume
Position sensor for position control of the main spool
and for diagnostic purposes

R Y P X Rx
A

F 2 0 1

U
S

Y1

Circuit diagram: SB33-EHS1 with Thermo PRV

541
24/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Manual auxiliary actuation for directional valve Caution:

Valves with manual auxiliary actuation must be actuated
spool (optional) mechanically after painting. The actuation force needed to
Mechanical manual actuation crack the paint layer between the rotating positioning shaft
Operated with standard tools (WAF 13 hexagon) and case could be too great for electrohydraulic actuation.
Control spool can be locked in neutral The configuration of the valves in the tractor must be selected
so that dirt cannot accumulate on the positioning shaft that
could cause the main spool to seize.

NH4 (SW10) Regular operation NH3 against NH4

Actuation NH2 without pilot pressure,
NH3 (SW17)
MA: 4.5 +1.0
1.0 Nm
NH1
NH2 against pilot pressure,
MA: 9.5 +1.0
1.0 Nm

NH2 (SW13) Clamping NH3 against NH1, MA: 20 Nm

Resumption of NH4 against NH2, MA: 9 Nm
normal operation

37

17

3
0
3
(45)
34

17

Caution: Increased risk upon actuation of the manual auxiliary actuation without pilot oil supply
Together with pilot pressure cutoff during diagnostics (deflected control spool), also LS signal to switch off pump.
Reason: Without pilot pressure, check valve A or B will close to R and the pump will bring an additional maximum
pump pressure to the cylinder. Without such a switch, very high pressures could arise on the load side:
load pressure + pump pressure x cylinder area ratio.

542
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 25/40

EHR functions R Y2 P X Rx
A

B/R

No Thermo PRV can be integrated in EHR variants (EHR33). 2 0 1

U
Pressure relief valve for EHR function in A S

(secondary PRV in support connection; optional)

Fixed setting.
Standard: 230 bar
(227...253 bar at 5 l/min,
...278 bar at 50 l/min)

2/2 proportional solenoid valve for IPC inhibition (optional) R Y P X Rx

A
When this 2/2 solenoid valve switches, the individual
B
pressure compensator (IPC) is inhibited so that, depending on
pump pressure, there is only a very small oil flow to the load F 2 0 1

(as with single-acting lowering) U

S 2
Connector type: Jet connector, 2-pin,
standard encoding
Y1

For details on the 2/2 solenoid valve, RFA

see RE18136-16

Function restriction:
No inhibitor function with undersupply
with low pressure.
No inhibitor function with insufficient
input control pressure 6p

543
26/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Pilot oil supply

Not a component of the directional valve (block or system Reason: Without pilot pressure, check valve A or B will close
component) to R and the pump will bring an additional maximum
pump pressure to the cylinder. Without such a switch, very
When using manual auxiliary actuation without pilot oil supply high pressures could arise on the load side:
and unrestricted pump supply, impermissible pressure in- load pressure + pump pressure x cylinder area ratio.
creases may occur since without pilot pressure the check
valves do not open for lowering.

Remedy: Through appropriate machine design, such pressure

increase can be avoided (e.g. through additional auxiliary pilot
oil supply or by switching off the LS signal to pump/port plate.

Required pilot oil flow per SB-/EHR33 segment:

Values for viscosity 30 mm2/s:
In neutral position: typically 250 ml/min, maximum 460 ml/min
When lifting or lowering: typically 600 ml/min, maximum 900 ml/min
In float: typically 250 ml/min, maximum 460 ml/min
During step function (lift or lower): typically 3.5 l/min (response time approx. 40 ms, no time ramp)
During step function (float): typically 4.4 l/min (response time ca. 75 ms)

Requirement peaks in the pilot oil can be limited

by preventing simultaneous activation of several consumers
(response time lag + safety margin). or by programming
the time ramps accordingly.

Pilot pressure referencing

Note that pilot pressure pX is to be referenced to the
highest return pressure of all SB33/EHR33 valves
(pX absolute = pX + pR max). If this referencing is not
performed, the calibration of inflow and return oil flow
will be shifted to such an extent that the inflow pressure
could rise to PRV pressure. Depending on load
characteristics, this could result in impermissibly
high pressures in the work port.
20
Pilot pressure 18

px = 180.8 bar (response point at pilot oil flow 16

0.8 to 1.2 l/min) 14
Pilot pressure [bar]

12

10
8

6
4
maximal
2 minimal
0
0 2 4 6 8
Pilot oil flow [l/min]

The pilot pressure acc. to the diagram must be available

solely to the SB33 valves as full valve performance is not
otherwise ensured.

Pilot oil fine filter

Pay close attention to oil cleanliness, particularly with
respect to the pilot oil supply; use an additional pilot
oil fine filter if necessary.

544
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 27/40

Flows
Standard valve oil flow variants:
Standard: P A, B = 100 l/min, A, B R = 200 l/min, cylinder area ratio = 2
Optional: P A, B = 140 l/min, A, B R = 250 l/min, cylinder area ratio = 1.8

As standard, valves are configured for a cylinder surface ratio of

2 or 1.8 with arbitrary connection possibility at one cylinder.
That means that the return flow is 2x or 1.8x
the inflow. Other designs on request.
If not specified otherwise, the following parameters
apply for an oil viscosity of i = 30 mm2/s.

Flow tolerance 5
4,5
The tolerance characteristics apply for inflow
oil flow with standard calibration. 4

Flow tolerance [l/min]

3,5
Other calibration (return flow) possible.
3
Special versions may have different
tolerances. 2,5

2
1,5 2
1
Flow Qmax 100 l/min
0,5
Flow Qmax 140 l/min
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow [l/min]
Hysteresis
With respect to oil flow: typically approx. 1 % of Qmax
(in oil flow range up to 80 % of Qmax)

Oil flow resolution 1,5

The characteristics apply for the

1,25
inlet oil flow with standard calibration.
Oil flow resolution [l/min]

Different tolerances may arise for

special versions. 1

0,75

0,5
Oil flow resolution Qmax 100 l/min max
Oil flow resolution Qmax 100 l/min typ.
0,25
Oil flow resolution Qmax 140 l/min max
Oil flow resolution Qmax 140 l/min typ
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow [l/min]

545
28/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Differential pressure (typical values)

30 30
YA to A YB to A
P0 to A P0 to A
25 YB to R 25 YA to R
B to R B to R

20 20
Pressure drop [bar]

Pressure drop [bar]

15 15

10 10

5 5

0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Pump oil flow [l/min] Pump oil flow [l/min]

Temperature drift in oil flow

The temperature-dependence of the oil flow is electronically compensated for in the temperature range 30 C to 90 C

Pressure drift in oil flow

Pressure drift of the oil flow (pressure increase due to increased pressure in parallel operation) is compensated for by the
individual pressure balance.

Internal leakage
A, B to R (with p = 125 bar, i = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C,
twait time = 15 s, tmeasurement time = 60 s)
In neutral: < 2 cm3/min
Higher values for variants with:
Secondary PRV: + ~ 1 cm3/min
Thermo PRV: + ~ 0.3 cm3/min

Typical leakage curve: 3.5 140

3 120

Pressure [bar]

Pressure [bar], temperature [C]

2.5 V [ml] 100
Temperature [C]
Leakage [ml] / [ml/min]

Q [ml/min]
2 80

1.5 60

1 40

Leakage at check valve 0.5 20

vs. time
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P to R (with p = 200 bar, i = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C)
Measurement time Time [min]
in pos. 0: typically: 60 cm3/min, maximum: 110 cm3/min
in pos. 1, 2: typically: 250 cm3/min, maximum: 450 cm3/min
in pos. F typically: 60 cm3/min, maximum: 200 cm3/min

Higher values may occur for special spool variants.

Y to R in (with p = 200 bar, i = 30 mm2/s, T = 50 C)
All pos. typically: 60 cm3/min, maximum: 110 cm3/min

546
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 29/40

Response time / dynamics 10000

Delay time: neutral to float
Actuating time: neutral to float
Cutoff frequency with respect to spool stroke Delay time: neutral to extend/retract
approx. 17 Hz for change in target value 1000
Actuating time: neutral to extend/retract
from 0 to 100 %

Time [min]
Step function:
see characteristic
100

10
0 10 100 1000 10000
Viscosity [mm2/s]

547
30/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Electronic functions
Standard Optional
CAN control PWM (pulse-width-modulated voltage signal) on request

General electrical details

Supply voltage Standard on 12-V vehicle battery voltage; on request: 24 V
Overvoltage resistance Power supply: 48 V, duration 5 min
Polarity reversal protection Test voltage 48 V, duration 5 min
Protection against short circuit Protection against short circuit against 36 V, against ground,
as well as between the individual inputs and outputs.
Level of protection IP69K (electronics), with mating connector plugged in
EMC irradiation ISO 11452-2
EMC irradiation measurement 0.2 MHz to 1000 MHz,
frequency according to ISO 14982: 1998
Reference limit values:
TEM cell 100 V/m
Stripline 150 V/m
EMC emission ISO 14982: 1998
ESD ISO 10605: 2008
Unpowered test: relay discharge: 8 kV, air discharge 15 kV, Ri = 2000 1,
C = 150 pF (table C1, category 1)
Powered up test: relay discharge: 8kV, air discharge 15kV, Ri = 2000 1,
C = 330 pF (table C2, category 1)
Line-bound interference ISO 7637-2:2004
Electr. power input UBat = 14V
Typ. [W] Max. [W]
in neutral position 0.4 0.6
at max. adjustment speed 12
in switch or intermediate position 3.6 5.0
in float 6 12
Input signal CAN, physical layer acc. to ISO 11898 High Speed,
standard transmission rate 250 kBaud
Connections Compact connector Jet connector
Pin 1 = ground Pin 1 = UBat
Pin 2 = CAN high Pin 2 = CAN low
Pin 3 = CAN low Pin 3 = CAN high
Pin 4 = UBat Pin 4 = ground
Sinusoidal vibration test DIN EN 60 068-2-6, 10 Hz 2000 Hz, 57,5 > 2000 Hz, 6.93 g rms
10 Hz > 57.5 Hz, 1.5 mm pp
Broadband noise test DIN EN 60 068-2-64, 5 Hz 2000 Hz, aeff 86.9 m/s2
Shock test DIN EN 60 068-2-27, a = 500 m/s2, 11 ms, 60 cycles
DIN EN 60 068-2-29, a = 400 m/s2, 6 ms, 300 cycles

548
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 31/40

Reading out the error code with the EHS diagnostic tool, error interpretation
The EHS Diagnostics Tool is a software program specially developed for troubleshooting in EHS systems in vehicles or
on the test bed. The diagnostic tool is used for identifying and diagnosing individual valves or all valves in the block / tractor.
The technical data and error memory of the valves can be read out via RS232 (individual valve only) or CAN (together).
For the RS232, the baudrate is set to 9600 baud; for the CAN, the baudrate is automatically calculated
Overview for internal diagnostics
Special measures for protecting against malfunctions resulting from contamination, material defects and similar are not specified.
The equipment does not perform any safety function without additional measures on the part of the user.
Fail-safe In the event of a power failure, short circuit or failure in the oil supply, the actuator will automatically
switch the pilot spool to neutral (spool is spring-centered)
Error detection Error Reaction in case of error:
Internal error: Control spool not in neutral position CAN: diagnostic message via CAN bus
when switching on Caution: Uncontrolled load shifts possible,
system must be shut down.
Spool not deflected far enough Valve switched to neutral, optionally only error message
Control spool deflected too far or If countersteering does not help, the actuator will be
does not return to neutral de-energized.
(e.g. spool held or stuck) CAN: diagnostic message via CAN bus
Caution: Uncontrolled load shifts possible,
system must be shut down.
Displacement pick up defective Valve is not actuated 2
Current measurement defective Valve is not actuated
Output stage defective Valve is not actuated.
Checksum error via
Main program Valve is not actuated
EEPROM customer area Checksum test, optionally only error message or shutdown
RAM error Test, either for error message or shutdown
Computer error Error due to interference peaks:
A second attempt is only permissible if the setpoint was first
set to neutral.
Other computer errors:
CAN: diagnostic message via CAN bus
Caution: Uncontrolled load shifts possible,
system must be shut down.
External errors: Supply voltage below Valve is not actuated (with CAN: above Bosch limit,
permissible range optionally only error message)
Supply voltage above Valve is not actuated (with CAN: below Bosch limit,
permissible range optionally only error message)
Setpoint voltage below Valve is not actuated
permissible range
Setpoint voltage above Valve is not actuated
permissible range
No setpoint message Valve is not actuated
(only with CAN)
Implausible setpoint message Valve is not actuated
(only with CAN)
No configuration message Valve is not actuated
(only with CAN)
Manual actuation (on manual lever Valve remains switched off, no counter reaction,
of the valve) no electric control possible
Visual error display Diagnostics LED in device plug Flash code indicates type of error (see flash code)
Fault diagnostics with The error is transmitted via CAN with an error code.
CAN The transmission message diagnostics is sent up to 5 times directly after the error occurs,
then every 100 ms (adjustable). The error code is transmitted (see CAN message description).

549
32/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

General information on CAN control

The EHS valve can be easily controlled via the serial CAN interface. A message can be used here to specify the operation modes
Neutral, Lift, Lower, Float as well as the oil-flow setpoint. A second message can be used for both Lift and Lower
(different for each) to set the characteristic shape, characteristic gradient and ramp times. Conversely, the valve can use an error
code to provide detailed information to the higher-order control panel about any errors which have occurred.
Finally, the valve can be permanently reprogrammed with the parameterization messages (CAN baudrate and identifier, battery
voltage limits, valve number, etc.).

General CAN conventions:

Standard setting
Baudrate 250 kBaud, to ) 1 MBaud possible
Sensing Single sensing action
Time of sensing action At 3/4 of the bit length
Synchronization edges Only edges from recessive to dominant
Synchronization steps SJW = 1 BTL cycle
Caution: The maximum baudrate must always be tested in the vehicle and is dependent on:
Data traffic on the bus
Effectiveness of the internal hardware identifier filter, affected e. g. by:
Allocation of the CAN identifiers which do not affect the valves
CAN identifier set, see TKU: Z 206 E00 444

550
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 33/40

Characteristics for forming target values and time ramps

Characteristic gradient
The characteristic gradient can be used to linearly reduce valve deflection from 100 % to 0 %.

255 steps can be programmed: 00hex, 01hex, 02hex......FEhex

0 %, 0.39 %, 0.78 %, ...100 %

In CAN mode, the value of the characteristic gradient is transferred in the configuration message; in PWM mode, it is in the valve
EEPROM and can be programmed. Standard setting is 100 %. The characteristic gradient should preferably selected with values
as shown.
Characteristic-curve
g g
100
FE
F0
90 DC
C8
B4
A0
80
8C
78 2
64
70 50
3C
28
14
60
0A
01
Output [%]

50

40

30

20

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Input [%]

For CAN control, the input corresponds to the oil-flow target value. For PWM control, input = 0...100 % corresponds
to a PWM pulse-duty factor of 53...85 % for lowering or 47...15 % for lifting (with standard characteristic vertices). Output
corresponds to the oil flow at the directional valve.

551
34/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Characteristic-curve shape
The characteristic shape can change from linear to heavily progressive. If needed, the valves fine control characteristic
can be changed.

15 steps can be programmed separately for lifting and lowering: 0hex, 1hex, 2hex......Ehex
linear...................progressive

In CAN mode, the value for the characteristic shape is transferred in the configuration message. In PWM mode it is in the valve
EEPROM and can be programmed.

Characteristic curvature
100
0
1
90 2
3
4
80 5
6
7
8
70 9
A
B
60 C
D
E
Output [%]

F
50

40

30

20

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Input [%]

For CAN control, the input corresponds to the oil-flow target value. For PWM control, input = 0...100 % corresponds to a signal
voltage or a PWM pulse-duty factor of 53...85 % for lowering or 47...15 % for lifting (with standard characteristic curve vertices).
Output corresponds to the oil flow at the directional valve.

552
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 35/40

Time ramps
By using time ramps, the dynamics of the valve can be reduced in a well-targeted manner. The ramp time is then the time needed
to run through the full stroke (from 0 to 100 % or 100 % to 0 % for lifting or lowering).

255 separate steps can be programmed for lifting and lowering and for switching on and off:
00hex, 01hex, 02hex.........FEhex
0, 16, 32,............4064ms

In CAN mode, the values for the time ramp are transferred in the configuration message. In PWM mode they are in the valve
EEPROM and can be programmed.
Time ramps
100

90
01
02
80 05
0F
1E
2D 2
70
3C
4C
5A
60 69
78
Output [%]

87
50 96
A5
B4
C3
40
D2
E1
F0
30 FE

20

10

0
0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

2800

3000

3200

3400

3600

3800

4000

4200

4400

4600

4800

5000

Time [ms]

553
36/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Installing the control block

Preparation Install the shuttle valve of the control block segments acc. to chapter 5.5
Shuttle valve.
Install the sealing elements of the control block segments acc. to chapter 5.4
Repairing flange surface sealing elements.

If the control block segment flange surface has stamp marks and if they
were treated with a whetstone, a spacer disc must be threaded onto tie bolt
screws , and .

Installation of the port plate 1. Use only original M 8 tie bolts from Rexroth (hardness class 10.9).
2. Screw in tie bolt screws to clockwise by hand to the ground.

Installation of the port plate

Installation of the control block Push the control block segments over the tie bolts in the specified order,
segments with the flange on the side opposite the O-ring facing the port plate.

Installation of the EHR23-EM2

control valve

Installation of the EHR33-EHS1

control valve

554
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 37/40

Installation description

Installation of the SB33-EHS1

control valve
Installation of the end plate 1. Align the end plate with the flange surface to the control block,
sliding it over the tie bolts to the stop.
2. Screw the nuts, without washers or retaining discs, onto the tie bolt screws
clockwise by hand.
3. Align the control block segments with one another.
4. Pretension nuts with a torque of 5+1 Nm.
5. Tighten the nuts clockwise with a torque acc. to the table.
2
Tightening sequence A A .

Tightening torques for nuts

Oiled
25.5+2,5 Nm
25.5+2,5 Nm
25.5+2,5 Nm

Installation of the end plate

555
38/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Specifications / regulations

The valve itself performs no safety function. It can fail. The tractor manufacturer (customer) must take safety measures
as necessary.

Additional notes on operation and commissioning

For block assembly and installation in the tractor:
Do not misplace or damage O-rings, back-up rings and shuttle valves.
Shock-like loads above the specified values may cause invisible concealed damage and must be avoided.
The installation positions of the valves in the machine must be such that mechanical damage, e.g. due to stones etc., with con-
sequential damage such as housing deformation, jamming, damaged control elements, fractured or damaged cables are avoided.
Risk in event of drop in pilot pressure
If, for example, oil from the inlet flows into the system faster than it can flow through the check valves and the main spool,
this could cause impermissible pressure spikes. Examine critical operating conditions during commissioning.
ESD was tested according to ISO 10605: 2008 tables C1 and C2, each in category 1, see General electrical details.
Adherence to the standard must also be ensured during installation and painting.
Note: If a hydraulic motor is operated with a directional valve in float position, the motor can turn freely.
If the hydraulic motor is turned by an external force and is quickly stopped by switching the directional valve to cutoff, the
moment of inertia of the hydraulic motor could give rise to very high pressure spikes that could damage the hydraulic system.
This could happen, for example, when the machine is switched off or the pilot pressure is cut off. The check valves in the
directional valve and the control spool then move to neutral.

For further details, please refer to Bosch Rexroth instruction manual RE-66132-B

Additional documents
Title Document number Document type

Control block SB33-EHS1, EHR33-EHS1 RE 66132-B Instruction manual

 Control block SB33-EHS1 RE 66132-10-R Repair instructions

Control valve SB33-EHS1 RE 66132-20-R Repair instructions

Control valve EHR33-EHS1 RE 66132-30-R Repair instructions

On Board Electronic SB33-EHS1 RE 66132-40-R Repair instructions

2/2 Solenoid valve RE 18136-16 Data sheet

SB33-EHS1 Interface description, Hydraulic Z 206 800 810 Technical information

SB33-EHS1 Interface description, Electronic Z 206 E00 444 Technical information

Air bleeding directional valves MH 121 Commissioning notes

Available from your

Supplied installation drawing / hydraulic plan Project drawing
machine or system manufacturer.

Hydraulic fluids on mineral oil basis RE 90220 Data sheet

Hydraulic fluids on mineral oil basis

RE 90220-1 Data sheet
for axial piston units

556
RE 66 132/04.12 | Control Block SB33-EHS1 Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 39/40

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in this document:

Abbreviation Meaning
PP Port plate
CAN Controller Area Network
PRV Pressure relief valve
Th-CV Throttle check valve
DA Double-acting
EHR Electronic and hydraulic hitch control
EHS1 Pilot controlled electro-hydraulic actuator
EP End plate
SA Single-acting
IPC Individual pressure compensator
LS Load sensing
OBE On Board Electronic
RfA Return flange work port A
SB33 Control block, directional valve series 33
2
Spare parts
Spare parts and material numbers can be found on the Internet at
www.boschrexroth.com/spc

Contacts for accessories and spare parts

Accessories and spare parts are available
from vehicle manufacturers (specialist dealers),
from system manufacturers and
from your BoschRexroth dealer.

The Rexroth sales partners can be found on the Internet at

www.boschrexroth.com/addresses

Address all questions regarding spare parts to your responsible Rexroth Service
partner or the service department of the plant that manufactures the control block.

Bosch Rexroth AG
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2
71701 Schwieberdingen
Germany
Tel. +49 (0) 711-811-84 81
Fax +49 (0) 711-811-28 11
[email protected]

557
40/40 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Control Block SB33-EHS1 | RE 66 132/04.12

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informations
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Product Unit Mobile Controls reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
D-71701 Schwieberdingen ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Fax +49 (0) 711-811 5 11 18 14 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
[email protected] the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.com/brm remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

558
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Steuerblcke
Valve Modules

Designation Type Size Data sheet Page

Hitch control valves EHR 5, 23 RE 66125 561

Traction module (flow divider) RTM 16, 25 RE 64592 577

Slew drive module MSC 16 RE 64593 603

Check-Q-meter FD 1232 RE 27551 615

Stabilising module RSM2 10 RE 64614 625

Stabilising module RSM2 16 RE 64617 631

Stabilising module RSM2 25 RE 64618 635

Multi-way directional valves MH.W. 6, 20, 30 RE 64638 639 3

Pressure relief valves RE 25860 647

Flow control valves RE 27574 659

Safety valves, type-approved 0 532 VA RE 50153

(see RE 90010-04, chapter 4)

Thermal pressure valve MHDBDT 6 RE 64309 667

Throttle check valve and check valve MHFS, MHSV 20, 25, 32 RE 64548 671

For the latest information on valve modules, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/mobile-valves
559
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

560
 RE 66 125/05.10 1/16
Hitch control valves Replaces:
RE 66 125/09.04

EHR5-OC, EHR5-LS, EHR23-EM2

Electronic-hydraulic
hitch control EHR

EHR5... Qmax = 60 l/min

EHR23... Qmax = 100 l/min

3
Contents Page Features
EHR-valves in flange or segmental design
System description EHR 2 combinably with directional control valves
EHR5-OC 4 for working hydraulics
EHR5-LS 7 Applications:
EHR23-EM2, -ERV 9 electronic-hydraulic hitch control for tractors,
Installation instruction 16 header control for combines.
Hitch control valves for:
position control, draft control, mixed control,
pressure- and slip control, as well as active vibration
damping (transport mode)

561
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR-System 14 3 2 10 11 9
System components
1 Hydraulic pump
2 Hitch control valve, rear-end
3 Hitch control valve, front
12 13
4 Radar velocity sensor
5 Speed sensor
6 Draft sensor
7 Pressure sensor
8 Lift cylinder
9 Position sensor

10 Control panel, rear-end

11 Control panel, front

12 Electronic control unit 7 1 4 5 6 8

13 Rear-end actuation

14 Inductive position sensor

Mode of operation Vibration damping

The hydraulic pump 1 supplies oil to the servo solenoid valve In order to reduce fluctuations in front-axle load and thereby
2 which controls the lift cylinder 8 . The cylinders operate increase steering control, sensors 6 and 9 are used to
on the linkage to raise, hold or lower the attached implement. measured the controlled variable. This is evaluated by the
The electronic control unit 12 receives the setpoint value via electronic control unit
12 , which then transwiths the appro-
the control panel 10 and the actual values via the sensors 9 priate electronic signals to the hitch control valve
2 .
and 6 .
The control deviation resulting from the comparison of set- Slip control
point and actual value is conditioned in the control unit
12 and
The slip control offers the following advantages:
then fed to the hitch control valve 2 . The raising and lowering
Savings in both time and fuel,
modules are controlled by 2 proportional solenoids.
Reduced tyre wear,
The following different operating modes can be implemented:
The soil is treated with greater care,
The driver is under less strain,
Position control The vehicle does not get stuck.
In this case, the controlled variable is the position of the hitch. This function is carried out by the radar sensor 4 and the
The position sensor 9 , which is operated by a cam on the speed sensor 5 .
hitch, supplies the feedback signal.
Pressure control
Draft control Pressure control enables optimum packing of the soil. The
In this case, the controlled variable is the force at the trailing output signals from the pressure sensor 7 are processed in
linkage. If it can be kept constant, it means that the tractor the control unit
12 and sent to on the hitch control valve
2 .
power is being used optimally, for example when ploughing
undulating land and inhomogeneous soil. The feedback signal Front-end control
is supplied by the draft sensors 6 . The draft is adjusted by
The setpoints for front-end control are present using con-
trol panel
varying the working depth of the attached implement (e.g.
11 .The feedback signals are transwithted to the
electronic control unit
12 by sensors 7 and
plough).
14 . On the basis
of the control deviation resulting from the setpoint/feedback
Mixed control signal comparison, the flow rate of the hitch control valve 3 is
In this case, the actual values of position and draft are mixed proportionally controlled. With front-end control, the position
in an adjustable ratio at the control panel and then processed and pressure-control functions can be carried out.
as the controlled variable. Mixed control allows the variations
in working depth due to fluctuations in soil resistance, which External control
occur with pure draft control, to be reduced.
The position sensor fixed to the attached implement supplies
electric signals which are evaluated in the control unit
12 and
hitch control valve 2 , thus enabling the attached implement
to be controlled in a defined position.

562
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

Rear-end actuation
The hitch can be raised and lowered using rear-end switch
13 .

Switch-on interlock
Besides its control and actual value conditioning functions, the The lift height is also monitored and its liwith can be prese-
electronic control unit also incorporates various supervisory cir- lected by means of a potentiometer.
cuits. A switch-on interlock prevents the hitch from making any The cable of the position sensor is monitored for open circuits
movement when the system is first switched on. The interlock or short circuits and, in the event of a fault, the control unit is
is released the first time the lift switch is operated. tripped so that the hitch cannot move.

CAN-Bus in the tractor

For years, the amount of electronics in the tractor has been Every future-oriented, high-performance electronic concept
growing steadily. This leads to greater complexity of the elec- makes exacting demands for inter-system exchange of informa-
tronic functions in the control units, which have to exchange tion combined with high transmission reliability. A suitable bus
or coordinate their information in order to accomplish their system is found in the Controller Area Network (CAN), since it
tasks. Here, the transfer of data via the conventional wiring allows equal-access stations to be linked to one another via
harness has often proven to be unsuitable. A solution is the a serial data bus. A further advantage of CAN over conventional
use of a serial data bus, which achieves a reduction in the cabling is the fact that any transmission errors which occasion-
wiring harness and connectors. ally occur due to electromagnetic interference are detected
and automatically corrected through a repeat transmission.
CAN features:
Considerably greater functional
reliability for all electronic systems.
High information density and baud rate.
Link-up enables simultaneous
communication between several
sensors, control units and
display units.
Internationally recognised stan-
dard. ISO 11898 and 11519-2,
Control panels for: 3
and SAEJ 1939.
Directional
Less cabling required, which Electronic control units for:
control valves
means smaller installation
EHR-Front EHR-Rear
space, lower costs and less sus-
1 0.00 0.00
ceptibility to interference. 2 0.00 0.00 SRC
Interface has greater error toler- P + -- S

ance and high interference immunity.

Optimum diagnostic capabilities CAN
thanks to error code output.
Maximum possible resolution. !

P
Cluster instrument R
LS

Central modular control block

CAN-Signal
CAN message

CAN

For additional documents, see RE 95337, application software

Electrohydraulic hitch control EHR.

563
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR5-OC
Hitch control valves

1 3-way pressure compensator

2 Raising module

3 Lowering module

4 Non-return valve

Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Symbol 3

A A
4 4 4
3 3 3

2 S 2 S 2 S

H H H

P
1 1 1

R2 P R1 R2 R1 R2 P R1 A

Technical Data
Design Proportional valve, single-acting, flange-design
Port connections Internal thread see table below
Installation position Axis Z Z, max. 30 deviation from the horizontal
Ambient temperature range 30...+80 C
Hydraulic fluid Hydraulic oils with mineral oil base to DIN/ISO.
Other, e.g. environmentally friendly fluids, available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s perwithted range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
...2000 mm2/s perwithted for starting
Fluid temperature range Operating 20...90 C, short time 30...+100 C
Filtering Contamination at least class 19/16 to ISO/DIS 4406 or class 10 to NAS 1638
optained with filter `25 = 75
Max. permissible pressure P: 220 bar, A: 220 bar, R1: max. 5 bar, but smaller than load pressure, R2: max. 10 bar
Rated flow QSN, QHN see table below
Load drop at port A max. 4 cm3 per minute at 125 bar, viscosity 35 mm2/s
Mode of operation Direct spool operation by means of proportional solenoids 12 V, Imax 3.35 A
Electrical connections Plug connection 2-pin
Degree of protection IP 64 A

Ordering-No. Drawing-No. Port connections: Lower- Raising Emer- Position Symb.

A A in the flange P Thread *) ing QSN QHN gency of
(max. 25 l/min) [l/min] [l/min] manual solenoid
actua- con-
tion nector
0 521 222 002 A 521 023 253 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 II 60 40 with  2
0 521 222 003 A 521 023 711 7/8 -14 UNF Flange II 60 60 without + 1
0 521 222 005 A 521 023 716 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 II 60 40 without + 2
0 521 222 006 A 521 023 717 M22x1.5 Flange I 60 60 with  1
0 521 222 008 A 521 023 253 M22x1.5 M18x1,5 II 60 40 with  2
0 521 222 009 A 521 023 723 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 II 60 40 with  2
0 521 222 010 A 521 023 253 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 II 60 60 with  2
0 521 222 012 A 521 023 733 closed x Flange II 60 20 without + 3
R 917 000 208 R 917 000 208 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 II 60 max. 40 without  2
R 917 000 878 R 917 000 878 M22x1.5 Flange I 60 60 without  1
R 917 005 088 A 521 023 717 M22x1.5 Flange II 60 60 with  1
R 917 006 052 A 521 023 246 M22x1.5 Flange II 20 40 with  1
R 917 006 650 A 521 023 246 M22x1.5 x Flange II 60 40 with  3
*) Execution I: DIN 3852, part of 1
Execution II: DIN 3852, part of 3, accordingly ISO 6149 (for O-ring sealing)
 = As shown, see page 5
 = Raising and lowering solenoids turned 90
 = Raising and lowering solenoids with different coding

564
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

EHR5-OC

167.8 Installation instruction see page 16

77.5
81.91 57.3
47.1
44
39.3
Flange connection P
Flanschanschluss 23
10.1
22.3
8.4 (3x)
15 (3x)

19.5
34 E 13 E 22.5
E
R1

0
Heben
Raising

0.5
0

R1

22
27
44.5

49.3
66.5

62
85.5
115
R2

84
A'

A M22x1.5 R1
0
48 Senken
Lowering E R1 14.4
incl.
16.8 24.4
24.3 30.3
75
P = Pump port
28.41 A, A = Cylinder port
13

R1 = Cylinder return port

R2 = Return port 3
E = Mounting hole
max. 60

Z e = 25+6 Nm
37

67
43.5

Gegenflche
Fixing surfaceRRmax
max 6 geschliffen
grinded
Z
28.41 oder
or RRmax
max8 8milled
gefrst
13
max. 60

Z
37

67
22.5

21
Gewindeanschluss
Z Screw thread P P

Characteristic curves
60 80
p A A R = 15 bar
70
T = 50 C 50
60
40
Lowering
QSN [l/min]

50
QHN [l/min]
Raising

30 40

30
20
20
10
10

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
I [A] I [A]

565
6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR5-OC
Subplate 30.5

32
78
69
50 11.2 44
10 23
30 10.1 32
P E

9
P' 9/16-18 UNF 28
2J512

35
0.5

13
27

15
66.5
145

132.5
85,5

R2 F MB

110.5
110

R1
13

E
57.2

12.5
9

Made in

23.9 9
39.3
R 1 1/16-12 UNF 28
47.1

P 3/4-16 UNF 28
Circuit diagram
Schaltplan
R2 P R1 E = Mounting hole
R F = Mounting threads
32

P'

P 30.5

PRV kg
p [bar]
Subplate for EHR5-OC 205+10 1,5 1 525 503 641

566
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

EHR5-LS
Hitch control valves

Symbol 1 Symbol 2

A A
4 3 4 3

2 S 2 S

1 3-way pressure compensator
H H

2 Raising module

3 Lowering module
1
Y P
1
R1 A

4 Non-return valve
Y P R1

Technical Data
Design Proportional valve, single-acting, flange-design
Port connections Internal thread see table below
Installation position Axis Z Z, max. 30 deviation from the horizontal
Ambient temperature range 30...+80 C
Hydraulic fluid Hydraulic oils with mineral oil base to DIN/ISO.
Other, e.g. environmentally friendly fluids, available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s perwithted range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
...2000 mm2/s perwithted for starting
Fluid temperature range Operating 20...90 C, short time 30...+100 C 3
Filtering Contamination at least class 19/16 to ISO/DIS 4406 or class 10 to NAS 1638
optained with filter `25 = 75
Max. permissible pressure P: 220 bar, A: 220 bar, R1: max. 5 bar, but smaller than load pressure
Rated flow QSN, QHN see table below
Load drop at port A max. 4 cm3 per minute at 125 bar, viscosity 35 mm2/s
Mode of operation Direct spool operation by means of proportional solenoids 12 V, Imax 3.35 A
Electrical connections Plug connection 2-pin
Degree of protection IP 64 A

EHR5-LS
Ordering-No. Drawing-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising Emer- Position Symb.
A A in the flange P Thread *) QSN QHN gency of
(max. 25 l/min) [l/min] [l/min] manual solenoid
actuation connector
0 521 222 101 A 521 023 727 M22x1.5 x Flange II 60 60 with  2
R 917 000 664 A 521 023 735 M22x1.5 Flange I 20 17 with  1
R 917 000 198 A 521 023 727 M22x1.5 x Flange II 60 60 without  2
R 917 004 482 R 917 004 482 M22x1.5 x Flange II 60 60 without  2
R 917 004 951 R 917 004 951 M22x1.5 x Flange II 60 60 without + 2
R 917 006 510 R 917 006 510 M22x1.5 x Flange II 60 60 with  2
*) Execution I: DIN 3852, part of 1
Execution II: DIN 3852, part of 3, accordingly ISO 6149 (for O-ring sealing)
 = As shown, see page 8
 = Raising and lowering solenoids turned 90
 = Raising and lowering solenoids turned 60
 = Raising and lowering solenoid connectors with different coding

567
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR5-LS

Installation instruction see page 16

167.42
77.5
81.51 57.3
47.1
44
39.3
30.3
10.1

19.52
8.4 (3x)
15 (3x)

34 E 9.61 E 22.5
E
R1

0
Heben
Raising 0

R1

24.35

22
44.5

40
49.3
66.5

1152

62
P

85.5
842
Y
A'

A M22x1.5 R1
0
48 E R1 14.4 incl.
Senken
Lowering 16.8 24.4
24.3
752
P = Pump port
A, A = Cylinder port
R1 = Cylinder return port
28.41
13

E = Mounting hole
e = 25+6 Nm
max. 60

672

Z
43.52
37

Z Gegenflche
Fixing surfaceRRmax
max 6 geschliffen
grinded
oder
or RRmax
max8 8milled
gefrst

Characteristic curves
60 80
p A A R = 15 bar
70
T = 50 C 50
60
40
Lowering

50
QSN [l/min]

QHN [l/min]
Raising

30 40

30
20
20
10
10

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
I [A] I [A]

568
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

EHR23-EM2, -ERV
Hitch control valves
EM2: direct electromagnetic actuation, proportional
ERV: limit control valve
with flange surface on the O-ring side (symbol 6)
with flange surface opposite the O-ring (symbol 7)

Symbol 1 Symbol 2

5 5

1 2-way pressure compensator

3 A1 3 A1

2 Raising module
4 4
3 Lowering module
B 2 B 2

4 No-return valve
A
R1
A
R1
5 Secondary pressure-relief valve

6
1 1
6 Shuttle valve
6

R Y P R Y P Rx X

Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5

A2 A2
5 5 5

3 A1 3 A1 3 A1
4 4 4
B 2 B B 2
A1
A A 2 A
R1 R1

1 1 1
6 6 6

R Y P Rx X R Y P R1 R Y P Rx X R1

Symbol 6, ERV Symbol 7, ERV

R Y P
5 3
5
3 A1
3 A1
4
4 B 2
B 2
A
R1 Notice to symbol 6 and 7:
A
R1
Not to be used as an end valve
1
1 in the control block.
R Y P

Technical Data
Design Proportional valve, single-acting, segmental design
Port connections Screw-in thread, see pages 1015
Installation position Axis Z Z, max. 30 deviation from the horizontal
Ambient temperature range 30...+80 C
Hydraulic fluid Hydraulic oils with mineral oil base to DIN/ISO.
Other, e.g. environmentally friendly fluids, available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s perwithted range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
...2000 mm2/s perwithted for starting
Fluid temperature range Operating 20...90 C, short time 30...+100 C
Filtering Contamination at least class 19/16 to ISO/DIS 4406 or class 10 to NAS 1638
optained with filter `25 = 75
Max. permissible pressure P, Y: 250 bar, R1: 5 bar, but smaller than load pressure, R: 30 bar
Rated flow QSN, QHN see pages 1015
Load drop at port A max. 4 cm3 per minute at 125 bar, viscosity 35 mm2/s
Mode of operation Direct spool operation by means of proportional solenoids 12 V, Imax 3.35 A
Electrical connections Plug connection 2-pin, except for OBE
Degree of protection IP 64 A

569
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR23-EM2 134.1
8.4 (3x)
Solenoid B E
(lowering)

111.3
170.3 +2
-2

70.3

77
61.6

57.5
Y

11
42.8
E
P

40
18.7

29

21.3
59

11.3
38.3 19.5 21
65.5 42
Solenoid A
(raising) 86.7
28.3 112.4
81.7+0.6
-0.6 133.6
2x 141.5 A1 P = Pump port
3.5 0.5 Nm A1 = Cylinder port
Tightening torque of the fitting
37

125+13 Nm
R1 = Back flow, lowering oil flow
Tightening torque of the fitting
R1 17.5 125+13 Nm
Without emergency R = Back flow
63
manual actuation Y = Control port for regulating pumps
112.5 E = Continuous mounting drilling
Tightening torque for tie bolts
oiled/unoiled:
242.7 +2
-2
25.5(+2.5)/30(+3) Nm
24.3

67 +15 Nm
6.5
24.3

41.7

11.3
57.5
(2x)

13.6
13

24.3

11.4
65 +10 Nm 38.3
Space for plug 65.5
disconnection 86.7

Ordering-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising PRV Emergency Position of EHS Symbol,
Drawing-No. A1 R1 Thread *) QSN QHN pLSV manual solenoid borehole see
[l/min] [l/min] [bar] actuation connector (X1, RX) page 9
R 917 006 918 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 I 65 80 220+20 with  without 1
R 917 005 455 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 I 65 80 220+20 with + without 1
R 917 006 003 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 I 65 50 220+20 with + without 1
R 917 006 449 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 III 65 80 220+20 without  with 2
R 917 005 001 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 III 65 100 203+18 with  with 2
*) Execution I: DIN 3852-1
Execution III: EN ISO 6149-1
 = As shown
 = Raising solenoid connector, towards O-ring side
 = Lowering solenoid connector, towards O-ring side

570
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

EHR23-EM2

134.1
8.4 (3x)

A2 Solenoid B RX E
(lowering)
X
R

111.3
160 +2

27
-2

70.3

77
61.6

57.5
11
54

42.8
6.5
E (3x) Y

40
18.7

-1.5
48.7 +1.5
29

21.3
11.3
38.3 19.5 21
Solenoid A 65.5 42
+1
(raising) 86.7 61.3 -1
28.3 112.4
81.4 133.6
2x 141.5
3.5 +1 Nm 67 +15 Nm
37

P = Pump port
17.5 A1, A2 = Cylinder port
With emergency
Tightening torque of the fitting
manual actuation R1 63 125+13 Nm
112.5 R1 = Back flow, lowering oil flow
Tightening torque of the fitting

242.4 +2
125+13 Nm 3
2 R = Back flow
Y = Control port for regulating
24.3
pumps
E = Continuous mounting drilling
Tightening torque for
67 +15 Nm
tie bolts oiled/unoiled:
6.5

25.5(+2.5)/30(+3) Nm
Tie bolts min. hardness
class 10.9
24.3

41.7

11.3
57.5
(2x)

13.6
13

24.3

8.4 A1
65 +10 Nm 38.3
67 +22 Nm
Space for plug 65.5
disconnection 86.7

Ordering-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising PRV Symbol,

Drawing-No. A2 R1 Thread *) QSN QHN pLSV see
[l/min] [l/min] [bar] page 9
R 917 005 125 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 III 65 80 220+20 3
*) Execution III: EN ISO 6149-1

571
12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR23-EM2
141.5
120.7
86.7
63 14
29.2

Solenoid B E
(lowering)

27 (4x) R

111.3
21.3

88.7
77
57.5
6.5

170.3
Y

11.3
36
R1
120.6

40
E

-1.5
48.7+1.5
E
37

18.7
65.5 19.5 21
+1
Solenoid A 28.3 -1 112.4 42
(raising) 81.7+0.6
-0.6
242.7 +2
-2
A1

P = Pump port
37

A1 = Cylinder port
Tightening torque of the fitting
125+13 Nm
Without emergency A1 17.5 R1 = Back flow, lowering oil flow
R = Back flow
manual actuation 95
Y = Control port for regulating pumps
E = Continuous mounting drilling
Tightening torque for tie bolts
24.3 Oiled/unoiled:
25.5(+2.5)/30(+3) Nm
2x
3,5 0.5 Nm
29
24.3

41.7

57.5

11.4
70.3

(2x) 24.3

38.3
65.5
86.7
134.1

Ordering-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising PRV Symbol,

Drawing-No. A2 R1 Thread *) QSN QHN pLSV see
[l/min] [l/min] [bar] page 9
R 917 005 120 M22x1.5 Flange III 65 90 218+22 4
*) Execution III: EN ISO 6149-1

572
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

EHR23-EM2

134.1
112,5
Solenoid B 8.4 (3x)
(lowering) 12 11.2
A2 E

12
(2
R

x)

111.3
R1

88.7
27

70.3
170.3+2

77
-2

61.6

57.5
65

13
11
41.7

42.8
54

6.5
Made in
Germany

X XXX XXX XXX

7920

E (3x)
XXX

40
18.7

-1.5
48.7 +1.5
29
Y

21.3
11.3
59

38.3 19.5 21

13
65.5 42
Solenoid A
86.7
(raising)
28.3 112.4
81.4 133.6
A1 P = Pump port
2x 141.5
A1, A2 = Cylinder port
3.5 +1 Nm
Tightening torque of the fitting
125+13 Nm
37

R1 = Back flow, lowering oil flow

Tightening torque of the fitting
125+13 Nm
With emergency R1 17.5
R = Back flow
manual actuation 67 +22 Nm
63 Y = Control port for regulating
pumps
112.5
E = Continuous mounting drilling
Tightening torque for 3
242.4 +2
-2 tie bolts oiled/unoiled:
25.5(+2.5)/30(+3) Nm
24.3 Tie bolts min. hardness
class 10.9
X, RX = Pilot oil borehole for EHS
67 +15 Nm
6.5
24.3

41.7

11.3
57.5
(2x)

13.6
13

24.3

11.4
65 +10 Nm 38.3
Space for plug 65.5
disconnection 86.7

Ordering-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising PRV Symbol,

Drawing-No. A1 A2 R1 Thread *) QSN QHN pLSV see
[l/min] [l/min] [bar] page 9
R 917 005 129 M22x1.5 Flange III 65 80 220+20 5
*) Execution III: EN ISO 6149-1 (for O-ring sealing)

573
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR23-EM2-ERV, Limit control valve with flange surface on the O-ring side
8.4 (3x)
Solenoid B 67 +10 Nm
(lowering) E

111.3
170.3+2
-2

77
61.6

40
18.7

-1.5
48.7 +1.5
29

21.3
59

19.5 21
Solenoid A 86.7 42
(raising) 28.3 112.4
81.4 141.5

A1
2x
3.5 +1 Nm
P = Pump port
37

A1 = Cylinder port
Tightening torque of the fitting
125+13 Nm

With emergency 17.5 R1 = Back flow, lowering oil flow

Tightening torque of the fitting
manual actuation 63 125+13 Nm
112.5 R = Back flow
Y = Control port for regulating pumps
E = Continuous mounting drilling
242.4 +2
-2 Tightening torque for tie bolts
24.3 oiled/unoiled:
25.5(+2.5)/30(+3) Nm

67 +15 Nm
6.5

P
24.3

11.3
57.5
(2x)
13

Y 24.3
R

R1 38.3
Space for plug
disconnection 67 +10 Nm 65.5
86.7

Ordering-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising PRV Position of Symbol,

Drawing-No. A1 R1 Thread *) QSN QHN pLSV solenoid see
[l/min] [l/min] [bar] connector page 9
R 917 004 244 M22x1.5 Flange II 65 80 220+20  6
R 917 005 640 M22x1.5 Flange II 65 100 220+20  6
*) Execution II: EN ISO 6149-1 (for O-ring sealing)
 = As shown
 = Direction of the raising and lowering solenoid connectors opposite the flange surface

574
EHR RE 66 125/05.10 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

EHR23-EM2-ERV, Limit control valve with flange surface opposite the O-ring
8.4 (3x)
Solenoid B
67 +22 Nm
(lowering) E

14
R

111.3
27
(3x)

21.3
3

77

-2
160 +2
58
6.5
E 14
85.5

40
18.7

-1.5
48.7 +1.5
29
Y

11.3
P

38.3 19.5 21
+1
Solenoid A 65.5 40.3 -1
(raising) 86.7 42
Space for plug 81.4 112.4
disconnection 141.5
(2x)
13

A1
2x
3.5 +1 Nm
P = Pump port
37

A1 = Cylinder port
Tightening torque of the fitting
125+13 Nm
17.5 R1 = Back flow, lowering oil flow
With emergency
Tightening torque of the fitting
manual actuation 63
125+13 Nm
112.5 R = Back flow
Y = Control port for regulating pumps
E = Continuous mounting drilling
242.4 +2
-2
Tightening torque for tie bolts
oiled/unoiled:
28.3 25.5(+2.5)/30(+3) Nm
3
67 +15 Nm

65 +10 Nm

Ordering-No. Port connections: Lowering Raising PRV Position of Symbol,

Drawing-No. A2 R1 Thread *) QSN QHN pLSV solenoid see
[l/min] [l/min] [bar] connector Ppage 9
R 917 006 959 M22x1.5 Flange I 65 80 220+20  7
R 917 001 441 M22x1.5 Flange III 65 100 220+20  7
*) Execution I: DIN 3852-1
Execution III: EN ISO 6149-1 (for O-ring sealing)
 = As shown
 = Lowering solenoid connector towards line port A1

575
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics EHR RE 66 125/05.10

EHR23-EM2
80 110
Characteristic curves 70 100
90
p A A R = 15 bar 60 80
T = 50 C
50 70

QSN [l/min]

QHN [l/min]
Lowering
60

Raising
40
50
30 40
20 30
20
10
10

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
I [A] I [A]

Installation instruction for hitch control valves EHR5 and EHR23

The valves must be completely filled with hydraulic fluid upon comissioning into service and during operation.
During service, the proportion of dispersed air in the oil must be low, as this may lead to malfunctions and to the hydraulic
components.
According to the latest information, proportions of undissolved air in oil within the range of 0.2...0.5 % by vol. under normal
pressure are deemed to be risk-free.
If greater proportions by volume are present, a field test under worst-case conditions must be performed and documented.

Instruction for plug connections

To ensure the reliable function of the plug system, use only Bosch GmbH specified mating plugs.
Customer specified plug system.
The customer is responsible for the function and reliability. Failty plug systems are not guaranteed by Bosch GmbH.

Further information on the correct handling of hydraulic products from Bosch Rexroth can be found in our publication:
Product-specific instructions RE 66 125-B2.

For further information on the properties of the flange mating surface and recommendations for the solenoid mating connector,
see notes in the quotation drawings.

Information on the name plate

Bosch Rexroth
Ordering no. Production date

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Produktbereich Mobile Steuerungen reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
D-71701 Schwieberdingen ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Telefax +49 (0) 711-811 5 11 69 23 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
[email protected] the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.com/brm remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

576
Traction module RTM RE 64592/05.2012
Replaces: 06.2006
1/26

(flow divider)

Data sheet

Size 16; 25
Component series 1X
Nominal pressure 500 bar
Max. flow:
160 l/min (size 16)
440 l/min (size 25) HAD 7373/05

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Protection against overrevving of hydraulic motors in control
Features 1 mode
Function, section 2 Synchronous operation of a maximum of 4 actuators
connected in parallel within a wide flow range
Technical data 3, 4
Adjustable dividing accuracy, can be preselected or re-
Ordering code 5 to 7 adjusted by means of proportional orifice
Symbols 8 to 11 Double acting (dividing or summating) flow divider
Characteristic curves 12, 13 Constant division ratio in the case of summating flow
Application examples 14 to 19 division
Unit dimensions 20 to 25 Suitable for open and closed circuits
Available individual components 26 2-, 3- and 4-fold flow division
Optionally with or without free-wheel operation
Can be switched in all functions
Integrated pressure relief/anti-cavitation valves for
protecting hoses and preventing cavitation
Electro-proportional regulation of the metering land

577
2/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Function, section

1 Housing 4.2 Reducing piece 9 Control spool

2 Meter-in orifice (for free-wheel 2) 10 Compression spring
3 Proportional valve 5 Pressure compensator 11 Spring chamber
4.1 Plug screw 6 Set screw 12 Bore
(without free-wheel 1) 7 Sleeve 13 2/2 directional valve
8 Chamber

Version RTMS2 Section A-A (without free-wheel circuit)

1 8 3

12

7 9 11 2 4.2 13 5 4.1

Traction module RTM (5) and on to channels A, B, C, and D. If the dividing

RTM traction modules are flow dividers for controlling the accuracy is to be increased, the pressure in spring chamber
synchronism and free-wheel of hydraulic motors. They can (11) must be increased by energizing proportional valve (3)
be used for 2-, 3- and 4-wheel drives and can be operated in so that the pressure compensator spool (5) starts to move
the open or closed circuit. earlier, and the traction accuracy of the vehicle is increased.
Design For the automatic change-over from the dividing to the
summation function, the 2/2 directional valve (13) moves
The basic components are housing (1), meter-in orifice (2),
from the right-hand to the left-hand limit stop.
proportional valve (3), reducing piece (4.2) or plug screw
(4.1) and pressure compensator (5). The differential lock can be switched on or off by controlling
port X by means of an external 3/2 directional valve.
In housing (1) sleeve (2) is radially fixed by set screw
(6), but can also move axially. According to the selected
NOTE!
division/summation ratio, metering orifices are integrated
in the sleeve, which are used for dividing and directing the The necessary operating pressure in port X is the present
outflowing flows into channels A, B, C and D. Pressure high pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the RTM. The
compensators (5) are integrated in the various actuator ports change-over is performed by means of an external
to compensate for differences in load pressures. directional valve (separate order).
The main flow flows from P into chamber (8) and shifts f X pressureless free-wheel, divider deactivated
control spool (9) against pre-loaded spring (10). This f X pressurized synchronism, divider activated
causes the cross-section of the metering orifice to change f A flushing valve must be provided between the pump
depending on the amount of flow, and the hydraulic fluid is and the RTM.
fed through bores (12) to the spool of pressure compensator External directional valve: see RE 18136-21
Flushing valve: see RE 18133-02

578
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 3/26

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Size 16 25
Weight Summation flow division Summation flow division
S2 S3 S4 S2 S3 S4
Without free-wheel function kg 14.0 18.2 18.2 29.9 37.4 37.4
With free-wheel function kg 14.1 18.3 18.3 30.0 37.5 7.5
Installation orientation Horizontal
Type of connection SAE flange connection
Type of mounting Contact face mounting
Base coat (standard) RAL 5010

Hydraulic
Max. operating P, A, B, C, D p bar 500
pressure in port
L p bar At zero pressure to tank
P p, S p bar 40
Pressure differential p bar approx. 2
Max. flow in port P qV, max l/min 80 or 160 220 or 440
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Phosphate ester (HFD-R)
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid Class 20/18/15
Cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c) For this, we recommend a filter with a minimum retention rate of
10 75.

579
4/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Electrical, proportional solenoid

Type of voltage U DC voltage
Supply voltage V 12 DC 24 DC
Solenoid coil resistance cold value at 20C 2.3 4.8
max. hot value 3.5 7.2
Max. coil temperature 1) C 150
Duty cycle % 100 100
Type of protection to VDE 0470-1, DIN 40050-9 IP69K (with plug-in connector mounted and locked)
Max. control current (nominal current) I A 1.76 1.2
Clock frequency f Hz 225

Electrical, switching solenoid

Type of voltage U DC voltage
Supply voltage V 12 DC 24 DC
Voltage tolerance vs. ambient temperature See diagram
Power consumption W 22
Duty cycle See diagram
Switching time to ISO6403 ON ms 80
(solenoid horizontal)
OFF ms 50
Max. switching frequency s/h 15000
Max. coil temperature 1) C 150
Type of protection to VDE 0470-1, DIN 40050-9 Version K40 IP69K (with plug-in connector mounted and locked)

Electrical, control electronics

Control electronics Modular amplifier VT-MSPA1-100
Plug-in amplifier VT-SSPA1-1.., see RE 30116

CAUTION! Voltage tolerance vs. ambient temperature; duty cycle /

When establishing the electrical connection of K40 , proportional solenoid
properly connect the protective earth conductor (PE ).
120 120
1
NOTE! 110 110
Nominal voltage in %

Further information about the proper handling of 100 100

hydraulic products of Bosch Rexroth can be found in 2
our brochure Hydraulic valves for mobile applications - 90 90
general information, RE 64020-B1.
80 80
1) Due to the surface temperature occurring on the solenoid 3
coil, observe the European standards EN 563 and EN 982!
70 70

60 60

50 50
-30 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 110
Ambient temperature in C

1 Maximum voltage
2 Duty cycle
3 Minimum operate voltage

580
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 5/26

Ordering code

RTM S 1X K40 V 11 *
Size 16 = 16
Size 25 = 25
Travel drive
Summation flow division =S
Number of actuator =2
=3
=4
Division ratio in % 1)
3-fold 4-fold 2-fold
A : B :C A :B:C:D A : B
33 : 33 :33 = A 25 : 25 : 25 : 25 = A 50 : 50 = A
34 : 32 :34 = F 33 : 17 : 33 : 17 = H 60 : 40 = B
25 : 50 :25 = M 27 : 23 : 27 : 23 = K 75 : 25 = C
30 : 40 :30 = T 30 : 20 : 30 : 20 = V
Free-wheel spool
Standard =
Special spool =Y
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
Nominal flow
Max. pump flow - size 16 (l/min) = 080
= 160
Max. pump flow - size 25 (l/min) = 220
= 440
p control
Electro-proportional orifice or orifice with electrical change-over orifice
(adjustable orifice) =P
Fixed orifice (without proportional valve) =F
Free-wheel circuit 3
Without free-wheel function =1
With free-wheel function =2
Secondary valves
Standard: Pressure valve with anti-cavitation feature, pressure setting in bar = H
Plug screw (only for open circuit) =Q
Pressure setting of secondary valve in bar (other values on inquiry)
420 bar = 420
460 bar = 460
CAUTION!
Match pressure setting with travel drive!
Add boost pressure to the pressure setting!
Orifice diameter of fixed orifice, e.g. F12 = 1,2 mm =F..
Operation with adjustable orifice, electro-hydraulic proportional 2) = W9
Operation with adjustable orifice, electro-hydraulic switchable 2) = W7
Supply voltage U = 24 V 2) =1
U = 12 V 2) =3
Electrical connection
Connecting plug 02-pin K40 0T04-2PA, make: Deutsch (standard) 2) 3) = K40
Seal material: FKM seals =V
Line connections: Flange acc. to DIN ISO 6162-2 4) = 11
Special configuration

1) Other division ratios on request. = Preferred program

2) Indication required only in conjunction with electro-proportional
orifice (version P).
3) Mating plugs are not included in the scope of supply and must be
ordered separately.
4) See pages 20 to 25.

581
6/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Supplementary explanations regarding the ordering code with summation flow division RTMS

Free-wheel circuit
Without free-wheel circuit 1

Free-wheel circuit
With free-wheel circuit 2

Operation by means of external directional valve:

X pressureless free-wheel, divider deactivated
X pressurized synchronism, divider activated
(see note on page 2)

p control
Electro-proportional orifice P
Electro-hydraulic proportional operation W9
Supply voltage 24 V 1
Supply voltage 12 V 3

Ordering code: P W91 or P W93

Electrical change-over orifice P

Electro-hydraulic proportional operation W7
Supply voltage 24 V 1
Supply voltage 12 V 3

Ordering code: P W71 or P W73

p control
Fixed orifice F
with orifice diameter of, e.g. 1.2 mm F12

Ordering code: F F12

582
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 7/26

Supplementary explanations regarding the ordering code with summation flow division RTMS

Free-wheel circuit Electro- Electrical change- Fixed orifice

proportional orifice over orifice
Without RTM active Proportional Switching solenoid Dividing accuracy
solenoid de- de-energized defined by fixed
energized orifice
(I = 0)

Proportional
increase Low dividing
in dividing accuracy
accuracy

Proportional Switching
solenoid energized solenoid
(I = Imax) energized
High dividing
accuracy

With X pressurised Proportional Switching solenoid Dividing accuracy

RTM active solenoid de- de-energized defined by fixed
energized orifice
(I = 0)

Proportional
increase Low dividing
in dividing accuracy
accuracy

Proportional Switching
solenoid energized solenoid
(I = Imax) energized
High dividing
accuracy 3
With X pressureless
RTM inactive RTM in free-wheel RTM in free-wheel RTM in free-wheel
mode, electro- mode, electrical mode, fixed orifice
proportional orifice change-over orifice ineffective
ineffective ineffective

Dividing accuracy: see diagrams on pages 12, 13.

583
8/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Symbols with summation flow division, without free-wheel circuit simplified circuit

RTMS2/P1 2-fold A B
S

RTMS3/P1 3-fold S S

A
C B

P1

RTMS4/P1 4-fold S S

A
B
D C

P1

584
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 9/26

Symbols with summation flow division, without free-wheel circuit detailed circuit
A B
RTMS2/P1 2-fold S
S

A B C
RTMS3/P1 3-fold
S S

P1

P
A B C D
RTMS4/P1 4-fold S S

P1

585
10/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Symbols with summation flow division, with free-wheel circuit simplified circuit

RTMS2/P2 2-fold A B
S S

RTMS3/P2 3-fold S S

A
B
C
X
P1

RTMS4/P2 4-fold S S

A
B
D
C
X
P1

586
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 11/26

Symbols with summation flow division, with free-wheel circuit detailed circuit
A B
RTMS2/P2 2-fold S S

A B C
RTMS3/P2 3-fold S S

X
P1

P
A B C D
RTMS4/P2 4-fold S S

X
P1

587
 12/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Characteristic curves (measured with HLP46, oil = 40C 5C; division ratio A = 50:50)

p-qV characteristic curves (Standard configuration)

RTM 16 S RTM 25 S
p in bar

p in bar



Flow in l/min Flow in l/min

Curve Direction of flow Proportional valve Current intensity

(1) Free-wheel
(2) P A, B, C, D de-energized I=0A
(3) P A, B, C, D energized I = 1.8 A at 12 V / 1.2 A at 24 V
(4) A, B, C, D P de-energized I=0A
(5) A, B, C, D P energized I = 1.8 A at 12 V / 1.2 A at 24 V

Dividing accuracy T at 150 bar pressure difference (Standard configuration)

RTM 16 S (qV nom = 80 l/min) RTM 16 S (qV nom = 160 l/min)

Dividing accuracy T in %

Dividing accuracy T in %

Flow in l/min Flow in l/min

Proportional valve energized to max. value (I = 1.8 A T = Deviation of an actuator from the theoretical
at 12 V / 1.2 A at 24 V) characteristic curve, with a pressure difference of 150
(with fixed orifice 1.2 mm) bar between the actuators, in dependence upon inlet
Proportional valve de-energized (I = 0.0 A) flow qV, p

588
 RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 13/26

Characteristic curves (measured with HLP46, oil = 40C 5C; division ratio A = 50:50)

Dividing accuracy T at 150 bar pressure difference (Standard configuration)

RTM-25 S (qV nom = 220 l/min) RTM-25 S (qV nom = 440 l/min)
Dividing accuracy T in %

Dividing accuracy T in %
Flow in l/min Flow in l/min

Proportional valve energized to max. value T = Deviation of an actuator from the theoretical
(I = 1.8 A at 12 V / 1.2 A at 24 V) characteristic curve, with a pressure difference of 150
(with fixed orifice 1.2 mm) bar between the actuators, in dependence upon inlet
Proportional valve de-energized (I = 0.0 A) flow qV, p

589
14/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Application example: Type RTM..S2

A4VG

Operational states of the vehicle:

Stepless, proportional regulation of dividing accuracy
Without current, extended manoeuvrability
Max. current, high dividing accuracy

Ordering code:
RTM..S2.1X/P1H W9.K40V11

590
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 15/26

Application example: Type RTM..S2 with free-wheel circuit

3
A4VG

Operational states of the vehicle:

Operating position 1
Stepless, proportional regulation of dividing accuracy
Without current, extended manoeuvrability
Max. current, high dividing accuracy

Operating position 2
Free-wheel, lines to motors free
No flow division

Ordering code:
RTM..S2.1X/P2H W9.K40V11

591
16/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Application example: Type RTM..S3

A4VG

Operational states of the vehicle:

Stepless, proportional regulation of the dividing accuracy
Without current, extended manoeuvrability
Max. current, high dividing accuracy

Ordering code:
RTM..S3.1X/P1H W9.K40V11

592
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 17/26

Application example: Type RTM..S3 with free-wheel circuit

A4VG
3

Operational states of the vehicle:

Operating position 1
Stepless, proportional regulation of the dividing accuracy
Without current, extended manoeuvrability
Max. current, high dividing accuracy

Operating position 2
Free-wheel, lines to motors free
No flow division

Ordering code:
RTM..S3.1X/P2H W9.K40V11

593
18/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Application example: Type RTM..S4

A4VG

Operational states of the vehicle:

Stepless, proportional regulation of the dividing accuracy
Without current, extended manoeuvrability
Max. current, high dividing accuracy

Ordering code:
RTM..S4.1X/P1H W9.K40V11

594
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 19/26

Application example: Type RTM..S4 with free-wheel circuit

A4VG
3

Operational states of the vehicle:

Operating position 1
Stepless, proportional regulation of the dividing accuracy
Without current, extended manoeuvrability
Max. current, high dividing accuracy

Operating position 2
Free-wheel, lines to motors free
No flow division

Ordering code:
RTM..S4.1X/P2H W9.K40V11

595
20/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Unit dimensions: RTM 16 S2 (nominal dimensions in mm)

Version P2 Version P1

Ports: 1 Port X only with version P2

(electro-proportional orifice with free-wheel)
P = SAE 3/4 J518 (6000 PSI)
A, B = SAE 1/2 J518 (6000 PSI) 2 Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve:
Material no.: R901069096
S = M18X1.5 RN 115.48
Width across flats: A/F = 24 mm
X = M14X1.5 ISO 6149
Tightening torque: MT = 90 + 9 Nm
3 Valve
Width across flats: A/F = 27 mm;
Tightening torque: MT = 45 + 5 Nm
4 Mating plug 02-pin Deutsch DT06-25WR
(not included in the scope of supply; must be ordered
separately; Mat. no. R901017846)
5 Nameplate

596
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 21/26

Unit dimensions: RTM 16 S3 (nominal dimensions in mm)

Version P2 Version P1

5
Ports: 1 Port X only with version P2
(electro-proportional orifice with free-wheel)
P = SAE 3/4 J518 (6000 PSI)
A, B, C = SAE 1/2 J518 (6000 PSI) 2 Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve:
Material no.: R901069096
S, P1 = M18X1.5
RN 115.48 Width across flats: A/F = 24 mm
MA = M14X1.5
ISO 6149 Tightening torque: MT = 90 + 9 Nm
X = M14X1.5
3 Valve
Width across flats: A/F = 27 mm;
Tightening torque: MT = 45 + 5 Nm
4 Mating plug 02-pin Deutsch DT06-25WR
(not included in the scope of supply; must be ordered
separately; Mat. no. R901017846)
5 Nameplate

597
22/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Unit dimensions: RTM 16 S4 (nominal dimensions in mm)

Version P2 Version P1

Ports: 1 Port X only with version P2

(electro-proportional orifice with free-wheel)
P = SAE 3/4 J518 (6000 PSI)
A, B, C = SAE 1/2 J518 (6000 PSI) 2 Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve:
Material no.: R901069096
S, P1 = M18X1.5
RN 115.48 Width across flats: A/F = 24 mm
MA = M14X1.5
ISO 6149 Tightening torque: MT = 90 + 9 Nm
X = M14X1.5
3 Valve
Width across flats: A/F = 27 mm;
Tightening torque: MT = 45 + 5 Nm
4 Mating plug 02-pin Deutsch DT06-25WR
(not included in the scope of supply; must be ordered
separately; Mat. no. R901017846)
5 Nameplate

598
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 23/26

Unit dimensions: RTM 25 S2 (nominal dimensions in mm)

Ports: 1 Port X only with version P2

(electro-proportional orifice with free-wheel)
P = SAE 1 1/4 J518 (6000 PSI)
A, B = SAE 3/4 J518 (6000 PSI) 2 Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve:
Material no.: R901079744
P1 = M22X1.5 RN 115.48
Width across flats: A/F = 30 mm
S = M22X1.5 RN 115.48
Tightening torque: MT = 100 + 10 Nm
X = M14X1.5 ISO 6149
3 Valve
Width across flats: A/F = 27 mm;
Tightening torque: MT = 45 + 5 Nm
4 Mating plug 02-pin Deutsch DT06-25WR
(not included in the scope of supply; must be ordered
separately; Mat. no. R901017846)
5 Nameplate

599
24/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Unit dimensions: RTM 25 S3 (nominal dimensions in mm)

5
Ports: 1 Port X only with version P2
(electro-proportional orifice with free-wheel)
P = SAE 1 1/4 J518 (6000 PSI)
A, B, C = SAE 3/4 J518 (6000 PSI) 2 Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve:
Material no.: R901079744
S, P1 = G 1/2 RN 115.48
Width across flats: A/F = 30 mm
MA = M22X1,5 ISO 6149
Tightening torque: MT = 100 + 10 Nm
X = M14X1,5 ISO 6149
3 Valve
Width across flats: A/F = 27mm;
Tightening torque: MT = 45 + 5 Nm
4 Mating plug 02-pin Deutsch DT06-25WR
(not included in the scope of supply; must be ordered
separately; Mat. no. R901017846)
5 Nameplate

600
RE 64592/05.2012 RTM Bosch Rexroth AG 25/26

Unit dimensions: RTM 25 S4 (nominal dimensions in mm)

5
Ports: 1 Port X only with version P2
(electro-proportional orifice with free-wheel)
P = SAE 1 1/4 J518 (6000 PSI)
A, B, C, = SAE 3/4 J518 (6000 PSI) 2 Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve:
D Material no.: R901079744
Width across flats: A/F = 30 mm
S, P1 = G 1/2 RN 115.48
Tightening torque: MT = 100 + 10 Nm
MA, MB = M22X1.5 ISO 6149
X = M14X1.5 ISO 6149 3 Valve
Width across flats: A/F = 27 mm;
Tightening torque: MT = 45 + 5 Nm
4 Mating plug 02-pin Deutsch DT06-25WR
(not included in the scope of supply; must be ordered
separately; Mat. no. R901017846)
5 Nameplate

601
26/26 Bosch Rexroth AG RTM RE 64592/05.2012

Available individual components

158
159

157

999

Item Designation DC voltage Material no.

157 Coil for individual connection
Proportional solenoid K40 12 V R901003055
24 V R901003053
Switching solenoid K40 12 V R900729189
24 V R900729190
158 Nut R900991453
159 O-ring for pressure tube R900004280
999 Valve seal kit R900733593

See also data sheet RE 18136-21.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Without their
consent it may not be reproduced or given to third parties.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
[email protected] Subject to change.
www.boschrexroth.de

602
Slew drive module RE 64593/06.2010 1/12

Type MSC

Size 16
Component series 1X
Maximum operating pressure 350 bar
Rated flow 160 l/min
HAD 7371/05

Table of contents Features

Contents Page System
Features 1 Independent, separate control of the supply and discharge
Function, control concept 2 flow (meter-in (MI) and meter-out (MO))
Technical data 3 Circulation pressure compensator for load-independent flow
control LUDS
Ordering code 4, 5
Operation of a holding brake
Symbol 6
Mating connector 6
Control concepts
Characteristic curves 7
Open vario = Controlled supply
Unit dimensions 8 to 10
Closed vario = Controlled supply and discharge
Speed vario = Controlled discharge
Free swing = Open discharges

Fields of application
Control of slew drives in the open circuit:
Cranes
Excavators
Drilling machinery
Machinery for forestry

603
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG MSC16 RE 64593/06.2010

Function
The MSC16 slew drive module contains in a compact form Apart from that, a primary (5) and a secondary pressure limi-
the functions required for actuating slew drives in mobile tation (6) is integrated in the slew drive module.
machines. Optionally, valves for loosening the holding brake (10) ca be
Supply and discharge spools are actuated independently. extended by a valve (13) for actuating a dynamic brake.
The pressure compensator is located downstream the supply The discharge spools can be designed in the position
spool. This allows for the realization of different control con- "normally open" or "normally closed".
cepts. Fluctuating or negative loads (e.g. during braking) can
Optionally with pilot oil switch-off (12).
be kept under control by means of these control options.
The pressure drops at the metering orifices depend on the
pressures occurring during accelerations or decelerations of Basic actuations:
the rotary movement. Due to the resolution of the control edg- Open vario
es, energetically optimized acceleration and cavitation-free Closed vario
deceleration (by hydraulically claiming the motor) of the rotary
Speed vario
movement are possible.
Free swing
By opening the discharge spools, a floating position can be
realized without having to renounce the fine control at the Special actuations
main spool.
Actuation of the supply spool (1) is effected via the pressure Thanks to the option of independent supply and discharge
reducing valves (2), control of the discharge via the discharge spool actuation, the user can program the perfect control con-
spools (3) and pressure reducing valves (4) with load-inde- cept for the rotary movement, individually for their application.
pendent flow control (7).
Any unwanted rotation of the upper structure against the
pump is prevented by the load-holding valve (9).

Control concept during rotation

Control concept Direction of rotation Supply spool (MI) Discharge spool A Discharge spool B
(left) (MO) (right) (MO)
Clockwise Proportional right Closed Open
Open vario
Counterclockwise Proportional left Oopen Closed
Clockwise Proportional right Closed Proportional
Closed vario
Counterclockwise Proportional left Proportional Closed
Clockwise Open right Closed Proportional
Speed vario
Ccounterclockwise Open left Proportional Closed
Free swing - Closed Open Open
Free selection of the supply and discharge spool actuation.
Special actuation
Combination of open, closed and speed vario.

MI = Meter in = Supply control

MO = Meter out = Discharge control

604
RE 64593/06.2010 MSC16 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
Size 16
Weight kg Approx. 22
Installation position Horizontal (see page 9)
Environmental/storage temperature range, at zero pressure C 40 to +80
Type of connection See unit dimensions page 8
Mounting type See unit dimensions page 8
Paintwork Standard priming RAL 5010
hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure bar 350
Maximum operating P, MP bar 350
pressure at the port A, B, X, MX bar 350
PV, BR, M1M4 bar 50
T bar 20
L bar Depressurized to the tank
Maximum flow at port P q l/min 160
Flow resistance, uncontrolled p bar 8 (with q = 160 l/min; viscosity 32 mm/s)
neutral circulation P A B T
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524; HFD-R
(phosphoric acid ester); fast bio-degradable hydraulic fluids
according to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221); HETG (rape
seed oil); other hydraulic fluids upon request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic Class 20/18/15 1)
fluid - cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) 3
electrical
Voltage type Direct voltage (DC)
On/off valves:
Supply voltage V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance with 20 C 10 40
Power consumption at 20 C W 14.4 14.4
Duty cycle % 100 100
Proportional valves:
Supply voltage V 12 24
Solenoid coil resistance with 20 C 2.4 12
Duty cycle % 100 100
Max. control current A 1.8 0.8
Recommended chopper frequency Hz 150 150
Protection class according to Version "C4" IP 66 (with mating connector mounted and locked)
VDE 0470-1 (DIN EN 60529), IP 69K (with Rexroth mating connector,
DIN 40050-9 Material no. R901022127)
Version "K40" IP 69K (with mating connector mounted and locked)
Plug-in connector type C4 Junior-Timer
K40 Deutsch plug
Control electronics e.g. BODAS control unit RC
1) The cleanliness classes specified for the components must
be adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration pre-
vents faults and at the same time increases the service life
of the components.

605
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG MSC16 RE 64593/06.2010

Ordering code

MSC 16 1X L L M

Size 16 = 16
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation
and connection dimensions)
Supply spool
80 l/min = 080
160 l/min = 160
Linear =L
Discharge spool
60 l/min = 060
90 l/min = 090
120 l/min = 120
160 l/min = 160
200 l/min = 200
Normally open =O
Normally closed =C
Linear =L
Pressure adjustment in bar, 3-digit
Primary secondary A secondary B, e.g. 140170170 =
Measuring ports
With =M
Pilot oil shut-off valve (optional)
With =S
Without =Z
Shuttle valve external X (optional)
With =W
Without =Z
Damping valve (optional)
Supply/discharge orifice, specification in mm (2-digit), 0.4 mm 2.0 mm = 04 20
Proportional valve dynamic brake (only upon request)
With =B
Without =Z

= Standard types

Standard types and standard units are contained in the

EPS (standard price list).

606
RE 64593/06.2010 MSC16 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Ordering code

V 01 *

Further details in the plain text

Line connections
01 = Pipe thread according to DIN ISO 228/1
Seal material
V= FKM seals
Attention!
Observe compatibility of seals with the hydraulic fluids used!
Electrical connection
K40 = DT04-2P ( Deutsch)
C4 = Junior-Timer 2-pin (AMP) 1)
Supply voltage
G12 = 12 V
G24 = 24 V

1) Note!
Mating connectors are not included in the scope of delivery and must be ordered separately, see also page 6.

Short type
Complete slew drive modules are defined according to the
type code. The order text serves the specify the technical
features and requirements. From the order text, the Rexroth
distribution organization derives a short type as well as a
3
material number.

Example of an MSC16 short type:

MSC 1006 1 0 / 1 MSC16 LUDS G24 -007

Serial number of the

slew drive module
Component series (1X)
Revision status of the series
Number of axes
Load-independent flow control
Direct voltage 24 V
Special number, if applicable

Standard types Material number Ordering code

MSC110010/1MSC16LUDSG24 R901267589 MSC161X/080L090CL180-210-210MZZ04-20ZG24C4V01
MSC-110110/1MSC16LUDSG24 R901267592 MSC161X/160L200CL180-210-210MZZ04-20ZG24C4V01

607
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG MSC16 RE 64593/06.2010

Symbol
Ports 5c 4c 2 7c 7b 4b 5b 23
P Pump N5 C B N4 QW CS M
A, B Actuator
T Tank
X External load indication
L Leakage oil
PV Pilot oil
BR Braking port
MX Measuring port Load indication N3 N2
MP Measuring port Pump
M1M4 Measuring port

U NY Y Q NQ
3c 8 9 22 : 6 3b 21

1 Supply spool
24
2a, b Proportional valve (actuation supply spool)
3a, b Discharge spool
4a, b Proportional valve (actuation discharge spool)
5 Primary pressure valve supply
6a, b Secondary valve 10 Holding brake valve
7 Pressure compensator 11 Optional: Shuttle valve external X port
8 Damping valve (optional) 12 Optional: Pilot oil switch-off
9 Load holding valve 13 Optional: Proportional valve dynamic brake

Mating connector

Recommended mating connector for plug-in connector

type Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP)
Mating connector for FTDRE and FTWE protection
class IP 69K
Material number: R900313533
For litz wire cross-sections from 0.5 to 1 mm and for an insu-
lation diameter of the individual seals from 1.2 to 2.1 mm
Material number: R901022127
For litz wire cross-sections from 0.5 to 1 mm and for an insu-
lation diameter of the individual seals from 2.2 to 3 mm

Note!
Mating connectors are not included in the scope of delivery
Recommended mating connector for Junior Timer 2-pin
and must be ordered separately.
(AMP)

608
 RE 64593/06.2010 MSC16 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Theoretic design characteristic curves

Supply spool

231
Opening cross-section in mm2

211
3
91

71
2
51

31

1
311 411 511 611 711 811 911 :11
Current in A
Spool:
1 80 l/min linear
2 160 l/min linear

Discharge spool linear, normally closed (standard) Discharge spool linear, normally open

71 71
Opening cross-section in mm2

Opening cross-section in mm2

6
61 61
5 5
3
51 51
4 4
41 41
3 3
31 31
2 2
21 21

1 1
311 411 511 611 711 811 911 :11 311 411 511 611 711 811 911 :11
Current in A Current in A

Spool: Spool:
1 60 l/min 1 60 l/min
2 90 l/min 2 90 l/min
3 120 l/min 3 120 l/min
4 200 l/min 4 160 l/min
5 200 l/min

609
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG MSC16 RE 64593/06.2010

Unit dimensions: Line connections

P G1 P = Pump
T G1 A, B = Actuator
A, B G3/4 T = Tank
X G1/4 X = External load indication
MX G1/4 L = Leakage oil
MP G1/4 PV = Pilot oil
M1, M2 G1/4 BR = Braking port
M3, M4 G1/4 MX = Measuring port Load indication
BR G1/4 MP = Measuring port Pump
PV G1/4 M1M4 = Optional: Measuring port override
L G1/2 (without override function, the ports are closed)

Mounting cavities for pipe fittings with thread according

to DIN ISO 228 / DIN 13.

Note!
The subsequent unit dimension serve to describe the product.
Technical modifications reserved.
Observe the valid, relevant type-specific installation drawing.

610
RE 64593/06.2010 MSC16 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Unit dimensions: Without pilot oil switch-off (dimensions in mm)

18
80

76

= Installation position
48

11
11,5

0
207
201
176
3a 154
124
2b 105

3b
10 2a

59
2
0
ca. 228

168

150
140

3
115

113
112

81
66
48
50
28
6
23
70,5
10,5

15
6a
39 41,5

77
5 87
6b
106
0 3 x through hole for 139
valve mounting with 174
screws M10 214
2a, b Proportional valve 228
(actuation
254,5
supply spool)
3a, b Proportional valves
(actuation
discharge spool)
5 Primary valve
supply
6a, b Secondary valves
10 Holding brake valve

611
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG MSC16 RE 64593/06.2010

Unit dimensions: With pilot oil switch-off (dimensions in mm)

18
80

76

= Installation position
48

11
11,5

0 207
201
3a 154
124
2a 105

3b
10
12 2b

59
2
0
ca. 228

168

150

115

113
5

81
66
48
50
28
6
23
70,5
10,5

15
6a
39 41,5

77
87
5 6b
106
0 3 x through hole 139
for valve mounting 174
with screws M10 214
2a, b Proportional valve 228
(actuation
254,5
supply spool)
ca. 288
3a, b Proportional valves
(actuation 202
discharge spool)
5 Primary valve
18

supply
6a, b Secondary valves
10 Holding brake
valve
12 Pilot oil switch-off

612
RE 64593/06.2010 MSC16 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Notes

613
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG MSC16 RE 64593/06.2010

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above serve to describe the product. If there is also
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 information on the use, it is only to be regarded as application examples
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 and proposals.
[email protected] Catalog information does not constitute warranted properties. The
www.boschrexroth.de information given does not release the user from the obligation of own
judgment and verification. Our products are subject to a natural process
of wear and aging.

614
 RE 27 551/06.03 1/10
Check-Q-meter Replaces: 09.97

Type FD

Nominal size 12...32

Series 2X
Max. Operating pressure 350 bar
Max. Flow 560 L/min
K2791/2

Overview of contents Features

Contents Page For installation in manifolds (cartridge valve),

Features 1 With SAE flanged ports,
Functions 1 For subplate mounting,
porting pattern to DIN 24 340, form D,
Ordering details 2
ISO 5781 and CETOPRP 121 H,
Symbols 2 subplates to catalogue sheet RE 45 062
(separate order),
Function desctription, section 3
Use subplate version when valve panel mounting.
Circuit examples 4
Technical data 5
Characteristic curves 5
Functions
Unit dimensions 6 to 9 Pilot operated check valve, leak-free,
The check-Q-meter controls the returning flow qV2 in relation
to the flow being directed into the opposite side of the
actuater qV1. With cylinders the area tratio (qV2 = qV1 )
has to be taken into account,
By-pass valve, free-flow in opposite direction,
Optional built-on secondary pressure relief valve (only for
valve with flange connections).

615
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics FD | RE 27 551/06.03

Ordering details

FD 2X / V *
Nominal size 12 = 12 Further details in clear text
Nominal size 16 = 16 V= FKM seals, suitable for mineral oil
Nominal size 25 = 25 to DIN 51 524 (HL, HLP)
Nominal size 32 = 32 and phosphate ester (HFD-R)
For manifold mounting (cartridge valve) = KA B00 = Without orifice
For sub-plate mounting without secondary DBV = PA B03 = Orifice 0.30 mm (sizes 12 and 16)
For SAE flange connections without secondary DBV = FA B04 = Orifice 0.40 mm (size 25)
For SAE flange connections with secondary DBV = FB B06 = Orifice 0.60 mm (size 32)
Series 20 to 29 = 2X (other orifice diameters on request)
(20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Pressure range of the secondary pressure relief valve
Valve with SAE flange connections
(only for version "FB")
200 = Pressure setting up to 200 bar
300 = Pressure setting up to 300 bar
400 = Pressure setting up to 400 bar

Symbols
Without secondary pressure relief valve With secondary pressure relief valve
B M B M
B

X X X

A
A A T
Valve type: Valve type: Valve type:
FD 12 KA 2X/B03.. FD 12 PA 2X/B03.. FD 12 FA 2X/B03.. FD 12 FB 2X/.B03..
FD 16 KA 2X/B03.. FD 16 PA 2X/B03.. FD 16 FA 2X/B03.. FD 16 FB 2X/.B03..
FD 25 KA 2X/B04.. FD 25 PA 2X/B04.. FD 25 FA 2X/B04.. FD 25 FB 2X/.B04..
FD 32 KA 2X/B06.. FD 32 PA 2X/B06.. FD 32 FA 2X/B06.. FD 32 FB 2X/.B06..

616
RE 27 551/06.03 | FD Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Functional description, section

Check-Q-meters are used in hydraulic systems to influence the The pressure required at port X to open B to A is now only
speeds of hydraulic motors and cylinders independent of the influenced by the spring in chamber (9). The pressure required
load (prevents running away). In addition there is an isolator to begin opening the connection B to A is 20 bar; to fully open
function for pipe burst safety. the connection 50 bar is required.
The check-Q-meter comprises basically of the housing (1), The opening cross-section for flow control increases
main poppet (2), pilot part (3), pilot spool (4), damping spool progressively. It is created by the successive opeining of radial
(5) and pilot damping (6). drillings in the bush and the main poppet (2) land.
The relationship between the control pressure, cracking
pressure and differential pressure determines the flow to the
Lifting the load
actuator via the connection of B to A. Thus uncontrolled
With free-flow from A to B the main spool (2) is opened. If the running away of the actuator is prevented.
load pressure fails (e.g. pipe break between the directional
The controlled lowering procedure is not affected even if there
valve and port A) then the main spool (2) immediately closes.
is a pipe burst between the directional valve and port A.
This function is achieved by the connection of the load side (7)
with chamber (8).
Guidelines for influencing the opening and closing times of the
check-Q-meter.
Lowering the load (circuit examples)
Throttling of the opening sequence is via orifice (6) in the
The direction of flow is from B to A. Port A is connected to
control spool (4) and both sides of the damping spool (5).
tank via the directional valve. The piston rod side of the cylinder
The orifice (6) is protected by sieves.
has a flow applied which corresponds to the working
conditions. The relationship between the control pressure at The closing movement of the check-Q-meter is virtually un-
port X and the load pressure at port B = 1 : 20. throttled.
When the control pressure is reached the pre-opening of the When being used in conjunction with cylinders the control
main spool takes place. Via the control spool (4) the pilot stage line to port X can be fitted with a throttle check valve (meter-
(3) is lifted off its seat and chamber (8) is de-compressed via out control) to influence the closing sequence.
this drilling and port A to tank. At the same time the load
When being used in conjunction with motors a throttle check
pressure in port B is no longer applied to chamber (8), this is
valve should not be fitted in the control line to port X. In this
due to the longitudinal movement of the pilot stage (3) within
case it is recommended that the control times of the
the main spool. The main poppet (2) is thereby unloaded. The
reverse side of the control spool (4) at the main poppet (2),
directional valve are influenced. 3
lies against the collar of the damping spool (5).

rr

6 9 2 3

A M T

B
5 4 7 8 1

617
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics FD | RE 27 551/06.03

Circuit examples
Differential cylinder Hydraulic motor
On safety grounds, a closed centre directional valve should So that the holding brake can operate both of the direction all
always be used! valve ports have to be connected to port T in the de-energised
position. If the brake is externally unloaded then it is possible to
use a closed centre directional valve in the de-energised
condition.

B
B
X
X A
A

Note:
Two check-Q-meters cannot be used to control two cylinders
which are forced mechanically to move together, as
synchronisation and the same pressure cannot be guaranteed
in each cylinder.
Therefore, the cylinders have to be equipped with two pilot
operated check valves, type SL. The check-Q-meter is fitted in
a common line.

X X
In this case, the load pressure must not exceed 200 bar!

X
A

618
RE 27 551/06.03 | FD Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10

Technical Data (For application outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Operating pressure, ports A, X bar up to 350
port B bar up to 420
Pilot pressure, port X (flow control range) bar min. 20 to 50, max. 350
Cracking pressure, A to B bar 2
Setting pressure for secondary pressure relief valve bar up to 400
Flow L/min 80 (size 12), 200 (size 16), 320 (size 25), 560 (size 32)
Area ratio of the pre-opening poppet seat area 1
=
area of pilot spool 20
Pressure fluid mineral oil to DIN 51524 (HL,HLP);
phosphate ester (HFD-R)
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to + 80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Degree of contamination (maximum permissible ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/15

Characteristic curves (measured at = 41 mm2 and = 50 C)

p
40
Pressure differential p
1 2 3 4
35 in relation to flow qv,
measured at throttle
Pressure differential in bar

30 position:
3
25 Throttle fully open
( px = 50 bar)
20

15 B to A

10

0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 qv

1 = size 12
Flow in L/min
2 = size 16
3 = size 25
4 = size 32

p
Pressure differential in bar

12
1 2 3 4 Pressure differential p
10 in in relation to flow qv,
8 measured over the
6
check valve
4 A to B
2

0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 qv

Flow in L/min

619
6/10 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics FD | RE 27 551/06.03

Unit dimensions: valve for assembly into manifolds (cartridge valve) (Dimensions in mm)

D1+0,2

y
B2
1 25,1 2 D2+0,1

L10+0,1
G 1/4 D3
A
y

L2+0,4
30
X

L30,4
L10,3

L50,2
D6

L60,2
,5
R2
L12

D8

L8
25
A

L4
25
D4H8 5
2,

x
0,05 A

L9
R
D7+0,2

L7
20
D8
B
L11

D5
x
= Rz16
y
= Rz8 D9; T1

B10,2

1 Control port B10,2

2 Name plate

Tightening torque MA of cartridge valve:

for size 12: 65 Nm size 25: 110 Nm
size 16: 65 Nm size 32: 270 Nm

Ports A and B can be optionally arranged about the circumference.

Attention!
The valve fixing holes must not be damaged.
Pipe threads G to ISO 228/1
Type B1 B2 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 T1 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
FD 12 KA 2X/... 48 70 54 46 M42x2 38 34 46 38,6 16 M10 16 39 16 32 15,5 50,5 60
FD 16 KA 2X/... 48 70 54 46 M42x2 38 34 46 38,6 16 M10 16 39 16 32 15,5 50,6 60
FD 25 KA 2X/... 56 80 60 54 M52x2 48 40 60 48,6 25 M12 19 50 19 39 22 65 80
FD 32 KA 2X/... 66 95 72 65 M64x2 58 52 74 58,6 30 M16 23 52 19 40 25 71 85

Type L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 Valve fixing screws/tightening torque MA in Nm Weight

FD 12 KA 2X/... 3 78 128 2,3 191 65 4 off M10 x 70 DIN 912-10.9 69 2,8 kg
FD 16 KA 2X/... 3 78 128 2,3 191 65 4 off M10 x 70 DIN 912-10.9 69 2,8 kg
FD 25 KA 2X/... 4 105 182 2,3 253 75 4 off M12 x 80 DIN 912-10.9 120 5,6 kg
FD 32 KA 2X/... 4 105 198 2,3 289 94 4 off M16 x 100 DIN 912-10.9 295 7,5 kg

620
RE 27 551/06.03 | FD Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10

Unit dimensions: for SAE flange connections, without secondary pressure relief valve (Dimensions in mm)
D1; T1 25;1
2
D2 G 1/4

A M
X
B
25;1

G 1/4

B1
H2
H1
L6

1 L2 D3 D4

3
L4 L5
4
D5; T2
7

(B) 5
X
A M

B4
B3
B1

5
B 7 3
B2

L1
6
L2
SAE flange connection: L3
Operating pressure 6000 PSI (420 bar)
1 Control port 5 Optional port B
Flange mounting screws and blanking 2 Measuring port 6 Name plate
flange are included within the scope of 3 Flange fixing screws 7 O-ring
supply. 4 Blanking flange

Pipe thread "G" to ISO 228/1

Type B1 B2 B3 B4 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 H1 H2
FD 12 FA 2X/... 50,8 16,5 72 110 43 18 10,5 18 M10 36 72
FD 16 FA 2X/... 50,8 16,5 72 110 43 18 10,5 18 M10 36 72
FD 25 FA 2X/... 57,2 14,5 90 132 50 25 13,5 25 M12 45 90
FD 32 FA 2X/... 66,7 20 105 154 56 30 15 30 M14 50 105

Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 T1 T2 Weight O-ring (7)

FD 12 FA 2X/... 39 23,8 105 65 140 78 0,1 15 7 kg 25 x 3,5
FD 16 FA 2X/... 39 23,8 105 65 140 78 0,1 15 7 kg 25 x 3,5
FD 25 FA 2X/... 50 27,8 148 75 200 105 0,1 18 16 kg 32,92 x 3,53
FD 32 FA 2X/... 52 31,6 155 94 215 115 0,1 21 21 kg 37,7 x 3,53

621
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics FD | RE 27 551/06.03

Unit dimensions: for SAE flange connections, with secondary pressure relief valve (Dimensions in mm)
2 8
D1; T1 25;1 D3; T2

D2 G 1/4 D4

A M T
X
B
25;1
G 1/4
B1

H2
H3
H1
L8
1 L2 D5 D6

7 5 3 4
L5 L6 L7

D7; T3

(B) T
X M
A

B2
B4
B5
B1

B3
L1 1 Control port
6 5 7 2 Measuring port
L2
3 Flange fixing screws
SAE flange connection: L3 4 Blanking flange
Operating pressure 6000 PSI L4 5 Optional port B
(420 bar) 6 Name plate
7 O-ring
Flange mounting screws and blanking flange 8 Secondary pressure relief valve
are included within the scope of supply.
Pipe threads "G" to ISO 228/1
Type B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 H1 H2
FD 12 FB 2X/... 50,8 47 16,5 72 110 43 18 34 G 1/2 10,5 18 M10 36 72
FD 16 FB 2X/... 50,8 47 16,5 72 110 43 18 34 G 1/2 10,5 18 M10 36 72
FD 25 FB 2X/... 57,2 80 14,5 90 132 50 25 42 G 3/4 13,5 25 M12 45 90
FD 32 FB 2X/... 66,7 80 20 105 154 56 30 42 G 3/4 15 30 M14 50 105

Type H3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 T1 T2 T3 Weight O-ring (7)

FD 12 FB 2X/... 118 39 23,8 105 141,5 65 162 38 78 0,1 1 15 9 kg 25 x 3,5
FD 16 FB 2X/... 118 39 23,8 105 141,5 65 162 38 78 0,1 1 15 9 kg 25 x 3,5
FD 25 FB 2X/... 145 50 27,8 148 198 75 225 50 105 0,1 1 18 18 kg 32,92 x 3,53
FD 32 FB 2X/... 145 52 31,6 155 215 94 240 50 115 0,1 1 21 24 kg 37,7 x 3,53

622
RE 27 551/06.03 | FD Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10

Unit dimensions: for subplate mounting (Dimensions in mm)

25;1
G 1/4
2

M
X
H3
H1
H2

A B

4
6
1 7 4 3
6 L7 L8
L1 L6

X A B M
25;1
G 1/4

B1
B2
B3

Subplates to catalogue sheet RE 45 062 L1 L2 3

must be ordered separately. L3 11
5 0,01/100mm
L4
Subplates for: R max 4
sizes 12 and 16 size 25 size 32 L5
G 460/01 (G 3/8) G 412/01 (G 3/4) G 414/01 (G 1 1/4)
G 461/01 (G 1/2) G 413/01 (G 1) G 415/01 (G 1 1/2) Required surface finish
of mating piece
Note!
Only use a sub-plate mounting valve for panel mounting!
4 Not for sizes 12,16 and 25
1 Control port 5 4 valve fixing holes for sizes 12, 16 and 25.
2 Measuring port 6 valve fixing holes for size 32
3 Locating pin 6 Name plate

Pipe threads G to ISO 228/1

Type B1 B2 B3 H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
FD 12 PA 2X/... 66,7 85 70 85 42,5 70 31,8 7,2 35,8 42,9 73,2
FD 16 PA 2X/... 66,7 85 70 85 42,5 70 31,8 7,2 35,8 42,9 73,2
FD 25 PA 2X/... 79,4 100 80 100 50 80 38,9 11,1 49,2 60,3 109,1
FD 32 PA 2X/... 96,8 120 95 120 60 95 35,3 16,7 42,1 67,5 84,2 119,7

Type L7 L8 Valve fixing screws/tightening torque MA in Nm Weight O-ring (7)

FD 12 PA 2X/... 65 140 4 off M10 x 100 DIN 912-10.9 75 9 kg 21,3 x 2,4
FD 16 PA 2X/... 65 140 4 off M10 x 100 DIN 912-10.9 75 9 kg 21,3 x 2,4
FD 25 PA 2X/... 75 200 4 off M10 x 120 DIN 912-10.9 75 18 kg 29,82 x 2,62
FD 32 PA 2X/... 94 215 6 off M10 x 140 DIN 912-10.9 75 24 kg 38 x 3

623
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics FD | RE 27 551/06.03

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG 2003 by Bosch Rexroth AG, Mobile Hydraulics, D-97813 Lohr am Main
Mobile Hydraulics All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored,
Zum Eisengieer 1 processed, duplicated or circulated using electronic systems, in any form or by
any means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany
In the event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52-18 0
obliged to pay compensation.
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52-18 23 58 The data specified above only serves to describe the product. No statements
[email protected] concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
www.boschrexroth.de derived from our information.The details stated do not release you from the
responsibility for carrying out your own assessment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
ageing.

624
Stabilising module RE 64614/07.04 1/6

Type RSM2

Nominal size 10
Component series 2X
Maximum operating pressure:
s
"DUVBUPS
DPOOFDUJPOT
"
#


CBS
s
"DDVNVMBUPS
DPOOFDUJPO
9

CBS
Nominal flow 80 L/min
)"%


Overview of contents Features

Contents Page 5IF
34.
TUBCJMJTJOH
NPEVMF
SFEVDFT
QJUDIJOH
NPWFNFOUT

PO

Features 1 XIFFMFE
WFIJDMFT
UIBU
FGGFDU
UIF
WFIJDMF
BOE
ESJWFS
'PS
UIJT
UIF

MJGUJOH
MJOF
JT
DPOOFDUFE
UP
B
IZESPQOFVNBUJD
BDDVNVMBUPS
WJB
B

Ordering details 2
TXJUDIJOH
WBMWF
UIBU
BCTPSCT
UIF
MPBET
DBVTFE
CZ
UIF
QJUDIJOH

'VODUJPO
DJSDVJU
 NPWFNFOUT


1BSLJOH
UIF
WFIJDMF
NBJOUFOBODF
BOE
TFSWJDF
XPSL
 Applications:
3FHVMBUPSZ
SFRVJSFNFOUT
BOE
TBGFUZ
HVJEFMJOFT
 Wheeled loaders
*OTUBMMBUJPO
HVJEFMJOFT
 n
5FMFTDPQJD
IBOEMFST
5FDIOJDBM
EBUB
 The following advantages apply when the RSM2 system is
$IBSBDUFSJTUJDF
DVSWFT
 fitted:
6OJU
EJNFOTJPOT
 Higher transport speeds
Higher handling rates
n
4UBCMF
TUFFSJOH
DIBSBDUFSJTUJDT
n
4IPSUFS
CSBLJOH
EJTUBODFT
n
)JHIFS
DPNGPSU
GPS
UIF
ESJWFS
n
-PXFS
NFDIBOJDBM
MPBEJOH
PG
UIF
FOUJSF
NBDIJOF
n
'FXFS
SFQBJST
PS
EPXO
UJNFT
XJUI
JEFOUJDBM
IBOEMJOH
SBUFT

625
2/6 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RE 64614/07.04

Ordering details

RSM2 10 B 2X V 01 *
Stabilising module Further details
Nominal size 10 = 10 JO
DMFBS
UFYU

Design Connections
#MPDL
EFTJHO
=B 01 = Pipe thread
to ISO 228/1
$PNQPOFOU
TFSJFT

UP

= 2X

UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT
V= FKM seals
Accumulator pressure limitation Electrical connections
8JUIPVU
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO
= A000 C4 = 1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS
"DDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO
with
&$
EFTJHO
UFTU K41L =
1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS
BOE

pressure in bar =A... EJPEF
1,&$"

7

"DDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO
without
&$
EFTJHO
UFTU K42L =
1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS

pressure in bar =B... BOE
EJPEF
1,&$"

7

Accumulator loading orifice EFGJOFE
XIFO
PQUJNJTJOH
UIF
NBDIJOF

Supply voltage
0SJGJDF
DSPTTTFDUJPO
mLoading side = 12.. G12 =

7
%$
G24 =

7
%$


0SJGJDF
DSPTTTFDUJPO
m Unloading side = ..04

Function, circuit
Design 5IF
EBNQJOH
WBMWF
DBO
CF
BVUPNBUJDBMMZ
BDUJWBUFE
WJB
UIF
USBWFM

5IF
TUBCJMJTJOH
NPEVMF


CBTJDBMMZ
DPNQSJTFT
PG
B
IPVTJOH
JOUP

TQFFE
5IF
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF


JT
TXJUDIFE
JOUP
UIF

XIJDI
BSF
CVJMU TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO

5IF
WBMWF
TQPPM


JT
TXJUDIFE
UP
UIF

TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO

BOE
DPOOFDUT
UIF
QJTUPO
TJEF
PG
UIF
MJGUJOH

n
7BMWF
TQPPM


DZMJOEFS


XJUI
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS


BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
SPE
TJEF
PG

n
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
TPMFOPJE
PQFSBUFE

UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


UP
UBOL
n
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF

5IF
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF


QSFWFOUT
VOQFSNJTTJCMF
IJHI

n
&NFSHFODZ
ESBJO
TDSFX

QSFTTVSFT
JO
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS

n
"DDVNVMBUPS
MPBEJOH
WBMWF

4FU
QSFTTVSF

QFSNJTTJCMF
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF


Function
*G
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


IBT
QSFTTVSF
BQQMJFE
UP
UIF
QJTUPO
TJEF
8
UIFO
QSFTTVSF
JT
BMTP
BQQMJFE
UP
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
MPBEJOH
WBMWF



BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS


T X
5IF
MPBEJOH
BOE
VOMPBEJOH
TQFFE
PG
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
JT

EFGJOFE
WJB
UIF
TFMFDUBCMF
PSJGJDF
DSPTTTFDUJPOT
PO
UIF

BDDVNVMBUPS
MPBEJOH
WBMWF



3 4
1

5
2

Lifting cylinder

7
2 1
2 6
1
B A

Control block

626
RE 64614/07.04 RSM2 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6

Parking the vehicle, maintenance and service work

7JB
UIF
FNFSHFODZ
ESBJO
TDSFX


TIPXO
JO
UIF
DJSDVJU
BT
B
B
EFHSFF
PG
XFBS
5IFZ
TIPVME
CF
DIFDLFE
BOE
JG
OFDFTTBSZ

NFDIBOJDBMMZ
PQFSBUFE
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF

JU
JT
QPTTJCMF
SFQMBDFE
BGUFS
BQQSPY

MPBE
DZDMFT
UP
VOMPBE
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
TP
UIBU
UIF
BCPWF
NFOUJPOFE
XPSL
Attention:
DBO
CF
DBSSJFE
PVU
5IF
TBGFUZ
UFDIOJDBM
SFRVJSFNFOUT
PG
UIF
WFIJDMF
IBWF
UP
CF

5IF
BDDVNVMBUPS
MPBEJOH
PSJGJDF
DPNQPOFOUT
BSF
TVCKFDU
UP
UBLFO
JOUP
BDDPVOU
5IF
MJGUJOH
TZTUFN
NVTU
GJSTUMZ
CF
TFDVSFE

BHBJOTU
MPXFSJOH
Regularity requirements and safety guidelines
"DDVNVMBUPST
BSF
SFRVJSFE
GPS
UIF
34.
TUBCJMJTBUJPO
TZTUFN
If a RSM2 is ordered without a pressure relief valve
*G
EVF
UP
UIF
PQFSBUJPO
TJUVBUJPO
PG
UIF
NBDIJOF
UIF
EBOHFS
FYBNQMF
34.
#9"

3FYSPUI
BTTVNFT
UIBU
UIF

FYTJTUT
UIBU
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPSAT
QFSNJTTJCMF
QSFTTVSF
MJNJU
DBO
CF
BQQSPQSJBUF
QSFTTVSF
TBGFUZ
GVODUJPO
IBT
CFFO
GPSFTFFO
CZ
UIF

FYDFFEFE
UIFO
B
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
IBT
UP
CF
GJUUFE
'PS
UIJT
WFIJDMF
NBOVGBDUVSFS
PS
UIBU
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
PWFSMPBET

system regularity requirements and those from the authorities BSF
QSFWFOUFE
JO
B
EJGGFSFOU
NBOOFS
XJUIJO
UIF
WFIJDMFAT
EFTJHO
NBZ
IBWF
UP
CF
DPNQMJFE
XJUI *O
BEEJUJPO
GPS
UIF
WFIJDMF
PUIFS
OBUJPOBM
BOE
JOUFSOBUJPOBM

'PS
UIJT
QVSQPTF
UIF
34.
JT
GJUUFE
XJUI
B
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
SFHVMBUJPOT
NBZ
BQQMZ
5IJT
DBO
BMTP
CF
B
EFTJHO
UFTUFE
WBMWF
XIJDI
DPNQMJFT
XJUI
UIF
5IF
FOUJSF
SFTQPOTJCJMJUZ
MJFT
XJUI
UIF
WFIJDMF
NBOVGBDUVSFS
QSFTTVSF
DPNQPOFOU
EJSFDUJWF
&$
TFF
PSEFSJOH
EFUBJMT


Installation guidelines
n
5IF
OVNCFS
PG
BDDVNVMBUPST
JT
EFQFOEFOU
PO
UIF
MJGUJOH
Attention:
DZMJOEFS
TJ[F
"DDVNVMBUPST
IBWF
UP
CF
PSEFSFE
TFQBSBUFMZ
n
#FGPSF
DBSSZJOH
PVU
BOZ
NBJOUFOBODF
XPSL
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPST

The pressure relief setting (safety valve for the pressure NVTU
CF
VOMPBEFE
[FSP
QSFTTVSF

WFTTFM

must
CF
MPXFS
UIBO
UIF
QFSNJTTJCMF
BDDVNVMBUPS

n
'PS
UIJT
VOTDSFX
UIF
QMVH
UIFO
SPUBUF
UIF
WBMWF
TQJOEMF

QSFTTVSF
MPBDBUFE
VOEFS
UIF
QMVH
"'


UVSOT
BOUJDMPDLXJTF
5IF

MJGUJOH
TZTUFN
NVTU
GJSTUMZ
CF
TFDVSFE
BHBJOTU
MPXFSJOH

Technical data GPS
BQQMJDBUJPOT
PVUTJEF
UIFTF
QBSBNFUFST
QMFBTF
DPOTVMU
VT

3

General
Installation Optional
"NCJFOU
UFNQFSBUVSF
SBOHF C 20 + 80
Weight kg 

Hydraulic
Operating pressure 1PSUT
"
# bar 




Port X bar 

Port T bar 

.BY
OPNJOBM
GMPX 1PSUT
"
9 L/min 80
Pressure fluid .JOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/


0UIFS
QSFTTVSF
GMVJET
PO
SFRVFTU
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 + 80
7JTDPTJUZ
SBOHF mm2/s 
x

.BY
QFSNJTTJCMF
EFHSFF
PG
QSFTTVSF
GMVJE
DPOUBNJOBUJPO $MBTT

$MFBOMJOFTT
DMBTT
UP
*40

D

Electrical
Control voltage 7


1PXFS
DPOTVNQUJPO
TPMFOPJE
W 

627
 4/6 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RE 64614/07.04

Characteristic curves
NFBTVSFE
XJUI
)-1
*oil


$


$

Direction of flow A m X Direction of flow B m T

16 16
Pressure differential in bar m

Pressure differential in bar m

14 14
12 12
10 10
8 8
6 6
4 4
2 2

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flow in L/min m Flow in L/min m

$p-qV-characteristic curves for selecting the accumulator loading orifice

0,3 mm 0,4 mm
0,6 mm 1,0 mm 1,2 mm
260
240
Pressure differential in bar m

220
200
180
160
140
2,0 mm
120
100
80
60
40
20

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Flow in L/min m

628
RE 64614/07.04 RSM2 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6

Unit dimensions JO
NN

3,5
96

70
29,5
X
4 G1/2 3
19 130 55
5 79,5 G1/2
16

20
A
48

Z
70

41,5 G1/2 1; 2
56,5 G1/2
39

B 3

Z
M8; 15 62
9
52

1 &NFSHFODZ
MPXFSJOH
TDSFX
Port sizes

M"


/N "
#
5
9

(

TFF
OPUFT
PO
QBHF

SFHBSEJOH

JOTUBMMBUJPO

2 7BMWF
TQJOEMF
MPDBUFE
VOEFS

1PT
"'
M"


/N
3 &MFDUSJDBM
DPOOFDUJPO
1MVH
QJO
5ZQF
+VOJPS
5JNFS
".1

4 Pressure relief valve

5 Name plate

629
6/6 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RE 64614/07.04

Notes

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

5IJT
EPDVNFOU
BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
EBUB
TQFDJGJDBUJPOT
BOE
PUIFS
JOGPSNBUJPOT

.PCJMF
"QQMJDBUJPOT TFU
GPSUI
JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
8JUIPVU
UIFJS

Zum Eisengieer 1 DPOTFOU
JU
NBZ
OPU
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS
HJWFO
UP
UIJSE
QBSUJFT

-PIS
BN
.BJO
(FSNBOZ 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJGJFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUFNFOUT

5FMFGPO





 DPODFSOJOH
B
DFSUBJO
DPOEJUJPO
PS
TVJUBCJMJUZ
GPS
B
DFSUBJO
BQQMJDBUJPO
DBO
CF

5FMFGBY






 EFSJWFE
GSPN
PVS
JOGPSNBUJPO
5IF
HJWFO
JOGPSNBUJPO
EPFT
OPU
SFMFBTF
UIF
VTFS

JOGPCSNND!CPTDISFYSPUIEF GSPN
UIF
PCMJHBUJPO
PG
PXO
KVEHFNFOU
BOE
WFSJGJDBUJPO
*U
NVTU
CF
SFNFNCFSFE

XXXCPTDISFYSPUIDPNCSN UIBU
PVS
QSPEVDUT
BSF
TVCKFDU
UP
B
OBUVSBM
QSPDFTT
PG
XFBS
BOE
BHJOH

630
Stabilising module RE 64617/05.04
3FQMBDFT

1/4

Type RSM2

Nominal size 16
Component series 2X
Maximum operating pressure:
s
"DUVBUPS
DPOOFDUJPOT
"
#


CBS
s
"DDVNVMBUPS
DPOOFDUJPO
9

CBS
/PNJOBM
GMPX

-NJO
)"%


Overview of contents Features

Contents Page 5IF
34.
TUBCJMJTJOH
NPEVMF
SFEVDFT
QJUDIJOH
NPWFNFOUT
PO

Features 1 XIFFMFE
WFIJDMFT
UIBU
FGGFDU
UIF
WFIJDMF
BOE
ESJWFS
'PS
UIJT
UIF

MJGUJOH
MJOF
JT
DPOOFDUFE
UP
B
IZESPQOFVNBUJD
BDDVNVMBUPS
WJB
B

Ordering details 2
TXJUDIJOH
WBMWF
UIBU
BCTPSCT
UIF
MPBET
DBVTFE
CZ
UIF
QJUDIJOH

'VODUJPO
DJSDVJU
 NPWFNFOUT


1BSLJOH
UIF
WFIJDMF
NBJOUFOBODF
BOE
TFSWJDF
XPSL
 Applications:
3FHVMBUPSZ
SFRVJSFNFOUT
BOE
TBGFUZ
HVJEFMJOFT
 Wheeled loaders
*OTUBMMBUJPO
HVJEFMJOFT
 n
5FMFTDPQJD
IBOEMFST
5FDIOJDBM
EBUB
 The following advantages apply when the RSM2 system is
$IBSBDUFSJTUJD
DVSWFT
 fitted:
Unit dimensions 4 Higher transport speeds
Higher handling rates
n
4UBCMF
TUFFSJOH
DIBSBDUFSJTUJDT
n
4IPSUFS
CSBLJOH
EJTUBODFT
n
)JHIFS
DPNGPSU
GPS
UIF
ESJWFS
n
-PXFS
NFDIBOJDBM
MPBEJOH
PG
UIF
FOUJSF
NBDIJOF
n
'FXFS
SFQBJST
PS
EPXO
UJNFT
XJUI
JEFOUJDBM
IBOEMJOH
SBUFT

631
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RE 64617/05.04

Ordering details

RSM2 16 B 2X V 01 *
Stabilising module Further details
Nominal size 16 = 16 JO
DMFBS
UFYU

Design Connections
#MPDL
EFTJHO
=B 01 = Pipe thread
UP
*40

$PNQPOFOU
TFSJFT

UP

= 2X

UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT
V= FKM seals

Accumulator pressure limitation Electrical connections

8JUIPVU
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO
= A000 C4 = 1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS
8JUI
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO K41L =
1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS
BOE

pressure details in bar =A... EJPEF
1,&$"

7

K42L =
1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS

Pressure limitation BOE
EJPEF
1,&$"

7

1SFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO

CBS
= B090
Supply voltage
1SFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO

CBS
= B120
G12 =

7
%$
1SFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO

CBS
= B160
G24 =

7
%$

Function, circuit
Design "
QSFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
GVODUJPO
GPS
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS


JT
JOUFHSBUFE
JO

5IF
TUBCJMJTJOH
NPEVMF
CBTJDBMMZ
DPNQSJTFT
PG
B
IPVTJOH
JOUP
UIF
WBMWF
TQPPM


TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO


5IF
PQFOJOH
QSFTTVSF
MJFT

XIJDI
BSF
CVJMU BQQSPY

CBS
IJHIFS
UIBO
UIF
TXJUDI
PGG
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO



n
7BMWF
TQPPM


5IF
EBNQJOH
WBMWF
DBO
CF
BVUPNBUJDBMMZ
BDUJWBUFE
WJB
UIF
USBWFM
TQFFE

n
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM

WBMWF
TPMFOPJE
PQFSBUFE


5IF
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF


JT
TXJUDIFE
JOUP
UIF
TXJUDIFE
position
n
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
&$
EFTJHO
UFTUFE



5IF
WBMWF
TQPPM


JT
TXJUDIFE
UP
UIF
TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO

BOE

n
&NFSHFODZ
ESBJO
TDSFX

DPOOFDUT
UIF
QJTUPO
TJEF
PG
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


XJUI
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS



BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
SPE
TJEF
PG
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


XJUI
UIF
SFTFSWPJS
Function 5IF
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF


QSFWFOUT
VOQFSNJTTJCMF
IJHI

*G
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


IBT
QSFTTVSF
BQQMJFE
UP
UIF
QJTUPO
TJEF
QSFTTVSFT
JO
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
PQFOJOH
QSFTTVSF

QFSNJTTJCMF

UIFO
UIF
QSFTTVSF
JT
BMTP
BQQMJFE
UP
UIF
DIFDL
WBMWF
JO
UIF
WBMWF
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF

TQPPM


BOE
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS

 6
%FQFOEFOU
PO
UIF
EFTJHO
TFF
PSEFSJOH
EFUBJMT


B090

n
GSPN

CBS
B120
n
GSPN

CBS
PS
T X2
B160
n
GSPN

CBS
MX
UIF
DPOOFDUJPO
GSPN
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


UP
UIF

BDDVNVMBUPS


WJB
UIF
WBMWF
TQPPM


JT
JOUFSSVQUFE

TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO



3 4
1

2 5
Lifting cylinder

7 2
3
4 1 2

1
B A

8
Control block

632
RE 64617/05.04 RSM2 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Parking the vehicle, maintenance and service work

7JB
UIF
FNFSHFODZ
ESBJO
TDSFX


TIPXO
JO
UIF
DJSDVJU
BT
B
Attention:
NFDIBOJDBMMZ
PQFSBUFE
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF

JU
JT
QPTTJCMF
5IF
TBGFUZ
UFDIOJDBM
SFRVJSFNFOUT
PG
UIF
WFIJDMF
IBWF
UP
CF

UP
VOMPBE
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
TP
UIBU
UIF
BCPWF
NFOUJPOFE
XPSL
UBLFO
JOUP
BDDPVOU
DBO
CF
DBSSJFE
PVU
5IF
MJGUJOH
TZTUFN
NVTU
GJSTUMZ
CF
TFDVSFE
BHBJOTU
MPXFSJOH

Regularity requirements and safety guidelines

"DDVNVMBUPST
BSF
SFRVJSFE
GPS
UIF
34.
TUBCJMJTBUJPO
TZTUFN
If a RSM2 is ordered without a pressure relief valve (example:
*G
EVF
UP
UIF
PQFSBUJPO
TJUVBUJPO
PG
UIF
NBDIJOF
UIF
EBOHFS
34.
#9"

3FYSPUI
BTTVNFT
UIBU
UIF
BQQSPQSJBUF

FYTJTUT
UIBU
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPSAT
QFSNJTTJCMF
QSFTTVSF
MJNJU
DBO
CF
QSFTTVSF
TBGFUZ
GVODUJPO
IBT
CFFO
GPSFTFFO
CZ
UIF
WFIJDMF

FYDFFEFE
UIFO
B
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
IBT
UP
CF
GJUUFE
'PS
UIJT
NBOVGBDUVSFS
PS
UIBU
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
PWFSMPBET
BSF

system regularity requirements and those from the authorities QSFWFOUFE
JO
B
EJGGFSFOU
NBOOFS
XJUIJO
UIF
WFIJDMFAT
EFTJHO
IBWF
UP
CF
DPNQMJFE
XJUI *O
BEEJUJPO
GPS
UIF
WFIJDMF
PUIFS
OBUJPOBM
BOE
JOUFSOBUJPOBM

The RSM2 is fitted with a design tested pressure relief valve SFHVMBUJPOT
NBZ
BQQMZ
XIJDI
DPNQMJFT
XJUI
UIF
QSFTTVSF
DPNQPOFOU
EJSFDUJWF
5IF
FOUJSF
SFTQPOTJCJMJUZ
MJFT
XJUI
UIF
WFIJDMF
NBOVGBDUVSFS
&$

Installation guidelines
n
5IF
OVNCFS
PG
BDDVNVMBUPST
JT
EFQFOEFOU
PO
UIF
MJGUJOH
Attention:
DZMJOEFS
TJ[F
"DDVNVMBUPST
IBWF
UP
CF
PSEFSFE
TFQBSBUFMZ
n
#FGPSF
DBSSZJOH
PVU
BOZ
NBJOUFOBODF
XPSL
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPST

The pressure relief setting (safety valve for the pressure NVTU
CF
VOMPBEFE
[FSP
QSFTTVSF

WFTTFM

must
CF
MPXFS
UIBO
UIF
QFSNJTTJCMF
BDDVNVMBUPS

n
'PS
UIJT
VOTDSFX
UIF
QMVH
UIFO
SPUBUF
UIF
WBMWF
TQJOEMF

QSFTTVSF
MPDBUFE
VOEFS
UIF
QMVH
"'


UVSOT
BOUJDMPDLXJTF
n
5IF
MJGUJOH
TZTUFN
NVTU
GJSTUMZ
CF
TFDVSFE
BHBJOTU
MPXFSJOH

Technical data GPS
BQQMJDBUJPOT
PVUTJEF
UIFTF
QBSBNFUFST
QMFBTF
DPOTVMU
VT

3

General
Installation Optional
"NCJFOU
UFNQFSBUVSF
SBOHF C n

x


Weight kg 

Hydraulic
Operating pressure 1PSUT
"
# bar 




Port X2 bar 

Port T bar 

.BY
OPNJOBM
GMPX 1PSUT
"
9 -NJO 
Pressure fluid .JOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/



0UIFS
QSFTTVSF
GMVJET
PO
SFRVFTU
Pressure fluid temperature range C n

x


7JTDPTJUZ
SBOHF mm2/s 
x

%FHSFF
PG
DPOUBNJOBUJPO
NBY
QFSNJTTJCMF
*40

D

DMBTT


Electrical
Control voltage 7


1PXFS
DPOTVNQUJPO
TPMFOPJE
W 

633
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RE 6461705.04

Characteristic curves NFBTVSFE
XJUI
)-1
*oil


$


$

10 10
Flow direction A m X2 Flow direction B m T
Pressure differential in bar m

Pressure differential in bar m

8 8

6 6

4 4

2 2

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
'MPX
JO
-NJO
m 'MPX
JO
-NJO
m
Unit dimensions JO
NN

2 x M10; 22 98

15
3

55
292
249,5
101
25,5 39 63 13,5
X2
1 T A
60
35
30

38,5
MX
35
63

80

B
30 69 39

2
1 &NFSHFODZ
MPXFSJOH
TDSFX
"' Port sizes
2 &MFDUSJDBM
DPOOFDUJPOT X2 "
#
5
9

(
1MVH
QJO .9

(
5ZQF
+VOJPS
5JNFS
".1

3 Pressure relief valve

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

5IJT
EPDVNFOU
BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
EBUB
TQFDJGJDBUJPOT
BOE
PUIFS
JOGPSNBUJPOT

.PCJMF
"QQMJDBUJPOT TFU
GPSUI
JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
8JUIPVU
UIFJS

Zum Eisengieer 1 DPOTFOU
JU
NBZ
OPU
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS
HJWFO
UP
UIJSE
QBSUJFT

-PIS
BN
.BJO
(FSNBOZ 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJGJFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUFNFOUT

5FMFGPO





 DPODFSOJOH
B
DFSUBJO
DPOEJUJPO
PS
TVJUBCJMJUZ
GPS
B
DFSUBJO
BQQMJDBUJPO
DBO
CF

5FMFGBY






 EFSJWFE
GSPN
PVS
JOGPSNBUJPO
5IF
HJWFO
JOGPSNBUJPO
EPFT
OPU
SFMFBTF
UIF
VTFS

JOGPCSNND!CPTDISFYSPUIEF GSPN
UIF
PCMJHBUJPO
PG
PXO
KVEHFNFOU
BOE
WFSJGJDBUJPO
*U
NVTU
CF
SFNFNCFSFE

XXXCPTDISFYSPUIDPNCSN UIBU
PS
QSPEVDUT
BSF
TVCKFDU
UP
B
OBUVSBM
QSPDFTT
PG
XFBS
BOE
BHJOH
4VCKFDU
UP
DIBOHF

634
Stabilising module RE 64618/05.04 1/4

Type RSM2

Nominal size 25
Component series 2X
Maximum operating pressure:
s
"DUVBUPS
DPOOFDUJPOT
"
#



CBS
s
"DDVNVMBUPS
DPOOFDUJPOT
9
9


CBS
/PNJOBM
GMPX

-NJO
)"%


Overview of contents Features

Contents Page 5IF
34.
TUBCJMJTJOH
NPEVMF
SFEVDFT
QJUDIJOH
NPWFNFOUT
PO

Features 1 XIFFMFE
WFIJDMFT
UIBU
FGGFDU
UIF
WFIJDMF
BOE
ESJWFS
'PS
UIJT
UIF

MJGUJOH
MJOF
JT
DPOOFDUFE
UP
UIF
IZESPQOFVNBUJD
BDDVNVMBUPS
WJB

Ordering details 2
B
TXJUDIJOH
WBMWF
UIBU
BCTPSCT
UIF
MPBET
DBVTFE
CZ
UIF
QJUDIJOH

'VODUJPO
DJSDVJU
 NPWFNFOUT


1BSLJOH
UIF
WFIJDMF
NBJOUFOBODF
BOE
TFSWJDF
XPSL
 Applications:
3FHVMBUPSZ
SFRVJSFNFOUT
BOE
TBGFUZ
HVJEFMJOFT
 Wheeled loaders
*OTUBMMBUJPO
HVJEFMJOFT
 n
5FMFTDPQJD
IBOEMFST
5FDIOJDBM
EBUB
 The following advantages apply when the RSM2 system is
$IBSBDUFSJTUJD
DVSWFT
 fitted:
Unit dimensions 4 Higher transport speeds
Higher handling rates
n
4UBCMF
TUFFSJOH
DIBSBDUFSJTUJDT
n
4IPSUFS
CSBLJOH
EJTUBODFT
n
)JHIFS
DPNGPSU
GPS
UIF
ESJWFS
n
-PXFS
NFDIBOJDBM
MPBEJOH
PG
UIF
FOUJSF
NBDIJOF
n
'FXFS
SFQBJST
PS
EPXO
UJNFT
XJUI
JEFOUJDBM
IBOEMJOH
UJNFT

635
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RE 64618/05.04

Ordering details

RSM2 25 B 2X G24 V 11 *
Stabilising module Further details
Nominal size 25 = 25 JO
DMFBS
UFYU

Design Connections
#MPDL
EFTJHO
=B 11 =
4"&
GMBOHF

$PNQPOFOU
TFSJFT

UP

= 2X V= FKM seals


UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT
Electrical connection
Accumulator pressure limitation C4 = 1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS
8JUIPVU
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO
= A000 K42L =
1MVH
QJO
+VOJPS
5JNFS

8JUI
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO BOE
EJPEF
1,&$"

7

pressure details in bar =A... Supply voltage

Pressure limitation G24 =

7
%$


1SFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO

CBS
= B090
1SFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO

CBS
= B120
1SFTTVSF
MJNJUBUJPO

CBS
= B160

Function, circuit
Design "
QSFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
GVODUJPO
GPS
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS


JT
JOUFHSBUFE
JO
5IF
TUBCJMJTJOH
NPEVMF
CBTJDBMMZ
DPNQSJTFT
PG
B
IPVTJOH
JOUP

UIF
WBMWF
TQPPM


TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO


5IF
PQFOJOH
QSFTTVSF
MJFT

XIJDI
BSF
CVJMU BQQSPY

CBS
IJHIFS
UIBO
UIF
TXJUDI
PGG
QSFTTVSF
TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO



n
7BMWF
TQPPM


5IF
EBNQJOH
WBMWF
DBO
CF
BVUPNBUJDBMMZ
BDUJWBUFE
WJB
UIF
USBWFM
TQFFE

n
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF
TPMFOPJE
PQFSBUFE


5IF
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF


JT
TXJUDIFE
JOUP
UIF
TXJUDIFE

n
1SFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
&$
EFTJHO
UFTUFE


position

5IF
WBMWF
TQPPM


JT
TXJUDIFE
UP
UIF
TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO


n
&NFSHFODZ
ESBJO
TDSFX

BOE
DPOOFDUT
UIF
QJTUPO
TJEF
PG
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


XJUI
UIF

BDDVNVMBUPS


BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
SPE
TJEF
PG
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


XJUI
Function
UIF
SFTFSWPJS
*G
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


IBT
QSFTTVSF
BQQMJFE
UP
UIF
QJTUPO
TJEF
5IF
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF


QSFWFOUT
VOQFSNJTTJCMF
IJHI
QSFTTVSFT
JO

UIFO
UIF
QSFTTVSF
JT
BMTP
BQQMJFE
UP
UIF
DIFDL
WBMWF
JO
UIF
WBMWF
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
PQFOJOH
QSFTTVSF

QFSNJTTJCMF
BDDVNVMBUPS

TQPPM


BOE
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS

 QSFTTVSF

%FQFOEFOU
PO
UIF
EFTJHO
TFF
PSEFSJOH
EFUBJMT

6
B090

n
GSPN

CBS
B120
n
GSPN

CBS
PS

B160
n
GSPN

CBS
T X1 X2
UIF
DPOOFDUJPO
GSPN
UIF
MJGUJOH
DZMJOEFS


UP
UIF
MX
BDDVNVMBUPS


WJB
UIF
WBMWF
TQPPM


JT
JOUFSSVQUFE

TXJUDIFE
QPTJUJPO



3 4
1

2 5
Lifting cylinder

7 2
3
4 1 2

1
B A

Control block 8

636
RE 64618/05.04 RSM2 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Parking the vehicle, maintenance and service work

7JB
UIF
FNFSHFODZ
ESBJO
TDSFX


TIPXO
JO
UIF
DJSDVJU
BT
B
Attention:
NFDIBOJDBMMZ
PQFSBUFE
XBZ
EJSFDUJPOBM
WBMWF

JU
JT
QPTTJCMF
5IF
TBGFUZ
UFDIOJDBM
SFRVJSFNFOUT
PG
UIF
WFIJDMF
IBWF
UP
CF

UP
VOMPBE
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPS
TP
UIBU
UIF
BCPWF
NFOUJPOFE
XPSL
UBLFO
JOUP
BDDPVOU
DBO
CF
DBSSJFE
PVU 5IF
MJGUJOH
TZTUFN
NVTU
GJSTUMZ
CF
TFDVSFE
BHBJOTU
MPXFSJOH

Regularity requirements and safety guidelines

"DDVNVMBUPST
BSF
SFRVJSFE
GPS
UIF
34.
TUBCJMJTBUJPO
TZTUFN
If a RSM2 is ordered without a pressure relief valve (example:
*G
EVF
UP
UIF
PQFSBUJPO
TJUVBUJPO
PG
UIF
NBDIJOF
UIF
EBOHFS
34.
#9"

3FYSPUI
BTTVNFT
UIBU
UIF
BQQSPQSJBUF

FYTJTUT
UIBU
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPSAT
QFSNJTTJCMF
QSFTTVSF
MJNJU
DBO
CF
QSFTTVSF
TBGFUZ
GVODUJPO
IBT
CFFO
GPSFTFFO
CZ
UIF
WFIJDMF

FYDFFEFE
UIFO
B
QSFTTVSF
SFMJFG
WBMWF
IBT
UP
CF
GJUUFE
'PS
UIJT
NBOVGBDUVSFS
PS
UIBU
BDDVNVMBUPS
QSFTTVSF
PWFSMPBET
BSF

system regularity requirements and those from the authorities QSFWFOUFE
JO
B
EJGGFSFOU
NBOOFS
XJUIJO
UIF
WFIJDMFAT
EFTJHO
IBWF
UP
CF
DPNQMJFE
XJUI *O
BEEJUJPO
GPS
UIF
WFIJDMF
PUIFS
OBUJPOBM
BOE
JOUFSOBUJPOBM

The RSM2 is fitted with a design tested pressure relief valve SFHVMBUJPOT
NBZ
BQQMZ
XIJDI
DPNQMJFT
XJUI
UIF
QSFTTVSF
DPNQPOFOU
EJSFDUJWF
5IF
FOUJSF
SFTQPOTJCJMJUZ
MJFT
XJUI
UIF
WFIJDMF
NBOVGBDUVSFS
&$

Installation guidelines
n
5IF
OVNCFS
PG
BDDVNVMBUPST
JT
EFQFOEFOU
PO
UIF
MJGUJOH
Attention:
DZMJOEFS
TJ[F
"DDVNVMBUPST
IBWF
UP
CF
PSEFSFE
TFQBSBUFMZ
n
#FGPSF
DBSSZJOH
PVU
BOZ
NBJOUFOBODF
XPSL
UIF
BDDVNVMBUPST

The pressure relief setting (safety valve for the pressure NVTU
CF
VOMPBEFE
[FSP
QSFTTVSF

WFTTFM

must
CF
MPXFS
UIBO
UIF
QFSNJTTJCMF
BDDVNVMBUPS
n
'PS
UIJT
VOTDSFX
UIF
QMVH
UIFO
SPUBUF
UIF
WBMWF
TQJOEMF

MPDBUFE
VOEFS
UIF
QMVH
"'


UVSOT
BOUJDMPDLXJTF
n
5IF
MJGUJOH
TZTUFN
NVTU
GJSTUMZ
CF
TFDVSFE
BHBJOTU
MPXFSJOH

Technical data GPS
BQQMJDBUJPO
PVUTJEF
UIFTF
QBSBNFUFST
QMFBTF
DPOTVMU
VT

3

General
Installation Optional
"NCJFOU
UFNQFSBUVSF
SBOHF C n

x


Weight kg 

Hydraulic
Operating pressure 1PSUT
"
# bar 




Port X bar 

Port T bar 

.BY
OPNJOBM
GMPX 1PSUT
"
9 -NJO 
Pressure fluid .JOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/



0UIFS
QSFTTVSF
GMVJET
PO
SFRVFTU
Pressure fluid temperature range C n

x


7JTDPTJUZ
SBOHF mm2/s 
x

%FHSFF
PG
DPOUBNJOBUJPO
NBY
QFSNJTTJCMF
*40

D

DMBTT


Electrical
Control voltage 7
24
1PXFS
DPOTVNQUJPO
TPMFOPJE
W 

637
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG RSM2 RD 64618/05.04

Characteristic curves
NFBTVSFE
XJUI
)-1
*oil


$


$

Flow direction A m X2 Flow direction B m T

8 8
Pressure differential in bar m

Pressure differential in bar m

7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
'MPX
JO
-NJO
m 'MPX
JO
-NJO
m
Unit dimensions JO
NN

B A

120
208,5
77,5 26
257,5
1 3 2 197
84
X2
131

MX
97

44,4
13
37,5 28

X1
T
62

78,5 35,3
62 55
141
238 Port sizes
336,5 9
9

(
.9

(
1 &NFSHFODZ
MPXFSJOH
TDSFX
"
#

4"&





"' X2




14*

5

4"&





2 &MFDUSJDBM
DPOOFDUJPOT
30


14*

1MVH
QJO
5ZQF
+VOJPS
5JNFS
".1

3 Pressure relief valve

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

5IJT
EPDVNFOU
BT
XFMM
BT
UIF
EBUB
TQFDJGJDBUJPOT
BOE
PUIFS
JOGPSNBUJPOT

.PCJMF
"QQMJDBUJPOT TFU
GPSUI
JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
8JUIPVU
UIFJS

;VN
&JTFOHJFFS
 DPOTFOU
JU
NBZ
OPU
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS
HJWFO
UP
UIJSE
QBSUJFT

-PIS
BN
.BJO
(FSNBOZ 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJGJFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUFNFOUT

5FMFGPO





 DPODFSOJOH
B
DFSUBJO
DPOEJUJPO
PS
TVJUBCJMJUZ
GPS
B
DFSUBJO
BQQMJDBUJPO
DBO
CF

5FMFGBY






 EFSJWFE
GSPN
PVS
JOGPSNBUJPO
5IF
HJWFO
JOGPSNBUJPO
EPFT
OPU
SFMFBTF
UIF
VTFS

JOGPCSNND!CPTDISFYSPUIEF GSPN
UIF
PCMJHBUJPO
PG
PXO
KVEHFNFOU
BOE
WFSJGJDBUJPO
*U
NVTU
CF
SFNFNCFSFE

XXXCPTDISFYSPUIDPNCSN UIBU
PS
QSPEVDUT
BSF
TVCKFDU
UP
B
OBUVSBM
QSPDFTT
PG
XFBS
BOE
BHJOH
4VCKFDU
UP
DIBOHF

638
Multi-way directional valves RE 64638/02.07
replaces: 01.06
1/8

(hydraulic switches)
MH.W...AG

Data sheet

Sizes 6, 20 and 30
Component series 2X
Operating pressure max. 350 bar
)

Content analysis Caracteristics

Content Page Direct or pilot operated
Characteristics 1 2 types of actuator
Function 1 (hydraulic and electrical)
Overview table of available models 2 With spring return
Operating Curves 2
Unit Dimensions:
s
4J[F


s
4J[F



s
4J[F



Function
The 6/2-way valves are hydraulically or electrically actuated
directional spool valves.
They control the starting, stopping and direction of a flow.
In general, these valves are used as an extension to a
mobile control block instead of fitting an extra section. The
following overview table shows the models available.
Deviating variants on request.

639
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG MH.WAG RE 64638/02.07

Overview table of available models

Actuation/voltage
Size Material No. Type Symbol switching pressure ppilot min
pilot pressure ppilot max
D C T F E direct actuated,
3 .)8&

"(9&(/.
FMFDUSJDBM


7

a direct actuated,
3 .)8&

"(9&(/. A B FMFDUSJDBM


7

6
D C T F E direct actuated,
3 .)8&

"(9-&(/.
FMFDUSJDBM


7

a direct actuated,
3 .)8&

"(9-&(/. A B FMFDUSJDBM


7


A1 A2 B1 B2 hydraulic,
pst L with spring return
3 .)8)

"(97
ppilot min


CBS

A B
ppilot max = 30 bar

20 3 .)88

"(9-($7
A1 A2 B1 B2
pilot operated,
3 .)88

"(9-($7 L
FMFDUSJDBM

7

3 .)88

"(9-($7 24V A B ppilot min = 3.5 bar
ppilot max = 30 bar
3 .)88

"(9-($7 pst

A1 A2 B1 B2 hydraulic,
pst L with spring return
3 MH6WH 32 AG2X/003M11
ppilot min


CBS

A B
ppilot max = 30 bar

30
A1 A2 B1 B2
pilot operated,
L
FMFDUSJDBM

7

3 .)88

"(9-"($.
24V A B ppilot min = 3.5 bar
ppilot max = 30 bar
pst

p-qV-curves (measured at 

NN2/s and = 50 C)

Size 6 20
Pressure differential

15
in bar

10
5

0 5 10 15 20 25
Flow in l/min
Size 20 10 Size 30 10
Pressure differential in bar

Pressure differential in bar

8 8

6 6

4 4

2 2

0 50 100 150 200 230 0 100 200 300 400 450

Flow in l/min Flow in l/min

640
RE 64638/02.07 MH.WAG Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Unit dimensions: size 6 (Dimensions in mm)

Type MH7WE 06 AG2X/EG..N9M01

.BUFSJBM/P
R901058030 
7





R901058029

7


Type MH6WE 06 AG2X/LEG..N9M01

.BUFSJBM/P
R901058035

7





R901058036

7


183
8,5

F E

25
22

50
D C

14
67,5 24,5 25
48,5 50
72,5 52,5
96,5 89 15

13,5 96p0,2 1 2 3

2x 6,6
36p0,2

3
7

B
T
14 11 11

A
36,5
60,5
84,5 4

1 Ports
"
#
$
%
&
'
BOE
5


(

UP
*40

2 Plug-in connector
3 Space required to remove
plug-in connector
4 /BNFQMBUF

641
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG MH.WAG RE 64638/02.07

Unit dimensions: size 20 (Dimensions in mm)

Type MH6WH 22 AG2X/003V01

.BUFSJBM/P
R901094340

67,5 13,5
1 2

A1 B1
98
97

53
48

(269)
126,5 136,5
109,5 111,5
96,5 96,5
82,5 82,5
40,5 40,5 31,5

A2 B2
A B
55
43

L X
(110)

A B
pst
43

54
55

A1 B1

X
A2 B2 98
48
53

34,5 48 54

13,5 67,5
11

1 Ports
A, A1, A2, B, B1 and B2
= G 1 to ISO 228/1
ppilot
BOE
-

(

UP
*40


2 /BNFQMBUF

642
RE 64638/02.07 MH.WAG Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Unit dimensions: size 20 (Dimensions in mm)

Type MH6WW 22 AG2X/030L2G 12 C4V01

24
.BUFSJBM/P
R901094342 7
=)
.BUFSJBM/P
R901094344 7


67,5 13,5
1 2
148,7

A1 B1
97

53
48

(263)
126,5 136,5
111,5 111,5
96,5 96,5
82,5 82,5
40,5 40,5

A2 B2
A B
55
43

L 3
27

X
(110)

A B
43

54
55

A1 B1

X
98
A2 B2
48
53

34,5 48
69

pst
54

13,5 67,5
11

1 Ports
A, A1, A2, B, B1 and B2
= G 1 to ISO 228/1
ppilot
BOE
-

(

UP
*40


2 /BNFQMBUF

643
 RE 64638/02.07 MH.WAG Bosch Rexroth AG 6/8

Unit dimensions: size 20 (Dimensions in mm)

Typ MH6WW 22 AG2X/030L2G 12
24 C4V11
.BUFSJBM/S
R901094341 7


.BUFSJBM/S
R901094343 7


65,5 13,5
1 2
148,7

A1 B1
97

53
48

(263)
126,5 136,5
111,5 111,5
96,5 96,5
82,5 82,5
40,5 40,5

A2 B2
55
43

A L
27

B X
(110)

A B
43

54
55

A1 B1

X
98
48
53

A2 B2 34,5 48
69

pst
54

13,5 65,5
11

1 Ports
A, A1, A2, B, B1 und B2

4"&

UP
+

14*

pSt
BOE
-

(

UP
*40


2 /BNFQMBUF

644
7/8 Bosch Rexroth AG MH.WAG RE 64638/02.07

Unit dimensions: size 30 (Dimensions in mm)

Type MH6WH 32 AG2X/003M11

.BUFSJBM/P
R901061669

95 25

A1 B1
116
93

60
55

(374)
175 193
153 155
138 138
113 113
13 60 60

A2
B2
61

49
pst
A B L X
(122)

A B
49
61

A1
B1 3
13
1 2 X
31,7
55
60

A2 B2
66,8

24 x M14; 20
25 95 41

1 Ports
A, A1, A2, B, B1 and B2

4"&


UP
+
(6000 PSI)
ppilot
BOE
-

(

UP
*40


2 /BNFQMBUF

645
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG MH.WAG RE 64638/02.07

Unit dimensions: size 30 (Dimensions in mm)

Type MH6WW 32 AG2X/L4AG24C4M11
.BUFSJBM/P
R901061670

95 25
162,2

A1 B1
116

60
55

1 Ports
(361) A, A1, A2, B, B1 and B2

4"&


UP
+
(6000 PSI)
168 193
ppilot
BOE
-

(

UP
*40

153 155
138 138 2 /BNFQMBUF
113 113
13 60 60

34,5
A2
B2
61

49
(122)

A
A B B
L X
12
24
49
61

A1
B1
13
1 2
153 31,7 X
55
60
82,5

A2 B2
66,8

pst

24 x M14; 20
25 95 41

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
;VN
&JTFOHJFFS
 be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.

-PIS
BN
.BJO
(FSNBOZ
5IF
EBUB
TQFDJGJFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUF-
5FMFGPO







ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
5FMFGBY








can be derived from our information. The information given does not
[email protected]
release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
www.boschrexroth.de
must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
wear and aging.

646
 RE 25 860/11.11 1/12
Pressure relief valves Replaces:
RE 25 860/10.10
Pressure relief valves

0 532 . . .
R 917 . . .

Valves for line connections

Valves for block installation

pmax = 350 bar

Qmax = 120 l/min

3
Contents Page Features
Function 2 Type of connection for pipeline installation and block installation
Technical data 2 Adjustment methods such as hand wheel, lead-seal capable,
fixed, hand wheel with scale (with and without lock)
Valves for line installation 3
Device dimensions 5 Application
Valves for block installation 7 In conveying and handling equipment, agricultural engineering,
Device dimensions 9 in municipal-vehicles and in general mechanical engineering.
Curves 11
Note
The versions Safety valves TV German Technical Inspec-
tion Agency model approved in accordance with the Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EG are used to safeguard hydraulic
accumulators, see technical data sheet RDEF 50 153.

647
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Pressure relief valves | RE 25 860/11.11

Function
This model series is based on a valve in seat design with Versatile version variants are available:
damping piston. The punched valve seat serves to ensure high Housing for pipeline installation with and without measuring
density, the damping piston prevents any valve vibration. It connection.
produces a flat control characteristic, i.e., even at an increas- Valve cartridges for block installation.
ing flow rate the set opening pressure is for the most part Various adjustment methods such as hand wheel, lead-seal
maintained. This is achieved by the effect of the flow forces on capable, fixed, hand wheel with scale (with and without lock).
the valve disk, whereby the valve continues to open as the Check valve before damping piston for fast response times.
flow rate increases.

T T T T T T

P P P

Stroke limiter

T T T T T T

Valve disk

Valve seat
Damping-
piston
P P
P Nonreturn valve

Technical data
Design Seat valve with damping
Line connections for pipeline installation and block installation
Installation position Optional
Ambient temperature 30...+80 C
Pressure medium Hydraulic oils based on mineral oil acc. to DIN/ISO,
other, e.g. environmentally-compatible fluids available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
...2000 mm2/s for start permissible range
Pressure medium temperature 30 C...+80 C with NBR sealings, NBR = Perbunan
15 C...+120 C with FKM sealings, FKM = Viton
Filtration Oil contamination Class 19/16 in accordance with ISO/DIS 4406,
or Class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638 to be achieved using filter `25 = 75
Direction of flow rate shown by symbol or marking
Operating pressure For line installation P: max. permissible 350 bar, depending on number of load changes and temperature.
Counter values on request.
T: max. permissible 210 bar (NBR) or 80 bar (FKM), depending on number of load
changes and temperature. Counter values on request.
Betriebsdruck For block installation P: In accordance with set pressure.
T: NBR max. 210 bar, FM max. 80 bar
MTTFd: max. 150 years, PRV with set value > 210 bar: B10 value on request
Cracking pressure (tolerance pnom +5 %) Set at flow 0.1 l/min

Leakage oil flow Max. 1 cm3/min

Flow Max. 120 l/min, depending on set pressure and line , see chapter Characteristics

648
RE 25 860/11.11 | Pressure relief valves Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Pressure relief valves for line installation

Threaded Version Seals Set Weight Material No.

port pressure * [kg]
[bar]
M 18 x 1,5 Fixed NBR 10 0.9 0 532 001 031
FKM 10 0 532 001 115
NBR 12 0 532 001 156
15 0 532 001 004
20 0 532 001 012
25 0 532 001 011
30 0 532 001 014
40 0 532 001 027
50 0 532 001 020
60 0 532 001 018
70 0 532 001 005
3
80 0 532 001 006
90 0 532 001 026
100 0 532 001 007
110 0 532 001 024
140 0 532 001 008
140 R 917 002 956 **
150 R 917 002 975 **
150 0 532 001 009
170 0 532 001 028
180 0 532 001 022
190 0 532 001 021
200 0 532 001 023
210 0 532 001 013
210 0 532 001 154
Fixed, with nonreturn valve 210 R 917 002 960 **
Fixed 230 0 532 001 019
250 0 532 001 016
300 0 532 001 030
NBR = Perbunan, FKM = Viton
** pnom +5 % at Q = 0.1 l/min, with back flow unloaded
** Pressure relief valve zinc-plated and transparent-passivated, special options upon request

649
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Pressure relief valves | RE 25 860/11.11

Threaded Version Seals Set Weight Material No.

port pressure * [kg]
[bar]
G1/2 ISO 228 Fixed, with nonreturn valve NBR 320 0.9 0 532 001 131

M 18 x 1.5 Adjustable NBR 10...15 1.0 0 532 002 010

15...50 R 917 002 939 **
15...50 0 532 002 005
7...67 0 532 002 052
40...100 R 917 002 936 **
40...100 0 532 002 003
50...300 R 917 002 938 **
50...300 0 532 002 007
FKM 50...300 0 532 002 020
NBR 50...350 0 532 002 064
70...180 R 917 002 937 **
70...180 0 532 002 001
100...250 0 532 002 004
G1/2 ISO 228 NBR 100...250 R 917 002 932 **
50...300 0 532 002 044
G1/2 ISO 228 Fixed, with nonreturn valve 50...350 0 532 002 059
M 18 x 1.5 Adjustable, long adjusting shaft NBR 1...10 1.2 0 532 003 014
Adjustable 1...35 0 532 003 035
15...80 0 532 003 016
15...150 0 532 003 001
30...200 0 532 003 003
30...200 R 917 005 060 **
50...250 0 532 003 002
50...300 0 532 003 009
G1/2 ISO 228 50...300 0 532 003 034
M 18 x 1.5 Adjustable 0...250 1.2 0 532 008 002

NBR = Perbunan, FKM = Viton

** pnom +5 % at Q = 0.1 l/min, with back flow unloaded
** Pressure relief valve zinc-plated and transparent-passivated, special options upon request

650
RE 25 860/11.11 | Pressure relief valves Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Device dimensions
Fixed T T T T

= 70+30 Nm
30 P Stroke limiter to P
pmax. = 110 bar
60

29.5
36 (2x)
T T T T

100
92.5
37.5

G1/4
Measuring
connection
P P
36 Nonreturn valve
43
6

Adjustment range 3
63
Adjustable T T

13
31
P 43

= 24+6 Nm
= 70+30 Nm
47,5

19
19
= 70+30 Nm
M26x1.5
24
max. 163
140

T T T T

P P

651
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Pressure relief valves | RE 25 860/11.11

Device dimensions (Continued)

11
9
10
8
6
4
2
0

21
= 70+30 Nm
2 Key
T 32 For locking
pressure setting

9 8
3
11
9
7
5
1
36
60

0
P 10 P
8
6
4
2
0

2 1
T

T
63
92.5
6 5
6

45
43

BKS
H
9 8

36
193
216.6

652
RE 25 860/11.11 | Pressure relief valves Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Pressure relief valves for block installation

Threaded Version Seals Set Weight Material No.

port pressure * [kg]
[bar]
M 30 x 1.5 Fixed FKM 5 0.2 0 532 001 148
Fixed, with nonreturn valve NBR 6 0 532 001 171
Fixed 12 0 532 001 060
15 0 532 001 055
25 0 532 001 039
30 0 532 001 113
50 0 532 001 059
60 0 532 001 142
70 0 532 001 127
80 0 532 001 032
90 0 532 001 036
120 0 532 001 048 3
130 0 532 001 057
150 0 532 001 041
160 0 532 001 029
170 0 532 001 147
170 0 532 001 040
180 0 532 001 050
190 0 532 001 037
200 0 532 001 052
FKM 210 0 532 001 176
NBR 220 0 532 001 058
Fixed, with nonreturn valve HNBR 230 R 917 006 555
Fixed NBR 250 0 532 001 051
260 0 532 001 167
280 0 532 001 061
FKM 280 0 532 001 172
NBR 300 0 532 001 043
Fixed, with nonreturn valve 320 0 532 001 145
330 0 532 001 173
NBR = Perbunan, FKM = Viton, HNBR = Therban
** pnom +5 % at Q = 0.1 l/min, with back flow unloaded

653
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Pressure relief valves | RE 25 860/11.11

Threaded Version Seals Set Weight Material No.

port pressure * [kg]
[bar]
M 30 x 1.5 Fixed NBR 185 0.2 0 532 001 170
350 0 532 001 139

M 30 x 1.5 Adjustable NBR 1...10 0.3 0 532 002 068

Adj., return loadable up to 330 bar 1...15 0 532 002 048
Adjustable, preset to 35+2 bar FKM 5...35 0 532 002 065
NBR 5...35 0 532 002 062
Adjustable 7...67 0 532 002 042
10...15 0 532 002 011
15...50 0 532 002 012
40...100 0 532 002 015
Adjustable, with nonreturn valve 40...200 0 532 002 051
Adjustable 50...300 0 532 002 014
Adjustable, with nonreturn valve 50...350 0 532 002 050
Adjustable FKM 50...350 0 532 002 046
Adjustable, with nonreturn valve NBR 50...380 0 532 002 058
Adjustable 70...180 0 532 002 002
FKM 70...180 0 532 002 016
Adjustable, preset to 190+10 bar NBR 100...250 0 532 002 013
Adjustable FKM 100...250 0 532 002 019
100...320 0 532 002 041
M 30 x 1.5 Adjustable, long adjusting shaft NBR 1...10 0.4 0 532 003 012
Adjustable 1...35 0 532 003 037
15...150 0 532 003 011
40...280 0 532 003 033

M 30 x 1.5 Adjustable NBR 50...315 0.5 0 532 008 001

M 26 x 1.5 Fixed, NBR 30 0.2 0 532 001 813

Valve carrier for screwing-in 40 0 532 001 806
M 24 x 1.5 110 0 532 001 812
See device dimensions
175 0 532 001 805
Page 10 bottom
200 0 532 001 804

NBR = Perbunan, FKM = Viton

* pnom +5 % at Q = 0.1 l/min, with back flow unloaded

654
RE 25 860/11.11 | Pressure relief valves Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Device dimensions
All sealing rings included loose

48.2 With nonreturn valve 28.5 17.7

T T

17.5
T T

14
P P
P
P

T T
= 70+30 Nm
1 T 8.5
T
24
120.2 80.5 = 70+30 Nm
30

143.5 max Stroke limiter to

pmax. = 110 bar
T 71.5 max
= 70+30 Nm
T
22
T
63
64

P P P

T
T 14
T = 70+30 Nm
86
19
189.5 max
117.5 max 3
T Adjustment range 13

P
63
64

T
1 = 70+30 Nm
T M26x1.5 = 24+6 Nm Maximal pressure limit
(can be lead sealed) 30
19

192
120
98
T
7 6 5 4 3

P
44

Locating bore
See Page 10 top

T = 70+30 Nm
32

655
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Pressure relief valves | RE 25 860/11.11

Device dimensions
0.1 A
43.5+0.3
in this area min. 30 Rz 16
28+0.15 permissible 25
27
T

0.1 A
A

30.5+0.3
M30x1.5
28F8 1)

120'
20H13
Rz 16

1) Return pressure
< 80 bar > 80 bar
28 28
F11( +0.150 +0.053
+0.020 ) F8 ( +0.020 )
T
16 max.
31.5+0.3 3+0.5
Thread runout
Valve carrier for screwing-in

T T
0.1 A

90'
30' 2'
0.1 A
0.1 A

P 28.2+0.1
3.4+0.2

= 65+10 Nm
31 M26x1.5
24

min. 15
Thread
R0.2
15
min. 29.4

10H13
32.2+0.2
22.8

A
0.1 B

B
82.1

T T
min. 28

65+10 Nm
1) 1) Recommendation:
40.5

Glue in thread,
e.g. using Loctite 243
18H13
M24x1.5
Metallic sealing surface

This pressure relief valve for block installation with M 26 x 1.5 internal thread is designed for particularly
small installation areas. The hydraulic parameters are identical with those for M 30 x 1.5 internal thread.
The exact pressure setting must ultimately be made by the customer.

656
RE 25 860/11.11 | Pressure relief valves Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Curves
v 35 mm2/s, T = 50 C For lower setting limits
Exceeding the boundaries of application
will cause a disproportionate increase
in pressure, and even to the functional limit
of the PRV.
45

40

35

30

25

P [bar]
20
max.
15 permissible
flow
10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Q [l/min]

For higher setting limits

400

350 3

300

250
P [bar]

200

150

100

50
max. per-
missible flow
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Q [l/min]

657
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Hydraulics Pressure relief valves | RE 25 860/11.11

Further notes

Special models for line installation with fatigue strength up to 350 bar on request.

For proper use, please observe the following additional data sheets:
Hydraulic valves for mobile applications: general information RE 64 020-B1
Pressure relief valves: product-specific instructions RE 25 860-B2
Pressure relief valves: repair instructions RDE 25 860-R

Information regarding the correct handling of Bosch Rexroth hydraulic products is available in our publication:
General Product Information for Hydraulic Products RE 07 008.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Product Segment Mobile Controls reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
D-71701 Schwieberdingen ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Fax +49 (0) 711-811 5 11 18 14 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
[email protected] the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.com/brm remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

658
 RE 27 574/04.05 1/8
Flow control valves Replaces:
1 987 760 704/10.97
Flow control valves

0 533 10. . . .
VT1, VH1, VH4, VHR4

Flow divider, dual acting

3-way flow control valves, fixed

3-way flow control valves, adjustable

3
Contents Page Features
Flow divider, Type of connection for pipeline installation
Function, Technical Data 2 Adjustment methods such as fixed and adjustable
3-way flow control valves, fixed
Function, Technical Data 3
3-way flow control valves, adjustable Application
Function, Technical Data 6 In conveying and handling equipment, agricultural engineering,
municipal-vehicles and in general mechanical engineering.

659
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Flow Control Valves RE 27574/04.05

Flow divider valve,

dual acting

Function
The flow divider valve is dual acting, i.e., the oil flow can be If the direction of flow is inverted, the oil flows A and B are
split up; however 2 oil flows can also be joined together. always joined together in an equal ratio to form an oil flow P,
When dividing the flow an oil flow P is always divided into irrespective of pressure differences in A and B.
equal oil flows A and B, irrespective of pressure differences A typical application for the flow divider valve is the synchroni-
in A and B. zation of 2 cylinders with differing cylinder loads.

Technical data
Design dual acting
Line connections for pipeline installation
Installation position Horizontal
Ambient temperature 30...+60 C
Pressure medium Mineral-based hydraulic oils in accordance with DIN/ISO,
other, e.g. environmentally-compatible fluids available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
20...2000 mm2/s for start permissible range
Pressure medium temperature 20...+80 C
Filtration Oil contamination Class 19/16 in accordance with ISO/DIS 4406,
or Class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638 to be achieved using filter 25 = 75
Direction of flow rate shown by symbol or marking
Operating pressure Max. 310 bar
Flow rate max. See table below
Dividing ratio 1:1

Device dimensions 30 44
6.75 (3x)

A B B
39.68
120
96
54

P
20

A
P

44.45 45
67 50

Type QP [l/min.] pmax

min. max. [bar] P A B Material number
VT1/10 6 10 310 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 0 533 108 003
VT1/20 8 20 310 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 0 533 108 005
VT1/30 16 30 310 M22 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 0 533 108 006
VT1/40 25 40 310 M22 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 0 533 108 007
VT1/50 35 50 310 M27 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 0 533 108 008
VT1/60 45 60 310 M27 x 2 M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 0 533 108 004
VT1/70 55 70 310 M27 x 2 M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 0 533 108 009

660
RE 27574/04.05 Flow Control Valves Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

3-way flow control valve,

fixed

Function
3-way flow control valves split up a delivered oil flow P into a Directly actuated valves have a faster response for the pressu-
regulated constant flow A and a residual flow B. The regula- re scale. The oil flow A is less constant as load pressure incre-
ted oil flow A remains practically constant irrespective of any ases (see curve).
pressure changes in A or B. The residual flow can then be sent Pilot operated valves respond less sensitively to changes in
to the tank or drive a secondary system. For applications in load pressure.
vehicles the constant flow is used, e.g. for steering. Their response characteristic is dampened.

Valve, pilot controlled, VH1 Valve, directly actuated, VH4

B B
Pressure scales throttle
Pilot valve

A Qconst. A Qconst.

P P
QRest QRest
B B
P P

Metering orifice
A Metering orifice
A 3

Technical data
Design 3-way flow control valves, fixed
Line connections for pipeline installation
Installation position Optional
Ambient temperature 25...+50 C
Pressure medium Mineral-based hydraulic oils in accordance with DIN/ISO,
other, e.g. environmentally-compatible fluids available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
20...2000 mm2/s for start permissible range
Pressure medium temperature 25...+80 C

Filtration Oil contamination Class 19/16 in accordance with ISO/DIS 4406,

or Class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638 to be achieved using filter 25 = 75
Direction of flow rate shown by symbol or marking
Operating pressure Max. 210 bar
Max. flow, type VH1 VH4
QP l/min 55 55
directly actuated QA l/min 30
pilot controlle QA l/min 30
Max. pressure difference p (A B) = 150 bar
Minimimu pressure drop Directly actuated: 6 bar, pilot controlled: 12 bar

661
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Flow Control Valves RE 27574/04.05

Type Qconst. Pilot controlled Direct mm * Material number

[l/min]
M D kg
VH 1/2/1 A 2 1.2 0.9 0 533 103 028
VH 1/3/4 3 1.5 0 533 103 007
VH 1/6/1 6 2 0 533 103 001
VH 1/9/1 9 3 0 533 103 046
VH 1/12/2 B 12 3 0 533 103 002
P
VH 1/19/3 19 3.5 0 533 103 051
VH 4/0.75/1 A 0.75 1.0 0.9 0 533 103 023
VH 4/1.5/1 1.5 1.2 0 533 103 033
VH 4/2/1 2 1.5 1.0 0 533 103 034
VH 4/3/1 3 2 1.5 0 533 103 024
VH 4/4.5/1 B 4.5 2.5 2.5 0 533 103 039
VH 4/6/... P 6 2.5 2.5 0 533 103 048
VH 4/6/1 6 3 2.5 0 533 103 015
VH 4/7.5/A1 7.5 3.3 2.8 0 533 103 056
VH 4/7.5/1 7.5 3.3 2.8 0 533 103 029
VH 4/9/1 9 3.5 3.0 0 533 103 019
VH 4/11/18 11 4 3.5 0 533 103 054
VH 4/12/1 12 4 3.5 0 533 103 021
VH 4/15/1 15 4.5 3.5 0 533 103 018
VH 4/17/1 17 5 4.5 0 533 103 026
VH 4/20/1 20 6 5.5 0 533 103 030
VH 4/23/2 23 5.3 0 533 103 031
VH 4/1.5/1 1.5 1.3 1.5 0 533 103 057
Valve, pilot controlled
Pressure scale response dampened. Flow more constant for rising load pressure.
Valve, directly actuated
Fast pressure scale response. Flow less constant for rising load pressure.
* M: mm metering bore
D: mm damping bore

Curves VH 1 pilot controlled

35 mm2/s QA %

The diagrams display the typical changes in the constant 150

PA150 P80 bar
flow QA depending on the pressure difference in A and B 0
as well as depending on the total flow QP. 100 150 PA0 PB150
The transfer for other constant flow variables is done as follows:
Ascertain the co-ordinate point from QP = desired constant
flow QA and ordinate QA = 100 % and draw straight lines
from it to the end points of the appropriate diagram above
QP = 55 or 110 l/min.

QA QP = Q A + Q B l/min

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55

662
RE 27574/04.05 Flow Control Valves Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

VH 4 directly actuated

QA % 150
100
150 50 PA150 P80 bar
0
PA0 PB150
150

100

QA QP = Q A + Q B l/min
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55

Device dimensions
39.5 = 60+15 Nm
VH1/..
32 41.2
30
M18 x 1.5 - 12
3
B
38

P A
67
P

B
= 60+15 Nm A
30 55 38
109

109 46
VH4/..
8
H8

25
M18 x 1.5 - 12
8.4

= 60+15 Nm
B
30
77

H8
P

50
8.4

P A
30

15

B A
= 60+15 Nm
25.5 11
30 23
32
57

663
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Flow Control Valves RE 27574/04.05

3-way flow control valve,

adjustable

Function
3-way flow control valves in this model series split up a
delivered oil flow QPR into a regulated constant flow QREG and
a residual flow QBP.
The regulated oil flow QREG remains for the most part constant
irrespective of any changes in pressure in REG or BP.
The residual flow can then be sent to the tank or drive
a secondary system.

Metering bore
Regulated flow Residual flow

REG BP

PR

Supply
REG BP PR

Pressure scales

Technical data
Design 3-way flow control valves, adjustable
Line connections for pipeline installation
Installation position Optional
Ambient temperature 25...+50 C
Pressure medium Mineral-based hydraulic oils in accordance with DIN/ISO,
other, e.g. environmentally-compatible fluids available on request
Viscosity 10...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
20...2000 mm2/s for start permissible range
Pressure medium temperature 25...+80 C

Filtration Oil contamination Class 19/16 in accordance with ISO/DIS 4406,

or Class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638 to be achieved using filter 25 = 75
Direction of flow rate shown by symbol or marking
Operating pressure Max. 250 bar
Flow, regulated 1...30, 1...47, 1...75 l/min
Minimum pressure drop 3...6 bar
Max. flow Total flow QPR = 114 l/min
Constant flow QREG see curve

664
RE 27574/04.05 Flow Control Valves Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Curves
Constant flow QREG [%]

150
150
PREG PBP
100
PREG PBP
50/0
80
100
150 PBP PREG 50 bar 70
PBP PREG 60
75

QREG l/min
50 4/
R
VH /47
40 R4
50 VH
30
Total flow 20 VHR 4/30
QREG QPR = Q REG + Q BP [l/min] 10
0 Scale
20 40 60 80 100 120 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

The diagram shows the typical change in constant flow, Example:

irrespective of any pressure difference between PREG and PBP Constant flow.............................QREG = 20 l/min
as well as the total flow QPR. Total flow .....................................QPR = 80 l/min
The diagram is adapted to other constant flow variables Pressure difference between constant and residual flow
as follows: PREG PBP = 150 bar.
Select the desired constant flow on the abscissa, and go According to the diagram, the constant flow deviation deviates
vertically up until the 100% line is reached. by 21 % from the set value.
From this coordinate, draw straight lines to the end points for This diagram was recorded for an oil viscosity of
QPR = 120 l/min. = 32 mm2/s.

3
Device dimensions
38,5

max. 96

REG PR BP 14.3
28.5
21.1

21.1

62.7 33.3 7.1 57.2 8.4H13

130
=
25.9

PR REG
49.5

77.8
=

BP

46 60.7

Type QPR [l/min] QREG [l/min] kg Material number

VHR 4 PR REG 114 0.5...30 M22 x 1.5 2.1 0 533 103 502
0.5...47 M22 x 1.5 0 533 103 500
0.5...75 M27 x 2 0 533 103 501
BP

665
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Flow Control Valves RE 27574/04.05

Information regarding the correct handling of Bosch Rexroth hydraulic products is available in our publication:
General Product Information for Hydraulic Products RD 07008.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive propeity of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
Product Segment: Mobile Controls be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Robert-Bosch-Strae 2 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
D-71701 Schwieberdingen ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Fax +49 (0) 711-811 5 11 18 14 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
[email protected] the user from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.com/brm remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

666
Thermal pressure valve RE 64309/06.06
Replaces: 06.02
1/4

MHDBDT 06

Data sheet

Nominal size 6
Component series 2X
Maximum operating pressure 280 bar
Maximum flow 3 l/min
H/A4624/95

Overview of contents Features

Contents Page Pressure adjustment, proportional to the temperature via a
Features 1 thermostat
Ordering details 2 Low hysteresis
Function 2 Very good repeatability accuracy
Symbol 2 Choice of several temperature ranges
Technical data 2 Optional installation orientation
Characteristic curves 3 Low weight
Unit dimensions 4 Saves energy

667
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG MHDBDT 06 RE 64309/06.06

Ordering details

MHDB DT 06 G 0 2X M *

Pressure relief valve Further details in

clear text
Direkt operated via thermostat = DT Port threads P and T
Nominal size 6 = 06 06 = Metric
Valve version 19 = UNF
Housing =G Seal material
Adjustment M= NBR seals, suitable for mine-
Not adjustable =0 ral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Nominal temperature at which control starts
Component series 20 to 29 = 2X
(20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) T050 = 50 C (control range 8 C)
T060 = 60 C (control range 8 C)
Maximum DB pressure
T075 = 75 C (control range 10 C)
210 bar = 210
280 bar (for AA10VO control pump) = 280 T082 = 82 C (control range 10 C)
T087 = 87 C (control range 10 C)

Function, symbol
The thermal pressure valve is a direct operated pressure
relief valve of poppet seat design, where the nominal pressure
is proportional to temperature within given limits. 1
The valve basically comprises of a housing, thermoelement (1),
valve seat and valve cone. The maximum pressure is dependent
2
on the selected version. The thermal element expands in rela-
P T
tion to the temperature and thereby compresses the springs
(2) and (3) via a spring plate. If the temperature at the thermo-
element (1) is lower than the control range, then the spring de-
compresses (2) and the re-set spring (3) unloads the pressure
3
chamber P to tank.

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
General
Weight kg 0,8
Installation Optional

Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure at port P bar315
Control pressure at port P bar210 or 280 (for AA10VO control pump)
Pressure at port T barZero pressure, separate line to tank
Max. flow l/min3
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524; fast bio-degradable pres-
sure fluids to VDMA 24568 (also see RE 90221); HETG (rape
seed oil); HEPG (polyglycols); HEES (synthetic ester); Other
pressure fluids on request
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 300
Degree of contamination class 20/18/15. We therefore recommend a filter with a mini-
mum retention rate of 10 75.
Max. hysteresis C 4
Repeatability accuracy % < 2 % of pnom

Installation notes:
MHDBDT 06 thermal pressure valves are only suitable for fluid circuits. The fluid to be measured should continually flow through
the device once it is installed.

668
RE 64309/06.06 MHDBDT 06 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Characteristic curves (measured at qV = 2 l/min and = 1 C/min)

Pressure/temperature characteristic curves

pnom = 210 bar pnom = 280 bar

300 300
operating pressure in bar

operating pressure in bar

280 280 280 bar
260 260
240 240
220 210 bar 220
200 200
180 180
160 160
140 140
120 120
100 100
80 18 bar 80 20 bar
60 7,4 bar Manufacturing tolerance 60 7,4 bar Manufacturing tolerance
40 40
20 without hysteresis without hysteresis
20
0 0

1, 2 see table 1, 2 see table

max. 4 oC
Temperature range thermostat:
pnom
1 2
Hysteresis in bar

50 C 58 C
60 C 68 C
75 C 85 C 3
82 C 92 C
87 C 97 C

1 2

1, 2 see table

669
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG MHDBDT 06 RE 64309/06.06

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

min. 24
40

63

(126)
60 54
38 15

1 1/16-12UN-2A
M 26 x 1,5
T
40

1 Name plate
P 2 Width across flats 32A/F
(tightening torque 50 Nm)
1 2 3 Installation in the cooling circuit

Ports P and T Installation cavity

D Rz 16
c
d2+0,1
D
d1
t1+0,4

0,1 A d2 +0,1
1

d1
t1+0,4

A 15o
1

Rz 16
t2 min

o R 0,2
45
t2 min

o R 0,2
45

Ports P and T Installation cavity for valve

Port thread d1 d2 D t1 t2 a Port thread d1 d2 D t1 t2
06 M12 x 1,5 13,8 22 2,4 11,5 15 06 M26 x 1,5 29,05 40 3,1 15
19 7/16-20 UNF-2B 12,4 21 2,4 11,5 12 19 1 1/16-12 UNF-2B 29,2 41 3,3 15

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specications and other
Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
Zum Eisengieer 1 AG. Without their consent it may not be reproduced or given to third
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany parties.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 The data specied above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
[email protected] application can be derived from our information. The information given
www.boschrexroth.de does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
verication. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging.

670
Throttle check valve and RE 64548/06.03
Replaces: 03.94
1/6

Check valve with SAE anged ports

MHFS; MHSV

Data sheet

K 3680/1 K 3683/12

Size 20, 25, 32 Type MHFS ...-1X/... Type MHSV...-1X/...

Series 1X
Operating pressure max. 420 bar

3
Overview of contents Features
Contents Page Operation dependent on pressure and viscosity
Features 1 Compact design
Throttle/Check Valve, Type MHFS: For direct mounting on cylinder or distributor block

s
4J[FT
BWBJMBCMF
 Reduction of possible leakage points

s
'VODUJPO
4FDUJPO
4ZNCPM
 Additional gauge port

s
5FDIOJDBM
%BUB


s
0QFSBUJOH
$VSWFT


s
6OJU
%JNFOTJPOT

Check Valve, Type MHSV:

s
4J[FT
BWBJMBCMF


s
4FDUJPO
4ZNCPM


s
5FDIOJDBM
%BUB


s
6OJU
%JNFOTJPOT

Check Valve, Type MHSV 22 PB2:

s
4J[F
BWBJMBCMF


s
4FDUJPO
4ZNCPM


s
5FDIOJDBM
%BUB


s
6OJU
%JNFOTJPOT


671
2/6 Bosch Rexroth AG MHFS; MHSV | RE 64 548/066.03

Throttle/Check Valve, Type MHFS

Sizes available:
s
4J[F


h
4" s
4J[F



h
4"&
Type MHFS 20 E2B1-1X/PBF45B08V11 Type MHFS 32 E2B1-1X/PBF10B03V11
Ordering code R900417906 Ordering code R900411106
s
4J[F


h
4"&
Type MHFS 25 E2B1-1X/PBF10B04V11
Ordering code R900334465

Function, Section, Symbol

B
The valves are primarily used for limiting cylinder speeds, in
order to reduce shocks when stopping heavy loads.
They consist basically of housing (1), spindle (2), valve poppet
(3) and compression spring (4).
Limiting the cylinder speed (ow from B to A) is achieved by
NFBOT
PG
TQJOEMF


%FQFOEJOH
PO
UIF
TQJOEMF
TFUUJOH
SBEJBM

holes (5) in valve poppet (3) are plugged to produce the requi-
red throttling to ow.
Fixed opening (6) between A and B prevents the throttle A
opening from being reduced to 0. This opening is 7.6 mm for
size 20, 13.2 mm for size 25, and 26.4 mm for size 32.
For the lifting operation (ow from A to B), valve poppet (3),
which is guided by spindle (2), is pressed against compression
spring (4) to allow the valve to fully open.

MA

MA

Technical data (For operation outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Max. operating pressure bar 420

Cracking pressure bar 0,5
Fluid .JOFSBM
PJM
UP
%*/


)-
)-1

QIPTQIBUF
FTUFS

)'%3

Fluid temperature range C 20 to +80

Viscosity range mm2/s 2,6 to 380
Fluid cleanliness (maximum permissible) *40

$

$MBTT

Weight Size 20 kg 2,1
Size 25 kg 3,5
Size 32 kg 5,1

672
 RE 64 548/06.03 | MHFS; MHSV Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6

Throttle/Check Valve, Type MHFS

Operating Curves (measured at N


NN
2/s and *


$

110 Throttle opening dependent on spindle movement

100 3
Throttle opening in mm2

80 1 Size 20
2
2 Size 25
60 3 Size 32

40
1
20

01 2 3 4 5 5,5
/VNCFS
PG
SPUBUJPO
PG
TQJOEMF

Unit dimensions %JNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

L2 D2 L4 D3/T1
= = D1
=

=
MA
H2

H1

H2
=
=

L4 L6

L3
B
L5

L2

MA
G 1/4 max. L1

Size Port A, B 1) L1 max. L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 H1 H2 D1 D2 D3 T1

20 4"&
h 85 60 30 23,9 30 49 75 50,8 11 18 M10 14
25 4"&
h 100 75 37 27,8 40 60 80 57,2 13,5 20 M12 16
32 4"&

h 116 85 42,5 31,7 42,5 70 90 66,7 15 24 M14 x 1,5 18

1)

14*

CBS

673
4/6 Bosch Rexroth AG MHFS; MHSV | RE 64 548/066.03

Check Valve, Type MHSV

Sizes available:
s
4J[F


h
4"& s
4J[F



h
4"&
Type MHSV 22 ZB1-1X/M11-099 Type MHSV 30 FB1-1X/M11
Ordering code R900493236 Ordering code R900307483
s
4J[F


h
4"&
Type MHSV 25 FB1-1X/M11
Ordering code R900358470

Section, Symbol Technical data (For operation outside these

parameters, please consult us!)
B
Max. operating presssure bar 420
Cracking Size 20 bar 0,6
pressure: Size 25 bar 0,5
Size 32 bar 1,5
Fluid .JOFSBM
PJM
UP
%*/


524 (HL, HLP) Phos-
QIBUF
FTUFS
)'%3

Fluid temperature range C 20 to +80

A Viscosity range mm/s 2,6 to 380
Fluid cleanliness *40

$


(maximum permissible) Class 20/18/15
B
Weight kg Approx. 1

Unit dimensions %JNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

D1 Size Port L1 L2 L30,2 L40,2 H1 D1 D2 D3 Seal kit

D2 A, B 1) ordering code
5

B 20 4"&
h 70 50 50,8 23,9 57 40 20 11,5 R900312289

25 4"&
h 80 60 57,2 27,8 70 46 25 13,5 R900312593
32 SAE 1 90 72 66,7 31,7 78 52 30 16 R900004330 2)
h R900007920 2)
H1

1)

14*

CBS

A
2)
*G
OFDFTTBSZ
TUBUF
CPUI
PSEFSJOH
DPEFT
D2

L3 0,2 D3
L4 0,2

L2

L1

674
RE 64 548/06.03 | MHFS; MHSV Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6

Check Valve, Type MHSV 22 PB2

Size available:
s
4J[F


h
4"&
Type MHSV 22 PB2-1X/M
Ordering code R900459081

Section, Symbol Technical data (For operation outside these

parameters, please consult us!)
A
Max. operating presssure bar 420
Cracking pressure bar 0,6
Fluid .JOFSBM
PJM
UP
%*/


524 (HL, HLP) Phos-
QIBUF
FTUFS
)'%3

Fluid temperature range C 20 to +80

Viscosity range mm/s 2,6 to 380
Fluid cleanliness *40

$


(maximum permissible) Class 20/18/15
B
Weight kg Approx. 1

Unit dimensions %JNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

40,5 -0,1
3/4 SAE ports (A, B) 6000 PSI (420 bar)
20
Seal kit ordering code R900312289
1

A
57

B
20

50,80,2 11
23,80,2

60

72

675
6/6 Bosch Rexroth AG MHFS; MHSV | RE 64 548/06.03

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG

CZ
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
*OEVTUSJBM
)ZESBVMJDT
%
-PIS
BN
.BJO

Mobile Applications "MM
SJHIUT
SFTFSWFE
/P
QBSU
PG
UIJT
EPDVNFOU
NBZ
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS
TUPSFE
QSP-
Zum Eisengieer 1 cessed, duplicated or circulated using electronic systems, in any form or by any
means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany
*O
UIF
FWFOU
PG
DPOUSBWFOUJPO
PG
UIF
BCPWF
QSPWJTJPOT
UIF
DPOUSBWFOJOH
QBSUZ
JT

Telefon +49 (0) 93 52-18 0
obliged to pay compensation.
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52-18 23 58 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJlFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWFT
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUFNFOUT

[email protected] concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be deri-
www.boschrexroth.de ved from our information.The details stated do not release you from the responsi-
CJMJUZ
GPS
DBSSZJOH
PVU
ZPVS
PXO
BTTFTTNFOU
BOE
WFSJlDBUJPO
*U
NVTU
CF
SFNFNCF-
red that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.

676
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Steuerblcke
Pilot Control Devices

Benennung
Designation Typ
Type Nenngre Datenblatt
Data sheet Seite
Page

Hydraulic Pilot Control Devices

Hydraulic pilot control device 2TH6 RE 64552 679

in sandwich plate design

Hydraulic pilot control device 2TH6R RE 64551 687

in pedal design

Hydraulic pilot control device 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N RE 64555 693

for armrest installation

Hydraulic pilot control device 4TH5NR, 5TH5NR, 6TH5NR RE 64535 705

with 2 pedals and damping system

Hydraulic pilot control device 4TH6NR, 5TH6NR, 6TH6NR RE 64554 713

with 2 pedals and damping system

Hydraulic pilot control device 4THF5, 6THF5 RE 64557 721

with end position lock

Hydraulic pilot control device 4THF6, 5THF6 RE 64553 733

with end position lock

Hydraulic pilot control device TH7 RE 64558 745

4

Electronic Pilot Control Devices

Electronic pilot control device THE5 RE 29881 755

Electronic pilot control device EJ RE 29896 799

For the latest information on pilot control devices, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/joysticks
677
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

678
Hydraulic pilot control unit of sandwich RE 64 552/05.06 1/8
Replaces: 05.03
plate design for the remote control of
directional valves, pumps, motors

Type 2TH6

Series 1X

Contents Features
Functional description, section 2 Progressive, sensitive control
Symbol hydraulic 3 Precise and play-free control characteristics
Technical data 3 Low actuation force at the lever

Ordering details 4 Rust-free plunger

Characteristics curves 5 Further remote controls and pilot control units:

Unit dimensions 6 to 7 Hydraulic remote control

Contact location within the plugs 8 s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
VOJU
UZQF

5)

3
QFEBM
WFSTJPO
TFF

RE 64551)
s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
VOJU
UZQFT

5)


5)

5)

/
GPS
BSN
SFTU
4
JOTUBMMBUJPO
TFF
3&


s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)

GPS
JOTUSVNFOU
QBOFM
JOTUBMMBUJ-
PO
PS
JO
QFEBM
EFTJHO
TFF
3&


s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
XJUI
FOE
QPTJUJPO
MPDLJOH
UZQF

5)'


TFF
3&


PS
UZQF

5)'

TFF
3&


Electronic pilot control device

s
&MFDUSPOJD
SFNPUF
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)&
GPS
EJSFDU

controlling of electrical or electro-hydraulical pilot operated
BDUVBUPST
TFF
3&


s
&MFDUSPOJD
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)&
TFF
3&


n
#
5)

TFF
QJDUVSF
PQQPTJUF

s
3FDPNNFOEFE
GPS
VTF
XJUI
B
TJOHMF

5)

DPOUSPM
BYJT
s
5IJT
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
VOJU
DBOOPU
CF
GMBOHFE
PO

679
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 | RE 64 552/05.06

Functional description, section

1
10
9

7 11

Holding
solenoid
6
3
13
8 U
4 12
Q

2
Q

2 3

Hydraulic operating principle QPTJUJPO
PG
UIF
DPOUSPM
MFWFS



Hydraulic pilot control units of the type 2TH6 operate on the 5IJT
QSFTTVSF
DPOUSPM
BT
B
GVODUJPO
PG
UIF
DPOUSPM
MFWFS



basis of direct operated pressure reducing valves. QPTJUJPO
BOE
UIF
DIBSBDUFSJTUJDT
PG
UIF
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH



Pilot control units of the type 2TH6 basically comprise of a enables the proportional hydraulic control of directional valves
DPOUSPM
MFWFS


UXP
QSFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
WBMWFT
BOE
B
IPVTJOH
and high response control valves for hydraulic pumps and

 motors.
&BDI
QSFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
WBMWF
DPOTJTUT
PG
B
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


B
"
SVCCFS
HBJUFS


QSPUFDUT
UIF
NFDIBOJDBM
QBSUT
JO
UIF

DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


B
SFUVSO
TQSJOH


BOE
B
QMVOHFS

 housing against contamination and ensures that the 2TH6 pilot
control units can also be used for the arduous applications.
In the non-actuated condition, the control lever is held in the
OFVUSBM
QPTJUJPO
CZ
UIF
SFUVSO
TQSJOH


5IF
DPOUSPM
QPSUT
 

Electro-magnetic lock
BSF
DPOOFDUFE
UP
UBOL
QPSU
5
WJB
B
ESJMMJOH


&OE
QPTJUJPO
MPDLJOH
JT
POMZ
QSPWJEFE
GPS
UIF
DPOUSPM

8IFO
UIF
DPOUSPM
MFWFS


JT
EFGMFDUFE
UIF
QMVOHFS


JT
connections which require that the control lever is held in the
QSFTTFE
BHBJOTU
UIF
SFUVSO
TQSJOH


BOE
UIF
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH
deflected position.


5IF
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


JOJUJBMMZ
NPWFT
UIF
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


"O
BEEJUJPOBM
TQSJOH


XIJDI
JT
GJUUFE
CFMPX
BO
BEEJUJPOBM

downwards and closes the connection between the relevant QMBUF


XBSOT
CZ
NFBOT
PG
BO
JODSFBTFE
GPSDF
XIJDI
JT

QPSU
BOE
UBOL
QPSU
5
"U
UIF
TBNF
UJNF
UIF
SFMFWBOU
QPSU
JT
SFRVJSFE
GPS
DPNQSFTTJOH
UIJT
TQSJOH
UIBU
UIF
QMVOHFS


BOE

DPOOFDUFE
UP
QPSU
1
WJB
UIF
ESJMMJOH


5IF
DPOUSPM
QIBTF
TUBSUT
UIF
DPOUSPM
MFWFS


IBWF
BMNPTU
SFBDIFE
UIF
FOE
QPTJUJPO
BT
TPPO
BT
UIF
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


GJOET
JUT
CBMBODF
CFUXFFO
UIF

8IFO
UIJT
UISFTIPME
JT
PWFSDPNF
B
SJOH


DPOUBDUT
UIF

GPSDF
GSPN
UIF
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


BOE
UIF
GPSDF
SFTVMUJOH
GSPN

TPMFOPJE


JG
UIF
TPMFOPJE
JT
FOFSHJTFE
UIFO
DPOUSPM
MFWFS



UIF
IZESBVMJD
QSFTTVSF
JO
UIF
SFMFWBOU
QPSUT
QPSUT



is held in its end position by magnetic force.
"T
B
SFTVMU
PG
UIF
JOUFSBDUJPO
PG
UIF
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


BOE

6OMPDLJOH
DBO
QFSGPSNFE
BVUPNBUJDBMMZ
XIFO
UIF
TPMFOPJE

UIF
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


UIF
QSFTTVSF
JO
UIF
SFMFWBOU
QPSUT
JT

current is switched off.
QSPQPSUJPOBM
UP
UIF
TUSPLF
PG
UIF
QMVOHFS


BOE
UIVT
UP
UIF

680
RE 64 552/05.06 | Type 2 TH6 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Symbol, hydraulic
Variants without electrical detent: L, M, P, T, N Variants with electrical detent: G, H, J
T P T P

1 2 1 2

Technical data, mechanical (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Inlet pressure bar up to 50
#BDL
QSFTTVSF
BU
QPSU
5
CBS up to 3
$POUSPM
GMVJE
GMPX
1
UP




MNJO up to 16
Hysterises bar up to 1
Pressure fluid
1)
suitable for NBR seals NJOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/

1)
2)
suitable for FKM seals QIPTQIBUF
FTUFS
)'%3

2)
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to + 80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
%FHSFF
PG
QSFTTVSF
GMVJE
DPOUBNJOBUJPO .BYJNVN
QFSNJTTJCMF
EFHSFF
PG
DPOUBNJOBUJPO
PG
UIF
QSFTTVSF


GMVJE
JT
UP
/"4

DMBTT

8F
UIFSFGPSF
SFDPNNFOE
B

filter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75
.BY
QFSNJTTJCMF
PQFSBUJOH
UPSRVF
BU
MFWFS
/N 10 in operation

/N 
GPS
BO
FYDFQUJPOBM
POF
UJNF
MPBEJOH
8FJHIU
EFQFOEFOU
PO
UIF
BDUVBUJOH
FMFNFOU

LH 1.2 to 1.8

Technical data, electrical (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
&DPOUBDU
UFDIOJDBM
EBUB
GPS
BDUVBUPS
/
s
4XJUDIJOH
DBQBDJUZ

%$ 
"


7


DZDMFT

"$ 
"


7



DZDMFT

"


7


DZDMFT
s
.BY
TUBSU
DPOUBDU
SFTJTUBODF
N8 50
s
.JO
JTPMBUJPO
SFTJTUBODF
BU


7
%$
.8 1 000
s
%JFMFDUSJD
TUSFOHUI 1 000 V eff. 50 Hz min. between outputs 4
1 500 V eff. 50 Hz min. between outputs and mass
Solenoid supply voltage V 

UP



%$
Power consumption of each solenoid 8.5 W at 24 V

"QQMJDBUJPO
HVJEFMJOFT (this list is not intended to be considered as complete)

n
%P
OPU
EJSFDU
the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.
n
5IF
FMFDUSJDBM
DBCMF
NVTU
CF
LFQU
GSFF
PG
BOZ
NFDIBOJDBM
GPSDFT
n
%VSJOH
PQFSBUJPn protection via the rubber boot must be ensured.

Safety guidelines (this list is not intended to be considered as complete)

Only one function control must be allocated to an E-contact.
The circuit functions are to be so designed that uncontrolled machine movements, caused by the application, are prevented and
that it is possible to switch from one function to another.
n

5BLF
JOUP
BDDPVOU
Bll of the application limits, particulary those application limits stated within this catalogue sheet.

681
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 | RE 64 552/05.06

Ordering details
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
VOJU
XJUI
/
GMBOHFBCMF
DPOUSPM
BYJT Example
TU
DPOUSPM
BYJT
3-2 TH 6 L06-1X
- 2 TH 6 -1X / M70
OE
DPOUSPM
BYJT L06 M01
/

OVNCFS
PG
DPOUSPM
BYFT
1 to 6

SE
DPOUSPM
BYJT

UI
DPOUSPM
BYJT

UI
DPOUSPM
BYJT

'VSUIFS
EFUBJMT
JO
DMFBS
UFYU
UI
DPOUSPM
BYJT
*

Pilot control unit with 1 control Example

BYJT
OPU
GMBOHFBCMF B 2 TH 6 -1X/ *
B 2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01
Example
$POUSPM
BYJT
TFQBSBUF 2 TH 6 -1X/ *
2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01
Connection threads
01 = G 1/4 pipe thread to
Actuator type standard ISO 228/1
1 lever without detent =L 05 =

6/'
#
DPOOFDUJPOT
1 lever with detent in 3 positions =M UP
TUBOEBSE
*40

1 lever held in any position by a friction Seals
coupling =P M =
/#3
TFBMT

1 lever with detent in 3 positions and held V = FKM seals
! "UUFOUJPO
in any position by a friction coupling =T
The compatibility of the seals and
1 lever with E-contact =N QSFTTVSF
GMVJE
IBT
UP
CF
UBLFO
JOUP

1 lever with electrical detent in position 1 =G account
1 lever with electrical detent in position 2 =H Plug
WPJS
QBHF


1 lever with electrical detent in both positions =J 5 =
%&654$)
TFBMFE
QMVH
*1


for wiring the solenoid on a 2 TH 6 G/H/J
Enter the identification number of the control curve that is 6 =
1MVH
".1
."5/-0,

SFRVJSFE
TFF
QBHF

for wiring the solenoid on a 2 TH 6 G/H/J
7 =
%&654$)
TFBMFE
QMVH
*1


Series 10 19 = 1X GPS
XJSJOH
UIF
TPMFOPJET
PO
B


5)

/

UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT

8 =
1MVH
".1
."5/-0,

GPS
XJSJOH
UIF
TPMFOPJET
PO
B


5)

/
No code = Without plug
Drillings for connections P and T: connection possibilities TFFO
GSPN
BCPWF

3-2 TH 6 L06-1X/ 1-2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01 B 2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01 2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01/

M70
L06 M01

2 2 2 2 2 2
P and T P and T P and T P and T

3 3 3 3 3 3

682
RE 64 552/05.06 | Type 2 TH6 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

06 Control curve, identification no. 06
This curve is used for the pilot control of the SM12, SM18, M1 control blocks

E Inlet
Control pressure in bar

pressure Inter-section point " B C %

2:-6 njoj D
Lever deflection 3 18 21 25
C "DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 0.8 / 2.7 3.8
GPS
BDUVBUPS
-
JO
/N Q


CBS

6-9 nbyj B "DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 0.8 1.8 3.2 4.3

1
GPS
BDUVBUPST
(
)
+
JO
/N Q
CBS

Lever deflection
#

SFTJTUBODF
QPJOU
CFGPSF
DIBOHFPWFS
UP
JOMFU
QSFTTVSF

70 Control curve, identification no. 70

This curve is used for the pilot control of the SX14, SX18 control blocks

E Inlet
Control pressure in bar

pressure Inter-section point " B C %

36 njoj D
C Lever deflection 3 18 21 25
"DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 0.8 / 2.7 3.8
GPS
BDUVBUPS
-
JO
/N Q


CBS

7 nbyj B "DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 0.8 3.2 3.6 4.3

GPS
BDUVBUPST
(
)
+
JO
/N Q
CBS

Lever deflection #

SFTJTUBODF
QPJOU
CFGPSF
DIBOHFPWFS
UP
JOMFU
QSFTTVSF

20 Control curve, identification no. 20

This curve is used for the pilot control of the SP12 control blocks

E Inlet
Control pressure in bar

pressure Inter-section point " B C %

33 njoj D Lever deflection 3 18 21 25
C "DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 1 /  3.8
GPS
BDUVBUPS
-
JO
/N Q


CBS

9 nbyj B "DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 1 3.1 3.4 4.3

GPS
BDUVBUPST
(
)
+
JO
/N Q
CBS

1
#

SFTJTUBODF
QPJOU
CFGPSF
DIBOHFPWFS
UP
JOMFU
QSFTTVSF
Lever deflection
4
 Control curve, identification no. 97 (only for actuators L, M, P, N and T)
This curve is used for the pilot control of the M7 control blocks

Inlet
Control pressure in bar

pressure
35 njoj D Inter-section point " C
Lever deflection 3 25
"DUVBUJPO
NPNFOU 0.8 3.3
GPS
BDUVBUPS
-
JO
/N
7 nbyj B
1

Lever deflection

5IF
BDUVBUJPO
NPNFOUT
TUBUFE
BSF
UIFPSJUJDBM
WBMVFT
XIJDI
EP
OPU
UBLF
JOUP
BDDPVOU
UIF
SVCCFS
CPPU
SFTJTUBODF

683
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 | RE 64 552/05.06

Unit dimensions (Dimensions in mm)

2 TH6 L 06-1X/M01
1-2 TH6 L 06-1X/M01 120
M 100
P 78
T 32 counter bore 27
N

16 16
2 holes
 1 2

50 60

18 25
1 25 2

56
42

10
12
301

120

8,5
5
2

T
T 2 holes 8.3


62

2 holes M8 Y
 * P


2 counter bores 20.40.1

37

P
1 2 deep 10.1

31 31 32

for version 2 TH 6 the threads are open

* for version 1-2 TH 6 the threads are closed

UIF
WFSTJPO

5)
/
IBT
PUIFS
EJNFOTJPOT
GPS
UIF
MFWFS
BOE
CVTI

B2 TH6
VQQFS
QBSU
JT
JEFOUJDBM
XJUI
UIF
BCPWF
EFQJDUFE

5)

PS

5)

counter bore
120 QPSUT

25
100 QPSUT

26
16 16

2 holes
 1 2
upper part

50 60
2
5

T
T
101



2 counter bores
QPSUT

25
62

P P QPSUT

26
37

1 2 EFFQ

NBYJ
16 16
32  
1 pressurisation of control port 1 78
2 pressurisation of control port 2

684
RE 64 552/05.06 | Type 2 TH6 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Unit dimensions (Dimensions in mm)

3-2 TH6 H06-1X/H06 L06 M01 1 pressurisation of control port 1
G G
2 pressurisation of control port 2
J J
120 3
TU
DPOUSPM
BYJT
)

100
4
OE
DPOUSPM
BYJT
)

5
SE
DPOUSPM
BYJT
-

16 16
1 2 6
0SJOHT

Y


PGG
QFS
DPOUBDU
TVSGBDF


7 plug factory fitted
1 2

16 16
2 holes
 1 2
50 60
156
5 4 3
25
25
1 2

301
8,5
5

T
T
101

P
62

P 2 counter bores 20.40.1 4

37

1 2 deep 10.1 7
16 16
  6
78 114

Installation guidelines
n
.PVOUJOH
GMBOHF
BSFB
'MBUOFTT



NN
n
4DSFX
IFBE
JNFOTJPOT


NN
n
5JHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
UIF
GMBOHF
GJYJOH
TDSFXT

.BY

/N
n
5JHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
UIF
QJQF
DPOOFDUJPOT

.BY

/N

685
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 | RE 64 552/05.06

&MFDUSJDBM
DPOUBDU
TZNCPM
GPS
WFSTJPO

5)

/
grey yellow

$POUBDU
MPDBUJPO
XJUIJO
UIF
QMVHT
GPS
XJSJOH
UIF

5)

/
DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67
PSEFSJOH
DPEF


Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK
PSEFSJOH
DPEF



View F View F
%&654$)
DPWFS
%5


1

$&
 ".1
DPWFS




Contact location within the plugs for wiring the solenoids of the
FMFDUSPNBHOFUJD
MPDL

5)

(

)

+
DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67
PSEFSJOH
DPEF



MPDL
DPOOFDUJPO
OP
MPDL
DPOOFDUJPO
OP

View F %&654$)
DPWFS
%5


1

$&


Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK
PSEFSJOH
DPEF



View F

MPDL
DPOOFDUJPO
OP ".1
DPWFS



MPDL
DPOOFDUJPO
OP

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
%4*
4"4 This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set forth
.PCJMF
"QQMJDBUJPOT BP 101 JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
*U
NBZ
OPU
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS

(MPDLFSBVTUSBF


CE
*SOF
+PMJPU$VSJF given to third parties without its consent.

&MDIJOHFO
(FSNBOZ 
7OJTTJFVY
$FEFY
'SBODF 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJGJFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUFNFOUT

5FM





 5FM








concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived
'BY







'BY







 from our information. The information given does not release the user from the
obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
JOGPCSNBL!CPTDISFYSPUIEF
XXXCPTDISFYSPUIGS
products are subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.
XXXCPTDISFYSPUIDPNCSN

Subject to revision.

686
Pilot Control Device in Pedal Design RE 64 551/05.06 1/6
Replaces: 05.03
for the Remote Control of Directional
Valves, Pumps and Motors

Type 2 TH6 R

Series 1X

Contents Features
Functional description, section 2 Progressive, sensitive operation
Symbol, hydraulic 2 Precise control
Technical data 3 Working ports underneath
Application guideline 3 Control elements protected by rubber sleeve
Characteristics 3 Plungers made of stainless steel, plunger guides made of
brass; this prevents corrosion and seizing
Ordering details 4
Further remote controls and pilot control units:
Unit dimensions 4 to 5
Hydraulic remote control
Installation guidelines 6 4
s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)
TFF
3&


JO
TBOE-
wich plate design
s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
VOJU
UZQFT

5)


5)

5)

/
GPS
BSN

SFTU
JOTUBMMBUJPO
TFF
3&


s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)

GPS
JOTUSVNFOU
QBOFM
JOTUBMMB-
UJPO
PS
JO
QFEBM
EFTJHO
TFF
3&


s
1JMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
XJUI
FOE
QPTJUJPO
MPDLJOH
UZQF

5)'


TFF
3&


PS
UZQF

5)'

TFF
3&


n
&MFDUSPOJD
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
s
&MFDUSPOJD
SFNPUF
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)&
GPS
EJSFDU

controlling of electrical or electro-hydraulical pilot operated
BDUVBUPST
TFF
3&


s
&MFDUSPOJD
QJMPU
DPOUSPM
EFWJDF
UZQF
5)&
TFF
3&


687
2/6 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 R | RE 64 551/05.06

Functional description, section

Hydraulic remote controls of type 2 TH 6 R... operate on the WJB
CPSF

5IF
DPOUSPM
QIBTF
TUBSUT
BT
TPPO
BT
DPOUSPM
TQPPM

basis of direct operated pressure reducing valves. 

GJOET
JUT
CBMBODF
CFUXFFO
UIF
GPSDF
PG
DPOUSPMTQSJOH


BOE

5IFZ
CBTJDBMMZ
DPOTJTU
PG
GPPU
QFEBM


UXP
QSFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
the force that results from the hydraulic pressure in the relevant
WBMWFT
BOE
IPVTJOH

 QPSU
QPSU

PS


&BDI
QSFTTVSF
SFEVDJOH
WBMWF
DPNQSJTFT
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


%VF
UP
UIF
JOUFSBDUJPO
PG
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


BOE
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH

DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


SFUVSO
TQSJOH


BOE
QMVOHFS

 

UIF
QSFTTVSF
JO
UIF
SFMFWBOU
QPSUT
JT
QSPQPSUJPOBM
UP
UIF

TUSPLF
PG
QMVOHFS


BOE
IFODF
UP
UIF
QPTJUJPO
PG
QFEBM


At rest, the pedal is held in the neutral position by return
TQSJOHT



1PSUT
 

BSF
DPOOFDUFE
UP
UIF
UBOL
QPSU
5
WJB
This closed-loop pressure control in relation to the position of
CPSF

 GPPU
QFEBM


BOE
UIF
QSPQFSUJFT
PG
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


BMMPXT

a proportional hydraulic control of directional valves and high-
8IFO
GPPU
QFEBM


JT
EFQSFTTFE
QMVOHFS


JT
QSFTTFE

response control valves for hydraulic pumps and motors.
BHBJOTU
UIF
SFUVSO
TQSJOH


BOE
DPOUSPM
TQSJOH


$POUSPM

TQSJOH


JOJUJBMMZ
NPWFT
DPOUSPM
TQPPM


EPXOXBSET
BOE

closes the connection between the relevant port and tank port
T. At the same time, the relevant port is connected to port P

5 3

U 4
7
6
Q 2

2 3

Symbol, hydraulic

U Q

2 3

688
RE 64 551/05.06 | Type 2 TH6 R Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6

Technical data GPS
BQQMJDBUJPOT
PVUTJEF
UIFTF
QBSBNUFST
QMFBTF
DPOTVMU
VT

Max. inlet pressure bar max. 50

Counterpressure in port T bar max. 3
Pilot flow l/min max. 16.
Hysteresis bar max. 1
Pressure fluid
1)
suitable for NBR seals .JOFSBM
PJM
)-
)-1

UP
%*/



2)
suitable for FKM seals 1IPTQIBUF
FTUFS
)'%3



Hydraulic fluid temperature range C n

UP



Viscosity range mm2/s 
UP

Fluid cleanliness Max. permisible degree of hydraulic fluid contamination
BDDPSEJOH
UP
/"4

DMBTT

'PS
UIJT
XF
SFDPNNFOE
B

filter with a minimum retention rate of 10 r

.BY
QFSNJTTJCMF
PQFSBUJOH
UPSRVF
BU
GPPU
QFEBM
/N 200
Weight kg BQQSPY
 

Application guideline UIJT
MJTU
JT
OPU
JOUFOEFE
UP
CF
DPOTJEFSFE
BT
DPNQMFUF

Do no direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.

Replace worn bellows to maintain foot pedal tightness..

Characteristic curves: control ranges, operating torque

06 Control curve, identication no. 06

Q Inlet pressure
DJSDVJU
QSFTTVSF

Control pressure in bar

2:-6njoj

6-9 nbyj

1 3 5 7 9 21 23

Pedal depression in degrees

Operating torque for control 4

curve 06, standard return N
spring and inlet pressure of
22-6
50 bar 22
21
:
9
Operating torque in Nm

7
6-6
6
5

1 3 5 7 9 21 23

Pedal depression in degrees

689
4/6 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 R | RE 64 551/05.06

Ordering details

2 TH6 R -1X *
2 control ports =2 Further details in plain text
Connecting thread
Pedal operation =R 01 = G1/4 pipe thread to standard
Pedal version *40

#FOU
QFEBM
=C 02 = M14 x 1,5 metric to standard
Flat pedal =P *40

05 =

6/'#
6/'
DPOOFDUJPOT
UP

Control curve 06 = 06 TUBOEBSE
*40

4FSJFT



= 1X Seals

UP

VODIBOHFE
JOTUBMMBUJPO
BOE
DPOOFDUJPO
EJNFOTJPOT
M =
/#3
TFBMT
V= FKM seals
!
"UUFOUJPO

The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid
has to be taken into account

Unit dimensions: flat pedal type "P" EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

180
7 160 Ordering
Ports P, T, 1 and 2
4 x 9 3 code
01 (

UP
*40

02 .
Y
 
UP
*40

20

1 2

6/'#
UP
*40

40

05

2 lamages26 28
2 prof. 0.2 1
4 56 118

12

282
130
12

5 16.5
16
24

1
4
25
182.5

M12
72
T
96
58.5

P
31

1 2
105 16
26 6 32

1
1PTJUJPO

QPSU

QSFTTVSJTFE

2 1PTJUJPO

QPSU

QSFTTVSJTFE

94

70

3 Fixing holes
4 Pedal depression
5 Adjustment screw
6 Anti-slip foot rest
7 Fixation of manual operating lever

690
RE 64 551/05.06 | Type 2 TH6 R Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6

Unit dimensions: bent pedal type "C" EJNFOTJPOT
JO
NN

Ordering
Ports P, T, 1 and 2
code
01 (

UP
*40


3 4 x 9 02 .
Y
 
UP
*40

05 
6/'#
UP
*40

40

7
2 56
4 160

12 120

12

310

50
150
300

10

5
25

72
4

T
96
58.5

P
31

1 105 2 32

6
4
98
74

1
1PTJUJPO

QPSU

QSFTTVSJTFE

2 1PTJUJPO

QPSU

QSFTTVSJTFE

3 Fixing holes
4 Pedal depression
5 Adjustment screw
6 Anti-slip foot rest
7 Fixation of manual operating lever

691
6/6 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 2 TH6 R | RE 64 551/05.06

Installation guidelines
Mounting flange area: Flatness = 0,5 mm
Screw head imensions = 13 mm
n
5JHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
UIF
GMBOHF
GJYJOH
TDSFXT

.BY

/N
n
5JHIUFOJOH
UPSRVF
GPS
UIF
QJQF
DPOOFDUJPOT

.BY

/N

#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
%4*
4"4 This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set forth
Mobile Applications #1
 JO
JU
BSF
UIF
FYDMVTJWF
QSPQFSUZ
PG
#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
*U
NBZ
OPU
CF
SFQSPEVDFE
PS

Glockeraustrae 2 
CE
*SOF
+PMJPU$VSJF given to third parties without its consent.

&MDIJOHFO
(FSNBOZ 
7OJTTJFVY
$FEFY
'SBODF 5IF
EBUB
TQFDJGJFE
BCPWF
POMZ
TFSWF
UP
EFTDSJCF
UIF
QSPEVDU
/P
TUBUFNFOUT

5FM





 5FM








concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived
'BY







'BY







 from our information. The information given does not release the user from the
obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr
products are subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.
www.boschrexroth.com/brm
Subject to revision.

692
Hydraulic pilot control units for RE 64 555/04.06 1/12
Replaces: 05.05
armrest installation

Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N

Series 1X

Contents Special features

Functional description, section, symbol 2 Progressive, sensitive operation.
Technical data 3 Low actuation forces.
Ordering details 4 Low force deviations when lever is actuated
(4TH5, 4TH6N).
Unit dimensions 5
Several ergonomic grips with various E contacts.
Characteristic curves 6 and 7
All connections point downwards.
Variations of ergonomic grip EC2000 8
Contact location within the plugs for wiring grip
EC2000 9 4
Guidelines 10

693
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N | RE 64 555/04.06

Functional description, section, symbol

Design Function
The 4TH6, 4TH6N and 4TH5 pilot control units basically com- When not actuated the control lever is held in zero position
prise of a control lever (5), four pressure adjustment valves and by the four return springs (8). The control ports (1, 2, 3, 4) are
a housing (10). connected to the tank port T via the drilling (11).
Each pressure adjustment valve comprises of a control spool With deflection of the control lever (5) the plunger (9) pushes
(6), a control spring (7), a return spring (8) and a plunger (9). against the return spring (8) and the control spring (7). The
control spring (7) firstly moves the control spool (6) down-
General wards and closes the connection between the appropriate
The design of the 4TH6N and 4TH5 versions differs from that port and tank port T. At the same time the appropriate port is
of the 4TH6. Thereby the forces deviations, which are felt connected to the port P via the drilling (11). The control phase
when the lever is deflected, are reduced. begins as soon as the control spool (6) has found its balance
between the force of the control spring (7) and the force which
As the 4TH5 is smaller and lighter, it is normally used for appli-
results from the hydraulic pressure in the appropriate port
cations in compact machines.
(ports 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Through the interaction of control spool (6) and control spring
Hydraulic symbol (7) the pressure in the appropriate ports is proportional to the
stroke of the plunger (9) and thus the position of the control
U Q lever (5).
A rubber boot (12) protects the mechanical components of the
housing from contamination.

Ports
P Supply
T Tank
2 3 4 5 1, 2, 3, 4 Control ports

4TH6 4TH5
4TH6N

12

7
10 10

11
6

694
RE 64 555/04.06 | Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Mechanical
4TH6, 4TH6N 4TH5
Inlet pressure bar up to 50 up to 35
Back pressure at port T bar up to 3
Pilot oil flow (P to 1 - 2 - 3 - 4) l/mn up to 16 up to 13
Pressure fluid
1)
suitable for NBR seals mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1)
2)
suitable for FPM seals phosphate ester (HFD-R) 2)
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Degree of pressure fluid contamination to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a filter with a
minimum retention rate of 10 75
Max. permissible operating torque at lever Nm 10 during operation
Nm 80 with an exceptional, one time loading
Weight kg approx. 2,6 approx. 1,9

Electrical
Technical data for the grips switch EC2000
s
Switching capacity
minimal current resistive load 100mA at 12VDC or 24VDC
maximal current resistive load 5A at 12VDC or 24VDC
s
Microswitch lifetime
resistive load at 12VDC 100 to 500mA 5 millions cycles
5A 300000 cycles
resistive load at 24VDC 100 to 500mA 3 millions cycles
5A 150000 cycles
inductive load L/R=5ms at 12VDC or 24VDC 1,25A 200000 cycles
s
Maximal contact resistance m 20
s
Switching on/off with low loads
minimum voltage V 12
minimum current strength mA 100
s
E-contact type high current
Grip protection IP65
4
Switching guidelines for DC voltages to ensure the service life of the electrical switch, we
recommend the use of free-wheeling diodes that are switched
parallel to the inductivity.

695
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N | RE 64 555/04.06

Ordering details
4 TH 5
1X / *
Operating force deviations 4 TH 6
For 4 TH 5:
Reduced no code
For 4 TH 6:
Conventional no code
Reduced =N

Grip range
Ergonomic EC2000 =E
Ergonomic EC4000 =H
Ergonomic EC2000+ =I
Ergonomic EC1000 = J1)
Customer's no code
Without grip =Z

Control curve (see pages 6 and 7) 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5

Curve 06 s s s 06
Curve 20 s 20
Curve 70 s s s 70
Curve 97 s s 97
Curve 106 s s 106
Different control curve: state identication No. s

Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) = 1X

Type of ergonomic grip

Grip type E (see page 8) = TT, ST, VT, YT, YU
Grip type H, I or J1) see datasheet RE 64547
Without grip no code

Grip orientation (see page 5) 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5

Lever straight, grip in the direction of control port 3 s s 03
Lever curved 15 in the direction of control port 4. Grip in the direction of control port 3 s s s 43
Lever curved 15 in the direction of control port 2. Grip in the direction of control port 3 s s s 23

Plugs (see page 9) 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5

DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 for wiring the grip s s s 5
Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK for wiring the grip s s 6
Without plug no code s s s

Seals type 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5

NBR seals ! Attention! the compatibility of the seals and s s s M
FPM seals pressure uid has to be taken into account s s V

Connection threads 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5

Pipe thread to standard ISO 228/1 G 1/4 s s s 01
Metric connections to standard ISO 9974 M 14 x 1,5 s 02
Connections to standard JIS 2351 s s 04
UNF connections to standard ISO 11926 9/16 UNF-2B s s s 05

Further details in clear text

1)
handle EC1000 for 4TH6 and 4TH6N only.

696
RE 64 555/04.06 | Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type designation of the pilot control units shown: Type designation of the pilot control unit shown:
4 TH 6 E XX - 1X / - - 43 - - - 4 TH 5 I XX - 1X / - - 23 - - -
4 TH 6 N E XX - 1X / - - 43 - - -
Fixing bolts Fixing bolts

2 1 2 2 1
1 2 1

Cable length: 300

Cable length: 300

Unit dimension Y in function of the grip type:

1 Lever deection when actuating 1 actuator. type of grip 4TH6, 4TH6N 4TH5
2 Lever deection when simultaneously actuating EC1000 236
2 actuators.
EC2000 207 207,5
EC2000+ 215 216,5
EC4000 251 248,5
4
Orientation of the pilot control units at the drivers seat (viewed from above)
Pilot control unit left hand Pilot control unit right hand
4 TH 5 E XX - 1X / - - 43 - - - 4 TH 5 E XX - 1X / - - 23 - - -
4 TH 6 E XX - 1X / - - 43 - - - 4 TH 6 E XX - 1X / - - 23 - - -
4 TH 6 N E XX - 1X / - - 43 - - - 4 TH 6 N E XX - 1X / - - 23 - - -

3 3

2 4 2 P 4

1 T 1 T
P

697
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N | RE 64 555/04.06

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

06 Control curve, identification No. 06 Inlet pressure

Control pressure in bar

This curve is used for the pilot control of the
SM12, SM18, M1, M6 control blocks

Lever deflection in
1)
4TH5 control pressure in bar: 5,9 maxi - 19 mini (1 actuator 2 actuators)
4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5
No. of actuated actuators 1 2 1 2 1 2
A 0,72 1,43 0,68 1,35 0,68 1,35
Operating torque in Nm B 1,99 3,99 1,46 2,92 1,45 2,90
C 2,93* 5,86* 2,10 4,19 2,08 4,16 *p = 35 bar
70 Control curve, identification No. 70 Inlet pressure
Control pressure in bar

D
This curve is used for the pilot control of the
SX12, SX14, SX18 control blocks 36 njo C

7 nbyj B

1 3.4 28.35 31.39

Lever deflection in
(1 actuator 2 actuators)
4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5
No. of actuated actuators 1 2 1 2 1 2
A 0,73 1,45 0,68 1,37 0,69 1,37
Operating torque in Nm B 2,33 4,67 1,69 3,39 1,69 3,39
C 2,93* 5,86* 2,10 4,19 2,08 4,16 *p = 35 bar
106 Control curve, identification No. 106 Inlet pressure
D
Control pressure in bar

This curve is used for the pilot control of the

SM12 control blocks C
(application example: mini excavator) 33 njo

7 nbyj B

1 3.4 28.35 31.39

Lever deflection in
(1 actuator 2 actuators)
4TH6 4TH5
No. of actuated actuators 1 2 1 2
A 0,72 1,44 0,68 1,36
Operating torque in Nm B 2,17 4,34 1,58 3,15
C 2,93* 5,86* 2,08 4,16 *p = 35 bar
The operating torques stated are theoritical values which do not take into account the rubber boot resistance.

698
RE 64 555/04.06 | Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

20 Control curve, identification No. 20 Inlet pressure
D

Control pressure in bar

This curve is used for the pilot control of the
SP12 control blocks C
33 njo

9 nbyj B

1 3.4 28.35 31.39

Lever deflection in
(1 actuator 2 actuators)

4TH6
No. of actuated actuators 1 2
A 0,83 1,65
Operating torque in Nm B 2,21 4,42
C 2,93* 5,86* *p = 35 bar

97 Control curve, identification No. 97 Inlet pressure

Control pressure in bar

This curve is used for the pilot control of the M7,

M4 control blocks D
35 njo

7 nbyj B

1 3.4 31.39
Lever deflection in
(1 actuator 2 actuators)

4TH6 4TH6N
No. of actuated actuators 1 2 1 2
A 0,72 1,44 0,68 1,36
Operating torque in Nm
C 2,45* 4,91* 1,77 3,53 *p = 35 bar
4

The operating torques stated are theoritical values which do not take into account the rubber boot resistance.

699
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N | RE 64 555/04.06

Variations of ergonomic grip EC2000

TT

without E-contact

ST yellow

single E-contact on
top
green

VT
black grey

double E-contact
with rocker switch

red blue

YT
yellow black grey

double E-contact
with rocker switch
single E-contact on
top
green red blue

YU
yellow black grey white
double E-contact
with rocker switch
single E-contact on
top
single E-contact to
the front green red blue brown

700
RE 64 555/04.06 | Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Contact location within the plugs for wiring grip EC2000

DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 Plug AMP MAT-N-LOCK
(ordering detail = 5) (ordering detail = 6)
Grip ST Grip ST

View F View F

cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 2P - CE 04 cover AMP 350778 - 1

Grip VT or YT Grip VT or YT

View F View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04 cover AMP 350781 - 1

Identica- Identica-
wire Ergonomic grip type wire Ergonomic grip type
tion in the tion in the
colour colour
plug VT YT plug VT YT
1 red X X 1 grey X X
2 black X X 2 black X X
3 grey X X 3 red X X
4 blue X X 4 blue X X
5 yellow X 5 yellow X
6 green X 6 green X

Grip YU Grip YU

View F View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 8P - CE 04 cover AMP 350782 - 1

Identica- identica- Identica- identica-

wire wire wire wire
tion in the tion in the tion in the tion in the
colour colour colour colour
plug plug plug plug
1 red 5 yellow 1 grey 5 yellow
2 black 6 green 2 black 6 green
3 grey 7 white 3 red 7 white
4 blue 8 brown 4 blue 8 brown

701
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N | RE 64 555/04.06

Application guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.
The electrical cable must be kept free of any mechanical forces.
During operation protection via the rubber boot must be ensured.
Only use the unit with its original grip and lever.
Ensure that the inertia data of the original grip are not exceeded.
Replace worn push buttons, so that the integrity of the EC2000 grip is ensured.

Safety guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Only one function control must be allocated to an E-contact.
The circuit functions are to be so designed that uncontrolled machine movements caused by the application are prevented and
that it is possible to switch from one function to another.
Take into account all of the application limits, particularly those application limits stated within this catalogue sheet.
Preparation for assembly and testing on the machine: The various checks must include all the functions of the pilot control
device.

Installation guidelines 4TH6, 4TH6N, 4TH5

Mounting flange area: Flatness = 0.5 mm
Screw head dimensions = 10 mm
Tightening torque for the flange fixing screws = Max. 10 Nm
Tightening torque for the pipe connections = Max. 30 Nm

Installation hole 4 TH 5 D 7

100 x 100
85

Fixing bolts
Nominal diameter / fixing via 4 screws
D = 92 to 100 mm or 100 to 108 mm

Installation hole 4 TH 6
108 7

100 x 100
96

Fixing bolts

108 = Nominal diameter / fixing via 4 screws

702
RE 64 555/04.06 | Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Notes

703
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4TH5, 4TH6, 4TH6N | RE 64 555/04.06

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set forth
Mobile Applications BP 101 in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or
Glockeraustrae 2 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie given to third parties without its consent.
89275 Elchingen, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Tel. +49 (0) 73 08 82-0 Tel. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived
Fax. +49 (0) 73 08 72 74 Fax. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 from our information. The information given does not release the user from the
obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr
products are subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.
www.boschrexroth.com/brm
Subject to revision.

704
Hydraulic pilot control device with RE 64535/08.10
Replaces: 05.09
1/8

2 pedals and damping system

Type 4 TH5NR, 5 TH5NR, 6 TH5NR

Series 2X

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Damping

Features 1 This damping system provides softer control of the travel
About this datasheet 2 function on compact tracked vehicles
Further pilot control devices 2 Abrupt manoeuvres are damped and return to neutral is os-
cillation-free
Functional description, cross-section 3
Compacity
Symbols, hydraulic 4
The monoblock design of the TH5NR integrates a large
Technical data 5
number of functions and reduces pipe work
Characteristic curves 5 4
Available with 4, 5 or 6 actuation ports without alteration of
Ordering details 6 the unit dimensions
Application guidelines 6 The use of a single fixing plate makes fitting on the machine
Installation guidelines 6 easier
Unit dimensions 7 More compact than 2 independent pedals side by side
The body in aluminium reduces the weight
Adaptability
Various types of pedal can be easily fitted by screwing them
on the supports (cams)
Easier fitting/exchange of the bellows protecting the mechan-
ical parts
Application
Control of compact tracked vehicle translation actuated by
foot or hand

705
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH5NR RE 64535/08.10

About this datasheet

This manual describs functioning, technical datas and order-
ing details of hydraulic pilot control device with pedal TH5NR.
This manual is illustrated with hydraulic symbols, sections
and unit dimensions drawings.

Related documents

Hydraulic pilot control device with pedal TH5NR is a system

component.

Also follow the instructions for the other system compo-

nents.
Also follow the instructions in the following manuals:
- System documentation from the system manufacturer
- Spare parts manual RDEF64535-E

Further pilot control devices

Hydraulic pilot control device Pilot control device with end position locking type 4/5 THF6
Pilot control device type 2 TH6R, in pedal design (see (see RE 64553) or type 4/6 THF5 (see RE 64557)
RE 64551) Electronic pilot control device
Pilot control device type 4/5/6 TH6NR, with 2 pedals and Electronic remote control device type THE6 for direct control-
damping system (see RE 64554) ling of electrical or electrohydraulical pilot operated actuators
Pilot control device type 2 TH6 (see RE 64552), in sandwich (see RE 29771)
plate design Electronic pilot control device type THE5 (see RE 29881)
Pilot control device types 4 TH6, 4 TH5 and 4 TH6N for arm Electronic pilot control device type EJ (see RE 29896)
rest installation (see RE 64555)
Pilot control device type TH7, for instrument panel installa-
tion or in pedal design (see RE 64558)

706
RE 64535/08.10 TH5NR Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Functional description, cross-section

Hydraulic remote controls of type TH5NR operate on the chamber. Return speed will be limited by the flow of this fluid
basis of direct operated pressure reducing valves. through the jet).
Pilot control devices in double foot pedal design type TH5NR Simulaneously, the plunger (5) is pressed against the return
basically consist of an actuation stage composed of a foot spring (4) and control spring (3). Control spring (3) initially
holding piece in double design (1), 4 pressure reducing moves control spool (2) downwards and closes the
valves (11), 4 damping systems (12), 1 rubber boot (13) and connection between the relevant port and the return line to
a body (6). tank port T.
Each pressure reducing valve comprises control spool (2), At the same time, the relevant port is connected to port P via
control spring (3), return spring (4) and plunger (5). bore (7). The control phase starts as soon as control spool
The damping system consists of a plunger (8), a jet (9) and a (2) finds its balance between the force of control spring (3)
return spring (10). and the force that results from the hydraulic pressure in the
At rest, the pedal is held in the neutral position by return relevant port (port 1 or 2).
springs (4 and 10). Due to the interaction of control spool (2) and control spring
When actuated, the foot pedal pushes the regulation plunger (3), the pressure in the relevant ports is proportional to the
and the damping system plunger in. stroke of plunger (5) and hence to the position of pedal (1).
Fluid squeezed inside the damping room gets throttled in the This closed-loop pressure control in relation to the position of
jet, at a pressure depending on the actuation speed. (In the foot pedal (1) and the properties of control spring (3) allows a
same way, when back to neutral the foot pedal pushed by proportional hydraulic control of directional valves and high-
the return spring will have to drive out the fluid caught in the response control valves for hydraulic pumps and motors.

2
24

4 9 :
4 22 U
5 23 21

21
4
3
Q
8 :
3

control ports 13 control ports 24

707
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH5NR RE 64535/08.10

Symbols, hydraulic

Q U

4 TH5NR

2 3 4 5

Q U

5 TH5NR

2 3 6 4 5

Q U

6 TH5NR

2 6 3 4 7 5

708
RE 64535/08.10 TH5NR Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Max. inlet pressure bar max. 50

Counter-pressure in port T bar min. 2
Pilot flow l/min max. 16
Hysteresis bar max. 1
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524 (suitable for
NBR seals)
Phosphate ester (HFD-R) on inquiry
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm/s 10 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic Class 9, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
fluid cleanliness class according to NAS 1638 retention rate of 10 75
Max. permissible operating torque at foot pedal Nm 200
Weight 4TH5NRZ kg approx. 2.8
Storage temperature range, ambient C -40 to +60

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

Control curve identification no. 70

This curve is used for the pilot control of the type SX10, SX12 D Inlet
Control pressure in bar

control blocks. pressure

36 njoj C

No. of actuated actuators 1

A 6.5
Operating torque in Nm B 9.2 7 nbyj B
C 10.3 1)
1 3.4 28.35 31.39
Lever deflection
1) p = 35 bar

The actuation moments stated are theoritical values which do

not take into account the rubber boot resistance. 4

709
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH5NR RE 64535/08.10

Ordering details

TH5NR 2X *

4 control ports =4 Further details in clear text

5 control ports =5 Connection thread
6 control ports =6 01 = G 1/4; Pipe thread to ISO 228/1
Hydraulic pilot control with 2 pedals 05 = 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926
and damping system Seals
Pedal version M= NBR seals for mineral oil (HL, HLP)
Bent pedal =C to DIN 51524
Flat pedal =P 2X = Series 20 to 29
Without pedal =Z
Control curve = 70

Application guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Do not use a high-pressure cleaner for cleaning.

Some back pressure must be maintained at port T (mini-
mum 2 bar) to make sure that damping chambers get filled.
Back pressure in T helps damping system feeding and
contributes to the quick bleeding that takes place once the
component has been fitted on the vehicle.
After bleeding completion, the damping system will become
fully efficient while being used.
Do not operate the foot pedal of the component prior to its
connection to the hydraulic circuit; otherwise an air intake
will make it necessary to bleed the damping circuit.
Replace worn bellows to maintain foot pedal tightness.

Installation guidelines

Mounting flange area: Flatness = 0.5 mm

Screw head dimensions = 16 mm
Tightening torque for the flange fixing screws = max. 40 Nm
Tightening torque for the pipe connections = max. 30 Nm
Pedals fixation: screw M10 and penetration of screw in the
switchplate thread: max. 15 mm
Tightening torque for the pedal fixing screws = 30 Nm 10%
Installation hole: see page 6

710
RE 64535/08.10 TH5NR Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

View A
261 261 261
36 36 43-6 36

3
2 3 2 3 2 6 3
6

98

98

98
65

65

65
Q U Q U Q U
4 5 4 5 4 7 5

3
35-6 35-6 35-6
5: 5: 5:

4 TH5NR 5 TH5NR 6 TH5NR

223 246
35 35 77
21 21

68
41
8

:6
89 :7

View from side A

61
3:

Ordering Ports P, T, control ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 4

22

detail
01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1
65-6
46-6

46

05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926

241

711
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH5NR RE 64535/08.10

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications BP 101 tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

712
Hydraulic pilot control device with RE 64554/01.11
Replaces: 05.09
1/8

2 pedals and damping system

Type 4 TH6NR, 5 TH6NR, 6 TH6NR

Series 2X

Table of contents Features

Content Page Damping

Features ....................................................................................1 This damping system provides softer control of the travel
About this datasheet ..................................................................2 function on compact tracked vehicles
Further pilot control devices ......................................................2 Abrupt manoeuvres are damped and return to neutral is
oscillation-free
Functional description, cross-section ........................................3
Compacity
Symbols, hydraulic ....................................................................4
The monoblock design of the TH6NR integrates a large
Technical data ...........................................................................5
number of functions and reduces pipe work
Characteristic curves .................................................................5 4
Available with 4, 5 or 6 actuation ports without alteration of
Ordering details .........................................................................6 the unit dimensions
Application guidelines ................................................................6 The use of a single fixing plate makes fitting on the machine
Installation guidelines ................................................................6 easier
Unit dimensions .........................................................................7 More compact than 2 independent pedals side by side
Adaptability
Various types of pedal can be easily fitted by screwing them
on the supports (cams)
Easier fitting/exchange of the bellows protecting the mechan-
ical parts
Application
Control of compact tracked vehicle translation actuated by
foot or hand

713
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH6NR RE 64554/01.11

About this datasheet

This manual describs functioning, technical datas and order-
ing details of hydraulic pilot control device with pedal TH6NR.
This manual is illustrated with hydraulic symbols, sections
and unit dimensions drawings.

Related documents

Hydraulic pilot control device with pedal TH56NR is a system

component.

Also follow the instructions for the other system compo-

nents.
Also follow the instructions in the following manuals:
- System documentation from the system manufacturer
- Spare parts manual RDEF64554-E

Further pilot control devices

Hydraulic pilot control device Pilot control device with end position locking type 4/5 THF6
Pilot control device type 2 TH6R, in pedal design (see (see RE 64553) or type 4/6 THF5 (see RE 64557)
RE 64551) Electronic pilot control device
Pilot control device type 2 TH6 (see RE 64552), in sandwich Electronic remote control device type THE6 for direct control-
plate design ling of electrical or electrohydraulical pilot operated actuators
Pilot control device types 4 TH6, 4 TH5 and 4 TH6N for arm (see RE 29771)
rest installation (see RE 64555) Electronic pilot control device type THE5 (see RE 29881)
Pilot control device type TH 7, for instrument panel installa- Electronic pilot control device type EJ (see RE 29896)
tion or in pedal design (see RE 64558)

714
RE 64554/01.11 TH6NR Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Functional description, cross-section

Hydraulic remote controls of type TH6NR operate on the chamber. Return speed will be limited by the flow of this fluid
basis of direct operated pressure reducing valves. through the jet).
Pilot control devices in double foot pedal design type TH6NR Simulaneously, the plunger (5) is pressed against the
basically consist of an actuation stage composed of a foot return spring (4) and control spring (3). Control spring (3)
holding piece in double design (1), 4 pressure reducing initially moves control spool (2) downwards and closes the
valves (11), 4 damping systems (12), 2 rubber boot (13) and connection between the relevant port and the return line to
a body (6). tank port T.
Each pressure reducing valve comprises control spool (2), At the same time, the relevant port is connected to port P via
control spring (3), return spring (4) and plunger (5). bore (7). The control phase starts as soon as control spool
The damping system consists of a plunger (8), a jet (9) and a (2) finds its balance between the force of control spring (3)
return spring (10). and the force that results from the hydraulic pressure in the
At rest, the pedal is held in the neutral position by return relevant port (port 1 or 2).
springs (10). Due to the interaction of control spool (2) and control spring
When actuated, the foot pedal pushes the regulation plunger (3), the pressure in the relevant ports is proportional to the
and the damping system plunger in. stroke of plunger (5) and hence to the position of pedal (1).
Fluid squeezed inside the damping room gets throttled in the This closed-loop pressure control in relation to the position of
jet, at a pressure depending on the actuation speed. (In the foot pedal (1) and the properties of control spring (3) allows a
same way, when back to neutral the foot pedal pushed by proportional hydraulic control of directional valves and high-
the return spring will have to drive out the fluid caught in the response control valves for hydraulic pumps and motors.

2
24

4 : 21
4 9
22
5 23

21

3 4
:

8
3 7

control ports 13 control ports 24

715
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH6NR RE 64554/01.11

Symbols, hydraulic

Q U

4 TH6NR

2 3 4 5

Q U

5 TH6NR

2 3 6 4 5

Q U

6 TH6NR

2 6 3 4 7 5

716
RE 64554/01.11 TH6NR Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Max. inlet pressure bar max. 50

Counter-pressure in port T bar min. 2
Pilot flow l/min max. 16
Hysteresis bar max. 1
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524 (suitable for
NBR seals)
Phosphate ester (HFD-R) on inquiry
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm/s 10 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic Class 9, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
fluid cleanliness class according to NAS 1638 retention rate of 10 75
Max. permissible operating torque at foot pedal Nm 200
Weight 4TH6NRZ kg approx. 7.8
Storage temperature range, ambient C -40 to +60

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

Control curve identification no. 06

This curve is used for the pilot control of the type SM12, M1 D Inlet
Control pressure in bar

control blocks. pressure

2:-6 njoj C
No. of actuated actuators 1
A 6.7
Operating torque in Nm B 10.5 6-9 nbyj !B
C 12.2 1)
1 3.4 28.35 31.39
Lever deflection
1) p = 35 bar

Control curve identification no. 70

This curve is used for the pilot control of the type SX14 D Inlet
Control pressure in bar

control blocks. pressure

36 njoj C 4
No. of actuated actuators 1
A 7.1
Operating torque in Nm B 11.0 7 nbyj B
C 12.2 1)
1 3.4 28.35 31.39
Lever deflection
1) p = 35 bar

The actuation moments stated are theoritical values which do

not take into account the rubber boot resistance.

717
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH6NR RE 64554/01.11

Ordering details

TH6NR 2X *

4 control ports =4 Further details in clear text

5 control ports =5 Connection thread
6 control ports =6 01 = G 1/4; Pipe thread to ISO 228/1
Hydraulic pilot control with 2 pedals 05 = 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926
and damping system Seals
Pedal version M= NBR seals for mineral oil (HL, HLP)
Bent pedal =C to DIN 51524
Flat pedal =P 2X = Series 20 to 29
Without pedal =Z
Control curve 06 = 06
Control curve 70 = 70

Application guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Do not use a high-pressure cleaner for cleaning.

Some back pressure must be maintained at port T (mini-
mum 2 bar) to make sure that damping chambers get filled.
Back pressure in T helps damping system feeding and
contributes to the quick bleeding that takes place once the
component has been fitted on the vehicle.
After bleeding completion, the damping system will become
fully efficient while being used.
Do not operate the foot pedal of the component prior to its
connection to the hydraulic circuit; otherwise an air intake
will make it necessary to bleed the damping circuit.

Installation guidelines

Mounting flange area: Flatness = 0.5 mm

Screw head dimensions = 16 mm
Tightening torque for the flange fixing screws = max. 40 Nm
Tightening torque for the pipe connections = max. 30 Nm
Pedals fixation: screw M10 and penetration of screw in the
switchplate thread: max. 15 mm
Tightening torque for the pedal fixing screws = 30 Nm
10%
Installation hole: see page 6

718
RE 64554/01.11 TH6NR Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

View A
261 261 261

2 3 2 3 3
2

235

235
54

54

235
Q

54
4 5 4 5 4 5

6
66 66
36

66
4 TH6NR 5 TH6NR 6 TH6NR

47 47 231
:3

23

73-6
23
36
46-4

8
73-8

:6
Q

219 212

View from side A

61

Ordering Ports P, T, control ports 1, 2, 3 and 4

detail 4
22

01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1

73

73

05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926

237

719
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG TH6NR RE 64554/01.11

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications BP 101 tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

720
Pilot control unit with end position RE 64 557/02.07 1/12
Replaces: 03.06
lock for the remote control of
directional valves

Type 4THF5 or 6THF5

Series 1X

Contents Special features

Functional description, section, symbol 2 Progressive, sensitive operation.
Technical data 3 Precise and play-free control.
Ordering details 4 Low actuation forces at lever.
Characteristic curves 5 Several ergonomic grips with various E contacts (design
patents).
Unit dimensions 6 and 7
Electro-magnetic end position lock for holding the control
Variations of ergonomic grip EC2000 8
lever in its deflected position.
Contact location within the plugs for wiring grip EC2000 9
The electro-magnetic lock may be released by operating a 4
Contact location within the plugs for wiring the switch on the machine.
solenoids of the electro-magnetic lock 10
Noticeable resistance point when operating close to the
Guidelines 11 lever end position (summation of progressive force), hence
providing a warning just before the changeover occurs to
the locked position or float position (prevention of accidental
operation).

721
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/6THF5 | RE 64 557/02.07

Functional description, section, symbol

Hydraulic function principle
The pilot control units with end position locks type THF5
operate on the basis of direct actuated pressure reducing
valves.
They basically comprise of control lever (1), four to six pressure
reducing valves, a housing (6) and locks.
Each pressure reducing valve comprises of a control spool (2), 1
a control spring (3), a return spring (4) and a plunger (5).
At rest, control lever (1) is held in its neutral position by return
springs (4). Ports (1, 2, 3, 4) are connected to tank port T via
drilling (8).
When the control lever (1) is deflected, plunger (5) is pressed
against return spring (4) and control spring (3). Control spring Electro-magne-
(3) initially moves the control spool (2) downwards and closes tic lock
the connection between the relevant port and tank port T. At
the same time the relevant port is connected to port P via
drilling (8).
The control phase starts as soon as control spool (2) finds
its balance between the force from control spring (3) and the 9
force, which results from the hydraulic pressure in the relevant
port (ports 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Due to the ineraction between control spool (2) and control
spring (3) the pressure in the relevant ports is proportional to
the stroke of plunger (5) and hence to the position of control
10
lever (1).
This pressure control which is dependent on the position of the 5
control lever and the characteristics of the control spring
permits the proportional hydraulic control of directional valves
and high response valves for hydraulic pumps and motors.
A rubber boot (9) protects the mechanical components in 5 11
the housing from contamination, therefore, these pilot control
units are suitable for even the most unfavourable operating
conditions. 4 12

End position lock 2 7

Only those control ports, for which it is necessary to hold the 3
control lever in a deflected position are equipped with end
position locks (except control port 2).

Electro-magnetic lock
8
An additional spring (7), which is fitted below the prefeeling
point socket (12) warns, by means of an increased force, which 6
is required for compressing this spring, that the plunger (5)
and the control lever (1) have almost reached their end position. port 2 port 4
When this threshold is overcome, the solenoid armature (10)
contacts the solenoid (11); if the solenoid is energised, then
control lever (1) is held in its end position by magnetic force. Symbol for the 4 THF 5
This lock is released automatically when the solenoid is de- with 3 electro-magnetic locks
energised.
UQ

2 3 4 5

722
RE 64 557/02.07 | Type 4/6THF5 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Mechanical
Back pressure at port T bar up to 3
Pilot oil flow (P to 1 - 2 - 3 - 4) l/mn up to 13
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1)
1)
suitable for NBR seals
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Degree of pressure fluid contamination to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a filter with a
minimum retention rate of 10 75
Max. permissible operating torque at lever Nm 10 during operation
Nm 80 with an exceptional, one time loading
Weight, version 4 THF 5 kg approx. 3,5
Weight, version 6 THF 5 kg approx. 4,9

Electrical
Technical data for the grips switch EC2000
s
Switching capacity
minimal current resistive load 100mA at 12VDC or 24VDC
maximal current resistive load 5A at 12VDC or 24VDC
s
Microswitch lifetime
resistive load at 12VDC 100 to 500mA 5 millions cycles
5A 300000 cycles
resistive load at 24VDC 100 to 500mA 3 millions cycles
5A 150000 cycles
inductive load L/R=5ms at 12VDC or 24VDC 1,25A 200000 cycles
s
Maximal contact resistance m 20
s
Switching on/off with low loads
minimum voltage V 12
minimum current strength mA 100
s
E-contact type high current
Grip protection IP65
Switching guidelines for DC voltages to ensure the service life of the electrical switch, we
recommend the use of free-wheeling diodes that are switched
parallel to the inductivity. 4

s
Power supply for the locking solenoids V 12 V (9 to 15) and 24 V (20 to 27) / DC
s
Max. power consumption of each solenoid W 13,5 at 12 VDC or 24VDC

723
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/6THF5 | RE 64 557/02.07

Ordering details
Single pilot control unit 4 / 6 THF 5
THF5 06 1X / M *

Number of control
ports
4 ports =4 Further details in
6 ports =6 clear text

Grip ranges:
Ergonomic EC2000 =E
Ergonomic EC4000 =H
Ergonomic EC2000+ =I Connection threads
Customers no code 01 = G 1/4 pipe thread
Without grip =Z to standard ISO 228/1
02 = M 14 x 1,5 metric
Control curve (see page 5) to standard ISO 9974
Curve 06 = 06 05 = 9/16 UNF-2B
Curve 70 = 70 to standard ISO 11926

Series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation
control port 2
control port 3
control port 4
control port 5
control port 6
Seals type
control port 1

and connection dimensions)

M= NBR seals
Type of ergonomic grip ! Attention!
Grip type E (see page 8) = TT, ST, VT, YT, YU the compatibility of the
Grip type H or I see datasheet RE 64547 seals and pressure uid has
Without grip no code to be taken into account

Grip orientation (see pages 6-7) Plugs

Lever curved 15 towards control port 4 5= DEUTSCH sealed plugs
and grip towards control port 1 = 41 IP67 for the wiring of the grip
Without grip no code and solenoids (see pages 9-10)
6= AMP MAT-N-LOK plugs
End position lock per control port for the wiring of the grip and
Without lock, without resistance point solenoids (see pages 9-10)
before changeover to inlet pressure = A 1) no code without plug
With electro-magnetic lock 24 V and resistance point
before changeover to inlet pressure (except control port 2) = C
With electro-magnet lock 24 V,
without resistance point (except control port 2) =D
With electro-magnetic lock 12 V and resistance point
before changeover to inlet pressure (except control port 2) = E
With electro-magnetic lock 12 V,
without resistance point (except control port 2) =F

1)
For the 4THF5: 3 control ports without lock maximum.

724
RE 64 557/02.07 | Type 4/6THF5 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

06 Control curve, identification No. 06
This curve is used for the pilot control of the SM12, M6 control blocks

Inlet pressure (bar)

Control pressure in bar

2:-6 njoj
D
C

6-9 nbyj !B

1
Lever deflection

B = Resistance point before changeover to inlet pressure

70 Control curve, identification No. 70

This curve is used for the pilot control of the SX12, SX14, SX18 control blocks

Inlet pressure (bar)

Control pressure in bar

36!njoj D
C

7!nbyj B

1
Lever deflection

B = Resistance point before changeover to inlet pressure

4

Actuation moments of 1 actuator

Inter-section point A B C D

Lever deflection 2 16 18 20

Operating torque
without detent in N.m 0,8 2,2 3,6 (p = 35 bar)

Operating torque
with detent in N.m 0,8 3,4 3,6 5,2 (p = 35 bar)

The operating torques stated are theoritical values which do not take into account the rubber boot resistance.

725
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/6THF5 | RE 64 557/02.07

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type designation of the pilot control units shown: 4 THF 5 E...1X / TT 41
view X
Wvf!#Y# 231
view X
Wvf!#Y#

56
4
8

4 5

223

67
Q
3

U 2
219

-7
4:
3 26
39
31
56
Z

38
461!!21

22:
46!!6

Unit dimension in function of the grip type:

The 4 THF 5 variants are supplied without fixing screws nor
shims type of grip Y

1 lever deflection when operating one actuator EC2000 208

2 lever deflection when operating two actuators EC2000+ 220

3 four equally space mounting points EC4000 254

726
RE 64 557/02.07 | Type 4/6THF5 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type designation of the pilot control units shown: 6 THF 5 H...1X / SL5689 PSA3 RAA2 41
29:
6:-6
view Z
Wvf!#[# 59
view Z 31
Wvf!#[#

56
8

39

39
6

231

21
U 3
5

39

39
7 4
219
56
4
83 39

31
43

26

39
29 31
2
3

2::
39 31
Z

315
85

69
38
dcmf!qpjhof!461!!21

:
261
cable 350 10
dcmf!tpmopef!461!!21
solenoid cable 350 10

22:

4
handle

1 lever deflection when operating one actuator

The 6 THF 5 variants are supplied without fixing screws nor 2 lever deflection when operating two actuators
shims 3 four mounting points

727
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/6THF5 | RE 64 557/02.07

Variations of ergonomic grip EC2000

TT

without E-contact

ST yellow

single E-contact on
top
green

VT
black grey

double E-contact
with rocker switch

red blue

YT
yellow black grey

double E-contact
with rocker switch
single E-contact on
top
green red blue

YU
yellow black grey white
double E-contact
with rocker switch
single E-contact on
top
single E-contact to
the front green red blue brown

728
RE 64 557/02.07 | Type 4/6THF5 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Contact location within the plugs for wiring grip EC2000

DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 Plug AMP MAT-N-LOCK
(ordering detail = 5) (ordering detail = 6)
Grip ST Grip ST
G G

3 2 3

View F View F

cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 2P - CE 04 cover AMP 350778 - 1

Grip VT or YT Grip VT or YT
G
G

2 7 2 3 4
3 6
5 6 7
4 5

View F View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04 cover AMP 350781 - 1

Identica- Identica-
wire Ergonomic grip type wire Ergonomic grip type
tion in the tion in the
colour colour
plug VT YT plug VT YT
1 red X X 1 grey X X
2 black X X 2 black X X
3 grey X X 3 red X X
4 blue X X 4 blue X X
5 yellow X 5 yellow X
6 green X 6 green X

Grip YU Grip YU
G
G
2 3 4 4
5 4 3 2

6 7 8 9

5 6 7
8 9 :

View F View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 8P - CE 04 cover AMP 350782 - 1

Identica- identica- Identica- identica-

wire wire wire wire
tion in the tion in the tion in the tion in the
colour colour colour colour
plug plug plug plug
1 red 5 yellow 1 grey 5 yellow
2 black 6 green 2 black 6 green
3 grey 7 white 3 red 7 white
4 blue 8 brown 4 blue 8 brown

729
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/6THF5 | RE 64 557/02.07

Contact location within the plugs for wiring the solenoids

of the electro-magnetic lock
DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 (ordering code = 5)
- Plug for wiring the 4/6 THF 5 electro-magnetic lock solenoids (ports 1, 3, 4)

lock connection no. 1 2 7

lock connection no. 3 3 6
lock connection no. 4 4 5

View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04

- Plug for wiring the 6 THF 5 electro-magnetic lock solenoids (ports 5, 6)

lock connection no. 5 2 7

lock connection no. 6 3 6
4 5

View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04

Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK (ordering code = 6)

- Plug for wiring the 4/6 THF 5 electro-magnetic lock solenoids (ports 1, 3, 4)

View F
G

2 3 4

5 6 7

lock connection no. 1

lock connection no. 3
lock connection no. 4
cover AMP 350781 - 1

- Plug for wiring the 6 THF 5 electro-magnetic lock solenoids (ports 5, 6)

View F G

2 3 4

5 6 7

lock connection no. 5

lock connection no. 6
cover AMP 350781 - 1

730
RE 64 557/02.07 | Type 4/6THF5 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Application guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Limit the control pilot circuit pressure to 35 bars maximum for a good resistance of the electrical detents.
Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.
The electrical cable must be kept free of any mechanical forces.
During operation protection via the rubber boot must be ensured.
Only use the unit with its original grip and lever.
Ensure that the inertia data of the original grip are not exceeded.
Replace worn push buttons, so that the integrity of the EC2000 grip is ensured.

Safety guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Only one function control must be allocated to an E-contact.
The circuit functions are to be so designed that uncontrolled machine movements caused by the application are prevented and
that it is possible to switch from one function to another.
Take into account all of the application limits, particularly those application limits stated within this catalogue sheet.
Preparation for assembly and testing on the machine: The various checks must include all the functions of the pilot control
device.

Installation guidelines
Mounting flange area: Flatness = 0.5 mm
Screw head dimensions = 10 mm
Dimensions of shims (large M6) placed underneath the screw heads = 18 mm
Tightening torque for the flange fixing screws = Max. 10 Nm
Tightening torque for the pipe connections = Max. 30 Nm

Installation hole 4 THF 5 56

219

s47
U
:: 2 5
29

3 4

8 4
108 = nominal diameter / fixing via 4 screws and 4 shims

Installation hole 6 THF 5 52 53

s29
219
56

6 2
4:

s33
56

Q
U
:1

::

3 5
56

4:

8
7 4
56

72 mm = between axis s29 83 5:

Fixing via 4 screws and 4 shims 262

731
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/6THF5 | RE 64 557/02.07

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set forth
Mobile Applications BP 101 in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or
Glockeraustrae 2 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie given to third parties without its consent.
89275 Elchingen, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Tel. +49 (0) 73 08 82-0 Tel. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived
Fax. +49 (0) 73 08 72 74 Fax. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 from our information. The information given does not release the user from the
obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr
products are subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.
www.boschrexroth.com/brm
Subject to revision.

732
Pilot control unit with end position RE 64 553/02.07 1/12

lock for the remote control of Replaces: 05.05

directional valves

Type 4THF6 or 5THF6

Series 2X

Contents Features
Functional description, section, symbol 2 and 3 Progressive, sensitive operation.
Technical data 4 Precise and play-free control.
Ordering details 5
Low actuation forces at lever.
Variations of ergonomic grip EC2000 6
Several ergonomic grips with various E contacts (design
Characteristic curve 7
patents).
Circuit example 7
Electro-magnetic end position lock at each control port
Unit dimensions 8 and 9
(the control lever does not have to be held in its deflected
Contact location within the plugs for wiring grip position).
EC2000 10 4
The electro-magnetic lock may be released by operating a
Contact location within the plugs for wiring the
switch on the machine.
solenoids of the electro-magnetic lock 11
Guidelines 12 Possible 5th hydraulic control port for additional functions
(e.g. control of float position).
One or more type THF6 pilot oil units can be directly flanged
on to the 2 TH 6 housing (single axis model, sandwich plate
design to RE 64 552) (pipe and space saving combination
optimum for the mounting of auxiliary proportional controls).
Noticeable resistance point when operating close to the
lever end position (summation of progressive force), hence
providing a warning just before the changeover occurs to
the locked position or float position (prevention of accidental
operation).

733
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/5THF6 | RE 64 553/02.07

Functional description, section, symbol

Hydraulic function principle
The pilot control units with end position locks type THF6 operate
on the basis of direct actuated pressure reducing valves.
They basically comprise of control lever (1), four pressure reducing
valves, a housing (6) and locks.
Each pressure reducing valve comprises of a control spool (2), a
control spring (3), a return spring (4) and a plunger (5).
At rest, control lever (1) is held in its neutral position by return
springs (4). Ports (1, 2, 3, 4) are connected to tank port T via
drilling (8).
When the control lever (1) is deected, plunger (5) is pressed
1
against return spring (4) and control spring (3). Control spring (3)
initially moves the control spool (2) downwards and closes the
connection between the relevant port and tank port T. At the
same time the relevant port is connected to port P via drilling (8).
The control phase starts as soon as control spool (2) nds its
balance between the force from control spring (3) and the force,
which results from the hydraulic pressure in the relevant port
(ports 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Electro-magnetic
Due to the ineraction between control spool (2) and control
spring (3) the pressure in the relevant ports is proportional to the lock
stroke of plunger (5) and hence to the position of control lever (1). 9
This pressure control which is dependent on the position of the
control lever and the characteristics of the control spring permits
the proportional hydraulic control of directional valves and high
response valves for hydraulic pumps and motors.
A rubber boot (9) protects the mechanical components in the
housing from contamination, therefore, these pilot control units are
suitable for even the most unfavourable operating conditions.

End position lock

Only those control ports, for which it is necessary to hold the
control lever in a deected position are equipped with end
position locks.
10 5
Electro-magnetic lock
An additional spring (7), which is tted below an additional plate
11 4
(12) warns, by means of an increased force, which is required for
compressing this spring, that the plunger (5) and the control
lever (1) have almost reached their end position. 12 3
When this threshold is overcome, a ring (10) contacts the
solenoid armature (11); if the solenoid is energised, then control 7 2
lever (1) is held in its end position by magnetic force.
This lock is released automatically when the solenoid is de-energised. 8

Symbol for the 4 THF 6

with 3 electro-magnetic locks
port 4 port 2 6

734
RE 64 553/02.07 | Type 4/5THF6 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Functional description, section, symbol

Fifth control port (type 5 THF 6...)
Model 5THF6 is equipped with a fth control port, which is used to control an auxiliary function. This function may be operated by
moving spool (14) against spring (15) under the inuence of the pressure acting in port 1.
As soon as this pressure reaches 22 bar, control port 5 is connected with either T, P or control port 1, depending on the circuit
required (see symbols).

Ordering code 1
1i5
5iT

14

22bar
15

x-x
Ordering code 2
Pi5
5iT

14

22bar
15

x-x

Ordering code 3
5iT
Pi5

14

4
22bar
15

x-x

Ordering code 4
5iT
1i5

14

22bar
15

x-x *) oat position

735
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/5THF6 | RE 64 553/02.07

Technical data, mechanical (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Back pressure at port T bar Up to 3
Pilot oil ow (P to 1 - 2 - 3 - 4) l/min Up to 16
Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1)
Phosphate ester (HFD-R) 2)
1)
suitable for NBR seals
2)
suitable for FKM seals
Pressure uid temperature range C -20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Degree of pressure uid contamination To NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with
a minimum retention rate of 10 75
Max. permissible operating torque at lever Nm 10 during operation
Nm 80 with an exceptional, one time loading
Weight, version 4THF6 kg Approx. 5.7

Technical data, electrical (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Technical data for the grip switch EC2000
s
4XJUDIJOH
DBQBDJUZ
minimal current resistive load 100mA at 12VDC or 24VDC
maximal current resistive load 5A at 12VDC or 24VDC
s
.JDSPTXJUDI
MJGFUJNF

resistive load at 12VDC 100 to 500mA 5 millions cycles
5A 300000 cycles
resistive load at 24VDC 100 to 500mA 3 millions cycles
5A 150000 cycles
inductive load L/R=5ms at 12VDC or 24VDC 1,25A 200000 cycles
s
.BYJNBM
DPOUBDU
SFTJTUBODF
N 20
s
4XJUDIJOH
POPGG
XJUI
MPX
MPBET








minimum voltage V 12
minimum current strength mA 100
s
&DPOUBDU
UZQF

IJHI
DVSSFOU





Grip protection IP65
Switching guidelines for DC voltages to ensure the service life of the electrical switch, we recommend
the use of free-wheeling diodes that are switched parallel to the
inductivity.

s
1PXFS
TVQQMZ
GPS
UIF
MPDLJOH
TPMFOPJET


7

UP


BOE

7

UP



%$
s
.BY
QPXFS
DPOTVNQUJPO
PG
FBDI
TPMFOPJE


8
BU

7%$
PS
7%$

736
RE 64 553/02.07 | Type 4/5THF6 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Ordering details
Single pilot control unit 4 / 5 THF 6

THF6 062X / Y *

Number of control
Further details
ports
4 control ports =4 in clear text
5 control ports =5 Connection threads
Grip range 01 = G 1/4 pipe thread
Ergonomic EC2000 =E to standard ISO 228/1
Ergonomic EC4000 =H 02 = M 14 x 1,5 metric
Ergonomic EC2000+ =I to standard ISO 9974
Customers no code 05 = 9/16 UNF-2B
Without grip =Z to standard ISO 11926

Control curve (see page 7) = 06 Seals type

control port 1

control port 2

control port 3

control port 4
M= NBR seals
Series 20 to 29 = 2X
(20 to 29: unchanged installation V= FKM seals
and connection dimensions) ! Attention!
the compatibility of the seals
and pressure uid has to be
Type of ergonomic grip taken into account
Grip type E (see page 6) = TT, ST, VT, YT, YU
Plug
Grip type H or I see datasheet RE 64547
5 = DEUTSCH sealed plugs IP67
Without grip no code
for the wiring of the grip and
solenoids (see pages 10-11)
Grip orientation (see page 9)
6= AMP MAT-N-LOK plugs
Lever curved 15 towards control port 4
for the wiring of the grip and
and grip towards control port 1 = 41
solenoids (see pages 10-11)
Without grip no code
no code without plug
End position lock per control port
Without lock, without resistance point Y= Connection ange, connections
before changeover to inlet pressure =A plugged, for the optional tting
Without lock, with resistance point of a type 2TH 6 unit
before changeover to inlet pressure =B
With electro-magnetic lock 24 V and resistance point Circuit version of the 5th control port
before changeover to inlet pressure =C =1 5 THF 6 only (enter here the number
With electro-magnet lock 24 V, =2 of the required hydraulic
without resistance point =D =3 symbol, see page 3)
With electro-magnetic lock 12 V and resistance point =4
No code (relates 4THF6)
before changeover to inlet pressure =E 4
With electro-magnetic lock 12 V,
without resistance point =F

Pilot control units 4 / 5 THF 6 + 2 TH 6

For part no.
of the single pilot
control unit: THF6 -2X Y *
see above
+ 2TH6 F -1X *

1 lever curved without detent = LC Connection threads

1 lever curved with electrical Seals type
detent in position 1 = GC
1 lever curved with electrical Plug
detent in position 2 = HC 5= DEUTSCH sealed plugs IP67 Ordering
1 lever curved with electrical for the wiring of the grip and solenoids details:
detent in position 1 and 2 = JC 6= AMP MAT-N-LOK plugs see 2TH6
for the wiring of the grip and solenoids datasheet
This variant of the 2TH 6 is wi- No code without plug RE 64552
thout fixing holes =F
Series
Control curve

737
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/5THF6 | RE 64 553/02.07

Variations of ergonomic grip EC2000

TT

without E-contact

ST yellow

single E-contact on top

green

VT
black grey

double E-contact
with rocker swith

red blue

YT
yellow black grey
double E-contact
with rocker switch
single E contact on top

green red blue

YU

yellow black grey white

double E-contact with
rocker switch
single E-contact on top
single E-contact to
the front
green red blue brown

738
RE 64 553/02.07 | Type 4/5THF6 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Characteristic curve: control ranges, actuation moments

06 Control curve, identication No. 06
This curve is used for the pilot control of the SM12, SM18, M1, M6 control blocks

Inlet pressure (bar)

Control pressure in bar

Actuation moments of 1 actuator

Inter-section point A B C D

Lever deflection 2 13 14 17

Operating torque
without detent in N.m 0,9 3,2 3,7 (p = 35 bar)
Lever deection in
Operating torque
with detent in N.m 0,9 4,5 4,8 6 (p = 35 bar)

B = Resistance point before changeover to inlet pressure

The operating torques stated are theoritical values which do not take into account the rubber boot resistance.

Circuit example
Pilot oil supply system bucket cylinder boom cylinder
(see RE 64571)

6UIG7 U Q

33!cbs

6 2 3 4 5
4

main pump

35!cbs

directional valve

739
8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/5THF6 | RE 64 553/02.07

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type 5 THF 6 I + 2 TH 6 LC Type 4 THF 6 E + 2 TH 6 GC / HC / JC

View X

1 lever deection when operating one actuator

2 lever deection when operating two actuators
3 four equally space mounting points
4 THF 6
5 2TH 6
6 lever actuation direction and control ports
thereby inuenced

Unit dimension in function of the grip type:

type of grip Y
EC2000 211
EC2000+ 226
EC4000 261
The THF 6 variants are supplied without xing screws
740
RE 64 553/02.07 | Type 4/5THF6 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type 4 THF 6 E -2X TT 41 Type 5 THF 6 H -2X 41
View X

View from side F

4
Type 4 THF 6 Z
Section G

View Z

1 lever deection when operating one actuator

2 lever deection when operating two actuators
3 four equally spaced mounting points

741
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/5THF6 | RE 64 553/02.07

Contact location within the plugs for wiring grip EC2000

DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 Plug AMP MAT-N-LOCK
(ordering detail = 5) (ordering detail = 6)

Grip ST Grip ST

View F View F

cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 2P - CE 04 cover AMP 350778 - 1

Grip VT or YT Grip VT or YT

View F View F

cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04 cover AMP 350781 - 1

Identica- Identica-
tion in the wire Ergonomic grip type wire Ergonomic grip type
colour tion in the colour
plug VT YT plug VT YT
1 red x x 1 grey x x
2 black x x 2 black x x
3 grey x x 3 red x x
4 blue x x 4 blue x x
5 yellow x 5 yellow x
6 green x 6 green x

Grip YU Grip YU

View F View F

cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 8P - CE 04 cover AMP 350782 - 1

Identica- identica- Identica- identica-

wire wire wire wire
tion in the tion in the tion in the tion in the
colour colour colour colour
plug plug plug plug
1 red 5 yellow 1 grey 5 yellow
2 black 6 green 2 black 6 green
3 grey 7 white 3 red 7 white
4 blue 8 brown 4 blue 8 brown

742
RE 64 553/02.07 | Type 4/5THF6 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Contact
Contact location
location withinwithin the
the plugs forplugs forsolenoids
wiring the wiring ofthe
thesolenoids
electro-magnetic lock
of the electro-magnetic lock
DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 (ordering code = 5)
- Plug for wiring the 4/5 THF 6 electro-magnetic lock solenoids

lock connection no. 1

lock connection no. 3
lock connection no. 4

View F
cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04

- Plug for wiring the 2 TH 6 GC / HC / JC electro-magnetic lock solenoids

lock connection no. 1

lock connection no. 2

View F cover DEUTSCH DT 04 - 6P - CE 04

Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK (ordering code = 6)

- Plug for wiring the 4/5 THF 6 electro-magnetic lock solenoids

View F

lock connection no. 1

lock connection no. 3
lock connection no. 4
cover AMP 350781 - 1

- Plug for wiring the 2 TH 6 GC / HC / JC electro-magnetic lock solenoids

View F

lock connection no. 1

lock connection no. 2

cover AMP 350781 - 1

743
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Type 4/5THF6 | RE 64 553/02.07

Application guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.
The electrical cable must be kept free of any mechanical forces.
During operation protection via the rubber grommet must be ensured.
Only use the unit with its original grip and lever.
Ensure that the inertia data of the original grip are not exceeded.
Replace worn push buttons, so that the integrity of the grip EC2000 is ensured.

Safety guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Only one function control must be allocated to an E-contact.
The circuit functions are to be so designed that uncontrolled machine movements caused by the application are prevented and
that it is possible to switch from one function to another.
Take into account all of the application limits, particularly those application limits stated within this catalogue sheet.
Preparation for assembly and testing on the machine: The various checks must include all the functions of the pilot control
device.

Installation guidelines
Mounting ange area: Flatness = 0.5 mm
Screw head imensions = 10 mm
Tightening torque for the ange xing screws = Max. 10 Nm
Tightening torque for the pipe connections = Max. 30 Nm
Before tting the grip to a THF6Z variant use a centralising bush to hold the cardan pin, so that the cardan joint is not damaged.
Also see the description in the spare parts list RDEF 64 553-E

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specications and other in-
BP 101 formation set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
Mobile Applications
AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its
Glockeraustrae 2 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie consent.
89275 Elchingen, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specied above only serve to describe the product. No
Tel. +49 (0) 73 08 82-0 Tel. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax. +49 (0) 73 08 72 74 Fax. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information
given does not release the user from the obligation of own judg-
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr
ment and verication. It must be remembered that our products are
www.boschrexroth.com/brm subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.
Subject to revision.

744
Hydraulic pilot control devices RE 64 558/05.06 1/10
Replaces: 05.03

Type TH7

Type 1TH7Z Type 1TH7QL Type 2TH7Q

Series 1X

Type 2TH7N Type 4TH7G

Contents Features 4
Functional description, symbol 2 Progressive, sensitive operation
Technical data 2 Precise and play-free control
Ordering details 3
Unit dimensions 4-7
Characteristics curves 8-9

745
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Type TH7 | RE 64 558/05.06

Functional description, symbol

1TH7QL: Single acting hydraulic remote control, operation via

one long pedal
1TH7Z: Single acting hydraulic remote control without ope-
rator

2TH7Q: Single acting hydraulic remote control, operation via

two independent pedals
2TH7L, M, N, P: Double acting hydraulic remote control,
operation via one side lever

4TH7G, H, J, K: Double acting hydraulic remote control,

operation via two side levers

Technical data, mechanical (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Inlet pressure bar 50
Back pressure at port T bar 3
Pilot oil flow l/min up to 20
Hysteresis bar up to 1
Pressure fluid
1)
suitable for NBR seals Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1)
2)
consult us Phosphate ester (HFD-R) 2)
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to + 80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 380
Degree of pressure fluid contamination Max. permissible degree of contamination of the pressure fluid
is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a filter with
a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
Max. permissible operating torque at the pedals Nm 20
Max. permissible actuation force at the plunger N 88
Max. permissible operating torque at the levers Nm 8
Weight kg 3,2 (1TH7QL, 2TH7L, M, N, P)
kg 1,2 (1TH7Z)
kg 6,2 (2TH7Q)
kg 3,5 (4TH7G, H, J, K)

746
RE 64 558/05.06 | Type TH7 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Codification

- 1X /

SO.008 = Sea water

1 control port: resistant (only 2TH7L,
s
MPOH
QFEBM
= 1TH7QL 2TH7M, 4TH7G, 4TH7H)
s
8JUIPVU
PQFSBUPS
= 1TH7Z SO.198 = Plunger grommet
(only 1TH7Z)
2 control ports:
s

JOEFQFOEFOU
QFEBMT
= 1TH7QL Threaded ports
s

TJEF
MFWFS
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
= 2TH7L 01 = G1/4
s

TJEF
MFWFS
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
BOE Pipe thread
detents in 3 positions = 2TH7M to standard ISO 228/1
05 = 9/16 UNF-2B
s

TJEF
MFWFS
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO UNF connection
lockable in any position and release = 2TH7N to ISO 11926
s

TJEF
MFWFS
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
BOE
DBO
be fixed in any position by a friction clutch = 2TH7P Seals
4 control ports: M= NBR seals
s

TJEF
MFWFST
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
= 4TH7G ! Attention!
s

TJEF
MFWFST
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
BOE
EFUFOUT
JO The compatibility of the seals and
3 positions = 4TH7H pressure fluid has to be taken into account
s

TJEF
MFWFST
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
MPDLBCMF
in any position and release = 4TH7J 1X= Series 10 to 19
s

TJEF
MFWFST
XJUI
TQSJOH
SFUVSO
BOE
DBO
CF
GJYFE
JO
BOZ
Unchanged installation and connection
position by a friction clutch = 4TH7K dimensions (10 to 19)

05, 06, 73, 91, 93 = Control curve

Application guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at the unit.
Replace worn rubber grommets.

Safety guidelines (these guidelines are not intended to be considered as complete)

Take into account all of the application limits, particularly those application limits stated within this catalogue sheet!
4

Installation guidelines
Mounting flange area: flatness = 0.5 mm
Screw head dimensions = 10 mm
Tightening torque for the flange fixing screws = 10 Nm max.
Tightening torque for the pipe connections = 30 Nm max.

747
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Type TH7 | RE 64 558/05.06

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type 1TH7QL, one single acting long pedal 4 Fixing holes
View Y 11 Pedal movement
12 Setting screw
14 Anti-slip pedal
14 surface
11 15 Adjustable angle
approx. every 5:
Hole
1 25
2 30
3 35
4 40

15

12

4
Ordering
Ports P, T, A
code
01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1
05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926

Type 2TH7Q, 2 independent single acting pedals

View X
4 12

11

4 Fixing holes
11 Pedal movement
12 Setting screw
Ordering
Ports P, T, 1 and 4
code
01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1
05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926

748
RE 64 558/05.06 | Type TH7 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type 1TH7Z Without operator element Type G 2 side levers, with spring Type J 2 side levers, spring return,
(grommet = SO.198) return with lock and release in any
Type H 2 side levers, with spring position
return and detents in
3 poisitions

4 4

3
7 3

7
Type G Type H 4

Ordering Ordering Ordering

Ports P, T, A Ports P, T, 1, 2, 3 and 4 Ports P, T, 1, 2, 3 and 4
code code code
01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1 01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1 01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1
05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926 05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926 05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926

3 Lever operation direction and control ports 7 Lever deflection

thereby influenced 8 Lever position locked
4 Fixing holes 9 Lever position released
6 Detents in 3 positions (type H)

749
6/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Type TH7 | RE 64 558/05.06

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type K 2 side levers, spring return, Type L 1 side lever, spring return Type M 1 side lever, spring return,
can be fixed in any position detents in 3 positions
by friction clutch

10
6

4 4
4

3 7 3 7 7
3

Ordering Ordering Ordering

Ports P, T, 1, 2, 3 and 4 Ports P, T, 1 and 4 Ports P, T, 1 and 4
code code code
01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1 01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1 01 G 1/4 to ISO 228/1
05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926 05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926 05 9/16 UNF-2B to ISO 11926

3 Lever operation direction and control ports thereby 7 Lever deflection

influenced 10 Fixed in any position by friction clutch
4 Fixing holes
6 Detents in 3 positions (type M)

750
RE 64 558/05.06 | Type TH7 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Type N 1 side lever, spring return, with lock and release in any Type P 1 side lever, spring return, can be fixed in any position
position by friction clutch

9
10

7 7
3 3

Ordering Ordering
Ports P, T, 1 and 4 Ports P, T, 1 and 4
code code
01 G 1/4 selon ISO 228/1 01 G 1/4 selon ISO 228/1
05 9/16 UNF-2B selon ISO 11926 05 9/16 UNF-2B selon ISO 11926

3 Lever operation direction and control ports thereby 7 Lever position locked
influenced 9 Lever position released
4 Fixing holes 10 Fixed in any position by friction clutch
7 Lever deflection

751
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Type TH7 | RE 64 558/05.06

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

05 Control curve, identification no. 05

Control pressure in bar

Inlet pressure

Operator deflection, plunger stroke

1TH7QL 1TH7Z 2TH7Q TH7 G/H/J/L/M/N TH7 K/P

Intersection point A C A C A C A C A C
Operator deflection () 455' 2610' 150' 1040' 440' 2730' 440' 2730'
Plunger stroke (mm) 1,6 9,2
Actuation moment (Nm) 0,82 2,38 2,33 6,72 1,95 3,57
Actuation force (N) 5,49 13,57

06 Control curve, identification no. 06 Inlet pressure

Control pressure in bar

This curve is used for the pilot

control of the SM12, SM18, M1
control blocks

Operator deflection, plunger stroke

1TH7QL 1TH7Z 2TH7Q TH7 G/H/J/L/M/N TH7 K/P

Intersection point A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
Operator deflection () 455' 2030' 2610' 150' 810' 1040' 440' 2120' 2730' 440' 2120' 2730'
Plunger stroke (mm) 1,6 7,1 9,2
Actuation moment (Nm) 0,86 2,29 2,66 2,42 6,48 7,53 1,17 3,33 3,63
Actuation force (N) 6,57 12,80 18,96

73 Control curve, identification no. 73 Inlet pressure

This curve is used for the pilot
Control pressure in bar

control of the SP12 control blocks

Operator deflection, plunger stroke

1TH7QL 1TH7Z 2TH7Q TH7 G/H/J/L/M/N TH7 K/P

Intersection point A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
Operator deflection () 455' 2030' 2610' 150' 810' 1040' 440' 2120' 2730' 440' 2120' 2730'
Plunger stroke (mm) 1,6 7,1 9,2
Actuation moment (Nm) 0,94 2,29 2,66 2,67 6,48 7,53 1,29 3,13 3,63
Actuation force (N) 8,57 13,96 18,96

752
RE 64 558/05.06 | Type TH7 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10

Characteristic curves: control ranges, actuation moments

91 Control curve, identification no. 91 Inlet pressure
This curve is used for the pilot

Control pressure in bar

control of the SX12, SX14, SX18
control blocks

Operator deflection, plunger stroke

1TH7QL 1TH7Z 2TH7Q TH7 G/H/J/L/M/N TH7 K/P

Intersection point A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
Operator deflection () 455' 2030' 2610' 150' 810' 1040' 440' 2120' 2730' 440' 2120' 2730'
Plunger stroke (mm) 1,6 7,1 9,2
Actuation moment (Nm) 0,86 2,29 2,66 2,44 6,48 7,53 1,18 3,13 3,63
Actuation force (N) 7,79 15,11 18,96

93 Control curve, identification no. 93

This curve is used for the pilot
Control pressure in bar

Inlet pressure
control of the M7, M4 control
blocks

Operator deflection, plunger stroke

1TH7QL 1TH7Z 2TH7Q TH7 G/H/J/L/M/N TH7 K/P

Intersection point A C A C A C A C A C
Operator deflection () 455' 2610' 150' 1040' 440' 2730' 440' 2730'
Plunger stroke (mm) 1,6 9,2
Actuation moment (Nm) 2,44 6,72 1,18 3,25 0,86 2,74
Actuation force (N) 7,79 14,73

753
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Type TH7 | RE 64 558/05.06

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set forth
Mobile Applications BP 101 in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or
Glockeraustrae 2 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie given to third parties without its consent.
89275 Elchingen, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Tel. +49 (0) 73 08 82-0 Tel. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived
Fax. +49 (0) 73 08 72 74 Fax. +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 from our information. The information given does not release the user from the
obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr
products are subject to a natural process of wear and ageing.
www.boschrexroth.com/brm
Subject to revision.

754
Electronic remote control RE 29881/09.10
Replaces: 07.08
1/44

for mobile application

Type THE5

Type 4THE5 H 1) Type 2THE5 RC 1)

Series 2X

Table of contents Features

Content Page Specially designed for mobile machines
Features ...................................................................................1 Types available: Voltage signal, PWM signal, CAN, Power
Functional description, cross-section .......................................2 High mechanical robustness of hydraulic remote control com-
4THE5, 6THE5, 8THE5, 2THE5R .....................................3 to 5 ponents
Ordering details ........................................................................6 Large selection of ergonomic grips with various E-contacts
on/off rockers or proportional control
Mechanical characteristics .......................................................7
Several types of pedals
Software parameters ................................................................7
Actuator ergonomics comparable with hydraulic remote
Voltage Signal characteristics controls 4
Electrical ..........................................................................8, 9 The design ensures an excellent protection of electronics
PWM Signal characteristics Hall effect contactless sensors
Electrical ......................................................................10, 11
Software ...................................................................12 to 16
Power characteristics
Electrical ...................................................................17 to 20
Software ....................................................................20 to 26
CAN Bus characteristics
Electrical ...................................................................27 to 29
Software ....................................................................30 to 37
Safety guidelines ....................................................................38
Programming tool ...................................................................39
Pin assignment ..............................................................40 to 44 1) Noncontractual pictures

755
2/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Functional description, cross-section

Design The remote control Power gives pulse-width-modulated cur-

Remote controls type THE5 are mainly composed of an rents for the direct operation of electrohydraulic proportional
operating element (lever or pedal) (1), a fixation body or pressure reducing valves.
plate (2) and a box (3) containing the contactless sensors Remote controls fitted with microcontrollers (PWM Signal,
and electronic cards. CAN and Power) communicate with the PC via ISOK inter-
faces.
General
All types of THE5 remote controls have similar mechanics Function principle
and ergonomics to the hydraulic remote controls. This design When not actuated the operating element is held in neutral
provides a high robustness level to the THE5. Main differenc- position by the return springs (8).
es come from the integrated electronic functions and the type With deflection of the operating element (pedal or lever) (1),
of output signals. plunger (5) pushes against return spring (8). The magnet
The remote control Voltage Signal needs external regulated (7) mechanically linked to the plunger (5) moves upward or
power supply for its sensors. It generates an analog voltage downward while following the operating element actuation
command value (V). direction. The command value generated by the sensor (4)
The remote controls PWM Signal, CAN and Power integrate is proportional to the deflection of the pedal or lever.
a power supply regulation and can therefore be supplied by A rubber boot (6) protects the mechanical components of the
the vehicle battery directly. housing from external contamination.
The remote control CAN periodically generates a frame on
CAN bus which allows the communication with other systems.
The remote controls Voltage Signal, PWM Signal and CAN
only generate low power signals. The actuation of an electro-
hydraulic axis requires a further external electronic power in-
terface.

4THE5 section 2THE5R section

2 5 1
6 5
8 4 2 8
8 7
3 7
3 4

756
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/44

4THE5, 6THE5, 8THE5

Features
The 4THE5 is available in version Voltage Signal, CAN,
PWM Signal or Power.
Electromagnetic compatibility (ECM) according to the
standards ISO 7637, 11452.
Ergonomics similar to hydraulic remote controls type 4TH6
and 4TH5.
Life expectancy: up to 5 millions cycles.
Up to 4 integrated proportional axis.

Wiring: block diagram

See pages 5 (Voltage Signal), 7 (PWM Signal), 9 (CAN),
or 11 (Power). 4THE5 H 1)

Outputs characteristic curves Application

See pages 5 (Voltage Signal), 7 (PWM Signal), 9 (CAN), The pilot control unit type 4THE5 is for armrest installation
or 11 (Power). and for the remote control of mobile machines equipment.
The electronics integrated in the joystick enables the remote
Installation guidelines control of up to 4 proportional axis if it is connected to the
proportional sensors inside the grip.
Mounting flange area: flatness = 0.5 mm.
Screw head dimensions = 10 mm.
Tightening torque for the
flange fixing screws = Max. 10 Nm.

Installation hole

81 min.
D
7

Nominal diameter / fixing via 4 screws

D = 100 to 113 mm.

4
1) Noncontractual picture

757
4/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

4THE5, 6THE5, 8THE5

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Signal and CAN joystick: Power joystick

THES5, THESW5, THEC5 THE5
View G View A View A
1 2+ 2+
28 32
0 0
1 1

100 x 100

100 x 100
2+ 21 1
0,5
1+ 12 1 1+
,5
98

7 7
1+ 2 100 to 113 2 100 to 113
75
15
G
Y

2+ 2 1 20 20 1+ 2+ 20 2 1 20 1+
Y

20 20
Max. Min. Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.
29

29
58

89,5
13

15

81
A 81

Unit dimension in function of the grip type

Type of grip Y (with bent lever) Z (with straight lever)

EC2000 207 211.5
EC2000+ 215.5 220.5
EC4000 250.5 257

758
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/44

2THE5R

Features
The 2THE5R is available in version Voltage Signal, CAN,
PWM Signal or Power.
Electromagnetic compatibility (ECM) according to the
standards ISO 7637, 11452.
Ergonomics similar to hydraulic remote controls type
2TH6R or electronic remote controls type 2THE6R.
Life expectancy: up to 1 million cycles.
Up to 2 integrated proportional axis.

Wiring: block diagram

See pages 5 (Voltage Signal), 7 (PWM Signal), 9 (CAN),
or 11 (Power 2)). 2THE5 RC 1)

Outputs characteristic curves Installation guidelines

See pages 5 (Voltage Signal), 7 (PWM Signal), 9 (CAN), Mounting flange area: flatness = 0.5 mm.
or 11 (Power 2)). Screw head dimensions = 13 mm.
Tightening torque for the
Application flange fixing screws = Max. 10 Nm.
The pilot control device type 2THE5R is for the remote control
via a pedal of various functions.

Unit dimensions (in mm) Installation hole

160
180
4 x 9 111
5,7

55
40
2
+1
12

307

63 10
0 125

4
240

25
4

4 x 9
72
20

41,5
74

1 1+
Min. Max.

105 17
42,5 300 p 10
74

1) Noncontractual picture
2) Power version under development

759
6/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Ordering details

THE 5 2X *

Number of axis Further details in clear text

1 axis =2 Plug
2 axis =4 5= Deutsch sealed plugs IP67
3 axis 1) =6 for the wiring of the grip
4 axis 2) =8 no code = no plug
Type of output Grip orientation / Machine 4)
Voltage Signal 3) =S 03 = Lever straight and grip towards 1
Signal PWM = SW 43 = Lever bent towards 2 and grip towards 1
CAN =C (left hand joystick)
Power = no code 23 = Lever bent towards 2+ and grip towards 1
Type of controller (right hand joystick)
Grip EC2000 =E no code = Without grip
Grip EC4000 =H Grip type
Grip EC2000+ =I TT, ST, VT, YT, YU = Grip type E
Grip EC3000+ =G Grip type H, I, G see datasheet:
Single flat pedal = RP RE 64547
Single bent pedal = RC no code = Other grip
Double pedal simple effect =Q Series
Without lever =Z 2X = Default
Other grip = no code 3X = (DT6 + DT12) connection 5)

1) 6THE5 with grip EC2000+ or EC4000 or EC3000+

2) 8THE5 with grip EC4000
3) Designate the Signal remote control with 2 axis maximum
because the additional axis provided by grips EC3000 and
EC4000 are not controlled by the remote control electronic
4) 4THE5, 6THE5 and 8THE5
5) Only for CAN signal

760
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/44

Mechanical characteristics (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Type of THE5 Joysticks Pedals

Lifetime 5 millions actuation cycles 1) 1 million actuation cycles 1)
Temperature range
Storage, ambient C 40 to +85
Operation C 20 to +60
Resistance to vibrations and shocks frequency 11 to 2,000 Hz const. accel. 5 g. Consult us
Electronic protection degree IP 67
Actuation Torque Nm
Stroke start 0.6 3
Full stroke position 1.5 7
Maximum permissible at the operating element 100 200
with an exceptional, one-time loading
Actuation angle in degree
On longitudinal axis 20 12
On lateral axis 20 /
Weight Kg 1 2.3

Software parameters

Parameters properties
For PWM signal, print pages 15 to 16.
For Power signal, print pages 24 to 26.
For CAN signal, print pages 35 to 37.
You will have to fill the parameters values following these rules:
Parameter Value Available Range Default

(give the names of (enter your choice here) (give information about (give the default value if
parameter list) possible values) no choice has been done)
[X-Y]
This means that you can
select a value between
X and Y, the resolution 4
is done with the unit.
[X;Y]
This means that you can
select only X or Y.

PARAMETER_NAME Function 1 Default Value and Unit

Function 2

This means that you can
select only 1 Function in the
function list 1,2
YES / NO
Select YES to have the
function active or NO to have
the function inactive

1) Life test realized with the operating torques (i.e. at full stroke position).

761
8/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Electrical characteristics Voltage Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Power supply V Regulated 5 V

(supply the digital outputs separately with the battery voltage)
Maximum current consumption mA 34
Proportional Signal
Voltage V (with power supply 5 VDC)
Full stroke towards 1+ or 2+ 4.3 V 200 mV 1) (under 5 VDC)
Neutral 2.5 V 150 mV 1) (under 5 VDC)
Full stroke towards 1 or 2 0.7 V 200 mV 1) (under 5 VDC)
Maximum sourcing current mA 1
Recommended load capacity nF 10
Digital Output (DIR_OUT)
Voltage V
Neutral 0
Off Neutral Battery voltage
Rising edge trigger level (LRE) 2.75 V / 2.25 V 40 mV

Falling edge trigger level (LFE) ( LRE 50mV ) 40 mV

Hysteresis mV 50
Maximum sourcing current mA 200 (with resistive load)
Protections
Protection against polarity reversal Outputs protected between 0 and 32 V
Protection against short circuits Yes
Fuse A 0.5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Magnetic field according to ISO 11452 part 2 V/m 100
Current injection according to ISO 11452 part 4 mA 200
Direct electrostatic discharge kV 6
Electrostatic discharge in the air kV 8
Further data Consult us

1) The tolerance is function of the full scale range and takes into account thermal drift and lifetime.

762
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/44

Electrical characteristics Voltage Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Wiring: block diagram

VCC_IN_1 (Pin 3) 5 VDC

ANA_OUT_1 (Pin 11)
ECM /
GND (Pin 2) MODULE 1
DIR_OUT_P_1 (Pin 7)
FUSE
DIR_OUT_M_1 (Pin 8)
S A
0 I
II M
VBAT (Pin 1) 0,5 mm x 1
FUSE EMERGENCY III D + -
GND (Pin 2) OFF
+12 VDC / +24 VDC
DIR_OUT_P_2 (Pin 9)

DIR_OUT_M_2 (Pin 10) FUSE High side Direction

Output (VBAT)
VCC_IN_2 (Pin 4) 5 VDC
ANA_OUT_2 (Pin 12)
ECM /
GND (Pin 5) MODULE 2

4THES5

Pin assignment: see page 43

Output characteristic

Proportional Signal

4,3 V p0,2 V

2,75 V
2,5 V p0,15 V
4

0,7 V p0,2 V

100 % 100 % angle

Direction Signal

Direction Direction +

100 % 13,8 % +13,8 % 100 % angle

763
10/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Electrical characteristics PWM Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Power supply V 9 to 32 VDC

Maximum current consumption mA 300
Proportional Signal
Proportional signal duty cycle %
Full stroke towards 1+ or 2+ 90 % 2.5 % 1)
Neutral 50 % 2.5 % 1)
Full stroke towards 1 or 2 10 % 2.5 % 1) (i.e. 7.5 % at 12.5 %)
PWM Signal frequency Hz 196
High voltage signal V 4 to 5
Low voltage signal V 0 to 1
Maximum sourcing current mA 20
Digital Input / Output (DIG_IN_OUT)
Characteristic Adjustable by programming

V bat Input function connected to a switch To ensure a minimum current when switching off
the connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an
internal pull up resistance of 8.2 K.
The switch must be fitted to a 5 mA current.

Output function When the ouput is inactive, take into account the pull up
8.2 K resistance to set the output voltage
Output function connected with a relay The relay must have a minimal current of activation of 10mA

Output function connected with a LED The LED must have a 500 resistance in parallel to reduce
its alimentation voltage under 2 V when output is idle

Output function connected to a logical input The logical input must have a 500 resistance in parallel to
reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V when output is idle

Maximum sourcing current mA 200 (with resistive load)

Protections
Protection against polarity reversal Outputs protected between 0 and 32 V
Protection against short circuits Yes
Fuse A 2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Magnetic field according to ISO 11452 part 2 V/m 100
Current injection according to ISO 11452 part 4 mA 200
Direct electrostatic discharge kV 6
Electrostatic discharge in the air kV 8
Further data Consult us

1) The tolerance is function of the full scale range and takes into account thermal drift and lifetime.

764
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/44

Electrical characteristics PWM Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Wiring: block diagram

S A
0 I
FUSE II M
VBAT (Pin 1) 0,5 mm x 1 III D
EMERGENCY OFF

GND (Pin 2) 0,5 mm x 1

FUSE
DIG_IN_OUT_1 (Pin 7)
+
DIG_IN_OUT_2 (Pin 8)
DIG_IN_OUT_3 (Pin 9)
+12 VDC / +24 VDC
DIG_IN_OUT_4 (Pin 10)
DIG_IN_5 (Pin 4) Low side Programmable Input Output
DIG_IN_6 (Pin 5) used as INPUT (GND)
DIG_IN_7 (Pin 6)
High side Programmable Input Output
used as OUTPUT (VBAT)

PWM_OUT_1 (Pin 11)

PWM_OUT_2 (Pin 12)

ECM

4THESW5

Programming tool: see page 42

Pin assignment: see page 44

Output characteristics
The proportional signal (%) is the ratio between the time at
high side and the time at low side

Proportional Signal 90 %
Proportional Signal
V Tperiod (% of duty cycle)
4-5 90 %

4
50 %
0 S
Proportional Signal 50 %
4-5 10 %
98 % 8 % +8 % 98 % Angle
100 % 100 %

S Directional Signal
0
Proportional Signal 10 %
4-5 Direction Direction +

0 S 100 % 8 % +8 % 100 % Angle

765
12/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

PWM Signal Software parameters

PWM Signal Outputs

PWM Duty cycle (%)

DUTY_CYCLE_MAX

50 %

100-DUTY_CYCLE_MAX
Travel angle (%)

100 98 100
NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND

Please refer to board #1 1)

Digital Input / Output Port

SIGNAL PWM integrate 4 Digital Configurable Input Output ports and 3 Digital Not Configurable Input ports. Inputs are active
when they are connected to ground by external circuitry and inactive when disconnected from ground, pull up is done internally.
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation:

V BAT V BAT

Output Port Output Port

Inactive Active

Please refer to board #2 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

766
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/44

PWM Signal Software parameters

Functions parameters
1. Direction and Out of Neutral Outputs
This function works using an Output Port.
The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Consider the internal pull up 8.2k Ohm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation.
Direction is active when the sensors position leaves the neutral dead band defined in percent of the full travel range
(NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND).

There are 6 modes:

Direction Plus on Axis 1 (D1P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 1 (D1M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Minus
Direction Plus on Axis 2 (D2P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 2 (D2M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Minus
Out Of Neutral Axis 1 (OU1): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 1
Out Of Neutral Axis 2 (OU2): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 2

2. Status Indicator Output

This function works using an Output Port.
The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Connect a LED to the relevant output considering the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive.

There are 2 modes:

Error Status Indicator (FLT): This mode will lead LED indicator to light on in case of fault.
Ready to Work Indicator (RTW): This mode will light on the LED if there is no fault detected.

Please refer to board #3 1)

3. Dead Man Input

This function works using an Input port.
This function is activated when port is connected to ground.
Dead Man function allows freezing the joystick signals in neutral if the assigned input is not activated and whatever the position
sensors are. Transition will be done without ramp time.

There are 2 modes to enable the outputs signals:

Permanent: The output signals are enabled while the input stays connected to the ground.
WatchDog: The output signals are enabled while the input changes periodically from connected to disconnected. 4

Please refer to board #4 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

767
14/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

PWM Signal Software parameters

4. Floating

PWM Duty cycle (%)

FLOAT_OUTPUT
DUTY_CYCLE_MAX

50 %

100-DUTY_CYCLE_MAX
Travel angle (%)

100 98 100
NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND

FLOAT_TRIGGER

Floating allows shifting the assigned spool in fourth position. The floating function works using an Input port and is activat-
ed when port is connected to ground (the input doesnt need to stay active after) and if the output activation is in the range
[80 %-90 %]. The float will then stay active until the axis goes out of neutral in the direction where the float has been assigned.

PWM duty cycle for the Floating Instruction, PWM duty cycle for triggering, axi(s) and direction(s) assigned to the float can be
selected in the following board.

Please refer to board #5 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

768
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/44

PWM Signal Boards

Board #1:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

PWM_FREQUENCY [120;124;;500] (Hz) 196

DUTY_CYCLE_MAX [80;90] (%) 90

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 8

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_2 [8-15] (%) 8

PWM_VOLTAGE_OUTPUT 5V [5V] 5V

Note 1: PWM Dduty cycle is always 50 % in neutral.

Note 2: Maxi Duty Cycle is reached at 98 % of the stroke (exemple: 19.6 for a 20 joystick), this value is not adjustable.
Note 3: PWM Voltage Output is 5 V for high level, 0VDC for low level (not adjustable).

Board #2:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

INPUT FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION_DIO_1 NOF
No Function (NOF)
Floating (FLO)
DeadMan (DMA)
FUNCTION_DIO_2 NOF
OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
Axis 1+ Direction (D1P)
Axis 1- Direction (D1M)
FUNCTION_DIO_3 Axis 1 Out of Neutral (OU1) NOF
Axis 2+ Direction (D2P)
Axis 2- Direction (D2M)
Axis 2 Out of Neutral (OU2)
FUNCTION_DIO_4 NOF
Status Indicator (STA)
4

FUNCTION_DI_5 NOF

INPUT FUNCTIONS
No Function (NOF)
FUNCTION_DI_6 NOF
Floating (FLO)
DeadMan (DMA)

FUNCTION_DI_7 NOF

Note 1: Floating, DeadMan and Status Indicator functions require additionnals parameters, refer to section
"Functions parameters" for furthers details.
Note 2: Floating and DeadMan functions can be assigned to one input maximum.

769
16/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

PWM Signal Boards

Board #3:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Fault Indicator (FLT)

STATUS_MODE FLT
Ready to work Indicator (RTW)

Board #4:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Permanent (PER)
DEAD_MAN_MODE PER
WatchDog (WDG)
DEAD_MAN_ TEMPO
[0-60] (s) 60
(if WatchDog mode selected)

Board #5:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

FLOAT_TRIGGER [80-90] (%) 80

FLOAT_OUTPUT [95;95.5;98] (%) 96.5

FLOAT_AXIS_1_PLUS YES / NO NO

FLOAT_AXIS_1_MINUS YES / NO NO

FLOAT_AXIS_2_PLUS YES / NO NO

FLOAT_AXIS_2_MINUS YES / NO NO

770
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/44

Electrical characteristics Power (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Power supply V 9 to 32 VDC 1)

Maximum current consumption A < 10
Proportional Current
% of maximum solenoid current
Neutral 0 % (with dead band 2) of 8 %)
Stroke start Minimum current programmed
Full stroke position Maximum current programmed
PWM frequency Hz 83, 100, 133, 166, 200, 233, 266
Maximum sourcing current A 2 (per proportional output)
Programming curves In 5 points
Programming ramps 0 to 10 s
Protections
Protection against polarity reversal Outputs protected between 0 and 32 V
Protection against power outputs short circuits Yes
at ground 3)
Fuse A 3 (2THE5)
5 (4THE5)
7.5 (6THE5)
10 (8THE5)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Magnetic field according to ISO 11452 part 2 V/m 100
Current injection according to ISO 11452 part 4 mA 200
Direct electrostatic discharge kV 6
Electrostatic discharge in the air kV 8
Further data Consult us

1) Under certain conditions, battery voltage lower than 12 V and temperature greater than 85 C, maximum current cannot be
reached.
2) We recommend a dead band of 8 %. The dead band is set at the transmitter only (Power joystick). The dead band on
neutral / full stroke positions depends upon the angular stroke (8 % for a stroke of 20 = 1.6).
3) The current inputs are not protected against short circuits at battery voltage.
4

771
18/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Electrical characteristics Power (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Input / Output Electrical characteristics

Digital Input (DIG_IN)
V bat Characteristic Adjustable by programming
Input function To ensure a minimum current when switching off
the connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an
internal pull up resistance

Digital Input / Output (DIG_IN_OUT)

Characteristic Adjustable by programming
V bat Input function connected to a switch To ensure a minimum current when switching off
the connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an internal
pull up resistance of 8.2 K.
The switch must be fitted to a 5 mA current.
Output function When the ouput is inactive, take into account the pull up
8.2 K resistance to set the output voltage

Output function connected with a relay The relay must have a minimal current of activation of
10 mA

Output function connected with a LED The LED must have a 500 resistance in parallel
to reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V
when output is idle

Output function connected to a logical input The logical input must have a 500 resistance in
parallel to reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V
when output is idle

Maximum sourcing current mA 200 (with resistive load)

Analog Inputs for axis 3 and 4

VCC_OUT_1 maximum sourcing current mA 75
VCC_OUT_1
ANA_IN_3 (4)

Pull down resistor on ANA_IN_3 (4) kOhms 10

GND_CPU

772
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 19/44

Electrical characteristics Power (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Wiring: block diagram S A

0 I
FUSE II M
VBAT_POWER (Pin 3, 4) 0,5 mm x 1
EMERGENCY OFF III D

GND_POWER (Pin 1, 2) 0,5 mm x 1

SOL_OUT_M_1 (Pin 15)

AXIS CUR_IN_1 (Pin 14)
1
SOL_OUT_P_1 (Pin 13)
AXIS 2, 3, 4
FUSE
DIG_IN_OUT_1 (Pin 27)
DIG_IN_OUT_2 (Pin 28)
DIG_IN_OUT_3 (Pin 29)
DIG_IN_OUT_4 (Pin 30) +12 VDC /+24 VDC
DIG_IN_5 (Pin 5)
DIG_IN_6 (Pin 10)
DIG_IN_7 (Pin 12) Low side Programmable Input Out-
put used as INPUT (GND)
GND_CPU (Pin 7) High side Programmable Input Out-
Roller 2 put used as OUTPUT (VBAT)
ANA_IN_3 (Pin 18)

VCC_OUT_1 (Pin 17)

ANA_IN_4 (Pin 20) Roller 3

8THE5
Programming tool: see page 42
Pin assignment: see page 46

Output characteristics
Control curves
Current command value
(depending of the maximum
current defined on the output)
Z`QU5
For each proportional output, a control curve can be adapted
to the customer system (solenoid).
Z`QU4 The control curve programming of each output can be 4
Z`QU3 determined through 5 points.
Z`QU2
Z`QU1

angle
Y`QU1 Y`QU2 Y`QU3 Y`QU4 Y`QU5

Ramps Each control curve has a ramp "Up" and a ramp "Down".
Up ramp time Down ramp time The programming allows the adaptation of the ramp times to
the operated function.
B

Command value
time

773
20/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Electrical characteristics Power (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Output characteristics
Ouput current Direction signal
(with standard curve) (if active)
Direction Direction +
100 %

35 % angle angle
100 % 98 % 12 % +12 % 98 % 100 % 100 % 8 % +8 % 100 %

Power Software parameters

Power Outputs
1. Pressure reducer characteristics
THE5 joystick and pedal are able to drive pressure reducers as long as the current is within [0.25 ; 2.4] Amp It is also able to
control Black and White solenoid (flip Flop). For better performances, all connected pressure reducers should be the same type
(Resistance, Voltage).

a) Standard pressure reducers

Please refer to board #6 1)

12 Volts

FTDRE2 MHDRE2 MHDRE2 MHDRE2

18 BAR 18 BAR 24 BAR 30 BAR

RESISTANCE () 2.4 3.5 2.4 3.5

PWM_FREQUENCY (Hz) 150 150 150 150

MIN_CURRENT (A) 0.80 0.60 0.60 0.60

MAX_CURRENT (A) 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.70

24 Volts

FTDRE2 MHDRE2 MHDRE2 MHDRE2

18 BAR 18 BAR 24 BAR 30 BAR

RESISTANCE () 12 10.9 12 10.9

PWM_FREQUENCY (Hz) 150 150 150 150

MIN_CURRENT (A) 0.36 0.34 0.26 0.34

MAX_CURRENT (A) 0.80 1.95 0.75 0.95

1) boards are at the end of this section.

774
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 21/44

Power Software parameters

b) Non Standard pressure reducers

For non standard solenoids the following information are required, note that all load are supposed to be identical.

Please refer to board #7 1)

2. Curves shape

a) Standard curves shape

Standard curve shape is linear between CURRENT_MIN and CURRENT_MAX adjusted to selected pressure reducer and
valve (if specified).

OUTPUT CURRENT
CURRENT MAX

CURRENT MIN

Travel angle (%)

8 98 100

b) Non standard curves shape

Define special curves allows having a non linear response on the joystick; this feature is useful to optimize the control of the
pressure reducers. The shape of the curve is defined in percent of the maximum currents applied on the output.

OUTPUT CURRENT
QU4 QU5
CURRENT MAX

QU3
QU2
QU1
CURRENT MIN 4

Travel angle (%)

21 211

Please refer to board #8 1)

If the application requires a special curve, you can specify it. You can define 7 special curves maximum.

Please refer to board #9 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

775
22/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Power Software parameters

Digital Input / Output Port

POWER THE5 integrates 4 Digital Configurable Input Output ports and 3 Digital Not Configurable Input ports. Inputs are active
when they are connected to ground by external circuitry and inactive when disconnected from ground, pull up is done internally.
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation:

V BAT V BAT

Output Port Output Port

Inactive Active

Please refer to board #10 1)

Functions parameters
1. Direction and Out of Neutral Outputs
This function works using an Output Port.
The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation.
Direction is active when the sensors position leaves the neutral dead band defined in percent of the full travel range
(NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND).

There are 6 modes:

Direction Plus on Axis 1 (D1P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 1 (D1M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Minus
Direction Plus on Axis 2 (D2P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 2 (D2M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Minus
Out Of Neutral Axis 1 (OU1): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 1
Out Of Neutral Axis 2 (OU2): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 2

2. Status Indicator Output

This function works using an Output Port.
The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Connect a LED to the relevant output considering the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive.

There are 2 modes:

Error Status Indicator (FLT): This mode will lead LED indicator to light on in case of fault.
Ready to Work Indicator (RTW): This mode will light on the LED if there is no fault detected.

Please refer to board #11 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

776
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 23/44

Power Software parameters

3. Dead Man Input

This function works using an Input port.
This function is activated when port is connected to ground.
Dead Man function allows freezing the joystick signals in neutral if the assigned input is not activated and whatever the position
sensors are. Transition will be done without ramp time.

There are 2 modes to enable the outputs signals:

Permanent: The output signals are enabled while the input stays connected to the ground.
WatchDog: The output signals are enabled while the input changes periodically from connected to disconnected.

Please refer to board #12 1)

4. Fine Control
This function works using an Input port.
This function stays activated while the port stays connected to ground.

When the function is active, the Fine Control Curve set is active.
When the function is inactive, the Normal Control Curve set is active.

Various set configurations may be defined from one axis alone up to all axis in the same set.
Changing of Fine Control Curve set can occur whatever the operating element position.

Secondary Outputs
For compatibility with 4THE6 joystick, secondary outputs can be activated.
Secondary Output allows to drive 2 axis using the same operating element sensor:
Axis 1 sensor is used to drive axis 3 outputs
Axis 2 sensor is used to drive axis 4 outputs
Obviously, axis 3 and 4 sensors are not requested for such application.

Please refer to board #13 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

777
24/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Power Boards

Board #6:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

FTDRE2 18 bars 12Volts (FT-18-12)

MHDRE2 18 bars 12Volts (MH-18-12)
MHDRE2 24 bars 12Volts (MH-24-12)
MHDRE2 30 bars 12Volts (MH-30-12)
PRESSURE_REDUCER MH-30-12
FTDRE2 18 bars 24Volts (FT-18-24)
MHDRE2 18 bars 24Volts (MH-18-24)
MHDRE2 24 bars 24Volts (MH-24-24)
MHDRE2 30 bars 24Volts (MH-30-24)

SX14NGE
VALVE SX14S SX14NGE
SX12

Note 1: Specify the valve allows making a fine adjustement of the joystick in order to optimize the proportional control range.

Board #7:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

NETWORK_VOLTAGE [12;24] (Volt) 12

RESISTANCE [2;20] (Ohm) 3.5

PWM_FREQUENCY [83;100;125;150;167;200;250](Hz) 200

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_1_PLUS

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_1_MINUS

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_2_PLUS

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_2_MINUS
[0.25-2.4] (Amp) 1.7
MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_3_PLUS

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_3_MINUS

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_4_PLUS

MAX_CURRENT_AXIS_4_MINUS

778
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 25/44

Power Boards

Board #8:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

X_PT0 [8-30] (%) 8

X_PT1 33 33 (%) 33

X_PT2 66 66 (%) 66

X_PT3 [66-X_PT4] (%) 85

X_PT4 [X_PT3-100] (%) 100

Board #9:

Parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Available Range

TARGET_AXIS [1;2;3;4]

PLUS
TARGET_DIRECTION
MINUS

NORMAL
CURVE_TYPE
FINE CONTROL

Y_PT0 [0-Y_PT1] (%)

Y_PT1 [Y_PT0-Y_PT2] (%)

Y_PT2 [Y_PT1-Y_PT3] (%)

Y_PT3 [Y_PT2-Y_PT4] (%)

4
Y_PT4 [Y_PT3-1000] (%)

RAMP_UP [0-2.56] (s)

RAMP_DOWN [0-2.56] (s)

Note 1: TARGET_AXIS and TARGET_DIRECTION define the output where you want to have the special curve.
Note 2: CURVE_TYPE define if the curve is activated when the FINE CONTROL is ON or OFF.
Note 3: If the output is defined with a maximum current of 1.7 Amps, you will define Y_PT(%) between 0 and 100 % of
1.7 Amps. Typically, the Y_PT0 will be set to 40 % to output a current of 680 mA at the starting point X_PT0.
Note 4: The parameter RAMP define the time the output will take to go from 0 to 100 % with a linear curve. If the Y_PT0
is for example 50 %, the ramp time will be divided by a factor 2. Ramp resolution is 25.6 ms.

779
26/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Power Boards

Board #10:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

INPUT FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION_DIO_1 No Function (NOF) NOF
DeadMan (DMA)
Fine Control Axis 1 (FC1)
Fine Control Axis 2 (FC2)
FUNCTION_DIO_2 Fine Control all Axis (FCA) NOF

OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
Axis 1+ Direction (D1P)
FUNCTION_DIO_3 Axis 1- Direction (D1M) NOF
Axis 1 Out of Neutral (OU1)
Axis 2+ Direction (D2P)
Axis 2- Direction (D2M)
FUNCTION_DIO_4 Axis 2 Out of Neutral (OU2) NOF
Status Indicator (STA)

FUNCTION_DI_5 NOF
INPUT FUNCTIONS
No Function (NOF)
DeadMan (DMA)
FUNCTION_DI_6 NOF
Fine Control Axis 1 (FC1)
Fine Control Axis 2 (FC2)
Fine Control all Axis (FCA)
FUNCTION_DI_7 NOF

Note 1: Floating, DeadMan and Status Indicator functions require additionnals parameters, refer to section
"Functions parameters" for furthers details.
Note 2: Floating and DeadMan functions can be assigned to one input maximum.

Board #11:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Fault Indicator (FLT)

STATUS_MODE FLT
Ready to work Indicator (RTW)

Board #12:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Permanent (PER)
DEAD_MAN_MODE PER
WatchDog (WDG)

DEAD_MAN_ TEMPO
[0-60] (s) 60
(if WatchDog mode selected)

Board #13:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

SECUNDARY_OUTPUTS YES / NO NO

780
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 27/44

Electrical characteristics CAN Bus (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Power supply V 9 to 32 VDC

Maximum current consumption mA 300
Output Signal
% of 250 (1 byte encoding)
Neutral 0 % 1)
Full stroke 100 % 1)
Bus frequency kHz 100, 125, 250, 500
Protocol (see page 29) 2.0 A or 2.0 B
Protections
Protection against polarity reversal Outputs protected between 0 and 32 V
Protection against short circuits Yes
Fuse A 2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Magnetic field according to ISO 11452 part 2 V/m 100
Current injection according to ISO 11452 part 4 mA 200
Direct electrostatic discharge kV 6
Electrostatic discharge in the air kV 8
Further data Consult us

1) We recommend a dead band of 8 %. The dead band can be set at the transmitter (CAN joystick) or at the receiver.
By default, there is no dead band on the transmitter.

781
28/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Electrical characteristics CAN Bus (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Input / Output Electrical characteristics

Digital Input (DIG_IN)

V bat
Characteristic Adjustable by programming
Input function To ensure a minimum current when switching off
the connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an
internal pull up resistance

Digital Input/Output (DIG_IN_OUT)

Characteristic Adjustable by programming

V bat Input function connected to a switch To ensure a minimum current when switching off the
connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an internal
pull up resistance of 8.2 K.
The switch must be fitted to a 5 mA current.
Output function When the ouput is inactive, take into account the pull up
8.2 K resistance to set the output voltage

Output function connected with a relay The relay must have a minimal current of activation
of 10 mA

Output function connected with a LED The LED must have a 500 resistance in parallel
to reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V
when output is idle

Output function connected to a logical input The logical input must have a 500 resistance
in parallel to reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V
when output is idle

Maximum sourcing current mA 200 (with resistive load)

Analog Inputs for axis 3 and 4

VCC_OUT_1 maximum sourcing current mA 75
VCC_OUT_1
ANA_IN_3 (4)

Pull down resistor on ANA_IN_3 (4) kOhms 10

GND_CPU

782
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 29/44

Electrical characteristics CAN Bus (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Wiring: block diagram

S A
0 I
FUSE II M
VBAT (Pin 1) 0,5 mm x 1
EMERGENCY OFF III D

GND (Pin 2 ) 0,5 mm x 1

DIG_IN_OUT_1 (Pin 8)
DIG_IN_OUT_2 (Pin 9) FUSE
DIG_IN_OUT_3 (Pin 10) +12 VDC /+24 VDC
DIG_IN_OUT_4 (Pin 1 DT4P)
DIG_IN_5 (Pin 2 DT4P)
DIG_IN_6 (Pin 3 DT4P) Low side Programmable Input Out-
DIG_IN_7 (Pin 4 DT4P) put used as INPUT (GND)
High side Programmable Input Out-
GND_CPU (Pin 7)
put used as OUTPUT (VBAT)
ANA_IN_3 (Pin 5) Roller 2

VCC_OUT_1 (Pin 4)

ANA_IN_4 (Pin 6) Roller 3

CAN_H (Pin 11) ECM

CAN_L (Pin 12) (RC controller)

8THEC5

Programming tool: see page 42

Pin assignment: see page 45

Output characteristics

Proportional signal
250 Direction signal

Direction Direction +

98 % 8 % +8 % 98 % Angle 100 % 8 % +8 % 100 % Angle 4

100 % 100 %

BRM Standard Protocol

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Bit 0: Axis1 Bit 0: DIG_IN_OUT_1 Bit 0: 0
Bit 1: Axis1+ Bit 1: DIG_IN_OUT_2 Bit 1: 0
Bit 2: Axis2+ Bit 2: DIG_IN_OUT_3 Bit 2: 0
Position Position Position Position Bit 3: Axis2 Bit 3: DIG_IN_OUT_4 Bit 3: 0
Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 zero
0->250 0->250 0->250 0->250 Bit 4: Axis3+ Bit 4: DIG_IN_5
Bit 5: Axis3 Bit 5: DIG_IN_6 Bit 4-7:
counter
Bit 6: Axis4+ Bit 6: DIG_IN_7 0->16
Bit 7: Axis4 Bit 7: 0

783
30/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

CAN Signal Software parameters

CAN Signal Outputs

Output (%)

100

100
Travel angle (%)

100 98 100
NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND

Please refer to board #14 1)

Protocol
Please refer to board #15 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

784
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 31/44

CAN Signal Software parameters

TxPDO BRM

System Joystick

Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis Error Incre-

Di Value TxPDO
Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Direction Code mental

Please refer to board #16 1)

Message content:

Byte bit Parameter Name

1 1-8 Joystick Axis 1 Position

2 1-8 Joystick Axis 2 Position

3 1-8 HandGrip Axis 3 Position

4 1-8 HandGrip Axis 4 Position

5 1 Axis 1 Direction [ Forward ]

2 Axis 1 Direction + [ Backward ]
3 Axis 2 Direction + [ Left ]
4 Axis 2 Direction [ Right ]
5 Axis 3 Direction + [ Up ]
6 Axis 3 Direction [ Down ]
7 Axis 4 Direction + [ Up ]
8 Axis 4 Direction [ Down ]

6 1 DIO_1 (1 = connected to ground) 4

2 DIO_2
3 DI_3
4 DI_4
5 DI_5
6 DI_6
7 DI_7

7 1-8 ZERO ( Error Code )

8 1-4 ZERO
5-8 Incremental counter
1) boards are at the end of this section.

785
32/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

CAN Signal Software parameters

TxPDO J1939

System Type 1, 2 & 3 JOYSTICK

Position Position Position Position Detent Detent Digital

1 Status 1 2 Status 2 Status 1 Status 2 Input
BJM

Position Position Position Position Detent Detent EJM

Dumy
3 Status 3 4 Status 4 Status 3 Status 4

Please refer to board #17 1)

BJM Message content:

Byte bit Parameter Name

1 1-2 Joystick Axis 2 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 2 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 2 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 2 Position

2 1 Joystick Axis 2 Position

3 1-2 Joystick Axis 1 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 1 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 1 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 1 Position

4 1 Joystick Axis 1 Position

5 1-4 Not defined

5-6 Joystick 1-Axis Detent Position Status
7-8 Joystick 2-Axis Detent Position Status

6 1-2 Joystick Button 4 pressed status

3-4 Joystick Button 3 pressed status
5-6 Joystick Button 2 pressed status
7-8 Joystick Button 1 pressed status

7 1-2 Joystick Button 8 pressed status

3-4 Joystick Button 7 pressed status
5-6 Joystick Button 6 pressed status
7-8 Joystick Button 5 pressed status
1) boards are at the end of this section.

786
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 33/44

CAN Signal Software parameters

EJM Message content:

Byte bit Parameter Name

1 1-2 Joystick Axis 3 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 3 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 3 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 3 Position

2 1 Joystick Axis 3 Position

3 1-2 Joystick Axis 4 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 4 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 4 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 4 Position

4 1 Joystick Axis 4 Position

5 1-8 Not defined

Not defined
Not defined
Not defined

6 1-8 Not defined

7 1-2 Not defined

3-4 Not defined
5-6 Not defined
7-8 Not defined

6 1-8 Not defined

787
34/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

CAN Signal Software parameters

Digital Input / Output Port

CAN BUS THE5 integrates 2 Digital Configurable Input Output ports and 3 Digital Not Configurable Input ports. Inputs are
active when they are connected to ground by external circuitry and inactive when disconnected from ground, pull up is done
internally.
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation:

V BAT V BAT

Output Port Output Port

Inactive Active

Please refer to board #18 1)

Functions parameters
1. Direction and Out of Neutral Outputs
This function works using an Output Port. The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max). Consider
the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation. Direction is active
when the sensors position leaves the neutral dead band defined in percent of the full travel range (NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND).

There are 6 modes:

Direction Plus on Axis 1 (D1P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 1 (D1M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Minus
Direction Plus on Axis 2 (D2P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 2 (D2M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Minus
Out Of Neutral Axis 1 (OU1): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 1
Out Of Neutral Axis 2 (OU2): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 2

2. Status Indicator Output

This function works using an Output Port. The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Connect a LED to the relevant output considering the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive.

There are 2 modes:

Error Status Indicator (FLT): This mode will lead LED indicator to light on in case of fault.
Ready to Work Indicator (RTW): This mode will light on the LED if there is no fault detected.

Please refer to board #19 1)

3. Dead Man Input

This function works using an Input port. This function is activated when port is connected to ground. Dead Man function allows
freezing the joystick signals in neutral if the assigned input is not activated and whatever the position sensors are. Transition
will be done without ramp time.

There are 2 modes to enable the outputs signals:

Permanent: The output signals are enabled while the input stays connected to the ground.
WatchDog: The output signals are enabled while the input changes periodically from connected to disconnected.

Please refer to board #20 1)

1) boards are at the end of this document.

788
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 35/44

CAN Signal Boards

Board #14:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 8

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 8

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 12

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 12

Note 1: Maxi Output % is reached at 98 % of the stroke (exemple: 19.6 for a 20 joystick), this value is not adjustable.

Board #15:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

PROTOCOL [BRM;J1939] BRM

BUS FREQUENCY [125;250;500] (kHz) 250

EMISSION PERIOD [20-50] (ms) 20

EMISSION PERIOD IN NEUTRAL [20-50] (ms) 20

BRM protocol is an eleven bit identifier protocol (2.0A)

J1939 protocol is a 29 bits identifier protocol (2.0B), remote control integrates 4 identifiers:

BJM1 Basic Joystick Message 1 for axis 1 & 2

BJM1R Basic Joystick Message 1 redundant
EJM1 Extended Joystick Message 1 for axis 3 & 4 if any 4
EJM1R Extended Joystick Message 1 redundant

789
36/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

CAN Signal Boards

Board #16:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

BJM1_PRIORITY
[0x2;0x3] 0x2
(3 MSB ID 11 bits)

0xFE
PDU_SA (Right)
[0x00-0xFF]
(8 LSB ID 11 bits) 0xFF
(Left)

Note 1: With Default values, identifier is 0x2FE.

Note 2: BRM protocol use same parameters name that J1939 protocol (BJM1, PDU_SA)

Board #17:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
STD_PGN_ID Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 1
BJM 0xFDD6 0xFDD8 0xFDDA
EJM 0xFDD7 0xFDD9 0xFDDB

SPE_BJM_PGN_ID
(For non standard)

SPE_EJM_PGN_ID
(For non standard)

790
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 37/44

CAN Signal Boards

Board #18:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

INPUT FUNCTIONS
No Function (NOF)
FUNCTION_DIO_1 DeadMan (DMA) NOF

OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
Axis 1+ Direction (D1P)
Axis 1 Direction (D1M)
Axis 1 Out of Neutral (OU1)
Axis 2+ Direction (D2P)
FUNCTION_DIO_2 Axis 2 Direction (D2M) NOF
Axis 2 Out of Neutral (OU2)
Status Indicator (STA)

FUNCTION_DI_3 NOF

FUNCTION_DI_4 NOF

INPUT FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION_DI_5 No Function (NOF) NOF
DeadMan (DMA)

FUNCTION_DI_6 NOF

FUNCTION_DI_7 NOF

Note 1: DeadMan function require additionnals settings, refer to section "Functions parameters" for furthers details.
Note 2: DIO and DI status will be transmitted on the bus in all conditions and even if no function is selected.
Note 3: Floating and DeadMan functions can be assigned to one input maximum.

Board #19:
4
Parameter Value Available Range Default

Fault Indicator (FLT)

STATUS_MODE FLT
Ready to work Indicator (RTW)

Board #20:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Permanent (PER)
DEAD_MAN_MODE PER
WatchDog (WDG)

DEAD_MAN_ TEMPO
[0-60] (s) 60
(if WatchDog mode selected)

791
38/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Safety features and guidelines of the THE5

Safety guidelines for the application of the Additional application guidelines for THE5
THE5 Power PWM
The system using the signals delivered by the remote con- Select the same supply voltage for the remote control
trols must check the consistency of the signals (Amplitude, THE5 and the solenoids which are to be connected. I. e.
Frequency) and implement the relevant corrective actions in 12 V solenoids for a 12 V application and 24 V solenoids
case of failure. for a 24 V application.
After correcting a fault, reset the remote control by switch-
When a fault is detected, the power outputs are automatically ing the power supply off.
switched off. The electrohydraulic system must be designed An emergency cut-off for the remote control power sup-
in such a manner that safe behaviour is guaranteed when ply must be provided for. Warning: when the remote con-
the command value gets equal to zero (case of translation trol power supply is switched off, the output currents are
drives). switched off without a ramp.
Do not fit free-wheel diodes in the power lines that direct-
Warning ly connect the solenoids with the THE5 Power as they are
integrated in the remote control. If the lines are interrupted
An emergency stop switch is to be provided to disconnect (e.g. by relays), then suitable protective circuitry has to be
the power supply to the electronics. This switch must be provided.
easily accessible to the operator. Safe braking must be
provided for in case of emergency stop (case of translation
drives).
Screen the electric cables connected to position sensors
(regulated power supply and proportional output). A low im-
pedance line should connect the screen with the vehicle's
ground.
Signal cables and power cables must be rooted separately
and away from each other.
In case of electric welding operations on the machine,
unplug the power supply battery as well as all plugs
connecting the electronics.
Place the electronics away from possible radio equipments,
to limit the magnetic field effect on remote control.
Hall sensors are sensitive to external magnetic fields.
Do not use the remote controls close to a magnetic field
source of frequency lower than 50 Hz and of amplitude
greater than 2 mT.
Do not use in hazardous environment.
Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at
the unit.
Solenoids must be fitted with free-wheeling diode to avoid
disturbances.
Remote controls must be switched off when starting the
engine of a mobile machine or vehicle.

792
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 39/44

Programming tool for PWM Signal, CAN and Power joysticks

Display and adjustment possibilities

All adjustment processes and display of functions, faults and
system-specific values are performed by means of a PC with
software EMToolBox 1) via the serial control panel (DSI part
number: R908250400 or R908250401).

Control panel connection

The control panel is equipped with a connector
Lumberg type RST 4.07.02M.

The machine must be equipped with one of the

following connector Lumberg:

Connector Lumberg type RKT 4.07.2M with

prolongation cable; DSI part number: R907213052.

Connector Lumberg to fix on a dashboard;

DSI part number: R907213053.

Bush terminal RKF 4.07.0,2M Nut RSKF9 Protective cap ZVF

Example of equipment to order

Diagnostic and adjustment of a joystick equipped with a Deutsch plug 12 pins:
EMToolBox software and serial control panel: DSI part number: R908250400 (1)
Connector Lumberg type RKT 4.07.2M with prolongation cable; DSI part number: R907213052 (2)
Machine plug: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: R908250513 (3)

EM ToolBox
1 2
12 V 4
rs232/isoK

1) EMToolBox software and updates are freeware.

793
40/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Pin assignment Voltage Signal

4THES5
2THES5R
Output connection on Deutsch plug 12 pins
Remote control plug designation: DT0412PACE01: 12 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: R908250513.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VBAT
2 GND
3 VCC_IN_1
4 VCC_IN_2
5 GND
DEUTSCH DT04 6 NO_CONNECTED
12PA-CE01 7 DIR_OUT_P_1
1 12
8 DIR_OUT_M_1 2 11
9 DIR_OUT_P_2 3 10
4 9
10 DIR_OUT_M_2
5 8
11 ANA_OUT_1 6 7
12 ANA_OUT_2

Symbol:
VBAT = +V battery
GND = Ground
VCC_IN_1 = 5 VDC Power supply for axis 1
VCC_IN_2 = 5 VDC Power supply for axis 2
DIR_OUT = Direction Output

794
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 41/44

Pin assignment PWM Signal

4THESW5
Output connection on Deutsch plug 12 pins
Remote control plug designation: DT0412PACE01: 12 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: R908250513.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VBAT
2 GND
3 ISOK
4 DIG_IN_5
5 DIG_IN_6
DEUTSCH DT04 6 DIG_IN_7
12PA-CE01 7 DIG_IN_OUT_1
1 12
8 DIG_IN_OUT_2 2 11
9 DIG_IN_OUT_3 3 10
4 9
10 DIG_IN_OUT_4
5 8
11 PWM_OUT_1 6 7
12 PWM_OUT_2

2THESW5R
Output connection on Deutsch plug 4 pins
Remote control plug designation: DT0404PACE01: 4 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0604SACE01; DSI part number: R908250695.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VBAT
DEUTSCH DT04 2 GND
04PA-CE01 3 PWM_OUT_1 4
4 ISOK

Symbol:
VBAT = +V batterie
GND = Ground
DIG_IN = Digital Input
DIG_IN_OUT = Digital Input / Output
PWM_OUT = PWM Output

795
42/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Pin assignment Power

Output connection on Deutsch plug 31 pins HDP 31

Machine plug designation: HDP24_24_31_SE_L017; DSI part number: R908250514.

Pin assignment plug Compatible with THE5 Potentiometric 1)

4-6-8THE5
Customer plug
(2-3-4 axis)
Type Pin Name
1 GND_POWER
2 GND_POWER
3 VBAT_POWER
4 VBAT_POWER
5 DIG_IN_5
6 SOL_OUT_P_4
7 GND_CPU
8 SOL_OUT_M_4
9 CUR_IN_4
10 DIG_IN_6
11 CUR_IN_2
12 DIG_IN_7
13 SOL_OUT_M_1
14 CUR_IN_1
15 SOL_OUT_P_1
16 CUR_IN_3
17 VCC_OUT_1
18 ANA_IN_3
19 ISOK
DEUTSCH 20 ANA_IN_4
HDP26_24_31_PE_L017
21 SOL_OUT_M_2
22 SOL_OUT_P_2
23 SOL_OUT_P_3
24 SOL_OUT_M_3
25 NO_CONNECTED
26 NO_CONNECTED
27 DIG_IN_OUT_1
28 DIG_IN_OUT_2
29 DIG_IN_OUT_3
30 DIG_IN_OUT_4
31 NO_CONNECTED

Symbol:
VBAT = +V battery VCC_OUT_1 = 5 VDC Power supply regulated
GND = Ground for external sensors (grip)
POWER = Power electronic board ANA_IN = Voltage Input for external sensor (grip)
CPU = Signal electronic board CUR_IN_2 = Return for current measurement on axis 2
DIG_IN = Digital Input SOL_OUT = Power Output for solenoid
DIG_IN_OUT = Digital Input / Output

1) Compatibility with 4THE5 Serie 1X and 4THE6: consult us.

796
RE 29881/09.10 THE5 Bosch Rexroth AG 43/44

Pin assignment CAN

4/6/8 THEC5
Output connection on Deutsch plugs 12 pins and 4 pins.
Remote control plug designation: DT0412PACE01: 12 pins.
DT0404PACE01: 4 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: R908250513
DT0604SACE01; DSI part number: R908250695.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VBAT 1 12
2 11
2 GND 3 10
3 ISOK 4 9
4 VCC_OUT_1 5 8
6 7
5 ANA_IN_3
DEUTSCH DT04 6 ANA_IN_4
12PA-CE01 7 GND
8 DIG_IN_OUT_1
9 DIG_IN_OUT_2
10 DIG_IN_OUT_3 Symbol:
11 CAN_H VBAT = +V battery
12 CAN_L GND = Ground
DIG_IN = Digital Input
1 DIG_IN_OUT_4
DIG_IN_OUT = Digital Input/Output
DEUTSCH DT04 2 DIG_IN_5
04PA-CE01 VCC_OUT_1 = 5VDC Power supply regulated
3 DIG_IN_6
for external sensors (grip)
4 DIG_IN_7 ANA_IN = Voltage Input for external sensor (grip)

2THEC5R
Output connection on Deutsch plug 8 pins.
Remote control plug designation: DT0408PACE01: 8 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0608SACE01; DSI part number: R908250593. 4

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VBAT
2 GND
3 ISOK
DEUTSCH DT04 4 DIG_IN_OUT_1
08PA-CE01 5 DIG_IN_OUT_2
6 DIG_IN_OUT_3
7 CAN_H
8 CAN_L

797
44/44 Bosch Rexroth AG THE5 RE 29881/09.10

Pin assignment CAN (Series 3X)

4/6/8 THEC5
Output connection on Deutsch plugs 12 pins and 6 pins.
Remote control plug designation: DT0412PACE01: 12 pins.
DT0406PACE01: 6 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: R908250513
DT0606SACE01; DSI part number: R908250598.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VCC_OUT_1 1 12
2 11
2 DIG_IN_OUT_1 3 10
3 DIG_IN_OUT_2 4 9
4 DIG_IN_3 5 8
6 7
5 GND
DEUTSCH DT04 6 ANA_IN_3
12PA-CE01 7 ANA_IN_4
8
9 DIG_IN_4
10 DIG_IN_5 Symbol:
11 DIG_IN_6 VBAT = +V battery
12 DIG_IN_7 GND = Ground
DIG_IN = Digital Input
1 VBAT
DIG_IN_OUT = Digital Input/Output
2 GND
VCC_OUT_1 = 5VDC Power supply regulated
DEUTSCH DT04 3 ISOK
for external sensors (grip)
06PA-CE01 4 ANA_IN = Voltage Input for external sensor (grip)
5 CAN_H
6 CAN_L

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications BP 101 tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

798
Electronic remote control RE 29896/04.09
Replaces: 04.07
1/28

for mobile application

Type EJ

Series 1X

Type 8EJ H 1)

Table of contents Features

Content Page Specially designed for mobile machines forklift truck or
Functional description, cross-section 2 tractor type.
Unit dimensions 3 Types available: PWM Signal or CAN.
Ordering details and BODAS configurations 4 Up to 4 proportional axis integrated.
Mechanical technical data 5 Large selection of ergonomic grips with various E-contacts
on / off rockers or proportional control.
Software parameters guidelines 5
The design ensures an excellent protection of electronics.
PWM signal characteristics 4
Hall effect contactless sensors.
Electrical 6, 7
Software 8 to 12
CAN bus characteristics
Electrical 13 to 15
Software 16 to 23
Safety features and guidelines of the EJ 24
Installation guidelines 24
Programming tool for PWM signal
and CAN joysticks 25
Pin assignment 26

1) Noncontractual picture

799
2/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Functional description, section

Design With deflection of the handle (1), plunger (5) pushes against
Remote controls type EJ are mainly composed of a han- return spring (8). The magnet (7) mechanically linked to the
dle (1), a fixation body or plate (2) and a cover (3) containing lever (9) of the handle (1) moves upward or downward while
the contactless sensors and electronic cards. following the operating element actuation direction. The com-
mand value generated by the sensor (4) is proportional to the
General deflection of the lever.
The main differences between types of EJ are the integrated A rubber boot (6) protects the mechanical components of the
electronic functions and the type of output signals. housing from external contamination.
The remote controls PWM Signal and CAN integrate a power
Application
supply regulation and can therefore be supplied by the vehi-
cle battery directly. Remote controls type EJ is for armrest installation and for the
remote control of mobile machines equipment (forklift truck,
The remote control CAN periodically generates a frame on
tractor). The electronics integrated in the joystick enables the
CAN bus which allows the communication with other systems.
remote control of up to 4 proportional axis if it is connected to
The remote controls PWM Signal and CAN only generate low the proportional sensors inside the grip.
power signals. The actuation of an electrohydraulic axis re-
In the PWM version, additional functionality dedicated to agri-
quires a further external electronic power interface.
cultural application, such as floating function, can be config-
Remote controls fitted with microcontrollers communicate with ured. Please consult us for more details.
the PC through ISOK interfaces.
Standard joystick BODAS EJ
Function principle
Pre-configured EJ standard configurations fitting to the
When not actuated the operating element is held in neutral Rexroth BODAS Mobile Electronics System can also be or-
position by the return springs (8). dered directly from Mobile Electronics. See ordering details
page 4 for more details.

EJ section

5
6
8 7

4
2
3

800
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 3/28

Unit dimensions (in mm)

Joystick EJ

2+

102 x 102
1- 1+

2-
113 to 116

202 189
20 20 20
20
3 (rotation axis)

235
X
2+ Maxi 2 Mini 1 Mini 1+ Maxi
100 min

102
35
300 min

70 136 53
70
78
129

2-

1- 1+

2+
4

Unit dimension in function of the grip type

Type of grip X (with straight lever)
EC2000 188
EC2000+ 197
EC4000 233

801
4/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Ordering details

EJ 1X 03 *

Number of axis Further details in clear text

2 axis =4 Plug
3 axis 1) =6 5= Deutsch sealed plugs IP67 for
4 axis 2) =8 the wiring of the grip and solenoid
Type of output no code = no plug
Signal PWM = SW Grip orientation / Machine
CAN =C 03 = Lever straight and grip towards 1
Type of controller no code = Without grip
Grip EC2000 3) =E Grip type
Grip EC4000 =H TT, ST, VT, YT, YU = Grip type E
Grip EC2000+ =I Grip type H, I, G see datasheet:
Grip EC3000+ =G RE 64547
Without lever =Z no code = Other grip
Other grip = no code

Standard BODAS EJ Configurations

(default software parameters)
4 EJ C E -1X / TT 03 5: 2 axes, CAN interface, handle
EC2000 without push buttons
4 EJ C E -1X / VT 03 5: 2 axes, CAN interface, handle
EC2000 with 2 push buttons
4 EJ C E -1X / YU 03 5: 2 axes, CAN interface, handle
EC2000 with 4 push buttons

These part numbers are to be ordered from Rexroth Mobile

Electronics Elchingen.

Note:
Standard BODAS EJ equipped with VT or YU handles feature
an inverted connector on the handle that allows to directly
plug the handle connector into one of the joystick base
connectors.

1) 6EJ with grip EC2000+ or EC4000 or EC3000+

2) 8EJ with grip EC4000
3) 4EJ only

802
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 5/28

Mechanical technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Lifetime 3 millions actuation cycles 1)

Temperature range
Storage, ambient C 40 to +80
Operation C 20 to +60
Resistance to vibrations and shocks According to CDC 381002. Consult us
Electronic protection degree IP 67
Actuation Torque Nm
Stroke start 0.6
Full stroke position 1.5
Maximum permissible at the operating 100
element with an exceptional, one-time
loading
Actuation angle in degree
On all axis 20
Weight Kg 0.9

Software Guidelines

Parameters properties

For PWM signal, print and fill pages 11 to 12.

For CAN signal, print and fill pages 21 to 23.
You will have to fill the parameters values following these rules:
Parameter Value Available Range Default

(give the names (enter your choice here) (give information (give the default value if
of parameter list) about possible values) no choice has been done)
[X-Y]
This means that you can
select a value between
X and Y, the resolution
is done with the unit.
4
[X;Y]
This means that you can
select only X or Y.

PARAMETER_NAME Function 1 Default Value and Unit

Function 2

This means that you can
select only 1 Function in the
function list 1,2
YES / NO
Select YES to have the
function active or NO to have
the function inactive

1) Life test realized with the operating torques (i.e. at full stroke position).

803
6/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Electrical technical data PWM Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Power supply V 9 to 32 VDC

Maximum current consumption mA 300
Proportional Signal
Proportional signal duty cycle %
Full stroke towards 1+ or 2+ 90 % 2.5 % 1)
Neutral 50 % 2.5 % 1)
Full stroke towards 1 or 2 10 % 2.5 % 1) (i.e. 7.5 % to 12.5 %)
PWM Signal frequency Hz 196
High voltage signal V 4 to 5
Low voltage signal V 0 to 1
Maximum sourcing current mA 20
Digital Input / Output (DIG_IN_OUT)
Characteristic Adjustable by programming
Input function connected to a switch To ensure a minimum current when switching off the
connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an internal
V bat
pull up resistance of 8.2 K.
The switch must be fitted to a 5 mA current.

Output function When the ouput is inactive, take into account the pull
up 8.2 K resistance to set the output voltage
Output function connected with a relay The relay must have a minimal current of activation of 10 mA

Output function connected with a LED The LED must have a 500 resistance in parallel to reduce
its alimentation voltage under 2 V when output is idle

Output function connected to a logical input The logical input must have a 500 resistance in parallel to
reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V when output is idle

Maximum sourcing current mA 200 (with resistive load)

Protections
Protection against polarity reversal Outputs protected between 0 and 32 V
Protection against short circuits Yes
Fuse A 2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Magnetic field according to ISO 11452 part 2 V/m 100
Current injection according to ISO 11452 part 4 mA 200
Direct electrostatic discharge kV 6
Electrostatic discharge in the air kV 8
Further data Consult us

1) The tolerance is function of the full scale range and takes into account thermal drift and lifetime.

804
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 7/28

Electrical technical data PWM Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Wiring: block diagram

S A
0 I
II M
VBAT (Pin 1) III D
FUSE EMERGENCY OFF
GND (Pin 2)
+12 VDC / +24 VDC

PWM_OUT_1 (Pin 11)

ECM
PWM_OUT_2 (Pin 12)

DIG_IN_OUT_1 (Pin 7) Low side Programmable

Input Output used as
DIG_IN_OUT_2 (Pin 8)
INPUT (GND)
DIG_IN_OUT_3 (Pin 9)

High side Programma-

ble Input Output used
as OUTPUT (VBAT)

EJSW

Programming tool: see page 25

Pin assignment: see page 26

Output characteristic
The proportional signal (%) is the ratio between
the time at high side and the time at low side

Proportional Signal 90 %
Proportional Signal
V Tperiod (% of duty cycle)
4-5 90 %

4
50 %

0 S
Proportional Signal 50 %
4-5
10 %
98 % 8 % +8 % 98 % Angle
100 % 100 %

Directional Signal
0 S
Proportional Signal 10 %
4-5
Direction Direction +

100 % 8 % +8 % 100 % Angle

0 S

805
8/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

PWM Signal Software parameters

PWM Signal Outputs

PWM Duty cycle (%)

DUTY_CYCLE_MAX

50 %

100-DUTY_CYCLE_MAX
Travel angle (%)

100 98 100
NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND

Please refer to board #1 1)

Digital Input / Output Port

SIGNAL PWM integrate 4 Digital Configurable Input Output ports and 3 Digital Not Configurable Input ports. Inputs are active
when they are connected to ground by external circuitry and inactive when disconnected from ground, pull up is done internally.
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation:

V BAT V BAT

Output Port Output Port

Inactive Active

Please refer to board #2 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

806
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 9/28

PWM Signal Software parameters

Functions parameters
1. Direction and Out of Neutral Outputs
This function works using an Output Port.
The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation.
Direction is active when the sensors position leaves the neutral dead band defined in percent of the full travel range
(NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND).

There are 6 modes:

Direction Plus on Axis 1 (D1P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 1 (D1M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Minus
Direction Plus on Axis 2 (D2P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 2 (D2M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Minus
Out Of Neutral Axis 1 (OU1): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 1
Out Of Neutral Axis 2 (OU2): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 2

2. Status Indicator Output

This function works using an Output Port.
The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max).
Connect a LED to the relevant output considering the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive.

There are 2 modes:

Error Status Indicator (FLT): This mode will lead LED indicator to light on in case of fault.
Ready to Work Indicator (RTW): This mode will light on the LED if there is no fault detected.

Please refer to board #3 1)

3. Dead Man Input

This function works using an Input port.
This function is activated when port is connected to ground.
Dead Man function allows freezing the joystick signals in neutral if the assigned input is not activated and whatever the position
sensors are. Transition will be done without ramp time.

There are 2 modes to enable the outputs signals:

Permanent: The output signals are enabled while the input stays connected to the ground.
4
WatchDog: The output signals are enabled while the input changes periodically from connected to disconnected.

Please refer to board #4 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

807
10/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

PWM Signal Software parameters

4. Floating

PWM Duty cycle (%)

FLOAT_OUTPUT
DUTY_CYCLE_MAX

50 %

100-DUTY_CYCLE_MAX
Travel angle (%)

100 98 100
NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND
FLOAT_TRIGGER

Floating allows shifting the assigned spool in fourth position. The floating function works using an Input port and is activated
when port is connected to ground (the input doesnt need to stay active after) and if the output activation is in the range
[80 %-90 %]. The float will then stay active until the axis goes out of neutral in the direction where the float has been assigned.

PWM duty cycle for the Floating Instruction, PWM duty cycle for triggering, axi(s) and direction(s) assigned to the float can be
selected in the following board.

Please refer to board #5 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

808
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 11/28

PWM Signal Boards

Board #1:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

PWM_FREQUENCY [120;124;;500] (Hz) 196

DUTY_CYCLE_MAX [80;90] (%) 90

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 10

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_2 [8-15] (%) 10

PWM_VOLTAGE_OUTPUT [5 V;VBAT] 5V

Note 1: PWM Dduty cycle is always 50 % in neutral.

Note 2: Maxi Duty Cycle is reached at 98 % of the stroke (exemple: 19.6 for a 20 joystick), this value is not adjustable.
Note 3: PWM Voltage Output is either 5 V or VBAT for high level, 0 VDC for low level.

Board #2:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

INPUT FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION_DIO_1 NOF
No Function (NOF)
Floating (FLO)
DeadMan (DMA)
FUNCTION_DIO_2 NOF
OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
Axis 1+ Direction (D1P)
Axis 1 Direction (D1M)
FUNCTION_DIO_3 Axis 1 Out of Neutral (OU1) NOF
Axis 2+ Direction (D2P)
Axis 2 Direction (D2M)
Axis 2 Out of Neutral (OU2)
FUNCTION_DIO_4 NOF
Status Indicator (STA)
4

FUNCTION_DI_5 NOF

INPUT FUNCTIONS
No Function (NOF)
FUNCTION_DI_6 NOF
Floating (FLO)
DeadMan (DMA)

FUNCTION_DI_7 NOF

Note 1: Floating, DeadMan and Status Indicator functions require additionnals parameters, refer to section
"Functions parameters" for furthers details.
Note 2: Floating and DeadMan functions can be assigned to one input maximum.

809
12/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

PWM Signal Boards

Board #3:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Fault Indicator (FLT)

STATUS_MODE FLT
Ready to work Indicator (RTW)

Board #4:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Permanent (PER)
DEAD_MAN_MODE PER
WatchDog (WDG)
DEAD_MAN_ TEMPO
[0-60] (s) 60
(if WatchDog mode selected)

Board #5:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

FLOAT_TRIGGER [80-90] (%) 80

FLOAT_OUTPUT [95;95.5;98] (%) 96.5

FLOAT_AXIS_1_PLUS YES / NO NO

FLOAT_AXIS_1_MINUS YES / NO NO

FLOAT_AXIS_2_PLUS YES / NO NO

FLOAT_AXIS_2_MINUS YES / NO NO

810
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 13/28

Electrical technical data CAN Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Power supply V 9 to 32 VDC

Maximum current consumption mA 300
Output Signal
% of 250 (1 byte encoding)
Neutral 0%
Full stroke 100 %
Bus frequency kHz 100, 125, 250, 500
Protocol (see page 15) 2.0 A or 2.0 B
Protections
Protection against polarity reversal Outputs protected between 0 and 32 V
Protection against short circuits Yes
Fuse A 2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Magnetic field according to ISO 11452 part 2 V/m 100
Current injection according to ISO 11452 part 4 mA 200
Direct electrostatic discharge kV 6
Electrostatic discharge in the air kV 8
Further data Consult us

1) We recommend a dead band of 8 %. The dead band can be set at the transmitter (CAN joystick) or at the receiver.
By default, there is no dead band on the transmitter.

811
14/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Electrical characteristics CAN Bus (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us !)

Input / Output Electrical characteristics

Digital Input (DIG_IN)

V bat Characteristic Adjustable by programming
Input function To ensure a minimum current when switching off the
connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an internal
pull up resistance

Digital Input / Output (DIG_IN_OUT)

Characteristic Adjustable by programming

V bat Input function connected to a switch To ensure a minimum current when switching off the
connected switch, each inlet is fitted with an internal
pull up resistance of 8.2 K7
The switch must be fitted to a 5 mA current.
Output function When the ouput is inactive, take into account the pull up
8.2 K7resistance to set the output voltage

Output function connected with a relay The relay must have a minimal current of activation of
10 mA

Output function connected with a LED The LED must have a 500 7 resistance in parallel
to reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V
when output is idle

Output function connected to a logical input The logical input must have a 500 7 resistance
in parallel to reduce its alimentation voltage under 2 V
when output is idle

Maximum sourcing current mA 200 (with resistive load)

Analog Inputs for axis 3 and 4

VCC_OUT_1 maximum
VCC_OUT_1 sourcing current mA 75
ANA_IN_3 (4)

Pull down resistor

on ANA_IN_3 (4) kOhms 10
GND_CPU

812
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 15/28

Electrical technical data CAN Signal (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)

Wiring: block diagram T B

1 J
JJ N
VBAT (Pin 1 DT4) JJJ E
FUSE EMERGENCY OFF
GND (Pin 2 DT4)
,23!WED!0!,35!WED

CANH (Pin 5 DT4)

ECM
CANL (Pin 6 DT4)
RC controller
ANA_IN_3 (Pin 6) Roller 2

VCC_OUT_1 (Pin 1)

ANA_IN_4 (Pin 7) Roller 3

GND (Pin 5)

DIG_IN_OUT_1 (Pin 2)
DIG_IN_OUT_2 (Pin 3)
DIG_IN_OUT_3 (Pin 4)
DIG_IN_OUT_4 (Pin 9) Low side Programmable Input
DIG_IN_5 (Pin 10) Output used as INPUT (GND)
DIG_IN_6 (Pin 11)
DIG_IN_7 (Pin 12) High side Programmable Input
Output used as OUTPUT (VBAT)
FKD

Programming tool: see page 25

Pin assignment: see page 26
Output characteristics

Proportional Signal

250 Directional Signal

Direction Direction +

98 % 8 % +8 % 98 % Angle 100 % 8 % +8 % 100 % Angle 4

100 % 100 %

Standard Protocol
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Bit 0: Axis1 Bit 0: DIG_IN_OUT_1 Bit 0: 0
Bit 1: Axis1+ Bit 1: DIG_IN_OUT_2 Bit 1: 0
Bit 2: Axis2+ Bit 2: DIG_IN_OUT_3 Bit 2: 0
Position Position Position Position Bit 3: Axis2 Bit 3: DIG_IN_OUT_4 Bit 3: 0
zero or
Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4
Bit 4: Axis3+ Bit 4: DIG_IN_5 default code
0->250 0->250 0->250 0->250
Bit 5: Axis3 Bit 5: DIG_IN_6 Bit 4-7:
counter
Bit 6: Axis4+ Bit 6: DIG_IN_7 0->16
Bit 7: Axis4 Bit 7: 0

813
16/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

CAN Signal Software parameters

CAN Signal Outputs

Output (%)
100

100
Travel angle (%)

100 98 100
NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND

Please refer to board #14 1)

Protocol
Please refer to board #15 1)

1) boards are at the end of this section.

814
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 17/28

CAN Signal Software parameters

TxPDO BRM

System Joystick

Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis Error Incre-

Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Direction
Di Value
Code mental TxPDO

Please refer to board #16 1)

Message content:

Byte bit Parameter Name

1 1-8 Joystick Axis 1 Position

2 1-8 Joystick Axis 2 Position

3 1-8 HandGrip Axis 3 Position

4 1-8 HandGrip Axis 4 Position

5 1 Axis 1 Direction [ Forward ]

2 Axis 1 Direction + [ Backward ]
3 Axis 2 Direction + [ Left ]
4 Axis 2 Direction [ Right ]
5 Axis 3 Direction + [ Up ]
6 Axis 3 Direction [ Down ]
7 Axis 4 Direction + [ Up ]
8 Axis 4 Direction [ Down ]

6 1 DIO_1 (1 = connected to ground)

4
2 DIO_2
3 DI_3
4 DI_4
5 DI_5
6 DI_6
7 DI_7

7 1-8 ZERO ( Error Code )

8 1-4 ZERO
5-8 Incremental counter
1) boards are at the end of this section.

815
18/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

CAN Signal Software parameters

TxPDO J1939

System Type 1, 2 & 3 JOYSTICK

Position Position Position Position Detent Detent Digital

1 Status 1 2 Status 2 Status 1 Status 2 Input
BJM

Position Position Position Position Detent Detent EJM

Dumy
3 Status 3 4 Status 4 Status 3 Status 4

Please refer to board #17 1)

BJM Message content:

Byte bit Parameter Name

1 1-2 Joystick Axis 2 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 2 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 2 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 2 Position

2 1 Joystick Axis 2 Position

3 1-2 Joystick Axis 1 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 1 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 1 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 1 Position

4 1 Joystick Axis 1 Position

5 1-4 Not defined

5-6 Joystick 1-Axis Detent Position Status
7-8 Joystick 2-Axis Detent Position Status

6 1-2 Joystick Button 4 pressed status

3-4 Joystick Button 3 pressed status
5-6 Joystick Button 2 pressed status
7-8 Joystick Button 1 pressed status

7 1-2 Joystick Button 8 pressed status

3-4 Joystick Button 7 pressed status
5-6 Joystick Button 6 pressed status
7-8 Joystick Button 5 pressed status
1) boards are at the end of this section.

816
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 19/28

CAN Signal Software parameters

EJM Message content:

Byte bit Parameter Name

1 1-2 Joystick Axis 3 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 3 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 3 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 3 Position

2 1 Joystick Axis 3 Position

3 1-2 Joystick Axis 4 NEUTRAL Direction Status

3-4 Joystick Axis 4 Direction + status
5-6 Joystick Axis 4 Direction status
7-8 Joystick Axis 4 Position

4 1 Joystick Axis 4 Position

5 1-8 Not defined

Not defined
Not defined
Not defined

6 1-8 Not defined

7 1-2 Not defined

3-4 Not defined
5-6 Not defined
7-8 Not defined

6 1-8 Not defined

817
20/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

CAN Signal Software parameters

Digital Input / Output Port

CAN BUS EJ integrates 2 Digital Configurable Input Output ports and 3 Digital Not Configurable Input ports. Inputs are active
when they are connected to ground by external circuitry and inactive when disconnected from ground, pull up is done internally.
Consider the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation:

V BAT V BAT

Output Port Output Port

Inactive Active

Please refer to board #18 1)

Functions parameters
1. Direction and Out of Neutral Outputs
This function works using an Output Port. The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max). Consider
the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive for external load and voltage level calculation. Direction is active
when the sensors position leaves the neutral dead band defined in percent of the full travel range (NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND).

There are 6 modes:

Direction Plus on Axis 1 (D1P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 1 (D1M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 1 Minus
Direction Plus on Axis 2 (D2P): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Plus
Direction Minus on Axis 2 (D2M): The Output Port is activated when the axis 1 goes in direction 2 Minus
Out Of Neutral Axis 1 (OU1): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 1
Out Of Neutral Axis 2 (OU2): The Output Port is activated in both directions Plus and Minus on Axis 2

2. Status Indicator Output

This function works using an Output Port. The activation switches the Output Port to battery voltage (200 mA max). Connect a
LED to the relevant output considering the internal pull up 8.2 kOhm resistors when Output is inactive.

There are 2 modes:

Error Status Indicator (FLT): This mode will lead LED indicator to light on in case of fault.
Ready to Work Indicator (RTW): This mode will light on the LED if there is no fault detected.

Please refer to board #19 1)

3. Dead Man Input

This function works using an Input port. This function is activated when port is connected to ground. Dead Man function allows
freezing the joystick signals in neutral if the assigned input is not activated and whatever the position sensors are. Transition
will be done without ramp time.

There are 2 modes to enable the outputs signals:

Permanent: The output signals are enabled while the input stays connected to the ground.
WatchDog: The output signals are enabled while the input changes periodically from connected to disconnected.

Please refer to board #20 1)

1) boards are at the end of this document.

818
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 21/28

CAN Signal Boards

Board #14:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_1 [8-15] (%) 10

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_2 [8-15] (%) 10

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_3 [8-15] (%) 14

NEUTRAL_DEAD_BAND_AXIS_4 [8-15] (%) 14

Note 1: Maxi Output % is reached at 98 % of the stroke (exemple: 19,6 for a 20 joystick), this value is not adjustable.

Board #15:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

PROTOCOL [BRM;J1939] BRM

BUS FREQUENCY [125;250;500] (kHz) 250

EMISSION PERIOD [20-50] (ms) 20

EMISSION PERIOD IN NEUTRAL [20-50] (ms) 50

BRM protocol is an eleven bit identifier protocol (2.0A)

J1939 protocol is a 29 bits identifier protocol (2.0B), remote control integrates 4 identifiers:

BJM1 Basic Joystick Message 1 for axis 1 & 2

BJM1R Basic Joystick Message 1 redundant
EJM1 Extended Joystick Message 1 for axis 3 & 4 if any 4
EJM1R Extended Joystick Message 1 redundant

819
22/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

CAN Signal Boards

Board #16:

Parameter Value Available Range (Unit) Default

BJM1_PRIORITY
[0x2;0x3] 0x2
(3 MSB ID 11 bits)

0xFE
PDU_SA (Right)
[0x00-0xFF]
(8 LSB ID 11 bits) 0xFF
(Left)

Note 1: With Default values, identifier is 0x2FE.

Note 2: BRM protocol use same parameters name that J1939 protocol (BJM1, PDU_SA)

Board #17:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
STD_PGN_ID Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 1
BJM 0xFDD6 0xFDD8 0xFDDA
EJM 0xFDD7 0xFDD9 0xFDDB

SPE_BJM_PGN_ID
(For non standard)

SPE_EJM_PGN_ID
(For non standard)

820
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 23/28

CAN Signal Boards

Board #18:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

INPUT FUNCTIONS
No Function (NOF)
FUNCTION_DIO_1 DeadMan (DMA) NOF

OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
Axis 1+ Direction (D1P)
Axis 1 Direction (D1M)
Axis 1 Out of Neutral (OU1)
Axis 2+ Direction (D2P)
FUNCTION_DIO_2 Axis 2 Direction (D2M) NOF
Axis 2 Out of Neutral (OU2)
Status Indicator (STA)

FUNCTION_DI_3 NOF

FUNCTION_DI_4 NOF

INPUT FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION_DI_5 No Function (NOF) NOF
DeadMan (DMA)

FUNCTION_DI_6 NOF

FUNCTION_DI_7 NOF

Note 1: DeadMan function require additionnals settings, refer to section "Functions parameters" for furthers details.
Note 2: DIO and DI status will be transmitted on the bus in all conditions and even if no function is selected.
Note 3: Floating and DeadMan functions can be assigned to one input maximum.

Board #19:
4
Parameter Value Available Range Default

Fault Indicator (FLT)

STATUS_MODE FLT
Ready to work Indicator (RTW)

Board #20:

Parameter Value Available Range Default

Permanent (PER)
DEAD_MAN_MODE PER
WatchDog (WDG)

DEAD_MAN_ TEMPO
[0-60] (s) 60
(if WatchDog mode selected)

821
24/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Safety features and guidelines of the EJ

Safety features of the EJ Warning

PWM Signal and CAN joysticks An emergency stop switch is to be provided to discon-
These remote controls usually integrate one sensor per axis nect the power supply to the electronics. This switch must
(main sensor). A second sensor may be added to provide be easily accessible to the operator. Safe braking must be
redundancy. provided for in case of emergency stop (case of translation
drives).
Shield the electric cables connected to position sensors
The internal 5 VDC power supply is controlled to avoid
(regulated power supply and proportional output). A low
any signal drift.
impedance line should connect the screen with the
vehicle's ground.
Optional on CAN joysticks Signal cables and power cables must be rooted separately
A hardware version can integrate the CAN joystick and away from each other.
into SIL 2 level customer systems 1) (IEC 61508). In case of electric welding operations on the machine,
unplug the power supply battery as well as all plugs
Safety guidelines for the application of the EJ connecting the electronics.
Place the electronics away from possible radio equipments,
to limit the magnetic field effect on remote control.
PWM Signal and CAN joysticks
Hall sensors are sensitive to external magnetic fields.
The system using the signals delivered by the remote
controls must check the consistency of the signals Do not use the remote controls close to a magnetic field
(Amplitude, Frequency) and implement the relevant source of frequency lower than 50 Hz and of amplitude
corrective actions in case of failure. greater than 2 mT.
Do not use in hazardous environment.
Do not direct the jet of a pressure washing unit directly at
the unit.
Solenoids must be fitted with free-wheeling diode to avoid
disturbances.
Remote controls must be switched off when starting the en-
gine of a mobile machine or vehicle.

Installation guidelines

Mounting flange area: Flatness = 0.5 mm

Screw head dimensions = 10 mm
Tightening torque for the flange fixing screws = Max. 10 Nm

Installation hole
D 45
4 x 6

R5
71 mini

43

Passage for handle cable

71 mini

Nominal diameter / fixing via 4 screws

D = 113 to 116 mm

1) Certification pending

822
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 25/28

Programming tool for PWM Signal and CAN joysticks

Display and adjustment possibilities

All adjustment processes and display of functions, faults and
system-specific values are performed by means of a PC with
software EMToolBox 1) via the serial control panel
(DSI part number: 08250400 or 08250401).

Control panel connection

The control panel is equipped with a connector Lumberg type RST 4.07.02M.
The machine must be equipped with one of the following connector Lumberg:

Connector Lumberg type RKT 4.07.2M with prolongation

cable; DSI part number: 07213052.

Connector Lumberg to fix on a dashboard;

DSI part number: 07213053.

Bush terminal RKF 4.07.0,2M Nut RSKF9 Protective cap ZVF

Example of equipment to order

Diagnostic and adjustment of a joystick equipped with a Deutsch plug 12 pins:
EMToolBox software and serial control panel: DSI part number: 08250400 (1)
Connector Lumberg type RKT 4.07.2M with prolongation cable; DSI part number: 07213052 (2)
Machine plug: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: 08250513 (3)

EM ToolBox
1 2
12 V 4
rs232/isoK

1) EMToolBox software and updates are freeware.

823
26/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Pin assignment PWM Signal

Output connection on Deutsch plug 12 pins

Remote control plug designation: DT0412PACE01: 12 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: 08250513.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VBAT 1 12
2 11
2 GND 3 10
3 ISOK 4 9
4 DIG_IN_5 5 8
6 7
5 DIG_IN_6
DEUTSCH DT04 6 DIG_IN_7
12PA-CE01 7 DIG_IN_OUT_1
Symbol:
8 DIG_IN_OUT_2
VBAT = +V batterie
9 DIG_IN_OUT_3
GND = Ground
10 DIG_IN_OUT_4
DIG_IN = Digital Input
11 PWM_OUT_1
DIG_IN_OUT = Digital Input / Output
12 PWM_OUT_2
PWM_OUT = PWM Output

Pin assignment CAN

Output connection on Deutsch plugs 12 pins and 6 pins.

Remote control plug designation: DT0412PACE01: 12 pins.
DT0406PACE01: 6 pins.
Machine plug designation: DT0612SACE01; DSI part number: 08250513
DT0606SACE01; DSI part number: 08250598.

Customer plug
Type Pin Name
1 VCC_OUT_1
2 DIG_IN_OUT_1
3 DIG_IN_OUT_2
1 12
4 DIG_IN_OUT_3 2 11
5 GND 3 10
4 9
DEUTSCH DT04 6 ANA_IN_3
5 8
12PA-CE01 7 ANA_IN_4 6 7
8
9 DIG_IN_OUT_4
10 DIG_IN_5
11 DIG_IN_6 Symbol:
12 DIG_IN_7 VBAT = +V battery
1 VBAT GND = Ground
2 GND DIG_IN = Digital Input
DEUTSCH DT04 3 ISOK DIG_IN_OUT = Digital Input / Output
06PA-CE01 4 VCC_OUT = 5VDC Power supply regulated
for external sensors (grip)
5 CAN_H
ANA_IN = Voltage Input for
6 CAN_L external sensor (grip)

824
RE 29896/04.09 EJ Bosch Rexroth AG 27/28

Notes

825
28/28 Bosch Rexroth AG EJ RE 29896/04.09

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth DSI S.A.S. This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Hydraulics BP 101 tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 91, bd Irne Joliot-Curie may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 69634 Vnissieux Cedex, France The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 52 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +33 (0) 4 78 78 52 26 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] www.boschrexroth.fr does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

826
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Steuerblcke
Power Brake Valves

Benennung
Designation Typ
Type Nenngre Datenblatt
Data sheet Seite
Page

Single-circuit power brake valve LT 05 RE 66143 829

Accumulator charging valve LT 06 RE 66191 833

Dual-circuit power brake valve LT 07 RE 66146 839

Hand brake valve LT 08 RE 66148 847

Relay valve LT 09 RE 66153 851

Single-circuit power brake valve LT 12 RE 66218 857

of compact design

Dual-circuit power brake valve LT 13 RE 66221 873

of compact design

Dual-circuit power brake valve LT 17 RE 66228 891

of compact design

Inching remotely powered brake valve LT 31 RE 66227 901

Steering brake valve LT 10 RE 66154 905

For the latest information on power brake valves, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/power-brakes
827
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

828
Single-circuit remotely powered RE 66143/08.04
Replaces: 01.03
1/4

brake valve LT 05

Data sheet

Component series 3X
Nominal braking pressure
60, 80, 100 and 125 bar
H6749

Table of contents Symbol

Contents Page
A = brake
Applications, Features 1
Symbol, Function and connections 1 DS1
Ordering code, connections 2
Technical data 2
Legal requirements and safety notes 2
Installation notes 2
Unit dimensions (with/without pedal) 3, 4
DS2
Brake pedal variants 3

Applications
P = accumulator T = tank
Earthmoving machines
Industrial trucks
Forestry and agricultural machines
Function and connections
Special vehicles
Connections
Features The valve must be connected as shown in the circuit diagram.
Small installation dimensions Port T is to be connected to a drain line (the pressure of the
drain line acts on the brakes m max. 0.5 bar). 5
Integrated maximum pressure relief function for the braking circuit
Function of the single-circuit brake valve
Braking pressure proportional to the operating force
The brake valve is a direct operated 3-way pressure reducing
Low hysteresis valve (pressure build-up: The pressure increases in relation to
Weight 2.7 kg the operating force).

829
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 05 RE 66143/08.04

Ordering code

LT 05 MK A 3X 02 M *
Further details in clear text
Component series 30 to 39 = 3X Pedal
(30 to 39: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) No code = Without pedal
Nominal braking pressure 60 bar = 060 12 = LT 19 with pedal rubber pad 1)
Nominal braking pressure 80 bar = 080 M= NBR seals, suitable for
Nominal braking pressure 100 bar = 100 mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Nominal braking pressure 125 bar = 125
Connection thread (see page 4)
1) Standard brake pedal, material no.: R900412419 02 = Metric thread

Connections
Hydraulic see also symbol on page 1 DS1: Pressure switch for activating the stoplight
A: Brake line to the wheel brakes (see pages 1 and 4)
P: Accumulator line and accumulator DS2: Pressure switch for monitoring the accumulator pressure
(diaphragm-type accumulator) (see pages 1 and 4)
T: Drain line Mechanical
Valve operation of the SBS foot brake with pedal
(see page 3)

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524;

bio-degradable hydraulic fluids on enquiry
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 ... + 80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2.8 ... 380
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the Class 20/18/15
hydraulic fluid, cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c)
Accumulator pressure, max. bar 200
Braking pressure Foot brake (SBS) bar ... 125 (for pressure stage, see ordering code)
Weight (Valve without pedal) kg 2.7

Legal requirements
A requirement that all legal stipulations have in common is that Braking systems must be approved in accordance with valid
a vehicle must be road safe in all operating conditions. The national and international regulations.
currently valid national and international regulations form the The responsibility for this lies with the vehicle manu-
basis for engineering a braking system. In addition, the braking facturer.
system must be designed in accordance with state of the art.

Safety notes
Damaged seals must be immediately replaced. Damaged valves must be repaired, even if their function is
not impaired.

Installation notes
Rubber parts must not be painted. Maximum tank pressure 0.5 bar (the tank must be mounted
Operating elements must not be directly exposed to high- above the valve!)
pressure jet cleaning. For the max. permissible degree of contamination, see tech-
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements nical data.
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating Damaged seals must be immediately replaced.
temperatures the pressure drop between hydraulic accumu- The tank pressure must not exceed the brake application
lator and brake cylinder remains low. pressure.

830
RE 66143/08.04 LT 05 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Installation drawing: with pedal (in mm)

Single-circuit remotely powered brake valve
fitted with standard brake pedal

ca.
Material no: R900412419

18
o
Angle adjustment in 5 increments:
Hole A 0
8 24
1 25 29
80
2 30

ca. 230
3 35

A
4 40
4
(Standard version)
2 3
1
Base plate
10 Rubber mat
50

100
88,3
100,8

99,2
116,3
118,9

149,5
DS1 T
A
P
DS2
19 8 Operating force, direct operated 30
33,5 33,5 1600
Operating force F in Nm

111 1400
170 1200
1000
143 4 x 9 800
Mounting hole
12 600
pattern in the base
plate 400
200

0 20 40 60 80 100 120
65

Braking pressure BR in bar m

Installation note: In the case of installation below the base
plate, take care that the movement of the pedal is not impaired by
150 accumulated dirt.
Brake pedal variants LT 19 and LT 20 (further variants on enquiry)
Type: LT 19 MKA-1X/000/00-S09 Type: LT 19 MKA-1X/000H/00-S01 Type: LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-S05
Material no.: R900571680 Material no.: R900328534 Material no.: R900517761

831
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 05 RE 66143/08.04

Unit dimensions: without pedal (in mm)

60

ca. 11
42,6
2

23

95,3 p0,4
106,2 p0,4

107,8 p0,4
123,3 p0,4
125,9 p0,4

156,5 p0,4
1
T
DS1
A
P
DS2

8 p0,2 24 p0,1 33,5 p0,4 33,5 p0,4

19 p0,2
42 p0,1

2xM8/12
5 9 +1
9,4 ,1
p0
,1 46
1 Nameplate
42 p0,1
SW41

46

2 Operating stroke
(depending on variant)
9
d2
d1
Mounting hole pattern
t2

Port d1 d2 t1 t2 P = Service brake accumulator

A M16x1,5 23 13 1 (service circuit)
t1

P M16x1,5 23 13 1 T = Tank
A = Service brake (service circuit)
T M16x1,5 23 13 1
DS1 = Stoplight pressure switch
DS1 M10x1 16 9
DS2 = Accumulator pressure pressure switch
DS2 M10x1 16 9

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specications and other
Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
Zum Eisengiesser 1 AG. Without their consent it may not be reproduced or given to third
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany parties.
Telephone +49 (0) 93 52-18 0 The data specied above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52-18 23 58 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
[email protected] application can be derived from our information. The given information
www.boschrexroth.com/brm does not release the user from the obligation of own judgement and
verication. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging

832
Accumulator charging valve LT 06 RE 66191/10.2011 1/6

Replaces: 08.2004
English

Data sheet

Component series 3X
Maximum operating pressure 200 bar
Approx. 4 bar p with a flow of 70 l/min
LT 06-3X

Table of contents Features

Content Page Simple and quick installation
Features 1 Reduced piping effort
Function 2 Small installation dimensions
Symbol, Cross-section 2 Integration into existing hydraulic systems is possible
Ordering code 3 Quickly ready-for-operation
Technical data 3 Flexible connection possibilities of accumulators
Connection possibilities for downstream consumers
General notes 4
Intended use 4
Characteristic curve 4
Unit dimensions 5

833
2/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 06 RE 66191/10.2011

Function

Accumulator charging valves or pressure shut-off valves the pressure is directed via the pilot line and pilot control
assume the function of keeping a pressure level in an to the load signal side of the pressure compensator (2).
accumulator circuit within certain limit values (cut-in This pressure compensator throttles the pump flow until the
pressure, cut-out pressure). The switching pressure pressure that builds up in the accumulator circuit overcomes
differential is approx. 18 % of the cut-off pressure. the spring force of the pressure adjustment element (1).
CAUTION! If downstream consumers (N) generate a higher The pilot control element reconnects the load signal line of
pressure than the cut-off pressure of the accumulator the pressure compensator (2) from S1 to T. The pressure
charging valve, the pressure of the accumulator circuit compensator (2) then re-directs the pump flow from P to
is raised to this level. The pressure of the downstream N and the check valve (3) closes. The charging process is
consumers (N) must be 30 % lower than the accumulator completed and the pump flow flows with a low p through
pressure (N < Accumulator pressure 30 %). the charging valve.
The valve basically consists of a pilot control with pressure Changing the pump flow over from neutral circulation to
adjustment element (1), pressure compensator (2) and accumulator charging
check valve (3). When the pressure in the accumulator circuit falls below the
Changing the pump flow over from accumulator lower switching point (cut-in point), P is connected to the
charging to neutral circulation load signal chamber of the pressure compensator (2) and
During the charging process, the pump feeds oil via the the pump flow is directed again into the accumulator circuit.
check valve (3) into the accumulator circuit. To this end,

Symbol, Cross-section

S2 3
S1
1

S1
3
T
N

P N 1

X P
2
2
1 Pressure adjustment element (factory setting) P Pump
2 Pressure compensator T Tank
3 Check valve S1 Accumulator circuit 1
S2 Accumulator circuit 2
X Load Sensing (LS)
N Downstream consumers

834
RE 66191/10.2011 LT 06 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6

Ordering code

LT 06 3X *

Further details in clear text

Component series 30 to 39 = 3X
(30 to 39: unchanged installation Sealing material
and connection dimensions) M= NBR seals, suitable for mineral oil
(HL, HLP) acc. to DIN 51524
Pressure stage of the accumulator circuit
100 bar = 100 CAUTION!
150 bar = 150 Observe sealing compatibility
185 bar = 185 of the hydraulic fluid used!
200 bar = 200 Line connections
Accumulator charging flow 02 = Metric threads acc. to DIN 3852-1
Approx. 6 l/min = B18 50 = Threads acc. to DIN ISO 6149-1
Approx. 17 l/min (Standard) = B40

Preferred standard types:

Pressure LT 06 B18 LT 06 B40
stage [bar] Part No. Part No.
150 R900455464 R900427591
200 R900586937 R900427595

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Weight kg approx. 3
Installation position upright preferred, pressure adjustment element face upwards
Ambient temperature range C 25 to +80
Coating Single-coat varnish RAL 5010

Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure in the accumulator circuit bar 200
Max. supply pressure Port P bar 200
Max. tank pressure Port T bar zero pressure to tank
Max. flow Accumulator charging l/min approx. 17 (Standard = B40)
(with approx. 4 bar p) flow P S
Pump flow P N l/min 70
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic
fluids, such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568
as well as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, on inquiry.
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75.
5

835
 4/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 06 RE 66191/10.2011

General notes

Installation notes Notes for the repair

Observe the minimum distance of 30 cm to the valve while Damaged valves must be repaired, even if their function is
cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner. not impaired.
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating
temperatures the pressure drop between hydraulic
accumulator and brake cylinder remains low.
Port T must be connected separately at zero pressure to
tank.
Ensure that the brake system is always vented.
Protect the pressure compensator from falling down while
removing the plug from port P.

Intended use

Accumulator charging valves LT 06 are hydraulic You may use the product as follows:
components and are therefore either covered by the cope Accumulator charging valves LT 06 have been developed
of the completely or the partly completed machinery in for the application in mobile working machinery
the sense of the EC machinery directive 2006/42/EC. The
component is exclusively intended to be assembled together f Comply with the technical data.
with other components to form partly completed or complete
machinery. The component may only be commissioned if it The product is only intended for professional use and not for
has been integrated in the machine for which it is designed. private use.

Characteristic curve

Pressure loss p from P N

31

27
p in bar

23

1
1 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 :1 211

Flow in l/min

836
RE 66191/10.2011 LT 06 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6

Unit dimensions (in mm)

69 35

max. 30
19

34
N
X T X 50 2
T

11
7

100
S2 S1
31

S2 S1

11
66,5

7
38

28

P P
28 36 12,5 57 4

1 Name plate
2 Fixing holes

Ports acc. to DIN 3852-1 d2 min

d1
Port d1 d2 t1 t2
t2

P, N M18x1,5 32 12 1
S1, S2 M18x1,5 32 12 1
t1

T, X M12x1,5 19 12 1

Ports S2, X are plugged by default.

837
6/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 06 RE 66191/10.2011

Spare parts

Protective cap (Color code orange) Part number: R900025379

for pressure adjustment element

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.com

838
Dual-circuit remotely powered brake valve RE 66146/07.2011 1/8

LT 07 Replaces: 10.2003
English

Data sheet

Component series 2X
Nominal braking pressure
60, 80, 100 and 120 bar
H/A 4597

Table of contents Features

Content Page Small installation dimensions
Features 1 Integrated maximum pressure limitation of the brake circuit
Function 2 Brake pressure proportional to actuation force
Symbol, Cross-section 2 Synchronisation through low hysteresis
Ordering code 3 All consumer ports on one side
Technical data 3 Optimal piping by freely swivelling fixnig flange
External brake pressure return possible
General notes 4
Ergonomic adaption of the pedal blade angle possible
Intended use 4
All pedal variations with slip resistant, removable rubber
Characteristic curves 4, 5 plates
Unit dimensions 6, 7
Brake pedal variations 8

839
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 07 RE 66146/07.2011

Function

The dual-circuit remotely powered brake valve LT 07 is a control spools (2). Firstly the control edges closes at channel
directly operated pressure relief valve in 3-way design with T, afterwards the flow from SP to BR is released in both
stepless mechanical operation. braking circuits.
It has a maximum pressure relief of secondary circuits The pressure building up in the brake lines pushes
and infinitely adjustable pressure in the secondary circuits simultaneously via the brake pressure returns (7) behind
(braking circuits) which is in proportion to the travel of the the control spool against the main compression spring (3)
operating element (4) or to the actuation travel angle of the so that the brake pressure (secondary pressure) rises in
pedal (8). proportion to the deflection of the operating element (4).
With the failure of one brake circuit the second brake circuit With the deflection of the operating element kept constant,
remains fully functional due to the mechanical contact of the control spool (2) moves into the control position and
both spools (2). The actuation force at the pedal remains holds the defined pressure in channels BR1 and BR2
unchanged. constant. Thereby the pressure in BR1 is only approx. 2 bar
higher than in BR2. The actuation force of the operating
The dual-circuit remotely powered brake valve consists
element is therefore proportional to its deflection.
mainly of the housing (1) and control spool (2), main
compression springs (3), operating element (4) and the When the main compression springs (3) are unloaded,
return springs (5) and (6). the return springs move the control spools back to initial
position. The control edges close from SP to BR and open
The valve is operated via the operating element (4). This
BR towards T. Thus closes the secondary circuits (braking
pushes the main compression springs (3) against both
circuits).

Symbol, cross-section

9 5 3 8 3 2 1 Housing
CS2 CS3
2 Control spool
N2 N3
3 Main compression springs
4 Operating element
ET2
5 Return spring
6 Return spring
7 Brake pressure return
8 Standard brake
pedal 9

TQ2 U TQ3
4 6 7 8
5
SP1 Supply operating brake circuit 1
SP2 Supply operating brake circuit 2
T Tank
BR1 Operating brake circuit 1
BR2 Operating brake circuit 2
4
M1 Brake pressure return (Operating brake circuit 1) 1)
M2 Brake pressure return (Operating brake circuit 2) 1) 2
DS1 Pressure switch (brake light) U CS2
3
1) Optionally pressure switch (brake light)
TQ2 N2
6
CS3
TQ3 3
N3
7

ET2

840
RE 66146/07.2011 LT 07 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Ordering code

LT 07 M 2X 02 M *

Type of actuation Further details in clear text

Mechanical =M
Accessories
Component series 20 to 29 = 2X No code = Without
(20 to 29: unchanged installation
12 = Fitted with a standard brake pedal
and connection dimensions)
Sealing material
Nom. braking pressure
M= NBR seals, suitable for
60 bar = 060
mineral oil (HL, HLP) acc. to DIN 51524
80 bar = 080
100 bar = 100 CAUTION!
120 bar = 120 Observe sealing compatibility
of the hydraulic fluid used!
Line connections (see table on page 6)
02 = Metric threads acc. to DIN 3852-1

Preferred standard types:

LT 07 LT 07
Braking without pedal with fitted standard
pressure pedal (12)
[bar] Part No. Part No.
060 R900900612 R900900334
080 R900907143 R900904638
100 R900905251 R900904622
120 R900907144 R900907145

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Weight Without pedal kg 4,7
With standard pedal kg 6,4
Installation position upright preferred
Ambient temperature range C 25 to +80
Coating Single-coat varnish RAL 5010

Hydraulic
Operating brake pressure, Port BR1, BR2 bar 120
max.
Supply pressure, max. Port SP1, SP2 bar 200
Tank pressure, max. Port T bar 0,5 (Tank pressure must not exceed the pressure being applied by
the brake.)
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic
fluids, such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568
as well as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, on inquiry.
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80 5
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate ofn 10 75.

841
4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 07 RE 66146/07.2011

General notes

Installation notes Notes for the repair

Rubber parts must not be painted.. Damaged valves must be repaired, even if their function is
Operating elements must not be directly exposed to not impaired.
highpressure jet cleaning.
Installation position
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating Upright preferred.
temperatures the pressure drop between hydraulic
accumulator and brake cylinder remains low.
The tank must be mounted above the brake valve LT 07
to avoid drainage of the brake valve.

Intended use

Brake vavles LT 07 are hydraulic components and are You may use the product as follows:
therefore either covered by the cope of the completely The brake valves LT 07 have been developed for the
or the partly completed machinery in the sense of the application in mobile working machinery.
EC machinery directive 2006/42/EC. The component
is exclusively intended to be assembled together with f Comply with the technical data.
other components to form partly completed or complete
machinery. The component may only be commissioned if it The product is only intended for professional use and not for
has been integrated in the machine for which it is designed. private use.

Theoretical characteristic curves

Actuation force without and with pedal according to braking pressure

Actuation force F without pedal in N

3111 611
Actuation force F with pedal in N
at 150 mm distance to swivel axis

2911 561
2711 511
2511 461
2311 411
2111 361
911 311
711 261
511 211
311 61
1 31 51 71 91 211 231

Braking pressure BR in bar

842
 RE 66146/07.2011 LT 07 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Theoretical characteristic curves (Preferred types)

Without pedal With pedal

60 bar; 1 = Force F, 2 = Braking pressure BR

Actuation force F in N

Actuation force F in N
2311 231

Br. pressure pBR in bar

Br. pressure pBR in bar

411 261
2111 211 361 236
911 91 311 211
2 2
711 71 261 86

511 51 211 61
3 3
311 31 61 36

1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : 21 22 1 3 5 7 9 21 23 25 27 29 31
Actuating stroke travel s in mm Pedal travel angle in

80 bar; 1 = Force F, 2 = Braking pressureBR

Actuation force F in N

Actuation force F in N
Br. pressure pBR in bar

Br. pressure pBR in bar

2711 271 461 286
2511 251 411 261
2311 231 361 236
2
2111 211 2
311 211
911 91
261 86
711 71
3 51 211 61
511 3
311 31 61 36
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : 21 22 23 1 3 5 7 9 21 23 25 27 29 31
Actuating stroke travel s in mm Pedal travel angle in

100 bar; 1 = Force F, 2 = Braking pressure BR

Actuation force F in N
Br. pressure pBR in bar

Br. pressure pBR in bar

Actuation force F in N

2911 291 511 311

2711 271 461 286
2511 251 411 261
2 2
2311 231
361 236
2111 211
311 211
911 91
711
3 71 261 86
3
511 51 211 61
311 31 61 36
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : 21 22 23 1 3 5 7 9 21 23 25 27 29 31
Actuating stroke travel s in mm Pedal travel angle in

120 bar; 1 = Force F, 2 = Braking pressure BR

Actuation force F in N

Actuation force F in N
Br. pressure pBR in bar

Br. pressure pBR in bar

3111 311 561 331

511 311
2711 271 461 286
2 2
411 261
2311 231
361 236
91 311 211
911 3
3 261 86 5
511 51 211 61
61 31
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : 21 22 23 1 3 5 7 9 21 23 25 27 29 31
Actuating stroke travel s in mm Pedal travel angle in

843
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 07 RE 66146/07.2011

Unit dimensions: Without pedal (in mm)

56-9
G
26

3
db/!53

db/!22
:9-7

:6-7
245-7

255-7
291-7

CS2

291-7
U
323-5

N2
CS3

TQ2
N3 TQ3

ET2
31 38 2 41 43
3: 45
:6

,2
1 Name plate 4 -2
57
!

2 Actuating stroke tavel -2

1
N9

-5
6:
3 Fixing flange
swiveling 360
53

F Actuation force

:
53
Assembly interface in base plate

Ports acc. to DIN 3852-1 :1

Port d1 d20,1 d3 t1 t2 z e4
BR1; BR2 M16x1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 0,05 e31-2
SP1; SP2 M16x1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 0,05 e2
[
T M16x1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 0,05
DS1 M12x1,5 12,4 20 0,9 11 0,1
u3,1-6
u2

M1, M2 M10x1 10,4 27 1,5 8 0,05

Ports DS1, M1 and M2 plugged by default.

844
RE 66146/07.2011 LT 07 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Unit dimensions: With standard pedal (in mm)

G 26
1
5
3:
9

31
4

db/!
91

51
db/!341

211
42
69

21

61

23
3

41
99-6
:2-6

2
248-6
238-6

284-6

CS2 U
284-6

316-6

N2
CS3
TQ2

N3 TQ3

ET2
5
41 43
31 38 281
3: 45
:6 261
254
23
1 Base plate 5y:
2 Rubber mat
3 Actuation angel
4 Distance
76
79

F Actuation force

ASSEMBLY NOTE!
When assembling below the base plate it must be taken
care that the movement of the pedal cannot be affected by Assembly interface in base plate
dirt.

845
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 07 RE 66146/07.2011

Brake pedal variations LT 19 and LT 20 (Further variants on request)

The brake valve LT 07 is optionally provided with or without pedal.

The following pedals are available:

Standard type LT 19 Type LT 19 with detent

Type LT 19 with shortened pedal
plate

9
3:

7-6
35
b

5
Type LT 20 for horizontal fitted
brake valves
3
4 2

Pedal angle :
1 Hole 1 = 25
2 Hole 2 = 30
3 Hole 3 = 35
4 Hole 4 = 40 (Standard)

NOTE!
All pedal variations are fitted with a slip resistant, removable
rubber plate by default.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Without their
consent it may not be reproduced or given to third parties.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
[email protected] Subject to change.
www.boschrexroth.de

846
Hand brake valve LT 08 RE 66148/07.09
Replaces: 07.03
1/4

Data sheet

Component series 2X
HAD 6881/02

Table of contents Features

Content Page Pipe line installation
Features 1 Integrated maximum pressure relief
Function, Symbol 2 Good fine control
Technical data 2 Mechanically operated
Unit dimensions 3
Order details 4

847
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 08 RE 66148/07.09

Function, Symbol

The hand brake valve is designed as a direct operated 3-way

pressure reducing valve and is designed for use in spring
loaded braking systems; other applications, however are also C
possible.
In position 1 (see Unit dimensions) of the hand lever the
through flow from S to B is open. The spring load braking sys-
tem is, therefore opened with the pressure applied in B. In
this position the maximum defined pressure in B is limited ac-
cording to type of the valve 25, 40, 60, 100 or 125 bar inde-
pendent of the pressure at input S.
By moving the hand lever into the detent position 2, the pres-
sure from B to T is decreased directly proportional to the trav-
el of the lever and the operating speed. The pressure at port ET
T U
B can be finely controlled with hand lever. The spring load
braking system is activated.
The operating lever is released by lightly lifting the release
ring (1).

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Supply pressure, max. bar 200

Tank pressure, max. bar 0.5
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2.8 to 380
Maximum permitted contamination level of hydraulic Class 20/18/15, we recommend for this a filter with a
fluid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) minimum retention rate of 10 75
Weight kg 3.2

848
RE 66148/07.09 LT 08 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Unit dimensions (Dimensions in mm)

69 :9
91
Qpt/!3 Qpt/!2

>
216

71
>
db/!312

2
> >
71
View Y
21-6

N9
: 72
5:-6

26
U
88-6
211-6

219-6
22:-6

T 91
C
Assembly interface
ET

24 4: 21
4 3
33
Z 2:-6 46-6

1 Release ring
Port d1 d2 t1 t2 e3
2 Connection possibility for a pressure switch e2
u3
3 Name plate S, T, B M16x1.5 24.3 12 1
02
u2

Pos. 1 Travel operation DS M12x1.5 18 12 1

Pos. 1 Brake position, detented

849
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 08 RE 66148/07.09

Order details

LT 08 MM A 2X 02 M *

Component series 20 to 29 = 2X
(20 to 29: unchanged installation Further details in clear text
and connection dimensions) Sealing material
Brake ventilation pressure M= NBR seals, suitable for
Pressure stage 25 bar = 025 mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Pressure stage 40 bar = 040 Caution!
Pressure stage 60 bar = 060 Observe sealing compatibility
Pressure stage 80 bar = 080 of the hydraulic fluid used!!
Pressure stage 100 bar = 100 Connection thread
Pressure stage 125 bar = 125 02 = Metric thread

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

850
Relay valve LT 09 RE 66153/01.2011 1/6

Replaces: RE 66152

Data sheet

Component series 2X

Maximum brake pressure 200 bar

HAD7835

Table of contents Features

Content Page Relay valves are used in vehicles with very long brake lines
Features 1 or very large brake cylinder volumes.
Function 2 The connection is directly at the axis which is to be
decelerated.
Symbol 2
The brake pressure is proportional to the control pressure.
Order details 2
Technical data 3
Characteristic curve 3
General notes 4
Intended use 4
Unit dimensions (in mm) 5
Line connections 6

851
2/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 09 | RE 66153/01.2011

Function

The hydraulic relay valve is a directly operated proportional The pressure which builds up in the brake line A
pressure reducing valve of 3-way design with hydraulic pilot. simultaneously pushes via the pilot oil drilling (5) behind the
The relay valve consists mainly of the housing (1), control spool (2) against the control pressure so that the
control spool (2), return spring (3) and bleed screw (4). brake pressure rises in proportion to the control pressure.
With the control pressure being held constant, the control
The valve is controlled via a hydraulic control pressure
spool (2) moves into the control position and holds the
in port G. This control pressure directly effects the
value set in channel A constant. When the control pressure
control spool (2). Firstly the control edge closes at port T,
decreases, the return spring closes via the control spool (2)
afterwards the flow from P to A is released.
from P to A and opens A to T, so that the braking circuit is
unloaded.

Symbol

6 2 3 5
B ET2
P Pump
T Tank
H A Operating brake
G Control pressure
DS1 Pressure switch for brake light
DS2 Pressure switch for accumulator

ET3
4 Q U

Order details

LT 09 HA 2X M *

Type of operation
Hydraulic = HA Further details given in clear text
Unit series 20 to 29 = 2X Seal material
(20 to 29: unchanged M= NBR seals, suitable for
installation and connection dimensions) mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Pressure stage Pipe connections
Details given in bar, 3-digit (max. 200 bar) 02 = Metric threads to DIN 3852-1
e.g. 150 bar = 150
50 = Connection threads to DIN ISO 6149-1

852
 RE 66153/01.2011 | LT 09 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Weight kg 3
Installation position upright, bleed screw at the top (see page 4)
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80

Hydraulic
Supply pressure, max. pP bar 250
Control pressure, max. pG bar 140
Operating brake pressure, max. pA bar 200
Tank pressure, max. pT bar 0.5
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524, other hydraulic fluids,
such as HEES (synthetic esters) according to VDMA 24568 as well
as hydraulic fluids as specified under RE 90221, on inquiry.
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2.8 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75

Characteristic curve
Operating brake pressure pA in bar

251

231

211 pA
1 Standard; ratio = 1:1
pG
91

71 2 Further ratios on inquiry.

51

31

1 31 51 71 91 211 231 251

Control pressure pG in bar

853
4/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 09 | RE 66153/01.2011

General notes

Installation notes Notes for the repair

Rubber parts must not be painted. Damaged valves must be repaired, even if their function is
Operating elements must not be directly exposed to high- not impaired.
pressure jet cleaning.
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating
temperatures the pressure drop between hydraulic
accumulator and brake cylinder remains low.
Preferrably the accumulators should be installed near the
relay valve.
The tank pressure must not exceed the brake application
pressure.
The tank must be mounted above the relay valve LT 09.

Installation position
Upright, bleed screw at the top.

Intended use

Relay valves LT 09 are hydraulic components and are You may use the product as follows::
therefore either covered by the cope of the completely The relay valves LT 09 have been developed for the
or the partly completed machinery in the sense of the application in mobile working machinery.
EC machinery directive 2006/42/EC. The component
is exclusively intended to be assembled together with f Comply with the technical data.
other components to form partly completed or complete
machinery. The component may only be commissioned if it The product is only intended for professional use and not for
has been integrated in the machine for which it is designed. private use.

854
RE 66153/01.2011 | LT 09 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6

Unit dimensions (in mm)

46-0.3 +1
ca. 24 ca. 44
G
1

42.5

95.3

107.8
106.2
125.9

123.3
156.5
A
DS1 T
A
P

DS2

8 24 4
16.5 42.6 33.5 33.5

59.4 0.1

46.1 +1
+30

9
42 0.1

-30

42 0.1 2x M8/12
2
9

Mounting hole pattern

P Pump 1 Name plate

T Tank 2 Bleed screw, alignment varies within 30relatively to
A Operating brake the housing; Tightening torque MA = 15 Nm, SW12
G Control pressure
DS1 Pressure switch for brake light
DS2 Pressure switch for accumulator

855
6/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 09 | RE 66153/01.2011

Line connections

Type: LT 09 HA-2X/ 02 Ports to DIN 3852-1

Port d1 d2 t1 t2
d2 min
P M16x1.5 23 13 1
d1
T M16x1.5 23 13 1

t2
A M16x1.5 23 13 1

t1
G M12x1.5 18 13 1

DS1 M10x1 16 9

DS2 M10x1 16 9

Type: LT 09 HA-2X/ 50 Ports to DIN ISO 6149-1

t1 t2 t3 t4 d2 min
Port d1 d2 min min +0.4 max

t4 max
d1
P M16x1.5 24 15.5 13 2.4 1.5

t3
T M16x1.5 24 15.5 13 2.4 1.5

t2
t1

A M16x1.5 24 15.5 13 2.4 1.5

G M12x1.5 19 14 11.5 2.4 1.5

Ports DS1, DS2 to DIN 3852-1 (see above), pluged by default.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set
Mobile Applications forth in it are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG.
It may not be reproduced or given to third parties without our consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-3972 from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.de

856
Single-circuit power brake valve RE 66218/05.2012
Replaces: 09.2007
1/16

of compact design English

LT 12

Data sheet

Component series 3X

Maximum braking pressure 125 bar

LT 12 H

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Advantages of a compact remotely powered braking
Features 1 system:
Function, Symbol 2 Simple and quick installation
Technical data 3 Piping is reduced to a minimum
Ordering code 4 Small space requirement
General notes 5 Integration into existing hydraulic systems is possible
Intended use 5 Quickly ready-for-operation
Fast response times
Characteristic curve 5
Sensitive metering
Circuit diagrams 6, 7
Minimum number of components
Design 8 to 10
Line connections 10 Application areas:
Unit dimensions 11 to 13 Earth moving machines
Brake pedal LT 20 14, 15 Fork lift trucks
Accessories 16 Forestry and agricultural machines
Municipal vehicles
Special vehicles
5

857
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Function

The LT 12 is a single-circuit brake valve in compact design, Hydraulic actuation:

which combines all necessary functions in one housing. With hydraulic operation, the tandem master cylinder
The function of the accumulator charging valve (1) is operated by an appropriate pedal. The pressure fluid
fed by the tank is piped to the pickup-head of the LT 12
The accumulator charging valve loads, as a priority, the
proportional to the pedal travel. The tandem master cylinder
accumulator. When the accumulator pressure falls below the
as well as the pickup-head of the LT 12 have two separate
switch-on pressure of the charging valve, the accumulators
chambers.
are loaded until the switch-off pressure is reached. The
accumulators are loaded with a flow of e.g. 17 l/min (version The pickup-spools steer in line proportional to the fed
B40). If the pump supplies more than e.g. 17 l/min, then the pressure fluid and charge the main brake spools via the
subsequent actuators are supplied with the difference. brake pressure control springs.
Note: If subsequent consumers (N) generate a higher The function of the mechanical operated parking brake/
pressure than the cut-off pressure of the accumulator auxiliary brake (4)
charging valve, the pressure of the accumulator circuit is The parking brake valve is a direct operated 3-way pressure
raised to this level. reducing valve. When the valve is actuated, the pressure
Accumulator circuit separation falls in proportion to the actuation. The valve controls the
pressure sensitively. Therefore the function auxiliary brake
The valve supplies the both braking circuits service brake
can also be operated.
(BBA) and parking brake (FBA). The accumulators S1 (BBA)
and S2 (FBA) are separated by an inverted shuttle valve The function of the electrical operated parking brake (4)
(2). If the BBA fails, the FBA will keep functional and can be The electrically switched parking brake is a 3/2-way
used as auxiliary brake. directional valve. When the valve is switched with a voltage,
The function of the single-circuit brake valve (4) then the parking brake is released with the accumulator
pressure from accumulator S2. The auxiliary brake function
Mechanical actuation:
cannot be performed.
The single-circuit brake valve LT 12 is a directly operated
3-way pressure reducing valve with continuous operation.
It comes with an infinitely variable metering of the brake
pressure in the BBA (BR1) proportional to the travel of the
actuator and to the actuating force. The maximum brake
pressure of the BBA must be set at the brake pedal (e.g.
LT 20), see page 8.

Symbol

  1 Accumulator charging valve

#3 ( ( #3
2 Shuttle valve

%4 3 Parking brake (optional)

%4
4 Single-circuit brake valve

P Pump
4
T Tank
4 N Drain or subsequent consumers
%4
BR1 Service brake (BBA)
 BR3 Parking brake (FBA)
S Accumulator line and accumulators
5
DS Pressure switch for monitoring
/
G Hydraulic operation of the service brake
 X Load Sensing (LS)
9 1

858
RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Line connections Metric threads
Weight kg approx. 10
Installation position Horizontal (preferred)
Ambient temperature range C 25 to +80
Coating Single-coat varnish RAL 5010

Hydraulic
Accumulator pressure, max. bar 200
Operating brake pressure, Service brake (BBA) bar 125
max.
Parking brake (FBA) bar 120 (proportional)
Version M
Parking brake (FBA) bar Relates to the accumulator charging pressure / depending on the
Version E accumulator charging valve
System pressure, max. bar 210
Accumulator charging Switch-off pressure bar 200
pressure, max.
Switch-on pressure bar approx. 20% below switch-off pressure
Flow, max. Accumulator charging l/min Version B40: approx. 17 l/min (Standard)
flow l/min Version B18: approx. 6 l/min
Pump flow l/min 70
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524
Biodegradable hydraulic fluids on inquiry
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75.

Electric
Type of voltage Direct current
Supply voltage V 12 DC; 24 DC
Type of protection acc. to Version K4 IP 65 with mating connector correctly mounted and locked 1)
VDE 0470-1
Version C4 IP 66 with mating connector correctly mounted and locked 1)
(DIN EN 60529)
DIN 40050-9 IP 69K with Rexroth mating connector (Mat. no. R901022127) 1)
Version K40 IP 69K with mating connector correctly mounted and locked 1)

1) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of supply and

need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.

859
4/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Ordering code

LT 12 3X 02 M *

Single-circuit-
compact Further
brake- details in
block = LT12 clear text
Type of actuation (BBA) Auxiliary equipment
Mechanical =M 16 = With
Hydraulic =H operating rod
Series 30 to 39 = 3X Sealing material
(30 to 39: unchanged instal- M= NBR seals,
lation and connection dimen- suitable for mineral oil
sions) (HL, HLP) acc. to DIN 51524
Characteristic curve CAUTION!
Linear =L Observe sealing compatibility
Progressive =P of the hydraulic fluid used!
Pressure of the service brake system Line connections
(BBA) 02 = Metric threads
40 bar = 040 Type of plug 2)
60 bar = 060
N K4 = Plug-in connector
80 bar = 080
100 bar = 100 N K40 = Deutsch plug
125 bar = 125
Type of actuation parking brake (FBA) N C4 = Junior timer, 2-pin (AMP)
Without FBA =
Mechanical =M N= Standard with
Electrically switched = E 1) manual override
Lifting pressure of parking brake (FBA) Voltage of solenoid
1) = XXX AG12 = 12 V
Without FBA = 000 AG24 = 24 V
20 bar = 020
Accumulator charging flow
40 bar = 040
B40 = Approx. 17 l/min (Standard)
60 bar = 060 B18 = ca. 6 l/min
80 bar = 080
Accumulator charging pressure
100 bar = 100
A= 100 bar
120 bar = 120
B= 120 bar
C= (Standard) 150 bar
1) With electrically switched FBA E the lifting pressure of the FBA D= 165 bar
relates to the accumulator charging pressure. Observe the
hysteresis! E= 185 bar
2) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of supply and F= 200 bar
need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.

860
 RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/16

General notes

Installation notes Notes for the repair

Rubber parts must not be painted.. Damaged valves must be repaired, even if their function is
Operating elements must not be directly exposed to high- not impaired.
pressure jet cleaning.
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating
temperatures the pressure drop between hydraulic
accumulator and brake cylinder remains low.
The tank pressure must not exceed the apply pressure of
the brake.
Ensure that the brake system is always vented.

Intended use

Brake valves LT 12 are hydraulic components and are You may use the product as follows:
therefore either covered by the cope of the completely The brake valves LT 12 have been developed for the
or the partly completed machinery in the sense of the application in mobile working machinery.
EC machinery directive 2006/42/EC. The component
is exclusively intended to be assembled together with f Comply with the technical data.
other components to form partly completed or complete
machinery. The component may only be commissioned if it The product is only intended for professional use and not for
has been integrated in the machine for which it is designed. private use.

Characteristic curve

Actuation force, service brake directly operated

(without pedal)

2000
Actuation force F in N

1600
1200
800
400

0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Braking pressure BBA in bar

861
6/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Circuit diagrams

Version LT 12 M 3X BR1

Mechanical (foot operation) DS1

Without parking brake

S1 S2
DS2

T
N

X P

G2 G1

Version LT 12 H 3X

Hydraulic (foot operation)

Without parking brake

Version LT 12 M 3X M BR3 BR1

Mechanical (foot operation) DS1

Mechanical parking brake (hand operation) DS3

S1 S2
DS2

T
N

X P

BR3 G2 G1

Version LT 12 H 3X M

Hydraulic (foot operation) DS3

Mechanical parking brake (hand operation)

862
RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/16

Circuit diagrams

Version LT 12 M 3X E
BR3 BR1
Mechanical (foot operation)
DS3 DS1
Electric parking brake

S1 S2
DS2

T
N

X P

BR3 G2 G1
Version LT 12 H 3X E
DS3
Hydraulic (foot operation)
Electric parking brake

863
8/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Design: LT 12 with mechanical operation

1 Brake pedal LT 20, see page 14, 15

2 Detent (optional)
3 Adjustment screw
4 Pedal adjustment screw
5 Changeover plate 

6 Fork head acc. to DIN 71752 1)

7 Lock nut 1)
8 Operating rod (optional)
9 Eye bolt for mechanical operating the parking brake
10 Base plate (e.g. cabin) 1)
1) Not included in the scope of supply


 


  

nmNBY
NOTE!
f Valve and pedal with operating rod must be mounted in
one line!

Adjustment instructions
Assembly Pedal (1) actuated
It is important for low friction operation that the valve and The maximum brake pressure can be adjusted, as required,
pedal are correctly aligned. When looking in the plan view via the adjustment screw (3) and then locked using the lock
the valve axis, operating rod, (8) and pedal (1) must be nut. When the pedal is released only the tank pressure must
aligned! In the side view the operating rod can have an off be applied.
set angle of up to a maximum 10 in relation to the valve. Option pedal with detent (2)
The angle and height of the pedal have a influence on the
The lock nut (7) and fork head (6) are screwed onto the
operating angle and force.
operating rod (8). The fork head is connected to the
If, due to space requirements, the control has to be fitted changeover plate (5) via the axis bolt. Move the pedal into
with a longer actuating unit then this has to be so designed the detent position. So adjust the operating rod (8) that the
that it is resistant to buckling (see actuating force). valve reaches the required maximum operating pressure.
Adjusting the pedal The pressure setting is locked using the lock nut (7).
The lock nut and fork head are screwed onto the operating Release the detent
rod (8) the fork head (6) is, after the valve and pedal have With the pedal (1) not actuated, adjust the pedal adjustment
been fitted, connected to the changeover plate (5) via the screw (4) until the smallest amount of play is achieved.
axis bolt.
Pedal (1) not actuated
The operating rod (8) is so adjusted that the play between
the ball end and the valve operator is at its minimum.
CAUTION! The valve operator must not be under tension.
The operating rod must be able to slightly move backwards
and forwards. The setting is secured via the locknut (7).

864
RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/16

Design: LT 12 with mechanical operation (Dimensions in mm)

Parking brake adjustment, version M Parking brake, version E

The parking brake is factory pre-set to the required Cannot be adjusted.
pressure. When the parking brake is not pulled then the When a voltage is applied to the solenoid (12 or 24 volts)
parking brake pressure is the factory pre-set pressure. The then the accumulator pressure is switched onto the parking
bowden cable must be so set that, in the non-actuated brake. The minimum lifting pressure relates to the switch-
condition, no pulling force is applied to the eye bolt (9). on pressure of the charging valve. If a voltage is not being
With an increase in operation (pulling) of the hand brake, applied then the outlet pressure is the same as the tank
the brake pressure falls to tank pressure. The entire force of pressure.
the spring accumulator cylinder is then applied to the wheel
brake. The bowden cable must, for this purpose, make
possible a minimum stroke of 10 mm. The holding force
relates to the application force and is a maximum of 1100
N. The bowden cable should be so fitted that low friction
operation is possible.

9 Eye bolt for operating the parking brake

 

Y






-5
DB
-5 DB 

For horizontal installation

865
10/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Design: LT 12 with hydraulic operation

NN

 

1 Brake pedal 1) (LT 20 not suitable)

2 Pedal travel 17 mm
3 LT 12 H (Example with electrical parking brake)
4 Flexible dual-circuit control lines 1) 
5 Tandem master cylinder 1)
6 Tank 1) 4 4 #3 4
1) Not included in the scope of supply
#3
For actuation, we recommend the tandem master cylinder
( (
MH17861.2.1 of company FTE Automotive (Ebern).
#3
The swept volume of the transmitter cylinder and the volume
of the LT 13 H pickup-head are harmonized. 5
1 /
With failure of one control line (4) the double pedal travel
is necessary for the tandem master cylinder, to reach the
brake pressure.


Line connections

Port d1 d2 t1 t2 Designation

P Pump
M18x1.5 28 12 1.5
N Subsequent consumers

T Tank
E
BR1 Service brake
E
BR3 M16x1.5 26 12 1 Parking brake
U

S1 Accumulator service brake

S2 Accumulator parking brake
U

G1, G2 M12x1.5 20 12 1 Hydraulic actuation of service brake

X M12x1.5 18 12 1 Load Sensing (LS)

DS1 Pressure switch brake light

M12x1.5 18 12 0.5
DS3 Pressure switch parking brake

DS2 M10x1 6 Pressure switch accumulator pressure

866
RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/16

Unit dimensions LT 12 (Dimensions in mm)

Y
Y

4 #3 4
%4 






%4





#3


5
9


1 /


%4 
 


 

4 4 #3

11





 
  



1) Version with pressure switch (optional)

867
12/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Unit dimensions Actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version LT 12 M 3X M

  4 #3 4

m m


#3



5
 

1 /

 

Base plate

m m


.
Version LT 12 M 3X E 2) Version with operating rod
3) Maximum stroke
4) Manual override

4 #3 4


m m

#3
 

5
 

1 /

 



Base plate
m m


.

868
RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/16

Unit dimensions Actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version LT 12 H 3X E

4 #3 4


( (


#3

1 /


 
 

4) Manual override

ca. 47

869
14/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Brake pedal LT 20 Standard version (Dimensions in mm)

Standard version
LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-
Material no. R900412420


 
 


m

 

 



B C






m


 m





 


Recommended connection interface in the base plate

1 Operating angle approx. 20
2 Setting angle may be

adjusted in 5 increments



Hole
1 25

Y
2 30
3 35



n

4 40 2)


1) Minimum dimensions in the base plate for

installing the pedals n
2) Standard version B C

870
 RE 66218/05.2012 LT 12 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/16

Brake pedal variants LT 20 Versions for mechanical actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version with detent hook Version with the operating rod to the front
LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-SO1 LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-SO2
Material no. R900328536 Material no. R900412421

 
   
 

 









m

m
m  
m
  
DB 
DB

Version with shortened foot plate

LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-SO9
Material no. R901056192

 
 
 


871
16/16 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 12 RE 66218/05.2012

Accessories

Material no.
Pressure switch DS1 Brake light 5 bar R961007359
DS2 Accumulator pressure 100 bar R900014525
Accumulator pressure 115 bar R900026566
DS3 Parking brake 25 bar R961007360
Pedal LT 20 Standard version R900412420
Version with detent hook R900328536
Version with the operating rod to the front R900412421
Version with shortened foot plate R901056192

Mating connectors see data sheet RE 08006.

Rexroth recommends the use of the following components:

Tandem cylinder MH17861.2.1 of company FTE Automotive, Ebern
Bowden cable Company MFB GmbH, Mhlheim a. d. Ruhr
(remote park brake operation)
Fork head Connecting the parking brake axis , fork head acc. to
DIN 71752 G8 x 16/32 Not available from
Rexroth!
Connecting the service brake axis , fork head acc. to
DIN 71752 G10 x 20/40
Accumulator NOTE:
For brake accumulators use ECO membranes
(for extended temperature range!)

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.com

872
Dual-circuit power brake valve RE 66221/06.2012
Replaces: 11.2011
1/18

of compact design English

LT 13

Data sheet

Component series 3X

Maximum braking pressure 125 bar

LT 13 H

Table of contents Features

Content Page Advantages of a compact remotely powered braking
Features 1 system:
Function, Symbol 2 Simple and quick installation
Technical data 3 Piping is reduced to a minimum
Ordering code 4 Small space requirement
General notes 5 Integration into existing hydraulic systems is possible
Intended use 5 Quickly ready-for-operation
Fast response times
Characteristic curve 5
Sensitive metering
Circuit diagrams 6 to 8
Minimum number of components
Design 9 to 11
Line connections 11 Application areas:
Unit dimensions 12 to 15 Earth moving machines
Brake pedal LT 20 16, 17 Fork lift trucks
Accessories 18 Forestry and agricultural machines
Municipal vehicles
Special vehicles
5

873
2/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Function

The LT 13 is a dual-circuit brake valve in compact design, With hydraulic operation, the tandem master cylinder
which combines all necessary functions in one housing. is operated by an appropriate pedal. The pressure fluid
The function of the accumulator charging valve (1) feeded by the tank is piped to the pickup-head of the LT 13
proportional to the pedal travel. The tandem master cylinder
The accumulator charging valve loads, as a priority, the
as well as the pickup-head of the LT 13 have two separate
accumulator. When the accumulator pressure falls below the
chambers.
switch-on pressure of the charging valve, the accumulators
are loaded until the switch-off pressure is reached. The The pickup-spools steer in line proportional to the feeded
accumulators are loaded with a flow of e.g. 17 l/min (version pressure fluid and charge the main brake spools via the
B40). If the pump supplies more than e.g. 17 l/min, then the brake pressure control springs.
subsequent actuators are supplied with the difference. The function of the mechanical operated parking brake/
Note: If subsequent consumers (N) generate a higher auxiliary brake (3)
pressure than the cut-off pressure of the accumulator The parking brake valve is a direct operated 3-way pressure
charging valve, the pressure of the accumulator circuit is reducing valve. When the valve is actuated, the pressure
raised to this level. falls in proportion to the actuation. The valve controls the
Circuit separation pressure sensitively. Therefore the function auxiliary brake
can also be operated.
The valve supplies two separate braking circuits.
These are separated by an inverted shuttle valve (2). The function of the electrical operated parking brake (3)
The function of the dual-circuit brake valve The electrically switched parking brake is a 3/2-way
directional valve. When the valve is switched with a voltage,
The dual-circuit brake valve comprises of two tandem
then the parking brake is released with the accumulator
design 3-way pressure reducing valves (pressure increase:
pressure from accumulator S3. The auxiliary brake function
the pressure increases in relation to the actuating force).
cannot be performed.
The valve of the 1st circuit (4.1) is directly operated. The
pressure of the 2nd brake circuit (4.2) is controlled by the 1st
brake valve. If the hydraulic supply to the 1st brake circuit
fails, then the 2nd brake circuit is directly actuated.

Symbol

3 4.1 4.2 1 Accumulator charging valve

BR3 G1 G2 BR1 BR2
2 Shuttle valve
3 Parking brake (optional)
DS3 DS1
4 Dual-circuit brake valve

S3
P Pump
T Tank
S1 S2 N Drain or subsequent consumers
DS2
BR1 Service brake (BBA 1st brake circuit)
2 BR2 Service brake (BBA 2nd brake circuit)
BR3 Parking brake (FBA)
T
S Accumulator line and accumulators
N
DS Pressure switch for monitoring
1 G Hydraulic operation of the service brake
(alternative)
X P
X Load Sensing (LS)

874
RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/18

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Line connections Metric threads
Weight kg 8.5
Installation position Horizontal (preferred)
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Coating Single-coat varnish RAL 5010

Hydraulic
Accumulator pressure, max. bar 200
Operating brake pressure, Service brake (BBA) bar 125
max.
Parking brake (FBA) bar 120 (proportional)
Version M
Parking brake (FBA) bar Relates to the accumulator charging pressure / depending on the
Version E accumulator charging valve
Parking brake (FBA) bar 120
Version R
Pressure at port S3, max. Parking brake (FBA) bar 210
Version P
System pressure, max. bar 210
Accumulator charging Switch-off pressure bar 200
pressure, max. (Standard)
Switch-onpressure bar approx. 20% below switch-off pressure
Flow, max. Accumulator charging l/min approx. 17 l/min (Standard) B40
flow l/min approx. 6 l/min B18
Pump flow l/min 70
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) according to DIN 51524
Bio-degradable hydraulic fluids on inquiry
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 380
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 10 75.

Electric
Type of voltage Direct current
Supply voltage V 12 DC; 24 DC
Type of protection acc. to Version K4 IP 65 with mating connector correctly mounted and locked 1)
VDE 0470-1
Version C4 IP 66 with mating connector correctly mounted and locked 1)
(DIN EN 60529)
DIN 40050-9 IP 69K with Rexroth mating connector (Mat. no. R901022127) 1)
Version K40 IP 69K with mating connector correctly mounted and locked 1)

1) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of supply and

need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.

875
4/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Ordering code

LT 13 3X 02 M *

Dual-circuit-
compact Further
brake- details in
block = LT13 clear text
Type of actuation (BBA) Auxiliary equipment
Mechanical =M 16 = With
Hydraulic =H operating rod
Series 30 to 39 = 3X Sealing material
(30 to 39: unchanged installati- M= NBR seals,
on and connection dimensions) suitable for mineral oil
(HL, HLP) acc. to DIN 51524
Characteristic curve
Linear =L CAUTION!
Progressive =P Observe sealing compatibility
of the hydraulic fluid used!
Pressure of the service brake system
(BBA) Line connections
40 bar = 040 02 = Metric threads
60 bar = 060 19 = UNF threads
80 bar = 080 Type of plug 3)
100 bar = 100 N K4 = Plug-in connector
125 bar = 125
Type of actuation parking brake (FBA) N K40 = Deutsch plug
Without FBA =
Mechanical =M N C4 = Junior timer, 2-pin (AMP)
Electrically switched = E 1)
Electrically switched, reduced =R N= Standard with
Electrically switched with manual override
external pressure supply = P 2)
Voltage of solenoid
Lifting pressure of parking brake (FBA) AG12 = 12 V
1); 2) = XXX AG24 = 24 V
Without FBA = 000
Accumulator charging flow
20 bar = 020
B40 = Approx. 17 l/min (Standard)
40 bar = 040 B18 = ca. 6 l/min
60 bar = 060
Accumulator charging pressure
80 bar = 080
A= 100 bar
100 bar = 100
B= 120 bar
120 bar = 120
C= (Standard) 150 bar
D= 165 bar
1) With electrically switched FBA E the lifting pressure of the FBA E= 185 bar
relates to the accumulator charging pressure. Observe the
hysteresis! F= 200 bar
2) With external pressure supply of the FBA P the lifting pressure of
the FBA relates to the supplied pressure.
3) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of supply and
need to be ordered separately, see data sheet RE 08006.

876
 RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 5/18

General notes

Installation notes Notes for the repair

Rubber parts must not be painted.. Damaged valves must be repaired, even if their function is
Operating elements must not be directly exposed to high- not impaired.
pressure jet cleaning.
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating
temperatures the pressure drop between hydraulic
accumulator and brake cylinder remains low.
The tank pressure must not exceed the apply pressure of
the brake.
Ensure that the brake system is always vented.

Intended use

Brake vavles LT 13 are hydraulic components and are You may use the product as follows:
therefore either covered by the cope of the completely The brake valves LT 13 have been developed for the
or the partly completed machinery in the sense of the application in mobile working machinery.
EC machinery directive 2006/42/EC. The component
is exclusively intended to be assembled together with f Comply with the technical data.
other components to form partly completed or complete
machinery. The component may only be commissioned if it The product is only intended for professional use and not for
has been integrated in the machine for which it is designed. private use.

Characteristic curve

Actuation force, service brake directly operated

(without pedal)

2000
Actuation force F in N

1600
1200
800
400

0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Braking pressure BBA in bar

877
6/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Circuit diagrams

Version LT 13 M 3X CS2 CS3

mechanical (foot operation) ET2

without parking brake

T2 T3
ET3

U
O

Y Q

H3 H2
Version LT 13 H 3X

hydraulic (foot operation)

without parking brake

Version LT 13 M 3X M CS4 CS2 CS3

mechanical (foot operation) ET2

mechanical parking brake (hand operation) ET4

T4

T2 T3
ET3

U
O

Y Q

CS4 H3 H2
Version LT 13 H 3X M

hydraulic (foot operation) ET4

mechanical parking brake (hand operation)
T4

878
RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 7/18

Circuit diagrams

Version LT 13 M 3X E CS4 CS2 CS3

mechanical (foot operation) ET4 ET2

electric parking brake

T4

T2 T3
ET3

U
O

Y Q

CS4 H3 H2
Version LT 13 H 3X E
ET4
hydraulic (foot operation)
electric parking brake
T4

Version LT 13 M 3X P CS4 CS2 CS3

mechanical (foot operation) ET4 ET2

electric parking brake
pilot oil port
T4

T2 T3
ET3

U
O

Y Q

CS4 H3 H2
Version LT 13 H 3X P
ET4 5
hydraulic (foot operation)
electric parking brake
pilot oil port T4

879
8/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Circuit diagrams

Version LT 13 M 3X R CS4 CS2 CS3

mechanical (foot operation) ET4

electric parking brake, reduced ET2

T4

T2 T3
ET3

U
O

Y Q

CS4 H3 H2
Version LT 13 H 3X R
ET4
hydraulic (foot operation)
electric parking brake, reduce

T4

880
RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 9/18

Design: LT 13 with mechanical operation

1 Brake pedal LT 20, see page 16, 17

2 Detent (optional)
3 Adjustment screw
4 Pedal adjustment screw
5 Changeover plate 

6 Fork head acc. to DIN 71752 1)

7 Lock nut 1)
8 Operating rod (optional)
9 Eye bolt for mechanical operating the parking brake
10 Base plate (e.g. cabin) 1)
1) Not included in the scope of supply


 


  

nmNBY
NOTE!
f Valve and pedal with operating rod must be mounted in
one line!

Adjustment instructions
Assembly Pedal (1) actuated
It is important for low friction operation that the valve and The maximum brake pressure can be adjusted, as required,
pedal are correctly aligned. When looking in the plan view via the adjustment screw (3) and then locked using the lock
the valve axis, operating rod, (8) and pedal (1) must be nut. When the pedal is released only the tank pressure must
aligned! In the side view the operating rod can have an off be applied.
set angle of up to a maximum 10 in relation to the valve. Option pedal with detent (2)
The angle and height of the pedal have a influence on the
The lock nut (7) and fork head (6) are screwed onto the
operating angle and force.
operating rod (8). The fork head is connected to the
If, due to space requirements, the control has to be fitted changeover plate (5) via the axis bolt. Move the pedal into
with a longer actuating unit then this has to be so designed the detent position. So adjust the operating rod (8) that the
that it is resistant to buckling (see actuating force). valve reaches the required maximum operating pressure.
Adjusting the pedal The pressure setting is locked using the lock nut (7).
The lock nut and fork head are screwed onto the operating Release the detent
rod (8) the fork head (6) is, after the valve and pedal have With the pedal (1) unactuated, adjust the pedal adjustment
been fitted, connected to the changeover plate (5) via the screw (4) until the smallest amount of play is achieved.
axis bolt.
Pedal (1) unactuated
The operating rod (8) is so adjusted that the play between
the ball end and the valve operator is at its minimum. 5
CAUTION! The valve operator must not be under tension.
The operating rod must be able to slightly move backwards
and forwards. The setting is secured via the locknut (7).

881
10/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Design: LT 13 with mechanical operation (Dimensions in mm)

Parking brake adjustment, version M Parking brake, version E

The parking brake is factory pre-set to the required Cannot be adjusted.
pressure. When the parking brake is not pulled then the When a voltage is applied to the solenoid (12 or 24 volts)
parking brake pressure is the factory pre-set pressure. then the accumulator pressure is switched onto the parking
The bowden cable must be so set that, in the unactuated brake. The minimum lifting pressure relates to the switch-
condition, no pulling force is applied to the eye bolt (9). on pressure of the charging valve. If a voltage is not being
With an increase in operation (pulling) of the hand brake, applied then the outlet pressure is the same as the tank
the brake pressure falls to tank pressure. The entire force of pressure.
the spring accumulator cylinder is then applied to the wheel Parking brake, version R
brake. The bowden cable must, for this purpose, make
When a voltage is applied to the solenoid (12 or 24 volts)
possible a minimum stroke of 10 mm. The holding force
then the adjusted pressure is switched onto the parking
relates to the application force and is a maximum of 1100
pressure. If a voltage is not being applied then the outlet
N. The bowden cable should be so fitted that low friction
pressure is the same as the tank pressure.
operation is possible.

9 Eye bolt for operating the parking brake

218/6 :
36/6

76
:5/6
62

MU!31
db/!54

MU!24 db/!:3 261

for horizontal installation

882
RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 11/18

Design: LT 13 with hydraulic operation

NN

 

1 Brake pedal 1) (LT 20 not suitable)

2 Pedal travel 17 mm
3 LT 13 H (Example with electrical parking brake)
4 Flexible dual-circuit control lines 1) 
5 Tandem master cylinder 1)
6 Tank 1) 4 4 #3 4
1) Not included in the scope of supply
#3
For actuation, we recommend the tandem master cylinder
( (
MH17861.2.1 of company FTE Automotive (Ebern).
#3
The swept volume of the transmitter cylinder and the volume
of the LT 13 H pickup-head are harmonized. 5
1 /
With failure of one control line (4) the double pedal travel
is necessary for the tandem master cylinder, to reach the
brake pressure.


Line connections

Port d1 d2 t1 t2 Designation

P Pump
M18x1.5 28 12 1.5
N Subsequent consumers

T Tank
d2
BR1, BR2 Service brake
d1
BR3 M16x1.5 26 12 1 Parking brake
t2

S1, S2 Accumulator service brake

S3 Accumulator parking brake
t1

G1, G2 M12x1.5 20 12 1 Hydraulic actuation of service brake

X M12x1.5 18 12 1 Load Sensing (LS) 5

DS1 Pressure switch brake light
M12x1.5 18 12 0.5
DS3 Pressure switch parking brake

DS2 M10x1 6 Pressure switch accumulator pressure

883
12/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Unit dimensions LT 13 (Dimensions in mm)

4!y!26
4!y!:/3

T3 T4 CS4 T2

ET4 2*
:5/6

CS3
78/6

266
54/6

ET2 2*

39/6

36/6
CS2

1/6
U
Y
211!2*

Q O

ET3 2* 32 82
6:
:4
218/6
288/4 !2*

T3 T4 T2 CS4
239
22

42/6
59/6
83

9 34
!2*
3: 83/5
54
1) :2
Version with pressure switch (optional)

884
RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 13/18

Unit dimensions Actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version LT 13 M 3X M

9 2: T3 T4 CS4 T2

CS3

21 21
234*

CS2
46 3*
U
23 4*
Q O

352/7 252!3*

Base plate

21 21
8/8

N21 3*
Version LT 13 M 3X E 2) Version with operating rod
3) Maximum stroke
LT 13 M 3X P 4) Manual override

T3 T4 CS4 T2
5*

CS3
21 21

CS2
46 3*
U
23 4*
Q O

248/6 252!3*
313

Base plate
21 21

5
N213*

885
14/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Unit dimensions Actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version LT 13 H 3X E

LT 13 H 3X P

S2 S3 BR3 S1
4)
G1 G2

BR2

39
BR1

P N

118
137.5 146
202 158

ca. 47

4) Manual override

886
RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 15/18

Unit dimensions Actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version LT 13 H 3X R

96

5)

S2 S3 BR3 S1
G1 G2

BR2

39
BR1

P N

118
146
175.5 158

ca. 47

5) Depending on valve version with plug type C4 or K40

887
16/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Brake pedal LT 20 Standard for mechanical actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Standard version
LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-
Material no. R900412420


 
 


m

 

 



B C






m


 m





 


Recommended connection interface in the base plate

1 Operating angle approx. 20
2 Setting angle may be

adjusted in 5 increments



Hole
1 25

Y
2 30
3 35



n

4 40 2)


1) Minimum dimensions in the base plate for

installing the pedals n
2) Standard version B C

888
 RE 66221/06.2012 LT 13 Bosch Rexroth AG 17/18

Brake pedal variants LT 20 Versions for mechanical actuation (Dimensions in mm)

Version with detent hook Version with the operating rod to the front
LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-SO1 LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-SO2
Material no. R900328536 Material no. R900412421

 
   
 

 









m

m
m  
m
  
DB 
DB

Version with shortened foot plate

LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-SO9
Material no. R901056192

 
 
 


889
18/18 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 13 RE 66221/06.2012

Accessories

Material no.
Pressure switch DS1 Brake light 5 bar R961007359
DS2 Accumulator pressure 100 bar R900014525
Accumulator pressure 115 bar R900026566
DS3 Parking brake 25 bar R961007360
Pedal LT 20 Standard version R900412420
Version with detent hook R900328536
Version with the operating rod to the front R900412421
Version with shortened foot plate R901056192

Mating connectors see data sheet RE 08006.

Rexroth recommends the use of the following components:

Tandem cylinder MH17861.2.1 of company FTE Automotive, Ebern
Bowden cable Company MFB GmbH, Mhlheim a. d. Ruhr
(remote park brake operation)
Fork head Connecting the parking brake axis , fork head acc. to
DIN 71752 G8 x 16/32 Not available from
Rexroth!
Connecting the service brake axis , fork head acc. to
DIN 71752 G10 x 20/40
Accumulator NOTE:
For brake accumulators use ECO membranes
(for extended temperature range!)

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.com

890
Hydraulic remotely powered RE 66228/04.09
Replaces: 05.08
1/10

brake valve of compact design

LT 17

Data sheet

Component series 4X
Brake pressures 40; 60; 80; 100; 125 bar
H7110

Overview of contents Features

Contents Page Hydraulic remotely powered braking systems are used in:
Features 1 Earth moving equipment Material handling vehicles
Ordering details 2 Forestry and agricultural Special vehicles
Function 3 machines
Legal requirements 3 The accumulator loading valve and the 2-circuit brake valve
arecombined to form the compact brake valve LT17.
Installation guidelines 3
Circuit 4 The advantages of the compact brake valve are:
Technical data 5 Simple and quick assembly
Actuating forces at the lever 5 Piping reduced to a minimum
Unit dimensions Standard version MFA 6 to 9 Low space requirement
Table unit dimensions 10 Integration into existing hydraulic systems is possible
Pressure switch (Accessory 14) 10 Integrated actuation pedal
Direct connection of the pressure accumulator is possible
(separate accumulator block is not required)
Connection facility for separate parking brake valve
Optional electrical on/off parking brake valve
Quickly ready for operation
5
Short response time
Sensitive metering
Minimum number of components
Low in maintenance

891
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LT17 RE 66228/04.09

Ordering code

LT 17 4X FOE M *

Remotely powered brake

valve
Further detail
Actuation
in clear text
Foot pedal = MFA
Foot pedal, = MFEA Accessories
electrical parking brake 14 = With pressure
switch
Component series
Component series 40 to 49 Seals
(40 to 49: unchanged installation M= NBR seals, suitable
and connection dimensions) = 4X for mineral oil (HL, HLP)
Max. operating brake pressure to DIN 51524
40 bar = 040 Connection threads
60 bar = 060 02 = Metric thread
80 bar = 080 40 = Metric thread, reduced
100 bar = 100 Switching solenoid for parking brake (MFEA)
Loading function set to 150 bar AG12C4 = 12 Volt solenoid
125 bar = 125 AG24C4 = 24 Volt solenoid
Loading function set to 210 bar both with plug-in connector
Please consult us for other settings Check valve
Parking brake system nominal pressure (MFEA) No code = Without check valve
Loading function set to 150 bar = 150 R= With check valve
Loading function set to 210 bar = 210 (optional with type MFA - connection S3)
Please consult us for other settings R= With check valve (standard with
Accumulator loading flow (standard with type MFEA - connection S3)
Approx. 4,5 l/min (standard B18) = No code
Approx. 17 l/min = B40

892
RE 66228/04.09 LT17 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Function, legal requirements, installation guidelines

The valve is connected immediately downstream of the pump. Legal requirements

Via an orifice approx. 4.5 l/min are made available to the in- The general content of all legal regulations is the demand that
tegrated accumulator loading valve, the remaining flow is a vehicle must be road-safe in all operating conditions. The
passed on to the subsequent actuators via port N (e.g. steer- current valid national and international regulations are the ba-
ing). sis when projecting a braking system. Furthermore, the brak-
When the loading pressure of 150 bar is reached, the en- ing system must correspond to the current level of technol-
tire flow is passed to port N. If the accumulator pressure falls ogy.
18% below the switch-off pressure then the accumulator load- Braking systems must be tested to the valid national and in-
ing process is repeated. The brake circuits are separated by ternational regulations.
check valves.
The responsibility lies with the vehicle manufacturer.
Note:
If downstream consumers (N) generate a higher pressure Installation guidelines
than the cut-off pressure of the accumulator charging valve, Rubber parts must not be painted
the pressure of the accumulator circuit is raised to this level. Actuating elements must not be subjected to direct high
Function of the 2-circuit brake valve pressure cleaning.
The 2-circuit brake valve comprises of 2 tandem 3-way pres- Damaged seals must be immediately replaced.
sure reducing valves (pressure increase: the pressure in- The cross-sections of the hydraulic transfer elements
creases in relation to the actuation force). The valve con- (pipes, hoses) are to be so selected, that at low tempera-
tained within the first brake circuit is directly actuated. The tures the pressure drop between the hydraulic accumulator
pressure of the second brake circuit is controlled by the first and brake cylinder remains low.
brake valve. If the hydraulic supply to the first brake circuit
The tank pressure must not exceed the pressure at which
fails then the second brake circuit is directly actuated.
the brakes are applied.
Function of the parking brake system (FBA)
When fitted below the base plate, care must be taken to
The parking brake is applied via a spring accumulator cylin- ensure that the movement of the pedal cannot be affected
der. by contamination.
Version MFA The foot mat must be so designed that there is always suffi-
A hydraulic parking brake valve can be connected to port S3 cient free space when the pedal is not actuated.
for loading an FBA. Please take into account when applying the remotely pow-
Version MFEA ered brake valve the relevant social insurance for occupa-
When the electrical parking brake valve is switched to re- tional accidents or TV requirements!
lease, the pressure fluid flows from the hydraulic accumu-
lator into the spring accumulator cylinder and releases the
parking brake.

893
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LT17 RE 66228/04.09

Circuit version MFA and MFEA

Version MFA BR1 BR2 M2

DS1

S1

S2
DS2

S3
Option

P
Version MFEA
BR3 BR1 BR2 M2
DS1

S3

S1 S2

DS2 BR1 = Operating brake (brake circuit I)

BR2 = Operating brake (brake circuit II)
BR3 = Parking brake
DS1 = Brake light pressure switch
T DS2 = Accumulator pressure switch
S1 = Operating brake accumulator (operating
cicuit I)
S2 = Operating brake accumulator (operating
N circuit II)
S3 = Parking brake accumulator (for MFEA)
P = Pump
T = Tank
N = Subsequent actuators
P
M2 = Brake light pressure switch (alternative to
DS1)

894
5/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LT17 RE 66228/04.09

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Installation Optional
Weight kg 11,5

Hydraulic
Max. nominal pressure bar 40; 60; 80; 100; 125
Max. pump pressure bar 210
Max. flow PS l/min Approx. 4,5 standard (B18) - approx. 17 l/min (B40)
PN l/min 70
Max. actuation volume per brake circuit cm3 60 (with the accumulator fitted)
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 380
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the class 20/18/15
hydraulic fluid, cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c) We, therefore, recommend a filter with a minimum retention
rate of 10 75.

Electrical 1) (version .. MFEA ..)

Power consumption at 20 C W 14,4
Duty % 100
Protection to DIN 40050 IP6K5

1) For futher details see catalogue sheet RE 58007

Actuating force at lever 150 mm, 100 bar (standard)

F 500 100
Brake pressure pBR in bar
Actuating force F in N

15 400 80
0

300 60

200 40

100 20

0
0 4 8 12 16 18 20
Actuating angle in degrees
Force
Pressure
5

895
 RE 66228/04.09 LT17 Bosch Rexroth AG 6/10

Unit dimensions: Standard version MFA (Dimensions in mm)

4 1

16
+
6
0
31 29

2
,5
54

54
22

34,5
60,5
DS2

73
78

P Option
135,6

128
166,65

BR3
N
212,65

Y Z
S1 56 8
M2
6

DS1 with 30 28
version 14 65,5 50
(Option - on request) 80

57 DS1 with
version 14 (standard) Cut-out in the base plate

58
"X" 2 32
R1 91
4 x 9
60p0,2
72

R5
R5

52

7
50

R1
34,4 28,9

60

15

R5
47p0,2

R5
37

R5 R
52
59

R5 5

44
4 x 9,2 31
103 5
158 42 26p0,2 (77)
103p0,2

896
7/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LT17 RE 66228/04.09

Unit dimensions: Standard version MFEA (Dimensions in mm)

"Y" "Z"
65,3

75
78
102

BR1
110,5

DS2 S3
S2
213

S1 54 8
BR2 T M2
Dimensions for threaded version 40
DS1
45 4
81
98
138

1 Pedal deflection
2 Setting angle, adjustable in 5
increments:
Hole A
1 25 1)
2 30 1)
3 35 1)
Standard = 4 40
3 Adjustable stop
4 Anti-slip foot rest (rubber on pedal 2-pin plug for solenoid: AMP Junior Timer
5 Fixing holes
6 solenoid operated 2/3-way directional valves for DS1 = Brake light pressure switch
electrical parking brake (version MFEA) DS2 = Accumulator pressure, pressure switch

For connection dimensions see table on page 11 5

1) Possible as a special version

897
 RE 66228/04.09 LT17 Bosch Rexroth AG 8/10

Unit dimensions: MFA...SO6 Replaces for series 3X (Dimensions in mm)

1 4
6
+
16

29
0 31

2 54
,5

52
22

36,5
62,5
DS2

75
80

P Option
137,6

130
168,65

BR3
N
214,65

Y Z
S1 56 8
M2
6

X
DS1 with 30 28
version 14 65,5 50
(Option - on request)
80
DS1 with
version 14 (standard)
Cut-out in the base plate

152,5 3 x 9
"X" 3 x 9,2
5 85 56

R6
59
34,4 29,9

104
94

70
94
59

175
110,5 42
213,5

898
9/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LT17 RE 66228/04.09

Unit dimensions: MFEA...SO6 Replaces for series 3X (Dimensions in mm)

"Y" "Z"
67,3

75
80
104

BR1
112,5

DS2 S3
S2
215

S1 54 8
BR2 T M2

Dimensions for threaded version 40

DS1
45 4
81
98
138

1 Pedal deflection
2 Setting angle, adjustable in 5
increments:
Hole A
1 25 1)
2 30 1)
3 35 1)
Standard = 4 40
3 Adjustable stop
4 Anti-slip foot rest (rubber on pedal
5 Fixing holes
6 solenoid operated 2/3-way directional valves for 2-pin plug for solenoid: AMP Junior Timer
electrical parking brake (version MFEA)
DS1 = Brake light pressure switch
For connection dimensions see table on page 10 DS2 = Accumulator pressure, pressure switch

1) Possible as a special version 5

899
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LT17 RE 66228/04.09

Table unit dimensions (Dimensions in mm)

Threaded Version 02
port d1 d20,1 d3 t1 t2 min z
90
BR1, BR2, BR3 M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1,4 12 0,1 d3
DS1 M12x1,5 12,4 20 0,9 11 0,1
d2p0,1
DS2 M12x1,5 12,4 12 0,05
d1
S1, S2 M33 x 1,5 33,5 20 0,1 Z
S31) M16x1,5 16,4 26 1 12 0,1

t2 min
M2 M12x1,5 12,4 12 0,05

t1
P, N M18 x 1,5 18,4 28 1,5 12 0,1
T M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1 12 0,1

Threaded Version 40
port d1 d20,1 d3 t1 t2 min z
BR1, BR2 M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1,4 12 0,1
DS1 M12x1,5 12,4 20 0,9 11 0,1 Switching symbol DS2
DS2 M12x1,5 12,4 12 0,05
S1, S2 M18 x 1,5 18,4 28 1,6 12 0,1
2
S31) M16x1,5 16,4 26 1 12 0,1 1
4
M2 M12x1,5 12,4 12 0,05 P
P, N M18 x 1,5 18,4 28 1,5 12 0,1
T M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1 12 0,1

1) Not for version MFEA

Pressure switch (Accessory 14):

Position for funktion Switch pressure Material no. SUCO-designation electrical funktion
DS1 light pressure 5 bar R900014524 0166-407-02-1-070 Make-contact
switch
DS2 accumulator 100 bar R900026372 0171-460-02-1-020 Changeover-contact
pressure

Rexroth Hydraulics uses pressure switches manufactured by SUCO / Bietigheim-Bissingen.

You can obtain the required pressure switch directly from the manufacturer using the above stated Material No.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other in-
Mobile Applications formation set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
Zum Eisengieer 1 AG. Without their consent it may not be reproduced or given to third
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany parties.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 The data specified above only serve to describe the product.
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 No statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for
[email protected] a certain application can be derived from our information. The
www.boschrexroth.de information given does not release the user from the obliga-
tion of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.

900
Inching-remotely powered RE 66227/06.06
Replaces: 04.02
1/4

brake valve LT 31

Data sheet

Component series 1X
Brake pressures 60; 80; 100 bar
Inching pressure 25 bar

H5793

Overview of contents Features

Contents Page Line mounting
Features 1 All of the connections are on one side
Ordering details 1 Integrated inching valve
Function, Symbol 2 Inching and braking pressures are proportional to the actuating
Technical data 2 Low hysteresis
Engineering guideline 2
Unit dimensions 3
Installations and maintenance guidelines 4

Ordering details

LT 31 MKA 1X 25 02 M *
Inching-braking valve = LT 31 Further details in clear text
Operator = MKA 12 = with pedal
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X No code = without pedal
(10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) (brake pressure is set)

Maximum operating brake pressure Seals

60 bar = 060 M= NBR seals, 5
80 bar = 080 suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP)
100 bar = 100 to DIN 51524
Inching pressure Connection thread
25 bar = 25 02 = Metric thread

901
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 31 RE 66227/06.06

Function, symbol

The inching-remotely powered brake valve is a combina- 3 2 1 7 6

tion of a single circuit brake valve (3-way pressure redu- BR1 SP2
cing valve) and an inching valve (2-way pressure reducing
valve) with stepless operation.

The valve basically comprises of the housing (1), brake

control spool (2), inching spool (7), force spring (3), compres-
sion spring (8), plunger (4), inching pressure limiting spring (6)
and inching pressure control spring (10).
The valve is normally operated via a foot pedal which moves
the plunger (4). This pushes against the force spring (3) and SP1 T M2
acts via the rod (5) on the inching pressure control spring (10)
4 8 9 5 10
together with the inching pressure against the inching pressure
control spring (6).
An increase in operation causes the control pressure to fall, the

Inching / brake pressure in bar

travel pump swivels back and hydro-statically brakes the ve-
hicle.
From a specific point the plunger acts on the compression pBRAKE
spring (8). This moves the brake control spool (2) and the
connection to tank is closed. The flow from the accumulator
to the brake cylinder is enabled. The increasing brake pressu-
re acts on the reverse side of the brake spool (2). The control pINCH
spool controls the brake pressure in relation to the operation.
A pedal travel limitation acts as a maximum pressure limiter for
the secondary circuit (brake pressure).

Pedal operating angle in

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
General
Weight kg 5.5
Installation Optional

Hydraulic
Maximum brake pressure bar Up to 60; up to 80; up to 100
Maximum system pressure bar 210
Maximum inching pressure bar 30
Brake cylinder volume (brake valve) cm3 Up to 120
Nominal flow (inching valve) l/min 12
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 2,8 to 380
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the Class 20/18/15
hydraulic fluid, cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c) We, therefore, recommend a filter with a minimum retention
rate of 10 75.

Engineering guidline
Please note: 41 StVZO Directive for vehicles with a hydro-static drives
Technical report no. KO 9015 (RWTV)

902
RE 66227/06.06 LT 31 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Unit dimensions (Dimensions in mm)

LT 31 fitted with a standard brake pedal 3
Material No. R900976109
(Option: for the horizontal installation
of the LT 31, see below) 1
29
0

40o

o
26
31,5
100
54
,5

50

(14)

22
99,2

96,2
135,2

145,2
5
181,3

BR1 T
181,3
219

M1
BR2
SP1
M2 SP2

4 4 30 32
20 27
150
29 34
143
95
12
Brake pedal for horizontal installation of the LT 31 4 x 9
Type LT 20 MKA-1X/000H/00-S05, Material No. R900517761
6

65
68
1 Pedal travel 5 Base plate
2 Pedal travel limiter 6 Assembly pattern for the
3 Anti-slip surface base plate
4 Name plate

90o
d3 SP1 Accumulator, opera-
Connection d1 d2+0,1 d3 t1 t2 min d2+0,1 ting brake (1. brake
BR1 M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 d1 circuit)
BR2 Connection plugged SP2 Inlet control pressure
SP1 M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 T Tank, drain oil 5
t2 min

t1

SP2 M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 BR1 Operating brake

T M16 x 1,5 16,4 26 1,5 12 (1. brake circuit)
M1 Connection plugged M2 Tank, travel operation
M2 M16 x 1,5 26 1,5 12 Similar to DIN 3852, part 1

903
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT 31 RE 66227/06.06

Application example
LT 31

SP1 BR1 pBRAKE

P
T

pINCH
M2 SP2

Installations and maintenance guidelines

s
5IF
DSPTTTFDUJPO
PG
UIF
IZESBVMJD
QJQF
MJOFT
BSF
UP
CF
TP
TFMFDUFE
UIBU
UIF
GVODUJPO
DBO
BMTP
CF
NBJOUBJOFE
BU
MPX
UFNQFSBUVSFT
s
$POOFDU
QPSUT
5
BOE
.
TFQBSBUFMZ
UP
UBOL
s
5IF
UBOL
QSFTTVSF
5
NVTU
OPU
FYDFFE
UIF
BQQMJFE
CSBLF
QSFTTVSF
s
"
QFEBM
USBWFM
MJNJUFS
JT
SFRVJSFE
s
%VSJOH
BTTFNCMZ
DBSF
IBT
UP
CF
UBLFO
UP
FOTVSF
UIBU
DPOUBNJOBUJPO
DBOOPU
BGGFDU
UIF
NPWFNFOU
PG
UIF
QFEBM
s
3VCCFS
DPNQPOFOUT
NVTU
OPU
CF
QBJOUFE
s
%BNBHFE
TFBMT
NVTU
CF
SFQMBDFE
s
5IF
PQFSBUJPO
FMFNFOU
NVTU
OPU
IBWF
EJSFDU
DPOUBDU
XJUI
IJHI
QSFTTVSF
DMFBOJOH
s
8IFO
BQQMZJOH
UIF
JODIJOHSFNPUFMZ
QPXFSFE
CSBLF
WBMWF
UIF
SFMFWBOU
5SBEF
6OJPO
PS
57
SFHVMBUJPOT
NVTU
CF
UBLFO
JOUP
BDDPVOU

Assembly guidelines:
When mounted under the base plate care has to be taken to ensure that contamination cannot affect the movement of the pedal!

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specications and other
Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
Zum Eisengieer 1 AG. Without their consent it may not be reproduced or given to third
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany parties.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 The data specied above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
[email protected] application can be derived from our information. The information given
www.boschrexroth.de does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
verication. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging.

904
Steering brake valve LT 10 RE 66154/03.08 1/4

Data sheet

Component series 2X
Nominal braking pressure 60, 90 and 100 bar

H7565

Table of contents Features

Content Page Small installation dimensions
Features 1 Identical braking pressure at both rear wheels while the
Function 2 brake pedal is coupled
Ordering code 2 Application of the steering brake valve:
Symbols 2 Earth-moving machines
Technical data 3 Forestry and agricultural machines
Unit dimensions 3 Tractors
Legal stipulations 4
Safety notes 4
Notes on the installation 4

905
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT10 RE 66154/03.08

Function

Steering power assistance for tractors and similar vehicles

with remotely powered braking system by braking optionally
the right or left rear wheel.
When both brake pedals are actuated while the vehicle is
traveling on the road, it is ensured that the braking pressure
is identical in B1 and B2 (straight traveling).

Attention!
When traveling on the road, the pedals must be coupled!
For steering braking (not on public roads) only one pedal is
actuated and the braking pressure applied only in B1 or B2.

B2 B1
P

Ordering code

LT 10 MK A 2X 02 M *

Type of actuation
Mechanical with push-button = MK
Further details in clear text
Type of connection
Seal material
Attachment =A
M= NBR seals, suitable for
Component series 20 to 29 = 2X mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
(20 to 29: unchanged
connection and installation dimensions) Pipe connections
Nominal braking pressure 60 bar = 060 02 = Metric thread
Nominal braking pressure 90 bar = 090
Nominal braking pressure 100 bar = 100

Symbol
Pipe connections
B1

B1, B2 Brake line to wheel brakes

P Accumulator line and accumulator
(diaphragm-type accumulator)
T Leakage line
DS Pressure switch accumulator pressure
P
DS
T

B2

906
RE 66154/03.08 LT10 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/4

Technical data

Weight (Valve without pedal) kg 2.7

Braking pressure Foot brake (BBA) bar Up to 100 (for pressure rating, see ordering code)
Accumulator pressure max. bar 200
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524;
bio-degradable hydraulic fluids on request
Hydraulic fluid temperature range C 20 to + 80
Viscosity range mm/s 2.8 to 380
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid Class 20/18/15
Cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c)

Unit dimensions: Without pedal (dimensions in mm)

2 9
39

T
37

51
71

71
102

B2 B1
1
DS P
28

120
1 Nameplate
4 x M8 60 2 Actuating stroke

Pipe ports
P = Operating brake accumulator
31

T = Tank
40

B1 = Operating brake
40
50

B2 = Operating brake
DS = Pressure switch accumulator pressure

72
d2
d1
t3

Port d1 d2 t1 t2 t3
P
t2

DS 5
t1

B1 M16x1.5 17.5 13
B2
T 26 1.5

907
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG LT10 RE 66154/03.08

Legal stipulations
A requirement that all legal stipulations have in common is of the art. Braking systems must be approved in accordance
that a vehicle must be road safe in all operating conditions. with valid national and international regulations
The currently valid national and international regulations form The responsibility for this lies with the
the basis for engineering a braking system. In addition, the manufacturer of the vehicle.
braking system must be designed in accordance with state

Safety notes
When the vehicle is driving on roads, the two brake pedals
must be connected to each other.
Damaged seals must be immediately replaced.
Damaged valves must be repaired, even if they function
properly.

Notes on the installation

Rubber parts must not be painted. Maximum tank pressure 0.5 bar (the tank must be moun-
Operating elements must not be directly exposed to high- ted above the valve!)
pressure jet cleaning. For the max. permissible degree of contamination, see
The cross-sections of hydraulic transmission elements technical data.
(pipes, hoses) must be selected so that at low operating Damaged seals must be immediately replaced.
temperatures the pressure drop between the hydraulic ac- The tank pressure must not exceed the brake application
cumulator and the brake cylinder remains low. pressure.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.de verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging.

908
RE 90010-03/07.2012 Bosch Rexroth AG

Steuerblcke
Steering Units

Designation Type Size Data sheet Page

Steering unit LAGC 50630 RE 14365 911

Steering unit LAGL 5001000 RE 11872 923

Steering unit LAGU 125320 RE 11867 933

Steering unit LAGZ 160300 RE 11868 945

Bypass priority valve LPD 120 RE 27549 957

Priority valve LPS 40160 RE 27548 963

Steering column and sensor LAB RE 11874 973

For the latest information on power steering units, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/power-steerings
909 6
Bosch Rexroth AG RE 90010-03/07.2012

910
Steering unit LAGC RE 14365/03.2012 1/12

Replaces: 10.2007

Data sheet

Nominal sizes 50 to 630

Component series 1X and 2X
Nominal pressure 175 bar
Maximum flow 63 l/min
H6211_d

Table of contents Features

Content Page LAGC steering units are used in hydraulic steering circuits
Features 1 of vehicles and mobile machines with large axle loads and
travel speeds not exceeding 50 km/h.
Ordering code 2
With the aid of a steering unit even heavy vehicles can
Function, section 3 easily be steered. The absence of a mechanical connection
Device variants 4, 5 between the steering unit and steering axle allows the de-
Functions in the steering circuit 6 signer to realize solutions, which would be impossible with
Technical data 7, 8 conventional steering systems.
The steering unit includes all valves required in the hydrau-
Calculating the steering moment 9
lic steering circuit for the protection of the steering unit and
Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump 10 the steering cylinder. This eliminates the need for additional
Unit dimensions 11, 12 pipework.
If the hydraulic pump fails, vehicles can also be steered
manually with the help of the LAGC; in this case, the LAGC
acts as hand pump for the steering cylinder.

911 6
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGC RE 14365/03.2012

Ordering code

LAG C M *

Steering unit Special specifications

Design Please consult our
sales organization
with integrated valves =C
6) Pipe ports
Displacement (cm3/rev)
P, T, L, R / LD
Nom. size OC; LD R1); LDA2) 01 = Pipe thread to
DIN 3852
50 = 50
06 = Metric ISO thread
63 = 63 to DIN 3852
80 = 80 12 = UNF thread
100 = 100 to SAE
125 = 125 40 = Metric ISO thread
to DIN 3852
160 = 160
200 = 200 Seals
250 = 250
M= Suitable for mineral oil
(HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
320 = 320 and fast bio-degradable hydraulic fluids
400 = 400 (HETG, rape seed oil) to
500 = 500 VDMA 24568 (see RE 90221)
630 = 630 7) Pressure relief valve setting
(pressure differential)
Noise characteristics
90 = 90 bar
Standard 3) =
140 = 140 bar
Low 4) =N
175 = 175 bar
Series 7) Shock valve setting
Series 10 to 19 = 1X (pressure differential)
(10 to 19: Unchanged installation
150 = 150 bar
and connection dimensions)
5) 200 = 200 bar
Series 20 to 29 = 2X
(20 to 29: Unchanged installation 240 = 240 bar
and connection dimensions) Reaction
No code = Without reaction
R= With reaction
Load Sensing
= Standard product range No code = Without load signal in Open Center
= Extended product range (OC) variant
LD = Dynamic load signal
LDA = Dynamic load signal, can be flanged on
1) With reaction Order example:
2) Dynamic load signal, can be flanged on
3) LAGC 200 -1X/LD150-90M01
To be specified for LD variant
4) To be specified for Open Center (OC) variant Steering unit with integrated valves
5) Only Open Center design (extended flow: see Technical data -
Size 200, dynamic load signal
page 7)
6) For thread dimensions, see Unit dimensions on pages 11 and 12 Shock valves 150 bar, pressure relief function 90 bar
7) The response pressure of shock valves must be 50 bar higher Pipe ports P, T, L, R in G 1/2 , LD in G 1/4
than the setting of the pressure relief valve, but not exceed 2.2
times the setting of the latter (see 38 StVZO, German Road LAGC 200 N1X/150-90M01
Traffic Licensing Regulation).
Preferably: 150 to 90; 200 to 140; 240 to 175. Steering unit with integrated valves
Size 200, low noise characteristics
Shock valves 150 bar, pressure relief function 90 bar
Pipe ports P, T, L, R in G 1/2

912
RE 14365/03.2012 LAGC Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Function, section

Pilot spool (1) of the control valve is rotated via the steering Pressure relief valve (5) limits the system pressure of the
column in relation to control sleeve (2). This opens a cross- steering circuit. On the Load-Sensing variants, the pilot
section between the spool and the sleeve. The pressure oil valve for the load signal is installed instead (see sectional
acts on rotor set (3) and sets the latter into motion. The oil is drawing).
then fed via the rotor set to the steering cylinder. The rota- Two shock valves (6) protect ports L and R to the steering
tion of the rotor acts on the sleeve, which then follows the cylinder. If one of the shock valve responds, the discharged
rotary movement of the spool. oil is fed via anti-cavitation valve (7) to the opposite side, or
The size of the opened cross-section depends on the turning missing leak-oil aspired from the tank.
speed of the steering wheel and on the steering pressure; In the event of an oil supply failure, the LAGC operates as
on Load-Sensing variants, it depends exclusively on the hand pump. In this operational state, oil can be withdrawn
turning speed. from the tank via anti-cavitation valve (8), with check valve
If the steering movement is interrupted and the spool is at a (9) preventing air to be aspired via the pump port (P). During
standstill, the oil, which still flows through the open cross- normal operation, this valve prevents shocks on the steering
section to the rotor, causes the rotor and hence the sleeve wheel caused by excessive external steering forces.
to continue to rotate.
The rotary movement then causes the cross-section to close
- now, the rotor also comes to a standstill and, at the same 9
time, the steering cylinder is in the required position. Center-
ing spring (4) brings and holds the spool and sleeve in a
neutral position to each other.

1
3

7 6
1 Pilot spool 6 Shock valve
2 Control sleeve 7 Anti-cavitation valve
3 Rotor set 8 Anti-cavitation valve
4 Centering spring 9 Check valve
5 Pressure relief valve

913 6
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGC RE 14365/03.2012

Device variants

Standard variant L R L R
Open Center with Non Reaction = OC / NR
Mainly used in steering systems with fixed displacement
hydraulic pumps.
When no steering movement is performed, the connection
between pump port (P) and tank port (T) is open (OC), and
the pump flow is directed to the tank almost at zero pres-
sure. Ports L1) (left) and R1) (right) are blocked in the neutral
position. In this way, external forces acting via the steering
cylinder are supported without the driver perceiving any re-
sulting reaction forces on the steering wheel (Non Reaction).

1) Contrary to standardization, the actuator lines in steering sys-

tems are usually designated L and R, not A and B.

P T P T

Standard variant L R L R
Open Center with Reaction = OC / R
In the neutral position, the cylinder ports are connected with
each other. External forces acting via the steering cylinder
are perceived as reaction force by the driver on the steering
wheel (Reaction).
When the driver releases the steering wheel after the steer-
ing maneuver is completed, the wheels and the steering
wheel automatically return to straight-ahead travel, provided
that the steering geometry is suitable for this.

P T P T

914
RE 14365/03.2012 LAGC Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Device variants

Load-Sensing variants L R L R
Steering units with Load Sensing provide a load signal that
can be used for controlling a priority valve and/or a pump.
They are designed as Closed-Center steering systems, with
the connection of pump port (P) to tank port (T) being closed
in the neutral position.
If the steering system and working hydraulics are supplied
by a common pump, a priority valve must be installed. This
valve ensures the preferred supply of the steering unit with
oil, with the valve being controlled by the load signal of the LD
steering unit. If no steering movement is performed, the
entire oil flow from the pump is available to the working hy-
draulics. Fixed or variable displacement pumps can be used
as hydraulic pump.
LD

P T P T

Load signal, dynamic

The oil flowing in the load signal line transmits the load
signal, with the pilot oil flowing from the priority valve to the
steering unit. Also in the neutral position, a continuous, low
pilot oil flow of ca. 0.5 l/min is provided. Consequently, the
steering unit has approximately the same temperature as
the oil.
Thermal shocks are largely prevented.
The LD variant causes the priority valve to react faster. The
hard point at the beginning of the steering movement is usu-
ally no longer perceivable- even under cold start conditions.
Flanged-on priority valve
Steering units with flanged-on priority valve significantly
reduce the piping effort.

L P LD T R L P LD T R

LAGC of LD variant for flanged-on priority valve

Low-noise variant
Steering units of the LAGC Open Center variant are gener-
ally delivered in the low-noise variant N.

915 6
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGC RE 14365/03.2012

Functions in the steering circuit

Servo-operation Pressure relief valve

Steering units of type LAGC consist of a manually oper- The pressure relief valve for the hydraulic pump is available
ated servo-valve of rotary spool design, a rotor set, which in three pressure settings:
operates according to the gerotor principle, and the required
90 bar
valves for the steering circuit.
140 bar
The size of the rotor set determines the oil volume, which
175 bar
flows per steering wheel turn to the steering cylinder. The
size of the rotor set is selected so that with 3 to 5 turns of
the steering wheel, it is possible to steer from one limit stop NOTE!
to the other.
The pressure in the T line increases the set pressure by the
Emergency operation equivalent value.
During normal operation of the steering unit, when the
hydraulic oil displaces a sufficient amount of oil, the torque Shock and anti-cavitation valves
on the steering wheel is less than 5 Nm. In the event of a
The cylinder side valves that are built into the LAGZ unit is
hydraulic pump failure, the steering unit operates in the
available in three pressure settings:
emergency mode; the rotor set acts as hand pump, and the
vehicle is steered manually, without power assistance. The 150 bar
pressure that can be generated manually depends on the 200 bar
size of the rotor set and the force applied to the steering 240 bar
wheel. The smaller the rotor set, the higher the pressure that
can be built up manually. Anti-cavitation valve
During manual steering, the following pressures can be If the hydraulic pump fails then the spressure fluid is drawn
achieved in dependence upon the steering moment: from the reservoir via this valve, which is fitted between the
Msteer Nom. size 050 063 080 100 125 160
P and T connections.

120 Nm p in bar 90 85 80 60 50 40
70 Nm p in bar 52 50 46 35 30 23
Check valve
Msteer Nom. size 200 250 320 400 500 630 This valve which is fitted in the P connection prevents:
120 Nm p in bar 30 25 20 15 12 10 The return flow of oil from the steering cylinder into the
hydraulic system when the cylinder pressure, due to travel
70 Nm p in bar 17 14 11 8 7 6
obstructions, is greater than the system pressure. Steering
shocks at the steering wheel are thereby suppressed.
The sucking in of air via the P connection during emer-
CAUTION! gency operation.
The emergency operating mode is not intended for continu-
ous operation!
f If a higher pressure is required for steering in emer-
gency operation at 70 Nm, a steering unit with reduction
gear, LAGU to RE 11867 or LAGZ to RE 11868, can be
installed.

916
RE 14365/03.2012 LAGC Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Steering moment - standard 1) M Nm 5
Steering moment - emergency operation M Nm 160 permissible
Max. tightening torque MA for the mounting screws Nm 30 (see RE 11874 steering column)

Hydraulic
Nominal pressure p bar 175
Pressure fluid see page 8
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the class 19/16/13 2)
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (c)

Displacement Flow Max. perm. pressure in port

Steering unit volume
type servo operation Nom 3) Max. P T L and R
cm3 l/min l/min bar bar bar

LAGC 050 50 5,0 15 175 20 240

LAGC 063 63 6,3 20 175 20 240
LAGC 080 80 8,0 25 175 20 240
LAGC 100 100 10,0 30 175 20 240
LAGC 125 125 12,5 35 175 20 240
LAGC 160 160 16,0 50 175 20 240
LAGC 200 200 20,0 50 175 20 240
LAGC 250 250 25,0 50 175 20 240
LAGC 320 320 32,0 50 175 20 240
LAGC 400 400 40,0 50 175 20 240
LAGC 500 500 50,0 50 175 20 240
LAGC 630 630 63,0 50 175 20 240

1) Other steering moment variants (e.g. low) on request

2) The cleanliness classes specified for components must be adhered to in hydraulic systems.
Effective filtration prevents malfunction and, at the same time, prolongs the service life of components.
For the selection of filters, see data sheets RE 50070, RE 50076, RE 50081, RE 50086, RE 50087 and RE 50088.
3) Related to the steering speed of 100 steering rotations/min.

917 6
 8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGC RE 14365/03.2012

Technical data of the hydraulic fluid

Pressure fluids Further on the selection of pressure fluids

Before carrying out any engineering please refer to the A prerequisite to being able to select the correct pressure
extensive information regarding pressure fluid selection and fluid is knowing the operating temperature and the ambient
application conditions in our catalogue sheets RE 90220 temperature.
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally compatible The pressure fluid should be so selected that the operating
fluids). These catalogue sheets refer to axial piston units, viscosity at the working temperature lies within the optimum
however, the details can be analogously applied to the range (see selection diagram).
steering units. For pressure fluids that require FKM seals
We recommend that the next higher viscosity class is se-
please contact ourselves.
lected.
Operating viscosity
Example:
We recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating
For an ambient temperature of X C the tank temperature
temperature) for efficiency and service life, is selected within
stabilises at 60 C. To achieve the optimum viscosity, this
the optimum range of
relates to the viscosity classes of VG 46 or VG 68; VG 68
opt = optimum operating viscosity range 16 to 46 mm2/s should be selected.
with reference to the temperature. Pressure fluid filtration
Limiting viscosity The finer the filtration the higher the cleanliness class of the
pressure fluid is achieved and so the higher the service life
For the limiting conditions the following values apply:
of the entire hydraulic system.
min = 10 mm2/s at a maximum permissible temperature of
max = +80 C
max = 800 mm2/s NOTE!
Temperature range: (see selection diagram) To ensure the functionability of the steering pump a
minimum pressure fluid cleanliness class of 19/16/13 to
min = 20 C ISO 4406 is necessary.
max = +80 C
CAUTION!
If there is the possibility of there being a temperature differ-
Operating the unit with contaminated hydraulic fluid may
ence of more than 20 C between the steering unit and the
lead to the steering system failing.
pressure fluid, then either a LD or LDA version or an open
center version for warming the steering unit should be fitted.

Selection diagram

40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG

VG 68
VG 32
VG 46
VG

200
10
22

100
60
40 46
Viscosity range

Nopt

20
16

10

5 5
40 25 10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
Pressure fluid Temperature * in C

*min = 40 C temperature range *max = 115 C

918
RE 14365/03.2012 LAGC Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Calculating the steering moment

1 b
Steering moment M = 0.05 FA e
[Nm]
1+ 200 0.7
b

Steering force M
F = I 103 [N]

h
b

l
M

Formula symbols
Formula Formula
Designation Unit Designation Unit
symbol symbol
A Required cylinder area mm2 l Smallest, effective steering lever mm

A1 Cylinder piston area, differential cylinder mm2 M Steering moment Nm

A2 Cylinder ring area, differential cylinder mm2 n Steering wheel rotational speed min-1

b Tyre width mm nleer Motor idling RPM min-1

d Piston rod diameter mm nMotor Motor operating RPM min-1

D Cylinder diameter mm p Steering pressure bar

e Distance of swivel bearing to center of tyre mm qvp Pump flow l/min

F Steering force N V Steering unit displacement cm3/U

FA Steering axle force N VP Steering pump displacement cm3/U

h Cylinder stroke length mm VZYL Cylinder volume cm3

i No. of steering wheel turns Co-efficient of friction

919 6
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGC RE 14365/03.2012

Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump

Steering cylinder Steering pump

The pump should be so selected that when the motor is
F
Required cylinder area A= 10 [mm2] idling, a steering velocity of approx. 50 min1 can still be
p achieved. The maximum steering speed, which is dependent
on the steering wheel diameter, is approx. 100 to 150 min1.
Cylinder area (piston side) A1 = D2 [mm2]
4 Pump flow qVP = V (n +10) 103 l/min.
The pump displacement ( nominal size) required for steer-
Cylinder area (rod side) A2 = (D2d2) [mm2] ing at idling speed and at operating speed of the vehicle
4
must be calculated.
When using a differential or double roded cylinder, A2 must Pump size at idling speed
be greater than the required cylinder area.
If two cross connected differential cylinders are to be qVP 103
VP = [cm3/U]
used, then A1 + A2 must be greater thant the required nleer
cylinder area.
The nominal size of steering unit results from the cylinder Pump size at operating speed
volume and the required number of steering wheel turns.
qVP 103
Cylinder volume VP = [cm3/U]
nMotor
Ah
VZYL = [cm3]
103

Displacement volume LAGU

VZYL
V= [cm3/U]
i

Normally there are 3 to 5 turns of the steering wheel from

end stop to end stop.

NOTE!
Further information is availabe here:
f Suitable steering columns RE 11874
f associated priority valves for steering
systems contained in load signal circuits: RE 27548
f General information: RE 64020-B1
f Product-specific applications: RE 07015-B2

920
RE 14365/03.2012 LAGC Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Unit dimensions: Type LAGC / LAGCLD (dimensions in mm)

Gear hub profile 16/32 60

Diametral pitch to
ANS B921-1970
34 p0,5

6,3

15 min.
2,8
30 p1
L
63 p0,5

T
L

M10; 15
LD

44
l1
R

P R

1) l2

Nom. size l1 l2
050 125 6.8
063 127 8.3
44
80 +3 080 129 10.5
100 132 13.2
125 135 16.5
160 139 21.1
200 145 26.4
250 151 33.0
320 161 42.3
400 172 52.9
80 +3

500 186 68.0

630 202 83.3

59 M10; 16 Imperial, metric thread

3/8-16 UNC; 16 2)
1) LD bore on variant LAGC...LD... d4
2) Only with variant 12 (see pipe ports)
d1 a1
b

UNF, metric - thread

d4
d2
A
d1
a1
b

a2

921 6
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGC RE 14365/03.2012

Unit dimensions: Type LAGCLDA.. (dimensions in mm)

Gear hub 16/32

Diametral pitch to
60
ANS B921-1970
44,4 25,4

6,3
2,8

15 min.
30 p1
T L
L

M10; 15

44
l1
R

P R
LD
l2

44
80 +3

Nom. size l1 l2
050 125 6.8
063 127 8.3
080 129 10.5
100 132 13.2
88 +3

125 135 16.5

80 +3

160 139 21.1

8 200 145 26.4

2p
0,3
Metric thread

59
M10; 16 d4

d1

Port Variant d1 d2 d4 bmin. a1

a1
b

P, T, L, R 40 M18x1.5 12

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Mobile Applications Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch
Zum Eisengieer 1 Ludwigsluster Chaussee 5 Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 19370 Parchim, Germany without its consent.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 60 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 63 70 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
www.boschrexroth.de or 60 62 01 application can be derived from our information. The information
given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment
and verification. It must be remembered that our products are
subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

922
Steering unit LAGL RE 11872/03.2012 1/10

Replaces: 05.2006

Data sheet

Nominal sizes 500 to 1000

Component series 1X
Maximum flow 80 l/min
H7375

Table of contents Features

Contents Page LAGL steering units are used in hydraulic steering circuits
Features 1 of vehicles and mobile machinery with great axle loads and
travel speeds up to max. 50 km/h.
Ordering code 2
With the help of a steering unit, even heavy vehicles can
Function, section 3 be easily steered. The absence of a mechanical connection
Device version: Open Center, symbols 4 between the steering unit and the steering axle allows the
Device version: Load-Sensing, symbols 5 designer the implementation of solutions that would not be
Functions in the steering circuit 6 feasible with conventional steering systems.
The steering unit includes all valves that are required in the
Technical data 6
hydraulic steering circuit for the protection of the steering
Technical data of the hydraulic fluid, selection diagram 7 unit and steering cylinders, which renders additional pipe-
Calculating the steering moment 8 work unnecessary.
Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump 9 The control valve is optimised for large nominal sizes. When
Unit dimensions, connections 10 compared with type LAGC, pressure losses were reduced.

923 6
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGL RE 11872/03.2012

Ordering code

LAG L 1X M *

Steering unit Special specifications

Design Please consult or
sales organization
Large (for large nom. sizes) =L
4) Pipe connections
Displacement (cm3/U)
P, T, L, R/LD
Nom. size OC LD 01 = Pipe threads (mounting
500 = 500 bores to DIN 38522)
02 = Metric ISO threads
630 = 630 (mounting bores to
800 = 800 DIN 38521)
1000 = 1000 Seal material
M= NBR seals
Noise characteristics
3) Pressure relief valve setting
Standard 1) =
Low 2) =N (pressure differential)
140 = 140 bar
Component series 175 = 175 bar
Component series 10 to19 = 1X 210 = 210 bar
(10 to19 unchanged installation
3) Shock valve setting
and connection dimensions)
(pressure differential)
Load Sensing
200 = 200 bar
Without load signal in
240 = 240 bar
Open Center (OC) version = No code
260 = 260 bar
Dynamic load signal = LD

= Standard programme
= Extended programme

1) Specify for LD version Order example:

2) Indicate for Open Center (OC) version
3) LAGL 800-1X/LD200-140M01
The response pressure of the shock valves must be set 50 bar
higher, but not more than 2.2 times higher, than the pressure Steering unit with integrated valves, size 800,
relief valve of the hydraulic pump (see 38 StVZO (German road
dynamic load signal, shock valves 200 bar,
traffic licensing regulations)).
Preferably 200 to 140; 240 to 175; 260 to 210 pressure relief valve 140 bar,
4) For thread dimensions, see unit dimensions on page 10 pipe connections P, T, L, R in G1/2; LD in G1/4

LAGL 800N1X/240-175M01
Steering unit with integrated valves,
size 800, Open Center, low noise,
shock valves 240 bar, pressure relief valve 175 bar,
pipe connections P, T, L, R in G1/2

924
RE 11872/03.2012 LAGL Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Function, section

Control spool (1) of the control valve is rotated via the steer- The cross-section is then closed via the rotary movement -
ing column in relation to control bush (2). This results in the the rotor now also comes to a standstill; and together with
opening of a cross-section between the spool and the bush. it, the steering cylinder stops at the requested position.
The hydraulic oil acts on rotor set (3) and sets it into motion. Centring spring (4) returns and holds the spool and bush in
The oil is fed via the rotor set to the steering cylinder. The a neutral position to each other.
rotation of the rotor acts on the bush and causes it to follow The system pressure of the steering circuit is limited by
the rotary movement of the spool. pressure relief valve (5). In the case of load-sensing ver-
The size of the opened cross-section depends on the turning sions (see section), a pilot valve for the load signal is
speed of the steering wheel and on the steering pressure; in installed instead of the pressure relief valve.
the case of load-sensing versions, it depends exclusively on The two shock valves (6) protect ports L and R to the steer-
the turning speed. ing cylinder. When one of the shock valves responds, the
When the steering movement is stopped and the spool discharging oil is fed by anti-cavitation valve (7) to the oppo-
comes to a standstill, the oil flowing through the still open site side or missing leak-oil is re-aspired from the tank. (For
cross-section to the rotor causes the rotor and hence the the functional description of items 8 and 9, see also page 6).
bush to continue to rotate.

5 8

2
4
1

7 6 3

1 Control piston 6 Shock valve

2 Control bush 7 Anti-cavitation valve
3 Rotor set 8 Suction valve
4 Centring spring 9 Check valve
5 Pressure relief valve

925 6
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGL RE 11872/03.2012

Device version: Open Center, symbols

Low-noise version Steering units of type LAGL Open Center are generally
Open Center with Non Reaction = OC / NR shipped in the low-noise version N.
Mainly used in steering systems with fixed displacement
1) In contrast to standard designations A and B, the working lines in
hydraulic pump.
steering systems are usually identified with L and R.
When no steering movement is performed, the connection
between pump port (P) and tank port (T) is open (OC), and
the pump flow is directed to the tank almost at zero pres-
sure. Ports L1) (left) and R1) (right) are closed in the neutral
position. In this way, external forces are supported, which
act via the steering cylinder, without the driver perceiving
any reaction forces at the steering wheel (Non Reaction).

Open Center version

L R L R

P T P T
Simplified representation Detailed representation

926
RE 11872/03.2012 LAGL Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10

Device version: Load Sensing, symbols

Load-Sensing version If the steering system and the working hydraulics are sup-
Steering units with load-sensing feature provide a load sig- plied by a common pump, a priority valve must be used.
nal, which can be used for controlling a priority valve and/or This valve ensures the priority supply of the steering unit
a pump. They are designed as Closed-Center steering units, with oil, with the valve being controlled with the help of the
with the connection of pump port (P) to tank port (T) being load signal from the steering unit. When no steering move-
closed in the neutral position. ment is performed, the entire amount of oil from the pump
is made available to the working hydraulics. The hydraulic
pump can be a fixed or a variable displacement pump.

Load-Sensing version

L R L R

LD

LD

P T P T
Simplified representation Detailed representation

Load signal, dynamic

The oil flowing in the load signal line transmits the load
signal, with the pilot oil flowing from the priority valve to the
steering unit. A small pilot oil flow of approx. 1.0 l/min flows
continuously also in the neutral position. Consequently, the
steering unit has almost the same temperature as the oil.
Temperature shocks can largely be ruled out.
The LD version causes a faster reaction of the priority valve.
The hard point when starting to steer - also under cold start
conditions - is usually no longer perceivable.

927 6
6/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGL RE 11872/03.2012

Functions in the steering circuit

Power-assisted mode Shock and anti-cavitation valve

Steering units of type LAGL consist of a manually operated The cylinder side valves that are built into the LAGL unit is
servo-valve of rotary spool design, a rotor set operating ac- available in three pressure settings:
cording to the gerotor principle, and the valves required for
200 bar
the steering circuit.
240 bar
The size of the rotor set determines the oil volume that flows
260 bar
to the steering cylinder per turn of the steering wheel. The
size of the rotor set is to be selected so that it is possible to Anti-cavitation valve
steer from one limit stop to the other with 3 to 5 turns of the
steering wheel. If the hydraulic pump fails then the spressure fluid is drawn
from the reservoir via this valve, which is fitted between the
P and T connections.
Pressure relief valve
The pressure relief valve for the hydraulic pump is available Check valve
in three pressure settings:
This valve which is fitted in the P connection prevents:
140 bar
The return flow of oil from the steering cylinder into the
175 bar
hydraulic system when the cylinder pressure, due to travel
210 bar obstructions, is greater than the system pressure. Steering
shocks at the steering wheel are thereby suppressed.
NOTE! The sucking in of air via the P connection during emer-
gency operation.
The pressure in the T line increases the set pressure by the
equivalent value.

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Steering moment - standard M Nm 5
Max. tightening torque MA for the mounting screws Nm 30 (see RE 11874 steering column)

Hydraulic
Nominal pressure p bar 175
Pressure fluid see page 7
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the Class 19/16/13; for this, we recommend a filter with a minimum
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 20 100 to ISO 16889.

Displacement Max. flow Max. perm. pressure in port

Nom. size volume l/min 1)
P T L and R
cm3
bar bar bar
500 500 80 210 20 260
630 630 80 210 20 260
800 800 80 210 20 260
1000 1000 80 210 20 260

1) Values for centering spring package, standard (2.5 to 4 Nm)

928
 RE 11872/03.2012 LAGL Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10

Pressure fluid technical data

Pressure fluids Further on the selection of pressure fluids

Before carrying out any engineering please refer to the A prerequisite to being able to select the correct pressure
extensive information regarding pressure fluid selection and fluid is knowing the operating temperature and the ambient
application conditions in our catalogue sheets RE 90220 temperature.
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally compatible The pressure fluid should be so selected that the operating
fluids). These catalogue sheets refer to axial piston units, viscosity at the working temperature lies within the optimum
however, the details can be analogously applied to the range (see selection diagram).
steering units. For pressure fluids that require FKM seals
We recommend that the next higher viscosity class is se-
please contact ourselves.
lected.
Operating viscosity
Example:
We recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating
For an ambient temperature of X C the tank temperature
temperature) for efficiency and service life, is selected within
stabilises at 60 C. To achieve the optimum viscosity, this
the optimum range of
relates to the viscosity classes of VG 46 or VG 68; VG 68
opt = optimum operating viscosity range 16 to 46 mm2/s should be selected.
with reference to the temperature. Pressure fluid filtration
Limiting viscosity The finer the filtration the higher the cleanliness class of the
pressure fluid is achieved and so the higher the service life
For the limiting conditions the following values apply:
of the entire hydraulic system.
min = 10 mm2/s at a maximum permissible temperature of
max = +80 C
max = 800 mm2/s NOTE!
Temperature range: (see selection diagram) To ensure the functionability of the steering pump a
minimum pressure fluid cleanliness class of 19/16/13 to
min = 20 C ISO 4406 is necessary.
max = +80 C
CAUTION!
If there is the possibility of there being a temperature differ-
Operating the unit with contaminated hydraulic fluid may
ence of more than 20 C between the steering unit and the
lead to the steering system failing.
pressure fluid, then either a LD or LDA version or an open
center version for warming the steering unit should be fitted.

Selection diagram

40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1600 1600
1000
600
400
200
VG

VG 68
VG 32
VG 46
VG

10
22

100
60
46
Viscosity range

40
Nopt

20
16

10

5 5
40 25 10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
Pressure fluid Temperature * in C

*min = 40 C temperature range *max = 115 C

929 6
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGL RE 11872/03.2012

Calculating the steering moment

1 b
Steering moment M = 0.05 FA e
[Nm]
1+ 200 0.7
b

Steering force M
F = I 103 [N]

h
b

l
M

Formula symbols
Formula Formula
Designation Unit Designation Unit
symbol symbol
A Required cylinder area mm2 l Smallest, effective steering lever mm

A1 Cylinder piston area, differential cylinder mm2 M Steering moment Nm

A2 Cylinder ring area, differential cylinder mm2 n Steering wheel rotational speed min-1

b Tyre width mm nleer Motor idling RPM min-1

d Piston rod diameter mm nMotor Motor operating RPM min-1

D Cylinder diameter mm p Steering pressure bar

e Distance of swivel bearing to center of tyre mm qvp Pump flow l/min

F Steering force N V Steering unit displacement cm3/U

FA Steering axle force N VP Steering pump displacement cm3/U

h Cylinder stroke length mm VZYL Cylinder volume cm3

i No. of steering wheel turns Co-efficient of friction

930
RE 11872/03.2012 LAGL Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10

Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump

Steering cylinder Steering pump

The pump should be so selected that when the motor is
F
Required cylinder area A= 10 [mm2] idling, a steering velocity of approx. 50 min1 can still be
p achieved. The maximum steering speed, which is dependent
on the steering wheel diameter, is approx. 100 to 150 min1.
Cylinder area (piston side) A1 = D2 [mm2]
4 Pump flow qVP = V (n +10) 103 l/min.
The pump displacement ( nominal size) required for steer-
Cylinder area (rod side) A2 = (D2d2) [mm2] ing at idling speed and at operating speed of the vehicle
4
must be calculated.
When using a differential or double roded cylinder, A2 must Pump size at idling speed
be greater than the required cylinder area.
If two cross connected differential cylinders are to be qVP 103
VP = [cm3/U]
used, then A1 + A2 must be greater thant the required nleer
cylinder area.
The nominal size of steering unit results from the cylinder Pump size at operating speed
volume and the required number of steering wheel turns.
qVP 103
Cylinder volume VP = [cm3/U]
nMotor
Ah
VZYL = [cm3]
103

Displacement volume LAGU

VZYL
V= [cm3/U]
i

Normally there are 3 to 5 turns of the steering wheel from

end stop to end stop.

NOTE!
Further information is availabe here:
f Suitable steering columns RE 11874
f associated priority valves for steering
systems contained in load signal circuits: RE 27548
f General information: RE 64020-B1
f Product-specific applications: RE 07015-B2

931 6
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGL RE 11872/03.2012

Unit dimensions LAGL /LAGLLD (nominal dimensions in mm)

Gear hub profile16/32
Diametrical pitch to 60

44,4 ANS B92.1-1970 25,4

27,5 p0,5

2,8
6,3

15 min.
38 p1
61 p0,5

T L
L

44
M10; 12
R

1 P R
L1

L2

80 +3 Bore, inch thread and metric thread

for ports P, T, R, L, LD
45
90
d4 Nom. size L1 L2
d1 500 202 68.0
630 218 83.3
a1

800 239 105.8

b
90 +3

1000 269 136.0

82 p0,3
Port Variant d1 d4 1) b min. a1

59 M10; 16 01 G 1/2 28 +0.4 14 max. 0.3

P, T, R, L
104 +2 02 M22x1.5 28 +0.4 14 max. 0.3
01 G 1/4 25 +0.4 12 1 0.5
LD
02 M12x1.5 25 +0.4 12 1 0.5
1 LD bore on version LAGL...LD
1) Differing from DIN 38521 and DIN 38522

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Mobile Applications Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch
Zum Eisengieer 1 Ludwigsluster Chaussee 5 Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 19370 Parchim, Germany without its consent.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 60 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 63 70 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
www.boschrexroth.de or 60 62 01 application can be derived from our information. The information
given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment
and verification. It must be remembered that our products are
subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

932
Steering unit LAGU RE 11867/03.2012 1/12

Replaces: 01.2009

Data sheet

Nominal sizes 125 to 320

Series 1X
Nominal pressure 175 bar
Maximum flow 50 l/min.
H6213_d

Table of contents Features

Contents Page The LAGU steering unit is used in hydraulic steering circuits
Features 1 on vehicles and mobile machines that have high axial loads
and maximum travel speeds of 50 km/h.
Ordering details 2
With the aid of a steering unit even heavey vehicles can
Function, section 3 be easily steered. By not having a mechanical connection
Versions 4 to 6 between the steering unit and axle which is to be steered,
Functions in a steering circuit 6 the designer has opportunities that are not possible with
Technical data 7, 8 convential steering.
Vehicles fitted with a LAGU unit can also be manually
Calculating the steering moment 9
steered if the servo system fails. The required force is
Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump 10 reduced by changing the ratio. Only due to this, in many
Unit dimensions 11, 12 cases, are the permissible limiting values complied with.
In many applications a second steering pump is no longer
necessary.
The LAGU unit works on the principle of switching off cham-
bers. In servo, the mode the steering acts as a fully hydrau-
lic steering without any changes to the ratios.

933 6
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGU RE 11867/03.2012

Ordering details

LAG U 1X M *

Steering unit Special specifications

Design Please clarify with our
sales organization
With step-down ratio =U
5)
Pipe connections
Displacement volume (cm3/U)
P, T, L, R / LD
Servo operation / emergency operation
01 = Pipe thread to DIN 3852
Nom. size OC; LD R1); U = 2:1
06 = Metric ISO thread to
LDA2)
DIN 3852
125/60 = 125/60 12 = UNF thread to SAE
160/80 = 160/80 40 = Metric ISO thread to
200/100 = 200/100 DIN 3852

250/125 = 250/125 Seals

M= NBR seals, suitable for
320/160 = 320/160
mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Noise characteristics 4) Pressure relief valve setting
Standard = (pressure differential)
Low 3) =N 90 = 90 bar
Component series 140 = 140 bar
Series 10 bis 19 = 1X 175 = 175 bar
(10 bis 19: unchanged installation 4) Shock valve setting
and connection dimensions)
(pressure differential)
Load Sensing 150 = 150 bar
Without load signal in = No code 200 = 200 bar
open center (OC) version 240 = 240 bar
Dynamic load signal = LD
Reaction
Dynamic load signal, = LDA
priority valve can be flanged on No code = Without reaction
R= With reaction

= Standard programme
= Extended programme

1) With reaction Ordering example:

2) Dynamic load signal, can be flanged on
3) LAGU 200/100 -1X/LD150-90M01
Only with the open center (OC) version
4) The response pressure of the shock valves must be 50 bar Steering unit with integrated valves
higher, however a maximum of 2.2 times that of the hydraulic
Nom. size 200/100, dynamic load signal
pump pressure relief valves. (see 38 StVZO)
Preferrably 150 to 90; 200 to 140; 240 to 175 bar. Shock valves 150 bar, pressure limitation 90 bar
5) For thread dimensions see unit dimensions on pages 11and 12 Pipe connections P, T, L, R are G 1/2 , LD is G 1/4

LAGU 200/100 N1X/150-90M01

Steering unit with integrated valves
Nom. size 200/100, low noise characteristics
Shock valves 150 bar, pressure limitation 90 bar
Pipe connections P, T, L, R in G 1/2

934
RE 11867/03.2012 LAGU Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Function, section
Via the steering column the control spool (1) of the control version (see section), the pilot valve for the load signal is
valve is rotated in relation to the control bush (2). Thereby fitted.
a cross-section is opened between the piston and the bush. The two shock valves (6) provide a safety function for the
The pressure fluid acts on the rotor set (3) and causes this connections L and R to the steering cylinder. If a shock
to move. The oil flows via the rotor set to the steering cylin- valve reacts then the displaced oil is passed to the opposite
der. The rotation of the rotor acts on the bush which causes side via the anti-cavitation valve (7), or missing leakage fluid
it to follow the rotary movement of the spool. is drawn from the reservoir.
The size of the cross-section opened is dependent on the If the hydraulic pump fails then the LAGU unit acts as a
rotational speed of the steering wheel and the steering pres- hand pump. In this case, via the cylinder pressure, the
sure, and for the load sensoring version on the rotational cut-off valve (10) opens and a specific number of displace-
speed. ment chambers are connected with the return (switched off).
If the steering movement is stopped then the spool also The check valves (11) and (12) prevents a connection from
stops, oil however, continues to flow via the open cross- taking place between the switched off and the switched on
section to the rotor, the rotor and bush, therefore, continue displacement chambers.
to rotate. The displacement volume of the rotor set is therefore, re-
The cross-section then closes due to the rotary movement, duced by the volume of the switched off chambers.
the rotor is now also stationary and the steering cylinder is Via the anti-cavitation valve (8) it is possible to draw oil from
therefore, in the required position. The centralising spring (4) the tank line, the check valve (9) however, prevents air from
brings and then holds the piston and bush into the neutral being sucked in via the pump connection (P). In normal
position. operation the same valve prevents high external load forces
The system pressure is limited in the steering circuit via the from causing shocks at the steering wheel.
pressure relief valve (5). At this location, for the load sensing

12 5 10 8 9

2
1 Control spool
4
3 2 Control bush
3 Rotor set
4 Centralising spring
1 5 Pressure relief valve
6 Shock valve
7 Anti-cavitation valve
8 Anti-cavitation valve
9 Check valve
10 Cut-off valve
11 Check valve
7 6 11 12 Check valve

935 6
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGU RE 11867/03.2012

Versions

Standard version: OC / NR L R L R
Open Center with Non Reaction = OC / NR
Mainly used in steering systems that utilise
a fixed displacement hydraulic pump.
If steering is not taking place then the
connection from pump (P) to the tank
connection (T) is open (OC) and the pump
displacement volume is passed at virtually
zero pressure to tank. The connections L1)
(left) and R1) (right) are closed in the neutral
position. In this manor, external forces,
that act on the steering cylinder, are taken
up without the driver feeling any reaction
forces via the steering wheel (Non Reac-
tion).

1) For steering systems the actuator lines are

identified with L and R, not as is normal with A
and B.

NOTE!
Steering units for vehicles with a pivot-
ing frame or with rear axial steering must
always use the NR version. P T P T

LAGU standard version: OC / NR

Standard version: OC / R L R L R
Open Center with Reaction = OC / R
The cylinder connections are in the neutral
condition connected with each other. Ex-
ternal forces acting on the steering cylin-
ders are noticed as reaction forces by the
driver via the steering wheel (Reaction). If
the driver releases the steering wheel after
the steering manoeuvre (curved line) then
the wheels and steering wheel, with the
relevant steering geometry, straigthen up
by themselves and the vehicle carries on
in a straight line.

P T P T
LAGU standard version: OC / R

936
RE 11867/03.2012 LAGU Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Versions

Load sensing version L R L R

Steering units with load sensing provide a
load signal that can be used to control a
priority valve and/or a pump. They are de-
signed as closed center steering systems
whereby the connection: pump connection
(P) to tank connection (T) is closed in the
neutral position.
If the steering and actuator hydraulics are
supplied by a common pump then the use
of a priority valve is necessary. This valve
ensures that the steering unit has a priority LD
oil supply, whereby the control of the valve
is via the steering unit load signal. When
steering is not taking place then the entire
oil flow from the pump is made available to
the actuator hydraulics. Fixed or variable
displacement pumps can be used.

LD

P T P T
LAGU in the LD version for a priority valve which is not flanged on

Load signal, dynamic

The pressure fluid flowing in the load signal
line transmits the load signal, whereby the
control oil from the priority valves flows to
the steering unit. In the neutral position
there is also a low continuous control oil
flow of approx. 0.5 l/min. As a result the
steering unit has virtually the same tem-
perature as the oil.
Temperature shocks are virtually elimi-
nated.
The LD version causes a faster reaction
of the priority valve. The hard point when
starting to steer, also with a cold start, is
normally no longer noticeable.
Flanged on priority valve
Pipe work is reduced by a large amount
with steering units that have a flanged on
priority valve.

L P LD T R L P LD T R

LAGU in the LD version for a priority valve which is flanged on

937 6
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGU RE 11867/03.2012

Versions

Noise reduced version

The OC/NR and OC/R variants of the type LAGC steering
units are only available in the noise optimised versions. The
noise generated by these units is, dependent on the flow
and installation situation, between 3 and 10 dBA lower than
the standard version of the LAGC.

Functions in the steering circuit

Servo operation Pressure relief valve

The LAGU series of steering units comprise of a hand The pressure relief valve for the hydraulic pump is available
operated servo valve of rotary spool design, a rotor set in three pressure settings:
that works to the gerotor principle and the valves that are
90 bar
required for the steering circuit.
140 bar
The nominal size of the rotor set defines the oil volume that
175 bar
passes to the steering cylinder per rotation of the steering
wheel. The size of the dosing pump is so selected that with
3 to 5 turns of the steering wheel it is possible to steer from NOTE!
one end stop to the other.
The pressure in the T line increases the set pressure by the
Emergency operation equivalent value.
During normal operation of the steering unit and when the
hydraulic pump is supplying an adequate flow of oil, the Shock and anti-cavitation valves
torque at the steering wheel is less than 5 Nm. If the hydrau-
The cylinder side valves that are built into the LAGU unit is
lic pump fails then the steering unit operates in an emergen-
available in three pressure settings:
cy mode, the rotor set acts as a hand pump and the vehicle
is manually steered without servo assistance. The pressure 150 bar
achieved by hand is dependent on the size of the rotor set 200 bar
and the force at the steering wheel. The smaller the rotor set 240 bar
the higher is the pressure that can be manually built up.
With the LAGU unit it is possible, by switching off chambers Anti-cavitation valve
(step-down ratio), to additionally reduce the displacement If the hydraulic pump fails then the spressure fluid is drawn
volume of the rotor set. The cut-off valve, that is closed dur- from the reservoir via this valve, which is fitted between the
ing servo operation, is opened during emergency operation P and T connections.
via the cylinder pressure and connects half of the displace-
ment chambers to the return. The displacement volume of
the rotor set is therefore, reduced by a volume of 2:1. Check valve
The manually generated pressure is doubled as is the num- This valve which is fitted in the P connection prevents:
ber of turns of the steering wheel. The return flow of oil from the steering cylinder into the
With a manual steering moment of 50 Nm and a rotational hydraulic system when the cylinder pressure, due to travel
speed of 20 min1 it is possible to achieve the following pres- obstructions, is greater than the system pressure. Steering
sures: shocks at the steering wheel are thereby suppressed.
The sucking in of air via the P connection during emer-
gency operation.
200/100

250/125

320/160
125/60

160/80

Nom.
MLenk
sizes

50 Nm p in bar 40 30 24 19 15
70 Nm p in bar 42 33 22 20

CAUTION!
The emergency operating mode is not intended for continu-
ous operation!
f If, for steering during emergency operation, a higher
pressure is required then an emergency steering pump
must be fitted.

938
RE 11867/03.2012 LAGU Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Steering moment - standard 1) M Nm 5
Steering moment - emergency operation M Nm 160 permissible
Max. tightening torque MA for the mounting screws Nm 30 (see RE 11874 steering column)

Hydraulic
Nominal pressure p bar 175
Pressure fluid see page 8
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the class 19/16/13 2)
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (c)

Displacement Displacement Flow Max. perm. pressure in port

volume volume
Steering unit
servo operation emergency Nom 3) Max. P T L and R
type
cm3 operation l/min l/min bar bar bar
cm3
LAGU 125/60 125 60 12.5 35 175 20 240
LAGU 160/80 160 80 16 50 175 20 240
LAGU 200/100 200 100 20 50 175 20 240
LAGU 250/125 250 125 25 50 175 20 240
LAGU 320/160 320 160 32 50 175 20 240

1) other steering moment variants (e.g. low) on request

2) The cleanliness classes specified for components must be adhered to in hydraulic systems.
Effective filtration prevents malfunction and, at the same time, prolongs the service life of components.
For the selection of filters, see data sheets RE 50070, RE 50076, RE 50081, RE 50086, RE 50087 and RE 50088.
3) Related to the steering speed of 100 steering rotations/min.

939 6
 8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGU RE 11867/03.2012

Pressure fluid technical data

Pressure fluids Further on the selection of pressure fluids

Before carrying out any engineering please refer to the A prerequisite to being able to select the correct pressure
extensive information regarding pressure fluid selection and fluid is knowing the operating temperature and the ambient
application conditions in our catalogue sheets RE 90220 temperature.
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally compatible The pressure fluid should be so selected that the operating
fluids). These catalogue sheets refer to axial piston units, viscosity at the working temperature lies within the optimum
however, the details can be analogously applied to the range (see selection diagram).
steering units. For pressure fluids that require FKM seals
We recommend that the next higher viscosity class is se-
please contact ourselves.
lected.
Operating viscosity
Example:
We recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating
For an ambient temperature of X C the tank temperature
temperature) for efficiency and service life, is selected within
stabilises at 60 C. To achieve the optimum viscosity, this
the optimum range of
relates to the viscosity classes of VG 46 or VG 68; VG 68
opt = optimum operating viscosity range 16 to 46 mm2/s should be selected.
with reference to the temperature. Pressure fluid filtration
Limiting viscosity The finer the filtration the higher the cleanliness class of the
pressure fluid is achieved and so the higher the service life
For the limiting conditions the following values apply:
of the entire hydraulic system.
min = 10 mm2/s at a maximum permissible temperature of
max = +80 C
max = 800 mm2/s NOTE!
Temperature range: (see selection diagram) To ensure the functionability of the steering pump a
minimum pressure fluid cleanliness class of 19/16/13 to
min = 20 C ISO 4406 is necessary.
max = +80 C
CAUTION!
If there is the possibility of there being a temperature differ-
Operating the unit with contaminated hydraulic fluid may
ence of more than 20 C between the steering unit and the
lead to the steering system failing.
pressure fluid, then either a LD or LDA version or an open
center version for warming the steering unit should be fitted.

Selection diagram

40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG

VG 68
VG 32
VG 46
VG

200
10
22

100
60
40 46
Viscosity range

Nopt

20
16

10

5 5
40 25 10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
Pressure fluid Temperature * in C

*min = 40 C temperature range *max = 115 C

940
RE 11867/03.2012 LAGU Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Calculating the steering moment

1 b
Steering moment M = 0.05 FA e
[Nm]
1+ 200 0.7
b

Steering force M 3
F = I 10 [N]

h
b

l
M

Formula symbols
Formula Formula
Designation Unit Designation Unit
symbol symbol
A Required cylinder area mm2 l Smallest, effective steering lever mm

A1 Cylinder piston area, differential cylinder mm2 M Steering moment Nm

A2 Cylinder ring area, differential cylinder mm2 n Steering wheel rotational speed min-1

b Tyre width mm nleer Motor idling RPM min-1

d Piston rod diameter mm nMotor Motor operating RPM min-1

D Cylinder diameter mm p Steering pressure bar

e Distance of swivel bearing to center of tyre mm qvp Pump flow l/min

F Steering force N V Steering unit displacement cm3/U

FA Steering axle force N VP Steering pump displacement cm3/U

h Cylinder stroke length mm VZYL Cylinder volume cm3

i No. of steering wheel turns Co-efficient of friction

941 6
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGU RE 11867/03.2012

Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump

Steering cylinder Steering pump

The pump should be so selected that when the motor is
F
Required cylinder area A= 10 [mm2] idling, a steering velocity of approx. 50 min1 can still be
p achieved. The maximum steering speed, which is dependent
on the steering wheel diameter, is approx. 100 to 150 min1.
Cylinder area (piston side) A1 = D2 [mm2]
4 Pump flow qVP = V (n +10) 103 l/min.
The pump displacement ( nominal size) required for steer-
Cylinder area (rod side) A2 = (D2d2) [mm2] ing at idling speed and at operating speed of the vehicle
4
must be calculated.
When using a differential or double roded cylinder, A2 must Pump size at idling speed
be greater than the required cylinder area.
If two cross connected differential cylinders are to be qVP 103
VP = [cm3/U]
used, then A1 + A2 must be greater thant the required nleer
cylinder area.
The nominal size of steering unit results from the cylinder Pump size at operating speed
volume and the required number of steering wheel turns.
qVP 103
Cylinder volume VP = [cm3/U]
nMotor
Ah
VZYL = [cm3]
103

Displacement volume LAGU

VZYL
V= [cm3/U]
i

Normally there are 3 to 5 turns of the steering wheel from

end stop to end stop.

NOTE!
Further information is availabe here:
f Suitable steering columns RE 11874
f associated priority valves for steering
systems contained in load signal circuits: RE 27548
f General information: RE 64020-B1
f Product-specific applications: RE 07015-B2

942
RE 11867/03.2012 LAGU Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Unit dimensions: types LAGU / LAGULD (dimensions in mm)

Gear hub profile 16/32
60 diametrical pitch to
ANS B921-1970
44,4 25,4

6,3
2,8
28,5 p0,5

15 min.
30 p1
59 p0,5

T L
L

M10; 15
LD

44
l1
R

P R

1)

l2

80 +3 44

Nom. size l1 l2
125 135 16.5
160 139 21.1
200 145 26.4
88 +3
80 +3

250 151 33.0

320 161 42.3
8
2p
0,3

Inch, metric thread

59 M10; 16
3/8-16 UNC; 16 2)

1) LD drilling with version LAGULD d1

2) Only with version 12

Connection Version d1 d2 d4 b min. a1 a2

a1
b

01 G 1/2 28+0.4 14 max. 0.2

06 M18x1.5 19.8+0.1 29+0.4 14.5 max. 0.2 2.4 +0.4 151
P, T, L, R
12 3/4-16 UNF 20.6+0.1 30+0.5 14.3 max. 0.2 2.4 +0.4 151
40 M18x1.5 25+0.4 12 max. 0.2
UNF - thread
01 G 1/4 25+0.4 12 1 0.5 d4
06 M12x1.5 13.8+0.1 25+0.4 11.5 1 0.5 2.4 +0.4 151
LD d2
12 7/16-20 UNF 12.4+0.1 21+0.5 11.5 1 0.5 2.3 +0.4 121
d1
40 M12x1.5 25+0.4 12 1 0.5
a1
b

a2

NOTE!
The LAGU...LDA.. version is not contained within the table,
for further details see page 12.

943 6
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGU RE 11867/03.2012

Unit dimensions: type LAGULDA (dimensions in mm)

Gear hub profile 16/32

diametrical pitch to 60
ANS B921-1970
44,4 25,4

6,3
2,8

15 min.
30 p1
T L
L

M10; 15

44
l1
R

P R
l2 LD

44
80 +3

45
Nom. size l1 l2
125 135 16.5
160 139 21.1
200 145 26.4
88 +3
80 +3

8 Metric thread
2p
0,3

59
M10; 16
d1
a1
b

Connection Version d1 d2 d4 b min. a1

P, T, L, R 40 M18x1.5 12

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Mobile Applications Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch
Zum Eisengieer 1 Ludwigsluster Chaussee 5 Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 19370 Parchim, Germany without its consent.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 60 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 63 70 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
www.boschrexroth.de or 60 62 01 application can be derived from our information. The information
given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment
and verification. It must be remembered that our products are
subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

944
Steering unit LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012 1/12

Replaces: 09.2007

Data sheet

Nominal sizes 160 to 300

Component series 2X
Nominal pressure 175 bar
Maximum flow 50 l/min
H6212_d

Table of contents Features

Content Page LAGZ steering units are used in hydraulic steering circuits
Features 1 of vehicles and mobile machines with large axle loads and
travel speeds not exceeding 50 km/h.
Ordering code 2
With the aid of a steering unit even heavy vehicles can
Function, section 3
easily be steered. The absence of a mechanical connection
Device variants 4, 5 between the steering unit and the steering axle allows the
Functions in the steering circuit 6 designer to realize solutions, which would be impossible
Technical data 7, 8 with conventional steering systems.
In the event of a failure of the power assistance, vehicles
Calculating the steering moment 9
can also be steered manually with the LAGZ. The required
Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump 10 force is reduced by changing the transmission ratio. In
Unit dimensions 11, 12 many cases, only this feature makes it possible to adhere
to the permissible limit values. A second steering pump is in
many cases superfluous.
In the power-assisted mode, the LAGZ operates with two
rotor sets. In emergency operation, one rotor set is switched
off. This allows optional combinations (transmission ratios)
within rotor set series.

945 6
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012

Ordering code

LAG Z 2X M *

Steering unit Special specifications

Design Please consult our sales
With transmission organization
(2 rotor sets) =Z 6) Pipe ports P, T, L, R/LD
Displacement (cm3/rev) 01 = Pipe thread to DIN 3852
Power- Emer-
06 = Metric ISO thread
Nom. size 2) R 1) assisted gency to DIN 3852
op. op. 12 = UNF thread to SAE
160/60 160 60 40 = Metric ISO thread
160/80 160 80 to DIN 3852
200/60 200 60 Seal material
200/80 200 80 M= Suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to
200/100 200 100 DIN 51524 and fast bio-degradable hydraulic
220/60 220 60 fluids (HETG, rape seed oil) to VDMA 24568
220/80 220 80 (see RE 90221)
220/100 220 100 5) Pressure relief valve setting
240/80 240 80 (pressure differential)
240/100 240 100 90 = 90 bar
300/100 300 100 140 = 140 bar
Noise level 175 = 175 bar
Standard 3) = 5) Shock valve setting
Low 4) =N (pressure differential)
Component series 150 = 150 bar
20 to 29 = 2X 200 = 200 bar
(20 to 29: Unchanged installation 240 = 240 bar
and connection dimensions) Reaction
No code = Without reaction
R= With reaction
Load-sensing
No code = Without load signal in Open Center (OC) variant
= Standard programme LD = Dynamic load signal
= Extended programme

1) Standard product range for LAGZ with reaction, OC and LD Order example:
available in all sizes.
2) LAGZ 200/100 -2X/LD150-90M01
The specified sizes are part of a preferred series; other combina-
tions with standard sizes 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160 and 200 are Steering unit with integrated valves
possible on request.
3) Size 200/100, dynamic load signal
Specify for LD variant
4) Specify for Open Center (OC) variant Shock valves 150 bar, pressure relief valve 90 bar
5) The response pressure of shock valves must be 50 bar higher Pipe ports P, T, L, R of G 1/2 , LD of G 1/4
than the setting of the pressure relief valve, but not exceed 2.2
times the setting of the latter (see 38 StVZO, German Road LAGZ 200/100 N2X/150-90M01
Traffic Licensing Regulation).
Preferably 150 to 90; 200 to 140; 240 to 175. Steering unit with integrated valves
6) For thread dimensions: see Unit dimensions on page 11. Size 200/100, low noise
Shock valves 150 bar, pressure relief valve 90 bar
Pipe ports P, T, L, R in G 1/2

946
RE 11868/03.2012 LAGZ Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12

Function, section
Pilot spool (1) of the control valve is rotated via the steering valve for the load signal is installed instead (see sectional
column in relation to control sleeve (2). This opens cross- drawing).
sections between the spool and the sleeve. The pressure oil Two shock valves (6) protect ports L and R to the steering
acts on rotor sets (3 and 10) and sets them into motion. The cylinder. If one of the shock valve responds, the discharged
oil is then fed via the rotor set to the steering cylinder. The oil is fed via anti-cavitation valve (7) to the opposite side, or
rotation of both rotors acts on the sleeve, which then follows missing leak-oil is aspired from the tank.
the rotary movement of the spool.
In the event of an oil supply failure, the LAGZ operates as
The size of the opened cross-sections depends on the turn- hand pump. In this case, the supply pressure (pilot pressure
ing speed of the steering wheel and on the steering pres- for the changeover spool) drops, too. Changeover spool
sure; on Load-Sensing variants, it depends exclusively on (12) is moved to its starting position by the spring, so that all
the turning speed. chambers of rotor set 2 (10) are connected to the internal
If the steering movement is interrupted and the spool is at a chamber. At the same time, the connection between the two
standstill, the oil, which still flows through the open cross- rotor sets is interrupted. The displacement of the steering
section to the rotor, causes the rotor and hence the sleeve unit is therefore reduced by the volume of rotor set 2 (10).
to continue to rotate. Rotor set 1 (3) determines the displacement during emer-
The rotary movement then causes the cross-section to close gency operation.
- now, the rotor also comes to a standstill and, at the same Oil can be taken from the tank via anti-cavitation valve (8),
time, the steering cylinder is in the required position. Center- with check valve (9) preventing air to be aspired via the
ing spring (4) brings and holds the spool and the sleeve in a pump port (P). During normal operation, this valve prevents
neutral position to each other. shocks on the steering wheel caused by excessive external
Pressure relief valve (5) limits the system pressure of the steering forces.
steering circuit. On the Load-Sensing variants, the pilot

5 8

6
6 Shock valve
3 11 12 10 7 Anti-cavitation valve
1 Pilot spool 8 Anti-cavitation valve
2 Control sleeve 9 Check valve
3 Rotor set 1 10 Rotor set 2
4 Centering spring 11 Changeover housing
5 Pressure relief valve 12 Changoever spool
7

947 6
4/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012

Device variants

Standard variant L R L R
Open Center with Non Reaction = OC /
NR
Mainly used in steering systems with fixed
displacement hydraulic pumps.
When no steering movement is performed,
the connection between pump port (P) and
tank port (T) is open (OC), and the pump
flow is directed to the tank almost at zero
pressure. Ports L1) (left) and R1) (right)
are blocked in the neutral position. In this
way, external forces acting via the steering
cylinder are supported without the driver
perceiving any resulting reaction forces on
the steering wheel (Non Reaction).

1) Contrary to standardization, the actuator

lines in steering systems are usually desig-
nated L and R, not A and B.

Note!
Steering units for vehicles with articulated
chassis or rear-axle steering must always
be selected in the NR variant. P T P T

Standard variant L L R
R
Open Center with Reaction = OC / R
In the neutral position, the cylinder ports
are connected with each other. External
forces acting via the steering cylinder are
perceived as reaction force by the driver
on the steering wheel (Reaction). When
the driver releases the steering wheel after
the steering maneuver is completed, the
wheels and the steering wheel auto-
matically return to straight-ahead travel,
provided that the steering geometry is suit-
able for this.

P T P T

948
RE 11868/03.2012 LAGZ Bosch Rexroth AG 5/12

Device variants
L R L R
Load-Sensing variant
Steering units with Load Sensing provide
a load signal that can be used for con-
trolling a priority valve and/or a pump.
They are designed as Closed-Center
steering systems, with the connection
of pump port (P) to tank port (T) being
closed in the neutral position.
If the steering system and working
hydraulics are supplied by a common
pump, a priority valve must be installed.
This valve ensures the preferred supply
of the steering unit with oil, with the valve
being controlled by the load signal of the
steering unit. When no steering move-
ment is performed, the entire oil flow
LD
from the pump is available to the working
hydraulics. Fixed or variable displace-
ment pumps can be used as hydraulic LD
pump.

P T P T

Load signal, dynamic

The oil flowing in the load signal line transmits the load
signal, with the pilot oil flowing from the priority valve to the
steering unit. Also in the neutral position, a continuous, small
pilot oil flow of ca. 0.5 l/min is provided. Consequently, the
steering unit has approximately the same temperature as the
oil.
Thermal shocks are largely prevented.
The LD variant causes the priority valve to react faster. The
hard point at the beginning of the steering movement is usu-
ally no longer perceivable - even under cold start conditions.

Low-noise variant
Steering units of the LAGZ Open Center variant are gener-
ally delivered in the low-noise variant N.

949 6
6/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012

Functions in the steering circuit

Power-assisted mode Pressure relief valve

Steering units of type LAGZ consist of a manually operated The pressure relief valve for the hydraulic pump is available
rotary spool valve, two rotor sets, which operate according in three pressure settings:
to the gerotor principle, and the required valves for the steer-
90 bar
ing circuit.
140 bar
The nominal size for the power-assisted mode results from
175 bar
the sum of the rotor set sizes. The size of the rotor set is to
be selected so that with 3 to 5 turns of the steering wheel, it
is possible to steer from one positive stop to the other. NOTE!
The pressure in the T line increases the set pressure by the
Emergency operation equivalent value.
During normal operation of the steering unit, that is, when
the hydraulic oil displaces a sufficient amount of oil, the Shock and anti-cavitation valves
torque required on the steering wheel is < 5 Nm. In the event The cylinder side valves that are built into the LAGZ unit is
of a hydraulic pump failure, the steering unit operates in the available in three pressure settings:
emergency mode. The required steering pressure must then
be generated by manual force on the steering wheel. 150 bar
With the LAGZ, the displacement can be reduced by switch- 200 bar
ing one rotor set off. The pressure that can be generated 240 bar
manually depends on the size of rotor set 1 (see page 3)
and the force applied to the steering wheel. The smaller the Anti-cavitation valve
displacement, the higher the pressure that can be built up If the hydraulic pump fails then the spressure fluid is drawn
manually. from the reservoir via this valve, which is fitted between the
For emergency operation, the size must be selected so that P and T connections.
legal stipulations with regard to the maximum manual force
are complied with. Check valve
Taking account of the sizes for the displacement, certain This valve which is fitted in the P connection prevents:
combinations are possible for the relevant transmission
ratio. The return flow of oil from the steering cylinder into the
hydraulic system when the cylinder pressure, due to travel
During manual steering, the following pressures can be obstructions, is greater than the system pressure. Steering
achieved in dependence upon the steering moment: shocks at the steering wheel are thereby suppressed.
Msteer Size .../60 .../80 .../100 The sucking in of air via the P connection during emer-
gency operation.
50 Nm p in bar 40 30 24
70 Nm p in bar 56 42 33

CAUTION!
The emergency operating mode is not intended for continu-
ous operation!
f If, for steering during emergency operation, a higher
pressure is required then an emergency steering pump
must be fitted.

950
RE 11868/03.2012 LAGZ Bosch Rexroth AG 7/12

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Steering moment - standard 1) M Nm 5
Steering moment - emergency operation M Nm 160 permissible
Max. tightening torque MA for the mounting screws Nm 30 (see RE 11874 steering column)

Hydraulic
Nominal pressure p bar 175
Pressure fluid see page 8
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the class 19/16/13 2)
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (c)

Displacement Displacement Flow Max. perm. pressure in port

volume volume
Steering unit
servo operation emergency Nom 3) Max. 4) P T L and R
type
cm3 operation l/min l/min bar bar bar
cm3
LAGZ 160/60 160 60 16 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 160/80 160 80 16 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 200/60 200 60 20 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 200/80 200 80 20 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 200/100 200 100 20 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 220/60 220 60 22 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 220/80 220 80 22 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 220/100 220 100 22 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 240/80 240 80 24 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 240/100 240 100 24 50 175 20 240
LAGZ 300/100 300 100 30 50 175 20 240

1) other steering moment variants (e.g. low) on request

2) The cleanliness classes specified for components must be adhered to in hydraulic systems.
Effective filtration prevents malfunction and, at the same time, prolongs the service life of components.
For the selection of filters, see data sheets RE 50070, RE 50076, RE 50081, RE 50086, RE 50087 and RE 50088.
3) Related to the steering speed of 100 steering rotations/min.
4) Values for standard centering package

951 6
 8/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012

Technical data of the hydraulic fluid

Pressure fluids Further on the selection of pressure fluids

Before carrying out any engineering please refer to the A prerequisite to being able to select the correct pressure
extensive information regarding pressure fluid selection and fluid is knowing the operating temperature and the ambient
application conditions in our catalogue sheets RE 90220 temperature.
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally compatible The pressure fluid should be so selected that the operating
fluids). These catalogue sheets refer to axial piston units, viscosity at the working temperature lies within the optimum
however, the details can be analogously applied to the range (see selection diagram).
steering units. For pressure fluids that require FKM seals
We recommend that the next higher viscosity class is se-
please contact ourselves.
lected.
Operating viscosity
Example:
We recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating
For an ambient temperature of X C the tank temperature
temperature) for efficiency and service life, is selected within
stabilises at 60 C. To achieve the optimum viscosity, this
the optimum range of
relates to the viscosity classes of VG 46 or VG 68; VG 68
opt = optimum operating viscosity range 16 to 46 mm2/s should be selected.
with reference to the temperature. Pressure fluid filtration
Limiting viscosity The finer the filtration the higher the cleanliness class of the
pressure fluid is achieved and so the higher the service life
For the limiting conditions the following values apply:
of the entire hydraulic system.
min = 10 mm2/s at a maximum permissible temperature of
max = +80 C
max = 800 mm2/s NOTE!
Temperature range: (see selection diagram) To ensure the functionability of the steering pump a
minimum pressure fluid cleanliness class of 19/16/13 to
min = 20 C ISO 4406 is necessary.
max = +80 C
CAUTION!
If there is the possibility of there being a temperature differ-
Operating the unit with contaminated hydraulic fluid may
ence of more than 20 C between the steering unit and the
lead to the steering system failing.
pressure fluid, then either a LD or LDA version or an open
center version for warming the steering unit should be fitted.

Selection diagram

40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1600 1600
1000
600
400
200
VG

VG 68
VG 32
VG 46
VG

10
22

100
60
46
Viscosity range

40
Nopt

20
16

10

5 5
40 25 10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
Pressure fluid Temperature * in C

*min = 40 C temperature range *max = 115 C

952
RE 11868/03.2012 LAGZ Bosch Rexroth AG 9/12

Calculating the steering moment

1 b
Steering moment M = 0,05 FA e
[Nm]
1+ 200 0,7
b

Steering force M 3
F = I 10 [N]

h
b

l
M

Formula symbols
Formula Formula
Designation Unit Designation Unit
symbol symbol
A Required cylinder area mm2 l Smallest, effective steering lever mm

A1 Cylinder piston area, differential cylinder mm2 M Steering moment Nm

A2 Cylinder ring area, differential cylinder mm2 n Steering wheel rotational speed min-1

b Tyre width mm nleer Motor idling RPM min-1

d Piston rod diameter mm nMotor Motor operating RPM min-1

D Cylinder diameter mm p Steering pressure bar

e Distance of swivel bearing to center of tyre mm qvp Pump flow l/min

F Steering force N V Steering unit displacement cm3/U

FA Steering axle force N VP Steering pump displacement cm3/U

h Cylinder stroke length mm VZYL Cylinder volume cm3

i No. of steering wheel turns Co-efficient of friction

953 6
10/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012

Defining the steering cylinder and steering pump

Steering cylinder Steering pump

The pump should be so selected that when the motor is
F
Required cylinder area A= 10 [mm2] idling, a steering velocity of approx. 50 min1 can still be
p achieved. The maximum steering speed, which is dependent
on the steering wheel diameter, is approx. 100 to 150 min1.
Cylinder area (piston side) A1 = D2 [mm2]
4 Pump flow qVP = V (n +10) 103 l/min.
The pump displacement ( nominal size) required for steer-
Cylinder area (rod side) A2 = (D2d2) [mm2] ing at idling speed and at operating speed of the vehicle
4
must be calculated.
When using a differential or double roded cylinder, A2 must Pump size at idling speed
be greater than the required cylinder area.
If two cross connected differential cylinders are to be qVP 103
VP = [cm3/U]
used, then A1 + A2 must be greater thant the required nleer
cylinder area.
The nominal size of steering unit results from the cylinder Pump size at operating speed
volume and the required number of steering wheel turns.
qVP 103
Cylinder volume VP = [cm3/U]
nMotor
Ah
VZYL = [cm3]
103

Displacement volume LAGU

VZYL
V= [cm3/U]
i

Normally there are 3 to 5 turns of the steering wheel from

end stop to end stop.

NOTE!
Further information is availabe here:
f Suitable steering columns RE 11874
f associated priority valves for steering
systems contained in load signal circuits: RE 27548
f General information: RE 64020-B1
f Product-specific applications: RE 07015-B2

954
RE 11868/03.2012 LAGZ Bosch Rexroth AG 11/12

Unit dimensions: Type LAGZ; LAGZLD (dimensions in mm)

60 Gear hub profile 16/32

Diametral pitch to
44,4 25,4
ANS B921-1970

6,3
2,8
34 p0,5

15 min.
30 p1
63 p0,5

T L
L

M10; 15
LD

44
R

P R

l
1)

b1
b2

80 +3 44

Nom. size l b1 b2
160/60 192 8.3 13.2
160/80 192 10.5 10.5
200/60 197 8.3 18.5
88 +3

200/80 197 10.5 16.5

80 +3

200/100 197 13.2 13.2

8 220/60 200 8.3 21.1
2p
0,3 220/80 200 10.5 18.5
220/100 200 13.2 16.5
59 M10; 16 240/80 202 10.5 21.1
3/8-16 UNC; 16 2)
For ports, see page 11.
1) LD bore only on variant LAGZLD
2) Only with variant 12

955 6
12/12 Bosch Rexroth AG LAGZ RE 11868/03.2012

Unit diemensions: Typ LAGZ / LAGZLD (dimensions in mm)

Ports Imperial, metric thread UNF, metric thread

d4
d4 d2
A
d1 d1

a1
b

a2
a1
b

Port Variant d1 d2 d4 b min. a1 a2

01 G 1/2 28 +0.4 14 max. 0.2

06 M18x1.5 19.8 +0.1 29 +0.4 14.5 max. 0.2 2.4 +0.4 15 1

P, T, L, R
12 3/4-16 UNF 20.6 +0.1 30 +0.5 14.3 max. 0.2 2.4 +0.4 15 1

40 M18x1.5 25 +0.4 12 max. 0.2

01 G 1/4 25 +0.4 12 1 0.5

06 M12x1.5 13.8 +0.1 25 +0.4 11.5 1 0.5 2.4 +0.4 15 1

LD
12 7/16-20 UNF 12.4 +0.1 21 +0.5 11.5 1 0.5 2.3 +0.4 12 1

40 M12x1.5 25 +0.4 12 1 0.5

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Mobile Applications Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch
Zum Eisengieer 1 Ludwigsluster Chaussee 5 Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 19370 Parchim, Germany without its consent.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 60 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 63 70 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
www.boschrexroth.de oder 60 62 01 application can be derived from our information. The information
given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment
and verification. It must be remembered that our products are
subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

956
Bypass priority valve LPD RE 27549/05.2012 1/6

Data sheet

Nominal size 120

Component series 1X
Nominal pressure 350 bar
Maximum flow 120 l/min
LPD

Table of contents Features

Content Page For supplying the steering system and working hydraulics,
only one pump is required
Features 1
The flow is available in parallel with working hydraulics and
Function 2
steering with low pressure losses
Function, Section 3 The prioritization of the steering occurs indirectly via the
Symbol 4 pressure in the EF-connection which acts on the pressure
Ordering code 4 compensators in the working hydraulics
Technical data 5 Energy saving in combination with variable pumps
Pressure fluid technical data 5 System requirements / impacts
Unit dimensions 6
Steering units with LS pressure relief in the steering circuit
Flow-sharing (LUDV) control block
Defined pump control pressure setting
Consider line conditions (observe pressure drop p of CF
line to steering and EF line to LUDV control block)

957 6
 RE 27549/05.2012 | LPD Bosch Rexroth AG 2/6

Function

Priority valves of type LPD are used in conjunction with In contrast to the full flow priority valves, the full pump flow
steering systems of closed center - load sensing design and is available for the control block (if it is not steered) without
flow-sharing (LUDV) control blocks. additional pressure losses by using the bypass priority valve
They distribute the pump flow between the steering and LPD.
working hydraulics, whereby the steering supply has priority If steered, the flow is distributed on the steering and control
(see the sectional view in its initial position). block. With the threat of undersaturation of the steering, the
In conjunction with variable displacement pumps it is pos- control pressure EF from the priority valve is reported via the
sible to create energy-saving hydraulic systems. bypass priority valve LPD to the pressure compensator of
the LUDV control block. The pressure compensators of the
The priority valve works in the same way as a 3-way flow
control block throttle the hydraulic system so that the neces-
control valve. The controlled flow (CF) is made available to
sary flow rate is available for the steering system.
the steering and the control pressure (EF) is passed to the
pressure compensator of the working hydraulics.

Steering system with LPD valve

L R

LS

P T

CF EF
2 4
LS

1 Pump
2 Bypass priority valve LPD
3 Steering unit LAG
4 Control block

958
RE 27549/05.2012 | LPD Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6

Function, Section

Neutral position depressurized Case 1: The load pressure of the working hydraulics is
In the neutral position, the spool is kept on stop by the higher than the load pressure of the steering
spring preload. The cross section from pump to steering is No signal pressure from EF to the pressure compensa-
fully opened (P CF). tor, as pEF < pLast-AH
The cross section from pump to LUDV pressure compensa- The load pressure of the working hydraulics (higher load
tor is completely opened (P EF). pressure) is reported at the pump.
Control position 1 The pump provides the required flow.
In control position 1 (pump on, no steering) the spool is in a
control position, in which the CF control edge (P CF) is Case 2: The load pressure of the working hydraulics is
opened minimal. Here, the flushing flow is compensated for lower than the load pressure of the steering
steering. Pump not fully swiveled out:
Control position 2 The LS signal of the steering (higher load pressure)
is reported at the pump.
During operation (steering and active working hydraulics, the
Pump fully swivelled out, flow is not sufficient for steer-
LPD is in the control position 2.
ing:
Depending on the required steering flow and the load signal Undersaturation: pEF > pLast-AH
(LS signal) the cross section to the steering (P CF) is The signal pressure pEF is reported to the pressure com-
open. In parallel, the EF control geometry will be opened. pensators of the working hydraulics (AH) and regulates
the working hydraulics.
The released flow is thus available to the steering
and the steering is prioritized.

Control position 2

E2 E3 D1 PP damping orifice
Q D2 LD dynamic orifice
D3 LD damping orifice
F13 Preload (control pressure differential)

Ports
P Pump
CF Steering
LS Load signal steering
FG DG MT E4 G2///4 EF Control signal pressure compensator

Differences between full-flow priority valve LPS (RE 27548) and bypass priority valve LPD (RE 27549)
LPS LPD
Size Interpretation of the nominal size results by the flow from Interpretation of the nominal size results by the steering
the priority valve to the control block flow
Prioritization Direct prioritization of the steering flow compared with the Indirect prioritization via signal pressure (EF) of LPD to
flow of working hydraulics the pressure compensator of the control block. Prioritiza-
tion results by the pressure compensator in the control
block.
Flow Flow to steering and control block is conducted via the Only steering flow and signal flow are conducted via the
LPS LPD

959 6
4/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LPD | RE 27549/05.2012

Symbol

Standard version line mounting

CF EF
The LPD..R.. priority valve is a version suitable for line
mounting. These priority valves are available with the nomi-
nal flow of 120 l/min. When using the type LPD..R.. care
has to be taken that the pressure relief valve, for the load LS
signal line, is integrated into the steering unit. If a LPD..R..
is used in conjunction with a steering unit without a pressure
relief valve, then the load signal lines have to be externally
protected.
P

Ordering code

LPD 120 R 1X LD 50 *

Nominal size
120 l/min = 120 Further details in clear text
Connection type Special specifications
Line mounting =R XXX = Please clarify with our
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X product management
(10 to 19: unchanged installation Pipe connections
and connection dimensions) 50 = Pipe thread to DIN ISO 6149-1
Load Sensing
Dynamic load signal = LD
Control pressure differential
5 bar = 05
10 bar = 10 PP LD LD
15 bar = 15 damping dynamic damping
orifice orifice orifice Orifice
20 bar = 20
0 Without
3 3 3 0,6 mm
4 4 4 0,8 mm
6 6 6 1,0 mm

Preferred program

960
RE 27549/05.2012 | LPD Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Weight kg 2,9
Installation position Spool axis horizontal
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80
Coating RAL 5010

Hydraulic
Nominal pressure p bar 350
Operating pressure, P, EF pmax bar 350
max. at port
CF, LS, R, L pmax bar 200
Nom. flow P CF qnom l/min 120
Flow resistance, P CF p bar < 5 at qnom
nominal
P EF p bar < 2 at qEF = 5 l/min
Pressure fluid See below
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of the hy- Class 19/16/13, for this we recommend a filter with a minimum
draulic fluid cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c) retention rate of 20 100 according to ISO 4572

Pressure fluid technical data

Before carrying out any engineering please refer to the Selection diagram
extensive information regarding pressure fluid selection and
application conditions in our catalogue sheets RE 90220
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally compatible
fluids). For pressure fluids that require FKM seals please
contact the product management.

Operating viscosity
We recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating
temperature) for efficiency and service life, is selected within
the optimum range of opt
opt = optimum operating viscosity range 16 to 46 mm2/s
with reference to the temperature.
Limiting viscosity
For the limiting conditions the following values apply:
min = 10 mm2/s at a maximum permissible temperature of
max = +80 C Pressure fluid Temperature in C
max = 800 mm2/s min = 40C Temperature range max = 115C

Temperature range: (see selection diagram)

min = 20 C
max = +80 C

961 6
6/6 Bosch Rexroth AG LPD | RE 27549/05.2012

Unit dimensions (in mm)

162 Ports
93.5 P Pump
57.5 CF Steering
21.5 30 LS Load signal steering
EF Control signal at
pressure compensator

22.5
45
Connections acc. to ISO 6149-1

EF LS Port Dimension
CF
P M27 x 2
26 CF M27 x 2

LS M14 x 1,5

EF M14 x 1,5

1 Two fixation bores, 11

2 Mounting surface
79

80
3 Washer 1)
1 69 4 Fixation screws 1)
40
11
1

Assembly note
116 Assemble the LPD free of tension.
Insert a washer between hous-
128
ing and mounting flange before
screwing.
75.5

3
P 5
4

1) Not included in the scope of supply.

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Zum Eisengieer 1 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
www.boschrexroth.de

962
Priority valve LPS RE 27548/03.2012 1/10

Replaces: 06.2006

Data sheet

Nominal sizes 40 to 160

Component series 1X
Nominal pressure 250 bar
Maximum flow 40 to 160 l/min
H5977

Table of contents Features

Content Page The LPS priority valve is used in conjunction with steering
Features 1 units using load sensing.
Ordering details 2 The priority valves guarantee the priority supply of steering
circuits, before all other actuators, with pressure fluid as
Function, section 3 defined in the statutory regulations.
Versions, symbols 4 The steering circuit is supplied with priority independently
Technical data 5 of pressure. Pressure fluid that is not required for steering
Unit dimensions 6 to 9 is returned to tank or is made available to other actuators.
For supplying the steering system and other actuators, e.g.
working hydraulics, only one pump is required.
With the aid of priority valves it is possible, in conjunction
with variable displacement pumps, to create energy saving
hydraulic systems.
In conjunction with other valves priority valves can also be
used as sequencing valve, flow divider or pressure relief
valve.

963 6
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LPS RE 27548/03.2012

Ordering details

LP S 1X LD *

Type of device Special specifications

Priority valve Please clarify with our
sales organization
Design
Standard =S Pipe connections
01 = Pipe thread to
Nominal size
DIN 3852
l/min A1) P1) R1) 02 = Metric ISO thread to
40 = 40 DIN 3852
80 = 80 12 = UNF thread to SAE
120 = 120 2; 3) LD damping orifice
160 = 160 2= 1.0 mm
Connection type 3= 1.5 mm
Flangeable =A 2) LD dynamic orifice
Pump mounting =P 4= 0.8 mm
Line mounting =R 6= 1.0 mm
Component series 2) PP damping orifice
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X 4= 0.8 mm
(10 to 19: unchanged installation
6= 1.0 mm
and connection dimensions)
Load Sensing
Dynamic load signal = LD
Control pressure differential
bar A1) P1) R1)
4 =4
7 =7
10 = 10

= Standard programme Ordering example:

= Extended programme LPS 80 R1X/LD7-643/01
Priority valve; line mounting; nominal size 80;
Dynamic load signal; control pressure differential 7 bar;
1) Connection type Orifice combinationsn 1.0/0.8/1.5;
2) When testing the machine, the system can be optimised by Pipe connections: With pipe thread
changing the orifices.
3) Please take note! LPS 160 R1X/LD10-643/01
The LD damping orifice has to be larger than the LD dynamic
orifice. Priority valve; line mounting; nominal size 160;
Dynamic load signal; control pressure differential 10 bar;
Orifice combinations 1.0/0.8/1.5;
Pipe connections: With pipe thread

964
RE 27548/03.2012 LPS Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Function, section

The type LPS priority valves are used in conjunction with In the neutral position of the steering system the load signal
steering systems of closed centre - load sensing design. line is connected to tank, i.e. A4 is open.
They distribute the pump flow between the steering and As with a 3-way flow control valve the priority valve, by
work hydraulics, whereby the steering supply has priority controlling the flow at the control orifice A1, controls the
(see the sectional view in its initial position). pressure differential at the metering orifice A2 and thereby
In conjunction with variable displacement pumps it is pos- achieves a balanced between the forces acting on the con-
sible to create energy-saving hydraulic systems. trol spool. The required pressure-independent supply to the
The priority valve works in the same way as a 3-way flow steering is thereby guaranteed (see the principle shown in
control valve. The controlled flow (CF) is made available to the control position).
the steering and the remaining flow (EF) is passed to the The type LPS priority valve works independently of the
work hydraulics. steering pressure and of the work hydraulics pressure. This
The metering orifice A2 and A4 in this system is not in the is achieved via a second control orifice A3. It moves into its
flow control valve, but in the steering control valve. A2 is working position when the pressure in the work hydraulics is
closed in the neutral position of the steering (no steering higher than the steering pressure.
action) and is opened depending on the required flow. The
load signal is sensed behind the metering orifice.

A4
A2

EF CF LD

1
3 P = Pump
2 CF = Steering (control flow)
EF = Work hydraulics (excess flow)
PP A1 = Control orifice
A2 = Metering orifie
(in steering unit)
A1 A3 = Control orifice
A3
A4 = Tank unloading
P (in the steering power unit)
EF CF
1 LD dynamic orifice
2 LD damping orifice
3 PP damping orifice

LD

3 P 1 2

965 6
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LPS RE 27548/03.2012

Versions, symbols
Symbol LPS..A..
Standard version - flangeable L CF LD T R
The LPS..A.. priority valve is directly flanged onto the
steering unit. Both components result in a compact unit. No
piping is required between the priority valve and the steering
unit. This design is available with the nominal flows of 40
and 80 l/min. It is suitable for steering units up to 200 cm3/U.
The pilot control pressure relief valve for limiting the steering
pressure is contained within the steering unit.

L EF P T R
Standard version line mounting and pump mounting Symbol LPS..R..; LPS..P..
The LPS..R.. priority valve is a version suitable for line EF CF
mounting.
These priority valves are available with the nominal flows
of 40, 80, 120 and 160 l/min. When using the type LPS..R..
care has to be taken that the pressure relief valve, for the LD
load signal line, is integrated into the steering unit. If a
LPS..R.. is used in conjunction with a steering unit without
a pressure relief valve, then the load signal lines have to be
externally protected.
P
The LPS..P.. iversion is designed to be directly mounted
onto a gear pump. 40 and 80 l/min version are available.

Special version with throttle check valve as PP damper1) With throttle check valve as PP damper
The priority valve with an additional check valve for by-
EF CF
passing the PP dampening orifice in the direction of open-
ing is provided only for use in conjunction with variable
displacement pumps and was specifically developed for this
purpose.
LD
This special variant provides fast closing of control orifice A1
and suppresses a pressure drop in CF for power-assisted
steering in the case of a sudden pressure drop in work
hydraulics EF.
1) Only available as 160 l/min variant for in-pipe installation P

Special version with throttle check valve and CF max. With throttle check valve and pressure relief valve in PP
pressure relief valve in PP
EF CF
In addition to the special version with check valve in PP,
with this version a pressure relief valve is integrated in PP.
This pressure relief valve opens, when the pressure in the
CF line is by approx. 30 bar higher than the pressure on the
LD
PP side.
Control orifice A1 opens abruptly, and any pressure peaks
occurring in the P or CF line are reduced.

P
Load signal dynamic
P = Pump
Via the LD dynamic orifice a continuous small flow is passed
into the load signal lines from the CF pressure connection. It CF = Steering
is therefore guaranteed that the load signal lines are always EF = Work hydraulics
full. This leads to the priority valve having short reaction T = Tank
times. The dynamic orifice also takes over the unloading the
CF connection when the steering does not accept any oil LD = Load signal (dynamic)
flow and the other actuators are being operated with high R; L = Cylinder
pressure.

966
RE 27548/03.2012 LPS Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

General
Ambient temperature range C 20 to +80

Hydraulic
Nominal pressure p bar 250
Peak pressure Ports P, EF bar 250
Ports CF, LD, R, L bar 175
Pressure fluid see below
Pressure fluid temperature range C 20 to +80
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 to 800
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the Class 19/16/13 2)
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (c)

Pressure fluid technical data

Pressure fluids Example:

Before carrying out any engineering please refer to the For an ambient temperature of X C the tank temperature
extensive information regarding pressure fluid selection and stabilises at 60 C. To achieve the optimum viscosity, this
application conditions in our catalogue sheets RE 90220 relates to the viscosity classes of VG 46 or VG 68; VG 68
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally compatible should be selected.
fluids). These catalogue sheets refer to axial piston units, Pressure fluid filtration
however, the details can be analogously applied to the
The finer the filtration the higher the cleanliness class of the
steering units. For pressure fluids that require FKM seals
pressure fluid is achieved and so the higher the service life
please contact ourselves.
of the entire hydraulic system.
Operating viscosity
We recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating NOTE!
temperature) for efficiency and service life, is selected within
To ensure the functionability of the priority valve a minimum
the optimum range of
pressure fluid cleanliness class of 19/16/13 according to
opt = optimum operating viscosity range 16 to 46 mm2/s ISO 4406 is necessary.
with reference to the temperature. CAUTION!
Limiting viscosity Operating the unit with contaminated hydraulic fluid may
For the limiting conditions the following values apply: lead to the priority valve failing.
min = 10 mm2/s at a maximum permissible temperature of
max = +80 C Selection diagram
max = 800 mm2/s

Temperature range: (see selection diagram)

min = 20 C
max = +80 C

If there is the possibility of there being a temperature differ-

Viscosity range

ence of more than 20 C between the steering unit and the

pressure fluid, then either a LD or LDA version or an open
center version for warming the steering unit should be fitted.
opt

Further on the selection of pressure fluids

A prerequisite to being able to select the correct pressure
fluid is knowing the operating temperature and the ambient
temperature.
The pressure fluid should be so selected that the operating
viscosity at the working temperature lies within the optimum
range (see selection diagram).
We recommend that the next higher viscosity class is se- Pressure fluid Temperature in C
lected. min = 40 C temperature range max = 115 C

967 6
6/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LPS RE 27548/03.2012

Unit dimensions: type LPS..A.., NS40 and 80 (nominal dimensions in mm)

P = Pump
T = Tank
EF = Work hydraulics
R, L = Cylinder

1 4 x O-ring 24x2 1)
2 O-ring 6x2 1)
3 Valve fixation screws M10x40 1)
DIN 912 - 10.9; MA = 60+5 Nm

1) Included in the scope of supply

Threads version 01 and 02

(inch, metric)

Thread type

Size Port Version d1 d4+0.4 bmin. a10.5

01 G1/2 34 14 1
P, EF
02 M22x1.5 28 16 1
40, 80
01 G3/8 28 12 1
T, L, R
02 M18x1.5 24 12 1

968
RE 27548/03.2012 LPS Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10

Unit dimensions: type LPS..P...; NS40 and 80 (nominal dimensions in mm)

P = Pump
CF = Steering
EF = Work hydraulics
LD = Load signal

1 O-ring 20x2,5 1)
Valve fixation:
Cylinder screws according to ISO 4762
M6x3510.9 2); MA = 15 Nm
1) Included in the scope of supply
2) Not included in the scope of supply

Threads version 01(inch)

Thread type

Size Port Version d1 d4+0.4 bmin. a10.5

EF, CF 01 G1/2 34 14 1
40, 80
LD 01 G1/4 12

969 6
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LPS RE 27548/03.2012

Unit dimensions: type LPS..R...; NS40, 80 and 120 (nominal dimensions in mm)

P = Pump
CF = Steering
EF = Work hydraulics
LD = Load signal

Thread type

Size Port Version d1 d2+0.13 d4+0.4 bmin. a1 a20.4 1 Threads version 01 and
02 (inch, metric)
01 G1/2 27 14
P, EF 02 M22x1.5 28 14 0.3+0.5
0.2
12 7/8-14 UNF 23.9 34 17.5 2.5 15
01 G1/2 27 14
40, 80 CF 02 M22x1.5 28 14 0.3+0.5
0.2
12 3/4-16 UNF 20.6 30 15 2.5 15
01 G1/4 12
LD 02 M12x1.5 12
12 7/16-20 UNF 12.5 13.5 2.4 12
01 G3/4 33 16
02 M27x2 33 16 0.3+0.5
P, EF 0.2 Threads version 12
12 1 1/16-12 29.2 33 19 3.3 15 (UNF)
UN
01 G1/2 27 14
02 M18x1.5 24 12 0.3+0.5
120 CF 0.2
12 3/4-16 20.6 30 15 2.5 15
UNF
01 G1/4 12
02 M12x1.5 12
LD
12 7/16-20 12.4 13.5 2.4 12
UNF

970
RE 27548/03.2012 LPS Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10

Unit dimensions: type LPS..P...; NS160 (nominal dimensions in mm)

P = Pump
CF = Steering
EF = Work hydraulics
LD = Load signal

Thread type
Threads version 01 and 02
Size Port Version d1 d4+0.4 bmin. a1+1 (inch, metric)

01 G1 40 18 1
P, EF
02 M33x2 41 20 1
01 G1/2 27 14 1
160 CF
02 M22x1.5 28 16 1
01 G1/4 12
LD
02 M12x1.5 12

971 6
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG LPS RE 27548/03.2012

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Mobile Applications Mobile Applications information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch
Zum Eisengieer 1 Ludwigsluster Chaussee 5 Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany 19370 Parchim, Germany without its consent.
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Phone +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 60 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 Fax +49 (0) 38 71 / 60 63 70 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
www.boschrexroth.de or 60 62 01 application can be derived from our information. The information
given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment
and verification. It must be remembered that our products are
subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

972
Steering column and sensor RE 11874/07.09
Replaces: 07.03
1/10

Type LAB

Component series 1X
Nominal voltage 12 to 48 Volt
Analog and digital output signal
HAD 6671/00

Table of contents Features

Content Page The steering column serves as the connection between the
Features 1 steering wheel and the LAG steering unit.
Ordering details 2 The sensor LAB makes it possible to obtain contactless mea-
surement of rotary movement. A measurement gear wheel is
Function; design 2
used as the signal trigger.
Unit versions, steering column with sensor 3
Preferably the sensor LAB is used in conjunction with the
Technical data 4 steering column and steering unit to control the electric motor
Unit dimensions LAB steering column 4 bis 6 of the steering circuit supply pump.
Function sensor LAB 7 The digital output signal supplies, after a steering wheel
Unit versions sensor LAB; characteristic curve 8 rotary movement of 2, an impulse.
Technical data; fault reactions sensor LAB 9 The analog output signal is proportional to the turns of the
steering wheel.
Unid dimensions sensor LAB 10

973 6
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics LAB RE 11874/07.09

Ordering details

LA B 1X *

Steering column Further details in clear text

e.g. special specifications
Design
Please clarify with our
Standard =B
sales organisation.
Nominal size
Flange
Longitudinal dim. C:: 65 mm = 65
E= Flat flange
80 mm = 80
G= Formed flange!
154 mm = 154
Steering wheel connection
300 mm = 300
A= Cone 1:20; woodruff key 5 x 6.5
450 mm = 400
C= Splined shaft 13/16, cone 1:16
650 mm = 650
D= Splined shaft 7/8; cone 1:19.26
762 mm = 762
Signal connection
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation and No code = Without signal connection
connection dimensions)) S01 = With signal connection 1x
S02 = With signal connection 2x
Sensor LAB
Without sensor = No code
Ordering example: LAB 65-1X/-AE
Sensor LAB 01 = 01
Standard steering column, longitudinal dim. 65 mm, without
Sensor LAB 02 = 02
sensor LAB, without signal connection, steering wheel con-
nection A, flange E.
= Standard programme Ordering example: LAB 300-1X/01S01-CG
Standard steering column, longitudinal dim. 300 mm, with
sensor LAB 01, with a signal connection S01, steering wheel
connection C, flange G.
Function, design

The steering column LAB basically comprises of a housing

(1), within which a steering shaft (5) is housed, bearing sup-
port the shaft within the housing.
A flange (4) is provided on the housing (1) for mounting the
column onto the steering unit. There are various steering
wheel connections (2) provided for fitting the steering wheel.
The transmission of the steering moments to the steering unit
is via the connection spigot (3).
For the version with sensor the steering shaft (5) is fitted with
a gear wheel (8), which is held and guided by the isolation 7
bush (9). The sensor LAB (6) is fitted to the housing via a Cable clamp (2x)
spring clip (7). only on request
AMP order no.
1 Housing 7 Spring clip 350811-1
2 Steering wheel con- 8 Gear wheel (36 teeth)
nection 9 Isolation bush
3 Connection spigot
4 Flange
5
5 Steering shaft
6 Sensor LAB
8
9 2
4
6
:

974
RE 11874/07.09 LAB Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Unit version: steering column LAB

Connection flange
For assembly of the steering column and Flat flange
the steering unit, there are variants
available with a formed or flat flange.
The steering column with a formed flange
makes it possible to pre-assemble the
steering unit and steering column using
two screws.
Vehicle bracket for
mounting the steering unit

Formed flange

Vehicle bracket for

Signal connection mounting the steering unit
For the installation of an electrical
through connection (for use as a horn
contact) the steering columns are
available with a signal connection.
For special applications two signal
connections are possible.

Sensor LAB
The sensor LAB makes it possible to obtain contactless mea-
surement of rotary movements. A measurement gear wheel
acts as the signal trigger.
Preferably the sensor LAB is used in conjunction with the
steering column and steering unit to control the electric motor
of the steering circuit supply pump.
The digital output signal supplies, after a steering wheel rota-
ry movement of 2, an impulse.
The analog output signal is proportional to the turns of the
steering wheel.
For further information see pages 5 to 8

Assembly note
The connection between steering column and steering unit is
calculated so that there no plate (bracket) may be assembled
between them.
The maximum tightening torque for
fixing screws is 30 Nm.

975 6
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics LAB RE 11874/07.09

Technical data 1): steering column LAB

Max. bending moment MB 2) (MB = FR x L) Nm 200

Max. axial force FA N 1000
Max. torque at the steering wheel MD Nm 150
Max. tightening torque MA of the nut Nm 40
for the steering wheel connection
Max. tightening torque MA for the fixing screws Nm 30
NE
1) See page 9 for sensor LAB technical data.
2) When the length L exceeds 150 mm, then the steering
column has to be supported

GB

GS

M
Unit dimensions: steering column LAB (Dimensions in mm)

Steering wheel connection A, with cone and woodruff key,

formed flange

1-4
Woodruff key 5 x 6,5 56
5!1-4

3!
26
DIN 6888

9
Cone 1:20
Washer 19 Code No.
34-4!1-16
N29y2-6

nby/!49-6

55-6!,1-3
njo/!61

91
22
27
Vehicle bracket for mounting
the steering unit
59!,2-6 D 7-6!1-7 91

Steering wheel connection C with cone 1:16 and splines

Spline 13/16 inch- 36 teeth 2-46!1-112

Cone 1:16 :1
N29y2-6

S!1-3
2

3
:-2

1-6
6!i
3!
32!1-14

22
1-1

33-27
26 5!1-159
6

41
62!,2-6 D

976
RE 11874/07.09 LAB Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10

Unit dimensions: steering column LAB (Dimensions in mm)

Steering wheel connection D with cone 1:19,26 and splines

Spline 7/8 inch- 36 teeth 2-698!1-1136

Cone 1:19,26 :1
N29y2-6

3
1-8
3
32-66,1-16
2-8

3!
:!

1-1
27 35-23! 1-16

6
1-136
35-:!1-3
54!,2-6 D

Steering column with signal connection

53!1-7
db!63

db!216

Steering wheel connection A, with cone and woodruff key,

flat flange 1-4
56
3!
9
nby!49-6

55-6!,1-3
njo!73

91
22

6!1-4 91
7-6!1-7
D

977 6
6/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics LAB RE 11874/07.09

Unit dimensions: steering column connection spigot (Dimensions in mm)

No. of teeth z = 12
Module m = 1,5875 mm
4-159!1-112 56
Pitch circle diameter d0 = 19,05 mm

S1
9-
Material Case hardened steel

27-9!1-22
33
The connection spigot can also be obtained separately
for manufacturing your own special steering columns.

2
3 Verzahnungslnge njo!28

7-
1-4

6!
!1-2

,1
-6
34-58!1-2 37
44-6

Note!
So that the correct connection to the steering unit can be
guaranteed it has to be ensured, during the design stage,
that the dimensions for the part of the connection pin pro-
tuding out of the flange is exactly 6.5 mm.
The steering column should only have one bearing as close
as possible to the steering wheel connection.
The connection spigot must line up, and run round, with the
welded component.

978
RE 11874/07.09 LAB Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10

Sensor LAB

Sensor LAB 01
Nominal voltage: 12 to 48 volts
Output signal: Analog and digital
Cable length: Approx. 300 mm
Plug 4-pin AMP - plug housing without mechanical
unloading (pulling of the cable)

Function

The rotary movement sensor LAB makes it possible to recog- To this principle it is possible to detect changes in rotary an-
nise rotating machine components without contact. The mag- gles that lie considerably below half a tooth division, as (theo-
netostrictive sensor is fitted, in a radial direction, onto the ro- retically) phase information is available at any point in time.
tating component where the ferromagnetic gear wheel (steel) The calculation of the actual speed for the analog speed out-
is located. A permanent magnet, which is fitted in the sen- put results from the time spacing between the zero passages
sor, generates a static magnetic field whose field lines pass of the sensor signal. As a minimum of three zero passages (=
through a magnetostrictive bridge resistance comprising of three edges) are required the analog output is accordingly ac-
four resistors and exits from the front of the sensor. With an tivated after an appropriate time delay. The form of the speed/
undisturbed field the four field strength-dependent resistanc- output voltage characteristic curve within the control range of
es have the same resistance values, i.e. the bridge is in bal- the analog output signal (0 4.3 V) is freely selectable by
ance and the bridge voltage is 0 V. the manufacturer. The switched condition of the digital output
If the field is disturbed by a ferromagnetic body entering from is signaled by an LED (light emitting diode).
the side (a gear wheel tooth), the field strength distribution in The digital output is galvanically separated from the supply
the resistance bridge becomes unsymmetrical, the resistanc- voltage of the sensor. By changing the plug allocation the out-
es have differing values and the bridge voltage is 0 V. With put can be configured (switchable) against V+, V or against
a symmetrical rotary movement of the gear wheel a virtual si- any other potential.
nusoidal bridge voltage results.
The analog and digital outputs of the sensor are overload and
This signal is amplified with a differential amplifier, low pass short-circuit proof. Overloads or short-circuits are signaled by
filtered and digitized. In a micro-processor the phase angle a blinking LED. The operating voltage connections are pro-
is calculated from the sine. The change in the phase angle is tected against polarity reversal.
therefore proportional to the change in the rotary angle of the
The sensor is maintenance and wear-free, has a high degree
gear wheel.
of protection (IP 63) and in contrast to optical pricesses is
This change is limiting value monitored with regard to in- practically resistant to dirt.
crease (= speed) and absolute value (= rotary angle), (the
Larger deposits of ferromagnetic particles or chips on the
limits are parameterised by the manufacturer). If both param-
front side of the sensor should however be prevented, (a per-
eters exceeded the given limiting values then the digital out-
manent magnet is located on the inside).
put is set and when one of the limiting values falls below the
given limiting value the digital output is reset, after a delay
time which has been defined within the parameterisation car-
ried out by the manufacturer.

979 6
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics LAB RE 11874/07.09

Unit versions: sensor LAB connection diagram

1. Digital output signal: ,

Output against V switching
Output switching via (UOUT = UR 1,5 V), 2;!W,!)x* SME E2

21!///74!WED
when n > 0,2 min1 and > 2 (see charateristic
curves) 3;!Ejhjubm!PVU

Vc!>
)ho*
Holding time TN dof the output when falling below nmin 6y1-25!nn3!MjZ!22Z

VPVU
approx. 2 s 4;!W!)cs,hs*
RLD must be so selected that the maximum output cur-
rent does not exceed 50 mA.

The free-wheel diode D1 can be omitted when the load VPVU0W
resistance RLD does not have an inductive component.
Vc
When the maximum permissible output current is
exceeded then the output switches off. As
UOUT = Ub; after the overload condition has been recti- VS
fied the output switches back on. UO!3t u0t

Ek!3

2. Analog output signal: u0t

Output voltage UOUT = 04,3 V against V o!=!1-3!njo2 o!!1-3!njo2 o!=!1-3!njo2
Maximum output current 1 mA RLmin 4.3 k
Output against V is short- circuit proof, a continuous
short circuit should however be avoided ,
With an overload at the output, the output is set to 0 V;
the output is reactivated when the overload condition 2;!W,!)x*

21!///74!WED
has been rectified.

Vc!>
The output voltage is as per the characteristic curve 5;!Bobmph!PVU!)hmc*
(identical for the right and left) 6y1-25!nn3!MjZ!22Z
4;!W!)cs,hs*

VPVU
The analog output reacts within = 10 15 when SMB
starting the rotary movement.

Characteristic curves: analog output signal

Output characteristics (36 teeth) 6

Analog OUT with tolerance range 4,3 V 0,4 V at 0 to 3,1 min-1

5
Analogspannung in V

Tolerance band

211!njo2!6!njo2
2

1 31 51 71 91 211 231
Lenkraddrehzahl in min-1

980
RE 11874/07.09 LAB Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10

Technical data: sensor LAB

General
Ambient temperature range C 25 to +70
Storage temperature range C 40 to +105
Air humidity max. 100 % r. F.
Resistance to aggressive mediums Mineral oil
Electrical
Electrical connections Pin 1 White Operating voltage V+
Pin 2 Green Digital OUT
Pin 3 Brown+Grey Operating voltage V
Pin 4 Yellow Analog OUT
Operating voltage V+ (V = 0 VDC) 10 VDC 63 VDC
Over votlage resistance at connection V+ 190 V for 3 ms at 200 Hz
(V = 0VDC)
Current consumption at connection V+ 14 mA
Switching current digital OUT 50 mA
Max. switching voltage, digital OUT (ohmic load) 100 mA
Residual voltage UR at digital OUT UR 1.5 V
with an active output Ilast = 50 mA
Switching characteristic digital OUT Gear wheel is moving VOUT = V + UR
NPN output (against V switching):: (n > ca. 0,2 min-1) LED continuously on

Gear wheel is not Digital OUT high ohmic

moving LED off
(n < ca. 0,2 min-1)
Output characteristic analog OUT See characteristic curves on page 8
Max. output current analog OUT 1 mA
(source / sinking) ( RLA 4.3 k
Supply cable LiY 11 Y 5 x 0,14 mm2 PUR/PVC black
Supply cable length Approx. 300 mm
Plug standard 4-pin AMP Mate-N-LOK
Holding time TN of the output 2 seconds after falling below nmin

Fault reactions

Fault Reaction
Incorrect polling of the operating voltage (V+ V) No movement recognision, the sensor is functional when the
operating voltage has been correctly connected
Over current at digital OUT (approx. IOUT > ca. 80 mA) LED slowly blinks (approx. 1.5 Hz)
Short circuit a digital OUT against V+, Digital OUT deactivated, analog OUT is functional,
Gear wheel in movement Digital OUT after falling below the maximum current/
rectification of the short circuit is functional
Short circuit analog OUT against V LED blinks quickly (approx. 3.5 Hz)
Analog OUT deactivated, digital OUT is functional,
Analog OUT is functional after rectification of the short circuit
Over voltage at V+ to specifications During the over voltage impulses there are function faults,
afterwards functional

981 6
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics LAB RE 11874/07.09

Unit dimensions: sensor LAB (Dimensions in mm)

Sensor is shown without cable and plug

Sensor designation
29
B
25
5
S2:
S3:
MFE
4
31

21
93
B.B B

48

Pin 4

Pin 3

Pin 2

Pin 1

Cable clamp (cable unloading) (2x) only on request

AMP-order no. 350811-1

Bosch Rexroth AG This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Mobile Applications tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengieer 1 may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 application can be derived from our information. The information given
[email protected] does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth.com verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.

982
 Bosch Rexroth AG
Mobile Applications
Glockeraustrasse 4
89275 Elchingen, Germany
Tel. +49 7308 82-0
Fax +49 7308 7274
[email protected]
www.boschrexroth.com

Your local contact person can be found at:

www.boschrexroth.com/addresses

Catalog No.: RE 90010-03/07.2012

Replaces: RE 90005-02/07.2009